CHURCHILL LIVINGSTONE

An imprint of Elsevier Limited

© Pearson Professional Limited 1995

© 2002, Elsevier Limited. All rights reserved.

The rights of Linda M. Merriman and Warren Turner to be identified as

editors of this work has been asserted by them in accordance with the
Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without either the
prior permission of the publishers or a licence permitting restricted
copying in the United Kingdom issued by the Copyright Licensing
Agency, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London WIT 4LP. Permissions may
be sought directly from Elsevier's Health Sciences Rights Department in
Philadelphia, USA: phone: (+1) 215 238 7869, fax: (+1) 215 238 2239, e-
mail: healthpermissions@elsevier.com. You may also complete your
request on-line via the Elsevier homepage (http://www.elsevier.com).by
selecting 'Customer Support' and then 'Obtaining Permissions'.

First edition 1995

Second edition 2002
Reprinted 2005

ISBN 0 443 07112 8

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the Library of Congress

Note
Medical knowledge is constantly changing. As new information becomes
available, changes in treatment, procedures, equipment and the use of
drugs become necessary. The authors and the publishers have taken care
to ensure that the information given in this text is accurate and up to date.
However, readers are strongly advised to confirm that the information,
especially with regard to drug usage, complies with the latest legislation
and standards of practice.

-
www.elsevierhealth.com
health sciences

Working together to grow

libraries in developing countries
www.elsevier.com I www.bookaid.org I www.sabre.org
ELSEVIER f,«"~~~~~ Sabre Foundation
The
publishers
policy istouse
papermanufactured
from sustainable forests
Printed in China
I
Contributors
Robert L Ashford
BA BEd MA MMedSci PhD DPodM MChS
Professor of Podiatry, Health and Social Care
Research Centre, Faculty of Health and
Community Care, University of Central
England, UK
Paul Beeson BSc(Hons) MSc DPodM
Senior Lecturer, Northampton School of Podiatry,
University College Northampton, UK
Ivan Bristow MSc(Oxon) BSc(Hons) DPodM MChS
Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Applied Sciences,
University College Northampton, UK
C J Griffith BSc(Hons) DPodM SRCh
Private Practitioner, The Manse Health Centre,
UK
Mary Hanley BSc(Hons) Psychology MSc PhD
Senior Lecturer (Health Psychology & Research
Methods), University College Northampton, UK
Linda Merriman PhD MPhil DPodM MChS CertEd
Dean, School of Health and Social Sciences,
Coventry University, UK
JMcLeod Roberts BSc(Hons) MSc DPodM
Senior Lecturer, Northampton School of
Podiatry, University College Northampton, UK
Patricia Nesbitt DPodM MChS PGD(BioEng)
Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Applied Sciences,
University College Northampton, UK
C Payne DipPod (NZ) MPH
Lecturer, Department of Podiatry, School of
Human Biosciences, La Trobe University,
Melbourne, Australia
A Percivall
Senior Lecturer, School of Podiatry, University
College Northampton, UK
I Reilly DPodM BSc SRCh FCPod(S) Cert MHS DMS
Senior Lecturer I Podiatric Surgeon, School of
Podiatry, University College Northampton, UK
Ian F Turbutt BSc(Hons) FChS FPodA FCPods
Specialist in Podiatric Surgery, The Manor
Hospital, Bedford; Ext. Lecturer in Podiatric
Radiology, University of Brighton and
University of Southampton, UK
R Turner MB ChB MRCP
Consultant Dermatologist,
Churchill Hospital, Oxford, UK
Warren Turner BSc(Hons) DPodM
Associate Dean, School of Podiatry, University
College Northampton, UK
Ben Yates MSc (Sports Injuries) BSc(Hons) FCPod
Head, Podiatry Department, La Trobe
University, Melbourne, Australia
Preface
Many textbooks make reference to the assess-
ment of the lower limb but very few are dedi-
cated entirely to this purpose. Those that are tend
to focus on only one of the components of the
process, e.g. skin disorders or on a specific client
group such as paediatrics. The purpose of this
book is to produce a textbook which encom-
passes all aspects of lower limb assessment.
Problems affecting the lower limb can lead to dis-
comfort, pain, reduction or loss of mobility and
loss of time from work. Effective and efficient
management of these problems can only be
based on a thorough assessment.
Throughout the book the term 'practitioner' is
used in its broadest sense to denote any person
who has an interest in the management of lower
limb problems. Although the podiatrist has a
natural claim to specialising in caring for the
foot, the range of practitioners with an interest in
the lower limb includes bioengineers, diabetolo-
gists, general medical practitioners, nurses, occu-
pational therapists, orthopaedic surgeons,
orthotists, physiotherapists and rheumatologists.
This is the second edition of this textbook and,
like the first edition, it is divided into four parts:
Approaching the Patient, Systems Examination,
Laboratory and Hospital Investigations and
Specific Client Groups.
Approaching the Patient provides an introduc-
tion to the assessment process and covers in
detail the assessment interview, the presenting
problem and the reliability and validity of clini-
cal measurement. For the second edition these
chapters have been reviewed and updated.
Systems Examination covers the separate com-
ponents of lower limb assessment: medical and
social history, vascular, neurological, orthopaedics,
skin and appendages and footwear assessments.
Details relating to anatomy and physiology have
been discussed where relevant. Again, the chapters
in this section have been updated as part of the
second edition. The chapter on the assessment of
skin and its appendages has been rewritten, as has
the chapter on the locomotor system, which has
been renamed orthopaedic assessment to reflect
more accurately the content of the chapter.
Laboratory and Hospital Investigations
focuses on those tests which may be performed
to confirm, support or clarify the clinical exami-
nation: blood analysis, urine analysis, microbial
identification, histopathology, radiographic
imaging and methods of quantifying gait and
foot-ground interface systems. These chapters
have been updated for the second edition.
Reliance on tests without the appropriate clinical
examination is unwise, creates higher costs, may
worry the patient unnecessarily and overworks
support departments. It is intended that this part
of the book demonstrates when and how these
tests can be used to aid the assessment process.
The last part of the book, Specific Client
Groups, looks at the main areas of foot disease:
the at-risk foot, the child's foot, sport injuries and
the painful foot. For the second edition two new
chapters have been added to this section: assess-
ment of the elderly and pre- and postoperative
assessment. The addition of these chapters reflects
the developments within podiatry. The elderly
 x PREFACE
form by far the largest client group receiving foot
treatment; it is, therefore, important that the
specific needs of this client group are addressed
in this textbook. Over the last 10 years there has
been a growth in the number of surgical proce-
dures performed, under local analgesia, by podi-
atrists. Assessing a patient for surgery under
local analgesia requires the practitioner to be
aware of the specific issues related to this type of
treatment as they do differ from those result-
ing from surgery under general anaesthesia.
Although Systems Examination covers the range
of assessments and can be applied to all age
groups, the assessment of children and sports
people is worthy of independent discussion. Pain
in the foot can arise due to a multitude of factors,
affects all age groups and has a highly morbid
affect on our lives; for this reason, it has been
given a separate chapter. The early diagnosis of
the at-risk foot is recognised as a means of reduc-
ing morbidity, mortality and minimising the cost
of in-hospital care for these patients.
Case histories and comments support some of
the chapters, particularly those in Systems
Examination and Specific Client Groups. These
have been used to illustrate certain points and
reflect real life experiences. Where appropriate,
black and white photographs, figures and tables
have also been used to support and further illus-
trate points raised in the text. A section of colour
plates has been specifically used to support
Chapters 6, 9 and 17. Each chapter has been ref-
erenced and some indicate Further Reading.
Clearly there is more than one approach to
undertaking an assessment. Assessment of the
Lower Limb has been written to support good
practice in a wide range of outlets for all profes-
sionals with an interest in the foot. Whatever
approach the practitioner adopts, it is hoped that
this text will be a valuable asset.
Linda Merriman, Warren Turner, 2002
Acknowledgements
We are indebted to those who have given their
help and encouragement throughout the devel-
opment and production of this second edition: in
particular, our family and friends.
A big thank you to all the contributors for their
time and effort in updating and/or rewriting
their chapters. We would also like to thank Ann
Marie Carr for her help with the new chapter on
assessment of the elderly.
This book is dedicated to Jackie McLeod
Roberts in recognition of her contribution to
podiatry and in particular her work in the
Ukraine, developing and improving footcare ser-
vices for people with diabetes. Jackie's pioneer-
ing work has made a significant difference to
these people.
 Plate 2
Typical ischaemic
ulceration
overlying a hallux
Plate 1 An ischaemic foot. The superficial tissues are abductovalgus in
atrophied. The fifth ray has been excised. a patient with
chronic peripheral
vascular disease.

Plate 4 Telangiectasias: distortion of the superficial

venules secondary to varicosity.

Plate 3 'Dry' gangrene, involving two toes. The necrotic

area is surrounded by a narrow band of inflammation. The
toes have become mummified, due to loss of the local blood
supply.

Plate 5 Atrophie blanche (white patches), which occurs in

association with chronic venous hypertension and venous
ulcers.
 Plate 7 Healed venous ulcer that had been present for
2 years.

Plate 6 Gravitational (varicose, stasis) eczema and

haemosiderosis.

Plate 8 Venous ulceration in association with gross

oedema and haemosiderosis (from Wilkinson J, Shaw S,
Fenton 0 1993 Colour guide to dermatology. Churchill Plate 9 Histology section of normal hairy skin stained with
Livingstone, Edinburgh, Figure 179). haematoxylin and eosin. Light microscopy x 60.
 Plate 11 Subungual exostosis affecting the second toe.
Plate 10 Koebner phenomenon in psoriasis due to injury.

Plate 13
Dorsal corn.

Plate 12
Extravasation within callus due to prolonged high pressure .

..
Plate 14 Plantar keratoderma.
Plate 15 Bullous pemphigoid.

Plate 16 Plantar pustular psoriasis.

Plate 17 Lichen planus.

Plate 18 Necrobiosis Iipoidica. Plate 19 Acute contact dermatitis to adhesives in footwear.

 CHAPTER TITLE 5

Plate 21 Pseudomonas infection affecting the interdigital

area.

Plate 20 Extensive plantar warts in an immunosuppressed

patient.

Plate 23 Tinea pedis affecting the dorsum of the foot.

Plate 22 Pitted keratolysis of the heel.

Plate 24 Interdigital melanoma.

 6 PART TITLE

Plate 27 The sample of urine on the left is normal; the

sample on the right is cloudy and tinged with blood,
indicating infection.
Plate 25 Pyogenic granuloma under the nail.

PRINT DATE: 02/92 00 NOT USE AFTER: 02194

Plate 26 00 NOT EXPO$!: TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT
READ PRODUCT INSERT BEFORE USE.
Metastatic
lesion
(secondary
________ 11
TESTS AND
READING TIMES (to be read in the ctireetlon of arrow)

5'
L£UCoCYTES TRACE ~ MODERATE LAROE

••
from a lung NEG. j< !
tumour). 2 minutes

NITRITE
60seconds

PRoTE1H
&D seconds

pH
60seconds

NON·
BLOOD HAEMOI.Yleo HAEMDLY2£O

• ••
NEG. lllACE TRACE
&Dseconds

SPECIRC GRAVITY
45seconds

KfTONE
40seconds

GLUCOSE

•
30seconds NEG.
Plate 28 Multistix 8SG: the range of biochemical tests
available from one urine sample (reproduced by kind Ii@nk,''''''
permission of Bayer Diagnostics UK Ltd).
 CHAPTER TITLE 7

Plate 29
Dry fissures
develop when
the skin is too
brittle to
conform to
external and
internal
mechanical
stresses
(tension and
shear
particularly).
They are a
frequent
complication of
anhidrosis and
atrophy.

Plate 31 A typical neuropathic foot.

Plate 30 Hyperhidrosis, particularly interdigitally, leads to

over-moist skin (macerated) which tears easily when
mechanically stressed, sometimes exposing the dermis as
seen here. Complications of hyperhidrosis include
dermatophyte, yeast and bacterial infections.

Plate 32 Deep neuropathic ulcer which penetrates to the

plantar tendons; there is no cellulitis or abscess formation.
The patient was a noninsulin-dependent diabetic.
 Plate 33 Bilateral arthropathy of the midtarsal joint,
with ulceration of normally non-weightbearing soft
tissues, in an insulin-dependent diabetic with
peripheral neuropathy.

Plate 34 A neuropathic ulcer on the plantar surface of the foot.

Plate 35 Typical neuroischaemic ulceration over the lateral

aspect of the midfoot in a noninsulin-dependent diabetic,
showing deep erosion of soft tissues, sloughy base, heavy
peripheral callosity and maceration of superficial tissues.
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 3
Why undertake a primary patient assessment? 3

The assessment process 4

Assessment
Risk assessment 4
Making a diagnosis 5 L. Merriman
Aetiology 7

Time management 7

Re-assessment 7

Recording assessment information 8

Confidentiality 9

Summary 10

INTRODUCTION
Patients present with a range of signs and symp-
toms for which they are seeking relief and if
possible a cure. However, before this can be
achieved, it is essential to undertake a primary
patient assessment. Ineffective and inappropri-
ate treatment may result if the practitioner has
not taken into account information obtained
from the assessment. This chapter explores why
it is necessary to undertake an assessment and
considers specific aspects of the assessment
process.

Why undertake a primary patient

assessment?
Information from the assessment helps the prac-
titioner to:

• arrive at a differential diagnosis or definitive

diagnosis
• identify the likely cause of the problem
(aetiology), e.g. trauma, pathogenic
microorganism
• identify any factors which may influence the
choice of treatment, e.g. poor blood supply,
current drug regimen
• assess the extent of pathological changes so
that a prognosis can be made
• establish a baseline in order to identify
whether the condition is deteriorating or
improving
• assess whether a second opinion is necessary.
3
 4 APPROACHING THE PATIENT

All the above information is essential if the

practitioner is to provide effective treatment and
care for the patient.

THE ASSESSMENT PROCESS

Assessment comprises three elements; the
interview, observation and tests (Table 1.1).
Information from the interview and observation
is used to formulate ideas as to the likely diagno-
sis and cause. Further information may be sought
via the ihterview and the use of clinical and lab-
oratory tests. The practitioner uses the data
gained from the assessment to formulate a
hypothesis(es) from which a diagnosis will be Figure 1.1 The stages of assessment summarised.
reached. This diagnosis will be used to inform
the management plan (Fig. 1.1). Where possible,
the cause (aetiology) of the problem should be possibilities. This approach focuses on symptom
identified, as part of the management plan reduction and palliation.
would be to eradicate or reduce the effects of the A good assessment requires that the practi-
cause. tioner demonstrates good interviewing (commu-
What has been outlined above is the ideal. In nication) and observational skills. It is essential
reality, patients often present with ill-defined that the practitioner has effective listening skills
problems and it is not possible to reach a defin- and knows when and which questions to ask the
itive diagnosis. In these instances the practitioner patient (see Ch. 2). Research has shown that
explores a range of likely possibilities and devel- most diagnoses are based on observation and
ops the management plan in relation to these information volunteered by the patient (Sandler
1979).
Clinical, laboratory and hospital based tests
Table 1.1 Components of an assessment provide additional data. Clinical tests involve
Component physical examination of the patient (e.g. assess-
ing ranges of motion at joints, taking a pulse) as
Assessment interview Presenting problem
Personal details
well as near-patient tests such as assessing blood
Medical history glucose levels with a glucometer. Most clinical
Family history tests are relatively quick and inexpensive to carry
Social history
Current health status
out and in most instances give fairly reliable and
Observation and clinical
valid results. Technological advances mean that
Vascular
examination Neurological there are an increasing number of available clini-
Locomotor cal tests. Tests in laboratories and hospitals are
Skin and nails
Footwear
more expensive and can be time-consuming.
Laboratory and hospital tests
Such tests should only be used when it is neces-
Urinalysis
Microbiology sary to confirm a suspected diagnosis, in cases of
Blood tests differential diagnosis or when the outcome of the
History test will have a positive influence on treatment.
Gait analysis
X-ray
Other imaging techniques
ECG Risk assessment
Nerve conduction
Risk assessment can serve two purposes:
 ASSESSMENT 5

• identify patients who need immediate whole area before such measures can be used
attention with confidence.
• serve as a predictor for those 'at risk'.
On account of the demands on time it is often
Making a diagnosis
necessary for the practitioner to differentiate
between those patients who need immediate Arriving at a diagnosis is a complex activity.
attention and those who do not. Table 1.2 sum- Studies of clinical reasoning show that practi-
marises the presenting problems which should tioners use one or more of the following
be given high priority. In clinics where there are approaches (Higgs & Jones 2000):
lengthy waiting lists patients may be screened
• hypothetico-deductive reasoning
initially to assess whether they have one or more
• pattern recognition
problems which appear in Table 1.2 and are then
• interpretative model.
given immediate treatment.
The term 'at risk' usually denotes those Hypothetico-deductive reasoning is based on
patients at risk of developing ulceration and generating hypotheses using clinical data and
infection. Identifying those at risk is a complex knowledge. These hypotheses are tested through
task. Currently, research into risk factors related further inquiry during the assessment. The evi-
to lower limb problems is sparse and thus it is dence gained is evaluated in relation to existing
difficult to produce risk assessment methods that knowledge and a conclusion reached on the basis
are robust and valid. Considerable research has of probability (Gale 1982).
been undertaken into the risk assessment of pres- Pattern recognition is a process of recognising
sure ulcers (Lothian 1987). In relation to the the similarity between a set of signs and symp-
lower limb some work has been undertaken into toms. The important aspect of the use of cate-
developing methods of risk assessment to iden- gorisation in clinical reasoning is the link
tify diabetics at risk of developing diabetic ulcers practitioners make between the pattern they are
(Zahra 1998). Further work is needed in this currently observing and previous cases showing
the same or similar patterns.
The interpretative model is very different
Table 1.2 Presenting problems which should be given high
priority
from the other two models. This approach is
based on the practitioner gaining a deep under-
Problem Features standing of the patient's perspective and the
Pain Constant, weightbearing and
influence of contextual factors. Protagonists of
non-weightbearing this approach believe that the meaning patients
Affects patient's normal daily give to their problems, including their under-
activities
standing of and their feelings about their
Infection Raised temperature (pyrexia) problem, can significantly influence their levels
Sign of acute inflammation
Signs of spreading cellulitis of pain tolerance, disability and the eventual
Lymphangitis, lymphadenitis outcome (Ferurestein & Beattie 1995).
Ulceration Loss of skin Studies have shown that with all these
Mayor may not be painful approaches there is an association between clinical
May expose underlying tissues
reasoning and knowledge (Higgs & Jones 2000).
Acute swelling Unrelieved pain There is a symbiotic relationship between the
Very noticeable swelling
May have associated signs of knowledge base of practitioners and their clinical
inflammation reasoning ability. It is not possible to develop
Abnormal skin changes Distinct colour change problem-solving skills in the absence of cognitive
Discharge may be malodorous knowledge related to the specific problem.
Itching There are three partners in the assessment
Bleeding
process; the practitioner, the patient and the
 6 APPROACHING THE PATIENT

wider environment. The ability of a practitioner Table 1.3 Factors which should be taken into
consideration when making a differential diagnosis
to undertake an effective assessment and make a
diagnosis is influenced by a range of factors: Social history Age
Gender
• personal values, beliefs and perceptions Race
• knowledge base related to the problem(s) Social habits
Occupation
• reasoning skills (cognition and metacognition) Leisure pursuits
• previous clinical experience
Medical history Family history
• familiarity with similar cases. Medication
There can be enormous differences between Symptoms Onset
practitioners, both in their assessment findings Type of pain
Aggravated by/relieved by
and their diagnoses. For example, Comroe & Seasonal variation
Botelho (1947) described a study in which 22 Signs Site
doctors were asked to examine 20 patients and Appearance
note whether cyanosis was present. Under con- Symmetry
trolled conditions these patient were assessed for Specific tests Imaging techniques
cyanosis by oximeter. When the results of the Urinalysis
Microbiology
clinical assessment were compared with the Blood analysis
oximeter results, it was found that only 53% of Biopsy
the doctors diagnosed cyanosis in subjects with Foot pressure analysis
Electrical conductive studies
extremely low oxygen content: 26% said cyanosis
was present in subjects with normal oxygen
content. Curran & Jagger (1997) found poor
agreement between podiatrists when diagnosing droses), whereas other conditions have specific
common conditions of the leg and foot. presenting features (e.g. the sudden, acute, noc-
Agreement improved when a patient expert turnal pain associated with gout).
system was used. Expert patient systems are The patient is the key partner in the assess-
increasingly being used, in particular in medicine ment process. Some patients want to playa
(Adams et al 1986). These computer-based greater role in decision making and their health
systems provide practitioners with a wealth of care management. Additionally, patients are
information and are used to guide and direct increasingly being seen as consumers of health
clinical decision making. care. As such, they have expectations of the type
Unfortunately, making a diagnosis is not a and quality of the health services they receive.
precise science: errors can and do occur. Patients' perceptions, beliefs and expectations
Practitioners should always keep an open mind related to their lower limb problems can be
when making a diagnosis, reflect on the process influenced by the following factors:
they have used, keep up to date with current lit-
• home environment
erature and technology and request a second
• work environment
opinion when unsure.
Sometimes the practitioner may have gener- • culture
• socioeconomic status
ated more than one possible diagnosis; in these
instances the practitioner has to undertake a dif- • language skills
• general state of health.
ferential diagnosis, i.e. decide which is the most
likely from a number of possibilities. When arriv- The above factors can affect patients' needs,
ing at a differential diagnosis the practitioner communication skills and, ultimately, the choices
should take into account the factors listed in they make.
Table 1.3. For example, a number of conditions The wider health environment and context
affect specific age groups (e.g, the osteo chon- cannot be ignored in the assessment process.

Health care is a political issue and government
policy changes can radically affect available ser-
vices. Finance is another major influencing factor
that may limit the range of clinical and labora-
tory tests that may be used. Conversely, techno-
logical advances have led to improved clinical
and laboratory test equipment. Employing
organisations can affect the assessment process in
a variety of ways, e.g. use of specific frameworks
of operation. Profession-specific frameworks and
the status of knowledge within the profession
can also be influencing factors.
Aetiology
Information from the assessment can enable the
practitioner to identify the cause of the problem.
A variety of aetiological factors can result in dis-
orders of the lower limb. These can be divided
into hereditary, congenital (present at birth) or
acquired.
Hereditary conditions may manifest immedi-
ately after birth, e.g. epidermolysis bullosa, or
may not appear until some years after, e.g.
Huntington's chorea.
Congenital conditions include chromosomal
abnormalities, e.g. Down's syndrome, develop-
mental defects, e.g. spina bifida, or birth injuries
such as cerebral palsy.
Acquired conditions are those which arise
after birth. Infection by a pathogenic organism
resulting in sepsis is a common example of an
acquired condition affecting the lower limb.
Many conditions occur as a result of more than
one factor, i.e. they are multifactorial. Athero-
sclerosis is thought to be due to the interplay of a
number of factors, including dietary intake,
familial high cholesterol level, high blood pres-
sure, sedentary lifestyle and stress. In many cases
predisposing factors present in conjunction with
an exciting factor before the condition manifests.
An example is a septic toe, where there has to be
a portal of entry in order for the bacteria to gain
entry into the skin and multiply.
If the cause can be identified (e.g. lack of shock
absorption, contamination by a pathogen) then
treatment can be aimed at eradicating or reducing
its effects. Knowing what has caused a problem
ASSESSMENT 7
can assist in identifying the most appropriate
treatment and help to produce an accurate prog-
nosis. For example, if the cause of pain in the foot
is chronic ischaemia due to atherosclerosis, the
prognosis may be poor unless radical (bypass)
surgery is performed. Conversely if the foot pain
is due to acute ischaemia that has occurred as a
result of hosiery constricting the peripheral circu-
lation, the prognosis is good and advice may be all
that is required. Unfortunately, it is not always
possible to isolate the cause; in these cases the
term idiopathic (unknown cause) is used.
TIME MANAGEMENT
The assessment process is fundamental to a satis-
factory outcome for both patient and practitioner.
However, practitioners often find themselves
working within strict time constraints and may
feel they have" insufficient time in which to
undertake a full primary patient assessment. It is
important that the practitioner does not compro-
mise the assessment process in order to save
time. Such action, although it may deliver a
short-term time saving, may result in unfortu-
nate long-term effects. The practitioner who has
not obtained important information or failed to
recognise salient clinical findings may reach an
incorrect diagnosis and/ or implement treatment,
that puts the patient at considerable risk. In the
long term this will lead to avoidable patient suf-
fering and extra time being spent in dealing with
the complications arising from treatment.
In order to use time effectively it is important to
plan and prioritise activities. The time allotted to a
primary assessment may be as little as 5 minutes
or may stretch to 30 minutes plus. On average
practitioners should be able to undertake a routine
assessment in 10 minutes; further time may be
required if the problem is complex, if a definitive
diagnosis cannot be reached or if laboratory or
hospital tests are required. Table 1.4 identifies the
essential components of any assessment.
RE-ASSESSMENT
Assessment should not be something that is only
undertaken on the patient's first visit. Every time
 8 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
----------_._---------------------

Table 1.4 The essential components of an assessment. RECORDING ASSESSMENT

These should be carried out with all patients. Further tests
and examination should be used if indicated from the INFORMATION
information obtained from the essential assessment
Information gained from the assessment should
Observation Gait as the patient walks into the room
in order to detect abnormal function
be accurately and clearly noted in the patient's
Facial features for signs of current record. This record is the storehouse of knowl-
health status edge concerning the patient and his/her
Interview Presenting problem medical history. It should contain a summary of
Personal details the main points from the assessment and
Medical history
Family history sufficient data to justify the diagnosis. Ideally,
Social history whether in a hospital or primary care setting,
Current health status health care practitioners should use the same
Observation Skin and nails to detect trophic changes patient record. This ensures that all practitioners
and abnormal lesions involved with the care of the patient are aware
Position of lower limb to note deformity,
malalignment of each other's assessments and interventions.
Footwear Although this is good practice, the keeping of
Tests Pulses, capillary filling time separate records by each health care profes-
sional, e.g. general practitioner, district (home)
nurses, podiatrists, is still prevalent. This prac-
tice does not facilitate teamworking.
the patient attends the clinic a mini-assessment Two methods may be used to record the
should be undertaken in order that the following assessment information. The first involves using
can be noted: a blank piece of paper on which the practitioner
• changes to the patient's general health status writes, in a logical sequence, assessment and
• changes to the status of the lower limb diagnostic details. The other involves the use of
• patient's perception of previous treatment a pro-forma; this may vary from a form with a
• effects of previous treatment few headings to a very detailed format with
• information about treatment from other boxes in which to write specific details. Such pro-
practitioners. formas can be self-designed or purchased from
specialised suppliers.
The process of assessment, diagnosis and treat- Whatever the method used, it is important that
ment should be an uninterrupted loop: at every all details are written in such a way that practi-
subsequent consultation, the patient should be tioners not involved with the assessment can
re-assessed and evaluated (Fig. 1.2). familiarise themselves with the salient details
and any previous treatment. Records may be
handwritten or typed; typed records are prefer-
able as they are more legible but they do have
resource implications. If handwritten, the hand-
writing must be legible and in ink (blue or black).
The use of computers is already having an
impact: it is likely that computers will eventually
be the prime means of recording patient data.
The record should be made at the time of the
assessment: any blank spaces should be scored
through. The original record should not be
altered or disguised. If it proves necessary to
amend the record, the nature of the amendment
Figure 1.2 The assessment loop. should be clear and the amendment should be

signed and dated by the practitioner making the
alteration.
It is recommended that abbreviations should
be avoided (Bradshaw & Braid 1999). The use of
profession-specific abbreviations can be particu-
larly problematic in multi-authored patient
records, which are completed by more than one
health care profession. However, the use of
abbreviations in patient records is common.
Curran (1994) noted that 97% of respondents
used clinical abbreviations in their podiatric
treatment records.
All entries should be dated and signed. In par-
ticular, details regarding the patient's medication
should always be dated, as the medication may
have been changed by the time the patient
attends for the next appointment. The patient's
name or the patient identifier should appear on
every page. Records should always be written in
such a way as not to be offensive or contain sub-
jective opinions.
Most professional bodies provide guidance on
recording information in patient records. For
example, the Society of Chiropodists and
Podiatrists (2000) produce Guidelines on the
Minimum Standards in Clinical Practice, which
contain specific information on record keeping.
Bradshaw & Braid (1999) identified the following
four reasons for poor record keeping:
• illegible handwriting
• incomplete information
• inaccurate information
• ambiguous abbreviations.
It is suggested that practitioners as part of their
continuing professional development receive
periodic reminders and refresher sessions related
to record keeping (Bradshaw & Braid 1999). It has
been found that regular audit of medical records
improves record keeping (Donnelly 1995).
The information recorded from the assessment
may be used for:
• ensuring contraindicated treatments are not
used
• clinical and epidemiological research
• audit
• planning
• legal purposes.
ASSESSMENT 9
Retrospective and prospective analysis of
patient records is commonly used for clinical
and epidemiological research, audit and plan-
ning. If well documented, they can provide a
wealth of information. However, one of the
problems with patient records is that there is no
standardised manner in which information is
collected. For example, the use of clinical terms
can be ambiguous.
The International Statistical Classification of
Diseases, Injuries and Causes of Death was estab-
lished by the World Health Organization as a
universal system for collecting data. The system
was originally designed for mortality statistics
but has evolved to cover a broad range of dis-
eases. It is updated every 10 years to keep abreast
of the constantly changing information base. This
system can be used to record diseases for the
purpose of clinical and epidemiological research
and audit.
In an increasingly litigious society it is impor-
tant that high standards of record keeping
are maintained. The St Paul International
Insurance Company Limited (1991) states that
35-40% of all malpractice claims in the United
States cannot be defended because of 'documen-
tation problems'. The Society of Chiropodists
and Podiatrists (1998) found that inadequate
patient records were the main reason why
legal claims against state-registered chiropodists
succeeded.
CONFIDENTIALITY
The information volunteered by the patient and
recorded in the patient's notes should be treated
as confidential and not divulged to any other
party without the consent of the patient.
However, the information can be made avail-
able to all those involved with the care of that
patient.
Patient records, whether in manual or elec-
tronic format, are subject to the Data Protection
Act 1998, which became effective from March
2000. This means that patients have the right of
access, for a pre-set fee, to information stored
about them. The act gives rights to individuals in
 10 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
respect of personal data held about them by
others. Where information about a patient is
stored electronically it is a legal requirement that
practitioners (or their employing organisation)
comply with the notification requirements of the
Data Protection Act (1998). If information is
solely stored manually then there is no require-
ment to notify.
REFERENCES
Adams I D, Chan M, Clifford P 1986 Computer aided
diagnosis of abdominal pain: a multi centre study. British
Medical Journal 293: 80-84
Bradshaw T, Braid S 1999 The practice of recording clinical
treatment and audit of practice - an overview for
podiatrists. British Journal of Podiatry 2(1): 8-12
Comroe J H, Botelho S 1947 The unreliability of cyanosis in
the recognition of arterial anoxemia. American Journal of
the Medical Sciences 214: 1-6
Curran M 1994 Use of abbreviations in chiropody /podiatry.
Journal of British Podiatric Medicine 49(5): 71-72
Curran M, Jagger C 1997 Interobserver variability in the
diagnosis of foot and leg disorders using a computer
expert system. The Foot 7: 7-10
Data Protection Act 1998 EC Data Protection Directive
(95/46/EC)
Donnelly A 1995 Improve your nurses' record collection.
Nursing Management 2(3): 18-19
Ferurestein M, Beattie P 1995 Biobehavioural factors affecting
pain and disability in low back pain: mechanisms and
assessment. Physical Therapy 75: 267-280
SUMMARY
This chapter has stated the purpose of assess-
ment and outlined the assessment process. If
undertaken well, it leads to the drawing up of
appropriate and effective treatment plans. It is
therefore an activity that should be seen as
pivotal to good patient-practitioner interaction.
Gale J 1982 Some cognitive components of the diagnostic
thinking process. British Journal of Educational
Psychology 52: 64-72
Higgs J, Jones M 2000 Clinical reasoning in the health
professions, 2nd edn. Butterworth-Heinemann, London
Lothian P 1987 The practical assessment of pressure sore
risk. CARE Science and Practice 5(4): 3-7
Sandler G 1979 Costs of unnecessary tests. British Medical
Journal 1: 1686-1688
Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists 1998 Defensive
practice (editorial). Podiatry Now 1(1): 1
Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists 2000 Guidelines on
minimum standards of clinical practice, December
St Paul International Insurance Company Limited 1991
Defensible documentation. St Paul House, 61-63 London
Rd, Redhill, Surrey RHI INA (information leaflet for
health care professionals)
Zahra J 1998 Can podiatrists predict diabetic foot ulcers
using a risk assessment card? British Journal of Podiatry
1(3): 79-88
 CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 11
Is an interview different from a normal
conversation? 11
Aims of the assessment interview 12
The assessment
Communicating effectively 12
interview
Questioning skills 13
Listening skills 15 M. Hanley
Non-verbal communication skills 16
Stereotyping 21
Documenting the assessment interview 21

Structuring the asseSSment interview 22

Preparation 22
The interview 23
,Closure 24
Confidentiality 25

What makes a good assessment interview? 25

Summary 26 INTRODUCTION
Research has shown that the interview, as
opposed to any other method of assessment such
as clinical tests and examinations, is the most
efficient method in reaching an initial diagnosis
(Sandler 1979). This chapter examines the
purpose of the interview, the skills required to
communicate effectively, how the interview
should be structured and the pitfalls to avoid. It
concludes by examining the features of a good
assessment interview.

Is an interview different from a

normal conversation?
An interview is based upon a conversation
between two or more people. As individuals we
converse with a broad range of people.
Conversation serves a multitude of purposes.
The conversation in an interview differs from an
ordinary conversation in a number of ways:
• It is an opportunity for an exchange of
information.
• It has a specific purpose; e.g. to solve a
problem.
• It has an outcome, e.g. a course of treatment.
• It has less flexibility than an ordinary
conversation.
• The interviewer has a perceived position of
authority/power over the interviewee.
• It is important that this power is not abused.
Every effort should be made to put the
interviewee (the patient) at ease.
11
 12 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
• A written record of the interview is usually
kept.
Practitioners may be involved with other types
of conversation with patients, which require
additional skills such as counselling, teaching
and advising. These are discussed in the accom-
panying text to this book: Clinical skills in treating
the foot.
Aims of the assessment interview
The assessment interview is a conversation with
a purpose, which takes place between the practi-
tioner and the patient. Patients present with
problems, which may have physical, psychologi-
cal and social dimensions. Patients often have
their own ideas and concerns about the problems
they present with, and about the medical care
that they mayor may not receive. Likewise, prac-
titioners approach the interview with percep-
tions of their role. These will have been
influenced by training, past experiences, atti-
tudes and beliefs. The availability of resources
and facilities will contribute to the practitioner's
response to the patient. It is essential that the
practitioner and the patient develop common
ground during the interview and that both are
aware of each other's perspectives. If this cannot
be achieved the interview may be an unsatisfac-
tory experience for both of them.
The prime purpose of the interview is for the
cause of the patient's concerns to be identified
and appropriate action taken. This is best
achieved by the patient and the practitioner
working in partnership to reduce or resolve these
concerns.
It is essential that the practitioner provides
ample opportunity for the patient to convey his
concerns and worries. In other words, the inter-
view should be patient-centred. Research has
shown that this is not always the case. A few
years after qualification most practitioners are
confident that they are good at taking histories
and explaining things to patients. Is this
confidence justified? A detailed analysis of the
recordings of over 2500 doctor/patient inter-
views showed that 77% of them were doctor-
centred, compared with 21% classed as patient-
centred (Byrne & Long 1976).
Information gathered collectively from the
interview and examination should facilitate the
identification of the patient's health problem
and, where appropriate, a diagnosis can be
made. However, as well as aiding the diagnostic
process, the interview serves other important
purposes:
• The information gained may be of help when
drawing up a treatment plan. For example, the
interview can provide a picture of the patient's
social circumstances, which may affect the
manner of, or the actual advice given.
• It provides an opportunity to gain the
patient's trust and confidence in you as a
practitioner.
• It facilitates the development of a therapeutic
relationship between the health care
practitioner and the patient.
However, not all health care students are
aware of how to communicate effectively and, as
a result, communication skills training is becom-
ing a common part of the curriculum in health
care courses (Hargie et a11998, Sleight 1995).
COMMUNICATING EFFECTIVELY
Since the interview plays a particularly
significant role in the assessment of the patient, it
is important to ensure that the meeting is suc-
cessful. In other words, good communication
skills are essential if you are to achieve an effec-
tive assessment interview. What is meant by
communication? In its simplest form it can be
seen as the transmission of information from one
person and the receiving of information by
another. Unfortunately, the communication
process is not that simple; if it were there would
not be communication breakdowns or misunder-
standing between people as to what has been
said.
Communication can be influenced by charac-
teristics of the sender (e.g. ability to express ideas
clearly, verbal skills, attitude toward the patient),
the receiver (e.g. the extent to which the receiver
is paying attention, ability to hear and under-
 THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 13

stand the conversation, prior beliefs and expecta- • questioning skills

tions) or characteristics of the social environment • listening skills
in which the interview is being conducted (e.g. • non-verbal communication skills.
disruption due to background noise). With so
Each of these skills will be considered in turn.
many opportunities for these forms of interfer-
ence, it is not surprising that many attempts to
communicate effectively fail. Consequently, Questioning skills
health care professionals should develop their
The prime purpose of the assessment interview is
communication skills in order to make the best
to gain as much information as possible from the
use of the interview.
patient in order that a diagnosis and treatment
A common question asked is: 'Are good com-
plan can be arrived at. To achieve this objective
municators born or is it a skill you can learn?'.
the practitioner uses a range of questioning skills.
The answer has to be, it's a bit of both. We can all
There are three categories of question:
think of people we consider to be good commu-
nicators; these people appear to have an inherent • open
skill. For others, communication may not come • closed
so easily. It is particularly important for health • leading.
practitioners to be aware of and develop effec-
Open questions. Open questions invite the
tive communication skills because so much clin-
patient to give far more than one-word answers.
ical information is gathered through the
The patient is in a much better position to con-
assessment interview. Research has shown that
struct the response he wishes to give. Examples
with assistance and motivation, good communi-
of open questions are:
cation skills can be developed (Ryden et aI1991).
A myriad of books are available on the subject • What happened when you went into
of communication skills. However, just reading a hospital?
book does not automatically mean you become a • What do you look for when buying a pair of
good communicator. Observing others, noting shoes?
good and bad points, receiving feedback from • What do you think is causing the problem?
others, role-play exercises, video- and audiotap-
This sort of question can elicit information
ing of interactions, practising in front of a mirror
from the patient that you had not expected. Open
or with friends are all helpful ways in which
questions are often preferable to closed questions
skills can be developed. Being an effective com-
such as 'When you were in hospital did they test
municator is a skill - and like any clinical skill it
your blood sugar or give you an X-ray?'. The
should be regularly practised and reviewed.
patient may legitimately answer 'no' to these
Constructive criticism is an essential part of
direct questions and fail to tell you that they
learning but not always an easy method to
undertook a test you have not mentioned.
accept!
Closed questions. Closed questions limit the
While you may not be able to change the com-
responses a patient may give. They usually
munication characteristics of the patient or the
require a one word response. Closed questions
social environment, you can ensure that your
may:
contribution to the interview is as effective as
possible. You can do this by sending clear and • require a yes/no response, e.g. Do you suffer
appropriate messages to the patient and by from rheumatoid arthritis?
ensuring that you understand fully what the • require the patient to select, e.g. Is the pain
patient is trying to communicate to you. In order worse in the morning or the afternoon?
to achieve this, you need to pay careful attention • require the patient to provide factual
to three key components of the communication information, e.g. How long have you been a
process: diabetic?
 14 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
Closed questions serve useful purposes during
the assessment interview. They provide a quick
means of gaining and verifying information.
Patients often find them easier to answer than the
more open type of question. They can be used to
focus the assessment interview in a particular
direction. On the other hand, if used too much
they limit what the patient can say. As a result the
patient may not volunteer important informa-
tion.
Leading questions. Leading questions should
be avoided where possible. In general, they give
responses that the professional expects to receive.
Examples of leading questions are:
• You don't smoke, do you?
• That doesn't hurt, does it?
• You said you get the pain a lot; that must
mean you get it every day?
While you may get the answer you want or
expect to hear, it does not necessarily mean it is
true!
In addition to a specific style of question, the
practitioner may also use a range of interview
techniques to elaborate further on the issues
raised. These techniques are often referred to as
probes. Probing questions are a very useful
adjunct to both open and closed questions. In
general they aim at finding out more from the
patient. In particular, they are useful in gaining
in-depth rather than superficial information.
Examples include:
• Could you describe the type of pain it is?
• What makes you think it might be linked to
your circulation?
You might also use silence as a probe to
encourage the patient to expand on a given
answer, or say 'yes', 'uh-hm' or simply nod,
techniques that are particularly useful when
you feel the patients may have more to say
and are thinking about expanding their
answer.
General pointers when questioning patients
The following points should be borne in mind
when interviewing patients:
• Show empathy. Authier (1986) defined
empathy as: '[being] attuned to the way another
person is feeling and conveying that
understanding in a language he/she
understands' .
• Use language that is simple, direct and
understandable. Avoid medical and technical
terms. The 'fog index' can be used to assess
the complexity of a piece of communication
(Table 2.1). It is primarily used in written
communication but has also been used,
although less frequently, to analyse the
complexity of the spoken word. It involves a
mathematical equation that produces a score.
For example, tabloid newspapers have a fog
index score between 3 and 6, whereas
government policy documents can achieve a
score of 20+. Applying the fog index to
spoken communication or a foot health
education leaflet will give an indication of the
complexity of that particular communication.
If it receives a high fog index score, the
average patient may find it very difficult to
understand.
• Avoid presenting the patient with a long list
of conditions. This is especially important
during medical history taking. It is unlikely
that a patient has experienced more than
one or two of the problems on a list. Patients
may fall into the habit of replying 'no' to
all the items on the list and fail to respond
in the affirmative to ones they do suffer
from. Strategies that can be used to avoid this
situation include a pre-assessment ques-
tionnaire (see Ch. 5) or breaking up the
list of closed questions with some open
questions.
Table 2.1 The fog index
Take a passage of about 100 words, ending in a full stop.
Work out the average sentence length. This is achieved by
dividing the number of sentences into 100. Then work out
the number of words of three or more syllables. Ignore two-
syllable words that have become three syllables with plural
or endings like -ed or -ing, technical words and proper
nouns. Add the average sentence length to the number of
difficult words and multiply by 0.4. The result will give you
the reading score (fog index)

• Don't ask the patient more than one question
at a time. For example, if asking a closed-type
question do not say, 'Could you tell me when
you first noticed the condition, when the pain
is worse and what makes it better?'. By the
end of the question the patient will have
forgotten the first part.
• Attempt to get the patient to give you
an honest answer using his or her own
words. Avoid putting words into the patient's
mouth.
• Clarify inconsistencies in what the patient tells
you.
• Get the patient to explain what he means by
using certain terms, e.g. 'nagging pain'. Your
interpretation of this term may differ from the
patient's.
• Pauses are an integral part of any com-
munication. They allow time for participants
to take in and analyse what has been
communicated and provide time for a
response to be formulated. Allow the patient
time to think how he wishes to answer your
question. Avoid appearing as if you are
undertaking an interrogation.
• In the early stages of the interview it is often
better to use the term 'concern' rather than
'problem'. Asking patients what concerns
them may elicit a very different response from
asking them what the problem is. Some
patients may feel they do not have a problem
as such but are worried about some symptom
or sign they have noticed. Asking them what
concerns them may get them to reveal this
rather than a denial that they have any
problems.
• Asking personal and intimate questions can
be very difficult. Do not start the interview
with this type of question; wait until further
into the interview when hopefully the patient
is more at ease with you. Try to avoid
showing any embarrassment when asking an
intimate question as this may well make the
patient feel uncomfortable.
• It is important that the patient understands
why you are asking certain questions.
Remember that the assessment interview is a
two-way process: besides gathering infor-
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 15
mation from the patient it can be used for
giving information to him.
• Some patients, on account of a range of
circumstances such as deafness, speech deficit
or language difference, may not be able to
communicate with the practitioner. In these
instances it is important that the practitioner
involves someone known to the patient to
communicate on his behalf, e.g. relative,
friend or carer.
• The patient may have difficulty listening and
interpreting what you are saying through fear,
anxiety, physical discomfort or mental
confusion. Be aware of non-verbal and verbal
messages that can give clues to the patient's
emotional state.
Listening skills
Listening is an active not a passive skill. Many
people ask questions but do not listen to the
response. A common example is the general
introductory question: 'How are you?'. Most
responses tend to be in the affirmative: 'Fine',
'OK'. Occasionally, someone responds by saying
they have not been too well, only to get the
response from the supposed listener: 'Great;
pleased to hear everything is fine'. Similarly, do
not limit your attention to that which you want
to hear or expect to hear. Listen to all that is being
said and watch the patient's non-verbal behav-
iour. The average rate of speech is 100-200 words
a minute; however, we can assimilate the spoken
word at around 400 words per minute. As a
result the listener has 'extra time' to understand
and interpret what is being said. If you have
asked a question you should listen to all of the
answer. Often when trying to understand the
clinical nature of a patient's problem, there is a
great temptation to listen to the first part of an
answer and then to immediately use this infor-
mation to try and make a diagnosis. This may
mean that you are not paying careful attention to
important clinical information, which the patient
may give, at the end of their reply. Finally, it is
important that you don't let your mind wander
on to unrelated thoughts such as what you are
going to do after the interview. Before you know
 16 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
it you have missed a good chunk of what the
patient has been telling you and have most prob-
ably missed important and relevant information.
In order to be a good listener you need to set
aside your own personal problems and worries
and give your full attention to the other person.
It is inevitable that, at times, one's attention does
wander. This may be due to lack of concentra-
tion, tiredness or because the patient has been
allowed to wander off the point. In the case of the
former do not be afraid to say to the patient,
'Sorry, could I ask you to go over that again?'. In
the latter case, politely interrupt the patient and
use your questioning skills to bring the conversa-
tion back to the subject in hand.
During the interview the techniques of para-
phrasing, reflection and summarising can be
used to aid listening and ensure you understand
what the patient is trying to convey.
Paraphrasing. This technique is used to clarify
what a person has just said to you in order to get
him to confirm its accuracy or to encourage him
to enlarge. It involves re-stating, using your own
and the patient's words, what the patient has
said.
Reflection. This technique is similar to
prompting in that it is used to encourage the
patient to continue talking about a particular
issue that may involve feelings or concerns. It
may be used when the patient appears to be
reluctant to continue or is 'drying up'. It involves
the practitioner repeating in the patient's own
words what the patient has just said.
Summarising. This technique is used to iden-
tify what you consider to be the main points of
what the patient is trying to tell you. It can also
be a useful means of controlling the interview
when a patient continues to talk at length about
an issue. To summarise, the practitioner draws
together the salient points from the whole con-
versation. At the end of the summary the patient
may agree with, add to or make corrections to
what the practitioner has said. Summarising
serves a useful purpose in checking the validity,
clarity and understanding of old information; it
does not aim to develop new information.
The basic skills of a good listener are high-
lighted in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Skills ofa good listener
• Look at the patient when he/she startsto talk
• Use body language such as nodding, leaning forward to
demonstrate to the speaker thatyou are interested in
what is being said
• Do not keep looking at the time
• Adopt a relaxed posture
• Use paraphrasing, reflecting and summarising to show the
patient that you are listening to and understanding what
he/sheis/are saying
Non-verbal communication skills
This involves all forms of communication apart
from the purely spoken (verbal) message. It is
through this medium that we create first impres-
sions of people and, similarly, people make initial
judgements about us. Once made, first impres-
sions are often difficult to change, yet research
has shown they are not always reliable.
Therefore, it is particularly important that we
consider non-verbal communication here since it
affects not only how we are perceived when we
communicate but also how we make judgements
about the patient.
Non-verbal behaviour includes behaviours
such as posture, touch, personal space, physical
appearance, facial expressions, gestures and
paralanguage (i.e. the vocalisations associated
with verbal messages, such as tone, pitch,
volume, speed of speech). It is said that we pri-
marily communicate non-verbally. Remember
the old adage 'a picture says a thousand words'.
Your body language and paralanguage will send
an array of messages to your patient prior to you
saying anything. Non-verbal communication
serves many useful purposes. It can be used to:
• replace, support or complement speech
• regulate the flow of verbal communication
• provide feedback to the person who is
transmitting the message, e.g. looking
interested
• communicate attitudes and emotions (Argyle
1972, Hargie et aI1994).
The average person only speaks for a total of
10-11 minutes daily, with the average spoken sen-

tence lasting only around 2.5 seconds
(Birdwhistell 1970). Therefore, non-verbal com-
munication is the main mode of conveying our
emotional state in most types of human interac-
tions. In fact, in a typical conversation only one-
third of the social meaning will be conveyed
verbally - a full two-thirds is communicated
through non-verbal channels! (Birdwhistell1970).
Due to the broad literature in this area the fol-
lowing section will focus on selected aspects of
non-verbal behaviour and how they may
influence the success of the assessment inter-
view. For the interested reader, there is a wide
range of books available which look at the topic
of non-verbal communication, many specialis-
ing in the clinical interaction: see Davis (1994),
Dickson et al (1997), Hargie (1997), or the winter
1995 edition of the Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
for further information on this topic.
Eye contact. Eye-to-eye contact is frequently
the first stage of interpersonal communication. It
is the way we attract the other person's attention.
Direct eye-to-eye contact creates trust between
two people; hence, the innate distrust felt of
someone who avoids eye contact. However, we
do not keep constant eye-to-eye contact through-
out a conversation. The receiver looks at the
speaker for approximately 25-50% of the time,
whereas the speaker looks at the other person for
approximately half as long. So in other words,
people tend to look more at the other person
when they are listening compared with when
they are speaking.
Too much eye contact is interpreted as staring
and is seen as a hostile gesture. Too little is inter-
preted as a lack of interest, attention or trustwor-
thiness. Interviewers cannot afford to look
inattentive because the patient may interpret this
as meaning that he has said enough and as a
result may stop talking. Conversely, withdraw-
ing eye contact may be used as a legitimate way
of getting the patient to stop talking.
Health care practitioners should be aware of
the frequency and duration of eye contact they
have with their patients. The use of eye contact is
important for assessing a range of patient needs
and providing feedback and support, and its use
during the interview should be based on the pro-
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 17
fessional judgement of the practitioner
(Davidhizar 1992). Certainly eye-to-eye contact is
recommended at the beginning of the interview,
to gain rapport and trust, and at the end of the
interview by way of closing the interview.
However, you should always be aware of poten-
tial cultural and gender differences in appropriate
level of eye contact. For example, Hall (1984) has
reported that on average women tend to make
more eye-to-eye contact compared with men, so
adjust your non-verbal behaviour accordingly.
Facial expression. Facial expression is argu-
ably the most important form of human com-
munication next to speech itself (Hargie et al
1994). It is via our facial expression we commu-
nicate most about our emotional state, and the
meaning of a wide range of facial expressions
(e.g. happy or sad) are recognised universally
(Ekman & Fresen 1975). Smiling, together with
judicious eye-to-eye contact, signifies a recep-
tive and friendly persona and inspires a feeling
of confidence and friendliness. Facial expres-
sions often carry even more weight in a social
interaction than the spoken word. For example,
if a practitioner is giving a very positive verbal
message to the patient but, at the same time, the
practitioner's facial expression communicates
anxiety and doubt, then it is likely that the
patient will pay more attention to the facial
message. This is because verbal behaviour is
much easier to control than non-verbal and, as a
result, non-verbal communication is likely to be
more honest! Therefore, it is important that
practitioners are always aware of the message
they are communicating using their facial
expressions.
Posture and gestures. The manner in which
we hold ourselves and the way in which we
move says a lot about us as individuals. This area
of non-verbal behaviour is often referred to as
kinesics and includes all those movements of the
body which complement the spoken word (e.g.
gestures, limb movements, head nods, etc.), One
particularly important aspect is posture. Four
types of posture have been identified:
• approaching posture, which conveys interest,
curiosity and attention, e.g. sitting upright
 18 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
and slightly forward in a chair facing towards
the person you are communicating with
• withdrawal posture, which conveys negation,
refusal and disgust, e.g. distance between the
receiver and the communicator, shuffling,
gestures indicating agitation
• expansion, which conveys a sense of pride,
conceit, mastery, self-esteem, e.g. expanded
chest, hands behind head with shoulders in
air, erect head and trunk
• contraction, which conveys depression,
dejection, e.g. sitting in a chair with head
drooped, arms and legs crossed or head held
in hands, avoiding eye contact.
Clearly, the posture adopted by the health care
practitioner is important in developing a rapport
and a working therapeutic relationship with the
patient.
When we speak we also tend to use our arms
and hands to reinforce and complement the
verbal message. In fact, when people are con-
strained from using their arms and hands, they
experience greater difficulty in communicating
(Riseborough 1981). Self-directed gestures such
as ring twisting, self-stroking and nail biting may
indicate anxiety. Be aware of self-participation in
these types of activities as you may convey a
non-verbal message of anxiety to your patient
while verbally you are trying to convey a
confident approach. The health care profession
should be sensitive to the non-verbal gestures
used by the patient as these may reveal more
about the patient's thoughts and feelings than
they are able to communicate verbally (Harrigan
& Taing 1997).
Touch. The extent to which touching is per-
missible or encouraged is related to culture
(McDaniel & Andersen 1998). In general, the
British people are not known as a nation of
Table 2.3 Four zones of personal space (Hall 1969)
Zone Distance
Intimate 0-0.5 metres
Personal 0.5-1 .2 metres
Social/consultative 1 .2-3 metres
Public 3 metres +
'touchers'. During the assessment it may be nec-
essary to touch the patient in order to examine a
part of his body. This type of touching, known
as functional touching, is generally acceptable
to most patients as part of the role of the practi-
tioner and as such does not carry any connota-
tion of a social relationship. However, people
from certain cultures may find it difficult to
accept, even in medical settings. Prior to func-
tional touching of a patient, it is important that
you inform the patient what you intend to do
and the reasons for doing it.
During the interview you may wish to use
touch as a means of reassuring the patient, to
indicate warmth, show empathy or as a sign of
care and concern (McCann & McKenna 1993). A
hand lightly placed upon a shoulder or holding a
patient's hand are means of showing concern and
giving reassurance. It is difficult to produce
guidelines for when this type of touching should
or should not be used. Practitioners must feel
confident and happy in its use, and must also take
into account a multitude of communication cues
from the patient before deciding whether it is or is
not appropriate (Davidhizar & Newman 1997).
Proxemics. All of us have a sense of our own
personal territory. When someone invades that
territory, depending upon the situation, we can
be fearful, disturbed or pleased and happy. As
with touch, our sense of personal space is
affected by culture. In some cultures individuals
have a large personal space, whereas in others
they have a very small personal space.
Encroaching on someone else's personal space
can be perceived as intimidation and, in the case
of the assessment interview, may put patients on
their guard. As a result the patient may become
reluctant to disclose relevant information. Hall
(1969) defined the four zones of personal space
(Table 2.3).
Activities
Intimate relationships/close friends
What is usually termed 'personal space'
Distance of day-to-day interactions
Distance from significant public figures
 THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 19

The zone in which people interact is highly
influenced by social status and people who have
an equal status tend to interact at closer distances
(Zahn 1991). The assessment interview usually
takes place in the social/consultative and the
personal zone. During the interview it may be
necessary to enter the intimate zone. Prior to
doing this, notify the patient in order to justify
any actions requiring closer contact.
Social interactions are not only influenced by
distance, but also by bodily orientation. The angle
at which you conduct the assessment interview
may have a significant effect on the success of the
interaction. There are four main ways in which
you can position yourself in order to interact
with the patient (Fig. 2.1): (i) conversation;
(ii) cooperation; (iii) competition; and (iv) coac-
tion. Research indicates that the conversation
position is most appropriate for an assessment
interview. In fact, research has shown that
when CPs sat at a 90Q angle to their patients
during a clinical interview, the amount of

A B

C o
Figure 2.1 Body orientation may influence the success of the interview. The figures show four positions commonly
encountered when two people interact. Which of the following orientations do you think would be most appropriate for the
assessment interview? A. Conversation B. Cooperation C. Competition D. Coaction.
 20 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
clinician-patient information exchanged increa-
sed by up to six times compared with when they
interacted face-to-face (Pietroni 1976).
Clearly, the health care professional needs to
be aware of the physical position they adopt
when assessing a patient as this will have a
significant impact on the kind of relationship
they are hoping to achieve (Worchel1986).
Physical appearance. We use our clothing and
accessories to make statements about ourselves
to others. Clothing can be seen as an expression
of conformity or self-expression, comfort,
economy or status. Uniforms are used as inten-
tional means of communicating a message to
others; often the message is to do with status.
Uniforms are also used in the health care profes-
sions for cover and protection. Whether one
wears a uniform (white coat, coloured top and
trousers) for the assessment interview is open
for debate, but one should pay attention to
issues of cleanliness and appearance of dress,
hair, hands, footwear and accessories such as
jewellery - they all send messages to the patient.
In addition to physical factors, which can be
altered, you should also be aware of how 'non-
changeable' physical characteristics may playa
role in your interaction with the patient. For
example, physically attractive and/or taller
people are typically judged more favourably in
general social interactions (Hensley & Cooper
1987, Melamed & Bozionelos 1992). Research has
shown that within a health care environment,
children make judgements about health
care professionals on the basis of height. In
general, taller health professionals were judged
to be stronger and more dominant than their
smaller colleagues, but they were not considered
to be more intelligent nor more empathetic
(Montepare 1995).
Finally, health care practitioners should also be
aware of the impact of their appearance on any
health promotion message that they hope to
communicate. For example, the patient will often
pay attention to the footwear worn by the practi-
tioner. Avoid giving conflicting verbal and non-
verbal messages, e.g. by wearing high-heeled
slip-on shoes while advising patients that they
should not wear this type of shoe.
Paralanguage. This involves the manner in
which we speak. It includes everything from the
speed at which we speak to the dialect we use.
Paralanguage is the bold, underlining, italics and
punctuation marks in our everyday speech! An
individual who speaks fast is often considered by
the receiver to be intelligent and quick, whereas
a slow drawl may be associated with a lower
level of intelligence. When talking to patients we
should be careful not to speak too quickly as they
will not understand what we say. Conversely, if
speech is too slow, the patient may not have
confidence in the practitioner.
When we speak we use pitch, intonation and
volume to affect the message we transmit.
Individuals who speak at a constant volume and
do not use intonation and/or alter their pitch
often come across as monotonous, dull and
boring. Such speech is often difficult to listen to.
Intonation and pitch should be used to highlight
the important parts of your question and can be
used to change the point you are trying to make.
For example, in the following sentence you can
see how changing the point of emphasis changes
the message you are trying to get across.
• You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. treatment is the responsibility of the patient.
• You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. it is essential that the treatment is carried out.
• You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. it is important that the cream is usedand not
some othersubstance.
• You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. the cream should be used on the foot and not
some other partof the body.
• You must use the cream on your foot daily,
i.e. treatment needs to beon a regular basis.
The fluency with which we speak also tends to
convey messages about mental and intellectual
abilities. Repeated hesitations, repetitions, inter-
jections of 'you know' or 'urn' and false starts
do not inspire confidence in the receiver
(Christenfeld 1995). We all experience occasions
when we are not as fluent as at other times. These
occasions tend to occur when we are tired or
under great stress. If possible, these times should
be keep to a minimum during clinical assessment.

Dialect conveys which part of the country we
originate from. It may also cause us to use vocab-
ularya person from another part of the country is
not familiar with. Avoid using colloquial terms.
Dialect, on the other hand, is not so easy to alter.
The only time it should be considered is when
patients cannot understand what the practitioner
is saying. Finally, volume should not be changed
too regularly. Shouting at the patient should be
avoided. In the clinical setting, as in life in
general, it certainly does not guarantee that the
other person will listen more to what you say!
From this section it should be clear that health
care professionals need to be sensitive to the kind
of atmosphere they are creating through their
non-verbal communication, and the role this may
have in the subsequent interaction with the
patient. The extent to which you establish a satis-
factory rapport will depend heavily on your non-
verbal skills and how you develop them in your
clinical work (Grahe & Bernieri 1999).
Stereotyping
Health care practitioners should be aware of their
own underlying psychological characteristics,
which may have a profound effect on the interac-
tion - i.e. stereotypes. A stereotype is a belief that
all members of a particular social group share
certain traits or characteristics (Baron & Byrne
2000). For example, you might hold particular
ideas about the characteristics of a patient who is
an alcoholic, elderly, from an upper social class
group, from a minority ethnic group or female. In
fact, you probably already hold a range of stereo-
types about a wide group of patients whom you
have never actually treated! While stereotypes
are not always negative, they do share a common
characteristic in that they reduce the ability of the
health care worker to see the patient as an indi-
vidual. Consequently, any information gathered
from the patient during the assessment interview
is likely to be interpreted in the light of such
stereotypes (Price 1987). Ganong et al (1987) con-
ducted a review of 38 research studies, which
examined stereotyping by nurses and nursing
students. Results indicated that nurses held
stereotypes about patients on the basis of age,
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 21
gender, diagnosis, social class, personality and
family structure. However, the impact on actual
patient care was harder to classify. What does
seem to be the case is that patients were less
likely to be seen as having unique concerns,
health problems and social circumstances.
Consequently, in addition to practising inter-
viewing skills, it is important for health care
practitioners to reflect on any belief systems they
may hold regarding particular patient groups,
and consider how such views may impair the
overall success of the assessment interview.
Documenting the assessment
interview
It is essential either during or at the end of the
assessment to make a permanent record of the
findings of the interview. This record is essential
as an aide-memoire for future reference when
monitoring and evaluating the treatment plan
and as a means of communicating your findings
to another practitioner who may collaborate in
treating the patient.
Despite recent discussions within the field of
podiatry regarding changing to electronic data
management systems, the majority of patient
records are still stored on paper. However, the
use of computerised records is on the increase,
particularly in private practice. It may well be in
the future that paper records are discarded com-
pletely, and replaced by computerised tech-
niques. Whatever the future may hold, the
need for clear, accurate recording of information
will still be the same. The recording of assess-
ment findings, together with the recording of
treatment provided, forms a legal document.
Patient records would certainly be used if action
was taken by a patient against a practitioner, or
if certain agencies required detailed evidence
of management and progress in the case of
disability awards.
Patient records may take a variety of forms: at
the simplest level a plain piece of paper may be
used. If using plain paper it is essential to adopt
an order to the presentation of your assessment
findings: e.g. name, address, doctor, age, sex,
weight, height, main complaint, medical history,
 22 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
etc. This is considered further in Chapter 5. A
variety of patient record cards exist in the NHS
and private practice. Many practitioners and
health authorities produce their own tailor-made
record card. The Association of Chief Chiropody
Officers produced a standard record in 1986 for
charting foot conditions, diagnoses and treat-
ment progress.
Handwritten recording of information requires
the following:
• The writing is legible and in permanent ink,
not pencil. If another practitioner cannot read
your writing the information is of no use.
• The information is set in a clear and logical
order. It is essential to use an accepted
method.
• Accurate recording of location and size of
lesions or deformities. The use of prepared
outlines of the feet are very good for
indicating anatomical sites and save
additional writing.
• Abbreviations are avoided where possible.
What is obvious to you may not be so
obvious to another practitioner.
• Entries are dated. Recording the medication a
patient is taking is useless unless it is dated.
Once dated the information can be updated
as and when there is a change.
• Each entry should be signed and dated by the
practitioner.
STRUCTURING THE ASSESSMENT
INTERVIEW
Preparation
In order to achieve a good assessment interview
it is essential you prepare yourself for the inter-
view. The following should be taken into consid-
eration.
Purpose. It is essential that the practitioner is
clear as to the purpose of interview. In some
instances the assessment interview may be used
as a screening mechanism to identify patients for
further assessment. It may be used to gain infor-
mation from patients in order that their needs
can be prioritised and those judged to be urgent
can be seen first. On the other hand, the assess-
ment interview may be aimed at undertaking a
full assessment of the patient, with treatment
provided at the end of the interview.
Letter of application. Was the patient referred
or self-referred? If the patient was referred by
another health care practitioner there should be
an accompanying letter of referral. Read this
carefully so you are fully informed of the reasons
for referral. This information should be used as a
starting point for the assessment. If patients have
referred themselves directly (self-referred) they
should complete any appropriate documentation
prior to the interview. Information on application
forms can be used to prioritise patients and
ensure the most suitable practitioner sees them. If
no application form or letter of referral is avail-
able the practitioner has very little information
prior to the interview, possibly only the patient's
name.
You may wish to give the patient a short health
questionnaire to complete prior to the assess-
ment (pp. 77-78). This questionnaire may be sent
to the patient prior to the interview or the patient
may be asked to fill it in on arrival. These ques-
tionnaires provide the practitioner with impor-
tant information before the start of the interview.
The patient should be allowed time to complete
the questionnaire in order that he can think about
his responses. The advantage of such a question-
naire is that the practitioner does not have to ask
the patient a series of routine questions during
the interview. However, some patients may be
reluctant to fill in a form without having met the
practitioner or reluctant to disclose information
in writing.
Prior to the interview try to read all the infor-
mation you have about the patient. You can then
come across to the patient as well informed and
as someone who has taken an interest in him.
Patient expectations. Does the patient know
what to expect from the assessment interview?
Some new patients, prior to attending their
assessment appointment, are sent an information
sheet or booklet explaining the purpose of the
assessment interview and what will happen
during it. Such an initiative is helpful. The cause
of a poor interview may be that the patient's
expectations of what will happen are very differ-

ent from what actually happens. For example, a
patient who expected immediate treatment and
had not envisaged any need for history taking
may well say, 'Why are you asking me all these
questions?'. Table 2.4 highlights what should be
contained in a patient information booklet.
Waiting room. Patients can spend a lot of time
in the waiting room, especially if they arrive too
early or are kept waiting due to unavoidable cir-
cumstances. Try sitting in the waiting room in
your clinic. Look around you: how welcoming is
it? The waiting room sets the scene for the rest of
the interview. Where possible, ensure that it is in
good decorative order, clean, with magazines to
read and informative, eye-catching posters or
pictures on the wall. Make the most of a captive
audience to put over important health education
information. TV monitors showing health pro-
motion videos may be used.
The name of the practitioner displayed outside
the clinic may be useful. Some clinics, like a
number of high street banks, have a display of
photographs with the names and titles of those
within the department or centre.
Interview room. The assessment interview may
be carried out in an office or in a clinic. Both have
advantages and disadvantages. Using an office
prevents the patient being put off by surround-
ing clinical equipment. It facilitates eye-to-eye
contact by sitting in chairs, and provides a non-
clinical environment. This is especially useful if
Table 2.4 Information booklet for patients to read prior to
the interview
The booklet should contain the following information:
The purpose of the assessment interview
How long the interview should take
What will happen during the interview
Specific information the patient may be asked to provide,
e.g. list of current medication
Specific items the patient may be asked to bring, e.g.
footwear
• Examples of questions he/she is likely to be asked
• The possible outcomes of the assessment interview, e.g.
whether the patient will receive treatment at the end of it.
The booklet may also contain a health questionnaire for the
patient to complete and bring to the assessment interview.
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 23
treatment is not normally provided at the end of
the assessment. On the other hand, using a clinic
ensures that clinical equipment is readily to hand
and the patient can be moved into different posi-
tions if there are controls on the couch.
During the interview you should ensure that
you are not disturbed. If there is a phone in the
room, redirect calls. Ensure the receptionist does
not interrupt. While the patient is in the room
you should be giving him your undivided atten-
tion. Constant disturbances not only makes the
assessment interview a protracted occasion but
also can prompt the patient into feeling that his
problem is not worthy of your attention.
The interview
When the patient enters the room, welcome him
to the clinic, preferably by name. This person-
alises the occasion for the patient and at the same
time ensures that you have the correct patient. If
you have difficulty with the patient's name, ask
politely how to pronounce it rather than doing so
incorrectly. Introduce yourself. As part of the
Patient's Charter you should be wearing a name
badge but a personal introduction is usually
preferable, especially if the patient's eyesight is
poor. It is useful to shake the patient by the hand
since touch is an important aspect of non-verbal
behaviour (as discussed earlier), although this
may be influenced by personal preference.
At this stage you may find it helpful to make
one or two general conversation points about
the weather, the time of year or some news item.
This enables patients to see you as a fellow
human. Remember that during the interview
they are going to give a lot of themselves to you.
It is important that patients feel you are
someone they wish to disclose information to.
Use the introduction as an opportunity to
explain the purpose of the interview and what
will happen.
The positioning of patient and practitioner can
influence the success of the assessment interview.
Ideally, you and the patient should be at the same
level in order to facilitate eye-to-eye contact.
Barriers such as desks are often used in medical
interviews. They can be considered as means of
 24 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
making the interview formal. Standing over a
patient who is sitting down or lying on a couch
may be intimidating.
Data gathering. It is essential that the practi-
tioner is clear as to what areas should be covered
in the interview. A logical and ordered approach
should be adopted. However, it is not always
possible or desirable to stick to an ordered
approach. Patients tend to talk around issues or
elect to give information about a question that
you asked earlier at the end of the interview. You
must make allowances for this.
Effective and efficient use of time is para-
mount. Experienced practitioners combine the
interview with the examination. This is
achieved by, for example, feeling pulses and
skin temperature while simultaneously asking
questions about medical history. This technique
is a matter of preference; some prefer to com-
plete the interview before commencing the
examination.
After each assessment interview reflect upon
it. Ask yourself how you could improve your
performance and how you could make better use
of the time. This will help you to make the best
use of the data-gathering stage of the interview.
Peer appraisal is another mechanism that you
may find helpful in aiding you to develop good
data-gathering skills.
Closure
Bringing the assessment interview to a close is a
difficult task. When do you know you have
enough information? This is a difficult question
to answer. Some presenting problems, together
with information from the patient, can be easily
diagnosed. Other problems are not so easy to
resolve and may require further questioning and
investigations.
General medical practitioners have been
shown to give their patients, on average, 6
minutes of their time. Psychotherapists, on the
other hand, spend 1 hour or more on each
assessment. Unfortunately the demands on
practitioners' time means they are often not in a
position to give the patient as much time as they
would like.
As a general rule of thumb the interview should
be brought to a close when the practitioner feels
the patient has been given an opportunity to talk
about the problem. Body language can be used to
convey the closing of the interview. Standing up
from a sitting position, shuffling of papers, with-
drawing eye-to-eye contact are all ways by which
the end of the interview can be conveyed to the
patient, together with a verbal message.
The patient should not leave the interview
without fully understanding what is to happen
next and without an opportunity to ask ques-
tions. A range of outcomes may result from the
assessment interview (Table 2.5). Patients should
know which outcome applies to them. They
should always be given the opportunity to raise
any queries or concerns they may have prior to
leaving the assessment. This is one of the most
important parts of the assessment and should not
be hurried. The patient must leave the assess-
ment fully understanding the findings of the
assessment interview and what action, if any, is
to be taken, and it is the responsibility of the
health care professional to ensure that they have
communicated such information clearly (Calkins
et al 1997).
It is helpful to provide written instructions as a
follow-up to the interview. For example, if the
patient is to be offered a course of treatment what
will the treatment involve, when will it be given,
who will give it, what problems may the patient
experience?
Table 2.5 Outcomes from the assessment interview
• Treatment is not required; the patient requires advice and
reassurance
• The patient can look after the problem once appropriate
self-help advice has been given
• A course of treatment is required; the patient should be
informed as to whether treatment will commence straight
after the assessment interview or at a later date
• The patient needs to be referred to another practitioner for
treatment
• Further examination and investigations are required
before a definitive diagnosis can be made
• A second opinion is required
• The urgency for treatment should be prioritised

Confidentiality
The information the patient divulges during the
interview is confidential. It should not be dis-
closed to other people unless the patient has
given consent. The Data Protection Act 1998
requires that all personal data held on computers
should be 'secure from loss or unauthorised dis-
closure'. The General Medical Council (1991) and
the National Health Service (1990) have laid
down guidelines on confidentiality.
WHAT MAKES A GOOD
ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW?
The prime purpose of the assessment interview is
to draw out information, experiences and opin-
ions from the patient. It is the duty of the inter-
viewer to guide and keep the interview to the
subject in hand. At the same time, it is equally
important to encourage the patient to talk and to
clear up any misunderstandings as you go along.
Keeping the balance between these two compet-
ing aims is not an easy task. One way of checking
on this is to ask yourself who is doing most of the
talking. Is it you or the patient? If you are to
achieve the aims of the assessment interview it
should be the patient.
It is not essential that you like the patient you
are interviewing. What is important is that you
adopt a professional approach, demonstrate
empathy and deal with the patient in a compe-
tent and courteous manner. It is essential that
you do not make value judgements based on
your own biases and prejudices. Respect the
patient; avoid stereotyping. Do not jump to con-
clusions before reaching the end of the interview.
As highlighted earlier, the assessment inter-
view should be patient-centred; its prime
purpose is to gain information from the patient.
However, one sometimes comes across patients
who appear unable to stop talking. What can the
practitioner do in these instances?
The first question to ask is why the patient is
talking so much. Is it because he is lonely and
welcomes the opportunity to talk, is he very self-
centred, is he avoiding telling you what the real
concern is by talking about minor issues? The
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 25
reason will influence the action you take. If you
feel the patient wants to tell you something but is
finding it difficult, try reflecting or summarise
what you think has been said. Ask if there is any-
thing else the patient would like to discuss.
Encourage patients by telling them that you want
to be able to help as much as you can; the more
they tell you about their concerns the more you
can help them.
On the other hand, if you feel you need to
control a talkative patient you may find the fol-
lowing techniques helpful:
• use eye contact and your body language to
inform the patient that you are bringing a
particular section of the interview to a close
• politely interrupt the patient, summarise
what he has said and say what is to happen
next
• ask questions that bring the patient back to
the topic under discussion.
The converse of talkative patients are those
who are reluctant to disclose information about
themselves. This may be because they do not see
the purpose of the questions you are asking, they
are shy, they cannot articulate their concerns,
they are fearful of what the outcomes may be or
they are too embarrassed to disclose certain
information. Your response will depend on the
cause of the reticence.
Explaining why you need to know certain
information will be helpful if the patient is hesi-
tant. For example, a patient may wonder why
you need to know what medication he is taking
when all he wants is to have a corn treated. If you
feel the patient cannot articulate what he wants
to say, you may find that closed questions can
help. This type of questioning limits responses
but can be helpful for a patient who has difficulty
putting concerns and problems into words. You
need to use a range of closed questions and avoid
leading questions if you are to ensure you reach
an accurate diagnosis.
The shy or embarrassed person may find self-
disclosure very difficult. It has been shown that
people tend to disclose more about themselves as
they get older. In general, females disclose more
than males. When privacy is ensured and the
 26 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
interviewer shows empathy, friendliness and
acceptance, patients have been shown to disclose
more information. Reciprocal disclosure can also
be helpful.
Feedback. In order to develop your interview
technique it is important that you obtain feed-
back on your performance. Mention has already
been made of self- and peer assessment of the
interview. This is a valuable process, which
should be ongoing. Patient feedback is another
valuable mechanism. Questionnaires (postal or
self-administered) and structured or unstruc-
tured interviews are ways in which patient reac-
tions to the interview can be obtained.
Suggestions as to how to improve interviews
should be welcomed.
REFERENCES
Argyle M 1972 The psychology of interpersonal behaviour.
Penguin, Harmondsworth
Authier J 1986 Showing warmth and empathy. In: Hargie
(ed) A handbook of communication skills. Routledge,
° discipline: Fitness to practice. GMC, London
London
Baron R A, Byrne D 2000 Social psychology, 9th edn. Allyn &
Bacon, Boston
Birdwhistell R L 1970 Kinesics and context. University of
Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia
Byrne P, Long E 1976 Doctors talking to patients: A study of
verbal behaviour of general practitioners consulting in
their surgeries. HMSO, London
Calkins D, Davis R, Reiley P et al1997 Patient-physician
communication at hospital discharge and patients'
understanding of the postdischarge treatment plan.
Archives of Internal Medicine 157: 1026
Christenfeld N 1995 Does it hurt to say Urn. Journal of
Nonverbal Behavior 19: 171
Data Protection Act 1998 EC Data Protection Directive
(95/46 EC)
Davidhizar R 1992 Interpersonal communication: a review
of eye contact. Infection Control and Hospital
Epidemiology 13: 222
Davidhizar R, Newman J 1997 When touch is not the best
approach. Journal of Clinical Nursing 6: 203
Davis C 1994 Patient practitioner interaction: An experiential
manual for developing the art of healthcare, 2nd edn.
Slack Inc, New Jersey
Dickson D, Hargie 0, Morrow N 1997 Communication skills
training for health professionals, 2nd edn. Chapman &
Hall, London
Ekman P, Fresen W V 1975 Unmasking the face. Prentice-
Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
Ganong L H, Bzdek V, Manderino M A 1987 Stereotyping by
nurses and nursing students: a critical review of research.
Research in Nursing and Health 10: 49
SUMMARY
The interview is the process of initiating an
assessment of the lower limb. The relationship
created between the practitioner and the patient
during the interview will hopefully lead to an
effective diagnosis. A good interview can
provide the majority of the information required
without having to resort to numerous tests and
unnecessary examination. There is no one
formula that can be applied to all assessment
interviews. Each patient should be treated as an
individual with specific needs. Practitioners
should develop their interviewing skills in order
that the interview achieves a successful outcome
for the patient and the practitioner.
General Medical Council 1991 Professional conduct and
Grahe J, Bernieri F 1999 The importance of nonverbal cues in
judging rapport. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 23: 253
Hall E T 1969 The hidden dimension. Doubleday, New York
Hall J A 1984 Nonverbal sex differences: communication
accuracy and expressive style. Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore
°
Hargie 1997 The handbook of communication skills, 2nd
edn.Routledge,London
Hargie 0, Saunders C, Dickson D 1994 Social skills in
interpersonal communication, 3rd edn. Routledge,
London
Hargie 0, Dickson D, Boohan M, Hughes K 1998 A survey
of communication skills training in UK schools of
medicine: present practices and prospective proposals.
Medical Education 32: 25
Harrigan J, Taing K 1997 Fooled by a smile: detecting
anxiety in others. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior 21: 203
Hensley W, Cooper R 1987 Height and occupational success:
a review and critique. Psychological Reports 60: 843
McCann K, McKenna H P 1993 An examination of touch
between nurses and elderly patients in a continuing care
setting in Northern Ireland. Journal of Advanced Nursing
18:38
McDaniel E, Andersen P 1998 International patterns of
interpersonal tactile communication. Journal of
Nonverbal Behavior 22: 59
Melamed J, Bozionelos N 1992 Managerial promotion and
height. Psychological Reports 71: 587
Montepare J 1995 The impact of variations in height in
young children's impressions of men and women. Journal
of Nonverbal Behavior 19: 31
National Health Service Circular No 1990 (Gen) 22, 7 June
1990 A code of practice on the confidentiality of personal
health information. London

----------------------------
Pietroni P 1976 Non-verbal communication in the GP
surgery. In Tanner B (ed) Language and communication
in general practice. Hodder & Stoughton, London
Price B 1987 First impressions: paradigms for patient
assessment. Journal of Advanced Nursing 12: 699
Riseborough M 1981 Physiographic gestures as decoding
facilitators: three experiments exploring a neglected
facet of communication. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
5: 172
Ryden M B, McCarthy P R, Lewis M L, Sherman C 1991 A
behavioural comparison of the helping styles of nursing
students, psychotherapists, crisis interveners, and
THE ASSESSMENT INTERVIEW 27
untrained individuals. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing
5: 185
Sandler G 1979 Costs of unnecessary tests. British Medical
Journal 1: 1686-1688
Sleight P 1995 Teaching communication skills: part of
medical education. Journal of Human Hypertension 9: 67
Worchel S 1986 The influence of contextual variables on
interpersonal spacing. Journal of Nonverbal Behavior
10:230
Zahn G L 1991 Face-to-face communication in an office
setting: the effects of position, proximity and exposure.
Communication Research 18: 737
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 29

The problem 30
Encouraging the patient to tell you about concerns
The presenting problem
and problems 30
Patients with special needs 31 1. Merriman
Why did the patient seek your help? 31

Assessmentof the problem 31

History of the problem 31
Dimensions of pain 33
Techniques for assessing pain 34

Summary 36

INTRODUCTION
Most patients consult a practitioner because
they have concerns about or problems with their
lower limbs. Problems are usually quite specific
and focused. Patients may have problems with
painful feet, an ingrowing toe nail or difficulty
accommodating a bunion in footwear. Concerns
are where the patient is worried or anxious
about something. Patients may have concerns
related to a problem, e.g. they are worried about
an ulcer that is taking a long time to heal.
Conversely, a patient may have concerns but no
specific problems, e.g. a patient may be con-
cerned that an asymptomatic mole on their leg
may be a malignant melanoma.
The role of the practitioner is to discover what
are the patient's concernis) and problemts) in
order that an effective management plan can be
drawn up and implemented. This may involve
anything from giving reassurance, e.g. that the
mole is not a melanoma, to implementing a
treatment plan aimed at resolving or reducing
the effects of a specific problem, e.g. pain in the
foot.
During the assessment interview the patient
should be given ample opportunity to express
their concerns and talk about any problems they
may have. The remainder of this chapter con-
centrates on acquiring information about the
patient's presenting problemts). However, the
practitioner should always remember it is also
important to identify any concerns the patient
may have.
29
 30 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
THE PROBLEM
What one person perceives as a problem another
may accept as being normal. A major concern for
one person may be a minor issue to another.
Defining what is normal and acceptable, and
what is abnormal or unacceptable and therefore a
problem, is fraught with difficulties.
When patients attend for their appointments
they bring with them their own ideas of what is a
problem and what is normal. A variety of factors
can influence a patient's perception (Table 3.1).
Fo~ example, if media coverage emphasised a
link between verrucae and cancer of the cervix
this might result in a number of females ~ho
had previously ignored their verrucae seekmg
treatment. Having a friend who has developed a
malignant melanoma may make a person
more vigilant for signs associated with this con-
dition and prompt her to seek advice when pre-
viously she may have been oblivious to the
situation. People from socioeconomic groups 1
and 2 are more likely to seek medical assistance
than those from socioeconomic groups 4 and 5
(Townsend & Davidson 1982).
It is important that the practitioner allows the
patient to describe the problem in her own
words. The practitioner's perception of the
problem is not always the same as that of the
patient. For example a mother may be concerne~
that her 3-year-old child has flat feet. The practi-
tioner considers this to be normal for a child of
that age. However, during the consultation, the
Table 3.1 Factors that influence a patient's perceptions of
what is normal and what is a problem
Age
Gender
Culture
Socioeconomic base
Knowledge base
Previous experiences
Views of family and friends
Media
Socioeconomic background
Life expectations
practitioner notices a small verruca on the apex
of the right second toe and suggests that it is
treated. The mother accepts the treatment but
leaves the clinic still concerned about her child's
flat feet. The practitioner has failed to identify the
mother's main concern. An effective solution
would have consisted of advice and reassurance
regarding the flat feet as well as treatment of the
verucca.
Encouraging the patient to tell you
about concerns and problems
How can you encourage patients to tell you why
they have sought your help? A whole range of
factors can make it difficult for the patient to
articulate the problem in words. Some patients
may be frightened or embarrassed, others may
be concerned that they are wasting your time and
others that you will think they are silly to be con-
cerned about a minor problem. It is essential that
patients are made to feel that they are. not
wasting your time and that you are genumely
interested in their concerns and problems.
Most patients present with discomfort or pain.
For example, a patient may present with discom-
fort from a bunion rubbing on footwear. The
patient may also be concerned about the appea.r-
ance of the bunion and scared that she will
develop a deformity similar to her grandmother's.
A skilled practitioner will identify all the anxieties
the patient is experiencing: the problems with the
current discomfort, the difficulty in finding
appropriate shoes to wear, the worry about the
unsightly appearance of the bunion and the fear
that it may get worse.
It is important that you consider how best to
start the conversation. Asking the patient 'What
are you complaining on', 'What's the problem?'
or 'What is it that's wrong with you?' are proba-
bly not the best ways to start. The last question
may result in the patient responding 'That's what
I've come here for you to find out'. 'How can I
help you?' or 'Would you like to tell me about
what concerns you?' may be preferable. Open
questions should be used. The patient should ~ot
feel rushed; avoid interrupting and puttmg
words into the patient's mouth. Record in the

patient's own words what she is concerned about
and what she sees as a problem. Avoid medical
jargon wherever possible.
Having obtained an idea of the patient's con-
cerns, it may help to find out if she has any
thoughts as to the cause. Ask the reason for such
conclusions. The answers to these questions may
reveal whether patient and practitioner share the
same view.
When patients do reveal what is worrying
them, avoid being judgemental and making
comments such as 'Oh, that's nothing!' or 'I
don't know why you are so worried!'. Remem-
ber it is a problem to the patient even if it is rel-
atively innocuous to you. Patients may not
reveal their real reason for coming to see you
until they are just about to leave. This can be a
source of annoyance to the busy practitioner. Do
try and give the patient time even if it is at the
end of the consultation.
Patients with special needs
Some patients may experience other difficulties
in telling you about their concerns and problems
than simply having poor powers of description.
The patient may be deaf and dumb, have suf-
fered a stroke, have a speech impediment or have
learning or language difficulties. It is important
you give these patients extra time. Avoid
jumping to too many assumptions. If the patient
can write, ask her to write down the nature of the
complaint. Friends or relatives may be able to
provide valuable details and information or act
as interpreters.
Why did the patient seek your help?
A variety of factors can influence why a patient
has chosen to visit your practice. Table 3.2 gives
the usual reasons for a patient choosing a partic-
ular practitioner. It is important to find out what
made the patient choose you. For example, a
patient who has been referred by a friend or rela-
tive may find it very easy to disclose her concerns
to you. The friend/relative may have been very
complimentary about your abilities. On the other
hand, a patient who is seeking a second opinion
THE PRESENTING PROBLEM 31
Table 3.2 Reasons for a patient choosing a practitioner
Applied for treatment at their local health service
Found your name in the yellow pages
• Saw an advertisement
• Noticed your plate outside the practice
• Were advised by a friend or relative to seek your help
• Were referred by another health practitioner, e.g. GP
Are seeking a second opinion because they were
unhappy with the response of the first practitioner
may want you to give a different diagnosis from
the one given by the previous practitioner. As a
result she may not disclose all the salient features
of the problem. It is important to remember that
outstanding legal claims for lower limb injuries
may affect the patient's perspective.
ASSESSMENT OF THE PROBLEM
Assessment of the problem involves acquiring
information about the history of the problem.
The history must be taken logically and system-
atically. An assessment of the current level of pain
and discomfort should also be undertaken.
History of the problem
History taking involves finding answers to a
range of questions (Table 3.3). Many diseases can
be identified by the pattern of symptoms they
display. Research has shown that history taking
Table 3.3 The history of the problem: questions to ask the
patient
• Where is the problem?
How did it start?
How long have you had the problem?
• Where is the problem?
• When does it trouble you?
• What makes it worse?
• What makes it better?
• What treatments have you tried?
• Are you treating it at the moment?
 32 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
can be more effective in diagnosing a problem
than clinical tests alone (Sandler 1979).
Where is the problem? Locating the problem is
very important. Getting the patient to show you
by pointing is the best way. If the patient has
difficulty reaching the area, you may find it
helpful to present an outline of the lower limb
and ask her to mark the area affected. For
example, pain may start in one area but then
radiate to other areas. Some problems may have
a precise location; others may be far more diffuse
or have multiple sites. These variations may
yield helpful clues to diagnosis. Isolating a
localised area in the case of pain can be very
helpful in differentiating enthesopathy from the
more general discomfort associated with conges-
tion of the heel pad. During the physical exami-
nation you may touch the area and attempt to
elicit the symptoms in order to make sure you
have isolated the area. Do not forget to tell the
patient that this is what you are going to do.
Palpation should use no more pressure than nec-
essary to elicit symptoms and isolate the particu-
lar anatomy affected. It is essential that you
record, either on a diagram or in words, the loca-
tion of the problem and give an indication in the
records as to whether it is well localised or
diffuse. For example, a patient with plantar digital
neuritis (Morton's neuroma) may complain of
acute pain at one particular site, but may also
describe a paraesthesia which radiates towards
the apex of the toes. Diagrams may be preferable
to written descriptions. Another practitioner
treating the patient on a different occasion can
see exactly where the problem lies. It is essential
that dimensions of skin lesions are recorded. This
approach allows progress to be monitored for
improvement or deterioration.
How did it start? It is important to identify how
the problem started. The problem may have had a
sudden or an insidious onset. For example,
rheumatoid arthritis may have an acute sudden
onset accompanied by raised temperature and
severe joint pains, or more commonly a slow
insidious onset with general aches and pains,
which gradually get worse and more regular.
Besides trying to locate the start of the condition,
it is also important to record the symptoms the
patient initially experienced. For example, was
there anything visible at the start, such as a rash,
swelling or erythema? Were there any symptoms,
e.g. the throbbing associated with acute
inflammation? Initial symptoms may be different
from the patient's current symptoms, especially
if the condition had an acute onset but is now
chronic.
How long have you had the problem? It may be
necessary to jog the patient's memory, especially
if the problem started some time ago. Using
family occasions such as weddings or births,
national events or the season of the year may
help the patient to pinpoint which time of the
year it started.
When does it trouble you? Some conditions
may give rise to constant symptoms. Others may
occur especially at night or during the day. For
example, one of the distinguishing features of
gout is nocturnal pain. Chronic ischaemia is asso-
ciated with pain in the calf muscle (intermittent
claudication) after a period of walking and the
maximum distance the patient can walk prior to
experiencing pain gives an indication of the
severity of the problem.
What makes it worse and what makes it better?
Some conditions may improve on rest, others can
deteriorate. Patients may discover all sorts of
ways to alleviate their symptoms, e.g. wearing
particular shoes, adopting a different walking
pattern. Such information can provide valuable
clues. In instances where patients alter their gait
because of a problem affecting one part of their
foot or leg they may develop secondary problems
elsewhere. It is essential that the practitioner
identifies the original problem, as treatment for
the secondary problem will not be successful
until the initial problem is identified.
What treatments have you tried? Are you treat·
ing it at the moment? It is important to find out if
the patient has or is presently using any medica-
tions. Sometimes treatments can mask or alter
the clinical features of a problem and make diag-
nosis difficult. For example, using 1 % hydrocor-
tisone cream on a fungal infection of the skin
may mask the inflammatory response and blur
the distinctive border between infected and non-
infected areas.

It is important that you record the information
the patient gives you in response to all these
questions. All critical events should be dated.
Dimensions of pain
Pain is a subjective, multidimensional phenom-
enon that can be affected by social and psycho-
logical factors. In the same way as individuals
differ over what they perceive as a problem, indi-
viduals also differ when it comes to the assess-
ment of their pain. Pain caused by apparently
similar conditions affects individuals in very dif-
ferent ways. Practitioners should avoid making
assumptions about the severity of pain an indi-
vidual is experiencing. Patients vary in their abil-
ities to cope with pain. Some are more than
willing to complain about mild discomfort,
whereas others make no complaint despite being
in considerable pain.
Tolerance and coping are subjective concepts
that are difficult to quantify. A patient's state of
mind and personal circumstances may make
their pain worse or demand that they ignore it.
For example, it is well known that runners may
continue to run in a race despite having sustained
an injury.
The assessment of pain requires information
about its character, distribution, severity, dura-
tion, frequency and periodicity. This information,
coupled with the history of the problem and
details of the patient's concerns, helps the practi-
tioner to arrive at the correct diagnosis and draw
up an effective treatment plan.
Character
Pain can be superficial or deep. Pain arising in
the skin often gives rise to a pricking sensation if
brief or burning if protracted. Deep pain is more
nebulous and is often associated with a dull ache.
Patients may use a variety of adjectives to
describe their pain (Table 3.4).
Distribution
Pain may be localised, diffuse or radiating.
Initially, a problem may give rise to localised
THE PRESENTING PROBLEM 33
pain but as it becomes chronic and the disease
process spreads it can affect a wider area.
Radiating pain can result from the extent of the
disease or from pain being referred from one site
to another; for example, a trapped spinal nerve
can lead to pains in the leg. Usually, referred pain
does not get worse when direct pressure is
applied to the site affected. However, if the pain
has a localised cause it usually worsens when
direct pressure is applied.
Severity
Certain conditions give rise to severe pain, e.g.
myocardial infarction. However, a patient's ability
to tolerate and cope with pain differs so much
that a description of the severity of the pain must
be assessed alongside the other features.
Duration
Pain may be fleeting or may be persistent.
Ascertaining the duration of the pain can provide
valuable information. For example, pain due to
intermittent claudication may last a few minutes
to half an hour. The pain associated with a deep
vein thrombosis is persistent. These differences
can be helpful in differential diagnosis.
Frequency and periodicity
Some conditions lead to pain occurring in a
regular pattern; others result in a less pre-
dictable pain pattern. It may be that the pain
recurs infrequently or regularly.
Table 3.4 Descriptors used to describe pain
Vice-like Deep
Tooth ache On touching
Throbbing On weightbearing
Sharp Intermittent
Stabbing
Shooting
Bursting
 34 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
Techniques for assessing pain
There are many general pain measures but there
are no foot-specific pain measures that are widely
used. Various foot-specific measures have been
developed, but these have not resulted in general
use. For example, Budiman-Mak et al (1991)
developed the Budiman-Mak Foot Function
Index. This index was used in elderly patients
with rheumatoid arthritis to assess activity limi-
tation, perceived difficulty and pain.
Weir (;Ot al (1998) in a survey of podiatrists
found that 53% of podiatrists did not assess
their patient's foot pain. This is of concern,
as the accurate assessment of pain is critical
for the identification of suitable and effective
interventions.
A range of techniques can be used to provide
more objective information about the dimensions
of pain experienced by a patient.
Numerical pain rating scales. Different dimen-
sions such as severity, frequency and duration
can be assessed. For example, a patient may be
asked to score the frequency of her pain using a
1-5 scale, where 1 signifies persistent, present
all the time, and 5 is very infrequent, less than
twice a week.
Verbal descriptor scales (VDS). Descriptive
scales can also be used. The following descriptors
can assess severity: slight, quite a lot, very bad,
agonising. Verbal descriptor scales are reliant on
the ability of patients to use words that best
describe their pain. It is not possible to compare
the descriptors used by individual patients.
Visual analogue scales (VAS). These scales can
be used to assess the severity of pain. The tech-
nique involves asking the patient to indicate how
severe their problem is. Figure 3.1 illustrates two
different types of visual analogue scale.
The VAS records the intensity of pain and is
more useful for acute rather than chronic pain.
The VAS has many advantages (Weir et aI1998):
• subjective measure of pain intensity
• clear to the patient what is being measured
• has face validity as it appears relevant to the
patient
• quick and easy to administer
• requires minimal training of the patient
• can be used in a variety of clinical settings
including home visits
• high degree of reliability when used on the
same patient
• useful indicator to compare 'before and
after' situations (Bowsher 1994).
The VAS is not suitable for those with poor
visual and motor coordination. It is thought to be
unsuitable for elderly patients, as they may be
confused and unable to adapt to the abstract
thinking required (Hayes 1995). Rather than
using a horizontal line a vertical line has been
used, which is more akin to a thermometer (pain-
ometer). It has been argued that this approach
facilitates the conceptualisation of pain increas-
ing and may be easier to respond to than the hori-
zontal scale (Herr & Mobily 1991).
General pain questionnaires. The most well-
known general pain questionnaire is the McGill
Pain Questionnaire, which is based on a 78-item
structured questionnaire that provides informa-
tion about present pain intensity and pain rating
index. Use of this questionnaire indicates that a
patient who describes their pain as frightening
usually does not understand what is causing it
(Melzack 1975). The use of this questionnaire has
been criticised for the time it takes to complete
and evaluate.
Body-part questionnaires. These question-
naires usually relate to pain in a particular
anatomical part, e.g. Boeckstyns (1987) devel-
oped a knee pain questionnaire.
Charts. Charts can be used for patients to
indicate where the pain occurs and, by using
4 5 6 7 8 9
A.c.
1
° 1 2 3 1°11
Figure 3.1 Visual analogue scales A. Numerical
B. Descriptive.
 THE PRESENTING PROBLEM 35

different symbols, the type of pain that occurs
(Fig. 3.2). Pain charts have been used as an aid
to the psychological evaluation of patients with
low back pain (Ransford et al 1976). This
method should be used with great caution
and with the assistance of a suitably qualified
psychologist in order to prevent incorrect
conclusions being reached.
Pain diaries. It may be helpful, especially if a
patient is rather vague about the duration and
frequency of the pain, to get the patient to com-
plete a diary of the pain over a specific period of
time. Figure 3.3 illustrates a pain chart. The cate-
gories used in the chart were devised by the Pain
Research Institute, Liverpool. While pain diaries
can be helpful, they may lead patients to focus on
their problem and could even exacerbate it.
The information gained from a patient present-
ing with a painful first metatarsophalangeal joint
is shown in Table 3.5. The data used for this
example suggest a diagnosis of gout. Laboratory
tests and further assessments, i.e. medical and
social history, may confirm this diagnosis.

Table 3.5 Information gained from assessment of a patient

with a painful first metatarsophalangeal joint
The problem(s) 'I've got a very painful big toe. I
can't sleep at night for the pain.'
The concern(s) 'Do you think it is something
serious?' 'Will I have to have
my
foot off?'
Where is the problem? The big toe joint on my left foot.
How did it start? The pain started one night. I
woke up in a lot of pain. My toe
was bright red and throbbing.
The next day it was really
swollen.
How long have you Itstarted about a week ago.
had the problem?
When does it trouble you? It hurts all the time, especially
at night.
Numbness xxxxx What makes it worse? If I knock it at all and when I
walk on it.
What makes it better? The pain eases a bitwhen I
Stabbing 11/ I ifill take a painkiller but when the
tablet wears off the pain is just
as bad again.
Pins and needles 00000
What treatments have Just painkillers. I have been
you tried? taking quite strong ones these
Burning AAAAA last few days.
Are you treating it at the See above.
Figure 3.2 Pain chart. moment?
 36 APPROACHING THE PATIENT

Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri 5 Excruciating SUMMARY

6.00 4 Very severe It is essential that the practitioner acquires a clear
7.00 and accurate understanding of the patient's
8.00 3 Severe concerrus) and problems in order to devise an
9.00
10.00 2 Moderate effective management plan. These terms have
11.00 been emphasised in different ways in this
12.00 1 Just chapter, although 'problem' and 'concern' may
13.00 noticeable
14.00
be used synonymously elsewhere.
15.00 o No pain If the basic history part of the assessment con-
16.00 cerning the presenting problem is inadequately
17.00 S Sleeping
18.00
dealt with or not undertaken the result of an
19.00 inaccurate diagnosis occurring is all too clear to
20.00 see. Some of these issues are emphasised in more
21.00
22.00
detail in Chapter 5, which forms a prerequisite
for systems analysis by functional enquiry and
Figure 3.3 Pain diary.
physical examination.

REFERENCES

Boeckstyns M E H 1987 Development and construct validity
of a knee pain questionnaire. Pain 31: 47-52
Bowsher D 1994 Acute and chronic pain and assessment. In:
Wells P E, Frampton V, Bowsher D (eds) Pain
management by physiotherapy, 2nd edn. Butterworth-
Heinemann, Oxford, pp 39-42
Budiman-Mak E, Conrad K J, Roach K E 1991 The Foot
Function Index: a measure of foot pain and disability.
Journal of Clinical Epidemiology 44: 561-570
Hayes R 1995 Pain assessment in the elderly. British Journal
of Nursing 4: 1199-1204
Herr K A, Mobily P R 1991 Complexities of pain assessment
in the elderly. Journal of Gerontological Nursing 17: 12-19
Melzack R 1975 The McGill Pain Questionnaire: major
properties and scoring methods. Pain 1(3): 277-299
Ransford A 0, Cairns D, Mooney V 1976 The pain drawing
as an aid to the psychologic evaluation of patients with
low-back pain. Spine 1(2:6): 127-134
Sandler G 1979 Costs of unnecessary tests. British Medical
Journal 2: 21-24
Townsend P, Davidson N 1982 Inequalities in health: the
Black Report. Penguin, Harmondsworth, pp 76-89
Weir E C, Burrow J G, Bell F 1998 Podiatrists and pain
assessment - a cross sectional study. The British Journal
of Podiatry 1(4): 128-133
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 37

Types of measurement 38
Quantitative measurement 38
Clinical measurement
Qualitative measurement 38
Semi-quantitative measurement 39 c. Griffith
Integration of the three types of measurement 40

Selection of an appropriate measurement

technique 41
The practitioner 41
The patient 41
Resources 41

Terms used in clinical measurement 42

Error in measurement 44
The clinical environment 45
Procedure 45
The equipment 45
The practitioner 47 INTRODUCTION
The patient 50
Clinical measurement is closely intertwined with
Measurement evaluation exercise 51 assessment and evaluation of the lower limb. The
Conclusion 52 term 'measurement' refers to the discovery of the
Summary 52 extent of an observation and to the result
obtained. 'Assessment' and 'evaluation' are terms
that refer to the process of interpreting the
meaning of a measurement. Measurements are
used for a number of reasons. They are funda-
mental to the processes of diagnosis, prognosis,
prescription of treatment, case management and
assessment of outcomes.
The lower limb consists of a number of inter-
related complex body systems. Bones, joints,
muscles, nerves, blood vessels and other soft
tissues all contribute to the health and function
of the lower limb. With so many diverse struc-
tures and physiological functions in each of
these body systems, it is not surprising that a
wide variety of techniques have evolved to
measure their performance.
Some clinical observations are amenable to
objective scientific measurement and others are
not. To gain as much clinically useful informa-
tion as possible about patients and their
responses to treatment, both objective and sub-
jective measurement methods can be employed.
It is a matter of selecting the most appropriate
technique for the particular circumstances.

37
 38 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
TYPES OF MEASUREMENT
There are three types of clinical measurement
technique:
• quantitative measurement
• qualitative measurement
• semi-quantitative measurement.
All three types of measurement provide valu-
able but different types of clinical information.
Quantitative measurement
Quantitative measurements measure quantity in
the true scientific sense, being objective and typi-
cally consisting of two parts: a numerical value
and a unit of measurement. The numerical value
denotes the magnitude of an observation, defined
against certain norms or standards called units
of measurement. Units of measurement give a
dimension to the numerical value. The language
of scientific measurement is the Systeme Interna-
tional (51), also known as the metric system.
Examples of 51 units of measurement appropriate
to the clinical setting are kilograms (mass), metres
(length), pascals (pressure), newtons (force), hertz
(frequency), degrees (angle) and degrees Celsius
(temperature). Because quantitative measure-
ments have both magnitude and dimension they
can be recorded and communicated exactly and
concisely.
All results obtained from quantitative
measurements are classed as either interval or
ratio levels of data. It is useful to know which cat-
egory data falls into because it affects its inter-
pretation. The numeric points or graduations on
any quantitative measurement scale have equal
intervals between them. This is an important
feature because the results can be compared
arithmetically. They can also be used in the most
powerful inferential statistical tests. A clinical
example will make the concept clear. If a plantar
ulcer had a diameter of 1.5 em and a depth of
0.5 em this would convey the size of the lesion
exactly. With treatment it would be hoped that
the ulcer would resolve. The progress of the ulcer
could be monitored over time. If on a subsequent
occasion the ulcer was found to have a diameter
of 0.75 em and a depth of 0.25 cm it would
demonstrate that the ulcer was exactly half its
previous dimensions.
A wide range of equipment is available to
measure clinical observations quantitatively.
Instrumentation may be quite basic in its design,
such as a rule or grid for measuring a lesion's
size, or more advanced, such as a plantar pres-
sure platform for gathering dynamic pressure
versus time measurements.
Qualitative measurement
Qualitative measurements, as the name sug-
gests, measure quality. They are subjective and
essentially descriptive measures dependent
upon human perceptions. This type of measure-
ment results in an observation expressed in
words. There is some debate as to whether qual-
itative observations are measurements in the
true sense. Qualitative researchers argue a
strong case for the legitimacy of these measures,
pointing out the reductionist nature of quantita-
tive results. They can provide extremely valu-
able clinical information where clinical features
cannot be quantified. Returning to the ulcer
example, qualitative measurement would
include descriptions about the appearance of
the ulcer. Qualitative descriptions of size could
include 'large', 'small', 'deep' and 'shallow'.
Comparison of size before and after a period of
treatment can be indicated by using phrases
such as 'larger than', 'smaller than', 'shallower
than' and so on. Qualitative descriptions are
clearly less exact in terms of magnitude than are
quantitative measures. It would not be possible
to say by how much the ulcer had decreased or
enlarged over time. Quantitative measurement
is clearly superior in the context of magnitude.
On the other hand qualitative measures can
make a major contribution to the understand-
ing, description and communication of clinical
observations. Considerable credence would be
given to the colour of the ulcer's base and dis-
charge, the shape of the lesion's edges and
walls, and perhaps any odour noticed. Changes
in these characteristics are clinically useful indi-
 CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 39

cators of the status of an ulcer and whether it is Indices

improving or deteriorating.
Ankle-brachial, footprint and pulsility indices
are commonly referred to in the literature. Each
Semi-quantitative measurement index is a ratio calculated from two quantitative
values. The ankle-brachial index, for instance, is
Semi-quantitative measurement techniques
calculated by dividing the systolic ankle blood
usually involve an association of quantitativ~ a~d
pressure by the systolic brachial pressure of the
qualitative methods. They are extremely vaned m
arm, e.g. 110/120 = 0.92. Indices are often refer-
their design and application and represent
red to as quantitative measures. Arguably they
attempts to quantify clinical observations. where
may best be considered as semi-quantitative
real quantitative methods are not appropnate, or
measures because they lack two important char-
as a cost-effective alternative. This type of mea-
acteristics of quantitative measures: indices are
surement allows a common objective approach to
dimensionless, as they have no units of measure-
obtaining, recording and communicating infor-
ment, and their numerical values cannot be
mation. Results based on objective measurements
treated arithmetically. For example, comparison
tend to be modified and supported as more data
of indices should be treated in a similar way to
are acquired (Calnan 1989). The following tech-
ordinal data. An ankle-brachial index of 0.4 indi-
niques exemplify some principles of semi-quanti-
cates a severe ischaemic condition but it cannot
tative measurement.
be said that the condition is twice as bad as an
index of 0.8.
Rating (grading) scales
Scores are allocated to each of a logical order of Nominal categorisation
observations, with each score in some way being
Nominal categorisation is essentially a very
better or worse than another. The scale may indi-
simple classification system where an obser:ra-
cate, for instance, the level of function of some
tion is placed into one of two or more categones.
system or activity, and range from normal func-
The observation of interest could be either
tion to absence of function. The Medical Research
present or absent, and given arbitrary labels,
Council (MRC) grading for muscle strength
perhaps A (present) and B (absent). For instance,
(Table 4.1) allocates scores from 0 to 5 to classify
a group of patients could be classified as hallux
function in patients with peripheral nerve
valgus present and hallux val~us absent. !?ata
damage. This is considered in Chapter 8 as part
treated in this manner are descnbed as nominal,
of essential orthopaedic assessment.
This is the most basic level of data and gives the
The six ratings or gradings are placed in rank
least amount of detail about an observation. The
order of increasing muscle power, from 0 (no
movement) to 5 (normal power). It is possible to
record muscle power on a single occasion or, by Table 4.1 Medical Research Council rating scale for
taking a series of measurements, monitor improve- muscle strength
ment or deterioration in muscle power over time.
Rating Characteristic
This type of data is classed as ordinal data. It is
important to remember that the differe~t score~ on o No movement
an ordinal scale cannot be compared m an anth- 1 Palpable contraction but no visible movement
metic way because the intervals between the 2 Movement but only with gravity eliminated
points on the scale are not equal. With ref~rence to 3 Movement against gravity
Table 4.1 it will be noted that the difference
4 Movement against resistance, but weaker than
between 1 and 2 is not the same as the difference the other side
between 4 and 5. Also, a score of 4 is better than,
5 Normal power
but not twice as good as, a score of 2.
 40 APPROACHING THE PATIENT

hallux valgus condition is denoted simply as and excessive flexion of the hip and knee, so that
present or absent with no indication as to the the toes can clear the ground.
severity of the condition. Only the simplest of Semi-quantitative measurement. A score of
arithmetic calculations can be carried out, and 3 on the MRC muscle strength grading scale. This
the data can only be used in the weakest types of indicates the level of impairment of the anterior
statistical test. muscle group. There is a deficit of motor power.
The patient can dorsiflex the foot against gravity
but not against resistance of the practitioner's
Integration of the three types of hand.
measurement
Quantitative measurement. Active dorsiflexion
In practice, techniques selected from the three can be quantified with a goniometer, e.g. _10°
types of measurement may be used together to dorsiflexion. The measurement of _10° dorsi-
obtain a comprehensive clinical picture. This is flexion indicates that with maximum contraction
illustrated in Table 4.2 by discussion of the of the anterior muscle group the foot still remains
results of measurements obtained for a patient 10° plantarflexed at the ankle. With assistance
presenting with walking difficulties. The rele- from the practitioner the maximum range of
vant case history concerns a fall 1 year previ- dorsiflexion can be obtained (_5°). Although an
ously when a fractured pelvis was sustained. additional 5° of dorsiflexion was obtained with
Following healing and discharge from hospital, the practitioner's help the foot remained
the left leg and foot have become progressively plantarflexed at the ankle. Comparison with the
weaker. unaffected ankle and known normal values will
Qualitative measurement. There appears to be a enable the practitioner to determine the extent of
motor deficit in the anterior compartment of the the reduction in ankle dorsiflexion and identify
leg. This may be due to impingement of a periph- the probable cause. The calf may have shortened
eral nerve related to the pelvic fracture. The lack of if there is a loss of power in the anterior antago-
ankle dorsiflexion during the swing phase is being nist muscle group. Future measurements can be
compensated proximally, by elevation of the trunk used to quantify improvement or deterioration of
ankle dorsiflexion.
The example above demonstrates the value of
Table 4.2 Assessment results
integrating quantitative, semi-quantitative and
Type of Method Results qualitative types of measurement. A complete
measurement picture of the case can be constructed where evi-
Qualitative Visual Stance phase: The dence from one type of measurement comple-
observation left foot slaps noisily ments another. Evaluation of the evidence then
of gait against the ground enables the practitioner to infer the cause of the
at each step
Swing phase: The left changes in gait pattern with more than a reason-
foot is plantarflexed, able degree of confidence. A thorough under-
the hip and knee are standing of the problem gained in this manner
flexed excessively
and there is upper enables an appropriate diagnosis and manage-
body sway to the ment plan to be decided.
right It could be argued that all measurements for
Semi-quantitative MRC muscle The anterior muscle the patient could have been quantitative. Gait
strength compartment score
grading scale of 3 (i.e. movement
analysis could have been recorded with video
against gravity) and the movements of the limb segments digi-
Quantitative Goniometric Active ankle tised to allow quantification. Muscle power
measurement dorsiflexion -10° could have been quantified with a dynanometer.
Passive ankle Nevertheless, the example represents the most
dorsiflexion _5°
usual clinical situation where the practitioner

may only have access to a goniometer. An impor-
tant issue for consideration has now been raised.
If a number of different measurement options are
available, how does the practitioner select the
most appropriate method?
SELECTION OF AN APPROPRIATE
MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUE
Selection of an appropriate measurement tech-
nique can be difficult, particularly for students
with relatively little experience. Many factors
influence the choice of a measurement technique.
The three main factors are:
• practitioner
• patient
• resources.
The practitioner
Choice of measurement technique will be
influenced significantly by professional and con-
tinuing education, past experience, personal
beliefs, existing skills and a detailed knowledge
of the patient's history. Consequently, some tests
will be used more frequently than others.
Knowledge and skills should be greater for those
techniques used more often. Where less frequent
or novel situations arise, a relevant measurement
technique for the observation of interest must be
selected. The MRC grading for muscle strength
described earlier is suitable for patients with
peripheral nerve damage causing muscle flaccid-
ity. It is not a valid technique for patients with
hypertonicity. To avoid the possibility of select-
ing an inappropriate technique, a sound theoret-
ical knowledge of the measurement techniques
under consideration is needed. The situations
that might arise when selecting a measurement
technique for a particular patient are:
• seemingly similar observations (as above) may
not be amenable to the same measurement
technique
• some observations can be measured by a
number of techniques and there may be no
particular clinical advantage in anyone
technique
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 41
• it may be clear that one particular technique
is preferred.
The patient
Each patient is unique. Although there may be
similarities between patients, no two cases are
identical. An individual patient's characteristics
will affect his suitability for different measure-
ment techniques. Age, mental state, build,
current medical status and medication, dietary
and social habits are characteristics that should
influence decisions about the choice of measure-
ment. This may result in a modification to the
measurement procedure, selection of an alterna-
tive technique, or even a decision not to perform
the measurement at all.
Resources
Resources have a significant influence on the
availability of measurement techniques: funding,
accessibility to equipment, professional skills,
time and space will determine which measure-
ments can be conducted. Practitioners will
usually have facilities for routine measurements.
However, ongoing technological advance-
ments have facilitated the introduction of more
sophisticated and cost-effective measurement
equipment and techniques at the clinical level.
Monofilaments help standardise the amount of
pressure applied to the skin when carrying out
neurological sensory testing because they buckle
at a preset force. If a practitioner is interested
only in peak pressures the Podotrack plantar
pressure measuring device could be used as a
much cheaper alternative to a computer-based
pressure measurement system. Using this device,
van Schie et al (1999) described a screening
method for high pressures in 'at risk' patients
with diabetes. Semi-quantitative measures are
produced quickly by comparing relevant areas of
the footprint with a calibration chart.
Developments in microelectronics have pro-
vided many powerful measurement tools.
Advances in digital photography have led to the
production of high-quality images at a relatively
low cost. Rajbhandari et al (1999) compared the
 42 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
use of a digital camera for two-dimensional mea-
surement of ulcer size with a more traditional
approach with OpSite Flexigrid film. It was
shown that digital imaging was easier, faster and
subject to less variation.
TERMS USED IN CLINICAL
MEASUREMENT
The notion of an ideal measurement is one that is
accurate, precise, repeatable, reliable and valid. To
gain an awareness of both the value and limita-
tions of contemporary measurement methods, an
understanding of the terms associated with mea-
surement is needed.
Accuracy
Accuracy concerns a result that reflects the true
value of the observation or phenomenon being
measured.
Precision
Precision is the degree of refinement in a mea-
surement and relates to the size of the intervals
on the measurement scale. A rule with gradua-
tions of 1mm would allow greater precision than
one with graduations every Smm. The intervals
between the graduations on the measurement
scale should always be appropriate for the obser-
vation of interest. If they are unnecessarily large
and the measurement indicator falls between
graduations the practitioner is forced to make an
estimate of the reading, increasing the potential
for error.
Repeatability
Repeatability is determined by measuring the
same patient with the same technique on two or
more occasions and comparing the results.
Inevitably there will be differences. An experi-
mental research design can be used to determine
statistically if any differences in repeated mea-
surement results are large enough to be
significant. A statistically significant difference
between the results would indicate that the mea-
surement technique is not repeatable, and conse-
quently of limited clinical value.
Many articles involving measurement ques-
tion the repeatability of the techniques they have
employed. Authors often make suggestions of
how their work may be refined to improve
repeatability, demonstrating that clinical mea-
surement techniques are continually evolving. A
novel procedure described by Prud'homme &
Curran (1999) is one such example. A prelimi-
nary study of pain relief following treatment of
corns was conducted. They found that the direct
force that could be applied to the lesion with a
hand-held algometer was greater after enucle-
ation of the corn. This indicated that symptoms
improved after podiatry treatment. The authors
identified several potential sources of error. The
rate of application and the uniformity of the
applied force, the linearity of the instrument and
variability in compliance of superficial tissues
were all considered.
Reliability
Reliability refers to consistency. It is the extent
to which a measurement procedure produces
similar results under constant conditions on all
occasions. Repeatability is a measure of reliabil-
ity. Clinical measures which quantify or semi-
quantify the extent of a problem can also be
used to detect change. In this context the mea-
surements are used both repeatedly and often
by different people. Consequently, it is impor-
tant to know how much any difference is due to
real change and how much is caused by error
(Wade 1992). In this way real improvements or
deterioration in a patient's condition can be
determined. Where the repeatability of a tech-
nique is known and variation in measurement
falls within clinically acceptable limits, the prac-
titioner can interpret the results and make clini-
cal decisions with confidence. Reliability can be
reduced by many factors.
There are four main sources of uncertainty
when comparing two or more results of the same
measure:
• variation in the patient's state

• different instruments may vary, and one
instrument may vary with time
• the same observer may differ when measuring
(intraobserver reliability)
• different observers may differ when
measuring (interobserver reliability).
Patient's state. Differences in the patient's state
between measurements may adversely affect the
results. There may be changes in physical and
mental states, motivation and fatigue levels.
Ingestion of certain drugs and foods can
influence the results of some tests. Some observa-
tions, e.g. blood pressure, can be affected by the
time of day that they are taken.
Instrument variation. Different examples of the
same instrument may differ in performance.
Booth & Young (2000) tested four types of com-
mercially available 10-G monofilaments with a
I-kg load cell using a standardised technique.
Important adverse characteristics of the
monofilaments were discovered that have impli-
cations for clinical use. Accuracy varied between
the different products (8.1 ± 0.3 to 10.1 ± 0.4),
where accuracy was defined as 10 g < 10%. The
two most accurate types of monofilament were
tested further. The longevity and recovery time
were assessed.
Only 50% of the monofilaments were accurate
after 200 compressions, and recovery could take
up to 24 hours with none regaining their original
buckling force. Instrumentation may be affected
by environmental changes such as variation in
temperature and humidity.
Intraobserver reliability. This factor concerns
the variation between the results of repeated
measurements obtained by the same observer.
Statistical techniques are used to determine
whether the differences in results are significant.
Intraobserver variation can be attributed to many
human characteristics. Variation in results may
be due to differences in fatigue, motivation,
stress levels and dexterity as well as to inconsis-
tencies in technique.
Intraobserver reliability differs from one indi-
vidual to another; some practitioners demon-
strate greater proficiency by obtaining more
consistent results. Ideally one should be aware of
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 43
one's own measurement capabilities, and evalua-
tion should be made at periodic intervals.
Interobserver reliability. This factor concerns
the variation between results of repeated mea-
surements between two or more observers. The
more observers are involved, the greater is the
opportunity for differences to occur between
them. There is evidence to show that intra-
observer reliability is greater than interobserver
reliability for many measurement techniques. For
example, one study of repeated goniometric mea-
surements concluded that reliability is increased
if only one observer takes the measurements
(Boone et aI1978). Simple, well-defined measure-
ment techniques have been shown to be more
reliable, presumably because observers can
follow the procedures more closely. It is generally
agreed that reliability of measurement improves
with training, education and experience (Bovens
et al 1990, Diamond et al 1989, Freeman 1990),
but Payne & Richardson (2000) found that relia-
bility of neutral and relaxed calcaneal stance
position measurements did not improve with
training in a group of undergraduate podiatry
students. Where the same patient may be mea-
sured by different practitioners over time, the
interobserver reliability between the individuals
in the group should be known. This facilitates
interpretation of the differences in results to
interobserver error or to real change so that
useful clinical judgements can be made.
However, reliability should not be considered
exclusively but in context with other measure-
ment characteristics.
Validity
Validity is concerned with whether the mea-
surement actually does measure what it is sup-
posed to measure (Bowling 1991). The idea of
using footprints to link foot types to foot pathol-
ogy has appealed to numerous researchers. The
validity of footprint parameters used as indirect
measures of the height of the mediallongitudi-
nal arch has been questioned. The arch angle,
footprint index and arch index described by
various authors were compared with a direct
measure of arch height (Hawes et al 1992). It
 44 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
was concluded that these footprint parameters
were no more than indices and angles of the
plantar surface of the foot itself, and were
invalid measures of arch height. All of the foot-
print parameters had previously been found to
be reliable. Presumably this means that the foot-
print pattern and data measured from it are
repeatable, but the indices derived cannot be
assumed to be valid indicators of arch height. In
a more recent study, Mathieson et al (1999) com-
pared electronic static and dynamic footprint
data using three different indices. Even though
there were good correlations between the static
and dynamic footprints, they concluded that the
parameters calculated differed considerably.
The concepts of sensitivity and specificity can be
used to test validity.
Sensitivity. Ability of a measurement or test
to identify positive cases of the observation of
interest.
Specificity. Ability of the measurement or test
to exclude negative cases of the observation of
interest.
A hypothetical example will illustrate the prin-
ciples of sensitivity and specificity. If we suppose
that the traditional approach to screening for
hallux valgus is to X-ray each patient's feet, it
might be thought beneficial to devise a method
that does not depend on X-rays. Practitioners
could be trained to use a new clinical measure-
ment technique to determine whether patients
have hallux valgus or not. If X-rays are assumed
to give the true result, the practitioners' results
could be compared with the X-rays. Two groups
of symptomatic patients, one group with and the
other without hallux valgus, would be selected
from the X-ray results. If the practitioners' mea-
surements were completely valid, then all the
patients with a positive X-ray for hallux valgus
and those with a negative X-ray would be appro-
priately identified. This never occurs in practice.
There are always some false positives, i.e. those
identified as having the condition when they do
not, or false negatives, i.e. those identified as not
having the condition when they do. Table 4.3
illustrates the main principles.
Sensitivity is the percentage of patients correctly
identified as having hallux valgus. Calculations
from the tabulated data show that the sensitivity
is high, at 95%, indicating that most patients with
hallux valgus were identified by the practitioners.
The specificity is the percentage of patients
without hallux valgus who were identified as not
having hallux valgus. The specificity is low at
45%. This means that 55% of patients without
hallux valgus were falsely diagnosed as having
hallux valgus. The practitioners identified nearly
half as many false positives (61) as true positives
(129). With so many false positives identified the
new clinical measurement technique would not
be considered a useful screening test for hallux
valgus.
Acceptable values for sensitivity and specificity
depend to some extent on the particular situa-
tion. Sensitivity of good tests is likely to be
between 80% and 100%. Specificity should be in
excess of 95%, particularly for screening tests
where most of the population is likely to be neg-
ative; otherwise, more false positives than true
positives may occur.
ERROR IN MEASUREMENT
A significant problem with taking measurements
is error. All results from measurements have two
components: the true value of the observation of
interest and an error component. The error com-
ponent can be further divided into two parts.
Random errors. These errors occur by chance
and, because of their random nature, cannot be
identified, controlled or eliminated. In research
studies an appropriate research design and use of
inferential statistical tests take random errors
into account. This type of error will not be con-
sidered further.
Table 4.3 Sensitivity and specificity
Practitioners' measurements X-ray results
Hallux valgus Hallux valgus
present not present
Hallux valgus present 129 61
Hallux valgus not present 7 49
Total 136 110
Sensitivity = 129/136 x 100 = 95%
Specificity = 49/110 x 100 = 45%

----------------------
Systematic errors. These errors relate to poten-
tial sources of measurement error that can
usually be postulated or identified. Once a source
of error has been identified, action should be
taken to try and reduce its occurrence. In all mea-
surements conducted on patients there are five
main potential sources of systematic error:
• clinical environment
• procedure
• equipment
• practitioner
• patient.
The clinical environment
Lighting must enable the practitioner to see
clearly so that information can be gathered and
recorded with ease. Careful planning of the light-
ing arrangements is essential. Assessment areas
should be well lit so that vital clinical features are
not obscured. Special lighting facilities are some-
times necessary. For example, a light box is essen-
tial for clear interpretation and measurement
from radiographs.
Clinical space is often at a premium. It is essen-
tial that there is sufficient space for a selected
measurement procedure to be undertaken. Gait
analysis requires a walkway of at least 6 m, but
preferably 10 m, so that a representative walking
style can be seen. The ambient clinic temperature
should be controlled at 21°C ± 2°C. This is not
only important for the comfort of the practitioner
and patient but is also essential for vascular and
neurological measurements. Significant adverse
effects on vascular measurements are caused by
factors that change peripheral arterial resistance
(Johnson & Kassam 1985).
Background noise, interruptions and distrac-
tions during consultations should be kept to
minimum levels as they impair concentration,
communication and patient relaxation.
Procedure
Standardisation of measurement techniques
reduces the potential for error in measurement.
Consequently, it can improve repeatability, reli-
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 45
ability and accuracy and, in most circumstances,
validity. Standardised techniques have clearly
specified procedures which must be followed
closely. Unfortunately, standardisation cannot
remove error completely. The extent of mea-
surement error that is clinically acceptable is
determined by the type of observation, research
and statistical methods. Where different tech-
niques measure the same type of observation,
the one that produces the least error should be
selected. An understanding of the size of the
error enables practitioners to understand the
limitations of the techniques they use so that
they can interpret their clinical measurements
realistically.
Research reports should be read with care.
Special attention should be paid to the quality
of the procedure before adopting a new or alter-
native technique. It is important to balance
gains in accuracy, precision, reliability and
validity claimed, particularly if they are mar-
ginal, with clinical costs and benefits to
patients.
The equipment
Equipment indirectly involved with measurement
can affect results. The examination couch should
permit a variety of positions to suit the many
types of examination that may be performed.
Practitioner fatigue will be reduced if the appro-
priate height of couch is used or if the height can
be adjusted. Instrumentation used directly on the
patient should be comfortable to handle and easy
to use.
Calibration of instrumentation is a fundamental
but essential process of measurement. The
purpose of calibration is to minimise the error
caused by the measurement equipment. It is a
process of setting up the instrument so that its
readings are as accurate as possible throughout its
range of measurement. The instrumentation is
tested against known standards. Calibration
curves are plotted so that the accuracy can be
determined and the error quantified. An example
will make things clear. To calibrate weighing
scales they must be placed on a horizontal surface.
The measurement indicator is aligned to zero.
 46 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
Known loads are applied at intervals throughout
the measurement range. A comparison is made
between the output reading on the measurement
scale and the known load (kgf). By plotting the
two variables a calibration curve can be produced.
Ideally, the curve would be linear throughout the
measurement range. If not, errors are identified
and the measurement tolerances calculated and
specified.
Where instruments are precalibrated, errors
may be specified as a percentage error within the
measurement range. For example, most manu-
facturers of equipment for measuring foot pres-
sure claim an accuracy within 10%. It is therefore
not possible to know whether marginal differ-
ences are real or due to error. Recalibration of
equipment should be carried out periodically,
following manufacturers' guidelines.
Some instruments are designed to measure a
series of values during cyclic activities. Pressure
transducers measure pressure under discrete
areas of the foot. A transducer located under the
second metatarsal head would measure pro-
gressive loading and unloading pressures
applied during one gait cycle. Static calibration
of the transducer is carried out by applying a
series of known loads and then progressively
removing them. A graph is produced in the
form of a loop. This phenomenon is known as
hysteresis. Figure 4.1 shows that the output
readings for known loads differ between the
ascending and descending modes. A dashed
line drawn from the horizontal axis at 5 kg
loading, to intersect with each curve, shows the
disparity in output readings during ascending
and descending modes at points (a) and (b),
respectively, on the vertical axis. Hysteresis is
defined as the maximum difference in any pair
of readings, one in the ascending mode and one
in the descending mode, during one cycle of cal-
ibration and is expressed as a percentage of full-
scale output (Dainty et al 1987).
The performance characteristics, particularly
of electronic equipment, must be suitable for the
intended purpose. Before obtaining a system to
measure plantar pressures it is vital to have a
clear idea of the information the practitioner
wishes to collect, a profile of the patients to be
studied and where the equipment will be used
(West & Barnett 1999). As there is no perfect
system, practitioners must weigh the advantages
and disadvantages of each and choose the one
that most closely matches their requirements.
Platform systems. Platforms measure the
unshod foot. The patient is unencumbered by
the attachment of wires but they must target the
platform accurately. Only data from one foot
(with a one-platform system) can be gathered
from each walk.
In-shoe systems. These systems seem attrac-
tive as they measure pressure at the foot-shoe
interface and many sequential measures of right
and left feet can be obtained from one walk.
Attachment of wires to the patient, whether it is
to a data pack worn by the patient or by an
umbilical arrangement to a computer, may
affect the patient's gait. The in-shoe environ-
ment is hostile to transducers: humidity, tem-
perature and bending effects may lead to the
production of artifact pressure readings or pre-
mature failure.
200
C'O
~ (a)
.~ 160
'"0
~ (b)
C
Ql
» Loading
.sE 120
(J)
c
> Unloading
80
40
o 5 10 15
Load kg
Figure 4.1 Hysteresis from elastomeric pressure
transducer. Pressure is recorded against load applied for
static calibration for a VP1 pressure pad. The plot shows
loading and unloading as two curves. The hysteresis is
represented by the gap between the curves (adapted from
Tollafield 1990).

The type of pressure transducer used by each
system should also be considered. Resistive,
piezoelectric and capacitance sensors convert
mechanical signals into electrical signals for pro-
cessing. The characteristics of transducers must
be matched to the type of data the practitioner
wishes to collect. The principles of hysteresis and
repeatability have already been described.
Spacial resolution, sampling frequency and
dynamic response are other important character-
istics described below. Practitioners requiring
further information are directed to a very com-
prehensive review of pressure sensors by Urry
(1999).
Spacial resolution. This refers to the number of
sensors in one square centimetre in a homolo-
gous matrix. If spacial resolution is low, smaller
anatomical features such as the lesser metatarsal
heads or toes may be missed because there is
greater spacing between individual sensors.
Some in-shoe methods do not have a matrix of
sensors but a number of separate or discrete
transducers giving a very low spacial resolution.
Problems with accurate placement of these trans-
ducers on the skin overlying the metatarsal
heads was highlighted by comparison with data
from the F-Scan high-resolution matrix insole
sensor (Lord et aI1992). The discrete transducers
were shown to be out of position by as much as
20mm.
Sampling frequency. This refers to the number
of times each individual sensor is scanned during
data collection. Events which occur very quickly
in the stance phase of gait may be missed if sam-
pling frequency is low. For walking a sampling
frequency of 50 Hz (50 times per second) is
appropriate, whereas a higher sampling rate of
200 Hz is required for running.
The dynamic range. This should permit sam-
pling of both high and low pressures expected in
the patient cohort. If this were not the case then
pressures occurring outside the range would be
missed. Particular care is required with neuro-
pathic patients as very high pressures are likely
to saturate the sensors at their upper limit.
Conversely, the soling materials in trainer
footwear may be very shock absorbent and very
low pressures may be missed.
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 47
Measurement instrumentation is prone to
ageing and wear and tear, increasing the potential
for error. Obvious changes in mechanical instru-
ments may be noticed where the measurement
scale becomes difficult to read, or its components
become damaged or loose. Electronic components
tend to age less noticeably. Noise is generated by
electrical circuitry and it tends to increase as
equipment ages. Everyday examples of noise
include the background hum of audio speakers,
or interference with visual information on a
display monitor, rather like the lines produced
on a television screen as an unsuppressed motor
vehicle passes by. It is important to ensure that
intrinsic noise produced by the instrumentation
and electrical equipment in the vicinity does
not interfere significantly with measurements.
Careful use, monitoring and maintenance of
equipment is essential if clinically useful mea-
surements are to be obtained.
The practitioner
Errors made by the practitioner can be reduced if
a good practitioner-patient relationship is estab-
lished. Effective communication and patient
compliance is essential. Efficiency and con-
fidence are usually transferred to the patient
through verbal and non-verbal communication
channels. Instructions given to patients must be
clear, so that they understand exactly what they
must do. Children, ethnic minorities and the
physically and mentally disabled usually require
more careful and considered approaches.
Adequate time must be allowed for the measure-
ments to be completed satisfactorily.
Qualitative measurements
Qualitative measurements involve an internal
appreciation and processing of the observations
made. Qualitative techniques are subjective in
nature and mainly involve the perceptions of
sight, hearing and touch. Some senses are more
acute in some individuals than in others.
Different life experiences, age, education, state of
health or mind and environmental factors will
affect these perceptions. Qualitative measurements
 48 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
are therefore more prone to bias errors in practi-
tioners than are quantitative measures. An
awareness of the problems associated with sub-
jectivity is important, because different individu-
als may perceive the same observation in
different ways.
Often, preconceived ideas lead to mistakes, as
illustrated in Figure 4.2A. When first seen most
people read the legends incorrectly as 'Paris in
the spring', 'Once in a lifetime', and 'Bird in the
hand'. We have a tendency to see what we
expect to see and ignore what we consider
unimportant. This may happen in diagnosis,
when a feature associated with a particular con-
dition is given greater importance than it should
receive and assumptions lead to a rapid, poorly
considered diagnosis. It may be that other clini-
cal features indicate a different pathology but
these may go unnoticed, be ignored or be
A
B
Figure 4.2 A. The three triangles. Failure to see the
duplicated words is common. We see only what we want to
see B. Howald is she? Some observers see a young
woman, others an old woman. The chin and neck of the
former become the nose and mouth of the latter and vice
versa (Munro & Edwards 1990).
regarded as of little significance. By remaining
as objective as possible and adopting a system-
atic problem-solving approach this tendency
will be reduced.
The brain may interpret the same observation
in different ways, as shown in Figure 4.2B.
The same observation may not only differ
between individuals but differ in the same indi-
vidual on different occasions or as they make a
closer study.
Some quantitative measurement procedures
depend on some subjective decisions by the prac-
titioner. The location of pulses, anatomical land-
marks and alignment of instrumentation all rely
on subjectivity, thus increasing the potential for
bias error. It is important to be aware of the sub-
jective qualitative factors which may impair
objective measurement so that attempts can be
made to control them.
Vision
Vision plays a major part in measurement.
During clinical training a student practitioner
develops a 'trained eye'. Recognition of pathol-
ogy develops with time and practice into a fine
skill, where even subtle signs may alert the prac-
titioner to a problem.
Visual information may be impaired if lighting
is inadequate. Apart from the more obvious
difficulties caused where lighting levels are low,
shadows cast on to a part of the limb may
adversely affect subjective aspects during biome-
chanical examination. Eyeballing describes a
subjective visual technique that can be used to
align joints before measurement, or to identify
midpoints across skin surfaces as goniometric
reference points. Passive examination of the sub-
talar joint range of motion and neutral position is
considered to be an important element in under-
standing abnormal function of the foot.
Inappropriate placement of reference lines, par-
ticularly on the curved surface of the back of the
leg, is more likely to occur if one side of the leg is
adequately lit and the other is not. A true vertical
bisection of the leg may not be obtained.
Consequently, the proportions of inversion and
eversion contributing to the total range of motion,

and determination of the neutral position, would
be incorrect.
Parallax error. A potential source of measure-
ment error, parallax error is particularly associ-
ated with joint position and movement.
Parallax is an apparent difference in position or
direction of an object caused by a change or rel-
ative change of observation point, as shown in
Figure 4.3. Viewing an object or patient at right
angles will eliminate parallax error. Measure-
ment error will increase if the measurement
instrument is not aligned with the plane of
motion. A 90° alignment must also be ensured
,
I
I
I
,
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I I information. It is very subjective. The force used
I
tpJctfJC F
A B C
o ter, but most practitioners rely on touch. The prac-
ABC
Figure 4.3 The effect of parallax on observation of the
midpoint of the posterior aspect of the leg and heel
A. Inappropriate positioning of the patient's leg leads to
parallax error B. With the patient's leg and the
practitioner's eyes correctly aligned parallax error is
eliminated C. Inappropriate positioning of the practitioner's
eyes leads to parallax error D. The actual and apparent
midpoints obtained from the relative eye and leg positions
adopted in diagrams A, Band C.
CLINICALMEASUREMENT 49
when reading analogue measurement scales.
Parallax error up to 3° was noted in one study
(Griffith 1988).
The patient must be advised on the need for
appropriate clothing if normal indoor dress
inhibits a particular observation. Body parts
must be clearly exposed where feasible. Shorts
and a T-shirt, for example, allow a relatively
uninhibited view of posture and movement.
Touch
Touch involves many forms of direct and indirect
(using instrumentation) physical contact with
,
I
patients. During clinical examinations various
components of the lower limb may be pushed,
pulled, pressed, squeezed and twisted. The
amount of force used is determined by feedback
I through the practitioner's proprioceptive path-
I
I ways, the patient's response, sound and visual
to test joint ranges of motion will need adjust-
ment for different patients and different joints.
Fluidity of the joints, muscle tone and the weight
of the limb will all influence the force required to
examine a joint effectively.
Instruments used in neurological and vascular
assessments must be applied to the appropriate
area and with an appropriate amount of force.
Using neurotips, tuning forks and cotton wool
requires a systematic approach and correct tech-
nique. For instance, inadvertently tickling the
patient with cotton wool when testing for light
touch will be interpreted through pain pathways
rather than light touch receptors, invalidating the
result.
Measurement of lower limb temperature can be
obtained quantitatively with a digital thermome-
titioner's hand temperature will influence his
appreciation of the patient's limb temperature.
This can be demonstrated with a simple experi-
ment. If both hands are inserted into a bowl of
tepid water, having previously had one in cold
and the other in hot, a clear difference in appreci-
ation of temperature of the tepid water by each
hand is noted. The subjective appreciation of tem-
perature is therefore a relative phenomenon and a
 50 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
patient's limb will feel warmer to a practitioner
with cold hands than one who has warm hands.
Hearing
Doppler ultrasound units generate audible
signals representing the velocity of blood flow. A
normal arterial audio spectrum is triphasic, rep-
resenting forward, reverse and forward blood
flow. Considerable experience is necessary to
develop the appropriate listening skills so that
normal and abnormal sounds can be distin-
guished. However, artifacts can be produced if
the application of the probe over the blood vessel
is imprecise so that an artery and a vein are
isonated simultaneously or the probe is not held
steady. If the probe angle is incorrect the signal
strength is reduced. A probe with an appropriate
frequency must be selected, depending on the
depth of the vessel of interest, so that adequate
signal strength can be obtained. Connection to a
computer with appropriate software enables the
blood flow to be seen as a waveform providing a
visual trace for interpretation (Fig. 4.4). Arterial
and venous flows, pathological states and arti-
facts can be confirmed, with a permanent record
produced for filing in case notes and inclusion in
correspondence. Excellent accounts of the clinical
use of Doppler ultrasound in the detection of
peripheral vascular disease have been written by
Velocity Doppler waveforms
===t>
Forward bloodflow
<;::===
Reverse bloodflow
Triphasic waveform Biphasic waveform
Figure 4.4 Diagrammatic representations of Doppler output showing normal and abnormal waveforms (adapted from Baker
& Rayman 1999).
Vowden (1999), Grasty (1999) and Baker &
Rayman (1999).
The patient
The patient may be responsible for measurement
errors for many reasons. General intelligence,
mental disorder, anxiety, impaired hearing or
sight or language difficulties could affect his
ability to understand what is required. Patients
may not follow instructions or respond appropri-
ately or truthfully. They may be non-compliant. If
the patient is anxious or annoyed, increased
adrenaline (epinephrine) levels will elevate the
basal metabolic rate, e.g. the pulse rate could be
increased. Patients who are emotionally distressed
may be less able to comply with the requirements
of some types of measurement procedure.
It is not unusual for patients to find difficulty in
relaxing during passive biomechanical measure-
ments. Joint ranges and fluidity of motion can
appear reduced. Forefoot varus or supinatus
could be erroneously diagnosed if the patient
fails to relax the tibialis anterior muscle, because
contraction of this muscle inverts the forefoot rel-
ative to the hindfoot.
Neurological sensory tests may require a
verbal response from the patient so that the result
can be obtained. Assuming that the test is
applied correctly, the patient must interpret the
TIme
Monophasic waveform

sensation felt, which relies greatly on patient sub-
jectivity. Vibration sensation may be tested with a
variety of instruments. Higher vibration percep-
tion thresholds (VPTs) are associated with large
peripheral nerve dysfunction. A 128 Hz tuning
fork is quick and simple to use but is unsatisfac-
tory for measuring the threshold at which vibra-
tion becomes perceptible. The Rydel Seiffer
tuning fork is a cost-effective alternative, allow-
ing semi-quantification. The biothesiometer and
neurothesiometer allow quantification but take
more time. Cassella et al (2000) used a neurothe-
siometer to demonstrate that enhanced VPT
readings were obtained (i.e. the ability to per-
ceive vibration was improved) at the medial
malleolus, first metatarsophalangeal joint and
thumb in a mixed group of normal subjects
1 hour after caffeine consumption. It is therefore
important to enquire whether caffeine-contain-
ing drinks have been consumed before com-
mencing neurological testing. The psychological
state of the patient may influence measurement
results. Painful diabetic neuropathy is associated
with significant depression (Tesfaye & Price
1997). These patients may, or may not, have
normal peripheral nerve function. It is important
to consider the effect that depression might have
on any sensory test results obtained.
If the patient is embarrassed, poorly moti-
vated, self-conscious or in pain, his walking
pattern and speed may be altered. If patients are
required to visualise and step on a specific target
such as a force or pressure platform, they may
adjust walking speed or step length before acti-
vating the transducer mechanism, giving an
atypical result. Controlling walking speed is a
major factor in foot pressure measurement. Step
length, cadence, stance phase gait and peak pres-
sure have all been shown to vary with walking
speed (Hughes et aI1991).
Some underlying pathological conditions can
influence the measurement results. Doppler
ultrasound waves are attenuated when they pass
through fat, haematoma or scar tissue, resulting
in a weak signal. Calcification of arterial walls
prevents collapse of the artery when a blood press-
ure cuff is applied. The abnormally high reading
obtained would invalidate the ankle-brachial
CLINICAL MEASUREMENT 51
index. Digital vessels are less likely to calcify and
toe pressures could be taken instead.
MEASUREMENT EVALUATION
EXERCISE
Many commonly used measurement techniques
have been shown to be prone to substantial error.
Problems with kinetic, goniometric, vascular and
neurological measurement techniques applied to
the lower limb have been regularly reported. A
paper about vascular assessment has been
selected from the literature so that the measure-
ment issues raised in this chapter can be applied.
The paper simply looked at whether or not four
observers could agree on the presence of two
pedal pulses. Following a summary of the
research findings the potential sources of error
and possible solutions to minimise errors will be
considered under the five main headings: clinical
environment, procedure, equipment, practitioner
and patient. The reader may also be interested in
trying this exercise on papers of their own choice.
Dorsalis pedis and posterior tibial pulses are
traditionally palpated to evaluate the blood
supply to the foot. An investigation of observer
variation in assessment of dorsalis pedis and
posterior tibial pulses by palpation and Doppler
ultrasound was conducted (Magee et al 1992).
The study concluded that palpation of pedal
pulses in patients with arterial disease is subject
to substantial error.
A consultant, registrar, senior house officer and
a nurse measured 33 claudicants and five con-
trols. Following palpation of the claudicants'
pulses all observers agreed on the presence of a
dorsalis pedis pulse in 67% of limbs, and the
presence of the posterior tibial pulse in 53% of
limbs. In contrast, with Doppler ultrasound, all
observers agreed on the presence of a dorsalis
pedis pulse in 58% of limbs, and the presence of
a posterior tibial pulse in 78% of limbs. The poor
reliability of these measurement procedures has
obvious clinical implications and warrants
further consideration.
The clinical environment. Temperature and back-
ground noise levels must be controlled to reduce
the potential for error. High and low temperatures
 52 APPROACHING THE PATIENT
alter peripheral resistance and may have had an
influence on the ease of detection of the pulses if
the ambient temperature was not controlled.
The procedure. Standardised procedures for
each measurement should be followed. The
subject's acclimatisation time before measure-
ments are taken is particularly important: at least
10 minutes' rest is required. The patients should
be placed in the same position for each measure-
ment. The Doppler probe must be applied at the
correct angle (60°) against the direction of blood
flow to obtain a clear signal. It is possible to
occlude superficial vessels with the Doppler
probe if too much pressure is applied. This may
explain why there was lower agreement between
practitioners over the presence of the dorsalis
pedis pulse when the Doppler probe was used.
The equipment. If different Doppler units were
used, even of the same make and model, there
could be differences in the results they produce. If
a Doppler unit's battery charge is low, weaker
sounds may not be heard. Systems that can
provide a permanent visual record of the vascu-
lar flow waveform would help confirm the pres-
ence of a pulse, and also allow identification of
artifacts, and venous sounds.
The practitioner(s). The ability of different
observers to detect pulses could be due to a
variety of factors. More experienced observers
may be more skilful and better able to locate
weak pulses. There may be differences in sensi-
tivity in the fingertips between observers. When
searching for the dorsalis pedis artery with the
Doppler probe it may lose contact with the skin
and coupling gel so that ultrasound waves are
not transmitted. Sufficient quantities of an ultra-
sound gel must be used. Noise and artifacts
caused by movement of the Doppler probe could
lead to error because of distortion of the audio
spectrum.
The patient. Anatomical variations, blood
vessel abnormalities and oedema could cause
variation in results between examiners.
Conclusion
The exercise above has identified problems asso-
ciated with clinical observations that are mea-
sured by many practitioners on a daily basis.
Some suggestions of changes to the measurement
techniques have been made which hopefully
would reduce the margins of error.
Measurement of clinical observations is an
essential part of clinical practice, but it is not a
simple step-by-step process. The knowledge pro-
vided by research leads to continual improve-
ments in standardisation of techniques and
advancements in instrumentation. It is important
that practitioners develop a scientific and system-
atic approach to clinical measurements and appre-
ciate the value and limitations of their
measurements. It is only by the diligent applica-
tion of measurement techniques that the body of
scientific knowledge will increase and further
improvements in the standards of clinical practice
will occur.
SUMMARY
Measurement may be conceptualised as being
quantitative or qualitative in nature or a mixture of
both. Data may be considered to have ordinal,
nominal or graded (scores) properties which
provide variable conclusions about the data col-
lected from measurement. This chapter has
attempted to highlight a number of the many pit-
falls for the unwary that may lead to significant
error. Ongoing research has identified many of the
causes of error in measurement, particularly those
associated with the subjective application of tech-
niques to simple as well as sophisticated tech-
niques. Error in measurement is affected by many
influencing factors. Compensation for error is pos-
sible up to a point.
When using any sophisticated equipment it is
essential that it is applicable to the purpose
required, is calibrated and has known tolerances
of error that can be accounted for. The terms
'validity', 'reliability' and 'repeatability' con-
tribute to a better understanding from any type of
equipment used. Different observers can affect
results and therefore strict protocols in practice are
essential to obtain the most helpful information.
The practitioner must therefore attempt, using
the type of knowledge highlighted in this
chapter, to minimise the potential for poor data
collection and erroneous interpretation that
could lead to false results.

-----------------------------------
REFERENCES
Baker N, Rayman G 1999 Clinical evaluation of Doppler
signals. The Diabetic Foot 2: 22-25
Boone D C, Stanley P A, Lin C M, Spence C, Baron C, Lee L
1978 Reliability of goniometric measurements. Physical
Therapy 58: 1355-1360
Booth J, Young M J 2000 Differences in the performance of
commercially available lO-G monofilaments. Diabetes
Care 23: 984-988
Bovens AMP M, van Baak M A, Vrencken J G PM, Wijnen
JAG, Verstappen F T J 1990 Variability and reliability of
joint measurements. American Orthopaedic Society for
Sports Medicine 18: 58-63
Bowling A 1991 Measuring health: a review of quality life
measurement scales. Open University Press, Buckingham
Calnan J S 1989 Handling the original idea. In: Mathie R T,
Taylor K M, Calnan J S (eds) Standardizing biomechanical
testing in sport. Human Kinetics Publishers, Champaign,
Illinois, p 87
Cassella J P, Ashford R L, Meakin J 2000 The effect of caffeine
on neurothesiometer readings. The Diabetic Foot 3: 18-20
Dainty D, Gagon M, Lagasse P, Orman R, Robertson G,
Sprigins 1987 Recommended procedures. In: Dainty D,
Norman R (eds) Standardizing biomechanical testing in
sport. Human Kinetics Publishers, Champaign, Illinois,
p 87
Diamond J E, Mueller M J, Delitto A, Sinacore D R 1989
Reliability of a diabetic foot examination. Physical
Therapy 69: 797-802
Freeman A C 1990 A study of the intertester and intratester
reliability in the measurement of resting calcaneal stance
position and neutral stance position. Australian Podiatrist
June: 10-13
Grasty M S 1999 Use of the hand-held Doppler to detect
peripheral vascular disease. The Diabetic Foot 2: 18-21
Griffith C J 1988 An investigation of the repeatability,
reliability and validity of clinical biomechanical
measurements in the region of the foot and ankle.
Project report No. 88/25. University of Westminster,
London
Hawes M R, Nachbauer W, Sovak D, Nigg B M 1992
Footprint parameters as a measure of arch height. Foot
and Ankle 13: 22-26
Hughes J, Pratt L, Linge K, Clark P, Klenerman L 1991
Reliability of pressure measurements: the EMED F
system. Clinical Biomechanics 6: 14-18
Johnson K W, Kassam M S 1985 Processing Doppler signals
and analysis of peripheral arterial waveforms problems
FURTHER READING
Edwards C R W 1990 The history and general principles
governing physical examination. In: Munro J S, Edwards
C R W (eds) Macleod's clinical examination. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 11
CLINICALMEASUREMENT 53
and solutions. In: Bernstein E F (ed) Non invasive
diagnostic techniques in vascular disease, 3rd edn.
C V Mosby, St Louis, ch 7, P 55
Lord M, Reynolds D P, Hughes J R 1992 Foot pressure
measurement: a review of clinical findings. Biomedical
Engineering 8: 283-293
Magee T R, Stanley P R, al Mufti R, Simpson L, Campell
W B 1992 Should we palpate foot pulses? Annals of the
Royal College of Surgeons of England 74: 166-168
Mathieson I, Upton D, Birchenough A 1999 Comparison of
footprint parameters from static and dynamic footprints.
The Foot 9: 145-149
Munro J S, Edwards C R W 1990 Macleod's initial
examination. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Payne C, Richardson M 2000 Change in the measurement of
neutral and relaxed calcaneal stance positions with
experience. The Foot 10: 81-83
Prudhomme P J, Curran M J 1999 A preliminary study of
the use of an algometer to investigate whether or not
patients benefit when podiatrists enucleate corns. The
Foot 9: 65-67
Rajbhandari S M, Harris N D, Sutton M et al1999 Digital
imaging: an accurate and easy method of measuring foot
ulcers. Diabetic Medicine 16: 234-243
Tesfaye S, Price D E 1997 Therapeutic approaches in
diabetic neuropathy and neuropathic pain. In: Boulton
A J M (ed) Diabetic neuropathy. Marius Press, Carnforth,
pp 159-181
Tollafield D R 1990 A reusable transducer system for
measuring foot pressures. A study of the reliability
in a commercial pressure pad. Department of Health
and Life Sciences, Coventry Polytechnic, Coventry,
pp 31-48
Urry 1999 Plantar pressure measurement sensors.
Measurement Science Technology 10: R16-R32
van Schie C H M, Abbott C A, Vileikyte L, Shaw J E, Hollis
S, Boulton A J M 1999 A comparative study of the
Podotrack, a simple semiquantitative plantar pressure
measuring device, and the optical pedobarograph in the
assessment of pressures under the diabetic foot. Diabetic
Medicine 16: 5-10
Vowden P 1999 Doppler ultrasound in the management of
the diabetic foot. The Diabetic Foot 2: 16-17
Wade D T 1992 Measurement in neurological rehabilitation.
Oxford Medical Publications, New York, p 20
West S, Barnett S 1999 Plantar pressure measurement: which
system? The Diabetic Foot 2: 3, 108-110
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 57
The purpose of the medical and social history 57

THE MEDICAL HISTORYAND SYSTEMS

The medical and social
ENQUIRY 59 history
The medical history 59
Current health status 59 1. Reilly
Past and current medication 60
Past medical history 62

The family hist~ry 62

Personal social history 63

Home circumstances 63
Occupation 63
Sports and hobbies 63
Foreign travel 64

The systems enquiry 64

The cardiovascularsystem 64 INTRODUCTION
The respiratory system 66
The alimentary system 67 A patient's medical and social history has a
The genitourinary system 68 number of implications for the diagnosis and
The central nervous system 70 management of lower limb problems. Conditions
The endocrine system 71
The locomotor system 73 affecting the lower limb may be caused by, or
have ramifications for, the patient's general
Summary 73 health and well-being. Taking a history is a
highly skilled exercise that requires practice to
achieve and maintain competency. Information
gleaned from a skilled enquiry is the first step
towards making the correct diagnosis, directing
further investigations and facilitating the formu-
lation of an appropriate treatment plan. A prop-
erly taken medical and social history is
concerned with the patient as a whole and not
just the lower limb complaint with which the
patient has presented. The approach outlined in
this chapter forms the basis of a holistic approach
to patient care.

The purpose of the medical and

social history
History taking is as important as any diagnostic
test or physical examination. It is the least expen-
sive of all investigations and time spent on
obtaining a thorough history is rarely wasted.
Diseases or abnormalities of the lower limb often
present with a history of signs and symptoms
which will allow the practitioner to make a pro-
visional diagnosis. Once a history has been
taken, physical examination and diagnostic tests

57
 58 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
can then be employed to confirm the diagnosis
and stage the severity of the condition.
An example of a provisional diagnosis that
can be obtained through history taking is
Morton's neuroma, which describes a painful
condition of the forefoot caused by a benign
enlargement of (usually) the third common
digital branch of the medial plantar nerve,
located between and often distal to, the third
and fourth metatarsal heads. The syndrome is a
mechanical entrapment neuropathy, with
degenerative changes resulting from stretch and
compression forces. Initially, the patient may
experience paraesthesia (pins and needles) or
numbness in the ball of the foot. In more
advanced cases, the pain may be sharp or throb-
bing, and classically radiates distally into adja-
cent toes. The pain is worse on exercise and is
relieved by rest and massage. By the time the
patient attends for consultation the symptoms
will often have been present for 4-6 months,
and be gradually worsening such that symp-
toms come on more quickly with exercise and
take longer to subside with rest. Such a history
points to a diagnosis before the practitioner
even needs to examine the patient and will indi-
cate what confirmatory tests need to be
employed. Diagnosis can then be confirmed by
point tenderness between the metatarsal heads
followed by the use of diagnostic nerve blocks.
A comprehensive history taking therefore
helps the practitioner to formulate a diagnosis
and develop and implement an effective man-
agement plan. An inadequate history of the
patient's health status may have the following
consequences.
1. The patient is placed at risk. Inappropriate
or unsafe treatment may be provided because of
inadequate knowledge of the patient's medical
history. Performing nail surgery on a patient
with a prosthetic joint may produce a bacter-
aemia, which could infect and then loosen the
joint replacement. Bacteraemia in patients with
a history of infective endocarditis or rheumatic
valvular disease may lead to bacterial growth
on the previously damaged heart valves or
endocardium. Invasive or operative treatment
on haemophiliacs or patients taking anticoagu-
lant therapy requires special consideration
because of the likelihood of very slow blood
clotting and haemorrhage. If drugs are pre-
scribed (or recommended) in the absence of a
detailed medical history an existing condition
may be exacerbated. For example, aspirin or
nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs)
may precipitate asthma attacks. Inadequate
knowledge of the patient's existing medication
could lead to adverse reactions with newly pre-
scribed drugs.
2. The practitioner is placed at risk. Inadequate
history taking may place the practitioner at risk
when handling tissue products. A history of jaun-
dice should alert the practitioner to the possibil-
ity of hepatitis, whereas a history of haemophilia,
blood transfusion, foreign travel or intravenous
drug use may place the patient and thus the prac-
titioner at risk from the human immuno-
deficiency virus (HIV) and hepatitis B.
3. Poor treatment outcomes. Treatment may
fail or cause the patient's presenting condition
to worsen because inadequate history taking
has prevented accurate diagnosis of the pre-
senting foot complaint. Swelling on the top of
the foot in a 39-year-old woman, which devel-
ops after an ankle sprain, may be nothing more
than inflammation-related oedema. If the prac-
titioner finds there is also a history of cigarette
smoking, use of the contraceptive pill and
recent immobilisation, the differential diagno-
sis would include deep vein thrombosis, a
potentially life-threatening condition that
requires quite different management to an
ankle sprain.
4. An increased risk of clinical emergencies.
Individuals may be placed at risk by certain
treatments, drugs or procedures that are nor-
mally considered routine. Adequate history
taking will identify those patients who have
previously developed adverse reactions.
Requesting an inappropriate antibiotic prescrip-
tion from a GP for a penicillin-sensitive patient
may result from poor history taking. Hyper-
sensitivity reactions to dressings, for example
zinc oxide strapping, or medicaments, for
example iodine, may be known to the patient
and should be noted.

THE MEDICAL HISTORY AND
SYSTEMS ENQUIRY
A systematic approach to history taking will
ensure that the practitioner covers all relevant
areas in the enquiry process. The medical history
and systems enquiry presented is based upon the
hospital assessment or clinical clerking system.
Findings recorded with this system (Table 5.1)
will determine the need for further clinical or lab-
oratory investigation and indicate the patient's
suitability for a range of treatments. Many
departments give their patients a health ques-
tionnaire (see Appendix, pp. 77-78) to complete
prior to seeing the practitioner again. The use of
questionnaires gives the patient time to consider
his answers and reduces the amount of time spent
during the consultation on taking a medical
history.
THE MEDICAL HISTORY
Current health status
Before history taking begins, the practitioner will
gain some impressions about the patient's
current health status from simple observation.
Patients should be observed as they enter the
consulting room. Diseases of nerves, muscle,
Table 5.1 The medical history and systems enquiry
Part 1. The medical history
Current health status
Past and current medication
Past medical history
Part 2. Family history
Part 3. Personal social history
Home circumstances
Occupation
Sports and hobbies
Foreign travel
Part 4. The systems enquiry - CRAGCEL
Cardiovascular system
Respiratory system
Alimentary system
Genitourinary system
Central nervous system
Endocrine system
Locomotor system
THE MEDICALAND SOCIAL HISTORY 59
bone and joints may all manifest in patients' gait
or posture. For example, upper and lower motor
neurone lesions may cause an ataxic gait where
coordination and balance are impaired. Patients
with acute foot or leg pain will walk with a limp
as they try to 'guard' the injured part. Patients
with chronic foot disorders will shuffle rather
than stride because a propulsive gait will cause
more forefoot pain. Gait disorders in children are
best visualised as the child walks into the room
to meet the practitioner; a child will often become
self-conscious when asked to walk on demand.
The consultation should begin with a hand-
shake as considerable information can be
gleaned from this simple contact. Wasting of the
thenar eminence and intrinsic musculature
of the hand occurs with rheumatoid arthritis
and with some genetic disorders, such as
Friedreich's ataxia and Charcot-Marie-Tooth
disease. Disorders of skin and nails may mani-
fest themselves in the hand: for example, psori-
asis and eczema may cause hypertrophy and
anhydrosis of the skin; pulmonary or cyanotic
heart disease may cause clubbed nails.
The patient's facial appearance and expres-
sion is also of interest to the practitioner. The
tense tired face of those in chronic pain will
appear similar to those suffering from depres-
sion. Parkinson's disease or long-term use of
psychotropic drugs will reduce facial expres-
sion, whereas the thyrotoxic patient, with char-
acteristic protruding eyes, will be striking for
their 'angry' appearance. Patients on long-term
steroid therapy can develop a 'moon' face.
Hypothyroidism will lead to a loss of hair from
the outer third of the eyebrows, baldness and
coarse, thickened facial skin. Acromegaly, an
excess of growth hormone due to a disorder of
the pituitary gland, will give rise to a heavy
'lantern' jaw. Cyanotic blue lips are a sign of
poor cardiac function. Small plaques of brown
lipid under the eyes, seen with hyperlipi-
daemia, are associated with atherosclerosis.
Obvious weight abnormalities affect the lower
limb and should be noted on first meeting the
patient. Obesity is associated with recalcitrant
heel pain and other postural symptoms. Seriously
underweight patients may be suffering from a
 60 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
range of systemic conditions or they could be
poorly nourished due to alcoholism, drug abuse
or anorexia nervosa. Fatigue and weight changes
are symptoms of many systemic illnesses and are
always worthy of note, especially if weight
change appears to be rapid. The following ques-
tions will reveal important information about the
patient's general health:
• Are you feeling well?
• Are you under the doctor or consultant for
any treatment currently?
• Do you sleep well at night?
• Do you feel tired during the day?
• Is your weight stable?
• For women, could you be pregnant?
In general, patients who are unwell are not
good candidates for involved procedures or
treatments that are likely to demand close com-
pliance on their behalf.
Past and current medication
Information about the patient's previous and
current drug therapy can provide useful infor-
mation about the patient's health. Patients
should be asked if they are currently taking, or
have taken in the past, any tablets or medicine or
used any ointments or creams that have been
Table 5.2 Side effects of drugs affecting the lower limb
Drug
Beta-blockers
Calcium channel blockers
Salbutamol
The contraceptive pill
Propanolol
Chloramphenicol
Colchicine
Metronidazole
Indomethacin
ACE inhibitors
4-quinolones
Corticosteroids
Aspirin
Frusemide
Nalidixic acid
prescribed by their doctor. It is not uncommon
for a patient to have used prescribed drugs for
many years with no clear understanding as to
why he has taken them. The practitioner should
refer to the British National Formulary (BNF) or
another pharmacological text if unfamiliar with
any drugs that the patient is taking.
Large doses or prolonged use of certain med-
ications can be associated with significant
ad verse drug reactions with relevance to the
lower limb. Most drugs produce several effects,
but the prescriber usually wants a patient to
experience only one (or a few) of them; the other
effects may be regarded as undesired. Although
most people use the term 'side effect', the term
'adverse drug reaction' is more appropriate for
effects that are undesired, unpleasant, noxious or
potentially harmful. Prednisolone, commonly
used in the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis, can
reduce skin thickness and impair wound healing.
Bendrofluazide, a useful diuretic for the treat-
ment of cardiac failure or hypertension, can
cause hyperuricaemia, which may result in gout-
like symptoms. Warfarin, an oral anticoagulant
used for the treatment and prophylaxis of venous
thrombosis and pulmonary embolism, increases
clotting time and has obvious implications if sur-
gical treatment is planned. Other examples of
adverse drug reaction can be found in Table 5.2.
Therapeutic use Side effects
Hypertension Coldness of extremities
Hypertension Ankle oedema
Asthma Peripheral vasodilatation
Contraception Increased risk of DVT
Hypertension Paraesthesia
Infection Peripheral neuritis
Gout Sensorimotor neuropathy
TB infection Sensorimotor neuropathy
Arthritis Sensorimotor neuropathy
Hypertension Muscle cramps
Infection Damage to epiphyseal cartilage
Inflammation Osteoporosis, skin atrophy
Pain management Purpura
Hypertension Bullous eruptions
Infection Bullous eruptions

Patients should also be asked if they are cur-
rently taking or have taken in the past any tablets
or medicine or used any ointments or creams
which they have purchased from the chemist.
Self-prescribed medication is of interest to the
practitioner not least because the quantities used
may be quite variable, with the possibility of
chronic overdosing. For example, repeatedly
exceeding the recommended daily dosage of vit-
amins A and D supplements may give rise to
ectopic calcification in tendon, muscle and peri-
articular tissue.
The practitioner should be alert to the possi-
bility of a patient developing an allergy or
adverse reaction to medications used during
treatment. In particular, details of any adverse
reactions, either by the patient or any member
of the patient's family, to previous local anaes-
thetic injections and other drugs (e.g. penicillin)
should be sought and explored. A type I hyper-
sensitivity reaction, which leads to anaphylactic
shock, is of most concern. It is not known why
some individuals are predisposed to anaphy-
laxis, though genetic mechanisms are certainly
involved since there is a strong familial disposi-
tion. In some individuals, contact with certain
allergens will stimulate the production of an
antibody of the immunoglobulin E (lgE) class,
which has the ability to adhere to mast cells in
tissues and basophils in the circulation. When
an individual sensitised in this way is exposed
on a second occasion to the allergen, the aller-
gen combines with the IgE antibodies on the
surface of the mast cells. This causes immediate
destruction of the mast cell, which releases its
contents, specifically histamine, serotonin,
platelet-activating factor and slow-reacting sub-
stance. If the exposure to the allergen is sys-
temic, hypotension, bronchiole constriction,
laryngeal oedema, swelling of the tongue,
urticaria, vomiting and diarrhoea may follow.
Fatal anaphylaxis is rare. When it does occur it
usually follows entrance of an antigenic drug
such as penicillin to the circulation of a sensi-
tised individual. Insect stings are also an impor-
tant cause of anaphylactic fatality.
Of particular concern to the podiatric practi-
tioner is the overdosage of local anaesthetics,
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 61
which can lead to convulsions as a result of
central nervous system stimulation. This may be
followed by a profound drop in blood pressure
and life-threatening cardiovascular system
depression. In such circumstances oxygen must
be administered to support the patient. The risk
of such a clinical emergency can be minimised by
adhering to the maximum safe dose values for
the various local anaesthetic agents and always
having oxygen available. A local type I hypersen-
sitivity reaction may be caused by local anaes-
thetic agents. The skin around the area of the
injection shows an immediate, localised inflam-
matory reaction.
Use of all recreational drugs should be
recorded. Amphetamines, like many mood stimu-
lants, will have a vasoconstrictive effect. The use
of injectable drugs places the patient at risk of
hepatitis and HIV. Long-term or heavy use of
tobacco can affect wound healing due to the
immediate vasoconstrictive effect of nicotine as
well as the long-term effect of increased plate-
let adhesiveness and atherosclerosis. Tobacco
smokers are also at greater risk of bronchitis,
asthma and lung cancer. Heavy alcohol consump-
tion can affect the peripheral sensation, immune
response, postoperative wound healing and the
metabolism of local anaesthetics, as well as having
implications for treatment compliance. Alcohol
consumption is generally measured in units. One
unit of alcohol is equivalent to one glass of wine, a
single measure of spirits or half a pint of beer.
More than four units of alcohol per day is note-
worthy. Unfortunately, it is likely that those
patients abusing alcohol are least likely to be
forthcoming about their alcoholism. Where
alcohol abuse is suspected, questions should be
asked in a permissive manner:
• Although you may not be drinking a lot now,
what about in the past?
• Was there ever a time when you were
drinking more heavily?
The patient should also be asked about dry
retching in the morning, as this is a symptom of
alcohol withdrawal. Drinking before 10 a.m. is an
important finding, as it is associated with chronic
alcoholism.
 62 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Past medical history
The past medical history consists of information
about previous lower limb problems and the
treatment received as well as details about any
problems that have affected the patient's general
health. The nature of previous podiatric treat-
ment, the name of the practitioner, details of rel-
evant investigations such as X-rays, and the
patient's view of the treatment's success should
be recorded. This information may prevent the
repetition of tests or treatments which have pre-
viously been ineffective. The patient should then
be asked:
• Have you been off work due to illness for
more than 1 week in the last 6 months?
• Have you ever been admitted to hospital?
• Have you ever had an operation?
• Have you ever been under the care of a
consultant or a hospital specialist?
• Did you have any major childhood illnesses?
Hospital records can provide this information
but they are not always available. These ques-
tions will hopefully prompt the patient into
recollecting any previous incidents of illness or
surgery. Questioning should follow a sequence
that moves from the patient's childhood to the
present.
Hospitalisations for operations or injuries
should be recorded and any complications
noted (Case history 5.1). In females, a particu-
larly common procedure is hysterectomy, which
has implications for the lower limb in that the
effect on hormone balance can lead to prema-
Case history 5. 1
A 23-year-old secretary presents with pain in the first
metatarsophalangeal joint. The pain is aching in
nature severe and worse on exercise. The range of
motio~ of the joint is reduced, with painfUl crepitus
evident on dorsiflexion. Further enquiry elicits a
history of trauma from a fall in a horse-riding accident
2 years ago.
Diagnosis: Traumatic arthritis. An X-ray revealed a
compression fracture to the head of the first
metatarsal, which has predisposed degeneration of
the joint.
ture osteoporosis. This may manifest clinically
as vertebral collapse, leading to spinal defor-
mity and possibly causing referred neural com-
pression symptoms. Injuries may often appear
to be unrelated to the patient's presenting com-
plaint but it must be remembered that the lower
limb functions as one unit and if one component
of the unit is damaged, it can lead to compensa-
tions elsewhere in the lower limb. If a patient is
still under the care of a hospital consultant it is
prudent to inform the consultant before any
treatment is given that may affect other body
systems.
THE FAMILY HISTORY
A pedigree chart to record details of major ill-
nesses and lower limb problems of the immedi-
ate family may be used (Fig. 5.1). Many
cardiovascular, alimentary, neurological and
endocrine disorders can be inherited. Enquiring
RH\A
A\W
Aged Died heart attack
71 aged 62
Hallux valgus
0 MALE
0 FEMALE
~ PATIENT
A'o/V ALIVE & WELL
• DEAD
Figure 5.1 The pedigree chart.

about the medical history of the immediate
family may reveal a predisposition to a range of
systemic diseases, a good example of which is
non-insulin-dependent diabetes. It can also be of
value to record the cause of death of immediate
family. Certain lower limb pathologies can be
inherited or appear to have a familial predisposi-
tion, especially diseases that are neurological
in nature such as Friedreich's ataxia and
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease. The diagnosis of a
patient presenting with difficulties in walking
will be affected by a positive family history of a
condition such as these. All forms of spina bifida
should be noted even if the problem has been
labelled as spina bifida occulta (impaired gait,
pes cavus and plantar ulceration have been
found to appear late in cases of spina bifida
occulta).
The ethnic origin of the patient should also be
noted. Sickle cell anaemia may affect people of
African or West Indian descent. Thalassaemia,
another haemolytic anaemia, can affect patients
from Mediterranean and Southeast Asian
regions.
The patient should be asked if anyone else in
the family has suffered from leg or foot problems.
This information will help to determine the
inherited nature of any foot condition and, in the
case of pes cavus, hallux valgus and lesser digit
deformity, could indicate the degree of severity
that the patient's presenting condition may even-
tuallyachieve.
PERSONAL SOCIAL HISTORY
Home circumstances
It is important to assess the patient's home situ-
ation. With some types of treatment patients are
required to reduce their activity level to a
minimum, change dressings or administer
treatments at home. In the case of surgical treat-
ment the practitioner must establish who is
going to transport the patient to and from
surgery and who is going to assist him through
the immediate postoperative recovery period.
Lack of home support may rule out certain
forms of treatment.
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 63
A 27-year-old female sales executive attended the
clinic with heel pain. The pain was on the
anteromedial aspect of the plantar heel pad and had
, been present for some time. Point tenderness at the
origin of the medial band of the plantar fascia was
elicited. Examination revealed a hyperpronatory foot
type.
Diagnosis: Plantar fasciitis. However, the patient
was required to wear fashionable court shoes for her
employment. She was unwilling to compromise on the
style of footwear she wore and provision of a suitable
orthotic was impossible. The patient was
subsequently referred for cortisone injections.
Occupation
A patient's occupation may be a contributory
cause of the lower limb problem and may
influence what treatment can be given (Case
history 5.2). Some patients may experience par-
ticular difficulties in taking time from work to
attend for treatment. The nature of the work
should be determined and special footwear
requirements should be noted. The types of
surface that the patient stands and walks on
during the day can be exciting factors. Bare con-
crete floors will exacerbate chilblains, whereas
patients whose occupation involves standing on
ladders will often suffer from chronic medial
longitudinal arch pain.
Sports and hobbies
Active sports people may make the association
between their sport and a lower limb problem:
those who participate in occasional sporting
activities and hobbies may not. Patients who par-
ticipate in infrequent sporting activities may not
think to inform the practitioner of these activi-
ties. However, these patients are often more
prone to injury because they are often not fit and
do not follow a warm-up and warm-down
regimen. These patients are more likely to develop
hamstring or calf muscle injury due to poor flexi-
bility. Details of any sporting hobby should,
therefore, be sought from the patient. The assess-
ment of the sports injury patient is considered in
detail in Chapter 15.
 64 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Foreign travel
Details of foreign travel should be recorded in
case the patient has acquired an infection. In par-
ticular, travel to tropical countries and any foot
injuries sustained while walking barefoot should
be recorded (Case history 5.3).
THE SYSTEMS ENQUIRY
The systems enquiry seeks to discover if the
patient suffers from any systemic conditions that
may affect the patient's lower limb problem and
unearth any signs and symptoms, which the
patient has not complained of spontaneously.
The systems enquiry may reveal significant symp-
tomatology which the practitioner is either inex-
perienced in or unqualified to diagnose. In such
circumstances the patient should be informed that
a second opinion is recommended. The subse-
quent referral for a second opinion should be seen
as part of the patient's overall treatment plan.
All the body systems are worked through in a
set order, which can be remembered using the
acronym 'CRAGCEL' (see Table 5.1). The systems
enquiry involves asking questions that will seem,
to the patient, to be quite unrelated to the lower
limb problem. It is important, before the enquiry
begins, that patients are advised that the purpose
of the questions is to ensure that there are no
Case history 5.3
A 23-year-old male attended clinic following 6 months
working as a volunteer in India. For some of the time
he walked around barefoot and recalls occasionally
having to remove splinters and small stones from his
sole. He presents with a pruritic, inflamed lesion with
a central black dot, under the free edge of the
hallucal toe nail of his left foot.
Diagnosis: A tropical parasitic infection of the
jigger or sand flea, Tunga penetrans. Originally a
native of the New World, it is now widely
disseminated in Africa and Asia. A fertilised female,
gaining access to human skin, burrows beneath the
surface where it becomes engorged with blood. The
site of penetration is usually found under the toe nail
of the barefooted patient, but can occur on the plantar
aspect of the foot. The central black dot is the flea's
abdominal segments. Treatment is by incision and
prophylactic antisepsis.
general health problems that may be causing the
lower limb condition or that may influence the
type of treatment considered.
The cardiovascular system
A history of cardiovascular disease should be
taken with respect to systemic, peripheral and
haematological disease states, followed up by a
review of symptomatology. To determine the
presence of systemic cardiovascular disease the
patient should be asked if they have ever had:
• angina
• a heart attack
• high blood pressure
• heart failure
• irregular heart rhythms
• rheumatic fever.
Ischaemic heart disease refers to two clinical
syndromes, angina pectoris and myocardial
infarction (MI). Angina occurs as a result of ath-
erosclerosis of the arteries to the myocardium
and often coexists with atherosclerosis of the
arteries to the lower limb. MI is a gross necrosis
of the myocardium due to interruption of the
blood supply to the area. Hypertension is a risk
factor for many life-threatening conditions such
as MI, renal failure and cerebral vascular acci-
dents (strokes). An increase in blood pressure is
usually asymptomatic and many hypertensives
do not realise they have the condition until they
develop symptoms (transient ischaemic attacks)
or routine screening reveals a diastolic blood
pressure above 90 mmHg. Practitioners should
routinely take their patients' blood pressure, not
least because the stress caused by treatment or
examination may provoke a clinical emergency
in an uncontrolled hypertensive.
Congestive heart failure (CHF) results from the
inability of the heart to sufficiently supply oxy-
genated blood to the tissues. Causes include
valvular heart disease, myocardial disease and
hypertension (Case history 5.4). Arrhythmias
may present as bradycardia (slow heartbeat) or
tachycardia (fast heartbeat) with varying degrees
of irregularity. Certain rhythms such as ventricu-
lar tachycardia predispose to cardiac arrest.

Case history 5.4
A 65-year-old female patient attended the podiatry
clinic complaining of weak muscles in her legs. She
had noticed the weakness for some time, stating
that if her symptoms continued to deteriorate she
would have to give up her job as a school
playground supervisor. Further questioning revealed
that her weakness could more accurately be
described as fatigue and heaviness of her legs
walking to and from work. The patient had also
noticed that climbing stairs brought upon a tight
squeezing pain in her chest. Sitting down relieved
the pain but prolonged sitting tended to make her
ankles swell.
Diagnosis: Congestive heart failure. This condition
can have a direct effect upon the ability of the
muscles to function under strain.
Rheumatic fever is a febrile disease occurring as
a sequel to group A haemolytic streptococcal
infections. It is characterised by inflammatory
lesions of connective tissue structures, especially
of the heart and blood vessels, and predisposes
to bacterial endocarditis.
Having recorded disease states of which the
patient is aware, enquire further about any sys-
temic cardiovascular symptoms. Ask the patient
if they:
• suffer from chest pains
• are ever short of breath
• experience palpitations
• find that their ankles swell
• are prone to fainting.
The most important cardiovascular symptom
to elicit is chest pain because of the range
of pathologies responsible for its occurrence.
The differential diagnosis includes MI, angina
pectoris, pneumonia, pericarditis and oesopha-
geal reflux. The pain of angina is tight and pres-
sure-like, precipitated by exercise and relieved
by rest, and usually lasts for only a few minutes.
The pain of an MI is similar in nature but is
more intense, lasting from 30 minutes to
3 hours.
Dyspnoea (shortness of breath) may occur as
a result of pulmonary oedema. In CHF there is
an inadequacy in the supply of oxygenated
blood. To compensate for this, first the heart rate
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 65
and then the volume of blood filling the left ven-
tricle increases. Because it takes longer to fill the
left ventricle, the pressure in the whole cardiac
pulmonary system 'backs up', causing pul-
monary congestion, reduced blood gas
exchange and eventually pulmonary oedema.
Pulmonary oedema and shortness of breath are,
therefore, signs and symptoms of left-sided
heart failure.
Right-sided heart failure is almost always asso-
ciated with left-sided heart failure and gives rise
to peripheral oedema. The right side of the heart
can no longer deal with the volume of venous
blood returning to the heart for transportation to
the lungs and a 'back up' of pressure occurs in
the systemic circulation, resulting in transuda-
tion of fluid into the peripheral connective tissue.
Gravity will force most of the transudate to
collect bilaterally in the feet and ankles. Initially,
the patient will notice that the swelling reduces
at night when the legs are recumbent. In chronic
right-sided heart failure, the peripheral oedema
will eventually be infiltrated by fibrous tissue
that cannot be reduced by elevation.
Syncope (fainting) is a transient loss of con-
sciousness. Cardiac disease such as arrhythmias
and aortic stenosis can cause syncope by decreas-
ing the cerebral blood supply. Other less-specific
systemic cardiac symptoms include fatigue and
decreased exertional tolerance.
To determine the presence of peripheral vascu-
lar disease the patient should be asked if they
have ever had:
• a thrombosis or blood clot
• night cramps
• an ulcer on their leg or foot
• varicose veins and/ or surgery.
Whereas cardiac problems may affect lower
limb perfusion, peripheral vascular disease can
occur in the absence of cardiac symptoms. The
general enquiry may have already revealed
sleeping problems, but the cardiovascular system
investigation should determine whether sleep
disturbance is due to cramping pain in the legs.
Nocturnal cramps are a consequence of increased
permeability of the microcirculation that accom-
panies the warming of the legs under bedding. In
 66 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

the presence of any impairment of the venous
system, toxic metabolites will accumulate,
increasing carbon dioxide tension while lowering
oxygen levels. Muscle ischaemia follows, mani-
festing as a painful tautness of muscle fibre.
Also enquire further about any peripheral vas-
cular symptoms. Ask the patient if they:
• get cramp at night
• get muscle cramps while walking
• suffer from chilblains
• notice their feet change colour if it is
particularly cold.
All the above factors are signs and symptoms
of peripheral vascular disease. Assessment of the
vascular status of the lower limb is covered in
detail in Chapter 6.
To determine the presence of haematological
disease patients should be asked if they have:
• anaemia
• haemophilia
• any other blood disorder.
Haematological disorders should be consid-
ered. Anaemia occurs when red blood cells or
haemoglobin content decreases because of blood
loss, impaired production or excessive destruc-
tion of red blood cells. Tissue hypoxia results
from anaemia and this in turn leads to cardiovas-
cular and pulmonary compensations. Clinical
symptoms depend upon the severity and dura-
tion of the anaemia. Severe anaemia is associated
with weakness, vertigo, headaches, tiredness,
gastrointestinal complaints and CHF.
Sickle cell disease is an inherited condition that
can affect persons of African or West Indian
descent. Those who inherit the gene from both
patients have more than a 75% chance of devel-
oping the condition. Sickle cell individuals are
prone to ulceration around the malleoli, a com-
plaint more characteristic of older people with
venous insufficiency. In most cases, patients will
know whether they have sickle cell anaemia, as
from early childhood the digits of the hands and
feet tend to swell and are very painful. The use of
tourniquets carries an increased risk of complica-
tion. A tourniquet causes relative anoxia and this
in turn causes occlusion in small vessels due to
changes in the haemodynamic qualities of red
blood cells, which may lead to small vessel
infarction and possibly digital gangrene.
The respiratory system
To determine the presence of known systemic
respiratory disease the patient should be asked if
they have ever had (Table 5.3):
• asthma
• chronic bronchitis
• emphysema
• pulmonary embolism.
Asthma presents as a dry, wheezing cough
accompanied by dyspnoea. Exercise, infection or

Table 5.3 The clinical features and implications of respiratory diseases

Disease Clinical features Clinical implications

Asthma Dyspnoea, wheezing, cough Attacks may be provoked by exercise,

Chronic bronchitis
Emphysema
Pulmonary embolism
Cough with expectoration of sputum for
at least 3 months in 2 successive years
Dyspnoea with varying degrees of exertion
Pleuritic chest pain and haemoptysis
infection or stress. May be treated with
long-term corticosteroid therapy
Commonly a history of cigarette smoking
carries an accompanying risk of peripheral
atherosclerosis
Sufferer will have limited exercise potential;
in time will lead to right-sided heart failure
and peripheral oedema
A life-threatening condition which may follow
prolonged postoperative bed rest

stress may provoke attacks. Patients may be
treated with long-term corticosteroid therapy.
Chronic bronchitis is associated with a history of
cigarette smoking and peripheral atherosclerosis.
Emphysema causes dyspnoea with varying
degrees of exertion. In time the sufferer will
develop right-sided heart failure and peripheral
oedema. Pulmonary emboli may cause pleuritic
chest pain and haemoptysis. It is a life-threaten-
ing condition that may follow prolonged post-
operative bed rest.
Having recorded disease states of which the
patient is aware, enquire further about any respi-
ratory symptoms. Ask the patient if they have:
• shortness of breath
• chest pain related to breathing or exercise
• a cough
• coughing up of blood.
Dyspnoea is one of the most common symp-
toms of respiratory disease. Respiratory illness
associated with pulmonary inflammation and
pressure on the pleural surfaces will lead to chest
pain. The pleura (the serous membrane covering
of the lungs and thoracic cavity) is richly
endowed with sensory nerve endings.
Stimulation of these nerves will cause a knife-like
pain, which is intensified by deep breathing.
Pulmonary hypertension and infection are com-
monly associated with chest pain. Coughing is a
protective mechanism employed to clear foreign
material or mucus. The causes of coughing can
be:
• mechanical, e.g. inhalation of dust
• inflammatory, e.g. mucous membrane
oedema
• non-pulmonary, e.g. pulmonary embolism
• malignancy, e.g. dry cough
• drug-induced, e.g. ACE inhibitors.
The coughing up of bloody sputum is always
considered an abnormal finding. Massive
haemoptysis is a life-threatening condition
which follows pulmonary neoplasm, mitral
stenosis, pulmonary hypertension or tuberculo-
sis (Case history 5.5).
A social and environmental history may also
be relevant. The patient should be asked if they:
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 67
Case history 5.5
A 19-year-old male presents with poor hygiene and
digital ulcers on his left foot. The ulcers arose from
neglected chilblains. A social history reveals that he
has been homeless since leaving school some years
ago. A cough of 2 months' duration is noted with the
sputum yellow in colour and tinged with blood,
indicating hasmoptysls.
Diagnosis: Tuberculosis. A chest X-ray revealed a
number of calcified granulomas and a small cavity
consistent with a tuberculosis infection.
• have ever had asthma or an allergy to any
airborne substances such as house dust or
pollen
• use any chemicals at work
• are exposed to chemical vapours
• live or work with people who smoke
cigarettes.
The alimentary system
Gastrointestinal (GI) disorders are extremely
common and have many implications for the
lower limb and its treatment (Case history 5.6).
To determine the presence of GI disease the
patient should be asked if they have ever had:
• any diet or bowel problems
• toothache or gum swelling
• indigestion or stomach ache
• stomach problems, e.g. upset stomach after
taking aspirin.
Dental disease presents a bacteraemic risk,
gastric ulcers will contraindicate NSAIDs and
analgesic preparations, whereas liver disease will
impair metabolism and may affect the safe denat-
uration of many drugs, including local anaes-
thetics.
The enquiry should start with questions about
the mouth and then progress to the stomach,
intestines and bowel (Case history 5.6). The
patient should be asked if he is currently suffer-
ing from toothache or gum disease. This ques-
tion will establish the presence of any potential
nidus of infection in the oral cavity. Information
about previous dental care may reveal that the
 68 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Case history 5.6
A 32-year-old male presents with low back pain that
was worse at night or after inactivity. He also suffered
from heel pain and neck pain, a loss of appetite and
had moderate weight loss. Examination revealed joint
pain and swelling in the shoulders, knees and ankles.
Diagnosis: Ankylosing spondylitis. This condition
was confirmed by X-rays and blood tests. It is a
progressive inflammatory disease that usually affects
young adult males. There is often a positive family
history with 95% of patients carrying the HLA-B27
antigen.
patient has to take antibiotics before undergoing
dental treatment. A known side effect of the
NSAID class of drugs is gastrointestinal irrita-
tion. This is significant when these drugs are
used for prolonged periods. Whereas the major-
ity of people will suffer occasional indigestion, a
history of dyspepsia provoked by small doses of
alcohol or analgesics will indicate gastrointesti-
nal sensitivity.
The character of the abdominal pain, its loca-
tion, precipitating factors and pain radiation
should be considered. The pain from gastritis is
burning or gnawing in character and is localised
to the epigastrium but may radiate to the back.
Gastritis pain is precipitated by ingestion of
alcohol, aspirin or fasting for long periods. Food
consumption will rapidly relieve the pain.
Chronic gastritis will eventually progress to
peptic ulcerative disease. Pain arising from the
biliary tract leads to a full or cramping sensation
in the upper quadrant just behind the right rib
cage. It will occasionally radiate to the right
shoulder, will not be relieved by ingestion of
food, and may be exacerbated by the ingestion of
fatty food.
The commoner forms of liver disease are rarely
accompanied by specific abdominal pain,
although in most hepatic conditions the liver
may be tender and enlarged on examination. A
history of jaundice is common with most liver
diseases. Jaundice is a syndrome characterised
by deposition of yellow bile pigment in the skin,
conjunctivae, mucous membranes and urine.
Liver disease is significant when the use of amide
local anaesthetics (e.g. prilocaine, mepivacaine,
bupivacaine) is being considered. If the liver is
damaged and its function impaired by cirrhosis,
first-pass metabolism will not operate effectively.
First-pass metabolism refers to the removal of
drugs from the hepatic portal circulation and
their subsequent metabolism in the liver. Certain
drugs, for example the opioid antagonist nalox-
one, are almost completely eliminated by first-
pass metabolism. If first-pass metabolism is
impeded, an increase in circulating concentra-
tions of the drug will follow. The maximum safe
dose that can be administered will have to be
reduced in these cases.
Chronic alcohol abuse can also increase the
activity of the liver's mixed function phase I
oxidase enzymes, which are responsible for the
metabolism of drugs such as paracetamol, war-
farin, barbiturates and benzodiazepines. This
increase in enzyme activity and drug metabolism
will significantly reduce the therapeutic effect of
these drugs. Combined alcohol and drug inges-
tion, however, will have the immediate effect of
enhancing the therapeutic effect of oral hypogly-
caemics, benzodiazepines and tricyclic antide-
pressants, which could produce potentially
life-threatening effects.
A history of regular nausea, vomiting or dys-
phagia (difficulty in swallowing) will always
demand an explanation. These clinical features
may be due to central nervous system problems
(e.g. intracranial tumours, meningitis), endocrine
disorders (e.g. myxoedema, diabetic ketoacidosis)
or systemic or gastrointestinal tract infections.
Constipation and diarrhoea are common com-
plaints that are usually benign and self-limiting.
Where there is an underlying disease the problem
is usually accompanied by fever, severe pain and
blood loss. Although not specifically relevant to
the lower limb, a history of altered bowel habit is
important when making an assessment of the
patient's general health and can influence the type
of drugs which may be used.
The genitourinary system
The kidneys regulate the body's electrolyte and
fluid balance. This has implications for lower
 THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 69
---------------

limb circulation and oedema and can delay

wound healing. For example, polyuria (excessive
urination) is associated with diabetes, cardiac
failure or cortisol deficiency, all of which will
affect healing. To determine the presence of
genitourinary disease the patient should be
asked if they:
• have any waterworks problems (such as
pain)
• have their sleep disturbed by the need to go
Jr----i-\---I-- RENAL ANGLE

to the toilet
• have had any sexually transmitted infections.
The practitioner should use the systems
enquiry and medical and social history to deter-
mine whether the patient is in a high-risk group
for blood-borne infections, such as hepatitis B or
AIDS.
Renal pain is a symptom of gross structural
disease of the kidney, such as kidney stones or a
blood clot passing down the ureter. Infection or
malignancy may also cause pain in the area of the Figure 5.2 The renal angle.
renal angle (Fig. 5.2) as well as more anteriorly in
the abdomen. Leg and ankle swelling is an
important finding, which may be related to that renal dysfunction is not the only cause of
kidney disease and indeed could be the first clin- ankle oedema. Breathlessness on exertion,
ical sign of a renal problem. Renal dysfunction weight loss, nausea and vomiting also occur in
that leads to a massive loss of protein into the renal failure and may further confuse the clinical
urine will disrupt normal capillary haemodynam- picture. A symptom that is renal-specific is dis-
ics, causing reduced transudation of fluid. Fluid turbed micturition (Table 5.4). Frequency of uri-
will pool in the tissues rather than returning back nation is dependent upon fluid intake and
into the capillary circulation. Oedema of the specific drugs within food and drink. Most
dependent limb will result, particularly around people urinate 4-6 times every 24 hours, mostly
the ankles. However, it should be remembered in the daytime.

Table 5.4 Causes of abnormal micturition

Abnormality Definition Causes

Polyuria Frequent micturition Diabetes mellitus, diminution in bladder's effective filling capacity
due to infection, foreign bodies, stones or tumour
Dysuria Painful urination Irritation and inflammation of bladder or urethra usually due to
bacterial infection
Nocturia Urination during the night May reflect early renal disease. Decrease in concentrating
capacity may be associated with cardiac or hepatic failure
Oliguria Straining, decrease in force Obstruction distal to the bladder. In men most commonly due to
and calibre of urinary stream prostatic obstruction
Haematuria Blood in urine Haematuria without pain: renal or prostatic disease, bladder or
kidney tumour. With pain: ureteral stone or bladder infection
 70 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
The patient should be asked if he experiences
any pain or problems passing water and whether
his sleep is disturbed by the need to pass water.
A positive response to these questions requires
further investigation as the kidneys may affect
bone metabolism as well as blood pressure and
water regulation.
Sexually transmitted infections
Reiter's disease, gonorrhoea, HIV and syphilis
are all sexually transmitted infections (Case
history 5.7). Practitioners investigating a lower
limb complaint may find it difficult to enquire
about sexually related problems (Table 5.5).
However, as these conditions can lead to an
array of lower limb symptoms, questions about
them must be included in the systems enquiry.
After enquiring about the urinary system, the
patient should be asked if he has ever had any
sexually transmitted infections, skin problems
or discharge.
The central nervous system
Diseases of the nervous system may cause pain
in the lower limb, deformity or gait abnormali-
ties. Comprehensive history taking is essential
(Case history 5.8). To determine the presence of
CNS disease the patient should be asked if they
have had:
• any neuromuscular disorder
• a head injury
• a stroke
• epilepsy.
Record details of a family history of epilepsy or
neuromuscular disease. General neurological
Case history 5.7
A 42-year-old male attended clinic with jaundice. He
complained of a fever and malaise, nausea and
vomiting. His urine was tested which was found to be
dark in colour. He had a 'home' tattoo made by his
previous girl friend, who had been an intravenous
drug user.
Diagnosis: Hepatitis C. This is an inflammation of
the liver caused by the hepatitis C virus.
Table 5.5 Lower limb signs and symptoms associated with
sexually transmitted diseases
Disease Lower limb signs and symptoms
Reiter's Asymmetric arthralgia of hip, knee,
ankle and metatarsophalangeal
joint. 'Sausage toe'. Keratoderma
blenhorragica
HIV Kaposi's sarcoma - a Widespread
skin or mucous membrane lesion
appearing as a pink or red macule
or violaceous plaques and nodules
on the face, trunk and limbs. May
appear wart-like
Gonococcal arthritis Acute joint pain, swelling and
stiffness. Usually accompanied by
urethritis, dysuria and haemorrhagic
vesicular skin lesions. Serious joint
damage may result if the condition
is not properly treated
symptoms may be significant. The patient should
be asked if he suffers from frequent headaches.
While stress-related headaches, migraine and
extracranial causes such as cervical spondylosis
account for the majority of headaches, cranial
arteritis is an important cause in the elderly.
Brain tumours (slow onset) and subarachnoid
bleeding (sudden onset) must be considered in
severe headaches.
Fainting, dizziness and visual disturbance may
occur in association with headaches. The basis
for most fainting episodes is inadequate blood
supply to the brain and is commonly cardiac or
cerebrovascular in origin. Anaemia, hypogly-
caemia and emotional stress can also explain a
temporary loss of consciousness.
Case history 5.8
A 40-year-old factory worker presented with bilateral
weakness in his legs. A history revealed that the
weakness occurred intermittently but was not related
to exercise or activity. Four years earlier he has
suffered from blurred vision in his right eye and
transient bouts of tingling in his right arm. He had not
sought a medical opinion for these symptoms for fear
of losing his driving licence. The podiatrist suspected
a progressive CNS disorder.
Diagnosis: Multiple sclerosis. The patient was
subsequently referred for a neurological assessment.

Having recorded disease states of which the
patient is aware, enquire further about any
peripheral neurological symptoms. Ask the
patient if they:
• ever get shooting pains in their arms or legs
• find their hands or feet go numb
• have ever noticed any weakness or
sluggishness of the arms or legs.
Causes of peripheral neuropathy are sum-
marised in Table 5.6. Numbness and paraesthesia,
loss of muscle bulk or weakness are significant
findings. If the patient's response is positive,
peripheral neuropathy, which can result from a
range of causes, should be considered. It is essen-
tial to establish the course of the symptoms and
consider them in the light of the patient's age.
Slow progressive weakness of the limbs over a
period of many years in a young person may
point to muscular dystrophy, whereas a more
acute onset may indicate a demyelinating disor-
der or spinal cord compression.
The significance of some symptoms in the neu-
rological enquiry will be very difficult to inter-
pret because the enquiry relies on the patient's
subjective account (Case history 5.8). However,
inadequate assessment of the neurological basis
Table 5.6 Causes of peripheral neuropathy
Nerve root compression of the sciatic or femoral nerve
arising from L4, 5, S1, 2, 3 and T1, 2, L1, 2, 3, 4 respectively
Distal nerve compression of the popliteal, common peroneal
and anterior tibial nerve
Hereditary neurological disease - Charcot-Marie-Tooth
disease, Friedreich's ataxia
Endocrine - diabetes mellitus, hypothyroidism, hypocalcaemia
Chronic alcohol abuse
Nutritional disorders - pernicious anaemia, thiamine or
vitamin 8 6 deficiencies
Renal failure
Systemic disorders - rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus
erythematosus, vasculitis, sarcoidosis, amyloidosis
Infections - tuberculosis, AIDS, leprosy, syphilis
Tumour - bronchogenic carcinoma, myeloma, lymphoma
Toxic agents - carbon monoxide, solvents, industrial
poisons, lead
Medication - isoniazid, metronidazole, nitrofurantoin
THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 71
Case history 5.9
A 40-year-old male steelworker sought the opinion of a
podiatrist when he began to suffer from corns on the
dorsal aspect of both fifth proximal interphalangeal
joints. The patient reported that his industrial boots no
longer fitted properly and joked that he must still be
growing as his protective headwear and gloves didn't
feel quite right. Further questioning revealed a
tendency to sweat profusely even when sitting quietly,
regular headaches and joint pains. His wife had
remarked that his features had become more rugged.
Diagnosis: Acromegaly. A urine sample
demonstrated glycosuria and his blood pressure was
elevated to 190/110 mmHg.
of foot pathology can lead to inappropriate treat-
ment through missed diagnosis. Neurological
assessment of the lower limb is covered in detail
in Chapter 7.
The endocrine system
Disorders of the endocrine system may be
divided into those conditions which present rela-
tively frequently (and are of regular concern) and
those which are rare (Case history 5.9). To deter-
mine the presence of endocrine disease the
patient should be asked if they have had:
• sugar diabetes
• thyroid problems.
In the assessment of the lower limb, diabetes
mellitus, thyroid disease, growth disorders,
obesity and problems associated with the
menopause are particularly relevant. Routine
questioning about endocrine symptomatology
should begin with asking the patient if they:
• ever suffer from a thirst that they find hard to
quench no matter how much they drink
• have a stable weight.
Diabetes is a disease of either insulin deficiency
or peripheral resistance to insulin action. Insulin
produced by the beta cells of the pancreas
decreases blood glucose by inhibiting glycogen
breakdown and facilitates the entry of glucose
into tissue cells. When peripheral tissues fail to
utilise glucose, blood glucose levels rise and
glucose is excreted in the urine. Because the body
 72 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
will continue to need a source of energy, home-
ostasis provokes breakdown of body fat and
muscle tissue. This process of 'accelerated starva-
tion' can be quite abrupt in children, causing
anorexia, nausea, coma and, if untreated, death.
In older patients it is more gradual and indeed the
first presenting symptom may be one of the com-
plications of the disease.
Thirst, polyuria and weight loss are the three
most common symptoms of diabetes. These three
features may also occur with other conditions
such as diabetes insipidus, hypercalcaemia and
renal failure (Table 5.7). The thirst associated
with diabetes is a result of the osmotic diuretic
effect of glucose - although it is difficult to be
precise as to what is excessive thirst. Increased
volume and frequency of urination will lead to a
corresponding increase in fluid intake. The
patient is often aware that sleep is regularly dis-
turbed by the need to urinate and a history of
polyuria should always be followed up by
glucose testing of the urine. Although diabetics
often believe that their decreasing weight is due
to polyuria, it is in fact a result of accelerated fat
and protein catabolism.
The thyroid hormones tri- and tetra-iodothyro-
nine (T3 and T4) are essential for normal growth
and development and have many effects on body
Table 5.7 Causes of thirst and polyuria
Cause Physiological reason
Diabetes mellitus Osmotic diuretic effect of glucose
Diabetes insipidus Kidney disease prevents normal
concentrating of urine or pituitary
gland disorders cause a
deficiency of antidiuretic hormone
Hypercalcaemia Result of hyperparathyroidism
where hypercalcaemia causes
reversible impairment of renal
concentrating mechanism
Hypocalcaemia Often a side effect of diuretic
therapy it leads to impaired
concentrating ability in the kidney
Excess salt intake Osmotic diuretic effect of
increased sodium level
Renal failure Normal concentrating function of
kidney lost
metabolism, the most obvious being to stimulate
the basal metabolic rate. In thyroid disease there
is either inadequate or excessive production of
thyroid hormones. The clinical features of hyper-
thyroidism are listed in Table 5.8.
Clinical features of hyperthyroidism such as
muscle weakness, tachycardia, weight loss and
sleep disturbance may have already been picked
up from the systems enquiry. Other features
associated with the condition may not have been
highlighted, e.g. heat intolerance, hand tremor
and irritability. If hyperthyroidism is suspected
the patient, should be asked:
• Do you find that you cannot tolerate hot
rooms or buildings?
• Have you noticed a change in your
handwlriting?
• Do your hands shake?
• Do your hands and feet get excessively sweaty?
Hyperthyroidism is an important systemic
cause of hyperhydrosis of the feet and hands.
Other lower limb signs and symptoms include
infiltration of non-pitting mucinous ground sub-
stance on the anterior surface of the tibia, which
causes intense itching and erythema. This so-
called pretibial myxoedema (a confusing term
since myxoedema suggests hypothyroidism) is
more accurately described as an infiltrative der-
mopathy. Hyperthyroidism can cause tarsal
tunnel syndrome and must be considered as a
differential diagnosis for this condition, especially
as the dermopathy will remain even after thyroid
function is stabilised.
Table 5.8 Clinical features of hyperthyroidism
Weight loss (with a normal appetite)
Heat intolerance
Fatigue
Cardiac palpitations
Irritability
Hand tremors
Sleep disturbance
Bulging eyes
Goitre
Diarrhoea
Generalised muscle weakness
 THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 73

Inadequate levels of circulating thyroid The adrenal cortex is susceptible to either

hormone will lead to hypothyroidism. This con-
dition may be discovered by asking the patient:
• Have you noticed any hair loss from your
head or eyebrows?
• Are you troubled by dry scaly skin on your
head or face?
• Have you noticed your hands or face getting
puffy?
• Do you feel you have generally slowed
down?
• Are you getting forgetful?
• Do you notice the cold?
• Has your weight increased?
In hypothyroidism the facial expression is dull
and the features puffy with swelling around the
eye sockets due to infiltration of mucopolysac-
charides. The eyelids will droop due to decreased
adrenergic drive and the skin and hair will be
coarse and dry. The tongue may be enlarged, the
voice hoarse and speech slow. Tarsal and carpal
tunnel syndrome, caused by the infiltration of
mucopolysaccharides, are common clinical fea-
tures. Either form of thyroid disease renders the
patient a poor candidate for foot surgery because
hypo- or hyperfunction. Hypofunction or
Addison's disease is an autoimmune condition;
the majority of clinical features are due to
deficiency in glucocorticoid and mineralocorti-
coid (Table 5.9). The most relevant aspect of
Addison's disease is the reduction in the level of
cortisol. This hormone is normally produced in
response to stress. Cortisol deficiency will reduce
resistance to infection and trauma. Cushing's
syndrome presents as an overproduction of glu-
cocorticoids. High levels of cortisol increase car-
bohydrate production and lead to truncal obesity
and development of a moon face. Purple striae or
stretch marks will develop on the abdomen. An
increased production of androgens may cause
hirsutism. Thinning of the skin and increased
risk of infection are important lower limb fea-
tures of Cushing's disease. Osteoporosis may
occur as a sequel to disruption of normal kidney
function. Secondary diabetes mellitus may also
occur as a sequel to Cushing's disease.
Table 5.9 Clinical features associated with disorders of the
adrenal glands

it reduces his ability to deal with stress. Cardiac Disorder Clinical features
arrhythmias or metabolic imbalance may occur
in stressful situations. Screening for thyroid Adrenal undersecretion Common features:
(e.g. Addison's disease) Tiredness
disease is therefore essential and the above Generalised weakness
enquiry should be included in any presurgery Lethargy
assessment. Anorexia
Weight loss
Disorders of the adrenal gland should also be Dizziness and postural hypotension
considered. The adrenal gland has two function- Pigmentation
ally distinct parts, the cortex and the medulla. The Less common features:
more important of the two, the adrenal cortex, is Hypoglycaemia
Loss of body hair
essential for life as it produces glucocorticoids Depression
and mineralocorticoids, which are essential for Adrenal oversecretion Truncal obesity (moon face,
maintaining blood volume during stress. The (Cushing's syndrome) buffalo hump, protuberant abdomen)
Thinning of skin
patient should be asked: Purple striae
Excessive bruising
• Do you ever feel faint or dizzy when Hirsutism
standing up after sitting for some time? Hypertension
Glucose intolerance
• Have you noticed any coloured patches or Muscle weakness and wasting,
streaks developing on your skin? especially of proximal muscles
• Have you had any problems with increased Back pain (osteoporosis and
vertebral collapse)
facial hair? Psychiatric disturbances
• Do you bruise easily?
 74 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Overactivity of the anterior pituitary gland will
increase circulating levels of growth hormone,
which results in excessive growth of feet, hands,
jaw and soft tissue acromegaly. Excess growth
hormone leads to glycogenesis: approximately
30% of acromegalies develop diabetes mellitus.
Hypertension, due to inadequate renal clearance
of phosphates, affects 30% of acromegalies. The
majority of acromegalies suffer from constant
headaches and joint pains. The condition,
although rare, has significant foot health implica-
tions with a catalogue of signs and symptoms that
will become apparent during virtually every stage
of the functional enquiry.
The locomotor system
To determine the presence of musculoskeletal
disease the patient should be asked if they have
ever had:
• any form of arthritis
• back, hip, knee, ankle or foot pain
• fractures of any bones in the legs or feet
• pulled or injured muscles in the legs
• joint swelling or stiffness
• limb pain during any specific activity.
The patient's account of spine or lower limb
pain involving areas other than that of the pre-
senting complaint should be obtained. The aim of
the locomotor enquiry is to broaden the practi-
tioner's outlook beyond the specific presenting
complaint to a broader view of the locomotor
system. Information from the locomotor enquiry
will help to exclude conditions which may have
Case history 5.10
A 45-year-old female teacher presented with pain
under the balls of both feet. She complained of
general malaise and would go to bed much earlier in
the evening than she used to. She described stiffness
in her hands and knees, which was worse in the
morning but improved after a hot bath and an aspirin.
On examination the small joints of her hands and feet
were swollen, leading the practitioner to suspect a
systemic rather than local mechanical cause.
Diagnosis: Rheumatoid arthritis. This was
confirmed by a blood test, which showed a raised
ESR (erylthrocyte sedimentation rate) and rheumatoid
factor.
a systemic origin (Case history 5.10). Assessment
of the locomotor system is considered in detail in
Chapter 8.
SUMMARY
Accurate diagnosis, which starts with taking the
patient's medical and social history, forms the
basis for formulation of an effective treatment
plan. A format for history taking has been pre-
sented which covers all aspects of the patient's
current and past medical status (Fig. 5.3). It has
been emphasised that the personal social history is
as important as the medical history, since it
enables an assessment to be made about aspects of
the patient's lifestyle which could influence any
proposed treatment. The approach outlined in this
chapter will ensure that a broad range of factors
are taken into consideration when making a diag-
nosis and drawing up a treatment plan.
 THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY 75

Current health status:

Not sleeping well, appetite poor, 'nerves bad'.
Current and past medication:
Presently taking temazepam as required. Co-proxamol for foot pain. Uses purgatives once weekly. In past prescribed hormone
replacement therapy, caused intolerable nausea and hot flushes. Also used amytal barbiturates for 2-year period. Current
family doctor refused repeat prescription.
Smokes 20 per day, drinks rarely.
Past medical history:
'Nervous breakdown' 10 years ago after menopause. Bronchitis almost every winter requires antibiotics.
Hospitalisations, operations, injuries: Fell and broke wrist 2 years ago, required a plate subsequently removed. Patient now
discharged from orthopaedic department.
Family history:

l<-e-5u.lcJ ~0 ~
anr.kv

Figure 5.3 Specimen medical and social history and functional enquiry.

Personal social history:

Now retired previously factory operative - sedentary.
Lives with husband who appears to be a regular and heavy drinker. Owns terraced house. Uses public transport.
No foreign travel.
Daughter lives in London never visits. All friends have moved away few visitors.
Systems enquiry:
Cardiovascular. Chest pain only with bronchitis. Shortness of breath when walking fast or uphill. Ankles swell every day, feet
always cold. No calf pain on walking.
Respiratory: Every morning productive cough, relieved by first cigarette. Occasionally blood-stained sputum.
Gastrointestinal: Still has lower teeth, top teeth all removed 1958. Regular indigestion, especially after vinegar or spicy food.
Uses laxative to ease constipation.
Genitourinary: No dysuria, infections or discharge.
Central nervous system: No headache, no paraesthesia, vision fine, no fits or faints.
Locomotor system: Right hip painful ?arthritic. Painful bunions causing shoe-fitting problems.
Endocrine: No symptoms reported.
Summary: Depressed, lonely 68-year-old, generally run down though no specific health problems at present. In winter troubled
by bronchitis probably related to heavy smoking.
 76 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
FURTHER READING
British National Formulary (BNF), updated twice yearly.
British Medical Association (BMA) and Royal
Pharmaceutical Society of Great Britain (RPSGB), London
Greenberger N, Hinthorn D 1993 History taking and
physical examination; essentials and clinical correlates.
Mosby Year Book, St Louis
Munro J F, Campbell I W 2000 Mcl.eod's clinical
examination, LOth edn. Harcourt Brace, Edinburgh
Seidel H M et al1995 Guide to physical examination, 3rd
edn. Mosby, St Louis
Seymour p, Siklos C 1994 Clinical clerking: a short
introduction to clinical skills, 2nd edn. Press Syndicate of
the University of Cambridge
Tally N, O'Connor S 1989 Clinical examination. Blackwell
Scientific, Oxford
Turner R, Blackwood R 1991 Lecture notes on history taking
and examination, 2nd edn. Blackwell Science, Oxford
Zier B 1990 Essential of internal medicine in clinical
podiatry. W B Saunders, Philadelphia
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 79
THE PURPOSE OF A VASCULAR
ASSESSMENT 79
OVERVIEW OF THE CARDIOVASCULAR
SYSTEM 80
Anatomy of the cardiovascular system
The heart 80
Peripheral circulation 81
Normal physiology of the cardiovascular
system 85
THE VASCULAR ASSESSMENT
General overview of the cardiovascular
system 89
Past history and current medication 89
Symptoms 90
Observable signs 91
Clinical tests 92
Hospital tests 94
Peripheral vascular system
Arterial insufficiency 95
Medical history 95
Symptoms 96
Observation 97
Clinical tests 98
Hospital tests 105
Venous drainage 106
Past history 107
Symptoms 107
Observation 107
Clinical tests 109
Hospital tests 109
Lymphatic drainage 110
Medical history and symptoms
Observation 110
Clinical tests 111
Hospital tests 111
Summary 111
Vascular assessment
J. McLeod Roberts
80
89
INTRODUCTION
Assessment of the patient's vascular status is an
essential part of the primary patient assessment.
Davies & Horrocks (1992) noted that there has
95
been an increase in the number of patients pre-
senting with vascular disease. This chapter
begins by explaining the purpose of a vascular
assessment and then proceeds to provide an
overview of the anatomy and physiology of the
cardiovascular system. It continues by describing
the necessary steps to be taken when assessing
the cardiovascular and in particular the peri-
pheral vascular status of the patient. Ranges of
expected and abnormal values are included
where appropriate. Simple, non-invasive tests
are described which can be carried out by the
110 practitioner using the minimum of equipment;
hospital-based tests are also briefly described.
THE PURPOSE OF A VASCULAR
ASSESSMENT
The vascular status of the lower limb bears a
direct relationship to tissue viability; further-
more, the severity of vascular disease has been
shown to be associated with an increase in mor-
bidity and mortality (Howell et al1989). It will be
apparent from this that assessment of the vascu-
lar status performs a useful screening function by
detecting previously unidentified vascular
abnormalities.
79
 80 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Information gained from a vascular assess- • Identify those patients in whom vascular
ment can be used to achieve the following: conditions require further investigation by
referral to a specialist.
• Identify whether the blood supply to and
from the lower limb is adequate for normal
function and tissue vitality.
• Identify vascular problems which could OVERVIEW OF THE
compromise the state of the tissues. It is CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
important to detect not only the presence of
such abnormalities but also the functional
ANATOMY OF THE
site, e.g. is it an arterial or venous
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
insufficiency or a combination of both? These
patients require monitoring so that The cardiovascular system (CVS) consists of a
complications - e.g. necrosis, ulceration and closed system of vessels through which blood
infection - can be prevented or their effects and lymph are pumped around the body by
reduced. means of the heart (Fig. 6.1).
• Identify whether there are any vascular
abnormalities which could affect healing or
The heart
the choice of treatment. These should be
borne in mind when drawing up a treatment The heart is constructed as a double pump in
plan. series: one pump comprising the left side of the

carotid
artery

superior
vena cava

dorsal
aorta
inferior
vena cava
hepatic vein hepatic artery

Figure 6.1 The major

hepatic vessels of the cardiovascular
mesenteric artery
portal vein system. In the body proper, the
dorsal aorta and the vena
cavae run in the central axis,
but for purposes of clarity they
RA = right atrium
are shown to the right and left
RV = right ventricle of the body, respectively.
LA = left atrium RA = right atrium, RV = right
LV = left ventricle ventricle, LA = left atrium,
LV = left ventricle, GIT =
gastrointestinal tract.
 VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 81

heart and the other the right side (Fig. 6.2). Each
pump has two chambers. Each upper chamber
or atrium is a receiving vessel with a thin muscle
wall or myocardium, whereas the lower cham-
bers or ventricles are the dispersing vessels and
therefore have much thicker muscle walls to
generate strong propulsive forces (Fig. 6.3). The
heart is lined by endocardium and surrounded
by a tough, non-extensible pericardium. The
endocardium forms the cusps of one-way
valves, called the tricuspid and bicuspid valves,
which control the flow of blood through the
heart. It also forms semilunar valves, which
control the entry of blood into the vessels
leaving the heart. Closure of these valves is
responsible for the two heart sounds, 'Iub-dup',
which can be heard through a stethoscope
applied to the chest wall.
The heart serves two circulations. The right
ventricle serves the pulmonary or minor circula-
tion and sends deoxygenated blood via the pul-
monary arteries to the lungs, whereas the left
ventricle supplies the systemic or major circula-
tion with oxygenated blood through the aorta to
the body (Fig. 6.2). Oxygenated blood is returned
from the lungs via the right and left pulmonary
veins into the left atrium and deoxygenated
blood from the body flows through the superior
and inferior vena cavae into the right atrium.
Peripheral circulation
The blood flows through the two circulations via a
system of vessels of varying diameters (Table 6.1).
Arterial tree
The vessels which transport blood to the tissues
are called arteries. These branch into consecu-
tively smaller vessels called arterioles. The walls
of arteries consist of three layers - the tunica
intima, tunica media and tunica adventitia - all of
which are lined with vascular endothelium,
whose cells secrete a variety of substances essen-
tial for maintenance of vessel wall and circulatory
function (Fig. 6.4A). All the vessels have some
smooth muscle in the tunica media to enable
them to change diameter, but arterioles have the
greater proportion. The arteries leaving the heart
have a high proportion of elastic tissue in their
walls, which enables them to act as secondary
pumps, whereas the rest of the arterial tree con-
sists of muscular distributing vessels. The small-
est arterioles deliver blood to capillary beds.

Venous tree
Blood is drained from the tissue beds by small
vessels called venules, which join to form larger
vessels called veins. The three layers seen in the
arterial walls are again present but the propor-
tions differ, as can be seen in Figure 6.4A. The
vascular endothelium forms semilunar valves in
the veins and venules to prevent backflow of

Table 6.1 The anatomy of peripheral vessels

Vessel Diameter Wall thickness

Aorta 25 cm 2 mm
Artery 4 mm 1 mm
Arteriole 30 urn 20 urn
Capillary 6 urn 1 urn
Venule 20 urn 2 urn
Figure 6.2 The heart is a double pump in series. It serves Vein 5 mm 500 urn
two circulations, the low-pressure pulmonary and the high- Vena cava 30 mm 1.5mm
pressure systemic circulation.
82 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Aorta

Superior Pulmonary artery

vena cava

Right
pulmonary vein
\ - - - - - - Left pulmonary vein

~--------- Left atrium

Right atrium - - - - - f

"'*"'i<i+----~ Chorda tendinae

l+\?c-"t\---- Left ventricle

."lll!rllJrt---- Thick-walled
myocardium
Inferior
vena cava

Right ventricle
Endocardium

Figure 6.3 Vertical section through the heart showing the valves, chorda tendinae, main vessels attached and the varying
thickness of the myocardium. The direction of flow of oxygenated (non-shaded arrows) and deoxygenated (shaded arrows)
blood is also shown.

blood. Veins are found either in the superficial
fascia or deep in the muscle. Communicating
veins link the two types so that blood can drain
from the superficial veins to the deep ones.
Capillary
A third type of vessel, the capillary, links arteri-
oles and venules. This is the smallest and most
numerous vessel, having only a thin-walled
endothelium (Fig. 6.4B). It permeates all the
tissue beds so that no tissue cell is far from a cap-
illary. Flow of blood into individual capillaries is
regulated by smooth muscle sphincters in vessels
called metarterioles, which are situated at the
entrances to the capillaries. Capillaries can be
bypassed by arteriovenous (A-V) anastomoses:
these are vessels which form a direct link
 VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 83

A between an arteriole and a venule (Fig. 6.5A). In

Tunica adventitia peripheral cutaneous sites exposed to extremes
Tunica media of temperature, such as the skin of fingertips,
Tunica intima apices of toes, nose and earlobes, the A-V anasto-
'------- Lumen ------' moses are very numerous and form specialised
' - - - - - Endothelium-------' structures under the nail beds called glomus
Artery Vein bodies or Sucquet-Hoyer canals (Fig. 6.5B).
B Endothelium
Microcirculation
Basement
membrane --u--
A.
Capillary
Lumen The smaller-diameter vessels collectively form
the microcirculation.

Figure 6.4 A. Cross-section through an artery and vein

showing tunica intima, media and adventitia B. Cross- Collaterals
section through a capillary. Note the relative proportions of
thickness in artery and vein and its absence in the Most microcirculations are served by more than
capillary. one branch of the arterial tree. These parallel

-tI-+F""---- AVA
Metarteriole

Figure 6.5 A. Diagram of the

microcirculation showing an
arteriole and a venule connected by
A an arteriovenous anastomosis
(AVA) and a capillary network. The
Modified muscle cells AVA is a shorter, tortuous, muscular
vessel of a larger calibre. The
capillary network comprises
metarterioles, which have a
muscular coat, and the distal
portion of the capillary network,
Arteriole which consists solely of endothelial
cells B. Diagram showing the
specialised AVA under the nail bed
B (glomus body).
 84 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

branches are called collaterals and may anasto- Lymphatic tree

mose freely or hardly at all, the degree of
Lymphatic vessels are very similar in structure to
communication varying from tissue to tissue
veins and capillaries, except that the smallest
(Fig. 6.6A). The lack of anastomoses in the coro-
vessels are blind-ended (Fig. 6.7). They drain the
nary circulation is responsible for the dramatic
tissues and transport lymph through various
effects of an occlusion in the left coronary artery
lymph nodes, eventually rejoining the peripheral
(Fig. 6.6B).
circulation through the thoracic duct.

Aorta---f"--.

~A-------- Pulmonary artery

"*--:.;;,~----- Left coronary artery

Right coronary
artery ---/+';b-"--------,ti

>\:i\k-- Circumflex branch

Figure 6.6 A. Small side vessels normally carry an insignificant fraction of blood into the peripheral tissues. Damage or
occlusion of the major arteries alters pressure relationships to divert blood through the side vessels (collateral circulation).
B. Anterior view of heart showing lack of anastomoses between arterial vessels supplying the myocardium. Left coronary
artery supplies hatched area, right coronary artery supplies unhatched area. The lack of anastomoses between left and right
coronary arteries explains why an occlusion of the left coronary artery can be so catastrophic.

-f-----
Blind-ended lymphatic capillary
Figure 6.7 Diagram showing a blind-ended lymphatic capillary.
Tissue fluid
While capillaries bring blood close to all body
cells, a diffusion medium is needed to enable
nutrients, waste products and gases to be
exchanged between the cells and the blood and
lymph. This medium is tissue fluid, which is con-
tinuously forming from blood at capillary and
postcapillary venular sites as a result of hydro-
static and oncotic pressures (Fig. 6.8). Some
tissue fluid is reabsorbed back into these vessels,
the remainder draining into the lymphatic capil-
laries to be returned to the general circulation.
NORMAL PHYSIOLOGY OF THE
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
The essential function of the CVS is to ensure that
there is sufficient perfusion pressure to maintain,
under all circumstances, an adequate flow of
blood to the vital organs, especially the brain.
This is achieved by alteration of the rate and
force of contraction of the myocardium and by
varying the diameter throughout the peripheral
circulation. In periods of increased demand, non-
vital areas will have a reduced flow and this may
very well affect the lower limb.
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 85
Lymphatic venule with valves
The heart contracts about once every 0.8
seconds in a healthy resting adult. The heart beat
is divided into two phases: the relaxation phase
or diastole and the contraction phase or systole.
Systole is the shorter of the two phases, lasting
about 0.3 seconds, though with increased heart
rate, the period of diastole shortens.
The volume of blood ejected from each ventri-
cle is the same and is called the stroke volume. In
a healthy resting adult about 70 ml is ejected at
each contraction of the ventricle. Since the
normal resting heart rate is an average of 72 beats
per minute, the volume ejected from each ventri-
cle in 1 minute is approximately 5 litres and is
known as the cardiac output.
The myocardium has the ability to contract
without nerve impulses. This property is called
myogenicity and is due to the presence of spe-
cialised 'pacemaker' cells which generate spon-
taneous action potentials. The most important
of these is the sinoatrial (SA) node, situated in
the right atrium (Fig. 6.9). The action potential
spreads rapidly through the other specialised
conducting tissues and then out over the
rest of the myocardium through gap junctions
between the cells. This ensures that the cells
can respond as a unit, producing a coordinated
 86 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

wave of contraction which pushes the blood
in the desired direction. Apart from these
specialised pathways, the septa that divide
the four chambers of the heart consist of
fibrous, non-conducting tissue.
While the heart can contract without nervous
stimulation, it is essential that it can alter its
activity according to the differing demands
placed upon it as mentioned earlier. One way
that this is achieved is via the autonomic system
(ANS) (Ch. 7). The two branches of the ANS send
fibres to the SA node. The sympathetic nerve acts
on the heart via specific receptors called beta 1-
receptors, the action of which is to increase
cardiac output by increasing both stroke volume
(positive inotropy) and heart rate (positive
chronotropy). The parasympathetic nerve to the
heart is called the vagus and causes slowing of

Arterial end

respiring cells

HPb high OcPb high

water, salts and HPb low OcPb high
blood (protein .salts, small amount proteins
water, cells)

Venous end
Blood Tissue Result
fluid
HPb > HPt < HPt Fluid in

OcPb > OcPt Fluid in (small) OcPt Fluid in

Net pressure forces fluid out Net pressure forces fluid in

HPb(t) = hydrostatic pressure of blood (and pressure flow)

OcPb(t) = oncolic pressure of blood (b) and tissue fluid (t)
oncolic pressure = oncolic pressure due to protein

Figure 6.8 The process of formation and reabsorption of tissue fluid in an ideal capillary. Movement of fluid in and out of the
capillary will vary according to the precise balance of pressures along the capillary at anyone time.

the heart rate (negative chronotropy), acting
through cholinergic receptors.
At rest the parasympathetic nerve predomi-
nates, producing the average resting heart rate of
72 beats per minute. The rate is less in trained
athletes and higher in children and is also
affected by posture, increasing on a change from
a supine to an upright position by approximately
10 beats per minute. The latter is due to compen-
sation for the effects of gravity on blood in the
peripheral vessels and is mediated through the
baroreceptor reflex (Fig. 6.10). Baroreceptors are
situated in both the arterial and venous compo-
nents of the systemic circulation, but the arterial
baroreceptors in the aortic arch and carotid body
are the more important for regulation of blood
pressure. They continuously monitor the level
and feed this information to the cardiovascular
control centre in the part of the brain stem called
the medulla oblongata. As a result of this infor-
mation being integrated in the medulla, compen-
satory adjustments are made to the action of the
heart and the diameter of the arterial tree through
Atrial excitation
begins complete
A B
Figure 6.9 Vertical outline of the heart, showing the SA node (A), AV node (8), bundle of His (C), Purkinje fibres (D) and
spread of waves from the SA node (A-D).
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 87
the sympathetic nerves, which act on the smooth
muscle of the tunica media. Despite being very
sensitive to changes in blood pressure, barorecep-
tors show a rapid adaptation to a sustained
change, so that in hypertension they are triggered
by a higher than normal 'operating' range.
All vessels except capillaries are subject to
some sympathetic influence or 'tone'. The greater
the sympathetic tone, the more vasoconstriction
is achieved, with vasodilation being produced by
a reduction in this tone. This in turn produces a
change in resistance to flow, or peripheral resis-
tance, a change in the pressure exerted on the
blood and a change in the work the heart has to
do (afterload), The greatest effect is produced in
the arterioles, called the resistance vessels, which
as mentioned previously have the largest propor-
tion of smooth muscle in their walls. They allow
the CVS to control distribution of blood and,
together with the heart, are the effector organs
for the homeostatic control of blood pressure. A
similar reflex exists to regulate blood volume,
which in addition involves, to a greater extent,
Ventricular excitation
begins complete
Right and left Purkinje fibres
branch bundles
C o
 88 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
the low-pressure baroreceptors in the right
atrium and where the effector organs include the
kidney as well as the CVS.
The aorta and pulmonary arteries are the
elastic arteries, having a large proportion of
elastic tissue in their walls. This distends as the
bolus of blood is received from the ventricles
and acts as a secondary pump during diastole
when the elastic recoil propels the blood
forward. The rebound causes a shock wave to
travel rapidly through the blood in the arterial
tree and it can be felt as a pulse wave at certain
points called pressure points.
The overall purpose then of all the vessels
within the systemic circulation, with the excep-
tion of the capillaries, is to deliver blood with its
dissolved nutrients, oxygen and hormones to the
tissues and to remove metabolic waste such as
carbon dioxide and urea. This transportation
must meet the demands of the different tissues,
which will vary in need according to their nature
and level of activity. Heat is also distributed
from areas such as active muscles and the liver
to the rest of the body. The skin is an important
organ for controlling heat loss, involving the
t ARTERIAL PRESSURE
Arterial baroreceptors
tFIRING
Reflex via medullary
cardiovascular
centre
... SYMPATHETIC
OUTFLOW TO
HEART, ARTERIOLES,
VEINS
Figure 6.10 Flow chart showing the arterial baroreceptor
reflex. If arterial pressure decreases the arrows in the boxes
would be reversed.
superficial papillary loops and the specialised
glomus bodies which can re-route blood
towards or away from the skin surface. The
purpose of such redirection is either to control
heat loss or to ensure that superficial tissues do
not suffer from ischaemia caused by cold-
induced vasoconstriction.
The function of the capillaries is the exchange
of the substances transported to the tissues by
the blood. It is here that tissue fluid plays its
essential role of intermediary between blood
and tissues mentioned earlier, being the ideal
candidate since it bathes every cell. There is a
large pressure drop across the capillary beds so
that blood flowing in the venules and veins is at
low pressure and needs help to get back to the
heart, in the form of semilunar valves, venocon-
striction and the pumping action of surround-
ing skeletal muscle on the deep veins. In
addition, the fluctuating negative pressures in
the abdomen and thorax, due to respiratory
movements and the action of the heart itself, all
act as suction pumps, drawing blood back into
the atrial chambers. The volume of blood
returning to the heart is termed the venous
return or preload. It is essential that ventricular
output exactly matches this venous return to
avoid a transfer of blood from one circulation to
the other.
This matching of venous return and cardiac
output is an intrinsic property of the myocardium,
independent of nervous control, which is often
referred to as Starling's law of the heart. The con-
sequences of unmatched venous return to cardiac
output is seen in a person with congestive heart
failure, the congestion being due to a build up of
blood throughout the venous tree because of a
weak or damaged myocardium. In addition to
returning blood to the heart, veins, because of
their distensibility, act as capacitance vessels, nor-
mally holding three-fifths of the total volume of
blood in the body. This can boost the circulation
when necessary.
The purpose of the pulmonary circulation is to
deliver blood containing carbon dioxide to the
lungs and exchange it via the alveolar capillaries
for oxygen. Having two separate circulations also
allows each to operate at a different pressure.

Red blood cells contain the pigment haemoglo-
bin, which picks up oxygen in the lungs in a step-
wise manner and releases it in the tissues.
Presence or absence of oxygen causes a change in
shape of the haemoglobin molecule and with it a
change in colour, so that oxygenated blood is
bright red and deoxygenated blood is bluish-red.
Red blood cells or erythrocytes are formed
from stem cells in the red bone marrow and
mature under the influence of kidney hormones
or erythropoietins. Various factors are needed,
such as iron, folic acid and vitamin BI 2 , for for-
mation of the mature erythrocyte. The red blood
cell circulates for 120 days before being broken
down in the liver by phagocytic von Kupffer
cells. Anaemias, reduction in the oxygen-carry-
ing capacity of blood, can result from a defect in
any part of this process. For example, damage to
the bone marrow by radiation can damage the
stem cells or the young red blood cells, resulting
in aplastic anaemia. An autoimmune disease
can destroy the parietal cells in the stomach,
leading to lack of Castle's intrinsic factor, and
this causes an inability to absorb vitamin BI 2 ,
which is required for erythropoiesis and normal
nerve function. After some delay, pernicious
anaemia develops.
THE VASCULAR ASSESSMENT
An assessment of the vascular status of a patient
consists of a general overview of the cardiovas-
cular system and a detailed assessment of the
peripheral vascular system, with particular ref-
erence to the lower limb. As mentioned previ-
ously, the peripheral vascular system consists of
arteries, veins and lymphatics.
The assessment of each part of the vascular
tree involves:
• past history and current medication
• symptoms
• observable signs
• clinical tests
• hospital tests.
Accurate diagnosis can often be achieved by
simple observation. Research which compared
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 89
diagnoses made by practitioners using observa-
tion with diagnoses arrived at with the aid of
hospital tests found that the former method was
almost as reliable as the latter.
GENERAL OVERVIEW OF THE
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
Central problems such as congestive heart
failure, angina of effort and myocardial infarc-
tion as well as systemic problems such as the
anaemias can all have a bearing on the diagnosis
and management of lower limb problems and so
must be taken into consideration (Table 6.2),
although full investigation of such problems are
beyond the scope of this textbook.
Past history and current medication
History taking is discussed in detail in Chapter 5.
Any factors which reduce or prevent tissue per-
fusion will not only deprive the tissue of oxygen
but also of nutrients, and prevent removal of
waste products, causing a condition referred to
as ischaemia. The most common cause of
ischaemic heart disease (IHD) is atherosclerosis
of coronary vessels; therefore, IHD is often
termed coronary arterial disease (CAD).
The presence of CAD should alert the clinician
to possible atherosclerosis in the lower limb. The
Table 6.2 Cardiac conditions which may affect lower limb
perfusion
Heart failure: left- and/or right-sided
Ischaemic heart disease: angina or myocardial infarction
Rheumatic fever
Myocarditis
Valve disorders:
mitral stenosis
aortic stenosis
mitral regurgitation
tricuspid regurgitation
Infective endocarditis
Congenital heart disease:
septal defects
valve defects
coarction of the aorta
Fallol's tetralogy
 90 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Case history 6.1
A male Caucasian first presented to the clinic when
74 years old, complaining of hard skin on the balls of his
feet and on the ends of his toes. He was finding it difficult
to focus and so had sought treatment. His medical and
social history revealed that he was a smoker and that he
had had an aortic aneurysm resected when aged 73.
He was taking bendroflumethiazide (bendrofluazide). A
preliminary vascular assessment showed telangiectases
and haemosiderosis superimposed on a normal skin
colour in both lower limbs. Varicose veins were present in
the right leg, hair was absent from legs and feet and the
skin was dry. Nails were long but otherwise unremarkable.
The feet felt cold. All four pulses were palpable and
demonstrated arrhythmia. Brachial BP was 110/60 mmHg.
The patient failed to attend further appointments until 3
years later, when examination revealed cyanotic feet with
the right foot being worse than the left. His toenails were
thickened and crumbly and oedema was present in both
ankles. Pedal pulses were barely palpable.
medical history should reveal conditions which
indicate coronary artery disease, such as angina
of effort or previous myocardial infarctions. The
presence of risk factors for atherosclerosis
should also be noted, such as smoking or the
presence of diabetes mellitus, hypertension or
hyperlipidaemia (Case history 6.1).
Anti-hypertensive medicaments such as
diuretics, beta-blockers, ACE inhibitors and
calcium antagonists all indicate a vascular
problem which often has a central component.
Diuretics act on various parts of the kidney
nephron to reduce water and salt reabsorption,
reducing preload and cardiac output and, as a
consequence, blood pressure. Beta-blockers
prevent the stimulatory action of endogenous
catecholamines on the heart, again reducing
cardiac output and blood pressure. ACE
(angiotensin-converting enzyme) inhibitors
interfere with the production of angiotensin 2,
which is both a powerful vasoconstrictor and
triggers release of the hormone aldosterone from
the adrenal cortex. As aldosterone promotes
water and salt reabsorption from the kidney,
drugs that inhibit its release will again reduce
preload and cardiac output, so that ACE
inhibitors promote a two-pronged attack on
blood pressure. Calcium antagonists act by inter-
fering with the process of vascular smooth
Transcutaneous oxygen tension (Tcp02) values of right
and left dorsum of the feet were 41 and 47 mmHg,
respectively. He had suffered a myocardial infarction and
a stroke when 76 and his medication had been changed
to digoxin and furosemide (frusemide).
When the patient first presented to the clinic, the
condition of skin, nails and general tissue viability were
unremarkable for someone of his age. Three years later
he had suffered a myocardial infarction and a stroke,
which suggests possible atherosclerosis in coronary
and cerebral arteries. The likelihood of lower limb
arteries also being involved is considerable and would
account for the low oxygen tension in the skin and the
barely palpable pedal pulses. Smoking is a risk factor
for atherosclerosis and for strokes. The peripheral
oedema and cyanosis were likely to be consequences
of cardiac insufficiency following the myocardial
infarction, although asymmetry also suggests some
peripheral factors at play, i.e, venous incompetency.
muscle contraction, reducing peripheral resis-
tance and so reducing blood pressure.
Symptoms
Angina and myocardial infarction
Pain in the chest on exercise or other stress indi-
cates inadequate blood supply to the myocar-
dium. Angina may occur as the result of a
previous myocardial infarction (M!) or may be
the precursor to an MI. The pain of angina can
vary from a mild discomfort to an intense crush-
ing sensation, or a feeling as if the chest is being
gripped by a steel band. It may radiate into the
left arm, to the back and the throat or even down
the right arm. It may settle into a predictable
pattern so that the patient will be able to
describe the trigger factors and the intensity,
duration and frequency of the attacks. More
seriously, the attacks may increase in frequency
or intensity, when it is termed unstable angina
and may be prodromal to an acute heart attack.
Unless vigorously treated, a large proportion of
patients with unstable angina will go on to
develop MI within weeks (Kumar & Clark
1990a). It is important to recognise such situa-
tions should they develop, as prompt action is
essential.
 VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 91

The chief distinguishing feature of an acute MI Observable signs

as opposed to an angina pectoris attack is that the
latter lasts only minutes and is usually relieved Oedema
within 5 minutes by rest or by sublingual nitro-
Any factor which interferes with the normal
glycerine. Any chest pain that does not amelio-
process of tissue fluid formation and reabsorption
rate after both these procedures must be viewed
may cause fluid to accumulate in the tissues. This
with concern. If after administration of further
is referred to as oedema, which will be observable
nitroglycerine the patient still does not obtain
in the peripheral tissues as swelling. It can be due
relief, emergency services should be called. There
to local factors, such as trauma or occluded
are many other causes of chest pain: few closely
drainage vessels, or to central factors such as con-
mimic angina, although indigestion and other
gestive heart failure, where the failure of the left
gastrointestinal disorders are often confused
ventricle to produce an adequate cardiac output
with angina (Ch. 5).
causes backward pressure through the CVS, in
time causing right ventricular failure. Just as left
Breathlessness (dyspnoea) ventricular failure produces oedema in the pul-
monary circulation, right ventricular failure results
While the most common cause of dyspnoea is
in bilateral peripheral oedema, especially notice-
physical exertion, it can be associated with cardiac
able in the lower limbs (Case history 6.1). An
problems. It should be established whether the
important exacerbating factor is the renin-
patient is a smoker or not, since there is a close
angiotensin-aldosterone system, which is trig-
correlation between smoking and cardiovascular
gered by the low cardiac output and causes renal
problems. The early stages of heart failure result
retention of salt and water, thus imposing an even
in metabolic acidosis, which causes compen-
greater load on the failing heart.
satory hyperventilation. In ~ater stages, the lungs
are congested and ventilatory effort is increased.
Difficulty in breathing when supine (orthopnoea) Cyanosis
accompanies left ventricular failure (Kumar &
Clark 1990b). Central cyanosis is the bluish discoloration of
lips, tongue and mucous membranes and indi-
cates that arterial blood is inadequately oxy-
Lassitude genated. It may be due either to deficiencies in
the pump such as a congenital hole in the heart,
One of the main symptoms associated with cardiac failure, or to deficiencies in ventilation
anaemia is lassitude, with other symptoms such as chronic obstructive airways disease.
depending on the severity and duration of the Severe cardiac and respiratory failure will also
condition and the particular type of anaemia such cause peripheral cyanosis of toes and feet.
as peripheral neuropathy associated with perni-
cious anaemia or leg ulcers associated with sickle
cell anaemia. Although anaemias lead to hypoxia Pallor
in the tissues, their effects on tissue viability tend
to be less severe than those of arterial occlusion A generalised pallor, especially noticeable in the
since they have no direct effect on supply of nutri- face, may indicate anaemia.
ents and removal of waste products. However,
Blackwell (2001) states 'even mild cases of anemia Spoon-shaped nails (koilonychia)
warrant investigation. Whatever it's cause, ...
anemia can signal a life-threatening condition'. In Lack of iron results in iron-deficiency anaemia,
the elderly, anaemia can trigger or exacerbate which causes koilonychia of the finger nails and
angina pectoris, claudication or dementia. a smooth, red tongue.
 92 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Clubbing of the nails (hippocratic nails)
Clubbing of the finger nails may be due to sub-
acute infective endocarditis or congenital cyanotic
heart disease. It is also associated with a variety
of other, primarily respiratory, causes, e.g.
bronchial carcinoma.
Splinter haemorrhages
These usually appear near the nail margins and
are associated with vasculitis (inflammation of
small vessels). They may have a local cause such
as a digital septic thrombus, or may herald a
widespread involvement of arteries of all organs,
including coronary, splanchnic and cerebral, as
may be seen in severe rheumatoid arthritis.
Splinter haemorrhages may also indicate sub-
acute bacterial endocarditis.
Clinical tests
Heart rate
This is normally assessed by taking the pulse at
the wrist. Arrhythmias are abnormal heart rates
and can be physiological or pathological, depend-
ing on the cause. Heart rates of less than 60 beats
per minute are classified as bradycardia and those
over 100 beats per minute as tachycardia. An
example of a physiological bradycardia is that
seen in trained athletes, whereas the bradycardia
due to a complete heart block in the atrioventric-
ular septum is pathological. Physiological
arrhythmia may also be associated with respira-
tion and is called sinus arrhythmia, appearing as
a tachycardia on inspiration and a bradycardia on
expiration. It is more noticeable in young people
and is thought to be due to fluctuations in the
parasympathetic output to the heart (Ganong
1991), although the fluctuations in thoracic nega-
tive pressure may exacerbate the effect through
the operation of Starling's law of the heart.
Beta.eblockers such as atenolol will induce a
bradycardia and thus reduce cardiac output and
blood pressure. Such drugs are therefore given as
antihypertensives. In contrast, thyroid hor-
mones, if present in excess, increase the affinity
of betaI-receptors to catecholamines and so induce
tachycardia, as seen in hyperthyroidism. The
tachycardia of exercise illustrates the relationship
between heart rate and efficiency, since with up
to approximately 180 beats per minute cardiac
output also rises; however, at rates greater than
this, the diastolic period is so short that the heart
cannot fill properly and cardiac output falls.
The quality of the pulse should also be noted.
Is it irregular, bounding or feeble? The pulse can
be graded on a score of 0-4, with 0 representing
no pulse and 4 representing a bounding, strong
pulse. Irregular or abnormal pulses (arrhyth-
mias) may be physiological (e.g. due to exertion,
anxiety, training or age) or may be due to some
underlying systemic condition such as thyroid
disorders or medication such as beta-blockers.
Similarly, a bounding pulse can be due to
response to stress, a sign of pyrexia, or can be
seen in pathological conditions such as thyrotox-
icosis, or in a hypoglycaemic diabetic person.
Irregular pulses, i.e. bradycardia, tachycardia or
absent pulses, with no apparent explanation
should be investigated with Doppler apparatus.
Blood pressure
Hypertension is usually asymptomatic unless
very severe. Symptoms usually indicate the pres-
ence of complications and include headache,
nose bleeds and dizziness. It rarely causes
oedema. Hypertension is a risk factor for many
serious conditions such as MI, left ventricular
failure, cerebrovascular accidents, aortic dissec-
tion and renal failure. There is a direct correlation
between the degree of hypertension and the like-
lihood of a stroke, so blood pressure values can
be one of the most reliable indicators for progno-
sis of life span; it is, therefore, one of the most
useful screening exercises that can be carried out
in the clinic. Simple non-pharmacological inter-
vention is usually tried as a first-line method of
treatment, unless the condition is severe, with
drugs being used only if the situation does not
respond or worsens.
The pressure in the large arteries will vary
during the cardiac cycle. The highest pressure
will be at ventricular systole when blood is being
forced into the arteries. The pressure at this point

is called the systolic blood pressure. The lowest
point is when the heart is relaxed, just before it
begins its next contraction. This is called the dias-
tolic pressure. The blood pressure is always
written as systolic pressure/diastolic pressure.
The value for a healthy adult is 120/80 mmHg
(17/11 kPa). Pulse pressure is the difference
between the systolic and diastolic pressures and
will widen or reduce as either or both pressures
change. The value of the systolic and the pulse
pressures rises with age due to loss of compli-
ance in the arterial tunica media.
The taking of blood pressures by the ausculta-
tory method is a simple technique but requires
practice and attention to detail in the procedure
(Fig. 6.11). Other methods such as the palpatory
method are not considered to be as sensitive. The
method was developed using mercury manome-
ters, but increasing awareness of health and
safety is seeing the gradual replacement of these
by aneuroid manometers, which are not only
safer but more user-friendly. Even easier to use
are automatic manometers which display the
blood pressure and heart rate on a liquid crystal
display (LCD) panel although accuracy varies
according to the model used.
In the manual versions the manometer is con-
nected to a rubber hand pump with a valve and
an inflatable cuff and the following procedure
should be adopted:
Figure 6.11 Diagram showing correct position of patient for measuring brachial blood pressure using the auscultatory method.
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 93
• The patient should be seated comfortably
with one arm flexed at the elbow and resting
at heart level on a flat surface.
• The brachial pulse should be palpated.
• The cuff should be wrapped around the
selected arm of the patient, well clear of the
brachial pulse point.
• The pressure cuff should be inflated until the
brachial pulse can no longer be palpated. The
value of this pressure should be noted and
the pressure released rapidly.
• The diaphragm of the stethoscope should be
placed on the pulse point and the pressure
cuff re-inflated to the same value as
previously obtained. Nothing will be heard at
this stage. All vessels will be occluded so that
no blood can flow through the artery.
• The pressure should be released slowly and
steadily, watching the needle on the
manometer face (or the column of mercury
fall). As the pressure falls to the level of the
patient's systolic blood pressure a knocking
sound will be heard in the stethoscope. At
this stage the pressure in the cuff is sufficient
to prevent flow of blood during diastole, but
not during systole, so that the systolic flow
can be heard. The reading of the manometer
when the sound is first heard should be
noted; this corresponds to the value of
systolic blood pressure.
 94 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
• The pressure should continue to be released.
The sounds will first increase then decrease
in intensity and finally disappear. At this
stage the pressure in the cuff is insufficient to
occlude the artery at any stage in the cardiac
cycle and this point is taken as the value for
the diastolic blood pressure.
• The practitioner should ensure that the cuff is
deflated completely.
The first person to describe this method was
Korotkoff and the sounds heard are called
Korotkoff sounds. Practice makes perfect! If the
readings are not consistent, there are a number of
ways in which errors may have been introduced:
• The rubber tubing may be perished.
• The valve may be faulty.
• The cuff may be the wrong size for the
diameter of the limb.
• The arm may not be at heart level.
• The practitioner may not read the values
correctly. If in doubt, or if the values are not
as expected, the exercise should be repeated,
after the patient has had time to relax.
Blood pressure values show a Gaussian distri-
bution curve, so the values used to indicate
hypertension are somewhat arbitrary. In the UK,
hypertension for adults is taken as any systolic
value over 160 mmHg and any diastolic value
over 95 mmHg. Ideally, readings should be taken
on three separate occasions since stress can cause
a temporary rise in blood pressure. The most
effective way of measuring blood pressure is by a
self-monitoring technique. Patients measure
their blood pressures at regular intervals
throughout the day and an average value is
obtained. The upper normal limit is lower in
children and higher in the elderly.
Hospital tests
These are performed both to confirm diagnosis
and to identify the exact site of a problem so that
accurate surgical therapy can be performed.
Non-invasive
Electrocardiogram. The electrical activity of
the heart is recorded using limb and chest leads
attached to the skin. Many pathologies of the
heart, such as MI or ventricular enlargement in a
failing heart, will alter the normal PQRS wave-
form. Exercise may be used to highlight prob-
lems not apparent at rest.
Chest X-ray. A standard radiograph of the
chest will show such pathologies as enlargement
of the heart, calcification of coronary arteries and
malignant masses.
Phonocardiography. This involves the applica-
tion of a sensitive microphone to the chest wall,
to allow heart sounds and murmurs to be
recorded, but is now being superseded by
echocardiography.
Echocardiography. This uses ultrasound at a
frequency of 2.5 MHz to visualise both the heart
and the coronary arteries. It can visualise move-
ment of ventricular walls, septum and heart
valves (Kapoor & Singh 1993a).
Electron beam tomography. A recently devel-
oped non-invasive procedure, electron beam
tomography has been shown in a recent study
to be more sensitive in detecting those patients
at high risk of CAD than the more usual proce-
dure of analysis of lipid cholesterol levels
(Hecht & Superko 2001).
Invasive techniques
Blood analysis. Diagnosis of anaemia can be
easily confirmed with a full blood count, where
the number and volume of the red blood cell is
calculated, as is the oxygen content (Ch. 13).
Further investigations are then required to estab-
lish the cause. Where aplastic anaemia is sus-
pected, a sample of bone marrow is analysed,
usually from the sternum. During unstable
angina or episodes of MI the ischaemic myocar-
dial cells produce increased amounts of particular
enzymes and metabolites, such as cardiac creatine
kinase, which peak 24 hours after the attack, so
that quantitative analysis of these substances aids
diagnosis.
Analyses of levels of low-density lipoprotein
cholesterol (LDLC) and high-density lipopro-
tein cholesterol (HDLC) are used as screening
processes, especially where a patient is at high
risk of CAD, such as those with familial hyper-
cholesterolaemia. Patients with levels of LDLC
>130 mg/ dl (3.4 mmol zl) or with levels of
 VASCULAR ASSESSMENT
---"--------"----------"-------"-"--"------"-----"-------
HDLC <35 mg/ dl (0.9 mmol/D are considered
in the United States to have subclinical CAD
(Hecht & Superko 2001).
Coronary angiography. This involves intro-
duction of a diagnostic catheter through the
femoral artery into the left ventricle and associ-
ated vessels (Kumar & Clark 1990c). Pressures
in various of the heart chambers and main
vessels can be measured directly. Blood samples
can be taken to measure oxygen content and
ischaemic metabolites such as lactate and
contrast cine-angiograms can be taken by injec-
tion of a radio-opaque dye at the site to be
investigated. Digital subtraction angiography
produces better-quality angiograms.
Myocardial perfusion scintigraphy (radionuclide
perfusion imaging). This is a very sensitive test
using exercise thallium-201 or technetium-99m
imaging to detect coronary artery disease (Kapoor
& Singh 1993b, Kumar & Clark 1990d).
PERIPHERAL VASCULAR SYSTEM
It is important to distinguish between an
impoverished arterial supply, reduced venous
drainage and impaired lymphatic drainage,
though of course more than one impairment
may coexist.
ARTERIAL INSUFFICIENCY
Medical history
Conditions which can affect the arterial supply to
the lower limb can be divided into those that lead
to acute and those that lead to chronic problems
(Table 6.3).
Most arterial problems affecting the lower limb
are chronic in nature, leading to peripheral arter-
ial occlusive disease (PAOD) and resulting in
ischaemia and poor tissue viability. The most
common cause of PAOD, which is also called
peripheral vascular disease (PVD), is atheroscle-
rosis. This is a pathological process involving for-
mation of a fatty plaque or atheroma in the
intima of large and medium-sized arteries
(Murphie 2001a). The atheroma itself causes no
obstruction to blood flow, but its tendency to
ulcerate promotes thrombus formation, which
95
Table 6.3 Causes of arterial insufficiency in the foot
Acute Extrinsic:
light clothing
tourniquet
plaster cast
trauma
frostbite
immersion foot
Intrinsic:
thrombosis
embolus
ruptured aneurysm
oedema
Transient (usually lead to acute problems but may
progress to chronic)
Raynaud's phenomenon
Chilblains
Hereditary cold fingers
Chronic Atherosclerosis
Vasculitis
Thromboangiitis obliterans (Buerger's disease)
Arteriolosclerosis?
causes narrowing (stenosis) or complete occlu-
sion of the vessel. In addition, the thrombus is
likely to embolise and be swept away to cause
obstruction further down the arterial tree. There
appears to be little evidence to suggest, as was
previously believed, that a similar process occurs
in the micro-circulation (Murphie 2001b).
Although hyalinisation (arteriolosclerosis) and
thickening of basement membranes and func-
tional abnormalities of small vessels have been
observed, these changes occur mainly in renal
and retinal vessels, and are not considered to
have major effects on the vascular status of the
foot. Such changes mainly affect people with dia-
betes, but not exclusively. Much less common
causes of PAOD are vasculitis, thromboangiitis
obliterans and arterial emboli. Vasculitis is
inflammation of blood vessels seen in a large
number of rheumatic and connective tissue dis-
eases. Any vessel can be affected, with the most
serious consequences being in the arterial tree,
resulting in partial or total occlusion.
Some of the conditions associated with vas-
culitis are:
• rheumatoid arthritis
• systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE)
• polymyositis
 96 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
• dermatomyositis
• systemic sclerosis
• polyarteritis nodosa
• giant-cell arteritis
• erythema nodosum
• Henoch-Schonlein syndrome.
Thromboangiitis obliterans is characterised
by inflammatory changes in small and medium-
sized arteries and veins. It mainly affects young
males and there is a very strong association with
smoking. All signs and symptoms of arterial
ischaemia and superficial phlebitis of the hands
and feet may be present. Eventually, distal
necrosis occurs.
Arterial emboli can be composed of any
obstructive body that lodges in the smaller
vessels of the arterial tree, causing ischaemia dis-
tally. The most common embolus is formed by
fragmentation of a thrombus, such as a mural
thrombus found on the endocardium, especially
around the heart valves, or in the arteries,
mostly at sites of bifurcation, where turbulence
is most likely. Emboli may occlude arterioles and
capillaries, causing isolated patches of digital
necrosis. The source of such emboli may be
septic thrombus from infection or deformed
red blood cells as seen in sickle cell anaemia. Any
history of previous MI, stroke or transient
ischaemic attacks suggests the presence of
atherosclerosis which, in addition to affecting
the coronary and cerebral arteries, may also be
affecting the arterial supply to the lower limb. A
past history of vascular surgery such as coronary
or femoropopliteal bypass grafting is also a good
indicator that atherosclerosis may be present. A
history of cryovascular disorders (e.g. chilblains,
Raynaud's disease/phenomenon) should be
noted as the attacks of vasospasm may become
chronic and cause painful digital ulceration.
(Case history 6.2).
Symptoms
Inadequate blood supply to the lower limb leads
to a range of signs and symptoms that are known
as the six Ps:
• pain
Case history 6.2
A 35-year-old female Caucasian first presented to
the clinic when aged 24, complaining of broken skin
on the toes. The patient presently lived alone as she
had recently separated from her partner and she
had a history of poor circulation to both hands and
feet. Footwear was inadequate for winter, and foot
hygiene was poor. Examination of the lower limbs
revealed pale skin and cold feet. The lesser toes
were held in flexion deformities. No hairs were
present. The nail on the left fifth toe was black. The
skin was tight, shiny and smooth. There were small,
painful ulcers on the apices of toes and fingers. All
ulcers showed signs of infection. Pedal pulses were
palpable but feeble. Popliteal pulses were stronger.
Ankle-brachial pressure indices at the dorsalis pedis
artery for right and left foot were 1.0 and 0.97,
respectively. There was no evidence of underlying
systemic disease.
A diagnosis of idiopathic Raynaud's disease was
made. The condition was exacerbated by personal
and social factors. The repeated breakdown of
lesions, as detailed in the patient's record over the
past 4 years, was due to the underlying vasospastic
disorder, which was worsened by cold weather, self-
neglect and emotional upsets. Current treatment was
successful in healing the lesions but without continued
patient compliance the overall prognosis is poor.
• pallor
• pulselessness
• paraesthesia
• paralysis
• perishing cold.
Pain is usually associated with arterial
insufficiency. It is important that the site, nature,
duration and aggravating factors of the pain are
recorded. This information can be very helpful
when assessing the prognosis of diseases that
affect the arterial supply. Inadequate blood
supply to respiring tissues may be an acute situ-
ation, producing a characteristic range of signs
and symptoms, including pain, pallor and lack
of pulses. When the deficiency is prolonged, the
tissues eventually suffer irreversible damage
and this stage can be recognised by mottling,
muscle tenderness, motor or sensory deficit and
necrosis. Continuation of the condition will lead
to a chronic state of insufficiency, accompanied
by pain on exercise, or even at rest if very severe,
and necrosis and ulceration. The following types

Table 6.4 The Fontaine classification of peripheral
vascular disease (PVD)
Stage Symptoms
Occlusive arterial disease but no symptoms
(due to collaterals)
2 Intermittent claudication
3 Ischaemic rest pain (usually worse at night,
relieved by dependency)
4 Severe rest pain with ulceration/necrosis (gangrene)
of ischaemic pain can occur and lead to the
Fontaine classification of PVD (Table 6.4).
Intermittent claudication
Just as angina pectoris indicates insufficient
blood supply to the myocardium, so intermittent
claudication indicates inadequate blood supply
to the periphery. When the blood supply is inad-
equate, the deficiency will be accentuated on
exercise. The exercising muscles have to respire
anaerobically and produce metabolites which
are not cleared by the blood. These cause
ischaemic pain, which forces the patient to stop
the activity. Resting for a few minutes reduces
the amount of metabolites produced and allows
the patient to continue walking for a further
period. The distance walked before onset of the
pain is called the ischaemic or claudication dis-
tance and is a good indication of the severity of
the condition. The exercise should be standard-
ised, e.g. 4 minutes at 0% incline at 4 km/h
(Lainge & Greenhalgh 1980). The site of the
ischaemic pain is an indication of the site of the
occlusion. It should be borne in mind, however,
that patients with neuropathy may not complain
of intermittent claudication.
Night cramps
If the blood supply is more severely compro-
mised, the patient will experience night cramps,
which are alleviated by dangling the legs over
the side of the bed or walking on a cool floor.
The warmth of the bedclothes increases the
metabolic rate of the tissues and so increases
their demand for oxygen; this cannot be met
and produces ischaemic pain. Using gravity to
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 97
aid flow and cooling the limb helps to reduce
metabolic activity.
Rest pain
This is the most severe condition of critical limb
ischaemia. Here the blood supply is inadequate
even at rest, walking is impossible and the only
way that the peripheral tissues can obtain any
blood is by gravity. The legs must always lie below
the level of the heart, either by raising the head of
the bed or by sleeping in a chair. Even contact of
the bedclothes on the limbs may be too painful.
Cages are sometimes used to protect the limbs.
Observation
While an experienced practitioner can glean con-
siderable information from simple observation, it
is important not to rely on these observations
alone, but to view them as part of the whole
picture. The patient should be seated on a couch
in a comfortably warm room.
Colour
Table 6.5 shows the range of colour changes seen
in the lower limb and their significance.
Tissue viability
Hairs. A poor blood supply leads to inade-
quate nourishment for skin and soft tissues. The
skin will appear thin, shiny, and dry with absent
hairs (Plate 1). Friction from boots and depilato-
ries could be less worrying causes.
Atrophy. In chronic situations atrophy (wastage)
of soft tissue, including muscle, will also be
present. This is especially noticeable on the plantar
surface of the foot. In severe limb ischaemia,
muscle tone will be lost and the limb will appear
lifeless.
Ischaemic ulcers
An impaired peripheral circulation makes ulcers
more likely to develop as the tissues are unable to
 98 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 6.5 Interpretation of colour changes in the lower limb

Colour Causes

Pink Healthy circulation

White/pale Cold, anaemia, chilblains, Raynaud's phenomenon, cardiac failure
White below demarcation line Severe ischaemia
Blue (peripheral cyanosis) Cold, chilblains, Raynaud's phenomenon, venous stasis
Blue seen with central cyanosis Cardiac/respiratory failure
Hazy blue Infection, necrosis
Red Heat, exercise, extreme cold (cold-induced vasodilation), inflammation, infection
(cellulitis), chilblains, Raynaud's phenomenon
Brown Haemosiderosis, moist necrosis
Black Bruise, shoe dye, necrosis

withstand the normal daily stresses on the lower
limb. The characteristics of the lesion can assist in
diagnosis of the circulatory problem, since ulcers
caused by ischaemia differ in many respects from
those caused by other deficiencies such as poor
drainage or neuropathy (Ch. 17). Ischaemic ulcers
are caused by trauma and are usually very
painful, unless there is neuropathy present, as for
example in some diabetic patients. There is lack of
granulation tissue and low amounts of exudate,
but slough is often present. The borders are well
demarcated and they may have a 'punched out'
appearance (Plate 2). They often occur first under
the toe nails, on the apices of the toes or around
the borders of the feet, a contributory factor
usually being tight or ill-fitting footwear. Leg ele-
vation can exacerbate the pain, whereas lowering
the leg into dependency can improve the blood
supply and ease the pain. Ischaemic ulcers are
unlikely to heal unless there is an improvement in
blood supply. Ulcers of any type are less likely to
heal if the patient is on medication which reduces
cardiac output, e.g. beta-blockers.
Nails
Poor blood supply will affect the nails. These may
be crumbly, discoloured or thickened. They are
prone to fungal infection and pitting. The latter
should be differentially diagnosed from dermato-
logical conditions such as psoriasis (Ch. 9).
regions being affected first. The tissue will
appear hard, black and mummified, with a clear
demarcation line between dead and living tissue
(Plate 3). Ulceration and infection may cause a
septic vasculitis, which again leads to ischaemia
and necrosis, but here the tissue remains moist
and usually has a distinctive smell. This is wet
gangrene. Pus and infection of surrounding
tissue is present. The presence of proximal arter-
ial occlusion and poor collateral development
may be contributing factors.
Oedema
Oedema is not usually associated with poor
peripheral arterial supply. If present bilaterally,
the cause is likely to be a central one such as
congestive heart failure. Unilateral or localised
oedema may be due to infection, trauma, allergy
or impaired venous or lymphatic drainage
(Table 6.6).
Clinical tests
The following tests should be repeated for both
lower limbs and require none or very simple
apparatus of the type usually found in a practi-
tioner's clinical environment. Again some of
these tests are of greater significance than others
in aiding diagnosis.

Necrosis (gangrene) Temperature gradient

Severe ischaemia, if unrelieved, will progress to The back of the practitioner's hand should be
necrosis or dry gangrene, with the most distal used to stroke the anterior surface of the patient's

Table 6.6 Differential diagnosis of oedema of the lower limb
Causes
Cardiac failure Venous stasis
Bilateral Unilateral
Transudate Transudate
Pitting Pitting
Acquired Acquired
Post myocardial infarction Post immobilisation
lower limb from the knee to the toes. The proxi-
mal part of the leg should feel warm to the touch,
with a gradual cooling as the feet are
approached. On a cold day the toes can feel very
cold; this is quite normal but a sharp temperature
drop on a comfortably warm day will suggest an
inadequate blood supply, with possibly an
obstruction occurring at the level of the sudden
change. Remember too, that the temperature felt
is relative to the temperature of the hand of the
practitioner. This problem can be overcome by
measuring skin temperature with a simple probe
thermocouple attached to a hand-held digital
display unit. Any difference between the two
limbs of more than 2°C should be investigated
further.
Capillary filling time (CFT)
CFT is gradually falling into disuse as it has
failed to show a correlation with gold standard
measurements such as transcutaneous oxygen
tension (Tcp02) values, being replaced by more
meaningful tests. To be strictly accurate, it is not
the capillaries but the subpapillary venous
plexus which is responsible for colour in the skin
and is blanched by digital pressure. The time is
noted in seconds for the blood to return after
blanching. Normal colour should return within
2-3 seconds on a warm day and within 5 seconds
on a cold day. Absence of blanching in a cyanotic
foot indicates that the tissues are devitalised.
Buerger's elevation/dependency test
The leg should be elevated until all the veins in
the dorsal arch of the foot have emptied. The
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 99
Primary lymphoedema Secondary lymphoedema
Bilateral Unilateral
Exudate Exudate
Non-pitting Non-pitting (unless very long-standing)
Congenital Acquired
Post-infection, radiotherapy, surgery,
malignancy
plantar surface of the foot will appear pale as
blood will have drained out of all superficial
vessels due to the effects of gravity. The blood
can be stroked from the raised limb to accelerate
the gravitational effects. A mild pallor should
then be seen within 1 minute. A severe, wide-
spread pallor suggests arterial insufficiency. The
limb should be lowered into dependency and
the time taken for the plantar surface to return to
the colour of the other limb or for the dorsal
veins to refill should be noted. If the blood
supply is adequate, the plantar surface of the
foot should regain its normal colour within
15 seconds. A delayed time of 20 seconds or
more suggests that blood supply is inadequate,
with severe ischaemia being likely if the delay is
40 seconds or more. If the colour on dependency
is a dusky red, this is a serious sign, indicating
that the blood supply is severely compromised.
Buerger's test has been shown to be a useful
adjunct to routine vascular assessment and can
be an indicator of more severe ischaemia with
distal limb artery involvement (Ins all et al 1989).
Allen's test
This can be used to detect occlusion distal to the
ankle. One leg of the patient is elevated and the
dorsalis pedis artery is compressed with the
practitioner's thumb. Maintaining pressure on
the artery, the leg is lowered into dependency. If
the tibialis posterior artery is patent, the foot
should return rapidly to its normal colour. The
patency of the dorsalis pedis artery can be tested
in a similar manner, by compressing the tibialis
posterior artery.
 100 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Pedal pulses ripples can travel rapidly over the surface of a

Each time the heart contracts, blood is ejected into
the aorta from the left ventricle. Because the aorta
has a large amount of elastic tissue in its walls, the
walls will be distended by the blood. At diastole,
as the heart relaxes, the pressure on the walls
drops and the elastic recoil of the walls causes
them to spring back, pushing the blood on and
acting as a secondary pump. The recoil causes a
pressure wave, which travels rapidly through the
blood in the arterial tree. It travels much faster
than the actual velocity of the blood, rather as
slow-moving stream. It is called a pulse (wave)
and can be palpated wherever the arterial tree
comes close to the skin surface, e.g. wrist. The
main pressure points in the lower limb are indi-
cated in Figure 6.12. These places are called pulse
points or pressure points. The frequency of the
pulse wave will be the same as the frequency of
the heartbeat, or the ventricular systole.
The practitioner should place the thumb or
second, third and fourth digits on the dorsalis
pedis pulse point; the number of shock waves in

B c

Figure 6.12 Location of pulses in the lower limb A. Dorsalis pedis B. Anterior tibial C. Posterior tibial D. Popliteal
E. Femoral.

1 minute should be counted. This procedure
should be repeated at the posterior tibial pulse
point and for the other leg. When the practitioner
is familiar with this technique, the time can be
reduced to 30 or 15 seconds, with the score being
doubled or quadrupled appropriately. This is
slightly less accurate than taking the pulse for
1 minute.
If the arteries are all patent and there is no vas-
cular problem, then the values should be identi-
cal at each site. If they are not, the pulses should
be checked again. If the pulse appears to be
absent, it may suggest that there is some occlu-
sion in the artery, proximal to the pulse point.
This will either produce a faint pulse or an absent
one. The site which is immediately proximal to
the absent pulse should be tried to see if the
approximate area of obstruction can be located. If
the pulse cannot be located, the site should be
investigated using a Doppler machine. However,
it should be noted that the dorsalis pedis pulse is
absent in 10% of the population and the posterior
tibial pulse is absent in 2%, but only 0.5% have
both absent in the same foot. Due to the many
anastomoses between pedal vessels, there is
some justification in the view held by some prac-
titioners that one patent artery per foot is
sufficient to avoid critical limb ischaemia.
A large pulsatile mass behind the knee or in
the inguinal area suggests the presence of an
arterial aneurysm: 10% of aneurysms occur in the
popliteal fossa. They should be differentiated
from popliteal cysts. Aneurysms are liable to
rupture or stagnate in the area, which may lead
to thrombus formation.
Bruits
Bruits are abnormal sounds which can be heard,
using a stethoscope, in the arterial part of the
cardiovascular system. Normal flow is laminar
and is silent. Bruits are due to turbulence in arter-
ies caused either by an increased velocity or an
obstruction. Nicholson et al (1993) consider that
clinical examination for bruits has good accuracy
(78%) and may be of clinical value in the early
detection of patients who are suitable for percu-
taneous angioplasty.
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 101
Doppler ultrasound
The Doppler ultrasound machine enables the
pulse to be heard much more clearly. The machine
consists of two piezoelectric quartz crystals, one of
which emits sound waves of very high frequency
(2-10 MHz). The degree of penetration of the
wave is inversely proportional to its frequency. It
is recommended that a 4 or 5 MHz probe is used
for deep vessels such as the femoral and popliteal
arteries and an 8 or 10 MHz probe is used for
superficial vessels such as pedal arteries
(Huntleigh Diagnostics 1999). The waves are
reflected off moving objects such as blood cells
and received back by the second crystal. The dif-
ference in frequency between the emitted and
reflected waves is emitted as a sound, the fre-
quency of which is proportional to the velocity of
the moving object. To obtain more information the
output may be fed into a hand-held or a comput-
erised chart recorder to produce a visible tracing
(Fig. 6.13). To protect the head of the probe, a
water-based coupling gel must always be used on
the skin surface. For best results the pulse should
be palpated and a blob of gel placed on the site.
The probe should be placed at an angle of 45° to
the skin surface and gently moved until an artery
is located. When using a trace, always angle the
probe proximally so that the systolic flow is
detected as flow towards the probe, showing as a
positive waveform, and reversed flow showing as
a negative waveform. Most machines used in the
community setting are the hand-held mini-
Doppler versions, although more sophisticated
versions are used in cardiovascular laboratories.
In its normal vasoconstricted state, the arterial
pulse is unmistakable as three clear sounds, a
triphasic response, the first being louder and of a
higher pitch. This is due to the ventricular bolus
being ejected from the heart during systole. The
second and third sounds are the diastolic sounds,
due to the reversal of flow caused by the elastic
distension in the arteries and a final forward flow
as the arteries rebound. The diastolic sounds cor-
respond to the 'dichrotic notch' seen on Doppler
traces, which will show two forward components
and one reverse component (Fig. 6.13A). Loss of
the reverse flow component or dampening of the
 102 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

systole

A triphasic trace typical of a healthy lower limb artery.

Note the reverse flow has started before the forward
flow has ended.

B
A biphasic trace typical of a lower limb artery
distal to a stenosis. Note dampened wave form
and loss of reverse flow.

A trace typical of a popliteal vein with intact valves

during compression and release of the vein.

D
A trace showing the typical pattern of valvular
incompetence in a vein.

compression release

Figure 6.13 Doppler traces A. Triphasic trace typical of a healthy lower limb artery. Note the reverse flow has started before
the forward flow in the systolic phase has ended B. A biphasic trace typical of a lower limb artery distal to a stenosis. Note
dampened waveform and loss of reverse flow C. A trace typical of a popliteal vein with intact valves during compression and
release of the vein D. A trace showing the typical pattern of valvular incompetence in a vein.

waveform indicates disease (Fig. 6.13B), although
a diphasic response can be seen with ageing as the
vessels lose compliability (Case history 6.3).
Forward and reverse flow simultaneously sug-
gests turbulence, as would occur just distal to a
site of stenosis. A monophasic response always
indicates disease, but care must be taken first to
ensure that the technique is not at fault. Patients
with bradycardia will have a weak triphasic
sound and patients with tachycardia will show
only a biphasic sound as the heart is beating too
rapidly for reverse flow to occur. The amplitude of
the waveform is not significant since it depends
on the angle of the probe.
Claudication distance
If the patient complains of intermittent claudica-
tion or if pedal pulses seem weak or absent, this
test can be used to give an indication of the sever-
ity of the arterial occlusion. The patient is exer-
cised, preferably on a treadmill, as the exercise
should be standardised, and the distance the
patient walks before the onset of pain is noted.
The treadmill should be at 0% incline and at a
speed of 4 km/h. No patient should be exercised
if there is a history of angina and it is recom-
mended that a full resuscitation kit should
always be present for any exercise test.
1--····----·-----·- -----.--------------.----
I Case history 6.3
I
------------------------------_._--_._--------_._-------
A ss-year-old female Caucasian presented to the clinic
with an ulcer of 12 months' duration over the right medial
maleolus. The patient complained that the skin had been
itchy prior to the ulcer occurring and had developed
following a knock to the right ankle. Pain was worsened
on standing for long periods and relieved by elevation of
the legs. She had no symptoms of paraesthesia or
claudication. Examination of the lower limbs was
remarkable for pitting oedema, varicose veins,
haemosiderosis, atrophe blanche and gravitational
eczema in the distal third of the right limb. The skin was
warm, pedal pulses were bounding and regular (70 beats
per minute) in the left foot but pedal pulses in the right
foot could not be palpated because of the oedema. Both
right pedal pulses were located with Doppler and gave a
regular, biphaslc signal. There was no evidence of trophic
changes to skin or soft tissue. An ischaemic (ankle-
brachial) index was not undertaken on the right leg
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 103
Ankle-brachial pressure index (ABPI)
This was first described by Yao in the 1960s. The
ankle-brachial index provides a good indication
of the presence of ischaemia in the lower limb. It
can be used quantitatively since it also correlates
well with the patient's symptoms, walking dis-
tance and angiography. It can be used to deter-
mine the optimum level of amputation and
prognoses for grafts (Ameli et al 1989, Davies
1992).
The ankle-brachial pressure index is arrived
at by recording the systolic pressure at the
brachial artery and at the posterior tibial artery
(ankle). Practitioners may find Doppler easier to
use than a stethoscope when trying to take a
reading of the systolic pressure in lower limb
arteries. The reading obtained for the ankle is
then divided by the brachial systolic reading and
is expressed as a ratio. The value obtained at the
ankle will depend on the position of the patient.
If the person is supine and the legs are at the
same horizontal level as the heart the ratio
should be 1. If the person is sitting or standing,
the pressure in the artery at the ankle will be
greater than in the arm, because of the vertical
column of blood between heart and ankle. As a
rule of thumb the ankle systolic pressure will be
2 mmHg higher for every inch below the heart.
Thus the ratio will be greater than 1. Average
because of the ulceration present. The ischaemic index
for the left leg was 1.2. The Doppler signal of the popliteal
vein in the popliteal fossa indicated venous reflux.
The past medical history revealed that the patient had
suffered a deep vein thrombosis while recuperating from
a major abdominal operation when 20 years old. The
thrombosis had been treated effectively at the time but
the patient had noticed some 10 years later that her right
leg began to ache and feel heavy after prolonged
standing. When she was about 40 years old her ankle
started to swell towards the end of the day and by the
time she was 50 the skin around the area had become
discoloured and itchy. Despite a range of treatments the
ulcer had not healed.
A diagnosis was made of venous ulceration, as a
result of post-thrombotic complications. These ulcers are
notoriously difficult to heal and account for the majority of
lower limb ulceration.
 104 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
values for healthy adults in the sitting position
are 0.98-1.31 (Davies 1992).
A ratio which is greater than 1 does not
always mean that all is well. Elderly patients may
show calcification of the tunica media of mus-
cular arteries (Monckeberg's sclerosis) which,
although independent of any atherosclerotic
process and clinically insignificant, leads to
incompressibility and a false high systolic pres-
sure value. People with diabetes are also prone to
calcification of the artery wall (not to be confused
with Monckeberg's sclerosis), again leading to
incompressibility of the artery. Nevertheless, 'the
measurement of ankle pressure using Doppler is
the single most valuable adjunct to the assess-
ment of the blood supply to the foot' (Faris 1991).
Any value below 1 should be checked again.
Values less than 0.8 suggest some obstruction
in the more proximal part of the artery to the
lower limb, although it is possible to find no
associated lesions in such patients. Values of 0.75
or less indicate severe problems, and at values
below 0.5 healing is unlikely to take place, the leg
being in a pre-necrotic state. Critical limb
ischaemia is said to be present when the ankle
systolic pressure falls below 50 mmHg or the toe
systolic pressure falls below 30 mmHg (Lowe
1993). Ischaemic ulcers may be present.
If severe ischaemia is suspected, but a high
ABPI is obtained due to calcification, the Pole test
can be used to calculate the ABPI (Smith et al
1994). The Pole test is a variation on the Buerger
test using a mini-Doppler machine. With the
patient supine, the suspected pedal artery is
located and the affected leg raised until the pulse
can no longer be heard. The vertical distance
between the heart and this point is noted. Ankle
systolic pressure is calculated using the formula
13 cm == 10 mmHg. Values of less than 40 cm
(31 mmHg) suggest severe occlusion. Calcifi-
cation will have no effect on this reading, but the
method is limited to those patients with pres-
sures less than 60 mmHg. It is also worth remem-
bering that the peroneal artery is usually spared
from calcification.
Since mild to moderate atherosclerotic change
may not affect the resting ABPI the effects of
exercise on the index are often observed (Davies
1992). Again a standardised treadmill exercise
should be used (4 km/h, 0% incline, 4 minutes).
In a healthy adult, unless exercise is severe, the
index will show no change or will rise but
rapidly returns to resting value once exercise has
stopped. In a person suffering from peripheral
vascular disease, the index will not rise and may
fall, taking a long time to return to resting values.
Heavy exercise may produce a fall in the index in
healthy subjects due to shunting of blood from
the distal arteries to the exercising muscles.
If the patient cannot be exercised, the hyper-
aemic test can be used. A second occlusion cuff is
placed proximal to the first and inflated to above
the systolic pressure for 2 minutes or as long as
the presence of ischaemic pain will allow. It is
then deflated and the systolic blood pressure is
immediately taken. The second cuff occludes the
arterial supply. Since venous drainage is also
temporarily interrupted, metabolites will accu-
mulate in the area. These have a vasodilatory
effect on the blood vessels, so that in a healthy
person, on releasing the second cuff, blood will
rush into the area, producing a temporary hyper-
aemia. This will cause a slight rise in systolic
blood pressure and so raise the value of the ABPI,
but will quickly return to normal values. In a
patient with peripheral vascular disease the nar-
rowed arteries will be unable to respond to the
vasodilatory effects of the metabolites, either
because they are unable to dilate or because the
occlusion prevents an increased flow, so that the
ABPI will either stay the same or fall.
If a low ankle-brachial index is recorded, the
index should be calculated at progressively higher
positions up the leg, to ascertain the site of the
occlusion. When using the ankle-brachial pres-
sure index it is also important to remember that
the value obtained for the ankle cannot accu-
rately predict the healing of lesions in the fore-
foot although pedal arteries are rarely affected by
atherosclerosis. Digital cuffs can be used to assess
the systolic reading in toes. A Doppler head of
10 mHz is preferable although not essential.
ABPI of the peroneal nerve, toe pressures and
analysis of the Doppler waveform will give a reli-
able indication of the presence of significant
ischaemia, which will be revealed as reduced

ABPI, reduced toe pressure and dampening of
the Doppler waveform.
The cardinal signs of ischaemia can be sum-
marised as follows:
• diminished or absent pedal pulses
• ABPI <0.9
• ischaemic pain.
Hospital tests
If an ischaemic limb has been identified, further
investigation may be required to assess:
• suitability for reconstructive surgery
• the prognosis for the healing of ulcers
• the level at which amputations should be
performed.
Macrocirculation
Duplex ultrasound. This xornbines B mode
ultrasound and Doppler to give both an image of
the artery under investigation and the flow
within that artery (Banga 1995). It takes time and
requires a level of expertise, but using Doppler
and pulse-generated run-off (PGR) a complete
non-invasive assessment of the lower limb can be
achieved, which reduces the need for contrast
angiography.
Angiography (arteriography). At present this
procedure, especially using intra-arterial digital
subtraction angiography, remains the gold stan-
dard for imaging the arterial supply of the lower
limb. A needle is inserted into the femoral artery
and a radio-opaque dye is injected just proximal
to the occlusion. It can be used to locate occlu-
sions and stenotic vessels and to determine
whether a collateral circulation has been estab-
lished. It is used to help determine the most
appropriate revascularisation procedure and, if a
bypass procedure is to be performed, the site of
the distal anastomosis. It also is used to predict
the prognosis for limb salvage and graft patency.
It can also be used during surgery, to enable the
surgeon to have an accurate picture of distal run-
off. Being an invasive procedure, it carries more
risks than non-invasive procedures, which are
likely to replace it as technicalities improve.
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 105
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) and positron
emission tomography (PET) scanning. These are
expensive, more recent procedures which can be
used to visualise the various parts of the circula-
tion. Initially, doubts were raised as to the value
of such procedures in the absence of evidence to
suggest any improvement in patient outcome
(Kapoor & Singh 1993c) but recent improvements
in resolution using gadolinium enhancement
now enable imaging of digital vessels as small as
1 mm diameter and have led Mercer & Berridge
(2000) to consider magnetic resonance angiogra-
phy as the modality of the future, eventually
replacing contrast angiography.
Microcirculation
Capillaroscopy. With the patient in a sitting
position, the capillaries of the pedal nail fold can
be examined, using an oil immersion microscope
under a strong light. The nutritive capillaries are
distinct and well filled with blood in a person
with no arterial disease but, as ischaemia pro-
gresses, the capillaries become hazy and less dis-
tinct. Capillaroscopy can be used to predict those
patients likely to develop critical limb ischaemia
as well as the likelihood of healing of ischaemic
ulcers.
Transcutaneous oxygen tension (Tcp02)' The
skin is heated to arterialise the capillaries and the
oxygen which diffuses to the surface of the skin
equilibrates with an electrolyte solution held in a
small chamber on the skin. The partial pressure
of oxygen in the solution is measured by an elec-
trode which screws into the chamber. This value
reflects the difference between oxygen supply
and consumption in the local tissues. Severe
ischaemia is indicated if the value is below
40 mmHg, when healing will be unlikely. This is
not a routine test but can be used as a predictor
of level of amputation and of the success of
angioplasty.
Photoelectric plethysmography. This method is
used to measure skin blood pressure. A light-
emitting diode is placed on the skin and a photo-
cell is used to detect the emitted light, which is
proportional to the amount of haemoglobin in
the tissues. A sphygmomanometer cuff is used to
 106 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

blanch the skin. The cuff is then slowly deflated • inflammation of the vein wall (phlebitis) with
and the pressure point at which a flow signal possible secondary formation of a thrombus
returns is taken to be the skin perfusion pressure. (phlebo-thrombosis).
A similar piece of apparatus is used to measu~e
The first condition affects superficial or com-
oxygen percentage saturation of the blood m
municating veins. The cause may be congenital,
pulse oximetry (Coull 1988). .
where family history is common; be caused by
Isotope clearance. This method IS used to
increased pressure, such as occurs during preg-
measure skin perfusion pressure (SPP) and skin
nancy; or an abdominal tumour or ascites which
vascular resistance (SVR) in the compromised
causes venodilation and renders the valves
foot in order to ascertain the likelihood of the
incompetent. Much less common are congenital
healing of ischaemic ulcers. The SVR can be cal-
conditions causing swelling or dilation of veins.
culated from the graph of clearance values and
The resulting back flow due to gravity leads to
applied pressure. A straight-line ~elations~ip
increased hydrostatic pressure in the lower limb
exists between the two and the SVR IS the reCIp-
veins, giving rise to the knotty appearance of
rocal of the slope. A small volume of the
varicose veins.
radioisotope technetium-99m, together with a
The second and third conditions can affect
vasodilator such as histamine, is injected into
superficial or deep veins, but part of th~ s.equela.e
the skin and the rate of clearance of the isotope
of deep vein pathology is often superficial van-
is recorded. The pressure from a sphygmo-
cosities. Phlebitis with no thrombosis affects
manometer cuff just necessary to prevent the
superficial veins, usually as a result of trauma or
radioisotope from leaving the area is taken as
infection. Causes of venous thrombi are multifac-
the SPP. This value reflects the degree of large
torial, being any factors which contribute to
artery disease. A value of 30 mmHg or more is
Virchow's triad of:
needed to ensure healing. Radionuclide
imaging as performed for investigation of coro- • stasis
nary arteries can also be used to estimate blood • hypercoagulability
flow in the foot and to detect the presence of • injury to the endothelium.
osteomyelitis (Faris 1991).
Patients suffering from recurrent thromboses
Laser-Doppler fluximetry. This measures the
show a familial tendency and an association has
movement of red blood cells in cutaneous
been demonstrated with a mutation for genes
vessels, which changes as ischaemia progresses
and so can be used to determine amputation
level. Table 6.7 Causes of venous insufficiency

Type Cause
VENOUS DRAINAGE Superfical Varicose veins:
primary - idiopathic
Venous problems may arise in the superficial, secondary - backflow from deep to
communicating and/or deep veins (Table 6.7). superficial vein
Superficial veins lie in the superficial fasci~, d~ep Thrombophlebitis
veins lie in skeletal muscle and communicating Phlebangioma (congenital swelling of vein)
veins link the two. There are three main patho- Phlebectasia (congenital dilation of vein)
logical processes affecting veins, which can be
Deep Deep vein thrombosis due to:
interlinked: abnormalities affecting blood flow
abnormalities of clotting
• absent or incompetent valves abnormalities of endothelium
• formation of a thrombus which may trigger Idiopathic
secondary inflammation of the vein wall
Thrombophlebitis
(thrombophlebitis)

coding for coagulation factor V, with greater inci-
dence among Caucasians than other ethnic
groups (Khachemoune et al 2001).
The presence of a thrombus in the deep veins,
whether causing or following an inflammatory
response, is much more serious than its presence
in a superficial vein as it will lead to chronic
venous insufficiency and the stasis syndrome
(post-thrombotic syndrome) in approximately a
quarter of these cases with the further risk of pul-
monary embolism. The incidence of deep vein
thrombosis (DVT) in the United States is 1:1000
with death from pulmonary embolism being
1-2% (Khachemoune et al200l).
Past history
As varicose veins and recurrent deep vein
thromboses tend to have a familial predisposi-
tion, it is important to ask the patient if anyone
else in the family suffers from the condition.
Varicose veins may be part of the post-thrombotic
syndrome (Case history 6.3) but do not always
indicate previous DVT. Patients should be asked
if they have previously suffered with any
venous problems, e.g. DVT. Women of child-
bearing age may have experienced a DVT
during, or more probably shortly after, child-
birth. Although this may have occurred some
years ago, it may be the underlying cause of
current venous problems.
Symptoms
Uncomplicated varicose veins may be asympto-
matic but present a cosmetic problem to many
women. Where superficial veins are affected by
phlebitis the vein and surrounding area will be
tender with erythema or cellulitis. If throm-
bophlebitis is present the vein will be palpable as
a linear, indurated cord and is usually associated
with tenderness, erythema and warmth.
A bursting or aching sensation associated
with ankle oedema suggests problems with the
deep veins. The pain and oedema are often alle-
viated by leg elevation. The onset of DVT can be
asymptomatic or be associated with severe pain,
tenderness and warmth in the calf. A ruptured
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 107
popliteal cyst, as sometimes occurs in patients
with rheumatoid arthritis, may cause similar
symptoms. If a DVT is suspected, it is not advis-
able to use any diagnostic test which increases
pressure on the calf, such as detection of
Homans' sign, as this increases the risk of
embolism. Because of the direction of venous
flow proximally and centrally, venous emboli
will be swept through increasingly larger
vessels and emptied into the heart. From
here they will enter the pulmonary circulation
and only here are the vessels small enough
to stop the embolus. Occlusion of the main
pulmonary vessels (pulmonary embolism) pre-
vents any gaseous exchange, often with fatal
consequences.
Observation
Hosiery
The wearing of elastic or support stockings or
bandages suggests some problem with venous
drainage. The extra compression provided by the
stocking aids venous blood flow and reduces
peripheral oedema.
Colour
Telangiectases (dilated microvasculature) around
the medial malleolus can indicate poor drainage
(Plate 4). A mottled cyanosis may appear in the
lower third of the lower limb due to stagnation of
blood in the veins as a result of poor drainage.
Atrophie blanche, white patches on the skin
around the ankles, occurs due to strangled micro-
circulation and leads to fibrotic and sclerotic
changes in the skin (Plate 5).
Brown iron complexes of haemosiderin may
be deposited in the tissues as a result of
increased hydrostatic pressure (Plate 6).
Differential diagnoses from haemosiderosis are
erythema ab igne, common in the elderly, and
necrobiosis lipoidica diabeticorum, a condition
associated with diabetes, where yellowish
patches are seen on the shins and the skin
appears very transparent, so that superficial
blood vessels can be seen.
 108 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Temperature
In venous insufficiency the skin often feels warm,
which suggests that the arterial supply is satis-
factory. However, it should be borne in mind that
recent thrombosis or venous embolus may
trigger inflammation in the veins (phlebitis).
Another cause of phlebitis is infection. Cellulitis,
general malaise, a rise in core temperature and a
portal of entry will be strong indicators of the
presence of infection.
Varicose veins
These may be due to incompetent valves in the
superficial or communicating veins alone or as a
consequence of DVT. Back pressure due to an
obstruction in the deep veins will accumulate
through the communicating veins to the
superficial veins. This causes the superficial veins
to become incompetent and forward flow of
blood is deficient. These veins are very extens-
ible, with non-uniform areas of weakness, and
have little support in the superficial tissues;
therefore, they bulge unevenly due to the pres-
sure of blood, giving the knotted appearance of
varicose veins. Varicosities are especially appar-
ent on standing. Poor tissue viability results,
which may lead to cellulitis or superficial
phlebitis, where the vein will be cord-like and
painful. If such a cord can be palpated in the calf
area, this does not indicate DVT, as the vein
involved is again a superficial one.
Tissue viability
Poor drainage results in the accumulation of
waste products. As a result, tissue viability is
adversely affected. The skin may eventually
become indurated. If the stasis is a consequence
of DVT, atrophy, venous (gravitational) eczema
and venous ulcers may result.
Gravitational (stasis) eczema
Signs of discoloration and pigmentation, scaly
and lichenified skin, in the presence of oedema,
haemosiderosis and atrophie blanche suggest a
diagnosis of gravitational eczema (Plate 6). The
area can be very pruritic; scratching may lead to
the development of ulcers. Patients with gravita-
tional eczema often find that they become sensi-
tised to topical antibiotics and to preservatives in
other topical medicaments and bandages.
Venous ulcers
These account for 85% of all leg ulcers and are
more common in women than men. They are
commonly found around the malleoli, in partic-
ular the medial malleolus, but can spread com-
pletely around the leg and when healed, form
unsightly scars (Plate 7). Venous ulcers are asso-
ciated with the post-thrombotic syndrome,
including gravitational eczema; they are rarely a
consequence of superficial varicosities. They are
usually shallow with irregular borders and have
either a healthy or slightly sloughy base unless
infected (Plate 8) (Ch. 17). Trauma is not always
the initiating factor. Venous ulcers are usually
only painful if they become infected. The pain
can be alleviated by leg elevation. Bacterial
infection is very common in long-standing
ulcers, which become malodorous and a source
of considerable misery and embarrassment to
the patient.
These ulcers are notoriously indolent. It is not
unusual for a patient to have suffered a venous
ulcer for many years which, despite daily atten-
tion, refuses to heal (Case history 6.3). In most
cases, this is because adequate compression is not
applied. In some cases malignant change, squa-
mous cell carcinoma, may occur. It is important
that the practitioner regularly monitors these
ulcers for signs of malignant change such as rolled
edges and a hyperplastic base.
Oedema
Oedema may be associated with venous problems
(Plate 8), occurring as part of the sequelae to DVT.
The increased hydrostatic pressure causes leakage
of tissue fluid, so that oedema results. If the
oedema is not controlled, the symptoms of post-
thrombotic syndrome will develop. Where the
tissue fluid is an exudate, it will contain plasma

proteins, including fibrinogen, and will become
organised. Transudate will not become organised
unless it is very long-standing. Once the oedema
is organised it cannot be squeezed by digital pres-
sure and so is called non-pitting. The oedema due
to DVT usually demonstrates pitting unless it is
very long-standing. There will often be an outline
of the patient's hosiery or footwear impressed on
the skin.
Oedema may result in ischaemia around the
ankle. In these instances moist gangrene may
occur if the occlusion of arteries is very severe.
The different types of oedema which can occur in
the lower limb and their differential diagnosis
are shown in Table 6.6.
Leg shape
Patients with chronic venous ulceration and
oedema may develop characteristic 'champagne
legs', also known as 'inverted bottle legs'.
Clinical tests
Pitting/non-pitting oedema
Digital pressure is firmly applied to the area for a
period of 3-5 seconds. If an imprint of the fingers
remains, the oedema is described as pitting.
Perthes test
This can be used to test the competency of leg
veins. With the leg dependent, an occlusion cuff
is inflated at mid-thigh level. The superficial
veins will become prominent as they fill. The
patient is then asked to walk for 5 minutes. If
the veins are healthy, the prominence will
reduce due to drainage into the deep veins. If
the superficial veins are incompetent, the
prominence will remain and if this is accompa-
nied by a dusky rubor it suggests that the deep
veins are incompetent.
Doppler
In contrast to the pulsating sounds of arteries,
veins give a non-pulsatile, continuous, low-
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 109
pitched sound, like wind sighing down a
chimney, because of the effects of respiration on
the flow of venous blood in the thorax. On a
chart the venous trace shows as an irregular,
continuous wavy line with flow away from the
probe (Fig. 6.13C). However, if there is excessive
fluid in the lower limbs, as in congestive heart
failure, the veins may give a pulsatile sound.
The Doppler machine can be used to test for
valvular incompetence of the calf veins as
follows.
With the patient standing and knee slightly
flexed, the Doppler probe should be positioned
over the vein in the popliteal fossa (it may be
easier to locate the popliteal artery and then
move the probe slightly sideways until the vein
is located). The practitioner should squeeze and
release the calf, distal to the probe. Two sharp
sounds should be heard. The first sound is
forward flow towards the probe as the vein is
squeezed and the second sound is reverse flow
due to gravity on release of the pressure. If there
is no sound on compression this indicates a
blockage between site of compression and
probe. If the second sound is not abrupt, but
continues and fades away, it suggests leakage of
blood through the valves. This will be seen on a
chart recording as a sharp peak, corresponding
to flow towards the probe and a rapidly rising
and much slower descending, irregular trace in
the opposite direction as the blood flows
through the valve (Fig. 6.130). This test should
not be performed if a DVT is suspected.
Hospital tests
Plethysmography. A range of methods can be
used - impedance or air plethysmography, phle-
borheoplethysmography and mercury strain-
gauge plethysmography. These instruments can
be used to diagnose thrombotic obstruction of
major proximal veins of the extremities. They are
not useful for detecting calf vein thrombosis.
Venous angiography. A radio-opaque dye is
injected into the affected vein to show valvular
incompetence and the presence of an obstruction.
Duplex ultrasound. Duplex can be used to
ascertain the long saphenous vein suitability for
 110 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

femoral bypass grafting as well as determining system, such as obstruction or damage due to
the presence of a thrombus. r~diotherapy, malignant disease, surgery (Case
history 6.4), pregnancy ('white leg') or certain
tropical infections (filariasis).
LYMPHATIC DRAINAGE
As previously described, the lymphatic vessels
Observation
play an important part in draining tissue fluid
back, via the thoracic duct, to the heart. If Oedema
lymphatic drainage is adversely affected,
In primary lymphoedema the oedema begins as
oedema (lymphoedema) results. Lymphoedema
a soft, pitting form but becomes harder and non-
can be congenital, where it is classified as
pitting with time. The condition can be unilateral
primary, or acquired, where it is classified as
or .t'ilateral. Secondary lymphoedema is usually
secondary lymphoedema. The causes of
umlateral and considerable fibrosis may occur
primary and secondary lymphoedema are out-
(Case history 6.4, Table 6.8).
lined in Table 6.8.

Tissue viability
Medical history and symptoms
The tissue fluid stagnation will interfere with dif-
A history of permanent oedema, usually confined
fusion of gases and nutrients and removal of
to the lower limbs, suggests primary lymph-
waste products and, as a result, impair tissue via-
oedema, especially if there is a family history of
bility. It may be associated with troublesome cel-
the disease as one form is an autosomal dominant
lulitis and usually leads to a thickening and
condition (Milroy's disease).
scaling of the skin, which can lead to an
Onset is either early in life (lymphoedema
'elephantiasis-like' appearance: an oedematous
praecox) or after the age of about 35 years
leg with skin that resembles elephant skin.
(lymphoedema tarda). It affects females more
than males. Unlike venous oedema, once it is
organised, it will not be alleviated by leg eleva-
tion. In contrast, secondary lymphoedema will
arise as a result of some trauma to the lymphatic Case history 6.4
A40-year-old male Caucasian attended clinic
complaining of difficulty in undertaking routine foot
care of the left foot. An assessment of the vascular
Table 6.8 Causes of lymphoedema status revealed ~hat the left leg was considerably
largerthan the nght and the skin was thickened, dry
Type Cause a~d coarse. Th~ nails on the left were very thickened,
distorted and discoloured. Examination of the left leg
Primary (congenital) Milroy's disease showed the presence of non-pitting oedema. The
Idiopathic patientsaid the left leg had become very swollen and
theskin thickened and dry after an operation on his
Secondary (acquired) Intrinsic: groin.
malignant neoplasia The past medical history revealedthat the patient
radiotherapy had ~ad testicular cancer. This had been treated by
surgical excision of surgical removal of the testicles and radiotherapy. His
lymph nodes problems with the left leg had resulted afterthe
filariasis course of radiotherapy.
infection Adiagnosis of secondary lymphoedema was
pregnancy made. It is likely that the radiotherapy damaged the
Extrinsic: left-side inguinal lymph nodes and as a result
trauma lymphatic drainage of the left leg was adversely
plaster cast affected, resulting in lymphoedema.

Lymphangitis and lymphadenitis
As the majority of tissue fluid normally drains
into the lymphatic system, it follows that any
infection present in the tissues, as indicated by
the presence of cellulitis, will also drain into the
lymph vessels unless dealt with by the inflamma-
tory response at the site of infection. The pres-
ence of infection in the lymphatic vessels causes
local inflammation, seen as red streaks following
the course of the vessel; it is called lymphangitis.
Should the infection reach the lymph
nodes/ glands into which the lymph vessels
drain, they will become tender and swollen (lym-
phadenitis). If not overcome by the body's
natural defences or by appropriate antibiosis, the
infection will enter the bloodstream (bacter-
aemia) and finally cause widespread systemic
infection (septicaemia /blood poisoning).
Yellow nail syndrome
The nail appears yellow in colour, thickened
but smooth and there is an increase in lateral
curvature. The rate of growth of the nail is
reduced. The condition is associated with
chronic lymphoedema.
Clinical tests
It is not usual to carry out any clinical tests for
lymphoedema apart from those which will dis-
tinguish it from other types of oedema, such as
whether it is pitting or non-pitting.
Hospital tests
Angiography for lymphatic vessels (lymphan-
giography) can be carried out in the same
REFERENCES
Ameli F M, Stein M, Provan J L, Aro L, Prosser R, St Louis
E L 1989 Comparison between transcutaneous oximetry
and ankle-brachial pressure ratio in predicting run off
and outcome in patients who undergo aortofemoral
bypass. Canadian Journal of Surgery 32: 428--432
Banga J D 1995 Lower extremity arterial disease in diabetes
mellitus. Journal of British Podiatric Medicine 50: 68-72
VASCULAR ASSESSMENT 111
manner as for venography. In primary lym-
phoedema X-rays may show hypoplasia of the
lymphatic system, with the lymphatic channels
appearing scanty and spidery.
SUMMARY
This chapter has outlined an assessment process
from which practitioners can arrive at a diagno-
sis of the vascular status of a patient. Case
studies have been included to illustrate the
effects of vascular problems.
The information gained from the vascular
assessment can be used to make a diagnosis and
draw up an effective treatment plan. While many
different pathologies can affect the cardiovascu-
lar system, there are five important signs which
should always alert the practitioner to further
investigation:
• absence of pedal pulses
• ABPI <0.9
• intermittent claudication
• oedema
• a difference in temperature between the two
lower limbs of 2°C or more.
It is important to establish if tissue perfusion
falls within an acceptable range in relation to
the patient's age. If it does, as long as no other
problems exist, the patient can receive the same
treatment as for any other non-risk patient. If
vascular problems are present or there is a dis-
tinct possibility they will occur in the future,
then it is important to give prophylactic advice
and treatment. Choice of treatment, e.g. surgery,
will be affected by the presence of vascular
problems, as wound healing will be impaired
and the patient is at greater risk of developing
infections.
Blackwell S 2001 Common anemias - What lies behind?
Clinical Reviews 11: 53-62
Coull A 1988 Making sense of pulse oximetry. Nursing
Times 32: 42--43
Davies C S 1992 A comparative investigation of ankle-
brachial pressure indices within an age variable
population. British Journal of Podiatric Medicine 48: 21-24
 112 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Davies A H, Horrocks M 1992 Vascular assessment and the
ischaemic foot. Foot 2: 1-6
Faris I 1991 The management of the diabetic foot, 2nd edn.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 150
Ganong W F 1991 Review of medical physiology, 15th edn.
Lange, London, p 510
Hecht H S, Superko H R 2001 Electron beam tomography
(EBT) may improve diagnosis of subclinical CAD in
females. Journal of the American College of Cardiology
37: 1506-1511
Howell M A, Colgan M P, Seeger R W, Ramsay D E, Sumner
D S 1989 Relationship of severity of lower limb
peripheral vascular disease to mortality and morbidity: a
six year follow-up study. Journal of Vascular Surgery 9:
691-696, discussion 697
Huntleigh Diagnostics 1999 Library of sounds-support booklet
for audio cassette. Huntleigh Diagnostics, Cardiff, pp 5-21
Insall R L, Davies R L Prout W G 1989 Significance of the
Buerger's test in the assessment of lower limb ischaemia.
Journal of the Royal Society of Medicine 82: 729-731
Kapoor A S, Singh B N 1993a Prognosis and risk assessment
in cardiovascular disease. Churchill Livingstone, New
York, p 131
Kapoor A S, Singh B N 1993b Prognosis and risk assessment
in cardiovascular disease. Churchill Livingstone, New
York, pp 130-131, 145
Kapoor A S, Singh B N 1993c Prognosis and risk assessment
in cardiovascular disease. Churchill Livingstone, New
York, pp 4, 11,423
Khachemoune A, Sahu M, Phillips T J 2001 Diagnostic
dilemmas. Wounds 13: 2-4
Kumar P L Clark M L 1990a Clinical medicine. A textbook
for medical students and doctors, 2nd edn. Bailliere
Tindall, London, p 571
FURTHER READING
Berkow R (ed) 2000 The Merck manual. Merck, Sharp and
Dohme Research Laboratories, New Jersey
Berne R M, Levy M N 1992 Cardiovascular physiology, 6th
edn. Mosby Year Book, St Louis, MO
Vander A, Sherman L Luciano D 2000 Human physiology -
the mechanisms of body function, international
Kumar P L Clark M L 1990b Clinical medicine. A textbook
for medical students and doctors, 2nd edn. Bailliere
Tindall, London, p 516
Kumar P L Clark M L 1990c Clinical medicine. A textbook
for medical students and doctors, 2nd edn. Bailliere
Tindall, London, pp 539-540
Kumar P L Clark M L 1990d Clinical medicine. A textbook
for medical students and doctors, 2nd edn. Bailliere
Tindall, London, p 538
Lainge S P, Greenhalgh R M 1980 Standard exercise test
to assess peripheral arterial disease. British Medical
Journal 280: 13-16
Lowe G D 0 (ed) 1993 Critical limb ischaemia - a slide
lecture kit. Schering Health Care/Professional
Postgraduate Services Europe Ltd, Worthing
Mercer KG, Berridge D C 2000 Peripheral vascular disease
and vascular reconstruction. In: Boulton A J M, Connor
H, Cavannagh P R (eds) The foot in diabetes, 3rd edn.
J Wiley, Chichester, p 220
Murphie P 2001a Macrovasular disease aetiology and
diabetic foot ulceration. Journal of Wound Care 10:
103-107
Murphie P 200lb Microvascular disease aetiology in
diabetic foot ulceration. Journal of Wound Care 10:
159-162
Nicholson M L Byrne R L, Steele G A, Callum K G 1993
Predictive value of bruits and Doppler pressure
measurements in detecting lower limb arterial stenosis.
European Journal of Vascular Surgery 7: 59-62
Smith F C T, Shearman C P, Simms M H, Gwynn B R 1994
Falsely elevated ankle pressures in severe leg ischaemia:
the pole test - an alternative approach. European Journal
of Vascular Surgery 8: 408-412
edition, 8th edn. McGraw-Hill, Boston
Walker W E 1991 A colour atlas of peripheral vascular
disease. Wolfe Medical, London
Yao S T 1970 Haemodynamic studies in peripheral arterial
disease. British Journal of Surgery 57: 761-766
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Why undertake an assessment of the patient's

neurological status? 113

OVERVIEW OF THE HISTOLOGY,

Neurological
ORGANISATION AND FUNCTION OF THE
NERVOUS SYSTEM 115
assessment
Histology 115 J. McLeod Roberts
Glial cells 115
Neurones 115

Organisation 116
Anatomical classification 116
Functional classification 122

Function 124
The nerve impulse 124
Sensory pathways 126
Motor pathways 129
Cerebellum 130 There are many conditions affecting the nervous
Basal ganglia 130
system which modify lower limb function
Reflexes 130 (Table 7.1). The purpose of this chapter is to
Reflex arcs 131 enable the practitioner to detect the presence of
Coordination and posture 133 these conditions. The chapter begins with an
outline of the histology, organisation and func-
THE NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 134
tion of the nervous system. Reflexes are dealt
General overview of neurological function 135 with as a separate topic as they form the basis of
History 135 so much neurological behaviour. It is not possible
Observation 136 to discuss the nervous system without also
Assessment of the level of consciousness 136 making some reference to the muscular system:
History 136 since muscles are the effector organs for much
Observation 137
Clinical tests 137
nervous activity, neurological deficits are often
Hospital tests 137 recognised by their characteristic effects on
Laboraory tests 138 muscle. Similarly, muscular disease may show
Assessment of lower limb sensory
similar characteristics to those of nervous dis-
function 138 orders. The second part of this chapter is con-
History 139 cerned with a detailed description of the
Clinical tests 139 assessment of each part of the neuromuscular
Hospital tests 144
system and, for the purposes of this chapter, the
Assessment of lower limb motor function 144 descriptive term 'neurological' is also taken to
Upper motor neurone lesions 145
Lower motor neurone lesions 146
imply 'neuromuscular' wherever appropriate.

Assessment of coordination/proprioception
function 150 Why undertake an assessment of the
Observation 150
Clinical tests 151
patient's neurological status?
It is important to undertake an assessment of the
Assessment of autonomic function 153
Observation 153 neurological status in order to identify whether
Clinical tests 153 the patient has an intact and normally function-
Summary 154
ing neurological system. The purpose of the
assessment is to:
• establish which, if any, part of the nervous
system is functioning abnormally
113
 114 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 7.1 Neurological conditions that may affect the lower limb

Condition Description

Cerebral vascular accident (CVA) (stroke) Due to haemorrhage, embolus or thrombosis of the cerebral arteries
Parkinsonism Degeneration of dopaminergic receptors. Usually idiopathic but can be
drug induced
Friedreich's ataxia One of a group of hereditary syndromes affecting the cerebellum.
Inheritance is autosomal recessive. Onset in childhood, death usual
around 40 years
Multiple sclerosis Patchy demyelination of the CNS. Shows relapses and remissions.
Onset 20+
Poliomyelitis Virus that affects lower motor neurones (LMNs).
Syringomyelia Progressive destruction of the spinal cord due to blockage of central
canal, e.g. tumour
Tabes dorsal Occurs with tertiary stage syphilis
Spina bifida Defective closure of vertebral column. Congenital
Motor neurone disease Degeneration of both upper motor neurones (UMNs) and LMNs. No
sensory loss. Onset usually between 40 and 60 years. Death usually
due to respiratory infection. Idiopathic
Subacute combined degeneration Due to lack of vitamin B12 . Usually seen in pernicious anaemia. Affects
of the spinal cord both sensory and motor tracts in the spinal cord. See UMN signs,
sensory and proprioceptive deficit. Reversible if detected in time
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease/ Affects peroneal nerve, predominantly motor with variable sensory
peroneal muscle atrophy/hereditary deficit. Commonest inherited neuropathy. Usually autosomal dominant.
motor-sensory neuropathy Onset in teens, slowly worsens
Guillain-Barre syndrome Post-viral autoimmune response, rapid onset, potentially fatal from
respiratory failure. Predominantly motor effects, with muscle weakness
and paralysis, but some sensory loss; 80% of patients show full
recovery. Also chronic relapsing form
Neurofibromatosis Autosomal dominant condition that leads to tumours of nerves and
compression of spinal cord
Peripheral neuropathy Occurs due to a variety of causes, e.g. alcoholism, injury, diabetes
mellitus
Myasthenia gravis Autoimmune disease that affects the neuromuscular junction and leads
to severe fatigue and weakness/paralysis
Myopathies Range of relatively rare diseases affecting muscle only. May be inherited
or acquired. Symptoms similar to LMN diseases but no fasciculation

• identify the extent of dysfunction
• where possible, arrive at a specific diagnosis
• draw up a treatment plan which takes
account of the above information.
It is important to establish which part or parts
of the nervous system are affected. For example,
an ataxic (uncoordinated) gait may be due to a
disorder of the cerebellum or a lack of proprio-
ceptive information. The practitioner may be in a
position to identify early changes in neurological
function, e.g. initial clinical features associated
with multiple sclerosis such as double vision,
falling over, tingling sensations, and loss of func-
tion. If an appropriate treatment plan is to be
drawn up, knowledge of the presence of any con-
dition and its specific effects on the lower limb is
essential. For example, sufferers of Cuillain-Barre
syndrome are predisposed to foot ulcers and so
the treatment plan should include preventative
measures and a monitoring programme, as 10%
of patients may show incomplete recovery.

OVERVIEW OF THE HISTOLOGY,
ORGANISATION AND FUNCTION OF
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
HISTOLOGY
There are two types of cell that make up the tissue
of the nervous system: glial cells and neurones.
Glial cells
There are four types of glial cell (Fig. 7.1):
• ependymal
• oligodendrocytes (brain) and Schwarm cells
(periphery)
• astrocytes
• microglial.
Ependymal cells are involved in the secretion
and absorption of cerebrospinal fluid (CSF),
which acts as an interstitial fluid, bathing the cells
of the brain and spinal cord. Oligodendrocytes in
the brain and Schwarm cells in the periphery are
responsible for the manufacture of a fatty
(myelin) sheath around the axons of the neu-
rones, which improves the speed of nerve con-
duction. They also playa role in the development
and repair of nervous tissue, helping to guide the
growing axons to their correct destinations.
Astrocytes have a buffering function, ensuring
that the K+ concentration of the CSF is constant.
This is essential for the correct functioning of the
neurones. These cells may also have a nutritive
role, they are phagocytic and they take up certain
neurotransmitters. Microglial cells are also
phagocytic and remove debris. Since glial cells
outnumber the neurones by a factor of at least
10 to 1, their sheer bulk means that they provide
structural support, there being no connective
tissue within the nervous tissue.
Neurones
Despite being in the minority, a mere 10 12 in the
brain, it is these cells which have the very
special function of rapid communication, trans-
mitting signals or nerve impulses from one
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 115
Blood vessel
Pedicle
A B
C D
Figure 7.1 Neuroglia A. Fibrous astrocyte B. Ependymal
cell C. Oligodendrocyte D. Microglial cell.
neurone to the next, or to other excitable tissue
such as muscle. Like other highly specialised
cells, neurones lose the ability to mitose soon
after birth and so once the cell body is
destroyed, it cannot be replaced; damage results
in permanent changes.
A neurone consists of four main parts (Fig. 7.2):
1. Cell body. This contains the nucleus and
other organelles and is the site of synthesis of
chemicals (neurotransmitters) for the transmission
of impulses.
2. Dendrites. These fine branches from the cell
body are the chief receptive area for impulses
from other neurones or for the reception of other
stimuli.
3. Axon. This is the conducting portion and
can be up to 1m in length. It conducts electrical
impulses and is also involved in the transport of
various substances to and from the cell body. It
may be myelinated as shown but if less than Lpm
in diameter it will be unmyelinated.
4. Presynaptic terminals. These are fine
branches of the axon and are responsible for the
release of neurotransmitters to enable the
116 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

'.j'ti===:;:=== Neurofibrils
.~ Nissl bodies

\ \ - - - Dendrites

Node of
Ranvier - - - - ' l o . ",-- Myelin sheath
\\\'ll'r---- Nucleus of Schwann cell
Axon----~\

' - - - - Synaptic knob

Figure 7.2 A single neurone (not to

scale) illustrating the four parts: cell body,
dendrites, axon, presynaptic terminals.
-r--=------'''----- Presynaptic terminal Note that in the eNS some neurones may
have no axons.

impulse to pass from one neurone to the next or

on to a muscle or gland. - - - - - Presynaptic
The gap or synapse between one neurone *"-------- Postsynaptic
and the next is an area of physical discontinuity
(Fig. 7.3).

II",,~\ ...1 ' - - - 7 9 - - Presynaptic

ORGANISATION )~::::~L__ Postsynaptic

The nervous system can be divided in a number Presynaptic _::..JL----\.)/ ":;"....,4-""::_- Postsynaptic
of ways to identify its different parts, based on
both anatomical and functional classifications
(Fig. 7.4).

Anatomical classification Presynaptic _~~#,---':~)I,y.:·· ':\'G??'"

Central nervous system (CNS) Postsynaptic ----II------,H

This contains all the structures lying within the

central axis of the body; the brain and spinal Figure 7.3 Diagram of synapses, identifying pre- and
cord. It consists of neurones and glial cells. postsynaptic membranes (adapted from Vander et aI1990).
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 117

<
BRAIN
CENTRAL
NERVOUS (CNS)
SYSTEM
SPINAL CORD

<
NERVOUS AFFERENT (SENSORY)
SYSTEM
(NS) SOMATIC NS

EFFERENT (MOTOR)
PERIPHERAL
NERVOUS (PNS)
SYSTEM AFFERENT

AUTONOMIC NS <SYMP
< EFFERENT

PARASYMP

Figure 7. 4 Flow diagram of the organisation of the nervous system.

The brain can be divided into fore-, mid- and
hindbrain and is covered by the three meninges
and protected by the cranium (Fig. 7.5). The cere-
bral cortex (telencephalon) consists of two hemi-
spheres (right and left), each of which is divided
into four lobes by deep grooves or sulci. The four
lobes are frontal, parietal, temporal and occipi-
tal. The cortex is highly convoluted, which
increases its surface area and therefore the
number of neurones it contains. It overshadows
other structures in the forebrain such as the basal
ganglia and thalamus (diencephalon). An inter-
connected collection of cortical and subcortical
structures - including parts of the frontal and
temporal lobes, thalamus and hypothalamus -
form the limbic system, the output of which is
coordinated by the hypothalamus.
The cerebellum consists of two hemispheres
which are primarily composed of the anterior
and posterior lobes. These are phylogenetically
younger than the flocculonodular lobe and the
midline structure called the vermis. The
brain stem consists of the medulla, pons and mid-
brain. It contains a diffuse network of neurones
called the reticular formation and discrete clus-
ters of neurones called nuclei. The parts of the
brain and their main functions are listed in
Table 7.2.

Table 7.2 Areas of the brain and their function

Area Function

Forebrain Cerebral cortex Frontal lobe: abstract thought, conscious action, speech
Parietal lobe: general senses, verbal understanding
Temporal lobe: hearing, taste, smell, emotions
Occipital lobe: vision
Diencephalon Thalamus: sensory relay station
Hypothalamus: emotions, endocrine system, ANS
Limbic system: motivation and emotions
Basal ganglia: movement
Midbrain Corpora quadrigemina Superior colliculi: visual orientation
Inferior colliculi: auditory orientation
Hindbrain Pons Modification of respiration
Cerebellum Modification of movement
Medulla oblongata Vital control centres
 118 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Cerebrum

Diencephalon

-t'rt'W-{-- Cerebellum

aP=---I--- Spinal cord

Somatosensory cortex

---',,---- Parietal lobe

~T-- Taste cortex

Frontal lobe ---f--jf;,..+-".. '-+--+-_ Auditory cortex
'...' \''8\--t-- Occipital lobe

~.,~';iIII"""''--- Visual cortex

Figure 7.5 The brain A. Anatomy of the brain B. Position of the lobes and cortex (adapted from Vander et al 1998).

The spinal cord is surrounded by the 32 ver- and their axons form the 'white matter' because
tebrae of the spinal column; the cell bodies of of the presence of myelin. Cerebrospinal fluid
the neurones form the so-called 'grey matter' (CSF) circulates through and over the brain and
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 119

spinal cord. During development a difference in
growth rates between the spinal cord and the
surrounding vertebrae means that the spinal
cord ends at the upper border of the second
lumbar vertebra (Fig. 7.6). The dura mater and
the subarachnoid space, with eSF, continue to
the level of the second sacral vertebra, so that
lumbar punctures can be performed at the level
of L3 or L4 to withdraw a sample of eSF
without damaging the spinal cord.

A""l--=---Cl
10 ~L.J 1 C2
D
CJ
02
03 C3
tJ 04 C4
/l 05 C5
~ C6
:R
=-'
06
C)7
C7

~~:rif=~~""'M-_T--- Lumbar plexus L1-4

l--+H-+---+---- Femoral
t;tS1--t-'r-----'\--- Sacral plexus L4, 5; S1-3

Hamstring nerve --j"----t----l--T-+t-'

L3
Sciatic - - - ' - - - - + - t f l
L4
1 + - - - - - - Common peroneal
L5

1 + - - - - - - - Superficial peroneal
Tibial - - - - - - - f - - l I H I
I f f i H + - - - - - - - Saphenous

~- Deep peroneal

Figure 7.6 The spinal cord A. Relationship of vertebrae to spinal cord segments (reproduced from Matthews & Arnold
1991, with permission) B. Organisation of the lumbar and sacral plexi and innervation of the lower limb (adapted from
McClintic 1980).
 120 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Peripheral nervous system (PNS)
The PNS comprises those nerves that lie outside
the spinal cord and brain, which can be sub-
divided into:
• afferent nerve fibres, which carry impulses
towards the CNS from receptors such as
warmth receptors
• efferent nerve fibres, which carry impulses
away from the CNS to effectors such as the
leg muscles or sweat glands.
The nerve processes form 12 pairs of cranial
nerves originating from the brain stem and 31
pairs of spinal nerves. The spinal nerves emerge
from the spinal cord as two roots, a dorsal (pos-
terior) and a ventral (anterior) root, which then
join to form the peripheral mixed spinal nerve
(Fig. 7.7), which emerges between two adjacent
vertebrae. The dorsal root contains the cell bodies
of afferent fibres in a swelling called the dorsal
root ganglion. The central process of each affer-
ent neurone travels into the area of grey matter of
the spinal cord called the dorsal horn. The
ventral root contains mainly efferent fibres, the
cell bodies of which lie within the ventral and
lateral horns of the spinal grey matter.

Internuncial neurones
Dorsal root

Peripheral receptor

Smooth muscle
or gland

Skeletal muscle
~----,Ht-- Grey ramus

White ramus

Ventral root

VI"e",' orqan
rn/
~ , ....•...
/~
.~.,
!---- Sympathetic ganglion

B Visceral receptor

Figure 7.7 A. Transverse section through the spinal cord showing mixed spinal nerve roots: (1) the paired mixed spinal
nerves; (2) dorsal (posterior) root; (3) ventral (anterior) root (4) central grey matter; (5) dorsal horn; (6) ventral horn; (7)
central canal; (8) surrounding white matter; and (9) dorsal root ganglion B. Connection between sensory and motor neurone
to the spinal cord (adapted from McClintic 1980).
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 121

The spinal nerves are mixed as they contain

both afferent and efferent fibres, from both the
somatic and the autonomic nervous system (see L1
below). This is why damage to a spinal nerve L1
may affect autonomic function (e.g. loss of
bladder control) as well as motor and sensory
function, depending upon the site of damage.
Again, the unequal growth rates of spinal cord
L2 L2
and vertebral column mean that the spinal
nerves from L2 onwards have to travel some way
posteriorly before emerging at the appropriate
level between the vertebrae. This results in the
formation of the 'cauda equina'.
A dermatome is defined as an area of skin sup-
plied by a single nerve's dorsal root. It also
implies that muscles are innervated in a similar
segmental pattern. Dermatomes overlap each r---L5
other by up to 30%, so if a spinal nerve is damaged
there will not be a total loss of sensation in that L5

area as adjacent dermatomes will respond to

stimuli. The dermatomes of the lower limb are
outlined in Figure 7.8.

Muscle
Muscle is divided histologically into three main
types (Table 7.3): Front Back

• skeletal Figure 7.8 The lower limb sensory dermatomes and their
• cardiac nerve roots (adapted from Epstein et al 1992).
• smooth.
In general, skeletal muscle is structurally the where in between. All three types of muscle
most highly organised, smooth muscle has the depend on the binding of calcium ions to
simplest structure and cardiac muscle lies some- calcium-binding proteins to initiate contraction.

Table 7.3 Classification of muscular tissue

Features Skeletal Cardiac Smooth

Structure Elongated fibres Branched fibres Spindle-shaped fibres

Multi-nucleated syncytium Single nucleus per cell Single nucleus per cell
Striations visible Striations visible No striations visible
Innervation Somatic nerves Autonomic nerves Autonomic nerves
Function Moves bones Pumps blood Moves vessels, organs and glands
Functions as part of a motor unit Forms a functional unit Forms functional sheets
Cannot contract without Has myogenicity Myogenicity in some smooth
nerve impulse muscles
Conscious control Unconscious control Unconscious control
 122 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
This shortening involves the formation of cross-
bridges and sliding of actin and myosin
myofilaments over one another.
Functional classification
While it is possible to divide the nervous system
into areas according to function, it has to be
remembered that the nervous system acts as a
coordinated whole, so that many areas of the
somatic and autonomic nervous systems will
work together. This is best illustrated by the total
response to an intensely painful stimulus, where
the painful stimuli are fed not only into the
sensory cortex but also to the hypothalamus and
limbic system, and the response is a product of
action by the somatic motor, autonomic and
endocrine systems on a range of muscles and
glands.
Somatic nervous system
This includes all parts of the nervous system that
deal with the conscious perception of stimuli and
conscious action, including the sensorimotor or
so-called conscious cortex. The afferent nerves
can also be called sensory nerves and the efferent
nerves can be called motor nerves. The receptors
detect changes in the external environment
and the effectors bring about movement of the
skeleton.
Autonomic nervous system (ANS)
This is the part of the nervous system that deals
with the internal organs. The parts of the brain
primarily involved with the autonomic system
are the hypothalamus and the limbic system. The
terms sensory and motor are not used here, as
these terms imply consciousness, and much
information coming from the viscera, such as
partial pressure of oxygen in arterial blood, does
not reach consciousness; likewise, the move-
ments of the viscera are rarely voluntary move-
ments. The afferent neurones are similar in
arrangement to those of the somatic system, with
cell bodies in the dorsal root ganglia, although
the receptors are situated in internal organs such
as the baroreceptors of the carotid sinus. The
efferent branches of the ANS differ from those in
the somatic system in that there are two neurones
in the pathway. The cell body of the first neurone
is in the eNS but those of the second are found in
the autonomic ganglia outside the eNS. This
divides the efferent neurones into pre- and post-
ganglionic neurones. This efferent outflow can be
further divided into the sympathetic and
parasympathetic systems (Fig. 7.9). The effector
organs for both systems are composed of smooth
or cardiac muscle.
Parasympathetic nervous system. This is the
efferent part of the autonomic nervous system
which restores the 'status quo' and allows emp-
tying actions. The cell bodies of the preganglionic
neurones are situated in the brain stem and sacral
region of the spinal cord (craniosacral outflow).
The postganglionic cell bodies are found in
ganglia close to or within the effector organ being
innervated, so that the majority of the efferent
pathway is preganglionic. The neurotransmitter
released at both the pre- and postganglionic
endings is called acetylcholine.
Sympathetic nervous system. This is the effer-
ent branch of the autonomic nervous system
which prepares the body for action: the fight or
flight response. The cell bodies of the pregan-
glionic neurones are found in the lumbar and
thoracic regions of the spinal cord and the sym-
pathetic ganglia form a chain alongside the
spinal cord, so that the majority of the efferent
pathway is postganglionic (see Fig. 7.7B). The
neurotransmitter released at the preganglionic
endings is again acetylcholine, but the postgan-
glionic endings mostly release noradrenaline
(norepinephrine).
Where an effector organ receives dual innerva-
tion, the two branches usually act antagonisti-
cally, in a push-pull or accelerator-brake fashion,
to regulate the activity of the effector organ. For
example, the vagus nerve (tenth cranial nerve)
slows the heart rate down and the sympathetic
nerve speeds it up. However, the parasympa-
thetic nerves do not innervate structures outside
the central axis apart from blood vessels of the
pelvic region. All other peripheral structures,
skin and blood vessels, are innervated by the
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 123

Preganglionic fibres
Postganglionic fibres

Eye

Pons
Medulla
~' •
,."
,."
,."
-- .... ---------- Olfactory glands

Salivary glands

Adrenal Spleen
glands

Kidney

Small intestine

Colon

Parasympathetic
Sympathetic

Figure 7.9 Autonomic outflow (adapted fro m Vander et al 1998).

 124 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
sympathetic system. Sympathetic activity causes
peripheral vasoconstriction and a reduction in
this activity or 'tone' causes vasodilation.
FUNCTION
As with all systems within the body, the prime
function of the nervous system is to ensure that
the internal environment which bathes the cells is
maintained within acceptable limits (homeosta-
sis). The particular role of the nervous system is
to ensure that the collection of cells and tissues
that constitute our bodies can act as an organised
whole. This can only be achieved if the cells can
communicate with one another. The nervous
system has evolved as the system of rapid com-
munication, usually producing short-term
effects. It evolved with, and works alongside, the
generally slower endocrine system, which tends
to have long-term effects.
The nerve impulse
Neurones use two types of signal to achieve
intercellular communication - graded and action
potentials. Both types of signals are dependent
upon the movement of ions across the cell mem-
brane and through protein ion channels, but they
also show many differences.
Action potential
This is used by the neurone to transmit an
impulse over long distances along its fine cyto-
plasmic processes, the dendrites and axons (see
Fig. 7.2). The action potential is initiated by a
voltage change which causes sodium channels to
open, allowing the influx of sodium. The entry of
these positively charged ions causes a reversal of
the resting membrane potential or a 'depolarisa-
tion'. Provided the initial voltage change is large
enough and of sufficient duration, a threshold
value of depolarisation will be reached and a
positive feedback cycle will be established,
causing further opening of sodium channels and
depolarisation. The magnitude of this depolari-
sation will be dependent on the number of ion
channels present in the plasma membrane and is
therefore fixed for a particular neurone. Provided
the threshold is reached, the resulting action
potential will always have the same value for
that neurone. This is known as the 'all or nothing
law'. Since the ion channels are operated by a
voltage change, they are described as voltage-
gated channels.
The depolarisation is reversed when the sodium
channels close and potassium channels open,
allowing an efflux of potassium ions. This
renders the interior of the neurone more and
more negative, and the membrane is now
'repolarised'. At the same time the sodium
pump, present in all plasma membranes,
actively pumps out the sodium which has
recently entered and claws back the escaped
potassium. Due to a time lag in the closing
of the potassium channels, the inside of the
neurone actually becomes briefly more negative
than when at rest, and this phase is described as
'hyperpolarisation' (Fig. 7.10).
The opening and closing of the ion channels is
triggered by the initial voltage change, but
because this opening and closing operates at dif-
ferent rates, the ions move in the sequence just
mV
2
40
20
0
3
-20
-40
5
-60
-80
Figure 7.10 Diagrammatic representation of an action
potential. 1 = Na+ enters axon; 2 = Na+ channels close,
K+ leaves; 3 = Na+/K+ pump begins; 4 = K+ channels close;
5 = resting potential restored.

described. Finally, the distribution of ions is
restored to their pre-action-potential level and
the membrane is at resting potential once more.
All this activity is ultimately dependent upon
energy being expended by the sodium/potassium
ATPase (adenosine triphosphatase) pump: hence
the term 'action potential'. Due to the establish-
ment of local current flow, the initial depolarisa-
tion triggers an identical action potential at
adjacent sites and this is propagated along the
axon without any attenuation of the impulse. If
the axon is unmyelinated, this sequence of events
will be repeated at every point along the axon,
spreading out in both directions away from the
initial stimulus.
The presence of myelin speeds up the passage
of the impulse, since it enables the local current
to spread further, up to 1 mm along the axon,
before another action potential needs to be gen-
erated. Hence, the sodium channels need only be
situated at 1 mm intervals, at the so-called 'nodes
of Ranvier' with a myelin coat in between. Since
local current flow is faster than the generation of
an action potential, the impulse appears to jump
or leap from node to node: hence the term 'salta-
tory conduction' from the Latin word saltare
meaning 'to leap'. In multiple sclerosis there is a
loss of the myelin coat and the nerve impulse is
adversely affected, leading to the clinical features
associated with this condition.
Graded potential
When the action potential reaches the terminals
of the neurone there has to be some mechanism
by which the impulse can cross the synaptic gap,
reach the next neurone in the pathway and gen-
erate an action potential in this neurone. This is
achieved by means of release of a chemical or
'neurotransmitter' from the presynaptic termi-
nals, which diffuses across the gap and combines
with receptors on the postsynaptic membrane
(see Fig. 7.3). The postsynaptic membrane is
usually the dendrite of the next neurone, but can
be an axon or the cell body itself.
The release of the neurotransmitter from the
presynaptic membrane is triggered by the arrival
of the action potential, which opens calcium
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 125
channels in the plasma membrane. Influx of
calcium causes the movement and exocytosis of
vesicles laden with neurotransmitter. The latter is
referred to as the first messenger. The conse-
quence of combination of the neurotransmitter
with postsynaptic receptors is a conformational
change in proteins of the plasma membrane,
resulting either in a direct effect on proteins to
open or close ion channels or, much more com-
monly, in activation of an enzyme such as adenyl
cyclase. This catalyses the production of cyclic
AMP (adenosine monophosphate) from ATP
(adenosine triphosphate). Cyclic AMP acts as a
second messenger, triggering a cascade of inter-
nal events that finally results in the opening of
ion channels, allowing depolarisation of the post-
synaptic membrane, the so-called graded poten-
tial. Since the ion channels are opened by chemi-
cals they are called chemically-gated channels.
In parkinsonism there is a loss of the neuro-
transmitter dopamine, and with myasthenia
gravis there is a loss of cholinergic receptors on
the skeletal muscle end-plate; both these condi-
tions adversely affect the normal functioning of
the graded potential. Graded potentials rapidly
dissipate and so can only travel over very small
distances. Since they are small, they must
summate to produce an action potential.
Summation can be spatial (convergence) or tem-
poral. This is initiated within a short distance on
the postsynaptic membrane. Provided the sum-
mation is adequate, the summated graded poten-
tials will initiate an action potential at a specific
site on the nerve fibre where there are most
sodium channels and the threshold is lowest. On
most neurones this area is where the axon leaves
the cell body, the axon hillock (see Fig. 7.2).
Synapses slow down the passage of impulses
due to the time taken for the neurotransmitter to
be released, but this disadvantage is more than
outweighed by the variability or plasticity which
synapses confer on the system. They play an
essential role in memory and learning, since fre-
quent use of a particular pathway facilitates the
passage of an impulse across the synapses used,
in preference to others. Initially this is a chemical
change, which may involve a facilitator such as
nitric oxide, but later a physical increase occurs
 126 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 7.4 Differences between action and graded pressure, touch, temperature, pain and position
Action potentials Graded potentials
sense, the so-called somatic receptors (Table 7.5).
Again, the use of the word 'sense' implies aware-
Voltage-gated ion channels Chemically/mechanically/light- ness of the stimulus, i.e. it reaches the conscious
gated ion channels
cortex.
Threshold must be No threshold, all triggers will Those receptors situated in the skin can also be
reached before an action generate graded potentials
potential is generated referred to as exteroceptors. There are also
Fixed magnitude (all or Magnitude proportional to size
stimuli which do not usually reach consciousness
nothing) of trigger but go to different areas of the brain; these origi-
Large potentials Small potentials nate within the internal organs and are called
Do not summate Summate
interoceptors. Examples of these are the barore-
ceptors in the aorta, which monitor changes in
Do not attenuate Rapidly attenuate
blood pressure, and the osmoreceptors in the
Used for long-distance Used for local signals
signalling
hypothalamus, which monitor the osmolarity of
the extracellular fluid. Receptors in the muscles,
tendons and joints that register position sense,
tension and degree of stretch are called proprio-
in the surface area and complexity of the synap- ceptors. They send impulses both to the cerebel-
tic membranes. They are also responsible for con- lum, which is part of the unconscious brain, and
verting the pathways into one-way systems, to the part of the conscious brain called the
essential if chaos is not to reign. Synapses are not somatosensory cortex.
the only site for graded potentials. They also The area served by a sensory unit (afferent
occur at receptors where the ion channels may be nerve, its branches and the attached receptors) is
triggered by mechanical or light changes as well called the receptive field. Receptor fields may
as chemicals. overlap and the density of receptors may vary in
The differences between action and graded different regions of the body. The precision with
potentials are summarised in Table 7.4. which a stimulus can be located and differenti-
ated depends on the size of the receptive field
and the density. For example, fingers and thumbs
Sensory pathways
are very good at detecting stimuli from the exter-
The various changes in the internal and external nal environment because the receptive fields are
environments are detected by receptors. small and dense.
Receptors may be found within specialised The peripheral afferent (sensory) pathway is
organs, such as the rods and cones of the eye, or the name given to the pathway from a receptor to
they may be distributed throughout the body, the eNS. As explained earlier the cell body of the
such as the pain receptors of the skin and gut. afferent neurone is usually situated along this
The first type give rise to the special senses of pathway, near to, but not in, the spinal cord. The
sight, hearing, balance, taste and smell, whereas central process then travels into the spinal cord
the second type give rise to the general senses of where it may synapse with one or more neurones

Table 7.5 Classification of the somatic receptors

Category Sense Receptor

Mechanoreceptor Touch, pressure Encapsulated and free nerve endings

Thermoreceptor Warmth, cold Free nerve endings
Nociceptor Pain Free nerve endings
Proprioceptor Position Encapsulated nerve endings
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 127

in the dorsal horn or continue on its path up the
spinal cord to the brain stern. The grey matter is
divided into layers or laminae of Rexed and the
neurones in the various layers differ in size and
functions. Stimuli detected in the periphery will
initially be conveyed by afferent neurones to the
spinal cord, but if further integration and inter-
pretation is to occur, the information must reach
the appropriate part of the brain. The informa-
tion travels to these higher centres in ascending
tracts or columns of the white matter of the
spinal cord (Fig. 7.11).
All information from a particular receptor type,
such as pressure, travels together in the same
ascending tract. The ascending tract is joined,
at each spinal segment on its upward journey,
by neurones which are carrying information
from pressure receptors in other dermatomes.
The organisation continues in the brain, so
that discrete areas of the cortex receive
the information from the various parts of
the body (Fig. 7.12). This is called somatotopic
organisation.
There are two main ascending systems (Budd
1984):
• the rapid, highly organised oligo- (few)
synaptic pathways
• the less well organised multisynaptic
pathways.
Most of the tracts are named according to
their origin and destination: e.g. the lateral
spinothalamic tract carrying pain information
runs from the lateral region of the spinal cord
up to the thalamus, an important sensory relay
station in the brain. The spinocerebellar tracts
do not reach consciousness but instead carry
proprioceptive information to the ipsilateral
lobes of the cerebellum, in the hindbrain.
The oligosynaptic pathway consists of two
tracts:
• the dorsal (posterior) columns
• the neospinothalamic tracts (part of the
anterolateral tract).
The multisynaptic pathways also travel via
two ascending tracts. One of these tracts, the fas-
ciculi proprii, runs as a central chain of neurones
through the spinal cord and ascending reticular
activating system (RAS) of the brain stern to the

fasciculus gracilis
,
fasciculus cuneatus
J
dorsal.
- (posterior)
I
co umns

dorsal spinocerebellar tract

lateral
corticospinal tract
ventral spinocerebellar tract

anterolateral tract
(neo-paleo-spinothalamic) ?
I I
I
ascending

brain stem tract (multineuronal) ventral corticospinal tract

I I
I
descending

Figure 7.11 Transverse section of the spinal cord showing ascending and descending pathways (adapted from McClintic 1980).
 128 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
±
·.·' ·
1( :>".
.,
,
L
r)
A B
Figure 7.12 Diagram illustrating the somatotopic organisation of (A) the motor and (B) the sensory cortex. The left half of
the body is represented by the right hemisphere of the brain and the right half of the body by the left hemisphere (reproduced
from Ross & Wilson 1990, with permission).
central areas of the thalamus, before projecting to
the limbic system and the hypothalamus. These
pathways do not cross and can be activated by
more than one stimulus. The other multisynaptic
pathway is the palaeospinothalamic tract, which
follows the same course as the neospinothalamic
tract until it reaches the brain stem, where it
diverges, to make further synaptic connections
with the RAS and central thalamus before travel-
ling on to the limbic system. The information is
interpreted in a less precise manner but with
emotional overtones, such as the sensation of a
deep, burning abdominal pain.
The division into tracts of differing modalities
is not hard and fast, however, since the nervous
system demonstrates the phenomenon of redun-
dancy, which means that if one tract is damaged
another is usually able to take over the function,
albeit in a slightly altered form. For example,
impulses conveying information about touch
travel in both the dorsal column and the ventro-
spinothalamic tract though the nature of the
information differs, as the dorsal column deals
with detailed localisation of the touch sensation
and the spinothalamic tract with gross tactile
sensations.
Some of the pathways, the neospinothalamic
pain pathways in particular, carry information
about a single type of stimulus. These are
described as specific pathways, since they are
interpreted as well-localised, precise sensations
by the somatosensory cortex - e.g. the sharp sen-
sation of a pinprick.
The majority of these ascending tracts cross
over to the opposite side at some stage, either in
the spinal cord or in the brain stem, synapsing
with contralateral areas of the thalamus before
continuing to the conscious cortex. This
arrangement explains why a stroke/ cerebrovas-
cular accident (eVA) affecting a particular part
of the sensory cortex produces numbness or
paraesthesia in a specific part of the body on the
opposite or contralateral side. Neurological
damage to the spinal cord may produce numb-

ness on either the contralateral side, if the site of
damage is before the tracts cross, or the ipsilat-
eral (same) side, if the site of damage occurs
after the tracts have crossed.
Motor pathways
Just as all conscious stimuli are interpreted in
the cortex, so all conscious actions originate
there. The whole area is known as the sensori-
motor cortex; one part is called the primary
motor cortex and initiates conscious action
(Fig. 7.12). It too shows somatotopic organisa-
tion, so that damage to this region produces
precise effects on particular actions on the con-
tralateral side of the body. Close to this area is
the premotor cortex, which is involved in the
planning of actions. Since the actions produced
by these neurones are the conscious movements
of the body, the muscles involved will be skele-
tal and the neurones will be part of the somatic
motor system.
Neurones in the brain which are responsible for
initiating the commands are called upper motor
neurones (UMNs). They do not send impulses
directly to the muscles but exert their influence
via neurones in the ventral (anterior) horn of the
spinal cord called lower motor neurones (LMNs).
The latter send impulses to the skeletal muscles
via their axons, which form the peripheral effer-
ent pathways within spinal nerves.
The descending pathways from brain to spinal
cord can be divided into two main tracts: the
corticospinal tract and the multineuronal (brain
stem) tract (see Fig. 7.11).
The corticospinal tract. This is a rapid pathway
and is mainly responsible for the skilled move-
ments of small, distal limb muscles such as those
used in scalpel work. Most of the fibres cross over
in the brain stem and descend in the white matter
of the spinal cord as the lateral corticospinal tract.
The uncrossed fibres descend as the ventral (ante-
rior) corticospinal tract. At the appropriate level in
the spinal cord they enter the ventral horn of the
grey matter to synapse with a lower motor
neurone. Because the corticospinal tract forms a
rough pyramid shape as it passes through the
brain stem, it is also called the pyramidal tract.
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 129
The multineuronal tract. This tract runs to
lower motor neurones by a slower, more diffuse
route, since it makes many more synaptic con-
nections on the way, particularly in the
descending reticular system and the nuclei of
the brain stem. Although influenced by UMNs
the tracts are only recognisable as separate
pathways as they emerge from the brain stem to
travel through the spinal cord as the vestibu-
lospinal, tectospinal and reticulospinal tracts.
The tracts enter the ventral horn of the grey
matter to influence the appropriate lower motor
neurone.
These tracts do not form part of the pyramids
in the medulla and so are also called the extra-
(outside) pyramidal pathways. They mainly
influence the large, proximal limb muscles and
the axial muscles of posture, and have a predom-
inately inhibitory effect on the ventral horn cells.
They are responsible for the antigravity reflexes,
which keep our knees extended and head erect in
order to maintain upright posture.
The division of the descending tracts is not
clear cut, as they also demonstrate redundancy,
there being much overlap and interaction between
the two. Other areas of the brain also have strong
modifying influences, such as the cerebellum and
clusters of neurones in the fore- and midbrain
known collectively as the basal ganglia.
The last stage in the production of a conscious
action is the excitation of an LMN in the ventral
(anterior) horn of the spinal cord and the
passage of an impulse along its axon in the
spinal nerve to the skeletal muscle. The LMN
will be subject to influences from many neu-
rones, not only from descending tracts but also
from spinal neurones. As many as 10000-15000
synapses, both excitatory and inhibitory, can
occur on one lower motor neurone. If the sum of
these influences is excitatory, the LMN will be
stimulated to discharge an impulse along its
axon and the skeletal muscle will contract. This
peripheral pathway from LMN to skeletal
muscle is called the final common pathway and
the entire pathway, including the neuromuscular
junction and the 10-600 skeletal muscle fibres
innervated by that nerve is called a motor unit
(Fig. 7.13).
 130 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
skeletal muscle
a motor unit
lower motor neurone
Figure 7.13 The final common pathway of a motor unit.
Cerebellum
The actions of the cerebellum are unconscious
and are very important in postural reflexes. The
cerebellum has no direct descending pathways to
the spinal cord; instead it has a rich afferent input
and sends modifying influences to the sensori-
motor cortex, the reticular formation and the
brain-stem nuclei. Thus, symptoms of cerebellar
defects may be due to lesions in the ascending
spinocerebellar tracts, in the cerebellum itself or in
efferent pathways going to other parts of the
brain.
The cerebellum receives all information about
position sense. The vestibular apparatus of the
ear projects via the vestibular nuclei of the brain
stem to the flocculonodular lobe. The spinocere-
bellar tracts carry proprioceptive information
from muscles, tendons, joints and cutaneous
pressure receptors which project to the vermis
and anterior lobes. The cerebral cortex gives
information about the actions decided upon and
projects to the posterior lobes via pontine nuclei.
The cerebellum integrates the information
received from all these areas and compares it
with the information on intended actions
received from the cerebral cortex. It then sends
modifying influences back to the motor cortex
and brain stem, so that descending instructions
to the LMNs can be altered where necessary.
Basal ganglia
At present the precise functions of the basal
ganglia in movement are unknown, but they are
thought to enable abstract thought (ideas) to be
converted into voluntary action (Ganong 1991a).
Like the cerebellum they function at an uncon-
scious level and have no direct pathway to LMNs
but influence the sensorimotor cortex and the
descending reticular formation. Because the
main action of the basal ganglia is on the
descending extrapyramidal tracts, they have
become known as the extrapyramidal system
and conditions affecting them are referred to as
extrapyramidal syndromes, e.g. parkinsonism.
REFLEXES
Reflex actions are automatic responses to partic-
ular stimuli and form the basis of much of our
behaviour, from the simple knee jerk to driving a
car. They are also very important in posture,
balance and gait. Reflexes can be inborn (inher-
ited, innate, instinctive) or acquired (learned).
Examples of the former are eye blink, pupil dila-
tion/ constriction, change in heart rate, knee jerk
(stretch) reflex, pain withdrawal and sweat secre-
tion. Examples of the latter are swimming,
walking, driving, debriding callus. They can
involve any subdivisions of the nervous system
and any type of effector organ. We may be aware
of them or they may never reach consciousness.
It is here that the close association between the
nervous and endocrine systems is best illus-
trated, since both can contribute to the same
reflex arc. For example, when the retina of the eye
detects a threatening situation, this information
will be carried by the optic nerve to the brain and
one of the responses will be the release of the
hormone adrenaline (epinephrine) from the
adrenal medulla, to prepare the body for action.
In all cases, the pathway allows the body to
respond rapidly to a given stimulus. Generally,
inborn reflexes produce stereotypic responses
which are usually protective reflexes or those
needed for posture and balance. Acquired reflexes
are more complex, involving the conscious cortex
and many different effectors, so that the response

is more easily modified. Try standing upright
and leaning backwards as far as you can. What
happens to your arms and knees? Can you
prevent their movement? Compare this with the
ease with which you can change from a walking
to a running gait.
Reflex arcs
The pathway between detector and effector is
called a reflex arc and always involves the CNS,
though not necessarily the brain (Table 7.6).
There are three reflexes that are of particular
importance to the functioning of the lower limb:
• pain withdrawal reflex
• crossed extensor reflex
• stretch reflex.
Pain withdrawal reflex. Injured cells produce
local chemical mediators, including prosta-
glandins, that sensitise the nociceptors to other
mediators. Graded impulses, proportional to
the damage done, are generated and trigger
action potentials in the afferent pathways. The
action potential travels to the CNS (in this case
the spinal cord) via the afferent neurone and
synapses within the grey matter of the dorsal
horn, in either Rexed's laminae II and III (the
substantia gelatinosa) or in laminae V. It is here
that the pain gating mechanism is thought to
take place. This mechanism was first described
internuncial
neurones ---=~--n+r?::'"
synapse
Figure 7.14 The reflex arc (reproduced from McClintic 1980, with permission).
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 131
Table 7.6 Essential elements of a reflex arc
1. A detector to detect the change (stimulus) in either the
internal or external environment
2. Afferent neurones that send the information into the CNS
along the afferent pathways
3. An integrating centre to match the appropriate response
to the stimulus. This will be in the brain or spinal cord.
Different parts of the CNS communicate with one another
via ascending and descending pathways
4. Efferent neurones that carry instructions from the CNS
via efferent pathways to the effectors (skeletal, smooth or
cardiac muscle or gland)
5. An effector to carry out the necessary response
by Melzack & Wall in the 1960s to explain pain
inhibition by such techniques as rubbing the
painful area, although the precise nature of the
gating mechanism is still not completely
known. From here the impulse is transmitted to
an LMN in the ventral horn of the spinal cord.
Excitation of this neurone results in an action
potential reaching the motor end-plate. The
neurotransmitter acetylcholine is released and
its combination with receptors in the muscle
membrane results in a graded potential that will
be transmitted to the interior of the muscle as an
action potential and cause contraction of skele-
tal muscle fibres (Fig. 7.14). The number of
fibres contracting depends on the number of
muscle fibres innervated by that neurone, i.e.
the size of the motor unit. Thus the limb suffer-
afferent neurone
----
~ (receptor)
skin
skeletal
muscle
(effector)
efferent neurone
 132 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
ing damage is removed from the deleterious
cause. The presence of more than one synapse in
the reflex arc means that the arc is described as
polysynaptic. In addition to this reflex arc, the
first-order neurones will synapse in the dorsal
horn with neurones which transmit impulses up
to neurones in the brain, via the ascending
anterolateral tracts. However, the cortex is not
needed for the withdrawal reflex to occur.
Crossed extensor reflex. This is often superim-
posed on the pain withdrawal reflex and is a pos-
tural reflex, enabling an injured lower limb to be
withdrawn while the remaining limb bears
weight. In order for this to occur, many LMNs
must be excited and their antagonists inhibited
(Fig. 7.15). This ensures that the flexors of the
injured limb contract while the extensors relax,
whereas in the contralateral limb the flexors are
excitation
of flexor
__ contralateral limb
Figure 7.15 The crossed extensor reflex (reproduced from McClintic 1980,
inhibited and the extensors contract to provide a
rigid support. This reflex occurs not only when a
lower limb is injured but at each step in walking,
when one limb is in the swing phase and the
other is weightbearing.
Stretch reflex. This is a very important reflex
for all motor activity, especially when new
actions are being learnt. It can be demonstrated
by the patellar and Achilles tendon reflexes and
exists to supply the cerebellum with information
about the state of contraction in muscle.
The receptors are stretch receptors in spe-
cialised muscle fibres called intrafusal fibres.
These receptors lie within swellings of the intra-
fusal fibres called muscle spindles. Whenever the
ordinary muscle fibres (extrafusal fibres) are
stretched, as when the patellar tendon is hit by
the hammer, the receptors will generate graded
painful
stimulus
from foot
excitation
of extensor
w~th permission).
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 133

potentials. These will in turn trigger action

potentials which will travel rapidly into the ....I
to cerebellum

spinal cord, to synapse directly with the alpha I

I
LMNs. Efferent impulses will travel out to the I
I
extrafusal fibres, causing contraction of the
muscle. The stretch receptors are of two types,
one conveying information about the degree of
stretch (static) and the other about the rate of
change of stretch (dynamic). This information is
sent along the spinocerebellar pathway to the
cerebellum as part of the rich input that the cere-
bellum needs to be able to compile a precise
'picture' of what is happening in the muscles
(Fig. 7.16). The reflex contraction of the muscle
switches off the muscle spindle and deprives the
cerebellum of information. This does not matter
if the action being carried out by the muscle is a
well-learned one, but if it is still being learned the
cerebellum needs this information and can
switch the spindle back on. This is achieved by a
system of alpha-gamma coactivation, whereby
small gamma LMNs are activated. These go to
the poles of the muscle spindle and, by contract-
ing the poles, the spindle continues to fire.

COORDINATION AND POSTURE

It is now possible to summarise the various parts
of the nervous system which are involved in
posture, balance, gait and coordination of motor
activity (Table 7.7).
Figure 7.16 The stretch reflex. Contraction of the extensor
muscle causes stretch in the muscle spindle and increases
the firing rate of action potentials. This information is
conveyed to the spinal cord and results in inhibition of the
extensor muscle's motor neurone and excitation of the flexor
muscle's motor neurone (adapted from Vander et al 1998).

Table 7.7 Role of CNS in posture, balance and coordination

Action Site Function

Motor coordination Premotor cortex Plans actions

Sensorimotor cortex Initiates action
Basal ganglia Converts thought into action
Cerebellum Modifies action. Compares actual and intended action, smooths action
Brain stem Modifies action
(extrapyramidal) Corrects position
(pyramidal) Skilled work
Posture and balance Cerebellum Rich input, miniprogrammes
Gait All of above
 134 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
THE NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT
Once the organisation and function of the nervous
system is understood, it is often possible to diag-
nose the site of a lesion by careful history taking,
observation and simple tests. The causes of neu-
rological disorders are many and can be
classified as follows:
• heredity, e.g. Huntington's chorea, peroneal
muscular atrophy, Friedreich's ataxia,
malignant hyperpyrexia
• developmental defect, e.g. spina bifida,
syringomyelia
• trauma, e.g. severing of the spinal cord or a
peripheral nerve, concussion
• ischaemia, e.g. stroke, cerebral haemorrhage
• compression, e.g. tumour of the cerebellum,
Morton's neuroma, common peroneal nerve
palsy
• infection, e.g. HIV, [akob-Creutzfeldt disease,
herpes zoster (shingles), Guillain-Barre
syndrome, lepromatous neuropathy
• autoimmune, e.g. myasthenia gravis,
polymyositis, possibly multiple sclerosis
• nutritional! metabolic, e.g. Korsakoff's
psychosis, sub-acute combined degeneration
of the spinal cord, diabetic neuropathy
• iatrogenic, e.g. tight plaster cast causing
nerve palsy, drug-induced myopathies
(lithium, high-dose steroids, etc.)
Table 7.8 Classification of neuropathies
Type of neuropathy Description
Mononeuropathy Abnormality of a single nerve
Mononeuritis multiplex Asymmetrical abnormality of
several individual nerves
Radiculopathy Abnormality of a nerve root
Polyneuropathy Widespread, symmetrical
abnormality of many nerves,
usually characterised as
sensory/motor/autonomic 'glove
and stocking' distribution
• idiopathic, e.g. Parkinson's disease, motor
neurone disease, non-familial Alzheimer's
disease.
The effects of any lesion in the nervous
system will depend on the area involved. For
example, occlusion of the posterior cerebral
artery, which feeds the occipital lobe of the brain
(striate cortex), may result in visual distur-
bances, occlusion of a cerebellar artery may
result in ataxia, and occlusion of the vasa nervo-
sum of a peripheral nerve may result in a 'glove
and stocking' paraesthesia.
Nerve function deficit is called neuropathy
and is classified according to the numbers and
types of nerves involved and the site of the lesion
(Table 7.8).
The assessment process involves a general
overview of neurological function followed by
assessment of:
• levels of consciousness
• sensory function
• motor function (to include muscles)
• posture and coordination
• autonomic function.
Many neurological conditions present with
multiple signs and symptoms because more than
one part of the nervous system is affected. It is
important to bear this in mind when assessing
each of the above parts in order that information
from all the assessments can be put together to
produce a definitive diagnosis. For example,
multiple (disseminating) sclerosis is a progres-
sive disease affecting the CNS where repeated
patchy demyelination of nerve sheaths occurs,
leading initially to temporary and later to perma-
nent loss of function. The nerve axons most often
affected are the optic nerves - the optic nerve is
considered an outgrowth from the CNS rather
than a peripheral nerve - the cerebellar nerves
and those of the lower spinal cord, leading to
blurring of vision (diplopia), unsteady gait,
weakness in the lower limbs, lower limb sensory
loss and/ or disturbances of micturition. Multiple
sclerosis along with Parkinson's disease is the
second most common disease to affect the CNS,
after strokes (Wilkinson 1993a).

GENERAL OVERVIEW OF
NEUROLOGICAL FUNCTION
History
It is important to undertake a thorough medical
and social history (Ch. 5). In particular the fol-
lowing should be borne in mind.
Presenting problem
Onset and duration may provide vital clues as to
the cause of a problem. For example,
Cuillain-Barre syndrome has a sudden, postviral
onset. The type of pain and its distribution can
help to establish whether the problem affects a
nerve pathway or is referred pain from entrap-
ment of a spinal nerve. The patients should be
asked if their limbs feel weak or sluggish
(paresis): a slow, progressive onset of muscular
weakness suggests muscular dystrophy, whereas
an acute onset suggests a demyelinating disease.
The history of the problem and the type of
onset may facilitate a diagnosis. For example,
pain, numbness, a sensation of heaviness or a
'pins and needles' sensation in the arm could be
due to compression of nerve roots in the spine, as
seen in cervical spondylosis, or to an attack of
angina pectoris. The sensation is likely to be
spasmodic and associated with exercise or some
other stress in the latter case, and of a more con-
tinuous nature in the former.
A history of frequent falls with no loss of con-
sciousness suggests a lesion in one of the areas of
the brain dealing with balance and posture, such
as the cerebellum or basal ganglia. Such episodes
can be seen in patients with Parkinson's disease or
in multiple sclerosis. Where loss of consciousness
has occurred, the period of unconsciousness and
the age of the patient should be taken into account
when making a diagnosis. The presence of a
severe headache is an important sign, since
although it often has a completely benign cause, it
may also indicate one of several underlying more
serious causes, e.g. brain tumour or subarachnoid
haemorrhage or the less sinister migraine or
tension headache. Again, the onset, nature and
duration of the headache should be established.
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 135
Social habits
Smoking and alcohol consumption should be
noted. Smoking is a risk factor for certain condi-
tions such as atherosclerosis and therefore CVAs.
Chronic alcoholism can affect both motor coordi-
nation and memory (Korsakoff's psychosis). The
actual cause is an alcohol-induced thiamine
deficiency which damages the limbic system
(Wilkinson 1993b). Such patients appear alert
and fully conscious, but recent memory of time
and place is severely impaired. The patient
denies any loss of memory and frequently
attempts to disguise the deficit by confabulation.
Similarly, indications of a lifestyle that increases
the risk of contracting the HIV virus, such as
intravenous drug abuse, may explain a neurolog-
ical deficit, since the infection can produce a pro-
gressive encephalopathy.
Gender
Some conditions occur much more frequently in
one sex than the other. For example, myasthenia
gravis affects females more than males whereas
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy, which is an
X chromosomal-linked disease, is seen much
more in males.
Age
There is a general slowing in the passage of
impulses throughout the nervous system with
age, as shown by nerve conduction tests.
Defective sensory perception is present in
around 20% of people over the age of 65 years
(Ch. 18). The likelihood of neurological abnor-
malities increases with advancing years. In addi-
tion, many conditions affecting the nervous
system have typical onsets at particular ages. For
example, shingles (herpes zoster), parkinsonism
and CVAs are all associated with the over-60 age
group, whereas Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
usually manifests itself in people in their twen-
ties and some forms of spina bifida have observ-
able effects from birth. However, where two or
more systemic conditions coexist the picture
may be altered - for example, patients with dia-
 136 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
betes mellitus or sickle cell anaemia are predis-
posed to earlier onset of CVAs. Coexisting
chronic disease can also be helpful in diagnosing
the cause - for example, atherosclerosis and
hypertension are major risk factors for strokes
(McLeod & Lance 1989a).
Observation
The patient should be observed while walking,
sitting and speaking as well as while performing
particular tasks. A change in the level of con-
sciousness, inability to follow simple instructions
and deficits in voluntary movement or sensation,
including the presence of pain, all provide
important clues. Important points to note are:
• The affected areas of the body, their
distribution and whether one or more
modalities are involved.
• Whether the effect is uni- or bilateral.
• If affecting movement, whether it causes
weakness or complete paralysis.
• Whether it involves particular muscles or
particular actions.
• Whether it produces any change in muscle
tone and bulk.
• If the deficit is affecting sensation, whether
the sensation is altered (paraesthesia) or lost
(anaesthesia).
• The presence of a deformity, e.g. a cavoid-
type foot and clawed toes are often seen with
spina bifida occulta.
• Presence of tremors. Tremors can have a
physiological cause or be associated with a
neurological deficit. The exact nature of the
tremor should be noted, when it appears/
disappears, area of body involved, etc.
The causes of tremor are summarised in
Table 7.9.
ASSESSMENT OF THE LEVEL OF
CONSCIOUSNESS
The cerebral cortex and the reticular formation of
the brain stem are the two areas of the brain most
concerned with maintaining consciousness. The
general level of the patient's awareness, ability to
answer questions and follow instructions can all
give indications of the level of consciousness.
History
Any history of loss of consciousness should
always be questioned further, to try to establish
whether the cause was:
• a simple faint
• transient ischaemic attack (TIA) or full-blown
stroke
• an epileptic episode
• a metabolic disorder such as a hypoglycaemic
coma.
Simple faints (syncope) are always due to a
temporary interruption of blood supply to the
brain, which is rapidly restored by the prostrate
position of the patient. This may be caused by:
• benign causes, such as emotional shock,
causing vasovagal syncope
• autonomic neuropathy if the fainting episode is
associated with a change to an upright posture
Table 7.9 Classification of tremors and their likely causes
Type of tremor Condition
Physiological Maintenance of posture is
accompanied by a tremor (10Hz).
This may be exacerbated by anxiety,
fatigue, thyrotoxicosis
Age (senile) With age the normal physiological
tremor slows to 6-7 Hz. As a result
the tremor becomes more noticeable
especially when undertaking a slow
motion such as picking up a cup to
drink from
Resting Tremor that is present during rest
(4-5 Hz), seen in parkinsonism
Intention Tremor that increases as the
individual tries to undertake a
coordinated movement, seen with
cerebellar dysfunction
Essential Postural tremor similar to a
physiological tremor but of much
greater amplitude, usually hereditary
Drug-induced Tremor similar to an essential tremor
may occur in 40% of patients treated
with barbiturates

• serious causes such as haemorrhage or
anaphylactic shock.
Strokes are the result of prolonged/permanent
interruption of the blood supply to the brain and
are the most common condition to affect the
CNS. TIAs are a temporary interruption in the
vascular supply to the brain and like strokes
usually occur in the older person (60+). Both
strokes and TIAs are primarily caused (80% of
cases) by thrombosis resulting from atheroma-
tous plaques in cerebral vessels, haemorrhage
being the cause of the remainder (McLeod &
Lance 1989a). TIAs usually last from 1 to 30
minutes and always less than 24 hours.
Epileptic attacks can occur at any age and are
due to unusual electrical activity in the cortex,
which could be caused by a lesion or a tumour.
Observation
TIAs may be accompanied by disorders of
speech (dysphasia), vision, movement (dyskine-
sia) or swallowing (dysphagia), depending on
the area of brain involved. However, a full recov-
ery is usual. CVAs can result in neurological
deficits similar to those seen in TIAs, but are
often permanent, though partial or total recovery
is possible depending on the extent and site of
damage to the brain.
Epileptic attacks can involve the whole brain
(global) and result in a brief loss of consciousness
(petit mal) which may not show any other symp-
toms or may last much longer, being accompa-
nied by tonic-clonic jerks (grand mal). Such an
attack is often preceded by an 'aura' and the
patient may cry out. Attacks can also be focal, as
in a Jacksonian attack, which affects only the
primary motor cortex and in which different
parts of the body show jerks as the attack spreads
over the motor cortex.
Clinical tests
In the clinic the following can be used to establish
the level of consciousness:
• the patient's response to a question and answer
schedule
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 137
• whether the patient can follow instructions
• the patient's response to stimuli.
Levels of consciousness can be graded as
shown in Table 7.10.
Hospital tests
The following is a brief summary of some of the
hospital tests that may be undertaken if a patient
shows an altered level of consciousness.
Occuloplethysmography. This is a non-inva-
sive test to detect carotid lesions that cause a
reduction in blood flow to the ipsilateral orbit
compared to the opposite eye.
Duplex Doppler ultrasound. This technique
uses sound waves of 4-8 MHz, which are beyond
the range of human hearing. The transmitted
beams are reflected from their interface with
tissues in amounts proportional to the density of
the tissues. The difference between transmitted
and reflected beams is proportional to the
density of the tissues and is used to create an
acoustic image. In this particular technique, two-
dimensional B-mode scanning is used, which
gives greater resolution than the M-mode scan-
ning of conventional Doppler. Duplex Doppler
may reveal stenosis or occlusion of the carotid
arteries, a possible cause of a CVA or a TIA, and
is often used prior to an angiogram.
Table 7.10 Assessment of the level of consciousness
(McLeod & Lance 1989)
Level Observable effects
Alert wakefulness Patient is fully aware of
environment and self and responds
to stimuli
Confusion Patient shows lack of attentiveness,
cannot concentrate and has
impaired memory
Delirium Patient is anxious, excited, agitated
and may be hallucinating
Lethargy Patient is drowsy but responds to
verbal stimuli
Stupor Patient is unconscious but
responds to pain
Coma Patient cannot be roused
 138 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Angiography. Interarterial angiography with
injection of a radio-opaque dye into the sus-
pected artery will show atherosclerotic plaques
in cerebral vessels, which are a common cause of
embolitic strokes.
Brain scans. Computed tomography (CT) or
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can be used to
confirm TIAs, full-blown CVAs, neoplastic mass
or epileptic foci. Both techniques produce digi-
tised images that can be numerically graded
according to the pixel value of the matrix. This can
then be converted to a grey-white scale. CT uses
X-rays to scan the brain. MRI uses radiofrequency
pulses that excite the protons of tissue.
Electroencephalogram (EEG). EEGs, or 'brain
waves', are traces which show the electrical
activity of the cortex, as measured by scalp
electrodes. EEGs are normally used to confirm
a clinical diagnosis and locate the focus of
epilepsy.
Lumbar punctures. A hollow needle is inserted
into the spinal canal through the intervertebral
space between L3 and L4 or L4-5 to withdraw
cerebrospinal fluid. This is analysed for microor-
ganisms, glucose levels, protein levels, blood cell
types and concentration and hydrostatic pres-
sure. It is based on the fact that many central
nervous disorders affect the blood-brain barrier
and allow passage of substances normally held
in check. The blood-brain barrier is affected by
inflammation, infection, haemorrhage and
degenerative diseases such as muscular sclerosis
and epilepsy. It is performed where bacterial or
viral infection in the brain such as encephalitis,
meningitis or the Cuillain-Barre syndrome,
abscess, tumour or haemorrhage is suspected.
Raised pressure measurements can indicate pres-
ence of infection or a tumour. A bloody aspirate
indicates cerebral haemorrhage.
Myelography. This test is usually combined
with MRI or CT investigations. A radio-opaque
dye is introduced into the subarachnoid space
via a lumbar puncture and with the patient on a
tilt table, the fluid is manoeuvred to the sus-
pected area. It is used to diagnose tumours of the
spinal cord, diseases of the intervertebral disc
space, bony abnormalities and spondolytic
lesions of the vertebral column.
Laboratory tests
These involve DNA testing to detect mutant
genes and other biochemical tests to detect
faulty enzymes, and are used for diagnosis of
hereditary metabolic diseases which affect the
CNS such as Huntington's chorea, familial
Alzheimer's disease, Tay-Sach's disease,
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease and inherited
myopathies such as McArdle's syndrome.
ASSESSMENT OF LOWER LIMB
SENSORY FUNCTION
It is important that the sensory system is intact in
order that a person can respond to his external
and internal environment. Failure to respond,
especially to noxious stimuli, can lead to serious
pathological changes and may even be life-
threatening. Some patients may be unaware that
sensory loss has occurred; it is therefore essential
that the practitioner assesses the functioning of
the sensory system.
Assessment involves checking whether sensory
units are functioning normally and, if not, the
extent of damage and the possible cause. Sensory
deficits may arise as a result of damage to:
• parietal cortex
• ascending pathways
• receptors.
Conditions which may cause sensory deficits
are outlined in Table 7.11.
The most important area of the brain for
somatic sensory perception is the parietal cortex
Table 7.11 Causes of sensory deficits
• Diabetes mellitus
• Subacute combined degeneration of the spinal cord
(vitamin 8 12 deficiency)
• Congential absence of particular sensory neurones
Spina bifida
• Syringomyelia
• Tabes dorsalis
Nerve injuries
• Guillain-Barre syndrome
• MUltiple sclerosis
• Cord compression/lesion, e.g. tumour (Brown-Sequard
syndrome)
Chronic alcoholism

(see Fig. 7.12). Any damage to this area, whatever
the cause, will produce a contralateral sensory
deficit in the appropriate part of the body.
Damage to the occipital lobe (striate cortex) will
produce visual disturbances. The most common
cause of such neurological deficits is an occlusion
or haemorrhage of one of the cerebral arteries.
Damage to the ascending tracts in the spinal
cord will produce either ipsi- or contralateral
effects, depending on the site of the lesion in rela-
tion to the point of crossover of the tracts. This is
well illustrated in the Brown-Sequard syndrome,
where damage to one side of the spinal cord
results in:
• ipsilateral loss of touch, position sense, two-
point discrimination and vibration sense
below the level of the lesion, due to dorsal
column injury
• contralateral loss of pain and temperature
sensation below the level of the lesion, due to
damage to the anterolateral tracts.
The exact effect of peripheral nerve damage
depends on the site and the nature of the
damage, since this dictates the repair process
(Table 7.12).
History
The nature and distribution of any sensory
deficit can be an important aid in diagnosing the
underlying cause. This may take the form of
Table 7.12 Classification of nerve damage
Type Damage
Neuropraxia Mild trauma or compression
causing local demyelination and
leading to temporary loss of
function. Full recovery within days
or weeks
Axonotmesis Crush injuries causing
degeneration of axon and myelin
sheath (wallerian degeneration)
Neurolemma sheaths intact and
reinnervated
Neurotmesis Whole nerve axon severed.
Surgical repair needed to ensure
reinnervation of distal trunk
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 139
complete anaesthesia (total lack of sensation) or
paraesthesia (an altered sensation). Examples of
paraesthesia are pins and needles, burning,
pricking, shooting pain and dull ache. Patients
should be asked if they experience any abnor-
mal sensations.
Phantom limb. An unusual phenomenon that
arises from amputation of a limb is that of
'phantom limb', where the patient has the very
real sensation of the amputated limb still being
present and behaving just like a normal limb.
The most unpleasant effect is the sensation of
pain which is said to occur in 70% of amputees
(Melzack 1992). The traditional explanation, that
this is due to the growth of neuromas in the
nerve stumps which continue to generate
impulses, cannot be the entire explanation since
cutting the afferent pathways from such nerves
does not abolish the pain. Melzack has sug-
gested that the phantom sensations are due to
learned circuits in the brain that are capable of
generating impulses in the absence of sensory
inputs.
Referred pain. Injury to the viscera often pro-
duces pain in a somatic structure some distance
away. This is called referred pain. For example, a
myocardial infarction can produce pain in the left
arm as both the heart and the skin of the left arm
have developed from the same dermatomal
segment. However, the exact mechanism is still
not clearly understood although both convergence
and facilitation are thought to playa role (Ganong
1991b). Damage to a spinal nerve may result in
referred pain which is experienced around the
heel; this occurs if there is damage to S1.
Clinical tests
Simple apparatus is all that is needed to under-
take an assessment of sensory function. Among
the apparatus that can be used are cotton wool,
the fine brush of a neurological hammer, a pair of
blunted dividers or a pair of blunt-ended orange
sticks, a 128 Hz tuning fork, a 109 monofilament,
a neurothesiometer, Neurotips (Owen Mumford)
and two small metal test tubes, metal being a
better conductor of heat than glass. Although all
the methods are acceptable, only tests using
 140 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 7.13 Sensory testing
Sense Method
Light touch Cottonwool/brush/monofilament
Two-point discrimination
Vibration (pressure)
Dividers, two orange sticks
Tuning forklneurothesiometer
Temperature Warm and cold test tubes/
dissimilar metals
Sharp pain/pinprick Neurotips
Proprioception Dorsilplantarflexion of hallux
monofilaments and neurothesiometers/biothe-
siometers have been evaluated. The tests
examine the integrity of the afferent pathways
that involve the ipsilateral dorsal columns
and the contralateral anterolateral columns
(Table 7.13). Each test should be demonstrated to
the patient first, usually on the back of the
patient's hand, so that the test is understood and
the expected sensation experienced. It is then
possible to ask the patient to compare the same
sensations on hand and foot which will indicate
the degree, if any, of sensory loss. If the patient
suffers from neuropathy of the upper limbs, the
demonstration test can take place on the fore-
head. For the actual test, where appropriate, the
patients should have their eyes closed in order
that the results cannot be influenced by observing
the test. Use of forced-answer questions where
possible help to eliminate observer influence, e.g.
'Which is sharper, number 1 or number 2?'.
Sham testing, where appropriate, should also
be used to rule out any attempts to guess the
correct answer by the patient. The test should be
repeated three times on the same site and if 2/3
answers are correct, the patient is not considered
to have a sensory deficit in that modality. If
screening is being carried out to detect gener-
alised neuropathy it is important that the tests
involve all the dermatomes at that level (see Fig.
7.8), starting distally and working proximally. As
most peripheral neuropathies begin at the most
distal site and progress proximally, it is only nec-
essary to test more proximal areas if the test has
proved negative distally. The results of each test
Fibre type and pathway in spinal cord
A-beta fibres
I Ipsilateral dorsal column
} A-delta and C fibres
Contralateral (anterolateral columns)
A-alpha fibres
Ipsilateral dorsal columns
should state the extent of any neuropathy, e.g.
'loss of vibration perception from toes to ankles'
to aid monitoring of the deficit. If a mononeu-
ropathy is suspected, e.g. anterior tibial damage
contributing to foot drop, the dermatomes inner-
vated by that nerve should be investigated. A
deficit may not always be due to pathological
causes: factors such as overlying callus render
the skin less sensitive and the normal slowing of
conduction rates associated with ageing results
in a reduction in sensation.
Testing large-diameter fibres
Light touch. Cotton wool, a fine brush or a
109 monofilament can all be used for this test.
The nerves being tested are large-diameter A-
beta fibres which ascend in the dorsal columns,
transmitting light touch perception. The recep-
tors (Meissner's corpuscles) lie in the superficial
dermis. After explaining the test, the patient's
eyes should be shut. The patient is asked to state
when the foot is being stroked and to indicate the
site. The clinician should make no further
comment until the test is finished. The skin of the
foot is then stroked lightly with a wisp of cotton
wool/brush or monofilament. The sense of touch
will be reduced in the elderly and in calloused
skin (due to thickened skin). The patient may
incorrectly distinguish between the lesser toes in
this test, but this is normal and is due to the par-
ticular innervation of the lesser digits.
Two-point discrimination. Blunt-ended orange
sticks or the two points of a pair of dividers can

be used for this test, providing the points of the
dividers have been blunted to avoid accidental
skin penetration. The nerves being tested are
again the large-diameter A-beta fibres, but here
the density of the touch receptor field is being
assessed. The plantar surface of the foot is
usually tested. The patient is asked, with eyes
shut, to state how many points can be felt when
the tips of a compass lightly press the skin surface
simultaneously. The distance between the tips of
the compass that allows the patient to detect two
points rather than one should be noted. Usually
the distance on the foot of a healthy young adult
is 2 cm. It will increase with age and if the skin is
calloused. The receptors responsible for identify-
ing two-point discrimination are also essential
for stereognosis - the ability to recognise objects
by touch - and are therefore very important for
readers of Braille.
Pressure. The 109 monofilament is used for this
test. The first monofilament for detecting
neuropathy was the Semmes-Weinstein mono-
filament produced by the Hansen's Disease
Center, USA. In theory this monofilament buckles
when a force of 109 is applied. Since then a wide
variety of monofilaments have been produced, all
said to be buckled by the same force of 109.
However, McGill et al (1998) and Booth & Young
(2000) studied 109 monofilaments from a range of
manufacturers and found inconsistencies in their
deforming pressures. The clinical relevance of this
variation has yet to be determined. Booth & Young
(2000) also showed that all monofilaments decline
with use and recommended a 24-hour rest should
be allowed between repeated use of a single
monofilament to allow recovery. A range of
monofilaments of different diameters and buck-
ling forces is also available, but these are more
useful for research purposes than for routine
screening. In view of its small size, low cost and
ability in detecting large-fibre neuropathy, the
monofilament is considered one of the most useful
tools a clinician can possess and is recommended
by the International Diabetes Federation, the
World Health Organization European St. Vincent
Declaration and the International Working Group
on the diabetic foot (International Consensus on
the Diabetic Foot 1999).
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 141
The nerve fibres being tested are once more
those belonging to the A-beta group of fibres.
The receptors are encapsulated and lie in the
dermis but are slow adaptors and so detect con-
stant pressure rather than vibration. Both touch
and pressure receptors can respond to applied
pressure, the difference being in the force used
to apply the pressure. Light touch will stimulate
a small area of nerve endings and increasing
pressure will recruit more and more receptors.
When the stimulus becomes pressure rather
than touch and whether a different receptor is
involved with increased pressure is not clear, so
the stimulus is sometimes referred to as the
touch-pressure sensation.
The monofilament is applied at right angles
to the skin surface with just enough pressure to
deform the filament into a 'C' shape. Care
should be taken not to slide the filament or
brush the skin. It should be held in that position
for 2 seconds, the patient having been asked to
state when and where pressure from the 109
monofilament is felt at various points, with
eyes shut. Inability to detect the 109
monofilament is taken to indicate neuropathy
of large fibres.
Vibration. Either a simple 128 Hz tuning fork
or a graduated Rydel-Seiffer version can be used.
The nerve fibres being tested are again large-
diameter A-beta fibres, sensitive to pressure, but
this time the deeply placed pacinian corpuscles
are particularly sensitive to rapidly changing
pressures or vibrations. They are coated with
layers of connective tissue, which has the ability
to absorb low-frequency pressure changes, so
that only high-frequency vibrations such as those
produced by the tuning fork will reach the
central receptor.
The vibrating tuning fork is placed on the
skin above a bony prominence such as the apex
of the hallux, malleolus or the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint (MTPJ). It is important to ask
the patients to describe what they feel, without
any prompting, as most patients will be able to
feel pressure, but not necessarily any vibratory
sensation. Most patients describe the vibratory
sensation as a 'buzzing'. The argument that the
tuning fork should not be placed over bone, as
 142 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
this augments the sensation, is immaterial, since
all damaging pressures to which the foot is
likely to be subjected - e.g. tight footwear,
ground forces on bony deformities or foreign
objects in footwear - compress soft tissue
against bone. The Rydel-Seiffer tuning fork is
an attempt to produce a semi-quantitative result
to enable comparisons to be made with other
patients and on different occasions. It has
detachable clamps which can be moved to dif-
ferent positions on the prongs, to alter the
vibrating frequency from 64 to 128 Hz. As the
prongs vibrate, the apex of a cone drawn on
the clamps, upright or inverted, will appear to
move vertically up or down a scale from 1 to 8.
The position of this cone is noted when the
patients say the vibration sensation stops. At
128 Hz the apex should reach at least halfway
along the scale, i.e. to the number 4 from 1 or 8,
depending on which cone is being observed. If
vibration sensation is lost before this point is
reached, the patient is said to have a vibratory
perception deficit.
Neurothesiometers provide an alternative
method of assessing vibration. The neurothe-
siometer is basically a vibrator that delivers
vibrations of increasing strength, measured in
volts per micrometre. The mains-operated
version, the biothesiometer, has been super-
seded by the battery-operated neurothesiometer,
to meet Health and Safety requirements.
Cassella et al (2000) recommended that rather
than using a pistol grip when using the appara-
tus, the head of the tool should rest in the palm
of the operator's hand while being applied to the
patient. Only in this way, with no extraneous
pressure being applied, could truly reproducible
vibratory perception thresholds (VPTs) be deter-
mined. The neurothesiometer is positioned over
a bony prominence and the strength of the vibra-
tions is increased until the patient can detect a
'buzzing' sensation. This reading is called the
VPT and values of over 25 volts are taken to
indicate the presence of peripheral neuropathy.
The measurement should be repeated three
times and the average value taken. An alterna-
tive method is to begin with the maximum inten-
sity of stimulus and reduce it until the patient
can no longer detect any sensation. This method
is not measuring the same index, however, and
the two methods should not be mixed on the
same patient. Up to 12 readings can be stored in
the memory of the apparatus. Intra-observer
error is small. The disadvantages of the appara-
tus are its cost and weight. Using data from 392
patients with diabetes mellitus, Coppini et al
(2000) found that using a VPT score based on
comparing the patient's value of VPT with an
age-related normal population showed overall
better sensitivity and specificity than raw VPT in
identifying patients with subclinical neuropa-
thy; they felt that this measurement would be
more useful in regular monitoring of diabetic
patients. A VPT score >10.1 indicates increased
risk of developing neuropathy.
Testing small-diameter fibres
Temperature. Two test tubes filled with warm
and cool water are preferable to immersing saline
sachets in cool and warm water, which quickly
lose their temperature differences. Metal rods
cooled or warmed in water can also be used. A
small cylinder made of two metals with dissimi-
lar conductivities is even easier to transport and
use, but is not so readily available in the UK. For
research purposes, quantitative instruments to
measure temperature perception thresholds
using thermode devices (Kalter-Leibovici et al
2001) or thermo-aesthesiometers (van Schie et al
1998) have been used. The latter paper concludes
that a combined method, using two simple clini-
cal tests and the more sophisticated apparatus,
produced the highest sensitivity (76%).
This tests the integrity of the warmth and cold
temperature receptors that feed into the anterior
part of the anterolateral columns. The nerve fibres
involved are narrow diameter A-delta and C
fibres. Cutaneous receptors detect absolute values
rather than the temperature gradient across the
skin. Warmth receptors operate in the range of
30---43°C and cold receptors operate in the range
of 35-20°C (Vander et al 1998). Temperatures
above 43°C or below 20°C will trigger pain recep-
tors. The skin temperature is usually a few
degrees cooler than that of core temperature, i.e.

between 30 and 35°C, though a greater difference
may exist in extremes of environmental tempera-
tures. The temperature of the warm water should
be above 35°C and that of the cold water below
30°e. Again, with eyes closed, the patient is asked
to state which they find the cooler/warmer from
the first or second tube presented.
Pain. Disposable Neurotips (Owen Mumford)
are best used for this test. The Neurotips have a
sharp and a blunt end, but the sharp end cannot
pierce the skin. Spring-loaded devices which are
designed to deliver a stimulus at a force of 40g are
thought to be the safest and most reliable way of
testing for pinprick sensitivity (Wareham et al
1997). The use of the sharp end of a patella
hammer is not advisable as it may be sharp
enough to penetrate the skin and is non-dispos-
able. A hypodermic syringe should not be used as
the danger of skin penetration is high.
This tests the integrity of the sharp pain
pathway, which begins with free nerve endings
in the dermis. A-delta fibres travel into the
spinal cord and synapse in the dorsal horn. The
postsynaptic fibres then cross to the contralat-
eral anterolateral columns which travel up to
the brain.
Using disposable Neurotips and with eyes
closed the patient is asked to state which is
sharper, the first or second sensation. The two
ends should be presented in random sequence to
avoid correct guessing by the anxious-to-please
patient. Neuropathy does not always mean
absence of pain, as is witnessed by diabetic
patients with neuropathy who can experience a
period of intense pain (Boulton 2000).
There are certain perceived wisdoms concern-
ing sensory testing on diabetic patients which the
busy practitioner may use to justify using only
one of the above methods:
• vibration sensation is the first modality to
deteriorate
• the presence of neuropathy as indicated by
failure to detect the 109 monofilament implies
neuropathy of all nerve fibres in that limb.
There is no conclusive evidence to support
either of these statements. Indeed Winkler et al
(2000) have reported the existence of a subgroup
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 143
of type 1 diabetic neuropathy patients who suffer
from autonomic symptoms severe enough to
warrant treatment, such as severe bladder or
gastroparesis, orthostatic hypotension and dia-
betic diarrhoea associated with a selective small-
fibre sensory and autonomic loss with relatively
preserved large-fibre sensory modalities such as
vibration and touch-pressure sensation. Whether
either or both of the above statements can be
applied to patients without diabetes is even less
certain. A study by Nakayama et al (1998) on rats
showed that small-diameter, unmyelinated nerve
fibres decrease in number with ageing whereas
larger-diameter fibres maintain both conduction
ability and numbers. In the absence of solid evi-
dence to the contrary, it would seem advisable to
carry out sensory testing on both small and large
fibres. However, any testing is better than none.
In research studies, a range of sensory tests have
been used to calculate a neuropathy disability
score (NDS). For further discussion of peripheral
neuropathy assessment in patients with diabetes
mellitus see Boulton et al 1998, Young &
Matthews 1998 and Chapter 17.
Tinel's sign. This helps in the diagnosis of nerve
compression. Palpating the nerve, or tapping it
with a patellar hammer, at the site of compression
will often elicit an abnormal sensation distally, but
it can also follow the proximal distribution of
the nerve. Usually the sensation is paraesthesia
(tingling, burning) or is like an electric shock.
Tinel's sign can be used to assess for compression
of the medial nerve at the wrist or the posterior
tibial nerve at the ankle (carpal and tarsal tunnel
syndromes). However, no clinical tests for carpal
and tarsal tunnel syndromes are entirely reliable
(Golding et al 1986), so that the suspicion of such
a condition needs to be confirmed by nerve con-
duction tests (see Hospital tests).
Referred pain. Entrapment of a spinal nerve
may lead to paraesthesia, pain and weakness of
muscles in the lower limb. Normally when pres-
sure is applied to a site of pain, the pain becomes
worse. However, with referred pain the level of
pain stays about the same. A suspected entrap-
ment of the sciatic nerve usually leads to pain
when the affected leg is raised while the patient
lies in a supine position.
 144 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Hospital tests
Nerve conduction test. Sensory nerve conduc-
tion velocities are measured by placing stimulat-
ing electrodes on the skin over the nerve to be
tested. Recording electrodes, either skin or needle
electrodes, are placed either proximally for ortho-
dromic stimulation or distally for antidromic stim-
ulation. The latter gives more consistent results.
The lower limit of normal sensory conduction
velocities in the lower limb is around 35 m/ s.
Values are less than those for the upper limb. A
slowing of conduction velocity may be due to a
variety of causes (Matthews & Arnold 1991):
• ageing
• damage to the cell body as in herpes zoster
(shingles)
• nerve axon damage as in compression due to
a spinal tumour, a slipped disc or
tarsal! carpal tunnel syndrome
• demyelinisation as seen in Guillain-Barre
syndrome.
Amplitude of the action potentials and latency
are also measured. For a brief discussion of pos-
sible findings, see section on motor nerve con-
duction tests.
Nerve biopsy. This can be carried out on
sensory, motor and autonomic nerves. A small
sample of tissue is removed, using a needle, cone
or, if surgery is being performed, a scalpel. The
tissue is examined histologically and its interpre-
tation requires great expertise. Characteristics
such as a thickened basement membrane, scar-
ring of the myelin sheath, etc., can be identified.
Biopsies are carried out where another labora-
tory test is inconclusive or where no other diag-
nostic test exists for the suspected condition.
ASSESSMENT OF LOWER LIMB
MOTOR FUNCTION
If the motor system is functioning normally
muscles should display a resting tone, show
good muscle power on active contraction and be
able to move against resistance (Ch. 8).
The lower limb reflexes, patella and Achilles,
should also show a normal response. Reflex path-
ways involve both an afferent and an efferent
component and therefore a deficit in either com-
ponent would be expected to have an observable
effect on the response, as would abnormal
influences by higher centres on the LMN. Reflex
responses can be graded as follows (Fuller
1993a):
3+ == clonus
2+ == increased
1+ == normal
+/ - == obtainable with reinforcement
o == absent.
Values of 2 and above suggest UMN lesions,
values of below 1 suggest LMN lesions, periph-
eral sensory nerve or muscle damage.
The patellar reflex. This tests the integrity of
the spinal reflex pathway (L3, L4) and demon-
strates descending influences on the ventral horn
cell. It is important that the limb being tested is as
relaxed as possible. The patient should sit side-
ways on the examination couch with the feet
clearing the ground. The practitioner can gently
push the leg to be tested, which should swing
freely in response. A gentle tap on the patellar
tendon with the hammer should elicit a knee
jerk. If the leg is not relaxed, the patient should
clasp both hands around the other knee and pull
(Jedrassik manoeuvre). This releases spinal
influence and allows the leg to relax. The test
should be undertaken on both legs.
The Achilles reflex. This tests the spinal reflex
pathway (51, 52). The response is best elicited if
the foot of the patient is slightly dorsiflexed by
applying gentle pressure to the plantar surface of
the forefoot with one hand and tapping the
Achilles tendon while the pressure is maintained.
The patient can either sit on a couch, with legs
extended and the limb being tested crossed over
the other, or kneel on a chair, with the foot to be
tested hanging slightly over the edge of the chair.
In a healthy young adult the forefoot will gently
plantarflex. In an elderly person no visible move-
ment may be seen, but a very slight
plantarflexion will be felt against the practi-
tioner's hand.
Lower limb motor dysfunction can occur as a
result of damage to upper motor neurones, lower
motor neurones, peripheral nerves or muscles.

Upper motor neurone lesions
Upper motor neurone (UMN) lesions are due to
damage occurring anywhere between the cortex
and L1 in the spinal cord. Since the spinal cord
ends at level L1, lesions below this level will not
produce UMN signs. Conditions which can lead
to UMN signs are listed in Table 7.14.
Although a specific area of the frontal lobes
(precentral gyrus) is designated the primary
motor cortex (see Fig. 7.12), many neurones
from other areas of the cortex are also involved
in planning and initiating conscious movement
and so can also be called upper motor neurones.
This includes neurones of both descending
tracts. Damage to the descending tracts will
produce the same effects as damage to the neu-
rones themselves.
Observation
Damage to the corticospinal neurones and tracts
will result in contralateral loss of skilled move-
ments. Lack of movement will in turn eventu-
ally lead to a form of muscle atrophy known as
disuse atrophy. Damage to the multineuronal
pathway causes release of inhibition on the
LMNs in the spinal cord, especially those which
innervate the antigravity muscles, producing
the effect most commonly associated with UMN
lesions, that of spasticity or stiffness in the
limbs.
Gait. Observation of the patient's gait is an
important part of the assessment for UMN
lesions. In the lower limb the effect is extension at
Table 7.14 Conditions associated with UMN signs
• Cerebral palsy due to anoxia at birth
• Cerebral vascular accidents
Brain injury
• Friedreich's ataxia
Spinal injury
Brain or spinal tumours
Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (motor neurone disease)
• Vitamin B12 deficiency
• Multiple (disseminated) sclerosis
• Later stages of syringomyelia
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 145
the hip and knee, with plantarflexion and inver-
sion of the foot. If the effect is unilateral, the
person is described as hemiplegic. The inability
to flex the knee and hip leads to a circumductory
gait, with the lateral border of the forefoot and
toes often scraping the ground. If both sides are
affected the person is paraplegic and the gait is
described as a scissor gait, with the knees
adducted and feet abducted. Walking aids such
as Zimmer frames are essential.
Clinical tests
Clasp-knife spasticity. The affected limb will
be initially stiff to passive stretch, but if gentle
stretch is continued, the limb may suddenly
relax, rather like the opening of a clasp-knife.
This is due to a length-dependent inhibition of
the stretch reflex (see Fig. 7.16).
Tendon reflexes. Due to the reduced inhibition
by the multineuronal tracts, the alpha LMNs
responsible for the contraction of extrafusal
fibres are hyperexcited. This results in exagger-
ated patella and ankle tendon reflexes and clonus
- increased rhythmic contractions elicited at the
ankle or patella by causing brisk stretch of the
muscles. More than three contractions as a result
of testing the patella or Achilles reflex is indica-
tive of UMN damage (Fuller 1993b).
Plantar reflex. Damage to the corticospinal
neurones or their axons has another effect that is
clinically detectable, the so-called plantar reflex
or Babinski sign. It has been suggested that the
abnormal reflex, a dorsiflexing big toe, is due to
release of a spinal inhibitory reflex (Van Gijn
1975). The plantar surface of the foot is stroked
firmly and briskly from the posterolateral border
of the heel to the hallux as shown in Figure 7.17.
The normal response is a slight plantarflexion of
the hallux and lesser toes, although no response
is also often seen, especially in the elderly where
the sensory pathway may be affected. In patients
with corticospinal tract dysfunction, the hallux
will extend (dorsiflexion of the hallux) and the
lesser toes may fan out. This is the extensor
response, sometimes referred to as a positive
Babinski response. However, the normal
response does not become established until the
 146 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
/
l Hospital tests
A Lower motor neurone lesions
\ ,
B e
Figure 7.17 The Babinski response A. Eliciting the
response B. Flexor response (normal response) - toes
plantarflex e. Extensor response (positive Babinski
sign) - toes dorsiflex.
person has learnt to walk and so an extensor
response is quite normal in babies. It is impor-
tant not to rely only on this test for diagnosis of
UMN lesions as it is easy to elicit a pain with-
drawal response which may appear similar to an
extensor response. The rest of the clinical picture
should also suggest UMN lesions.
Muscle tone. Due to the release of spinal inhi-
bition in UMN conditions, the LMNs will be in
a hyperexcited state and so will be firing more
frequently. This will result in greater muscle
'tone' and the affected muscle will feel very firm
or tense.
Any condition which causes damage to the
UMNs or their descending tracts can produce
UMN signs. If the cortex is affected, the effects
will occur on the contralateral side of the body,
and if the lesion is in the spinal cord, the effects
will be on the same side, below the level of the
lesion (Case history 7.1).
The use of tests to diagnose UMN lesions will
vary according to the suspected cause. For
example, brain scans are indicated if a CVA is
suspected, whereas a spinal radiograph would
be used if a tumour of the spine was suspected.
As the lower motor neurone cell body, its efferent
fibres, the neuromuscular junction and the
10-600 skeletal muscle fibres it innervates all act
as a coordinated whole, damage to any part of
this motor unit will produce similar effects of
weakness (paresis) or complete loss of function
(paralysis) and reduced or absent reflexes.
Diseases principally affecting the muscles are
called myopathies, but this can be confusing as
often the cause is lesions in the LMN which have
given rise to atrophy of the muscle. Therefore,
assessment of all parts of the motor unit will be
considered in this section. For classification of
myopathies, see Table 7.15.
Since LMNs or their spinal nerves exit at all
segments of the spinal cord, LMN symptoms can
be seen as a result of damage to any segment from
Case history 7.1
A 70-year-old female Caucasian presented to the
clinic complaining of excessive wear on the lateral
border of the left shoe and a corn on the dorsum of
the fifth toe. The patient walked with a stick and had
a slow, circumducted gait; the left arm was held in a
flexed position.
Neurological assessment revealed normal tendon
reflexes and muscle power in the right leg but
exaggerated tendon reflexes and an extensor plantar
response (positive Babinski sign), clonic spasm of the
muscles and signs of muscle atrophy in the left leg.
Diagnosis: History taking revealed the patient had
suffered a major eVA, which had affected the right
cortex. The clinical features were consistent with the
history. Fortunately for the patient she was right-
handed so her speech was not affected and she was
still able to feed herself and write.
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 147

Table 7.15 Classification of myopathies

Classification Descriptor

Inherited Muscular dystrophies (at present untreatable)

Duchenne's - X-linked recessive condition. Commonest and most serious of the inherited
dystrophies. Affects males, females are carriers. Onset before age 10 years. Weakness in
proximal and girdle muscles of lower limb first, later upper limbs also. Hypertrophy and later
fatty infiltration (pseudohypertrophy) of calf muscles. Cardiac muscle also affected. See ele
vated levels of serum phosphokinase. Death from respiratory failure usual between 20 and
30 years
Becker's - X-linked recessive condition. A more benign variety of the above
Dystrophia myotonica - autosomal dominant condition. Gene located on chromosome 19.
Insidious onset, usually between 20 and 50 years, but can be present earlier. Progressive
weakness and wasting of distal as well as proximal limb muscles, facial and sternomastoids.
Cardiomyopathy, cataracts and frontal baldness also common. Myotonia is failure of muscle
to relax immediately after contraction. Patient cannot open hand quickly after making a fist.
Faulty gene leads to defective chloride ion transport, resulting in membrane hyperexcitability
Facio-scapulo-humeral-autosomal dominant condition - benign, often asymptomatic.
Wasting and weakness of facial, scapular and humeral muscles mean patient has
difficulty in whistling, heavy lifting, etc., as well as scapula in abnormal position
Limb girdle - variable inheritance (may be treatable, depending on cause). Several causes:
specific biochemical defect, benign form of motor neurone disease, polymyositis, hormonal
and metabolic disease

Biochemical defect McArdle's syndrome. Abnormality of glycogen metabolism due to deficiency of muscle
phosphorylase. Patient suffers from fatigue, cramps and muscle spasm.
Malignant hyperpyrexia. No muscle wastage or weakness. Symptoms occur during or
immediately after administration of a general anaesthetic, especially if halothane or the
muscle relaxant suxamethonium chloride is given. Defect in calcium metabolism gives rise
to prolonged muscle contraction, in turn raising body temperature. Fatal in 50% of cases

Acquired inflammatory
Polymyositis-autoimmune disease. Infiltration of monocytes and muscle necrosis. Weakness
of proximal limb, trunk and neck muscles. Patient has difficulty raising hands above head,
getting up out of low chairs and bath. May be associated pain on muscular exertion
Dermatomyositis. As above, with additional involvement of skin of face and hands, with
erythematous rash

Non-inflammatory Secondary to high-dose steroids and thyrotoxicosis. These are the most usual causes, but
can also be associated with alcoholism, Cushing's disease, Addison's disease, acromegaly,
osteomalacia and malignancy. See weakness of proximal limb muscles and shoulder girdle.
Trunk may also be involved

C1 to 55. However, due to the anatomy of the Table 7.16 Conditions associated with lower motor
neurone lesions
spinal cord any damage to the cord from L2 will
only result in an LMN lesion. It is possible to see • Poliomyelitis
a combination of UMN and LMN symptoms if the • Injury to lower motor neurone and/or peripheral nerve
lesion is between C1 and LI, e.g. syringomyelia. • Motor neurone disease
The conditions that can lead to lower motor
Syringomyelia
neurone lesions are listed in Table 7.16.
Vitamin B12 deficiency
Cord compression/lesion (Brown-Sequard syndrome)
Observation
Spina bifida
If the pathway is interrupted or damaged in any
• Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
way, either at the level of the cell body or along
 148 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Case history 7.2
A 54-year-old male Caucasian first presented to the
clinic complaining of corns and callus under the
metatarsal heads of both feet. He was unable to bend
down to cut his toe nails.
A vascular assessment revealed weak pulses in
both feet, with the right foot being cold. A neurological
assessment revealed dimished reflexes in the right
leg and absence of vibration sense in the right foot.
Two-point discrimination was 2 ern in the left foot and
10 cm in the right foot. Orthopaedic examination
showed a leg length discrepancy of 2.5 ern, the right
leg being the shorter and having developed a
functional equinus at the ankle. Muscle wastage was
apparent in the lower limb of the right side. The
patient walked with a limp.
Diagnosis: The signs and symptoms are all
consistent with poliomyelitis. The patient had
contracted the virus when a child. The lower motor
neurones of the right side of the spinal cord at the
level of the lumbar plexi had been affected.
its axon, then the impulse cannot reach the
muscle. The result will be weakness (paresis) or
flaccid paralysis, depending on the site and
extent of the damage. The sites of damage may
involve:
• lower motor neurone, e.g. poliomyelitis virus
(Case history 7.2)
• peripheral axon, e.g. diabetes mellitus
• neuromuscular junction, e.g. destruction of
cholinergic receptors of the skeletal muscle as
in myasthenia gravis.
Myopathies will also produce weakness or
paralysis, even if the lower motor neurone is intact.
In contrast to UMN lesions, which affect par-
ticular movements, LMN lesions and myopathies
affect particular muscles (Case history 7.3). For
example, if the tibialis anterior nerve is affected
the anterior tibial muscle is unable to control
deceleration of dorsiflexion at the ankle in gait,
producing a characteristic slapping gait (Root
et al1977).
Nerve impulses are essential to the health of
the muscle, so that lack of impulses leads to
much more rapid atrophy of muscle, skin and
other soft tissue than seen in UMN lesions. This
is known as denervation atrophy. In addition, the
denervated muscle becomes highly sensitive to
Case history 7.3
A 52-year-old Caucasian female presented to the
clinic with plantar callus and fissuring, which had
arisen following plantar fasciotomy to correct 'clubbed
feet'. The patient stated that she had been born with
normal feet, but by the time she was 6 years old she
could not run or jump properly and by the time she
was an adolescent her feet had become high-arched
and inverted.
She had noticed a gradual weakness in her arms
and legs and on one accasion, when 41 years old, she
had almost dropped a baby while working as a nursing
auxiliary. This incident had caused her to be sent for a
neurological examination which revealed slowed motor
nerve conduction velocities. She had a recent history
of several falls, with her ankle 'going over'. She also
complained of aching joints in the feet, knees and hips.
Her 27-year-old son was similarly affected.
Neurological examination showed all sensory
perception except vibration to be normal, but reflexes
were absent. Muscle power was reduced in all limbs
and muscle wasting of hands, feet and calf muscles
was noted. Orthopaedic examination showed reduced
dorsiflexion and eversion, with a pes-cavus-typa foot
and high-stepping gait.
Diagnosis: The patient suffered from
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, also known as
peroneal muscle atrophy. It is an inherited peripheral
neuropathy and exists in more than one form, the two
most common forms being autosomal dominant.
very small amounts of neurotransmitter (acetyl-
choline), possibly due to upregulation of recep-
tors. This results in a quivering of the muscle
(fasciculation), seen on an electromyogram as
fibrillation. This effect will not be seen if the
lesion is in the muscle itself.
Clinical tests
Muscle power: Muscle power can be graded
according to the Medical Research Council scale
(Fuller 1993c) as follows:
5 = normal power
4+ = submaximal movement against resistance
4 = moderate movement against resistance
4- = slight movement against resistance
3 = moves against gravity but not resistance
2 = moves with gravity eliminated
1 = flicker
a = no movement.
A reduced strength of contraction suggests
paresis or paralysis.

Fatiguability. If the site of the lesion is the neu-
romuscular junction, the muscle will show a
sliding decrease in response or fatiguability as
seen in myasthenia gravis. The acetylcholine
receptors are destroyed in an autoimmune
attack and although the first quanta of neuro-
transmitter can diffuse to remaining receptors,
subsequent release of neurotransmitter is less
and less likely to make contact and so the
response fades. The muscle cells are able to
replace the receptors but the autoimmune attack
will strike again, in the same or different
muscles.
Muscle tone. In the skeletal muscles of a
healthy person there will always be some motor
units firing, which means that the muscle will
feel firm. This is referred to as the 'tone' of the
muscle. In LMN or muscle damage, the muscle
will feel flabby, because of loss of this tone.
Tendon reflexes. Reflexes will be weak or
absent, because of interruption of the final
common pathway. A single reduced or absent
reflex suggests mononeuropathy or radiculopa-
thy. A reduction or absence of all lower limb
reflexes suggests polyradiculopathy, cauda
equina lesions, peripheral polyneuropathy or a
myopathy. In the latter there will be no sensory
deficit.
Hospital tests
Again, the tests selected vary according to the
suspected cause. For example, if diabetic
polyneuropathy is suspected, the diagnosis
could be confirmed by a combination of sensory
testing, nerve conduction tests and blood glucose
measurements.
Nerve conduction. To measure motor conduc-
tion velocities the stimulating electrode is placed
along the path of the nerve and the recording
electrode is placed over the belly of the muscle.
Amplitude and duration of the action potential
are also recorded. The lower limit of normal con-
duction velocities in the lower limb is 40 m/ s.
Nerve conduction tests, whether sensory,
motor or mixed nerve, do not give definitive
diagnoses but help to confirm diagnosis: e.g. by
comparing the affected side with the healthy side
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 149
as in diagnosing tarsal tunnel syndrome (Galardi
et al 1994) or by distinguishing between axonal
degeneration and segmental demyelination, the
two chief pathological processes occurring in
peripheral nerve diseases. The distinguishing
characteristics are shown below.
Axonal degeneration, e.g. the polyneu-
ropathies of diabetes mellitus, alcoholism, toxic-
ity due to heavy metals, nerve entrapment and
Friedreich's ataxia (Zouri et al 1998):
• see clinical changes first (weakness,
numbness, atrophy)
• slowing of nerve conduction velocities and
loss of large fibres
• reduction in action potential amplitude
• more prominent distally than proximally
(longest fibres affected first)
• fibrillation seen on electromyograph.
Segmental demyelination, e.g. vasculitis of
rheumatoid arthritis (acquired, chronic),
Guillain-Barre syndrome (acquired, acute/
chronic), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease/peron-
eal muscular atrophy/hereditary motor and
sensory neuropathy (inherited, chronic):
• electrophysiological changes seen first
• dramatic fall in nerve conduction velocities,
maybe even total conduction block
• worsens proximally.
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease is interesting
because two subtypes have been identified:
HMSN type I, which shows primarily segmental
demyelination, and HMSN type II, which shows
mainly axonal degeneration (McLeod & Lance
1989b).
Electromyography. This uses a needle elec-
trode inserted into the muscle to show the elec-
trical activity of the muscle in response to an
electrical stimulus. Abnormal results are detected
in dysfunction of motor nerves, neuromuscular
junction lesions and in myopathies (Matthews &
Arnold 1991). Electromyography is the only
means of electrophysiological testing for
myopathies:
• if due to motor nerve denervation (e.g.
poliomyelitis), will see reduced recruitment,
 150 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 7.17 Differences between upper motor neurone and lower motor neurone lesions

Upper motor neurone Lower motor neurone

Exaggerated tendon reflexes Loss of tendon reflexes

Extensor plantar response (positive Babinski sign)
Loss of abdominal reflex
Normal electrical excitability of muscle
Some muscle wasting over a period of time due to lack of use
Increase in muscle tone (clonus)
Whole limb affected
Flexor plantar response (negative Babinski sign)
Normal abdominal reflex
Fasciculation (fibrillation seen on EMG)
Marked muscle wasting occurs relatively quickly
Flaccid muscles (lack of tone)
Certain muscle groups affected depending on site of
damage; deformity due to contracture of antagonists

fibrillation, then a reduction in nerve action reflexes necessary for accurate movement. The
potential amplitude basal ganglia also play an important part in the
• if due to changes at the neuromuscular coordination of movement. Damage to these
junction (e.g. myasthenia gravis), will see a parts of the nervous system may have an effect
reduction in recruitment on gait and coordination. Conditions that may
• if due to muscle disease (e.g. Duchenne's affect coordination and proprioception function
muscular dystrophy), will see spike are listed in Table 7.18.
potentials on the electromyograph.
Tests may be performed that are specific to Observation
particular conditions, such as detection of the
Careful observation of motor activity can give
presence of antibodies to cholinergic receptors in
an indication of a deficit in posture, balance or
myasthenia gravis.
coordination; for example, a stamping gait may
Nerve and muscle biopsies. These are obtained
be due to loss of proprioception as occurs in
in an identical manner to those described for
sensory nerve biopsies. Histological examination
of nerve and muscle tissue will show structural
abnormalities, and biochemical tests will detect Table 7.18 Conditions that may result in poor coordination
enzyme dysfunction: e.g. in distinguishing Part Conditions
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy from the treat-
able connective tissue disease of polymyositis, Cerebellum Tumour
Multiple sclerosis
which also shows muscle weakness and atrophy Arnold-Chiari malformation
of limb girdles. Friedreich's ataxia
The differences between UMN and LMN Other hereditary spinocerebellar
ataxias
lesions are summarised in Table 7.17. Hypothyroidism
Repeated head trauma as in boxing
Basal ganglia Parkinsonism
ASSESSMENT OF Huntington's chorea
COORDINATION/PROPRIOCEPTION Wilson's disease
FUNCTION Sydenham's chorea
Ascending pathways Subacute combined degeneration
The receptors in the muscles, joints and tendons of the spinal cord
all feed position sense information to the cerebel- Guillain-Barre syndrome
lum and cortex. In turn, the cerebellum and the Tabes dorsalis
Alcoholism
cortex bring about vital postural reflexes and

tabes dorsalis, where the ascending tracts in the
dorsal columns degenerate. The patient will not
know where his body is in space and so lifts his
legs much higher than necessary to clear the
ground. The patient will also be unaware of
when his foot is about to make ground contact
and so stamps the foot down. This has the
advantage of stimulating pressure receptors
proximally, as vibrations from the foot travel up
the leg and so provide much needed informa-
tion to the brain.
The cerebellum has modifying influences on
the UMNs in the cortex and on brain-stem nuclei.
It receives rich proprioceptive information and
adjusts the activity of the UMNs to ensure that
the actual action and intended action are
matched. The cerebellum is essential for smooth,
accurate movement and posture and balance.
Dysfunction of the cerebellum or of its afferent
and efferent tracts produces characteristic effects
that are easily observable.
Dysarthria. Here cerebellar dysfunction affects
the speech muscles and produces a scanning
speech, with inappropriate syllabic stress and
volume.
Dysdiadochokinesia. This is where actions are
no longer smooth, continuous movements, but
are broken down into their component parts,
producing clumsy, jerky actions.
Tremor. The tremor associated with cerebellar
defect is due to the dysfunction of the stretch
reflex and is an intention tremor, i.e. one which
increases in amplitude as the person tries to carry
out any tasks with the affected limb. The tremor
disappears at rest.
Gait. If maintenance of balance is upset, the
patient will feel unsteady and adopt a wide base
of gait. As voluntary movement is also affected,
the gait will be clumsy or staggering, as if drunk.
Such gait is described as ataxic. The patient may
complain of deviating to one side, which sug-
gests the dysfunction is limited to that hemi-
sphere.
Basal ganglia. Although the basal ganglia also
have a modifying role on voluntary movement,
the effects of their dysfunction is quite different
from that of the cerebellum. Damage to the basal
ganglia produces either a poverty of movement
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 151
(hypo /bradykinesia) as seen in Parkinson's
disease, or jerky writhing movements (choreo-
athetosis) as seen in the inherited disease of
Huntington's chorea (Case history 7.4) or the
benign and brief effects of Sydenham's chorea,
associated with rheumatic fever.
Clinical tests
Proprioception in joints. To test proprioception
distally, the practitioner holds the sides of the
hallux between forefinger and thumb. While the
patient's eyes are shut, the toe is moved up and
down and the patient should be able to state the
final position of the toe. The sides of the hallux
are held rather than the dorsal and plantar sur-
faces, to avoid additional pressure information
being generated. This information travels from
receptors in joints in the largest-diameter, fastest
nerve fibres of the A-alpha class into the spinal
cord, up to the cerebellum in the ipsilateral
spinocerebellar tracts and to the conscious
cortex in the dorsal columns. A positive result
shows that the pathway to the cortex is intact.
An inability to give the correct responses would
be seen in conditions such as tabes dorsalis.
Romberg's sign. This test can be used to
confirm proprioceptive disturbance in the dorsal
columns or peripheral nerves (Fuller 1993d).
Case history 7.4
A 30-year-old Caucasian male attended the clinic
complaining of sore corns. Questioning revealed that
he was mentally handicapped. Examination showed
warm, hyperhidrotic feet with a poor skin condition
and fibrous lesions on the plantar aspect of the feet.
The left foot had marked pes cavus deformity. The
gait revealed limping and shuffling with excessive arm
movement in order to maintain balance.
Over a period of a few years further mental and
physical deterioration became apparent. The patient's
brother was similarly affected and so apparently had
been their father.
Diagnosis: A diagnosis of Huntington's chorea was
made. This disease is inherited as an autosomal
condition with complete penetration and late onset,
and is characterised by progressive chorea and
dementia.
 152 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Patients are observed standing with feet together
and eyes open and then closed. If patients are
unable to maintain balance with eyes open, this
suggests either a cerebellar or a vestibular defect
and if the patients rock backwards and forwards
with eyes open a cerebellar defect could be the
cause. In such cases this is not a positive
Romberg's sign and Romberg's test cannot be
performed. Closing the eyes will deprive the
patients of visual information, so that the brain
has to rely on proprioceptive input: if this is not
being transmitted, the patients will sway and
find it difficult to keep balance. The practitioner
must be ready to catch the patient. A positive
Romberg's sign could be due to cord compres-
sion, tabes dorsalis, vitamin B12 deficiency or
degenerative spinal cord disease.
Nystagmus. This is rapid eye movements due
to vestibular dysfunction and can be elicited by
asking the patient to make a sudden rapid head
movement. Its presence indicates a cerebellar
lesion.
Heel-shin test. The patient is asked to slide the
heel of one leg straight down the shin of the
other. Patients with cerebellar dysfunction are
often unable to do this because of lack of coordi-
nation and the heel will follow a wavy path
down the other leg.
Heel-toe test. The patient is asked to walk in a
straight line heel to toe. Patients with cerebellar
dysfunction will stagger about the midline, but it
must be remembered that there are many other
causes of an unsteady gait, especially in the
elderly.
Finger-nose test. The patient is asked to stand
comfortably and then, with eyes shut and one
arm outstretched, to bring his fingertip to the
nose. Repeat for the other arm. Cerebellar dys-
function will cause the patient to overshoot
(hypermetria) or undershoot (hypometria) and
miss the nose.
Muscle tone. This will be reduced in the
affected limbs.
Tendon reflexes. These may be unusually sus-
tained, because of the oscillations of an abnormal
stretch reflex, but should not be exaggerated.
Occasionally, a weak response can be seen in
cerebellar syndromes.
Parkinson's disease
This is the commonest extrapyramidal disease
and is due to depletion of dopaminergic neurones
in the substantia nigra, which project to the
caudate nucleus. The most troublesome effect is
hypo/bradykinesia, which results in the patient
having great difficulty initiating or stopping
movement (Case history 7.5). Rest tremor and
rigidity are also features. If the hand is affected
the tremor may cause the patient to move inde~
finger and thumb in a 'pill-rolling' movement.
The patient may show a mask-like face, and
speak in a soft voice. Micrographia (small hand-
writing) is also a characteristic.
The antigravity muscles are affected, producing
a stooped posture with knees flexed, so that the
patient's centre of gravity is no longer over the
base of gait. This causes the festination seen in
gait, where the patient has to move more and
more quickly to avoid falling forward. Gait also
tends to be shuffling, with poor heel-ground
contact - 'marche ii petits pas'.
The tendon reflexes are unaffected. There is a
general resistance to passive stretch, described
as 'lead-pipe rigidity'. It may show a superim-
posed intermittent release of the resistance
producing a series of jerks, the so-called 'cog-
wheel' effect.
Case history 7.5
A 65-year-old female Caucasian presented to the
clinic requesting nail care. On examination her nails
were found to be long, thickened and mycotic and a
variety of dorsal, apical and interdigital lesions were
present.
The patient could appreciate temperature, light
touch and pressure and reflexes were normal, but
she was very confused and nervous, so that
communication was difficult. A full orthopaedic
assessment could not be carried out because of the
patient's inability to relax her legs and feet. Ankle
dorsiflexion was limited and the feet adopted a varus
position. Most of the toes showed retraction
deformities. Movements were hypokinetic and gait
was stooped and shufftinq. There was a minor rest
tremor in the right arm.
Diagnosis: The symptoms are consistent with
Parki.n.son's ~isease. This is a progressive idiopathic
condition which gradually affects all limbs. Mental
confusion/dementia is not always present.

In a patient with Parkinson's disease, there is
no habituation with the glabellar tap reflex. The
glabellar tap reflex involves the practitioner
gently, slowly and repeatedly tapping the fore-
head of the patient between the eyes. In a healthy
person, the first tap or two will elicit the eye-
blink reflex, but this will rapidly habituate.
The frequency of the tremor may be measured
via hospital tests but usually the above clinical
tests and a positive response to drug therapy
will be sufficient to confirm the diagnosis of
Parkinson's disease.
ASSESSMENT OF AUTONOMIC
FUNCTION
As explained earlier, the autonomic nerves inner-
vate the viscera and internal structures such as
blood vessels, since they enable the nervous
system to maintain homeostasis (see Fig. 7.9).
Medical history may reveal abnormalities of
bowel and bladder function.
Observation
There will be various signs which would suggest
autonomic neuropathy such as abnormal sudo-
motor responses in the skin and abnormal car-
diovascular responses in the functioning of the
heart and peripheral blood vessels (Faris 1991).
Sudomotor neuropathy usually leads to an
absence of sweating and a dry skin, although it
may produce hyperhidrosis. Vasomotor neu-
ropathy usually produces a warm red skin and
an absence of vasoconstriction in response to
cold although it may occasionally produce a pro-
longed vasoconstriction. It may also lead to pos-
tural hypotension. Neuropathy of nerves to the
cardiac pacemaker tissue may lead to failure of
the heart to respond appropriately to the
demands of the body, e.g. an absence of tachy-
cardia in response to exercise.
Clinical tests
Heart rate. The pulse is taken while the patient
is in a supine position and repeated when an
NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 153
upright posture is adopted. The normal response
is an increase in heart rate of greater than 11 beats
per minute. A loss of response suggests parasym-
pathetic abnormality.
Blood pressure. Repeat the above test measur-
ing blood pressure in the two positions. The sys-
tolic blood pressure should fall on standing by
approximately 30 mmHg and the diastolic pres-
sure by about 15 mmHg. An increased drop sug-
gests sympathetic abnormality. Failure of the
cardiovascular system to compensate for pos-
tural effects can lead to postural syncope.
Valsalva manoeuvre. This is not advisable if
there is evidence of proliferative retinopathy. The
patient is asked to take a deep breath and exhale
against a closed glottis for 10-15 seconds and
then breathe normally. The pulse rate is taken
during the Valsalva manoeuvre and on release.
Heart rate should increase during the manoeuvre
and fall on release. No increase during the
manoeuvre suggests sympathetic abnormality
and no decrease on release suggests parasympa-
thetic abnormality. These tests reveal abnormal
responses of the baroreceptor reflex, which impli-
cates defects in innervation of the cardiac pace-
maker tissue rather than peripheral autonomic
neuropathy, for which there are no clinical tests.
Certain signs may suggest peripheral autonomic
(sympathetic) neuropathy:
• a dry skin due to failure of sudomotor
nerves
• a warm foot due to lack of arterial
vasoconstriction
• engorged dorsal veins, due to lack of venous
vasoconstriction.
Signs of parasympathetic neuropathy are
disorders of bowel and bladder function and
impotence.
The condition commonly associated with
autonomic neuropathy is diabetes mellitus,
where the foot will often appear red and feel dry
and warm. There may be coexistent neuropathy
of other small fibres such as pain and tempera-
ture fibres (A-delta and C), as well as large-fibre
(A-alpha and A-beta) involvement, giving
rise to the picture of a typical neuropathic foot
(Ch, 17). Less common conditions exhibiting
 154 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

autonomic neuropathy are Cuillain-Barre syn- SUMMARY

drome, amyloidosis and congenital autonomic
failure. It should be remembered that other con- This chapter has considered the assessment of the
ditions, such as infection and anaemia, and various components on the nervous system.
certain drugs, such as beta-blockers, can also However, as stated earlier, it is important to
affect the cardiovascular system and may give a remember that a number of conditions affect more
false-positive result. than one part. Those conditions that result in
damage to more than one part of the nervous
system are summarised in Table 7.19. It is essential
that all parts of the nervous system are assessed in
order that the practitioner may acquire a full
picture of neurological function (Case history 7.6).
Case history 7.6 A summary of the tests discussed and their inter-
A 47-year-old male Caucasian was referred to the
pretation is shown in Table 7.20.
clinic with a small ulcer which had existed for
6 months beneath his right heel. When 29 years old,
he had visited Nigeria where he had contracted Table 7.19 Conditions that affect more than one part of the
schistosomiasis with resultant paraparesis from his nervous system
lower abdomen downwards. Since then he had
suffered repeated ulceration of both feet. The present Condition Parts affected
ulcer was covered with dense callus which when
debrided revealed a lesion 15 mm in diameter and Diabetes mellitus Sensory, motor (LMN) and
8 mm deep. Its border was surrounded by macerated autonomic
callus.
A vascular assessment showed no remarkable Motor neurone disease LMN and UMN
features, all tests indicating a good blood supply to Spina bifida LMN and sensory
the foot. The neurological assessment revealed
absent reflexes, lack of appreciation of all senses and Syringomyelia Sensory, LMN and UMN
constant 'pins and needles' sensation around his hips Vitamin B 12 deficiency Sensory, LMN and UMN
and legs. The skin of the feet was dry. The patient
Multiple sclerosis Sensory and UMN
used a walking stick to support his right leg and
walked with an abductory gait to achieve ground Cord compression/lesion Sensory, LMN and UMN
clearance as the right foot could not dorsiflex. The
Guillain-Barre syndrome LMN, sensory and autonomic
right leg showed wasting of the triceps surae.
Diagnosis: A diagnosis was made of neuropathic Charcot-Marie-Tooth Mainly LMN but possible
ulcer associated with peripheral sensory, motor and disease sensory
autonomic neuropathy due to damage in the spinal
cord caused by the parasitic blood fluke Schistosoma Nerve injuries Depends upon site, may
result in LMN, UMN, sensory
haematobium.
or autonomic

REFERENCES

Booth J, Young M 2000 Testing the reliability of 10 g
monofilaments. Diabetic Medicine 17: S74
Boulton A J M (ed) 2000 The pathway to ulceration. In:
Boulton A J M, Connor H, Cavanagh P R (eds) The foot in
diabetes, 3rd edn. J Wiley, Chichester, p 22
Boulton A J M, Gries FA, Jervell J A 1998 Guidelines for the
diagnosis and outpatient management of diabetic
peripheral neuropathy. Diabetic Medicine 15: 508-514
Budd K 1984 Pain. Update Postgraduate Centre Series.
Update, Guildford
Cassella J P, Ashford R L, Kavanagh-Sharp V 2000 Effect of
applied pressure in the determination of vibration
sensitivity using the neurothesiometer. The Foot 10: 27-30
Coppini D V, Weng C, Young P J, Sonksen P H 2000 The
'VPT score' - a useful predictor of neuropathy in diabetic
patients. Diabetic Medicine 17: 488-490
Epstein 0, Perkin G, de Bono D, Cookson J 1992 Clinical
examination. Gower Medical, London
Faris I 1991 The management of the diabetic foot. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh
Fuller G 1993a Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 135
Fuller G 1993b Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 135
Fuller G 1993c Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, p 107
 NEUROLOGICAL ASSESSMENT 155

Table 7.20 Summary of neurological signs and symptoms

Feature Site of lesion Possible disease

Apraxic gait Stroke

Aphasia, speech defects UMN (hemisphere) Hydrocephalus
Visual defects Head injury

Progressive focal deficit epilepsy UMN (head) Tumour, ischaemic stroke,

previous intracranial disease

Increased tone and reflexes UMN (head/spinal cord) Stroke

Weak arm extensors Cerebral palsy
Weak leg flexors Neck, cervical region Neck injury
Multiple sclerosis
Hypo/bradykinesia
Festinating gait Basal ganglia Parkinson's disease
Lead-pipe/cog-wheel rigidity
Rest tremor

Choreo-athetotic movements Basal ganglia Huntington's chorea

Sydenham's chorea (rare)
Nystagmus
Dysarthria Brain stem Multiple sclerosis
Cranial nerve palsies Syringomyelia

Nystagmus
Dysarthria Friedreich's ataxia
Scanning speech Cerebellum Stroke
Diminished, pendular reflexes Spinal cord Tumour
Intention tremor Vitamin B12 deficiency
Ataxic gait Syringomyelia
Dysdiadochokinesia Spina bifida

Diminished tendon reflexes LMN Poliomyelitis

Paresis/paralysis (Spinal cordi nerve roots/axons) Diabetes mellitus
Pain Chronic alcoholism
Paraesthesia/anaesthesia Guillain-Barre syndrome
Rheumatoid arthritis
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
Vitamin deficiencies (Bl' B6 , B12 )
Tumour
Disc protrusion
Trauma

Progressive fatiguability and weakness Neuromuscular junction Myasthenia gravis

Proximal limb muscle weakness and Muscle Myopathies

wasting, but no sensory loss and
no fasciculation

Fuller G 1993d Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, pp 41-42
Galardi G, Amadio 5, Maderna L et al 1994
Electrophysiologic studies in tarsal tunnel syndrome -
diagnostic reliability of motor distal latency, mixed nerve
and sensory nerve conduction studies. American Journal
of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 73: 193-198
Ganong W 1991a Reviews of medical physiology, 15th edn.
Lange, London, p 200
Ganong W 1991b Reviews of medical physiology, 15th edn.
Lange, London, pp 132-133
Golding D N, Rose D M, Selvarajah K 1986 Clinical tests for
carpal tunnel syndrome: an evaluation. British Journal of
Rheumatology 25: 388-390
International Consensus on the Diabetic Foot 1999
International Working Group on the Diabetic Foot, p 32
Kalter-Leibovici 0, Yosipovitch G, Gabbay U, Yarnitsky D,
Karp M 2001 Factor analysis of thermal and vibration
thresholds in young patients with Type 1 diabetes
mellitus. Diabetic Medicine 18: 213-217
McClintic J R 1980 Basic anatomy and physiology of the
human body. John Wiley, New York
 156 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
McGill M, Molyneaux L, Yue D K 1998 Use of the
Semmes-Weinstein 5.07/10 gram monofilament: the long
and the short of it. Diabetic Medicine 15: 615-617
McLeod J, Lance J 1989a Introductory neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 210-211
McLeod J, Lance J 1989b Introductory neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, p 282
Matthews P, Arnold D 1991 (eds) Diagnostic tests in
neurology. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Melzack R 1992 Phantom limbs. Scientific American, April: 90
Nakayama H, Noda K, Hotta H, Ohsawa H, Hosoya Y 1998
Effects of ageing on numbers, size and conduction
velocities of myelinated and unmyelinated fibers of the
pelvic nerve in rats. Journal of the Autonomic Nervous
System 69: 148-155
Root M L, Orien W P, Weed J H 1977 Normal and abnormal
function of the foot. Clinical biomechanics - volume 2.
Clinical Biomechanics Corporation, Los Angeles, p 254
Vander A J, Sherman J H, Luciano D S 1998 Human
physiology, 7th edn. McGraw Hill, New York, pp
238-239
Van Gijn J 1975 The Babinski response: stimulus and
effector. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and
Psychology 38: 180-186
FURTHER READING
Berkow R (ed) 2000 The Merck manual. Merck Sharp &
Dohme Research Laboratories, New Jersey
Fuller G 1993 Neurological examination made easy.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Joel A, Delisa J B (eds) 1993 Electrodiagnostic evaluation of
the peripheral nervous system. In: Rehabilitation
Van Schie C H M, Abbott C A, Shaw J E, Boulton A J M
1998 A simple method for measuring temperature
perception threshold in diabetic neuropathy. Diabetic
Medicine 15: S66
Wareham A, Rayman A, Rayman G 1997 Pin-prick sensory
thresholds in detecting risk of neuropathic ulceration.
Diabetic Medicine 14: S32
Wilkinson I M S 1993a Essential neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, p 135
Wilkinson I M S 1993b Essential neurology, 2nd edn.
Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 49-50
Wilson K J W 1990 Ross & Wilson Anatomy and
physiology in health and illness. Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh
Winkler A S, Ejskaer N, Edmonds M, Watkins P J 2000
Dissociated sensory loss in diabetic autonomic
neuropathy. Diabetic Medicine 17: 457-462
Young M, Matthews C 1998 Neuropathy screening: can we
achieve our ideals? The Diabetic Foot 1: 22-25
Zouri M, Feki M, Hamida C B et al1998 Electrophysiology
and nerve biopsy: comparative study in Friedreich's
ataxia and Friedreich's ataxia phenotype with
vitamin E deficiency. Neuromuscular Disorders 8:
416-425
medicine: principles and practice, 2nd edn. Lippincott,
Philadelphia
Kandel E, [essel T, Schwartz J 1991 The principles of neural
science. Elsevier, New York
Wilkinson I M S 1998 Essential neurology, 2nd edn. Blackwell
Science, Oxford
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 157
Terms of reference 157
Position of a part of the body 158
Joint motion 158
Position of a joint 161
Deformity of a part of the body 161
Why is an orthopaedic assessment
indicated? 161
The assessment process 162
General assessment guidelines 163
Gait analysis 167
Abnormal gait patterns 173
Non-weightbearing examination 175
Hip examination 175
Knee examination 181
Tibia/fibularexamination 186
Ankle examination 187
Midtarsaljoint 194
Metatarsal examination 194
Metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs) 196
Interphalangeal joints (IPJs) 197
Alignment of the leg and foot 197
Static examination (weightbearing) 202
Limb-lengthinequality 206
Summary 209
Orthopaedic assessment
P. Beeson
INTRODUCTION
Orthopaedic lower limb assessment is an essen-
tial component of the primary patient evaluation.
It involves both static and dynamic assessment of
musculoskeletal function. Movement of the
lower limb involves interaction between the
musculoskeletal and the nervous system. This
chapter concentrates on the assessment of the
musculoskeletal system. Details of the neurolog-
ical basis of movement and assessment of the
nervous system are covered in Chapter 7.
The assessment process is based upon an
approach which involves general observation of
the patient, specific joint observation, palpation,
examination of movements and conduction of
special tests (McRae 1997). Qualitative, semi-
quantitative and quantitative measurement tech-
niques are used. The practitioner should be
aware of the likely errors that can ensue from
such measurements and take these into consider-
ation when interpreting and analysing data from
the assessment (see Ch. 4). This chapter concen-
trates on assessment of the lower limb: details
regarding the upper limb and spine have been
excluded but can be found in other texts.
TERMS OF REFERENCE
The body is divided into three cardinal planes:
sagittal, frontal (coronal) and transverse (Fig. 8.1).
These planes form the reference points from which
to describe:
157
 158 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
I-----=.:~~_t-L=-=-=_~--- Sagittal plane
t - - - - Frontal plane
Transverse
plane
Figure 8.1 Cardinal planes of the body: sagittal. frontal
and transverse. Sagittal divides the body into right and left
halves. frontal divides the body into front and back and
transverse divides the body into upper and lower sections.
The diagram shows midplanes but the terms refer to any
plane parallel to the appropriate midplane.
• position of a part of the body
• joint motion
• position of a joint
• deformity of a part of the body.
Position of a part of the body
The cardinal body planes are used as reference
points to describe positions within the body.
Anterior (to the front of) and posterior (to the rear
of) describe positions in the frontal plane, e.g. the
patella lies anterior to the knee joint. Distal (away
from the centre) and proximal (towards the
centre) describe positions in the transverse plane,
e.g. the interphalangeal joints (IPJs) lie distal to
the metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs). Medial
(towards the midline of the body) and lateral
(away from the midline of the body) describe
positions in the sagittal plane, e.g. the navicular
lies on the medial side of the foot and the cuboid
on the lateral side. In the foot, dorsal is used to
refer to the top of the foot and plantar to the sole
of the foot.
Joint motion
Sagittal plane. Motion in the sagittal plane pro-
duces extension and flexion. The term flexion
denotes the bending of a joint, whereas extension
denotes the opposite, i.e. straightening of a joint.
The terms used to describe sagittal plane motion in
the foot are slightly different from those used to
describe such motion at the hip and knee (exten-
sion and flexion). At the ankle (Fig. 8.2), subtalar
joint (STJ), midtarsal joint (MTJ), metatarsopha-
langeal joint (MTPJ), interphalangeal joint (IPJ)
and first and fifth rays, sagittal plane motion is
termed dorsiflexion and planiarilexion. Dorsiflexion
denotes a raising of the whole or part of the foot
towards the leg, whereas plantarflexion denotes the
movement of the dorsal aspect of the foot away
from the leg.
Frontal (coronal) plane. Motion in the frontal
plane produces abduction and adduction of the
thigh and leg and inversion and eversion of the
foot. This is because the foot lies at right angles to
the leg, so the terminology used to describe
movements of the foot differ from that for the leg
and thigh. Abduction is when the distal segment
moves away from the midline of the body and
adduction when it moves towards the midline.
For example, in order to do the 'splits' gymnasts
must abduct their legs. Inversion of the foot is
when the plantar aspect of the foot is tilted so as
to move towards the midline of the body.
Eversion is when the plantar aspect of the foot is
tilted so as to face away from the midline of the
body (Fig. 8.3).
Transverse plane. Motion in the transverse
plane produces internal and external rotation of
the thigh and leg and adduction and abduction of
the foot. Internal rotation occurs when the anterior
surface of the distal segment rotates medially in
relation to the proximal segment and external
rotation when the opposite occurs - the anterior
surface of the distal segment moves laterally in
relation to the proximal segment (Fig. 8.4). In the
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 159

A B C

Figure 8.2 Sagittal plane motion at the ankle A. Dorsiflexion: movement of the foot toward the anterior aspect of the tibia
B. Neutral position C. Plantarflexion: movement of the foot away from the tibia.

Figure 8.3 Frontal plane motion in relation to the midline of the body (black line) A. Inversion: the foot is lifted up and
away from the line B. Eversion: the foot is moved down and towards the line.
 160 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

A B

c D

Figure 8.4 Relationship between transverse plane motion

in the leg and transverse plane motion in the foot A. The
feet are mildly abducted; this is the normal standing position
B. The legs are externally (laterally) rotated, which results in
abduction of the feet (C) D. The legs are internally rotated
E (medially), which results in the adduction of the feet (E).
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 161

foot the use of the terms adduction and abduction Deformity of a part of the body
is dependent upon the site of the reference point:
the midline of the body or the midline of the foot. The term 'deformity' is used to describe a fixed
Functionally, the midline of the body is usually position adopted by a part of the body. Terms
used as the reference point: abduction of the foot used to denote deformity usually have the
is where the distal part of the foot moves away suffix -us:
from the midline of the body and adduction when • Sagittal plane - equinus when the foot or part of
the distal part of the foot moves towards the the foot is plantarflexed, e.g. ankle equinus,
midline of the body (Fig. 8.4). Anatomically the and extensus when the foot or part of the foot
midline of the foot is commonly used as the ref- is dorsiflexed, e.g. hallux extensus. Calcaneus,
erence point: e.g. adductor hallucis is inserted although rarely seen, is used to describe the
into the lateral side of the proximal phalanx of calcaneus when it is in fixed dorsiflexion, e.g.
the hallux and is so termed because it brings talipes calcaneovalgus.
about adduction of the hallux - movement of the • Frontal plane - varus and valgus (Fig. 8.5).
hallux towards the midline of the foot. • Transverse plane - adductus or abductus.
Triplanar motion. The position of the joint axis
together with the shape of the articulating surfaces
can result in joint motion in more than one plane.
If a joint axis is positioned at an angle of less than
900 to all the cardinal body planes triplanar motion
occurs - pronation and supination. Pronation is the
collective term for dorsiflexion, eversion and
abduction and supination for plantarflexion, inver-
sion and adduction. In the foot the subtalar and
midtarsal joints produce triplanar motion.

Position of a joint
To describe the position of a joint the suffix -ed is
used:
• sagittal plane - extended and flexed (thigh and
leg); dorsiflexed and plantarflexed (foot)
• transverse plane - internally and externally
rotated (thigh and leg); adducted and abducted
(foot)
• frontal plane - abducted and adducted (thigh
and leg); inverted and everted (foot)
• triplanar - pronated and supinated (foot).
It is important that a distinction is made
between joint motion and position; a joint moves Genu valgum Genu varum
(knock knees) (bow leg)
in the opposite direction to the position it is in. For
A B
example, at heel-strike the foot is slightly
supinated (position) but as soon as the heel con- Figure 8.5 Frontal plane deformity of the legs A. Genu
tacts the ground pronation (motion) occurs at the valgum (knock knees): the knees are close together and the
medial malleoli are far apart B. Genu varum (bow legs):
subtalar joint in order to absorb shock from ground the knees are far apart and the medial malleoli are close
contact. together.
 162 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 8.1 Factors that can affect normal function

• Hereditary/congenital problems, e.g. Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, talipes equinovarus, CDH

• Acute/chronic injury causing pain, e.g. slipped femoral epiphysis, ankle sprain
• Abnormal alignment secondary to trauma, e.g. femoral/ tibial! epiphyseal fracture
• Abnormal alignment (developmental), e.g. internal femoral torsion, genu valgum
• Infections, e.g. tuberculosis
• Neurological disorders, e.g. CVA
• Muscle disorders, e.g. Duchenne's muscular dystrophy
• Neoplasia, e.g. osteosarcoma
• Systemic disease, e.g. autoimmune (rheumatoid arthritis), bone disease (Paget's disease)
• Degenerative processes, e.g. osteoarthritis
• Joint hypermobility, e.g. Marfan's syndrome
• Osteochondroses, e.g. Perthes' disease
• Psychological factors, e.g. attention seeking
• Footwear, e.g. high-heeled shoes

WHY IS AN ORTHOPAEDIC • establish how the problem evolved

ASSESSMENT INDICATED?
Normal lower limb function should be pain-free
and energy-efficient. The main purpose of the
assessment is to identify whether the system is
functioning within the boundaries of 'normality'.
Normal function can be affected by many factors
(Table 8.1). It should be remembered that
orthopaedic lower limb problems are not always
isolated in origin. They may result from referred
pain from a proximal source or can be part of a sys-
temic disorder. It is therefore important that the
lower limbs are not examined in isolation and that
observation and examination of other parts of the
body are undertaken where indicated.
In summary the purpose of an orthopaedic
lower limb assessment is to:
• establish the main complaintts), e.g. pain,
stiffness, tenderness, numbness, weakness
or crepitus
• identify the site of the primary problem - e.g.
foot, leg, knee, hip - and try to relate to
underlying structures
• identify any secondary problems and relate
them to the primary problem, e.g. lesion
patterns, pronation due to leg-length
discrepancy
• identify the cause of the problem, e.g.
abnormal alignment
• identify any movement/activity that
produces/exacerbates symptoms
• identify movement/activity that relieves
symptoms
• establish any differential diagnoses
• utilise the data from the assessment to produce
an effective management plan
• utilise the data from the assessment to monitor
the progress of the condition.
The assessment process
When undertaking an assessment of the lower
limb it is essential that the system is observed
weightbearing (dynamic and static) and non-
weightbearing. Differences between the two can
help to determine whether compensation has
occurred. For example, non-weightbearing assess-
ment may identify the presence of a forefoot varus;
observation of the patient's gait may show this
problem has been fully compensated through
abnormal pronation at the subtalar joint. Con-
versely, information from the non-weightbearing
assessment may explain the cause of a gait abnor-
mality, e.g. a patient may have a bouncy gait due
to an early heel lift; non-weightbearing assessment
of the ankle joint may reveal that the cause is an
ankle equinus due to a short gastrocnemius
muscle.

To gain a full and detailed picture of the function
of the locomotor system, the following factors
must be assessed:
• gait
• alignment and position of the lower limb
• joint motion
• muscle action.
Practitioners vary as to the sequence in which
they assess the above. There is no one correct
sequence; practitioners should adopt the sequence
and approach they feel most comfortable with.
However, it is essential that a systematic approach
is adopted to ensure vital pieces of data are not
omitted. For the purposes of this chapter the fol-
lowing sequence has been adopted:
1. Gait analysis. This will focus on the position
and alignment of the body and foot-ground
contact.
2. Non-weightbearing. This will focus on the
assessment of joints and muscles.
3. Static weightbearing. This will focus on the
position and alignment of the body and the
relationship of the foot to the ground during
stance.
To achieve a successful assessment it is impor-
tant that the patient is at ease and cooperates with
and has confidence in the practitioner. The practi-
tioner should always be sensitive to the patient's
needs and explain what she is about to do, and
why, prior to undertaking the assessment.
Qualitative and quantitative measurement should
be undertaken where necessary, but the data must
be meaningful and reproducible if they are to be of
any use in assessing improvement or deteriora-
tion. Various measuring devices may be used; their
use will be discussed in the appropriate sections.
General assessment guidelines
Always observe and functionally assess the joints
bilaterally. It is valuable to obtain an overview of
both limbs, particularly if the onset of the
problem is insidious, the pain is diffuse and non-
specific or if during testing a number of joints
appear to be implicated. Where only one limb
is affected, it is often helpful to start with the
unaffected limb first, then repeat the test on the
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 163
affected limb. Compare ranges of motion, end
feel (the sensation the examiner feels when he
pushes the joint being examined to the end of its
range of motion) and muscular strength. It is
helpful to arrange your testing so that the most
painful test is last. This ensures that the condition
will not be aggravated by your testing procedure
or make the patient apprehensive.
Not all of the tests will be necessary for each
component of the lower limb assessment. The
selection of tests used will depend on the findings
as the examination proceeds, and should be
influenced by the history and observations in
order to rule out needless testing: having said that,
it is necessary to be thorough enough to rule out all
other possibilities by applying a holistic approach.
Exclusion of all possible injured structures in addi-
tion to vascular, visceral and systemic conditions
will be required.
Referred pain associated with local nerve
entrapments or radicular patterns of pain in which
spinal nerves or nerve roots are irritated need to
be considered. In addition, it is important to rule
out the joint above and below, especially if the
history suggests other joint involvement.
Furthermore, it is useful to remember that a
problem that affects one part of the system can
lead to problems elsewhere in the system. This is
because the lower limb functions as one mechani-
cal unit; as a result a problem in one part has to be
compensated for in another part of the system.
Compensation is a change in structure, position
or function of one part in an attempt to adjust to an
abnormal structure, position or function in another
part. For example, a scoliosis of the spine may lead
to an apparent leg-length discrepancy, which will
affect foot function. Conversely, a problem affect-
ing the foot, e.g. an uncompensated rearfoot varus,
may lead to discomfort/pain at the knee.
The process of assessment follows a standard
format:
• general observation of the patient
• specific joint observation
• palpation
• examination of joint movement
• muscle assessment
• undertaking special tests
• arranging further investigations.
 164 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
General observation of the patient
The assessment process starts in the waiting room.
Observation of the patients' demeanour, facial
expression, seated posture and how they get up
from the chair will provide valuable clinical infor-
mation. In addition, the way in which the patient
walks into the clinic, together with use of walking
aids, provides additional information as to mobil-
ity and how this might be influencing lower
limb / foot function.
Specific joint observation
Observation of each lower limb joint prior to
examination is useful to establish the presence of
any clinical features synonymous with pathology,
e.g. oedema, contusion, erythema, local muscle
wasting, alteration in shape or the presence of
scars. In addition, comparison of symmetry of con-
tralateral parts, abnormal posture/evidence of
limb shortening and abnormal joint movement
during gait are additional clinical clues to underly-
ing pathology.
Palpation
Palpation of the limb segment or joint for clinical
features such as raised/lowered skin temperature,
swelling/effusion, tenderness, pain or abnormal
lumps/nodules provides additional information
to help establish a diagnosis.
Examination of joint movement
Features of an inflamed joint are redness, heat,
pain, swelling and loss of function. Inflammation
of a joint may be due to a range of factors: trauma,
infection, loose body (osteochondritis diseccans),
Examination of the joint, information from the
medical and social history and results from X-ray
and lab tests will enable a diagnosis to be made. If
a patient complains of a painful joint the character-
istic features of the pain should be recorded.
Prior to examining a joint it is important that the
joint is warmed up (moved through its range of
motion); this relaxes the ligaments and muscles
and also reduces the viscosity of the synovial fluid.
The process of joint assessment should be based
upon the following approach:
• range of motion (ROM)
• direction of motion (DaM)
• quality of motion (QOM)
• symmetry of motion (SaM)
• dislocation and subluxation.
Range of motion (ROM) is the amount of
motion at a joint and is usually measured in
degrees. The ROM at a joint can be compared
with the expected ROM for that joint; e.g. if only
20° of motion is found at the first MTPJ when the
expected norm is 70° (28% of the normal ROM)
it can be concluded that the ability of this joint to
carry out normal function is impaired (hallux
limitus). Often a guesstimate of the amount of
joint motion is made from observation.
Protractors, tractographs and goniometers can
be used to quantify joint motion (Fig. 8.6). A joint
may show a normal ROM but the direction of the
motion (DaM) may be abnormal. It is, therefore,
important to note the direction as well as the
range. For example, the total ROM of transverse
plane rotation at the hip is 90°; 45° internal rota-
tion and 45° external rotation. If the ROM is 90°
but there is 70° of external rotation and 20° of
A B
.~
~
c
Figure 8.6 Devices used to measure joints
A. Protractor B. Tractograph C. Finger goniometer.
D. Gravity goniometer.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 165

internal rotation then the ROM would be normal Table 8.2 Joint changes
but the DaM would be abnormal. Normal joint Type of sensation Indication
motion should occur without crepitus, pain or
resistance (quality of motion or QOM). The Joint stiffness Inflammatory/degenerative
changes
ROM and DaM of motion of a joint, e.g. hip,
should be the same for both limbs (symmetry of Tightness or tension Swelling or protective muscle
spasm
motion or SaM). The presence of asymmetry of
Popping Muscle tear or strain
motion should always be noted. Joint motion
can be affected by the ligaments around the Snapping Tendon slipping over bony
prominence
joint. It is important as part of joint assessment
Clicking Meniscal tear or patella rubbing
to identify any dysfunction of the ligaments, e.g. femoral condyles
ligament tear or contracture of a ligament.
Grating Osteoarthritis or osteochondritis
Finally, joints should be assessed as to whether
Crepitus (tendon) Inflammation of tendon
they are subluxated or dislocated. Dislocation
occurs where there is no contact between articu- Crepitus (joint) Articular damage or loose body
lating surfaces of the joint and subluxation Tearing Muscle or ligament tear
where there is only partial contact. Tingling Neural or circulatory pathology
The range of active and passive movement of Warmth Local inflammation or infection
each respective lower limb joint should be exam- Numbness or Local nerve or nerve root
ined, documented, compared and contrasted with hypersensitivity compression
the contralateral side. It is useful to assess whether
passive movement of the joint provokes any pain
or guarding (sometimes seen in hallux Iimitus). In
addition, it is valuable to document the response to neutralise the effects of other muscles prior to
resisted testing (strong/weak/painless/painful) testing the muscle in question. One way in which a
and stability of the joint. This will determine the muscle can be neutralised is by flexing the joint
integrity of the articulating surfaces and ligaments. which the muscle crosses so that tension is
Provoking crepitus on joint movement is an indi- removed.
cation of joint damage. Table 8.2 summarises the Muscles should be tested for:
main joint changes that can be detected during
joint assessment. • strength
Often it is helpful to be able to differentiate • tone
between articular and capsular damage. In a • spasm
lesser MTPJ this can be achieved by comparing • bulk.
the results of a compression test (compression of Strength. The Medical Research Council (MRC)
the metatarsal head against the proximal phalanx system is commonly used for grading muscle
- to test for articular damage) with a distraction strength (Crawford Adams & Hamblen 1990):
test (dorsiflexion/plantarflexion of a distracted
proximal phalanx against the joint capsule dor-
o = no contraction
1 = a flicker from muscle fasciculi
sally/plantarly).
2 = slight movement with gravitational effects
removed
Muscle assessment 3 = muscle can move part against gravity
4 = muscle can move part against gravity +
Muscles bring about motion at joints. To identify
resistance
the cause of joint dysfunction and/or pain it is
5 = normal power.
important to differentiate between muscle, liga-
ment and joint abnormality. As a number of Muscle strength can be assessed by the patient
muscles may affect anyone joint, it is important to bringing about the motion (active) or by the prac-
 166 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

titioner moving the part (passive). Active motion

Case comment 8.1
can be tested against resistance, i.e. the practitioner
attempts to prevent active motion. Be mindful of diabetics who inject themselves with
Tone. All muscles should show tone. Tone insulin. The quadriceps and abdominal muscles are
often used and will show patchy loss of fat and
denotes that a muscle is in a state of partial con- muscle.
traction without full movement being necessary.
Asking the patient to undertake isometric contrac-
tion of a muscle is a useful means of identifying ligament. The section on non-weightbearing exam-
tonal quality. For example, the tone of the quadri- ination will discuss the specific tests used to assess
ceps can be assessed by asking the patient to con- each of the lower limb joints and their associated
tract the muscle while the knee is in an extended structures.
position. During contraction muscles should feel
firm as well as appearing taut. Flaccid muscles lack
tone; this is common with lower motor neurone Arranging further investigations
disorders. Absence of tone in young males could Usually the information obtained from a detailed
be due to Duchenne's muscular dystrophy. history and assessment is sufficient to arrive at a
Spasm. Muscles may present in spasm and as a
result affect joint motion. There are two types of
muscle spasm: tonic and clonic. Tonic spasm
usually occurs as an attempt by the muscles to stop
movement at a painful joint; clonic spasm is asso-
ciated with neurological (upper motor neurone)
deficit and is involuntary. Information from the
neurological assessment, medical history and pre-
senting problem should enable identification of the
type of spasm.
Bulk. Muscle bulk should be observed and com-
parisons made between the lower limbs. Atrophy
of muscle can result in a loss of muscle bulk and
may be due to a number of factors, e.g. lack of use,
lower motor neurone lesion (Case comment 8.1).
Hypertrophic muscles that show normal tone and
symmetrical distribution are considered normal
and are usually due to the effects of exercise.
Unilateral atrophy/hypertrophy can be assessed
by observation and measuring the girth of both
limbs with a tape measure (Fig. 8.7).

Undertaking special tests

It may be necessary to carry out specific examina-
tion tests so as to confirm a diagnosis or to differ-
entially diagnose between similar conditions.
Some clinical examination techniques have been
developed so as to test a particular aspect of joint
function, e.g. Lachman's test - to assess sagittal
plane stability of the knee in an anterior direction Figure 8.7 Assessment of muscle bulk (quadriceps) using
and thereby the integrity of the anterior cruciate a tape measure.

diagnosis. Occasionally, however, it may be neces-
sary to arrange specialist investigations to confirm
the diagnosis or to consider other options. A
number of possibilities are available, including:
specialist imaging techniques and haematological,
biochemical and nerve function tests. In addition,
histological examination of specimens, elec-
tromyography (EMG), video/treadmill gait analy-
sis or computerised analysis/ forceplate analysis
may be indicated. The choice of investigation will
depend upon the patient's individual history.
Furthermore, cost restraints, time, availability of
each technique and local expertise will also deter-
mine which specialist investigations are arranged.
GAIT ANALYSIS
Gait involves complex neuromuscular coordina-
tion of the lumbar spine, pelvis, hips and those
structures distal to them. Any dysfunction in the
lower limb will become observable during gait. A
variety of neurological, systemic and structural
dysfunctions can influence gait (Inman et a11981)
(Table 8.3). The effects of the dysfunctions listed
in Table 8.3 may lead to gross or relatively minor
changes to gait. Gross disorders are readily
observed, whereas those that lead to relatively
minor changes, e.g. rearfoot varus, may not be so
obvious.
Gait can be adequately assessed with few aids,
providing that sufficient room is available;
ideally there should be a walkway 1.1 m wide
and 6 m long. A treadmill may be used; this facili-
tates the observation of a sufficient number of
strides without the patient having to make fre-
quent turns and is especially appropriate if there
is not enough room for a 6 m walkway. It is
important that the patient is appropriately attired
(ideally shorts and 'l-shirt) so that key parts can
be observed; these are summarised in Table 8.4.
This section concentrates on the observation of
gait. Methods of analysing gait are discussed in
Chapter 12; these can provide a very useful
adjunct to information obtained from observa-
tion and are particularly useful in the monitoring
of gait changes. The patient's gait must be
observed from the posterior, anterior and lateral
views in order that movement in all three body
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 167
Table 8.3 Dysfunctions that can influence gait
Neurological
May involve dysfunction of one or a combination of the
following parts of the CNS and/or PNS:
• motor, e.g. CVA
sensory, e.g. tabes dorsalis, blindness
• cerebellum, e.g. Friedreich's ataxia
• basal ganglia, e.g. Parkinson's disease
Systemic
• joint disease, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis,
juvenile idiopathic arthritis
• crystal arthropathies, e.g. gout
• muscle disease, e.g. Duchenne's muscular dystrophy,
dermatomyositis
bone disease, e.g. rickets, Paget's disease
Structural
• limb-length inequality, e.g. DOH, polio,
femoral/tibial fracture
alignment disorders: coxa valgalvara, genu
valgum/varum/recurvatum, tibial/femoral torsion,
rearfoot varus
planes can be assessed. Gait should be observed
with the patient both barefoot and wearing shoes
(with and without orthoses).
Gait analysis commences with the patient
entering the room. At this point the patient is less
conscious of being observed and is less likely to
act unnaturally. The practitioner's eye should
run from the patient's head to ground level,
observing foot-ground contact. At this stage
there are some key points the practitioner should
address about the patient's gait (Table 8.5).
Gait is divided into a swing phase and a stance
phase; stance phase relates to the period of the
gait cycle when the foot is in contact with the
ground and swing phase to when it is not. Stance
phase is easier to visualise than swing phase; it
consists of the contact, midstance and propulsive
stages (Fig. 8.8). Contact phase starts when the
heel makes ground contact; this is followed by
the rest of the foot. During contact phase the foot
pronates in order to absorb shock from the effects
of ground reaction. Midstance starts when all the
foot is in ground contact and ends with heel lift.
During midstance the foot starts to re-supinate
ready for propulsion. Propulsion starts at heel lift
and ends when the hallux leaves the ground.
 168 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 8.4 Anatomical and functional features to observe The movement and relationship of both limbs
during gait
during gait is summarised in Table 8.6.
Head position The following section considers each of the
Shoulder position specific pointers listed in Table 8.4.
Head. The head should not show excessive
• Arm swing
movement. Altered positions may include twisting
• Trunk position/rotation
(torticollis), due to muscle contracture, or tilting on
Pelvic tilt
one side as a result of pain or limb-length inequal-
Limb motion ity (LLI). In type I compensation for LLI the head
• Thigh segment will tilt down on the long limb side due to cervical
Patellar position (transverse plane) scoliosis. In type II and III compensation for LLI
Knee position (frontal/sagittal plane) the head will tilt down on the short limb side.
• Tibial position Shoulder position. Both shoulders should be
• Ankle
level. Unilateral tilting may be due to LLI or sco-
liosis. In children under 12 years with LLI the
Calcaneal position
shoulders will always tilt down on the short limb
Navicular position
side (type III compensation). In adults where sec-
Midtarsal joint (position/movement) ondary scoliosis can present the shoulders will
Metatarsals (anterior/lateral views) tilt down on the long side (type I and type II com-
• Toe position pensation). Fixed deformities should be distin-
Foot position/shape guished from flexible vertebral deformities (see
Muscle activity static weightbearing examination).
Propulsion
Arm swing. Arm swing is a feature of normal
forward progression. The arms should swing to
Swing phase
even out leg movement. The upper torso will act
to decelerate lower limb motion. Some subjects
fail to swing their arms; this alone is not abnor-
During propulsion the foot continues to mal but can affect spine position during walking:
supinate; the fifth metatarsal head is the first to there is a tendency to lean either forward or back
leave the ground, followed in sequence by the as the arms do not swing. Arm and hand position
others. The hallux should be the last to leave the may point to signs of injury or motor disability
ground. Assessment of foot-ground contact and and should be recorded: e.g. flexed position of
swing phase can be facilitated by high-quality arm and hand held close to the body suggests a
video recording and playback with freeze frame. cerebral vascular accident (eVA). In addition, in

Table 8.5 Questions the practitioner should consider when assessing the patient's gait

Does the patient lurch or look uncoordinated? This suggests ataxia and requires examination of the cerebellum and
nervous system.
Does the patient have any postural problem? Is the posture abnormal?
Does the spine appear curved?
Does one leg/foot lead, followed by the other without obvious asymmetry or alteration in cadence?
Does the face shows signs of pain or anxiety? Could this be an antalgic gait?
Does the patient appear to be overweight in relation to his/her height?
Does the whole foot contact the ground when shod?
Does the foot look straight, adducted or abducted?
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 169

Table 8.6 Stance phase of gait showing 'normal' movement of the left and right limbs

Left knee/hip Left foot Right knee/hip Right foot

Knee extended Heel contact Knee and hip extended Heellif!

Hip flexed
Knee flexed Foot flat (forefoot loading) Knee and hip flexing to max Toe-off
Hip extending
Knee extended Midstance Knee starts to extend from Midswing
Hip extended maximum flexion
Hip flexed
Knee and hip extended Heel lift Knee extended Heel contact
Hip flexed
Knee and hip flexing to max Toe-off Knee flexed Foot flat (forefoot
Hip extending loading)

A B

c D

Figure 8.8 Series of photographs taken at 400 frames per second A. The right heel contacts the ground; forefoot motion is
decelerated by the extensor muscles B. The metatarsal heads have contacted the ground but the toes are still dorsiflexed
C. The right foot completes forefoot contact and the left heel is about to leave the ground (heel lift) D. Propulsion: the fifth
and fourth toes are no longer in ground contact and the third, second and first are about to follow in that order.
 170 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
patients with LU, the arm on the shorter limb
side will be held away from the body to help
maintain balance and will hang lower than the
contralateral arm.
Trunk position/rotation. Observe for obvious
structural abnormalities likely to influence gait
posture such as spinal kyphosis, scoliosis or lor-
dosis. Excessive amounts of trunk rotation will
increase energy expenditure during gait and can
often be associated with myopathy such as
Duchenne's muscular dystrophy and spastic
neurological gaits. In addition, excessive upper
body movements with the arms swinging across
the body may be caused by faulty hip or lower
limb mechanics.
Pelvic tilt. This forms the pivot of lower limb
function. The pelvis moves in all three cardinal
planes in order to provide smooth up and down
(sinusoidal) motion. Tilting may arise from neu-
rological problems, spinal deformity, LU (pelvis
tilts down on side of short limb) and injury.
Pelvic tilting can also present in osteoarthritis of
the hip due to weakness of gluteus medius
(resulting in Trendelenburg gait).
Limb motion. Do the limbs present a normal
forward progression during gait rather than the
exaggerated circumducted movements typical of
a CVA patient?
Thigh segment. Thigh movement is a reflection
of the transfer of pelvic motion through the hip
joint. Excessive transverse plane rotation (internal
and external rotation) should be noted; this may be
due to a variety of factors, e.g. abnormal femoral
torsion or version.
Patellar position (transverse plane). As long as
the patella proves to have normal alignment then
it can be used as a reference point to determine
the extent of transverse plane motion of the leg.
The amount of transverse plane rotation at the
knee should be slightly greater than at the hip
and may therefore be easier to observe than at the
thigh. At heel contact the leg should internally
rotate (patellae face inward); throughout mid-
stance and most of propulsion the leg should
externally rotate (patellae face outward) (see Fig.
8.4). Alternatively, if the patella has an abnormal
alignment, a bisection line drawn through the
tibial tubercle with a black felt marker may assist
observation of transverse plane motion. Excessive
internal or external rotation should be noted; it
may be due to proximal or distal abnormality. If
the patellae are squinting with an in-toed gait it
suggests the cause of the in-toeing is suprapatel-
lar, whereas if the patellae are facing forward
with an in-toed gait the inference is that the cause
of the in-toeing is infrapatellar. Excessive exter-
nally facing (fish eye) patellae are generally asso-
ciated with external femoral torsion.
Torque conversion is the means by which
motion of the thigh and leg influences the foot;
the subtalar joint (STJ) is the interface between
the leg and foot and is where torque conversion
takes place. Internal rotation of the leg is trans-
ferred into pronation of the foot (required for
shock absorption) and external rotation of the leg
is transferred into supination of the foot
(required for stability of the foot during propul-
sion). However, excessive transverse rotations of
the leg during gait will influence the angle of
gait and, subsequently, promote prolonged and
abnormal pronation or supination of the foot,
leading to foot and leg pathology.
Knee position (frontal/sagittal planes). Sagittal
plane motion of the knee joint during gait is out-
lined in Table 8.6. Alteration in sagittal plane
knee motion will affect the third determinant of
gait. If the knee does not flex it causes the hip to
lift further and allows greater height on that side.
To swing the leg from stance through swing back
to stance again the pelvis has to rotate more and
has a vertical displacement which should appear
obvious. Excessive extension of the knee (genu
recurvatum) should be noted if it occurs during
gait.
Frontal plane problems (genu valgus/varum)
can be identified from observing the position of the
knees and the tibiae. The normal tibial outline
shows a slight genu varum because muscle distri-
bution results in lateral bulk. Bowing of the legs
(genu varum) or knock knees (genu valgum)
should be noted (see Fig. 8.5). Valgum of the hip
(coxa) can produce the effect of a genu varum. In
addition, osteoarthritis of the medial knee can
cause a genu varum deformity. Conversely, coxa
vara can produce a genu valgum. If a genu varum
or valgum is present, it should be noted if it is bilat-

eral or unilateral. A unilateral deformity may
suggest injury, infection or growth disturbance at
the epiphysis in earlier life. Tumours are a rare
cause but should always be considered.
Tibial position. Bowing of the tibia in the
frontal plane (tibial varus), a cause of rearfoot
varus, or sagittal plane bowing (sabre tibia), seen
in Paget's disease, should be noted.
Ankle. The ankle complex provides smooth
transference of weight from heel to toe. A
minimum of 10° dorsiflexion is required to allow
the leg to pass over the foot during midstance.
Equinus is the term used to indicate loss of
dorsiflexion. Toe walking and/ or an early heel
lift may indicate an ankle equinus but non-
weightbearing examination of the ankle joint
must be carried out before a definitive diagnosis
can be made. Unstable ankles may have frontal
plane instability, which shows as tilting hesita-
tions. The subtalar joint works in concert with
the ankle (talocrural) joint. Inman (1976)
regarded the talocrural (TCJ) and subtalar (STJ)
as the 'ankle joint' because they have a symbiotic
relationship. The TCJ provides predominantly
sagittal plane motion and the STJ frontal and
transverse plane motion. If one of these joints is
unable to produce motion, e.g. after surgical
arthrodesis (joint in fixed position), then the
other compensates.
Calcaneal position. The posterior position of the
calcaneus should be observed. The calcaneus con-
tacts the ground in a slightly inverted position. As
a result of ground contact the calcaneus everts,
without the need for active muscle contraction, in
order to bring the medial tubercle of the calcaneus
into ground contact. The position of the calcaneus
moves very quickly from an inverted to an
everted position; it is therefore often easy to miss
subtle changes. At the end of midstance the calca-
neus lifts off the ground in order to prepare the
foot for propulsion (Case comment 8.2). An early
heel lift or a heel that makes no ground contact
suggests a neurological problem, an ankle equinus
or hamstring tightness. Rapid eversion of the cal-
caneus at heel contact can be associated with com-
pensation for a rearfoot deformity, e.g. fully
compensated rearfoot varus (sometimes described
as a heel strike pronator).
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 171
Navicular position. At heel contact the foot
pronates in order to absorb shock from ground
contact. During pronation the talar head ad ducts
against the navicular and as a result the distance
between the ground and the navicular reduces.
As the foot progresses into midstance and then
toe-off the foot re-supinates (talus abducts); at
this point the distance between the navicular and
the ground increases. If the talonavicular promi-
nence is visible for more than a moment, or if the
extent of the displacement is abnormal, careful
examination of the cause must be considered
during the non-weightbearing examination.
Midtarsal joint (MTJ). During midstance and
propulsion the MTJ plays an important role in
maintaining foot stability in order to withstand
the forces on the foot generated by uneven sur-
faces and particularly during propulsion.
Functioning of the MTJ is difficult to observe
during gait. However, if there is abnormal prona-
tion at the subtalar joint the forefoot will appear
abducted on the rearfoot at the site of the MTJ; an
increased concavity of the lateral border of the
foot at the level of the calcaneocuboid joint will
be apparent. This is an important sign of dys-
function, which may result in forefoot deformity
(Fig. 8.9). Unlocking of the midtarsal joint,
known as 'abductory twist', can occur during the
last half of midstance should re-supination of the
STJ fail to occur. The MTJ unlocks and causes the
forefoot to abduct on the rearfoot, resulting in a
less springy propulsive phase.
The metatarsals. Forefoot loading during the
contact phase should be observed from the ante-
rior viewpoint (Fig. 8.8A-C). The fifth metatarsal
head makes ground contact first, followed in
sequence by the other metatarsals; the first
metatarsal head is the last to make ground
contact. At propulsion, the reverse should
Case comment 8.2
Given that the average time of contact is between
650 and 750 rns, information has to be rapidly
absorbed by the observer. Practitioners may think
there is an ankle equinus as a result of gait analysis
only to find that on video replay the timing of heel lift
is in correct sequence with the opposite foot.
 172 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Figure 8.9 The foot should be viewed from the posterior aspect to determine subtalar joint and midtarsal joint position during
midstance. The midtarsal joint offers a useful gauge to determine deformity due to abnormal pronation, leading to a medial
shift in the talonavicular relationship. The lateral border may be very apparent as the foot pronates abnormally. The
photograph shows moderate pronation with abduction at the midtarsal joint.

happen; the fifth is the first to leave the ground,
followed in sequence by the others, with
the first being the last to leave ground contact
(Fig. 8.80). During propulsion, motion at the first
MTPJ should be observed from the lateral side;
ideally, the MTPJ should dorsiflex to approxi-
mately 70 0 •
Toe position. Toes should be dorsiflexed at
contact (Fig. 8.8A,B). Once the first metatarsal
has contacted the ground on the medial side, all
toes should be plantigrade (Fig. 8.8C). At propul-
sion the hallux should be the last to leave the
ground. Any change in normal digital position
should be noted. The position of the digits
during the stance phase is influenced by the
intrinsic muscles Oumbricals and interossei) and
the long and short flexors and extensors. The role
of the intrinsic muscles is to provide transverse
plane stability at the distal and proximal IPJs and
prevent the toes from buckling under the effects
of contraction of the extensors and/or flexors.
Clawing of toes during gait can occur if the
flexors have a mechanical advantage over the
intrinsic and extensor muscles. Conversely, toe
clawing can also occur if there is increased exten-
sor muscle activity prior to heel lift.

Foot position/shape. When all the foot is in
contact with the ground the position of the foot in
relation to the midline of the body should be
observed. Normally the foot should be slightly
abducted (approximately 13°). If the foot is
adducted (in-toeing) or excessively abducted
(out-toeing) this should be noted together with
whether the problem is bi- or unilateral. Foot
shape can help inform us about function. High-
arched cavoid feet (high STJ axis) produce a
greater percentage of internal!external leg rota-
tion, which can result in proximal symptoms in
the lower limb. In contrast, low-arched flat feet
(low STJ axis) produce increased frontal plane
motion, which can result in symptoms in the foot
(Green & Carol 1984).
Muscle activity. The anterior view allows
muscle activity to be observed (Fig. 8.10). Normal
'decelerator' muscle activity can be observed.
Deceleration implies that the muscle resists joint
movement by eccentric contraction; extensor
tendons on the dorsum of the foot are active at
contact because they decelerate the foot, prevent
foot slap and allow the sole to contact the ground
smoothly (Fig. 8.8A,B). Paralysis of the anterior
muscle group will lead to a rapid collapse of the
foot on to the ground and an audible slap. An
example of a severe form of muscle group weak-
ness is shown in Figure 8.11. The peronei, longus
and brevis are difficult to identify during gait
unless they show spasm. When this happens,
and it is not common, the tendons stand out
around the lateral malleolus (peroneus longus)
and lateral foot (peroneus brevis).
Propulsion. A lateral view of the first MTPJ at
propulsion is useful to check whether the normal
range of dorsiflexion (approximately 70°) is
achieved. An alteration in gait at propulsion is
often seen in hallux limitus/rigidus to avoid
painful dorsiflexion. Furthermore, observation of
the whole foot is necessary to assess whether a
rigid lever is formed at propulsion and that the
foot is not propulsing off an unstable hyper-
mobile forefoot (a cause of first ray pathology).
Swing phase. The foot pronates during early
swing because the STJ provides additional
dorsiflexion with pronation to aid ground clear-
ance. Some neuromuscular conditions may
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 173
Muscle belly Tibialis
of extensor anterior
digitorum brevis
Extensor
digitorum .,,------f--c,+t-.c-+I
longus
Extensor
-::--t-- hallucis
longus
Figure 8.10 Muscles on the dorsal aspect of the foot. It is
important to observe muscle activity during gait. The
contraction of the extensor and tibialis anterior muscles
should be clearly seen (Fig. 8.8A,B).
prevent this from occurring and lead to the toes
dragging across the ground, e.g. poliomyelitis.
Signs of skin lesions over the digits may provide a
clue that this is happening. Hip flexors and inter-
nal rotators contract to bring the leg forward. If the
hamstrings are injured, the time spent in the swing
phase will be reduced.
Abnormal gait patterns
Gait can be affected in a variety of ways, leading to
abnormal gait patterns. Some of the commonly
encountered gait patterns are described below.
Antalgic gait. This is usually due to a painful
muscle, ligament or joint in the lower limb.
Furthermore, a painful superficial skin lesion, e.g.
verruca, can cause the patient to alter his gait so as
to avoid weightbearing on the painful area of the
foot. An antalgic gait may commonly be seen fol-
lowing an ankle sprain (lateral ligaments).
Apropulsive gait. During the propulsive stage
of gait the MTPJs should dorsiflex to approxi-
mately 70° and the hallux should be the last digit
to leave the ground; if this does not occur, the
gait is said to be apropulsive. An apropulsive gait
may occur due to a variety of factors, e.g. hallux
limitus/rigidus, abnormal pronation, unusual
 174 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Figure 8.11 The flat-footed and abducted gait has been brought about by muscle paresis (weakness) in the lower leg.
Extensive tests have shown no obvious diagnosis. The gait shows shuffle-waddling. There is marked abduction with bilateral
ground contact for most of the stance phase. The left foot shows medial roll off as the leg prepares to move into swing.

metatarsal formula, excessive internal rotation of
the leg. The foot may compensate for lack of
propulsion by rolling off its medial border (Fig.
8.11), by propelling from a hyperextended
(dorsiflexion) first IPJ rather than MTPJ or by an
abductory twist. This is when the distal part of
the foot twists outwards during propulsion.
Whatever the cause, the foot is prevented from
re-supinating during the later stages of mid-
stance. However, once the heel lifts off the
ground the effect of ground reaction, which pre-
vented the re-supination, is reduced and the fore-
foot twists outwards in order to bring the foot
into a more medial position for toe-off.
Abnormal pronation. Abnormal pronation can
be classified as excessive pronation and/or
pronation occurring when the foot should be
supinating. Signs of abnormal pronation during
gait are excessive/prolonged internal rotation of
the leg, eversion of the calcaneus, abduction at
the midtarsal joint, an apropulsive gait and
abnormal phasic activity of the muscles.
Early heel lift. This may vary from the heel
making no contact with the ground (toe walking)

to a relatively normal heel contact but an early heel
lift. Heel lift should normally occur at the end of
midstance prior to propulsion. An early heel lift
can give rise to a bouncy gait. The most common
cause is an ankle equinus.
Limb-length inequality (LLI). One shoulder is
usually lower than the other, and there may be a
functional scoliosis. The determinants of gait are
affected and the gait appears uneven. The foot of
the shorter leg is usually in a supinated position
and the foot of the longer leg abnormally pronates.
Early heel lift may occur in the shorter leg and pro-
longed flexion of the knee of the longer leg.
Trendelenburg gait. This is characterised by a
lurching/waddling gait where the pelvis tilts to
the affected side. Associated with congenital dys-
plasia of the hip and hip osteoarthritis (due to
weak gluteus medius), Trendelenburg gait can
present following Achilles tendon lengthening
procedures and will remain as long as posterior leg
muscle weakness persists.
Painful knee joint. Avoidance of extension.
Painful hip joint. It is commonly held in slight
flexion, abduction and external rotation because
this puts least stress on the capsule or inflamed
synovial membrane. Walking speed and time
spent on the involved hip is reduced, e.g.
osteoarthritis, Perthes' disease and slipped capital
femoral epiphysis.
Foot drop or steppage gait. A high knee lift is
produced during gait to ensure ground clearance
of the affected limb. It is often associated with per-
oneal damage (Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease),
weak tibialis anterior or poliomyelitis.
Circumducted gait. A CVA victim has the char-
acteristic features of unilateral limb weakness and
will circumduct (rotate the leg in an arc) and flex
the elbow and hand towards the body. Movements
are made slowly to maintain balance. Jerky move-
ments suggest muscle coordination problems; the
nature of upper and lower motor neurone deficits
are described in Chapter 7.
Scissoring gait. The legs cross the line of pro-
gression during gait in cerebral palsy. Circum-
duction is necessary in order to produce forward
motion.
Dystrophic/atrophic gait. An exaggerated alter-
nation of lateral trunk movements with an exag-
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 175
gerated elevation of the hip suggestive of the gait
of a duck or penguin is seen in Duchenne's mus-
cular dystrophy (Sutherland et aI1981).
Festinating gait. Small accelerating shuffling
steps are taken often on tip-toe. This gait pattern is
typically associated with Parkinson's disease.
Ataxic gait. This condition produces an unstable
poorly coordinated wide base of gait pattern.
It is primarily seen in patients with cerebellar
pathology.
Helicopod gait. The feet describe half-circles as
they shuffle along during contact and early mid-
stance phase. This condition is seen frequently in
hysterical disorder.
NON-WEIGHTBEARING EXAMINATION
The prime purpose of the non-weightbearing
examination is to undertake an assessment of the
joints and muscles of the lower limb. Information
from this part of the examination may explain the
cause of a gait abnormality or the patient's pre-
senting problem. For example, a foot may in-toe as
a result of an osseous and/ or soft tissue problem of
the leg; the purpose of the non-weightbearing
examination is to establish which is most likely.
A flat couch is required for the patient to lie on.
The patient should feel comfortable and relaxed
and should not wear restrictive clothing.
Non-weightbearing examination involves an
assessment of the following:
• hip
• knee
• ankle
• subtalar
• midtarsal
• metatarsals
• metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs)
• digits (proximal and distal interphalangeal
joints - IPJs)
• alignment of the lower limb.
Hip examination
The hip joint is both a mobile and stable joint.
Stability is provided by the depth of the acetabu-
lum, strong capsule, capsular ligaments and sur-
 176 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
rounding muscles. Mobility occurs in all three
body planes.
The primary presenting problem is often hip
pain (coxodynia), This is felt deep in the groin,
whereas pain on the outside of the femur is often
referred pain from the spine. A hip problem can
occasionally result in pain being referred (via the
obturator nerve) to the knee. A patient who cannot
accurately localise pain in the knee should be sus-
pected of having a disorder of the hip. The main
cause of hip pain is osteoarthritis, a particularly
common condition in the elderly. An X-ray of the
hip should be considered if confirmation of a
disease process is necessary or diagnosis unclear,
e.g. osteoarthrosis, Perthes' disease.
It is not usually necessary to examine every
patient's hip. The hip should only be examined if
the patient complains of discomfort or pain in the
area and/or gait analysis reveals an abnormality
which affects normal pelvis and thigh/leg motion.
Observation of the hip for gross deformity,
muscle wasting, oedema, contusion and scar will
provide valuable information about potential or
past pathology. In addition, palpation of the hip
region for joint, muscle pain/tenderness or bursitis
(e.g. greater trochanter bursitis due to overuse,
weakness of gluteus medius on the opposite side
or LLI) is helpful. Where a hip examination is indi-
cated, a series of tests on the hip joint itself in addi-
tion to the muscles acting upon it is undertaken.
Hip joint tests
Assessment of hip motion should be undertaken in
each of the three body planes - sagittal, frontal and
transverse.
Sagittal plane. To ensure forward progression
during gait, sagittal plane motion at the hip is nec-
essary. Ideally, there should be approximately
120-140° of flexion and 5-20° of extension,
although not all of this is necessary for gait. To
assess hip flexion the patient is placed supine on a
firm, flat couch. The practitioner holds the leg
firmly and flexes the hip by pushing the leg
towards the body until resistance is met (Fig. 8.12).
To assess extension the patient is placed in the
prone position. The practitioner places one hand
on the posterior superior iliac crest to stabilise the
pelvis while the other hand holds the opposite leg
just above the anterior knee and moves the leg
towards the body to the point of resistance.
Loss of sagittal plane motion may be due to
pain, femoral nerve entrapment or effusion in the
hip joint as the anterior ligaments (iliofemoral and
pubofemoral) will be under greater tension and
resistance than usual. Any asymmetry should be
noted.
Frontal plane. To assess abduction and adduc-
tion at the hip the patient lies supine and the prac-
titioner holds the leg just below the anterior knee.
The leg with the knee extended is moved across
the opposite leg (adduction) and then brought
back and abducted. The pelvis should be stabilised
during this assessment by placing a hand on the
opposite iliac crest. There should be less adduction
than abduction at the hip. Tightness of the adduc-
tors on abduction can lead to a scissors-type gait:
this is when one or both legs have a tendency to
cross over during gait and can be seen with cere-
bral palsy.
Transverse plane. Internal and external rotation
of the lower limb is essential for normal gait.
Ideally, the total range of transverse plane motion
in an adult should be 90°, comprising 45° internal
and 45° external rotation. Females tend to show
more internal rotation than males (Svenningsen et
al 1990). The range of transverse plane motion at
Figure 8.12 The patient should be asked to draw the leg
towards the stomach as depicted in the photograph. The hip
is flexed to its limit against the abdomen. Thomas's test
should be considered at the same time by looking for
contralateral lifting.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 177

the hip decreases with age and the DOM changes
from symmetry to more external than internal
rotation.
To assess transverse plane rotation the patient
lies in a supine position. The hip and knees are
flexed and the leg is moved medially and laterally
as one would the arms of a clock. A gravity
goniometer can be used to assess the range of
motion (Fig. 8.13). Asymmetry in the DOM should
be noted. For example, a patient who shows 70°
internal rotation and only 20° external rotation has
an internally rotated femur which will affect
normal lower limb function and may result in
abnormal pronation at the subtalar joint.
The test can be repeated with the patient in
the same position but with the hip and knees
extended. The practitioner may note a differ-
ence in the ROM and DOM at the hip when the
knees are flexed compared to when they are
extended. It was thought that this technique
could be used to detect the presence of torsion
(bone influence) or version (soft tissue
influence). Torsion was said to exist if there was
no difference between the ROM and DOM at the
hip with the knees flexed and extended and
version if there was a greater ROM when the
knees were flexed. It was considered important
to make a distinction as torsion cannot be
treated conservatively while version can. This
concept, while plausible, is not consistent with
bone torsion measurement and is open to mis-
diagnosis. However, it is important when

A B

Figure 8.13 The hips are in a flexed position A. A gravity goniometer is used to assess the amount of internal femoral
rotation B. A gravity goniometer is used to assess the amount of external femoral rotation.
 178 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
undertaking an assessment of the muscles
around the hip to see if there are any soft tissue
contractures, which may be responsible for lim-
iting motion. Contracture of capsular structures
of the hip will limit hip movement when these
structures are on-stretch (hip extended),
whereas contracture of the medial hamstrings
will limit external hip rotation with the hip in a
flexed position.
Scouring/circumduction test. This test is used to
assess QOM and joint congruency in patients com-
plaining of groin pain. The hip is flexed and
adducted and the practitioner rotates the hip to
test for any crepitations. If pain is provoked during
this manoeuvre with the hip internally rotated a
lesion of the acetabular labrum should be sus-
pected. A posterolateral force applied to the hip
will test the integrity of the posterior/lateral hip
capsule.
Patrick's or faber's test (flexion abduction exter-
nal rotation). The patient lays supine with one leg
straight. The other knee and hip are flexed so that
the heel is placed on the knee of the straight leg.
The knee is then slowly lowered into abduction.
Gentle pressure is applied to the flexed knee while
the opposite hand stabilises the pelvis over the
opposite anterior superior iliac spine. This test
stresses the medial hip capsule by placing an
anteromedial force on the hip, the integrity of the
iliofemoral! pubofemoral ligaments and also
assesses for sacroiliac discomfort.
Sacroiliac joint provocation test. Patients who
experience pathology of the sacroiliac joint may
complain of pain in the region of the hip. It is there-
fore important to be able to exclude pathology in
the sacroiliac joint. To isolate and test this joint the
practitioner places her hands on the anterior supe-
rior iliac spines of the pelvis and presses down
firmly and evenly to compress the joint and stress
the sacroiliac ligaments. The test is positive
if the patient experiences unilateral pain in the
abdominal-groin, gluteal region or the leg.
Hip muscle tests
Young's test. A taut tensor fasciae latae causes
the knee and hip to flex. By abducting the lower
limb, tension on the tensor fasciae latae is reduced
and any flexion deformity should disappear. A
tight tensor fasciae latae may be the cause of an
apparent limb length discrepancy.
Thomas's test. Iliopsoas consists of psoas
major, psoas minor and iliacus (the prime flexors
of the hip). Thomas's test is used to rule out the
presence of iliopsoas contracture. If a flexion
deformity exists the affected leg will flex at the
knee (see Fig. 8.12) (Case comment 8.3). Further-
more, the femoral nerve can be irritated by a taut
iliopsoas group. Damage to the nerve will lead to
weakness of the quadriceps, as well as loss of
sensation on the anterior and medial aspects of
the leg (Case comment 8.4).
Ely's test. This test is used to assess hip flexor
(rectus femoris) tightness or contracture. The
patient lies prone and the knee is slowly flexed as
far as possible until the heel comes close to the but-
tocks. Observe the buttock/hip during this
manoeuvre. The point at which the buttock rises
off the couch on the tested side indicates the degree
of hip flexor tightness.
Ober's test. This test is designed to assess for
iliotibial band contraction or tightness. The
patient lies on his side and the outer limb with
the knee extended is moved anteriorly and then
adducted towards the couch (Fig. 8.14A). This
stretches the lateral structures, primarily the
Case comment 8.3
Thomas's test: while the patient flexes the hip, the
practitioner must observe the opposite (contralateral)
thigh for any sign of elevation. The lumbar spine must
lie flat. If the iliopsoas muscles are tight, the
contralateral hip will rise as the ipsilateral hip will
force the lumbar spine against the COUCh. Fixed
flexion will cause an apparent LLI.
, - - - - - - - - -....._ - - _ . _ - - - - - - - -
Case comment 8.4
The obturator nerve arises in the psoas major and
crosses the hip joint, exiting through the obturator
foramen. If this nerve is injured in the hip region, e.g.
due to a slipped capita femoris epiphysis, knee pain
may result. Where knee pain exists, hip pathology
must always be ruled out.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 179

Figure 8.14 A. Ober's test

identifies resistance in the tensor
fascia/iliotibial tract
B. Assessment of the external
rotators. Muscle strength can be
gauged by resisting external
rotation C. The patient is asked
to bring the knees together
against resistance. This tests
adductor strength.
A

B C
 180 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

iliotibial band. A modified form of the test sepa- Laseque's (straight-leg-raise) test. This test will
rately tests the short fibres of the knee; this is provoke pain in patients with hamstring muscle
achieved by flexing the knee and repeating the inflexibility, severe hip pathology and also tests
manoeuvre. mobility of nerve roots L4 to 52. Where no pathol-
Piriformis test. With the patient lying on his ogy is present the leg should make an angle of 70°
side, the hip and the knee are flexed to 90°. The to the supporting surface (Gajdosik et al 1993,
examiner places one hand on the pelvis for stabili- Kendall et al 1993). There is no significant differ-
sation and with the other hand applies pressure at ence in hamstring flexibility between males and
the knee, pushing it towards the couch. This puts females (Gajdosik et al 1990).
the piriformis muscle on tension. If tightness of the
piriformis muscle is impinging on the sciatic
Functional tests
nerve, pain may be produced in the buttock and
also down the leg. Also, in this position the If the patient's pain has not been reproduced
strength of the external rotators of the hip can be during formal examination, then functional tests
tested by asking the patient to externally rotate the should be performed. A single leg squat can be
hip against resistance (Fig. 8.14B). used to assess pelvic control. Abnormalities of
Adductor strength test. The adductors have excessive lateral or anterior tilt may be noted. Step-
their insertion on the medial side of the femur up or step-down tests may also be useful.
along the linea aspera. The adductor muscles are
important during the swing phase, stabilising the
contralateral side of the hip against the pelvis as
the leg swings forward. Adductor strength can
be tested as in Figure 8.14C. Gracilis, a partial
adductor, rotates the femur on the hip. As it
shares some of the function of the adductors, it
can be examined with them. However, this
muscle crosses the knee and lies between the sar-
torius and semitendinosus on the medial aspect
of the knee. The knee should be extended to
include the action of gracilis, but flexed to
remove its influence.
Abductor strength test. The abductors include
the gluteus medius and minimus as well as tensor
fasciae latae. Together they act through the iliotib-
ial tract. Abductor strength is best assessed when
the subject lies on his side. The patient should raise
the upper leg away from the couch against gravity
and resistance.
Trendelenburg's test (Stork test). This tests the
stability of the hip and the ability of the hip B
abductors to stabilise the pelvis on the femur.
The patient stands on one leg with the other knee
flexed; the pelvis should tilt upwards or stay
level on the side of the lifted leg. A positive
Trendelenburg sign occurs when the reverse Figure 8.15A,B A. Normal knee anatomy: (1) anterior
happens: the pelvis tilts downwards, indicating cruciate (2) posterior cruciate (3) meniscus
(4) collateral ligament (5) cartilage (6) ligamentum
weak glutei. Osteoarthritis of the hip can patellae surrounding patella (7) tibial tubercle
produce a positive Trendelenburg sign. B. Diagrammatic representation of the joint margin.

Knee examination
The knee joint is the largest joint in the body. It is
a complex structure which is comprised of the
patellofemoral and tibiofemoral joints. The knee
should be examined if dysfunction is observed
during gait and/ or the patient complains of knee
discomfort/pain. To make a comprehensive
assessment of knee function a detailed history is
required. It is important that the practitioner
establishes whether knee pain/discomfort is due
to a primary problem affecting the knee, e.g.
meniscus tear, or to compensation for a problem
C
Figure 8.15C Photograph of the joint margin corresponding to B. (Fig. 8.15A,B on facing page.)
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 181
elsewhere, e.g. abnormal pronation causing
instability and damage to the knee.
Figure 8.15 illustrates the anatomy of the knee
joint and the knee joint margin. The knee joint
can be compared to a boiled egg lying on a plate;
the configuration of an oval femoral surface on a
flat tibial plateau allows great mobility. During
gait it is important that the knee is stable; the cru-
ciate and collateral ligaments, the menisci and
the iliotibial band and sartorius muscles provide
most of the stability.
The patella forms part of the knee joint; it artic-
ulates with the anterior surface of the inferior
 182 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
end of the femur. It acts as a sesamoid as
described earlier and provides a key mechanical
advantage, increasing the moments of force
applied through the ligamentum patellae on to
the tibial tubercle.
The history should be followed by a compre-
hensive clinical examination of the knee joint and
its associated structures. In view of the number
of structures involved, assessment needs to be
approached in a systematic manner. The key
feature of the knee examination is that each struc-
ture that may be injured must be examined. The
following scheme of assessment is suggested:
• observation
• palpation
• patellofemoral joint tests
• tibiofemoral joint motion
• tibiofemoral joint stability
• integrity of internal knee structure
• muscle testing
• Q angle
• functional tests
• laboratory tests.
Observation
Prior to formal examination the knee should be
observed for:
• Gross deformity (genu valgum/varum,
enlarged or abnormal position of tibial
tubercle).
• Patellar position (squinting, fisheye or outward
facing, patella alta, patellar tilt or rotation).
• Patellar size (small patella unstable in femoral
groove, susceptible to subluxation/
dislocation).
• Oedema - the presence and site of swelling
in the knee should be noted (Case comment
8.5). Swelling of an extreme nature can be
associated with bursitis, acute synovitis,
tearing of the menisci, rheumatoid arthritis
(Baker's cyst) or osteoarthritis. Spontaneous
swelling is usually caused by cruciate or
meniscus injury or haemarthrosis following
trauma.
• Tonic muscle spasm (hamstrings) secondary to
intra-articular/ extra-articular pain.
Case comment 8.5
A to-year-old male developed a tender area on the
anterior aspect of his knee during activity. The site of
the tibial tubercle was shown to have been damaged
by force from the traction of ligamentum patellae,
leaving clinically a hot swollen prominence. The
condition was Osgood-Schlatter's disease, a
common example of a traction apophysitis.
Examination may reveal an old unilateral or bilateral
condition typified by an enlarged tubercle.
• Muscle wasting (quadriceps femoris,
particularly vastus medialis). Often associated
with anterior knee pain, osteoarthritis,
rheumatoid arthritis and Osgood-Schlatter's
disease.
• Bruising (trauma).
• Scars (site and size will provide evidence of
type/ extent of surgery).
Palpation
Systematically palpate the knee to localise areas
of pain/ tenderness and thereby isolate the struc-
tures involved:
• Palpate for warmth (inflammatory joint
disorder).
• Palpate for oedema (generalised/localised).
• Palpate joint line medially /laterally for
joint, meniscal pathology and anteriorly for
coronary ligament pathology.
• Tendons crossing the knee joint: medially
(semitendinosus / semimembranosus);
laterally (biceps femoris, iliotibial band); and
anteriorly (patellar tendon).
• Patellar: tenderness superior pole (rectus
femoris tear or bipartite patella); pain in body
of patellar (fracture following trauma); pain
inferior pole of patellar (Sinding-Larsen-
Johansson syndrome); infrapatellar
fat pad palpated for tenderness - this fat
pad can become impinged between the
patellar and femoral condyle following
forced extension of the knee (Hoffa's
syndrome); however, chronic fat pad
impingement (aka infrapatella bursitis)
occurs more frequently.

• Popliteal fossa (Baker's cyst, popliteus bursitis,
fabella).
• Tender, enlarged tibial tubercle (Osgood-
Schlatter's disease).
• Local oedema.
• Bursae (suprapatellar - between quadriceps
tendon/femur; prepatellar - between front of
patellar/ skin; infrapatellar - between patellar
tendon/proximal tibia; pes anserine - under
tendinous insertion of gracilis, semitendinosus
and sartorius muscles).
• Soft tissue lumps such as lipoma can also be
found around the knee.
Patellofemoral joint tests
Ballottement test (patellar tap test). This is used
to test for moderate intracapsular swelling.
Squeeze excess fluid out of the suprapatellar
pouch, place tips of the thumb and three fingers on
the patella, and jerk it quickly downwards. A
floating sensation of the patella over fluid or a click
indicates the presence of an effusion.
Wipe test (fluid displacement test). This is used
to test for slight to moderate intracapsular
swelling. First, evacuate the suprapatellar pouch
of fluid; then stroke the medial side of the
patellar. A wave of fluid will bulge on the lateral
side of the joint. Stroke the lateral side and
observe the medial side of the joint for fluid
movement.
Apprehension test. The patella is manually dis-
placed laterally. If the patient shows signs of
apprehension by contracting the quadriceps, this is
a positive indication of a subluxing/dislocating
patella.
50 :50 test. Displacement of the patella greater
than 50% of its width both medially and laterally
indicates hypermobility (supported by the
Beighton scale).
Clarke's test. With the patient supine the practi-
tioner places one hand proximal to the superior
pole of the patella and asks the patient to contract
the quadriceps. This test is used to detect anterior
knee pain, and used to be a popular test for the
diagnosis of chondromalacia patellae; however,
chondromalacia patella can only really be diag-
nosed on arthroscopic examination.
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 183
Tibiofemoral joint motion
The main motion at the knee occurs in the sagit-
tal plane; this is important for forward progres-
sion during gait. Ideally, the knee should flex to
approximately 135°; the thigh muscles restrict
further motion. The amount of sagittal plane
motion can be measured with a protractor or
tractograph. The amount of extension available is
minimal (0-10°). Forced extension of the knee
will test the posterior capsule. The knee should
extend and lock without pain, with the patella in
the centre of the knee. Postural extension beyond
10° is known as genu recurvatum and is indica-
tive of lower limb dysfunction or flexed trunk
posture (Riegger-Krugh & Keysor 1996).
Tibiofemoral joint stability
Frontal plane. The lateral and medial ligaments
of the knee provide stability in the frontal plane.
There should be no or limited frontal plane
motion at the knee. Frontal plane motion is nor-
mally only available to a child under 6 years of
age.
Lateral collateral ligament stress test (varus
stress test). A lateral stress test is used to assess
the lateral collateral ligaments. With the patient
supine, the knee is flexed to 30° so the joint is
unlocked during the test. The practitioner places
one hand on the medial side of the lower end of the
femur and the other on the lateral side of the upper
end of the tibia. The practitioner then pushes with
both hands in an attempt to 'break' the knee by
stressing the lateral collateral ligament. Palpation
of the lateral collateral ligament (which is deep to
biceps femoris) can be made easier using the
'figure-4' position. The patient is seated with the
hip maximally externally rotated, the knee flexed
to 90° and the foot rested on the top of the distal
thigh of the other leg.
Medial collateral ligament stress test (valgus
stress test). The medial collateral ligament can
then be stressed by placing the hand in the oppo-
site position. Motion at the knee during these tests
indicates weak collaterals and poor knee stability.
The medial collateral ligament is more commonly
damaged (e.g. football/rugby players). The lateral
 184 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

collateral ligament is less commonly damaged (e.g.

ice hockey players).

Integrity of internal knee structures

Assessment of anterior and posterior cruciate liga-
ments tests knee stability in the sagittal plane.
There are two cruciate ligaments within the knee
joint: anterior and posterior. Their purpose is to
prevent the knee joint from 'opening up'.
Drawer test. To assess the anterior cruciate liga-
ment the patient lies supine with the knee flexed to
45° and the foot flat on the couch. The practitioner
sits on the foot and grasps the upper end of the A

tibia and pulls it forward to stress the anterior cru-

ciate ligament. The posterior cruciate is examined
by reversing the manoeuvre. This test is known as
the drawer test because the action is like opening
and shutting a drawer (Fig. 8.16A). More than
2-3 cm displacement of the tibia is considered
abnormal and may be painful; excessive move-
ment suggests tearing of these structures. The
Lachman's test specifically tests the anterior cruci-
ate ligaments. The knee is flexed to 25° and the
tibia is pulled forward while the knee is externally
rotated. If there is displacement of the tibia this is
indicative of a weak anterior cruciate ligament. A
positive sign is indicated by a forward translation
B
of the tibia with a mushy/soft end feel. The pivot
shift test will also assess the anterior cruciate liga-
ments. With the knee in full extension and the tibia
internally rotated, a valgus force is applied to the
knee. In an anterior cruciate deficient knee, the
condyles will be subluxed. The knee is then flexed,
looking for a 'clunk' of reduction, rendering the
pivot shift test positive.
McMurray's test. This is used to detect meniscus
tears. The medial meniscus is most likely to tear
because it has less flexibility as it is attached to the
capsule. The McMurray test is also designed to
seek out any loose bodies by detecting crepitations
and clicking (Fig. 8.16B,C). There may be a history
of knee locking due to tonic spasm of the ham- c
strings in order to protect the joint. The patient lies
supine with the knee and hip flexed to 90°. The Figure 8.16 Knee joint examination A. Drawer test
practitioner grasps the sole of the foot with one requires the tibia to be push-pulled against the femur B.
McMurray's rotation test with the knee flexed and the leg
hand; the other should be placed around the knee externally rotated C. McMurray's rotation test with the knee
so that the joint line can be palpated. By moving flexed and the leg internally rotated.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 185

the foot the tibia is externally rotated and a valgus action with the quadriceps and a functional
stress is applied. A positive test will elicit a equinus at the ankle joint. The 90: 90 test is per-
'popping' or 'snapping' sound or sensation. The formed with the patient supine. The knee and hip
test is repeated with internal rotation and a varus are flexed to 90°. The practitioner holds the leg
stress for the lateral meniscus. Ensure that snap- and extends the knee until resistance is met. If the
ping and clicks due to normal tendon movement knee can be fully straightened or to within 10°,
over prominences are not misdiagnosed as patho- then the hamstrings are within normal limits. If
logical lesions. the leg can only be partially extended it indicates
Apley's compression test. The patient lies tight hamstrings.
prone and the knee is flexed and the foot Any asymmetry should be noted. To assess
grasped. The practitioner creates a compression whether this is due to a tight biceps femoris or
at the knee joint while producing a rotation semitendinosus, stretch can be placed on the
movement. A noisy and painful response sug- biceps femoris muscle by medially rotating the
gests meniscus damage. extended leg and on the semitendinosus by later-
ally rotating the leg (Fig. 8.18).
Muscle testing
Quadriceps. The practitioner should inspect
the tone of the quadriceps. Wasting of the
medial vastus in particular may occur as a result
of knee dysfunction. A tape measure can be
used to assess muscle bulk in this area and
monitor any change as a result of treatment (see
Fig. 8.7). The circumference of both legs should
be measured at a standard distance of 10 cm
above the superior pole of the patella. The
rectus femoris muscle is a weak flexor of the hip
but a powerful extensor of the knee. As part of
the quadriceps group of muscles, rectus femoris
is an important stabiliser of the knee, in con-
junction with the vasti, and is needed to swing
the leg forward in gait. Pain at its insertion
(anterior inferior iliac spine) can arise with a
strong kicking action. Examination of the rectus
femoris muscle is undertaken with the patient
sitting on the edge of the couch with the knees
flexed. To assess the strength of this muscle the
patient is asked to extend the knee while the
practitioner attempts to resist this active motion
(Fig. 8.17).
Hamstrings. The tone of the hamstrings
should be inspected. From an extended knee
position the strength of the hamstrings is tested
by asking the patient to flex their knee (push
down) against resistance. The 90: 90 test is used
to identify tightness and contracture of the ham-
string muscle group. Tight hamstrings may cause Figure 8.17 Rectus femoris is tested by extending the knee
knee flexion, creating an inefficient antagonist against resistance.
 186 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Figure 8.18 90 : 90 test. The leg can be laterally and
medially rotated to identify specific areas of tightness. The
photograph shows the leg laterally rotated to identify tight
medial hamstrings.
Qangle
The 'Q angle' is the position the patella adopts in
relation to the direction of pull of the quadriceps
tendon. A line is drawn from the ASIS to a line
bisecting the patella. If the angle of this line to the
bisection of the patella is greater than 15° the
patient is said to have a high Q angle. This sug-
gests medial displacement of the patella and is
often associated with greater than normal internal
rotation and anterior knee pain.
Functional tests
If the patient's pain has not been reproduced
during formal examination functional tests such as
squat,lunge, hop, step-up or step-down should be
performed.
Laboratory tests
X-rays (anteroposterior and skyline views) may
be requested to gain a full picture of the extent
of osseous damage to the knee and to rule out
osteoarthritis, loose bodies, a fragmented
patella or bipartite patella. Ultrasound or mag-
netic resonance imaging (MRI) will demonstrate
thickening/swelling around a tendon, the pres-
ence of any tendon tears or degeneration and
meniscal damage. Assessment of joint aspirate
will rule out haemorrhage, in, e.g. haemophilia,
or pus, in, e.g. infective arthritis. Arthroscopy
can be combined with surgical exploration of
the joint.
Tibia/fibular examination
The tibiofibular segment should be examined for
soft tissue swelling. Bilateral swelling suggests a
systemic rather than local cause. Unilateral leg
oedema in women over 40 years is a common
sign of intrapelvic neoplasm. Local swelling is
common over inflammatory lesions and stress
fractures. Local bone swelling is suggestive of an
old fracture or neoplasm (e.g. osteoid osteoma).
Multiple or single exostoses occur in the tibia in
diaphyseal aclasia. Thickening of the ends of the
tibia is seen in osteoarthritis and rickets.
The tibiofibular segment should be examined
for areas of tenderness. An enlarged and painful
tibial tuberosity can be seen in Osgood-Schlatter's
disease, tenderness over the proximal/lateral area
of the tibia is associated with Brodie's abscess or
osteitis, whereas pain in the region of the head of
the fibular can be due to proximal tibiofibular joint
osteoarthritis. Anterior pain between the tibia and
fibular following trauma is seen in anterior tibial
compartment syndrome, whereas pain directly
over the anterior tibial border is associated with
tibial stress fracture. Tenderness in the region of

the medial border of the tibia can be associated
with medial tibial stress syndrome. Tenderness
over the inferior tibiofibular joint may be associ-
ated with lateral ligament injury and may cause
anterior ankle pain. Tenderness in the back of the
calf may be associated with a ruptured plantaris
tendon syndrome, whereas pain over the tendo
calcaneus may be suggestive of a partial or com-
plete rupture. With the patient prone, Thomson's
test can be performed. The calf is squeezed. If no
ankle plantarflexion occurs, a complete rupture is
indicated.
The frontal plane alignment of the tibia should
be determined because tibial deformity can
influence foot function. This is best performed in
the supine position by bringing the legs together
and observing the relative distance between the
knees and malleoli. A greater distance between
the knees is seen in tibial varum. Tibial varum is
generally more common than tibial valgum. In
the largest normative study, Astrom & Arvidson
(1995) reported a mean of 6° of tibial va rum;
therefore, a slight tibial varum is considered
normal. An excessive tibial varum, however, can
lead to a range of lower limb conditions with the
development of pathology theoretically depen-
dent on the STJ's ability to compensate.
Unilateral overuse injuries are more likely to
exhibit larger tibial varum on the affected side
(Tomaro 1995).
The eight-finger test can also be used to esti-
mate the degree of frontal plane bowing of the
tibia. All eight fingers are placed along the ante-
rior border of the tibia and their alignment com-
pared. Sagittal plane bowing (sabre tibia) and
general tibial thickening as seen in Paget's
disease should not be overlooked (Fig. 8.19). It is
also important to assess for any transverse plane
deformity of the tibia, as this can influence foot
function. Medial tibial torsion is associated with
flat feet and intoeing deformities (Thackery &
Beeson 1996), whereas a lateral torsional defor-
mity of the tibia is seen in pes cavus. With the
patient supine and knees flexed and the soles of
the feet on the couch, the relative lengths of the
tibiae should be assessed by comparing the
heights of the knees (Skyline/Allis test) or tibial
tuberosities.
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 187
Figure 8.19 Patient with severe bowing associated with
Paget's disease, 'sabre tibia' affecting patients in the
sixth/seventh decade of life. Deformity occurs in the sagittal as
well as the frontal plane.
Ankle examination
Inman (1976) regards the ankle as a two-joint
system comprising the talocrural joint (TCD and
the subtalar joint (STD. Motion of the foot is pri-
marily controlled through this joint complex, but
the whole proximal segment also relies upon the
TCJ and STJ working in concert. Elftman (1960)
considered the midtarsal joint to be the third
member of the ankle complex. In addition,
Brukner & Kahn (1993) consider the inferior
tibiofibular joint to be part of the ankle joint
complex. The inferior tibiofibular joint is a syn-
desmosis supported by the inferior tibiofibular
ligament. A small amount of rotation is present at
this joint. Each of these joints will be considered
separately for examination purposes but func-
tionally they should be considered together.
Coalitions between the joints making up the
ankle complex may be present. The two
most common involve the talocalcaneal (medial
and posterior facets) and the calcaneonavicular
(Kulik & Clanton 1996). Other types may occur
but are quite rare. The coalition may be fibrous,
cartilaginous or osseous. Fibrous coalitions permit
some motion whereas cartilaginous and osseous
coalitions produce little motion but more symp-
toms. Tonic spasm of the peronei is a common
finding with tarsal coalitions. X-rays are necessary
to diagnose a synostosis (osseous coalition).
 188 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Talocrural joint
The trochlear surface of the talus articulates with
the inferior surface of the tibia to form the
talocrural joint. The medial and lateral malleoli
provide additional articulations and stability to
the ankle joint. The talocrural joint is a triplanar
joint but, because of the position of its axis and
the shape of the joint surfaces, its main motion is
in the sagittal plane. The lateral curvature and
radius of the trochlear surface of the talus has
been found to be variable - the longer its radius,
the less dorsiflexion (Barnett & Napier 1952).
During midstance there should be at least 100 of
dorsiflexion at the ankle in order to allow the leg
to move over the foot.
The body compensates for a lack of ankle
dorsiflexion at the knee and/or subtalar and
midtarsal joints. The STJ has less available
sagittal plane motion than the TCL but if
necessary the STJ will increase the amount avail-
able if there is insufficient motion at the TCJ.
In addition, the knee can hyperextend (genu
recurvatum) as a way of compensating for an
ankle equinus.
Assessment of TCJ range of motion, stability,
strength, palpation for tenderness, grading of lig-
amentous injury and proprioception are impor-
tant parts of the ankle joint assessment.
Joint motion. The passive range of TCJ
plantarflexion and dorsiflexion should be
assessed and compared for each limb. Ankle
equinus is traditionally defined as less than 100 of
dorsiflexion at the TCJ, although some practition-
ers suggest that less than 50 dorsiflexion leads to
abnormal compensation. It may arise from soft
tissue or bone abnormalities of an acquired or
congenital nature.
Assessing sagittal plane motion at the TCJ is
difficult. It can be assessed either weightbearing
or non-weightbearing. If assessed non-weight-
bearing the patient should lie in a prone or
supine position with the knee extended and the
foot and ankle free of the end of the couch. The
practitioner holds the foot in a neutral position
with one hand, places the other hand on the sole
of the foot and dorsiflexes the ankle (Fig. 8.20A).
If subtalar joint pronation is allowed to occur
during the examination a falsely elevated
dorsiflexion value will result (Rome 1996a,
Tiberio et aI1989).
The force applied by the practitioner to
produce TCJ dorsiflexion can vary; this will
have an effect on the result. A tractograph can
be used to assess the range of motion but the
practitioner may find it difficult to use, while at
the same time keeping the foot in a neutral posi-
tion (Fig. 8.20B). In addition the intra- and inter-
observer reliability of non-weightbearing TCJ
dorsiflexion measurements using a tractograph
is questionable (Rome 1996b).
A tight soleus and/or gastrocnemius may
prevent TCJ dorsiflexion. To differentiate between
the two the amount of dorsiflexion with the knee
extended and flexed should be measured. With
the knee flexed the tendons of gastrocnemius
which cross the knee are released from tension
and as a result a tight gastrocnemius should not
affect TCJ dorsiflexion. If the amount of
dorsiflexion is still reduced when the knee is
flexed the cause is likely to be soleus (Fig. 8.20C).
A bony block (osteophytes on distal! anterior
tibia) can also limit "rCJ dorsiflexion with the knee
flexed; however, the tendo Achilles in this case
will feel slack.
Assessment of the TCJ end-of-ROM is useful.
Soft tissue limitation will result in a springy end-
feel, whereas limitation resulting from a bony
block will be abrupt.
More consistent results have been achieved
when sagittal plane motion is assessed with the
patient weightbearing. The patient stands facing
a wall with a distance of approximately 0.5 m
between the patient and the wall. One leg, with
the knee in a flexed position, is placed in front,
approximately 30 cm from the wall. The other leg
is placed behind the forward foot with the knee
extended and the foot held in a neutral position.
The patient leans towards and places both hands
on the wall and is asked to move his body
towards the wall. In order to do this the patient
must dorsiflex the ankle of the limb furthest from
the wall. The amount of dorsiflexion can be mea-
sured with a tractograph (Fig. 8.200).
Stability. By moving the TCJ in all three
planes the ligaments can be stressed and any
tenderness noted. There should be little or no
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 189

A C

B D

Figure 8.20 Ankle joint dorsiflexion A. Non-weightbearing assessment of ankle joint dorsiflexion with the knee extended and
the foot in the neutral position. Restriction of motion may be due to tight gastrocnemius, soleus or bony block B. A tractograph is
used to measure the amount of dorsiflexion C. Non-weightbearing assessment of ankle joint dorsiflexion with the knee flexed and
the foot in a neutral position. Restriction with the knee flexed due to a bony block or tight soleus D. Assessment of ankle joint
dorsiflexion weightbearing.

displacement in the frontal plane and the
patient should find the movement pain-free.
Tenderness from the lateral ligaments (calca-
neofibular and talofibular) should be noted
before stressing the joint at the extreme ends of
inversion and eversion. The anterior joint line
should be pressed upon firmly at the tibial
plafond. The talus may have less stability if the
inferior transverse tibiofibular ligament is
affected as this holds the distal end of the tibia
and fibular within the ankle mortise.
Stability in the sagittal plane can be tested by
applying a forward and then a backward push
on the TCJ while the knee is flexed and the foot is
in contact with the examining couch. This is the
drawer test and should reveal minimal positional
change and no discomfort. This test assesses the
integrity of the anterior talofibular ligament. The
talar tilt test will assess the integrity of the calca-
neofibular ligament laterally and the deltoid lig-
ament medially. With the patient supine the
calcaneus is grasped and moved medially and
 190 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

laterally. The medial and lateral movement of the

talus and calcaneus is assessed in relation to the
tibia and fibular.
Stress X-rays using a German system known
as TELOS allows the ankles to be compared
(Fig. 8.21). Anterior-posterior shift and lateral
stress views can be taken. The procedure is per-
formed under local anaesthesia using a common
peroneal nerve block; it provides a reproducible
method to determine ankle stability.
Functional tests. These tests can be a valuable
aid to diagnosis. The lunge test (patient lunges
forward while standing) assesses weightbearing
ankle dorsiflexion and helps in the diagnosis of
anterior impingement syndromes. The single-
limb heel-raise test may be used to aid the diag-
nosis of tibialis posterior dysfunction syndrome
(TPDS). If the manoeuvre induces pain in the
region of the tubercle of the navicular extending
to the posterosuperior border of the medial
malleolus and along the posteromedial tibial
border with the calcaneus failing to invert a
partial or complete tear of the tendon is indi-
cated. The patient with TPDS will also present
with a severely pronated foot. Functional tests
such as single-leg standing and hopping can be
used to reproduce a patient's pain in other causes
of ankle pain.
The posterior aspect of the talus should be Figure 8.21 TELOS: lateral ankle stress test under local
palpated while the ankle is in a plantarflexed anaesthesia (reproduced by courtesy of Fifth Avenue Hospital,
position. Stieda's process may become irritated, Seattle).
or fracture if extra-long, or may appear as a sep-
arate bone (os trigonum) and become tran- by calcaneofibular (CFL) and, finally, the poste-
siently irritated. The pain is deeper than with rior talofibular ligament (PTFL). Complete tear of
soft tissue problems such as a tender Achilles all three ligaments is usually associated with an
tendon. ankle fracture. Lateral ligament injuries are
Strength. Both active movements of ankle divided into three grades:
plantarflexion/ dorsiflexion, inversion/ eversion
and resisted movements of eversion should be • grade I = minor ATFL tear with pain but no
assessed using the Medical Research Council laxity
system. • grade II = painful if stressing ligament with
Grading of ligamentous injury. The lateral laxity but firm end-point
ankle ligaments are more commonly damaged • grade III = gross laxity without discernible
than the medial (deltoid) ligament. In the typical end-point.
inversion and plantarflexion injury, the three To isolate the specific structure(s) damaged fol-
parts of the lateral ligament are usually damaged lowing an ankle injury a number of areas around
in order, depending on the severity of the sprain: the ankle should be palpated for tenderness
the anterior talofibular ligament (ATFL) followed (Table 8.7).

Proprioception. Single-leg standing with eyes
closed may demonstrate impaired proprioception
compared with the uninjured side.
Investigations. X-rays (anteroposterior mortice,
lateral and oblique views) should be performed
after ankle sprains in cases where instability is
present or acute bony tenderness is present on
the malleoli or the medial or lateral dome of
the talus. Ankle X-rays must include the
base of the fifth metatarsal to exclude
associated fracture. In special cases computed
tomography (CT) or MRI scans may be
indicated.
Table 8.7 Structures to palpate following an ankle injury
Tender structure
Distal fibular
Lateral malleolus
Lateral ligaments
Lateral aspect of talus
Posterior aspect of talus
Peroneal tendon
Base of fifth metatarsal
Anterior joint line
Dome of talus
Tibialis anterior
Posterior medial malleolus
Medial malleolus
Medial (deltoid) ligament
Tibialis posterior tendon
Sustentaculum tali
Sinus tarsi
Anterior inferior talofibular ligament
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 191
Subta/ar joint
The inferior surface of the talus articulates with the
superior surface of the calcaneus at three facets.
The largest facet forms the posterior joint, which is
separated from the others by the interosseous talo-
calcaneal ligament, which lies in the sinus tarsi.
Pain may arise from damage to the sinus tarsi. The
STJ produces triplanar motion. Because of the posi-
tion of its axis - 42° from the transverse plane, 45°
from the frontal plane and 16° from the sagittal
plane (Root et al 1966) - little movement is pro-
duced in the sagittal plane but motion does occur
in the frontal and transverse plane (L: 3 : 3).
Possible diagnosis/injury
Fracture
Fracture
Anterior talofibular ligament/calcaneofibular ligament (ATFUCFL) sprain
due to forced inversion/plantarflexion. Complete tear of ATFL, CFL and
posterior talofibular ligament (PTFL) follows an ankle fracture
Fracture to lateral process of talus
Fracture to posterior process of talus or os trigonum fracture
Peroneal tendonitis due to excessive eversion, peroneal dislocation due
to forced passive dorsiflexion and tearing of peroneal retinaculum or
peroneal rupture
Avulsion fracture due to inversion injury
Articular damage (osteoarthritis)
Osteochondral fracture associated with compressive component of
inversion injury (landing from a jump)
Tibialis anterior tendinitis due to overuse of ankle dorsiflexors secondary
to restriction in joint range of motion
Entrapment of posterior tibial nerve (tarsal tunnel syndrome) due to
inversion injury or excessive pronation
Stress fracture
Ligament sprain associated with fractured medial malleolus, talar dome
Tibialis posterior tendinitis (pain is exacerbated by passive eversion)
Flexor hallucis longus tendinitis (pain aggravated by resisted flexion of
hallux or full dorsiflexion of hallux)
Excessive subtalar joint pronation or ankle sprain
The anterior inferior talofibular ligament (AITFL) is damaged in more
severe ankle injuries. Occasionally associated with malleolar fractures
 192 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Alteration of the axis can favour motion in one
direction at the expense of motion in another. The
knee and foot are affected by the axial position of
the STJ (Green & Carol 1984).
Joint motion. To measure triplanar motion at
this joint one would have to measure the motion
produced in each plane; this is impossible to
achieve clinically. The amount of frontal plane
motion at the STJ can be measured, and this is
used as an indicator of the ROM at the STJ. It is
important that there is an adequate ROM and
appropriate DaM at the STJ for normal prona-
tion and supination of the foot.
To assess frontal plane STJ motion the patient
lies prone with the ankle and foot hanging over
the edge of the couch. The distal third of the leg is
bisected; this line is used as a reference point for
measuring the ROM and DaM. The calcaneus is
moved into its maximally inverted position and
the posterior surface of the calcaneus is bisected
(Fig. 8.22A). A tractograph is used to measure the
angle between the bisection of the leg and the
bisection of the posterior surface of the calcaneus.
The calcaneus is placed in its maximum everted
position and a reading is taken of the angle
between the bisection of the leg and the bisection
of the posterior surface of the calcaneus (Fig.
8.22B). Although this technique is helpful for clin-
ical assessment, it is not considered accurate
(Elveru et aI1988). Milgrom et al (1985) examined
272 male infantry recruits and an error in excess of
20% was identified. It is also recognised that for
research purposes its reliability and validity are
poor (Menz 1995). Some consider it to be so poor
as to suggest that this method of examination no
longer be used to determine the measurement of
STJ movement (Buckley & Hunt 1997). A weight-
bearing assessment of STJ ROM would theoreti-
cally be a better indicator of the range utilised
during walking. There is normally twice as much
inversion as eversion (2: 1 ratio). Many patients
appear to have a 3 : 1 ratio of inversion to eversion
without any abnormal sequelae arising.
Subtalar varus
Subtalar varus implies that the neutral position
of the calcaneus is varus (inverted) in relation to
the leg bisection (non-weightbearing). Subtalar
varus or rearfoot varus (discussed under static
examination) can affect the function of the rear-
foot during gait and may lead to excessive prona-
tion of the foot and delay re-supination of the
foot during gait.
Abnormal pronation
Abnormal pronation, i.e. excessive STJ pronation
during contact phase and/ or STJ pronation occur-
ring when the STJ should be supinating during
midstance and propulsion, is one of the most
common disorders of the lower limb. A large
degree of frontal plane motion in the foot (due to
uncontrolled STJ pronation) is thought to predis-
pose to forefoot pathology and ankle dysfunction,
whreas a greater degree of transverse plane tibial
rotation is thought to predispose to leg and knee
pathology.
The presence of four or more of the following
indicates abnormal pronation:
• more than 6° between the relaxed calcaneal
stance position (RCSP) and the neutral
calcaneal stance position (NCSP)
• medial bulging of the talar head or 'midtarsal
break' - quantified using the navicular drift
technique (Menz 1998)
• lowering of medial longitudinal arch -
quantified using the navicular drop technique
(Mueller et a11993)
• more than 4° eversion of the calcaneus
• Helbing's sign (medial bowing of the tendo
Achilles)
• abduction of the forefoot at the MTJ (concavity
of lateral border of foot)
• apropulsive gait.
Numerous conditions arising in the lower limb
may lead to abnormal pronation; many of them
have been highlighted in this chapter (the list is not
exhaustive):
• internal or external torsion of the leg/ thigh
• tibial (genu) valgum/ varum
• coxa vara/ valga
• ankle equinus
• rearfoot varus
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 193

A B

Figure 8.22 Assessing frontal plane motion at the ST J A. The distal third of the leg is bisected and a line is drawn at the
bisection point. The posterior surface of the calcaneus is moved into its maximally everted position and the angle between the
bisection of the leg and the bisection of the calcaneus is measured B. The calcaneus is moved into its maximally inverted
position and the angle between the bisection of the leg and the bisection of the calcaneus is measured.

• inverted forefoot The patient should be asked to plantarflex the

• everted forefoot.
For treatment to be effective it is important that
the cause and the extent of the abnormal pronation
are correctly identified; otherwise, only sympto-
matic treatment on a trial and error basis can be
provided.
Examination of muscles affecting the ankle
complex
Plantarflexors. The posterior group of muscles
plantarflex the foot at the ankle but may also
restrict the amount of dorsiflexion at the ankle.
foot with and without resistance in order to test
muscle strength. Rupture or partial rupture of
the tendo Achilles should be ruled out. If the
tendo Achilles is functioning normally the foot
should plantarflex when the calf muscle is
squeezed. Plantaris is a small muscle that is not
present in everyone. Spontaneous rupture of
plantaris may occur; it shows as a painful medial
swelling over the posterior aspect of the calca-
neus at its insertion near the tendo Achilles.
Invertors. Tibialis posterior and anterior are
the main invertors of the foot. These extrinsic
muscles play an important role in re-supinating
 194 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
the foot during midstance and propulsion. To
assess the strength of these muscles the patient
should be asked to move his foot into supination
against resistance.
Dorsiflexors. The main dorsiflexors of the
foot are the long extensors and tibialis anterior.
To assess the strength of the anterior muscles
the patient should be asked to dorsiflex the
ankle with the foot in inversion against resis-
tance. Weakness of the anterior group is often
linked to neurological problems, e.g. polio-
myelitis. The plantarflexors have a work capac-
ity 4.5 times that of the dorsiflexors. If the
dorsiflexors are weak the foot is held in a
plantarflexed position as the plantarflexors have
a mechanical advantage.
Evertors. The evertors of the foot are the
peronei. To assess the strength of the peronei the
patient should be asked to evert the foot against
resistance. The evertors are not as powerful as
the invertors and in the case of neurological
problems and/ or muscle imbalance the invertors
have a mechanical advantage over the evertors
and the foot is held in an inverted position (fol-
lowing a CVA). Tonic spasm of the peroneal
muscles can occur; this is noted particularly with
tarsal coalitions. A local anaesthetic can be
administered in order to differentiate between a
muscle spasm and a tarsal coalition.
Midtarsal joint
The MTJ comprises two synovial joint com-
plexes: talonavicular and calcaneocuboid. The
MTJ is also known as the transtarsal or Chopart's
joint, and is an articulation between the rearfoot
and forefoot. The MTJ has two axes: longitudinal
and oblique. The longitudinal axis provides
frontal plane motion facilitated by the ball and
socket joint of the talonavicular articulation. The
oblique axis involves both calcaneocuboid and
calcaneotalonavicular joints and primarily pro-
duces transverse and sagittal plane motion.
Limitations of motion at the ankle joint are com-
pensated at the oblique axis of the MTJ.
The MTJ assists in reducing impact forces and
helps to prepare the foot for propulsion. It can
also accommodate walking on uneven terrain
without affecting the rearfoot. This means that
the forefoot might invert while the heel remains
vertical; the converse does not occur.
Joint motion. To assess the motion at the MTJ
the practitioner must stabilise the STJ and
prevent any motion occurring at this joint by
firmly holding the heel with one hand and
holding the foot just distal to the midtarsal joint
with the other. The MTJ should then be moved in
the sagittal, transverse and frontal planes. There
should be most motion in the sagittal and trans-
verse planes and minimal motion in the frontal.
The position of the axes will affect the amount of
motion at the MTJ: e.g. a high (vertical) oblique
axis will result in an increase in transverse plane
motion but a reduction in sagittal plane motion.
Metatarsal examination
The first and fifth metatarsals have independent
axes of motion and produce triplanar motion.
The second metatarsal is firmly anchored to the
intermediate cuneiform and has least motion; the
third has less motion than the fourth metatarsal.
Whereas the first and fifth metatarsals provide
triplanar motion, the central three only move in
the sagittal plane. The ability of the first
metatarsal to plantarflex is important in order
that the medial side of the foot makes ground
contact during gait and the first MTPJ can
dorsiflex during propulsion. Patients commonly
present with cutaneous changes associated with
dysfunction of the metatarsals, especially the first
and fifth. Sometimes one of the metatarsals may
be held in a plantarflexed position. The position
of the metatarsals can subsequently affect foot
mechanics and gait.
Joint motion. Clinical assessment of first and
fifth metatarsal motion can only be satisfactorily
undertaken in the sagittal plane. Unlike most
joints, motion at the first and fifth rays is mea-
sured in millimetres, not degrees. To assess sagit-
tal plane motion the patient can be in a supine or
prone position. The feet must be allowed to hang
free of the couch. The practitioner places one
hand, with the thumb to the plantar surface,
around the lateral side of the forefoot including
the second metatarsal while maintaining the foot
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 195

in its neutral position. The other hand, again with
the thumb to the plantar surface, is placed
around the first metatarsal. The first metatarsal is
moved into maximum dorsiflexion and
plantarflexion. It is usual to find approximately
10 mm in each direction (Fig. 8.23A,B). Lack of
plantarflexion of the first ray is known as
metatarsus primus elevatus. The amount of
motion can be assessed using the thumb tech-
nique (Kelso et al 1982) (Fig. 8.23A,B). A Sagittal
Raynger provides an alternative means of assess-
ing first metatarsal motion (Fig. 8.23C,D)
(Kilmartin et al 1991). Sagittal plane motion of
the fifth metatarsal can be undertaken using the
same approach. The validity of this technique is
questionable, however, as it may not represent

A B

C D
Figure 8.23 Assessment of motion at the first ray A. Measurement of dorsiflexion of the first ray using the thumb test
B. Measurement of plantarflexion of the first ray using the thumb test C. Dorsiflexion of the first ray measured with a Sagittal
Raynger (reproduced by courtesy of Nova Instruments) D. Plantarflexion of the first ray measured with a Sagittal Raynger
(reproduced by courtesy of Nova Instruments).
 196 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
the range the first or fifth metatarsal moves
through during gait.
Deformity. Deformity of the metatarsals is said
to occur when the ROM or DOM of one or more
metatarsals is asymmetrical or the metatarsal
heads do not lie in the same plane. Table 8.8
refers to the various positions and terms associ-
ated with the deformities affecting the rays; these
may be congenital or acquired. It is not unusual
for a problem affecting the metatarsals to be uni-
lateral.
Metatarsal parabola. The metatarsal parabola
should also be assessed and documented using
the palpation technique (Spooner et al 1994), as
abnormal metatarsal length is known to be asso-
ciated with pathology. A short first metatarsal
can be associated with the development of hallux
valgus, whereas a long first metatarsal can cause
hallux rigidus. Shortening of a lesser metatarsal
(e.g. brachymetatarsia) can result in the develop-
ment of intractable plantar keratosis, metatarsal-
gia or hammer toe deformity.
Table 8.8 Abnormal positions ofthe metatarsals
Position Description
Normal position Thefirst and fifth metatarsals
exhibit equal motion above and
below the second/fourth metatarsal
of 10-20 mm (5-10 mm in each
direction)
Metatarsus primus Reduces ability offirst metatarsal
elevatus to bear weight and overloads
central (dorsiflexed first metatarsal)
metatarsals. Differential diagnosis
forefoot varus. Shows limited
plantarflexion and cannot be
reduced below level ofsecond
metatarsal
Flexible plantarflexed Thefirst metatarsal may appear
first metatarsal pronounced on the plantar surface
ofthe foot with a cleft between the
first and second metatarsal heads.
Most ofthe movement is in the
plantar direction. Loading the
metatarsal head produces
reduction ofthe position
Rigid plantarflexed Thefirst metatarsal cannot be
first metatarsal reduced at all from its plantarflexed
position. Theforefoot tends to rotate
in inversion during weightbearing;
this affects rearfoot function
Metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJs)
The MTPJs are the joints between the metatarsals
and the proximal phalanges; they produce
motion in the sagittal plane. During the propul-
sive period of gait it is important that
dorsiflexion occurs at these joints in order to
facilitate toe-off.
Joint examination. The ROM and DOM in
the sagittal plane should be assessed for all
MTPJs; they should have a free range of motion
without pain or restriction (Fig. 8.24). The first
MTPJ has the greatest range of motion: approxi-
mately 70-90° dorsiflexion and 20° plantarflexion
(Bojson-Moller 1979). The ROM and DOM at the
first MTPJ can be assessed with a tractograph or
finger goniometer. The practitioner should
appreciate that the declined angle of the first ray
accounts for at least 15° of dorsiflexion at rest.
A lack of dorsiflexion at the first MTPJ is
known as hallux limitus, and a complete absence
as hallux rigidus. The presence of either of these
conditions, but particularly hallux rigidus, will
affect toe-off and can lead to an apropulsive gait
and overloading of one or more of the other
metatarsal heads. Some authors also consider
that this interferes with the angular momentum
of the body (Miyazaki & Yamamoto 1993) and
predisposes to the development of chronic pos-
tural complaints (Dananberg 1986, 1993). Hallux
flexus is not so common; this is where the proxi-
mal phalanx adopts a plantarflexed position.
Hallux extensus (trigger toe) is where the proxi-
mal phalanx is abnormally dorsiflexed; it is often
associated with pes cavus.
Restriction of movement at MTPJs could be
due to osteophytes, loose bodies or articular
damage, e.g. osteochondritis dissecans. The
effects of Freiberg's disease may be to produce an
enlargement of the metatarsal head and early
osteoarthritic changes; this usually affects the
second or third metatarsal. In some patients, par-
ticularly younger ones, the clinical appearance of
the joint may appear normal and X-rays may
reveal no abnormalities. It is essential in these
cases that spasm of flexor hallucis brevis and/ or
abductor hallucis is ruled out via the use of local
anaesthetic blocks.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 197

A B

C D

Figure 8.24 Assessment of motion at the MTPJs A. Dorsiflexion of the first MTPJ B. Plantarflexion of the first MTPJ
C. Dorsiflexion of the second MTPJ D. Plantarflexion of the second MTPJ. In both cases (first and second MTPJ) dorsiflexion is
greater due to the shape of the articular surfaces.

Interphalangeal joints (IPJs) Alignment of the leg and foot

Toes have considerably less functional move-
ment than fingers. The practitioner should note
any restriction or fixed deformity affecting
either the proximal (PIPJs) or distal (DIPJs)
joints.
Joint examination. The PIPJs can plantarflex
(approximately 35°) but cannot dorsiflex
(Fig. 8.25A). The DIPJs can dorsiflex to 30° and
plantarflex up to 60° (Fig. 8.25B,C). The patient
may be unable to actively move the toes to assess
the function of the intrinsic muscles. However,
plantarflexion can be assessed by placing the
fingers under the apices of the toes and asking
the patient to claw the toes around them.
While the patient is lying on the couch the follow-
ing should be assessed:
• presence of genu varum/valgum
• malleolar torsion
• rearfoot to forefoot alignment
• arch height
• metatarsal formula
• toe position
• foot length.
Genu varumlvalgum. To assess the presence of
lower limb varus or valgus the patient lies supine
with the knees extended. The practitioner takes
hold of the ankles and brings the legs together. If
 198 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
A B
c
there is a difference of more than 5 cm between the
knees genu varum is suspected; if it is impossible
to bring the malleoli together a genu valgum is
present (Beeson 1999). Obesity may prevent the
knees and malleoli being brought together.
Malleolar torsion. Torsion of the leg can affect
the position of the foot, adducted (in-toe) and
abducted (out-toe), as well as the position of the
patellae. Assessing the amount of tibial torsion
clinically is impossible, but it is suggested in the
literature that assessing the relationship of the
tibia and fibula malleoli to each other gives an
indication of torsion in the leg (Hutter & Scott
1949, Lang & Volpe 1998). To measure malleolar
torsion the patient lies in a supine position with
the legs extended on the couch. The femoral
condyles should lie in the frontal plane (i.e. par-
Figure 8.25 Assessment of motion at the IPJs
A. Plantarflexion of the proximal IPJ B. Plantarflexion
at the distal IPJ C. Dorsiflexion at the distal IPJ.
allel to the couch). The practitioner bends down
until her eyes are level with the malleoli and
observes the relationship of the malleoli to each
other. The amount of malleolar torsion can be
measured in three ways:
• Estimate by using the thumb technique. Place the
thumb of each hand anterior to the malleoli;
the medial malleoli should be one thumb's
thickness anterior to the lateral malleoli.
• Traciograph. The protractor end of the
tractograph should be held on the fibula side;
one arm of the tractograph is placed parallel to
the couch and the other arm is moved until it
bisects the malleoli.
• Gravity goniometer. The ends of the arms of the
gravity goniometer are placed on the malleoli
and the goniometer is held vertical (Fig. 8.26).

When the techniques were examined, the
gravity goniometer fared best (Hayles & Lang
1987). Recent work suggests that there is good
agreement between the gravity goniometer and
CT scan measurements (Lang & Volpe 1998):
13-18° of malleolar torsion is considered normal.
Tibial torsion is considered to be 5° more than
malleolar torsion (Elftman 1945, Lang & Volpe
1998), therefore normal tibial torsion is 18-25°.
Forefoot to rearfoot alignment. The plantar
plane of the forefoot should lie parallel to the
plantar plane of the rearfoot (Fig. 8.27B). The
relationship of the forefoot to the rearfoot is
Figure 8.26 Assessing malleolar torsion using a gravity
goniometer.
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 199
assessed by placing the foot in its neutral posi-
tion; the patient may be either supine or prone
but it is important that the foot hangs free of the
couch. The neutral position of the foot is defined
as the foot being neither pronated or supinated.
To put the foot into the neutral position the prac-
titioner should feel on the dorsum of the foot for
the talar head. The foot should be moved into
pronation and supination; while the foot is
pronating the talar head can be felt protruding on
the medial side of the talonavicular joint and
while the foot is supinating it can be felt protrud-
ing on the lateral side of the talonavicular joint
(Fig. 8.28). Neutral position is achieved when the
talar head cannot be palpated on either side. As
the foot is non-weightbearing it is also necessary
to 'lock' the midtarsal joint in order to reproduce
the position the foot would adopt if it were
weightbearing. In order to lock the midtarsal
joint the talar head should be held in its neutral
position and a slight dorsiflexing force applied to
the fourth and fifth met heads until the foot is at
90° to the leg. The neutral position of the foot
therefore acts as a reference point from which
joint motion and the position of parts of the foot
can be assessed. While the foot is held in its
neutral position a tractograph or a forefoot-
measuring device can be used to measure any
deviation of the forefoot to the rearfoot in the
frontal plane; the forefoot may be inverted or
everted to the rearfoot (Fig. 8.27C,A). Minor dif-
ferences between the forefoot and rearfoot are
usually insignificant and are often due to exam-
iner error, but quite high angles of discrepancy
can exist in excess of 15°.
An inverted forefoot may be due to:
• True forefoot varus: bony abnormality,
theoretically due to inadequate torsion of the
head and neck of the talus during fetal
development, but this is not well supported
(Kidd 1997). The presence of a true forefoot
varus is said to lead to a very flat foot with no
longitudinal arch (Grumbine 1987).
• Forefoot supinatus: acquired soft tissue
deformity due to abnormal pronation of the
rearfoot. The forefoot is held in an inverted
position because of soft tissue contraction.
 200 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Medial Lateral Medial Lateral

Forefoot valgus (everted 1-5) Forefoot (1-5) parallel: rearfoot

A B

Medial Lateral

C Forefoot varus (inverted 1-5)

Figure 8.27 Assessment of forefoot to rearfoot relationship A. Everted forefoot: the forefoot is everted to the rearfoot B. Ideal
forefoot to rearfoot relationship: the forefoot is parallel to the rearfoot C. Inverted forefoot: the forefoot is inverted to the rearfoot.

This condition can be reduced with
treatment. It can be difficult to differentiate
between a forefoot supinatus and forefoot
varus. Various techniques are suggested. One
is to get the patient to stand; the foot is put
into its neutral position. With both conditions
the medial side of the foot should not be in
ground contact. Pressure is applied to the
dorsum of the first ray: with a supinatus,
there should be some give and the first ray
should plantarflex; with forefoot varus, any
pressure on the dorsum of the first ray

-------------------------_._-_.
A B
Figure 8.28 Finding subtalar joint neutral A. Locating the
talar head on the medial side B. Locating the talar head on
the lateral side. It is easier to palpate the talar head on the
lateral side than it is on the medial side.
should cause the foot to tilt inwards and the
fifth ray to leave ground contact.
• Dorsiflexed first ray (metatarsus primus eleoaius):
may be a fixed or flexible deformity.
• Plantarflexed fifth ray: as with the first ray this
may be a fixed or flexible deformity -
dependent upon the cause, treatment may
reduce the deformity.
An everted forefoot may be due to:
• Forefoot valgus: bony abnormality, theoretically
due to excessive torsion of the head and neck
of the talus during fetal development which
holds the forefoot in a fixed everted position
that cannot be reduced with treatment.
• Planiarjlexed first ray: a common cause of an
everted forefoot position that may be due to a
fixed or flexible deformity.
• Dorsiflexed fifth ray: as with the first ray this
may be a fixed or flexible deformity.
The incidence of metatarsus primus elevatus
and plantarflexed first ray is thought to be
greater than that of forefoot varus and valgus.
There may also be malalignment between the
forefoot and the rearfoot in the sagittal and
transverse planes. The forefoot may appear
plantarflexed in relation to the rearfoot or vice
versa. This may be a flexible or fixed deformity
and may lead to a pes-cavus-type foot. The fore-
foot may appear adducted on the rearfoot; this
may be due to a metatarsus adductus or metatar-
sus primus adductus; non-weightbearing the
lateral border of the foot appears banana-shaped
with a metatarsus adductus.
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 201
Arch height. The shape and height of the lon-
gitudinal arch should be observed and compared
to its position when weightbearing. Creasing of
the skin in the arch of the non-weightbearing foot
usually indicates that the foot is mobile and
excessively pronates on weightbearing.
Metatarsal formula. The metatarsal formula
refers to the apparent length of the metatarsals.
The second metatarsal is usually the longest and
the fifth the shortest. A typical metatarsal
formula is 2 > 1 > 3 > 4 > 5 or 2 > 3 > 1 > 4 > 5. It
is important that the first metatarsal is shorter
than the second in order to allow normal func-
tion during propulsion. When the first MTPJ
dorsiflexes the first ray plantarflexes on to the
sesamoids; if the first metatarsal is as long as the
second this cannot occur and as a result the first
MTPJ is not able to dorsiflex, resulting in over-
loading of the other metatarsal heads, commonly
the second. The practitioner should look at the
shoe crease to observe the normal oblique angle
afforded by the typical 2 > 1 > 3 > 4 > 5 formula.
A rare but well-recognised formula is when the
fourth metatarsal is congenitally short, known as
brachymetatarsia (Tachdjian 1985). In this case
the formula would be 2 > 1 > 3 > 5 > 4.
The metatarsal formula is important for normal
digital function. Abnormalities of the formula
may affect forefoot pressure distribution, causing
metatarsalgia. Short first metatarsals do not nec-
essarily cause symptoms in the foot (Harris &
Beath 1949); a correlation between long first
metatarsals and the incidence of hallux abductus
has been reported (Duke et al 1982). Minor
changes in metatarsal length may not adversely
affect forefoot function and weight distribution.
Toe position. The position the toes adopt non-
weightbearing should be noted and compared
with the position they adopt weightbearing.
Depending upon the effects of muscle pull and
ground reaction, the extent of the deformity may
reduce or increase on weightbearing.
Foot length. The length and width of the foot
should be measured non-weightbearing and
compared with weightbearing measurements.
Foot length and width should increase by a small
amount when weightbearing; usually there is up
to one or one and a half shoe size difference.
 202 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
However, noticeable differences in foot length
(two to three shoe sizes) indicates a mobile foot
which excessively pronates during gait. No dif-
ferences between the two is indicative of a rigid
foot.
STATIC EXAMINATION
(WEIGHTBEARING)
To complete the assessment, the patient should
be observed standing. Information from this part
of the assessment should help to complete the
picture of lower limb alignment, give an indica-
tion of whether compensation is occurring at the
STJ and enable deformities of the forefoot to be
observed. It may be helpful to ask the patient to
walk on the spot for a few steps and then tell him
to stop. The position the patient adopts on stop-
ping can be accepted as the normal angle and
base of gait. As with gait analysis, the patient
should be observed from head to toe. The follow-
ing should be noted:
• head
• shoulders
• spine
• pelvis
• angle and base of gait
• relaxed and neutral calcaneal stance position
• longitudinal arch
• toes
• foot width and length.
Points related to the position of the head,
shoulders and pelvis are the same as those made
for gait analysis. Any abnormality may be indica-
tive of an LU, neurological or spinal problem.
The shape of the lower limb and distribution of
muscle bulk should be noted. There should be
symmetry of muscle bulk, although there may be
slight variation between the dominant and reces-
sive side of the body. This is particularly true
where one side, arm and/or leg engages in a
greater level of activity than the other.
Spine
The position of the vertebrae should be observed
for the presence of kyphosis, lordosis or scoliosis.
A true scoliosis can be differentiated from a func-
tional scoliosis by asking the patient to bend
forward. If the spine is still deviated when the
hips are flexed a true scoliosis exists; if vertebrae
alignment improves it is likely to be a functional
scoliosis.
Angle and base of gait
A normal angle and base of gait is when the feet
are slightly abducted (approximately 13° from
the midline of the body) and the distance
between the malleoli is approximately 5 cm (see
Fig. 8.4A). Frontal plane deformity of the legs -
genu valgum or va rum - may be very noticeable
when the patient stands and will affect the base
of gait, i.e. the gap between the malleoli will be
greater (genu valgum) or less (genu varum) (see
Fig. 8.5). The angle of gait will be affected by tor-
sional problems affecting the leg. Excessive inter-
nal torsion will lead to an adducted base of gait
and squinting patellae, whereas excessive exter-
nal rotation will lead to an abducted base of gait
(greater than 13°) (Fig. 8.4B-D). Torsional prob-
lems may be due to bony or soft tissue problems;
the true cause should be identified from the non-
weightbearing assessment.
Relaxed (RCSP) and neutral (NCSP) calcaneal
stance position
The relaxed calcaneal position is an indicator of
STJ motion when weightbearing. This position
can be used to assess whether compensation for
any proximal (e.g. tibial varum) or distal (e.g. fore-
foot varus) deformities has taken place at the STJ.
The RCSP is measured by bisecting the poste-
rior surface of the calcaneus; the angle this line
makes with the ground is measured (Fig. 8.29A).
The amount of calcaneal eversion or inversion
(frontal plane) can be measured. Values greater
than 4° eversion indicate the presence of abnor-
mal pronation:
• 0-4°: normal limits
• 4-7°: moderate pronation requiring treatment
if symptomatic or a cause for concern
• 8° and above: marked pronation.

The causes of an abnormal everted RCSP are
numerous, e.g. compensated forefoot varus,
compensated ankle equinus, tibial valgum and
varum, internal and external torsion of the leg.
If the calcaneus does not have an everted posi-
tion during RCSP it does not mean that abnor-
mal pronation is not occurring. Compensation
for a rearfoot varus involves excessive STJ
pronation in order to bring the medial tubercle
of the heel into ground contact and provide
shock absorption during the contact phase of
gait. A 10° rearfoot varus will require 10° of
pronation in order to bring the heel into a verti-
A B
C
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 203
cal position. Although excessive pronation has
occurred, the RCSP will appear vertical and not
everted.
An inverted RCSP may be due to a neurologi-
cal problem, an uncompensated varus deformity
affecting the rear- or forefoot, subtalar joint
damage, tonic spasm of the invertors of the foot
or the presence of a plantarflexed first ray.
The NCSP is measured by placing the foot into
its neutral position while in ground contact and
bisecting the calcaneus (Fig. 8.29C). The angle
between the bisection of the posterior surface of
the calcaneus and the ground should be mea-
Figure 8.29 Assessment of RCSP and NCSP A. Feet in
relaxed calcaneal stance position (RCSP) B. Bisection of the
posterior surface of the calcaneus and the distal third of the
leg C. Foot held in the neutral position in order to assess
neutral calcaneal stance position (NCSP).
 204 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
sured; usually the calcaneus is in a slight
inverted position. This is known as rearfoot
varus and may be due to the presence of a sub-
talar varus (see non-weightbearing assessment of
the STJ) and/ or tibial varum.
The presence of a tibial va rum can be assessed
during assessment of the NCSP. While the foot
is in NCSP a bisection of the posterior surface of
the leg should be compared to the ground.
Ideally the bisection of the leg should be vertical
to the ground (Fig. 8.29B). An angle of less than
90° when measured from the medial side of the
bisection of the leg indicates a tibial valgum and
an angle greater than 90° indicates a tibial
varum. It was thought that the NCSP position
was a composite of the STJ plus the tibial posi-
tion. For example, a value of 7° rearfoot varus
might be deemed to be made from 4° STJ varus
and 3° tibial varum. A tibial valgum would con-
versely have a negative effect upon the presence
of an STJ varus. Because of the inaccuracy and
error in measuring these values, however, this
concept is questionable.
It is important to note the difference between
the RCSP and NCSP in order to assess the com-
pensation that occurs for proximal or distal
problems (Fig. 8.29A,C). It is normal for there to
be a difference of up to 6° between RCSP and
NCSP; this is because most people have a slight
subtalar varus and need to pronate to provide
shock absorption.
The limitations of comparing NCSP with RCSP
is that it only provides information regarding
frontal plane motion of the rearfoot. Some
authors suggest that sagittal plane motion
(Mueller et al1993, Payne & Dananberg 1997) or
transverse plane motion (Nawoczenski et al
1995) may be a better indicator of foot pronation.
Longitudinal arch
Arch shape is affected by the rearfoot and fore-
foot position, the declination angles of the
metatarsals, the inclination angle of the calcaneus
and the tone and activity of intrinsic and extrin-
sic muscles. In the past flat-footed people were
rejected for the army as it was considered that
their feet would not cope with the demands of
army life. However, there is rather more to foot
function and mechanics than the height and
shape of the longitudinal arch.
The patient should be asked to stand on tiptoe
and the position of the foot arch should be noted.
With rigid flat feet the arch height does not
increase when the patient stands on tip toe; with
a flexible flat foot the arch height increases. Rigid
flat feet may be due to bony coalitions (synos-
toses), contractures due to muscle imbalance or
neurological paralysis with subsequent soft tissue
contractures. The shape and size of the arch can be
captured by taking a footprint; this can be used to
monitor changes.
Toes
There are three main categories of pathomechani-
cal causes of lesser hammer toe syndrome.
Flexor stabilisation. A contraction (hammer-
ing) of all the lesser toes with an associated
adductovarus deformity of the fifth and some-
times fourth toes (quadratus plantae losing its
mechanical advantage). This can occur in an
excessively pronated foot during late stance
phase when flexor digitorum longus and/or
flexor digitorum brevis have gained mechanical
advantage over the interossei muscles.
Pronation of the STJ allows unlocking of the
midtarsal joint, resulting in forefoot hyper-
mobility. The flexors fire earlier and longer than
normal in an attempt to stabilise the forefoot.
These muscles are ineffective at stabilising the
forefoot but effective in overpowering the small
interosseous muscles, thereby causing hammer-
ing or clawing of the toes.
Flexor substitution. A straight contraction of
all the lesser toes (with no adductovarus of the
fourth and fifth toes). This can occur in a
supinated foot during late stance phase when the
flexors have gained mechanical advantage over
the interossei muscles. This digital deformity
occurs when the triceps surae muscle is weak
and the deep posterior and lateral leg muscles try
to substitute for the weak triceps. Flexor substi-
tution is the least common of the three categories
that create pathological hammer toe syndrome of
the lesser toes.
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 205

Extensor substitution. Extensor substitution and therefore broad forefoot appearance.

is a term that describes the excessive dorsi- Changes in forefoot shape due to hallux abduc-
flexion of the toes during swing phase of gait tus and digiti quinti varus can be monitored by
and at heel strike. Extensor digitorum longus taking photographs or ink prints of the foot on a
(EDL) gains mechanical advantage over the regular (twice-yearly) basis. It is also useful to
lumbricales. This can be due to a variety of draw around the foot at regular intervals to gain
factors. An anterior pes cavus, ankle equinus, a visual representation of foot shape and to
pain, spasticity of the EDL muscle or weakness monitor changes.
of the lumbricales. Without the stabilising effect
of the lumbricales the MTPJs will be excessively
dorsiflexed, resulting in severe dorsal contrac-
tion of the toes. This is commonly seen in pes
cavus during non-weightbearing (Fig. 8.30) and
can be emphasised by asking the patient to
dorsiflex the foot. It is exaggerated during the
swing phase of gait and at heel contact when
extensor digitorum longus and brevis are nor-
mally active. This deformity often begins as a
flexible deformity that may reduce completely
during weightbearing but becomes more rigid
as accommodative contractures develop.
Hallux abductus and hallux abductovalgus are
common complex deformities affecting the first
MTPJ (Fig. 8.31). Slight abduction of the hallux is
considered normal, up to 15°. Deviation of the
hallux can be measured with a finger goniome-
ter: the value should be recorded so that deterio-
ration of the condition can be monitored.
The fifth ray may frequently be abducted:
tailor's bunion or digiti quinti varus may be asso-
ciated with hallux abductus, giving a splayed

Figure 8.30 Flexed deformity of toes (28-year-old male) due

to extensor substitution present on non-weightbearing and Figure 8.31 Hallux abductovalgus: abduction of the hallux
weightbearing. with valgus rotation.
 206 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Digital formulae should be noted. Usually Table 8.9 Classification of toe deformities
the first toe is longest or the first and the Toe deformity Description
second are of equal length - 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 5,
1 = 2 > 3 > 4 > 5. An excessively long toe, e.g. the Hallux abductus Hallux abducted more than
15° from the midline of the body
fourth, may be impacted in footwear, resulting in
toe deformity and secondary lesions. Hallux abductovalgus As above, but the hallux is
also rotated so that the hallux
Deformities of the lesser digits (toes 2-5) can nail faces towards the midline
be described in various ways; unfortunately, of the body
there is no commonly agreed set of definitions. Hallux abductus Distal hallucal phalanx abducted
When assessing and recording the presence of interphalangeus away from the midline of the body
digital deformities, the best approach is to Hallux varus Hallux adducted towards the
midline of the body
describe the plane that the deformity is in - e.g.
sagittal - and whether the deformity is fixed or Hallux limitus Reduced dorsiflexion at the
first MTPJ
mobile. A fixed deformity implies that there is no
Hallux rigidus Complete lack of dorsiflexion
motion at the joint due to soft tissue changes and at the first MTPJ
possible bony ankylosis; such deformities can Hallux flexus Plantarflexion of the hallux at
only be corrected by surgery. Table 8.9 lists and the first MTPJ
defines the main toe deformities. Hallux extensus Dorsiflexion of the hallux at the
first MTPJ
Hyperextended hallux Distal phalanx of the hallux
LIMB-LENGTH INEQUALITY dorsiflexed
Once gait analysis, non-weightbearing and static Hammer toe Dorsiflexion at the MTPJ,
plantarflexion at the proximal
weightbearing examinations have been com- IPJ and either normal position
pleted it may be necessary to assess for limb- or dorsiflexion at the distal IPJ
length inequality. Claw toe Dorsiflexion at the MTPJ,
An LLI can have profound effects on the func- plantarflexion at the proximal
tioning of the musculoskeletal system, affecting and distal IPJs

the spine, sacroiliac and hip joints as well as the
foot. A difference of greater than 1 cm can affect
normal body alignment. In a sedentary person a
small discrepancy may have a negligible effect
upon posture, but if a person increases his level of
physical activity, the effects of any imbalance
become amplified.
Retracted toe Claw toe where the apex of the
toe is not in ground contact
Mallet toe Plantarflexion at the distal IPJ
Adductovarus fifth Fifth toe rotated so that nail is
facing away from the midline of
the body and the toe is adducted
(moved towards the midline of
the body)

A leg-length discrepancy may be real, apparent Dorsally displaced One or more toes is in a
dorsiflexed position in
or environmental. A real limb-length discrepancy comparison to the other toes
is due to a difference in the length of the femurs
or the tibiae and is common after a hip replace-
ment. An apparent limb-length discrepancy may
be due to a number of factors, e.g. osteoarthritis
coexist. The possible effects of treatment should
of the hip or a scoliosis. In addition, an environ-
be considered prior to commencing treatment
mental limb-length discrepancy may exist; this
(Case comment 8.6).
can be due to uneven footwear or camber of
The presence of a limb-length discrepancy can
roads. It is important to identify the difference in
be observed during gait analysis:
length between the limbs and to differentiate
between a real and apparent discrepancy prior to • shoulder tilt to one side
commencing treatment. It should be noted that a • unequal arm swing
real and an apparent limb-length inequality may • pelvic tilt
 ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 207

Case comment 8.6 .:

It should be remembered that a patient who has had

a discrepancy for years will have compensated by
altering his/her body posture. If any raise under the
heel is considered, this must only be for a proportion
of the difference. Heel raises used alone may cause
unwanted plantar flexion, especially when the
deformity is greater than 2.5 em. The adaptation to
footwear should affect the whole sole in this case.

• foot supinated on the short side

• foot pronated on the long side
• knee flexed on the long side
• ankle plantarflexed on the short side.
Limb length measurement is only performed if
the patient's symptoms or dynamic function
suggest that a discrepancy may be present.
To assess for the presence of a real LLI the
patient lies supine on a flat couch with the hips
and knees extended. The practitioner places her
hands around the heels and exerts a slight pull
on the legs, at the same time bringing the legs
together so that the knees and malleoli are touch- Figure 8.32 Assessment of leg-length inequality.The knees
ing. The knees and malleoli should be level. are flexed so that the position of the knees and ankles can be
A difference indicates an inequality at the femur compared.

or tibia. To identify which bone is affected the

knees should be flexed and the heels pushed
flush against the buttocks (Skyline/Allis test)
(Fig. 8.32). If the tibiae are of unequal length, the
knees or tibial tubercles will be at different levels.
If one femur is longer than the other, the knee of
the longer femur will be positioned further
forward than the other knee. This is a relatively
crude method of assessment and does not quan-
tify the extent of the difference.
A flexible non-stretch tape measure with a
metal end can be used to measure a real leg
length ('direct measurement technique'). With
the patient supine the distance between the
anterior superior iliac spine (ASIS) and the
medial malleolus is measured (Crawford
Adams & Hamblen 1990). The metal end of the
tape fits snugly in front of the ASIS, as shown in
Figure 8.33A. The practitioner may use any part
of the medial malleolus as a reference point, but
it is important that the same point is used for
repeat measurements. An error of up to 10%
should be allowed for because the tape measure
may wrap around asymmetrical muscle bulk or,
more commonly, the patient's pelvis may not be
properly aligned. In cases of asymmetrical
muscle bulk, measuring from the ASISs to the
lateral malleoli is advocated. A tape measure
can be used to compare the individual lengths
of the femurs by measuring from the greater
trochanter to the lateral knee joint line. The
lengths of the tibiae can be compared by mea-
suring from the medial knee joint line to the
medial malleolus or the tibial tubercle to the
middle of the anterior ankle. The 'indirect mea-
surement technique' can also be used to assess a
real leg length. The patient stands while blocks
of wood of varying thicknesses are placed
under the suspected shorter limb until the iliac
crests are palpated to be level.
Radiological measurement (Scannergram) is
only used when surgical correction is planned, as
it is expensive and, unless the results are going to
 208 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
be used for surgery, exposes the patient to need-
less radiation.
Distinction between a real or apparent differ-
ence can be achieved by measuring each limb
from a common reference point above the pelvis;
the xiphisternum is usually used. The metal end
of the tape is placed on the xiphisternum and the
distance from the xiphisternum to each malleolus
is measured with the patient (Fig. 8.33B). If
values are the same, then the LLI is likely to be
apparent. The cause usually lies at the hip or
pelvis, where a fixed deformity makes the limbs
appear unequal so that the body compensates by
tilting laterally. An alternative method can be
used with the patient weightbearing:
B Positioning for
xiphisternum
Figure 8.33 Assessment of a true and apparent leg-length inequality A. Measurement from the anterior superior iliac spine
(ASIS) to the medial malleolus B. Measurement from the xiphisternum to the medial malleolus.
• The patient stands in the RCSP position
(Fig. 8.29A).
• The position of the ASISs is assessed to see if
they are level.
• The feet are then placed in the NCSP (Fig.
8.29C).
• The position of the ASISs is assessed to see if
they are level.
• If the ASISs are not level in either the RCSP
and NCSP, and the extent of the discrepancy
remains the same in RCSP and NCSP, a
true LLI should be suspected. If the ASISs
are on the same level in the NCSP but differ
for the RCSP, an apparent LLI should be
suspected.

SUMMARY
Orthopaedic assessment of the lower limb is a
complex process. Good observational skills, an
ability to take a detailed history and an holistic
approach to examination are paramount. It can
be compared to doing a jigsaw - all the pieces
have to be put together in order to produce the
picture. Because the lower limb functions as
one mechanical unit, it is important that the
practitioner differentiates between primary and
REFERENCES
Astrom M, Arvidson T 1995 Alignment and joint motion in the
normal foot. Journal of Orthopedic Sports Physical
Therapy 22(5): 216-222
Barnett C H, Napier J R 1952 The axis of rotation at the ankle
joint in man. Its influence upon the form of the talus and
the mobility of the fibula. Journal of Anatomy 86: 1-9
Beeson P 1999 Frontal plane configuration of the knee in
children. The Foot 9(1): 18-26
Bojson-Moller F 1979 Anatomy of the forefoot - normal and
pathological. Clinical Orthopaedic Related Research 142:
10-18
Brukner P, Khan K 1993 Clinical sports medicine. McGraw
Hill, Sydney, p 438
Buckley R E, Hunt D V 1997 Reliability of clinical
measurement of subtalar joint movement. Foot & Ankle
International 18(4): 229-232
Crawford Adams J, Hamblen D L 1990 Outline of
orthopaedics, 11th edn. Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh, pp 280-283, 353
Dananberg H L 1986 Functional hallux limitus and its
relationship to gait efficiency. Journal of the American
Podiatric Medical Association 76(11): 648-652
Dananberg H L 1993 Gait style as an etiology to chronic
postural pain. Part 1: functional hallux limitus. Journal of
the American Podiatric Medical Association 83(8):
433--441
Duke H, Newman L M, Bruskoff B L, Daniels R 1982 Relative
metatarsal length patterns in hallux abductovalgus. Journal
of the American Podiatric Association 72: 1-5
Elftman H 1945 Torsion of the lower extremity. American
Journal of Physical Anthropology 3: 255-265
Elftman H 1960 The transverse tarsal joint and its control.
Clinical Orthopaedics 16
Elveru R A, Rothstein J M, Lamb R L 1988 Goniometric
reliability in a clinical setting. Physical Therapy 68(5):
672-677
Gajdosik R L, Giuliani C A, Bohannon R W 1990 Passive
compliance and length of the hamstring muscles of healthy
men and women. Clinical Biomechanics 5(1): 23-29
Gajdosik R L, Rieck M A, Sullivan D K et al 1993
Comparison of four clinical tests for assessing hamstring
muscle length. J Orthopaedic Sports Physical Therapy
18(5): 614-618
Green D R, Carol A 1984 Planal dominance. Journal of the
American Podiatry Association 74: 98-103
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 209
any secondary problems. However, it is not
always necessary to examine every component
of the lower limb. The practitioner should
weigh up the necessity for a head to toe exam-
ination against assessing isolated parts of the
anatomy. This decision will be informed by
data obtained from the patient's history, the
presenting problem, a brief gait analysis and
information from other parts of the assessment
process.
Grumbine N A 1987 The varus components of the forefoot in
flatfoot deformities. Journal of the American Podiatric
Medical Association 77: 14-20
Harris R 1, Beath T 1949 The short first metatarsal: its
incidence and clinical significance. Journal of Bone and
Joint Surgery [Am] 31A(4): 553-565
Hayles M, Lang L 1987 Measuring tibial torsion: comparison
of measurement techniques. ACTUK Journal Spring: 17-20
Hutter C G, Scott W 1949 Tibial torsion. Journal of Bone and
Joint Surgery [Am] 31A: 511-518
Inman V T 1976 The joints of the ankle. Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore, p 65
Inman V T, Ralston H J, Todd F 1981 Human walking.
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, pp 86-108
Kendall F P, Kendall-McCreary E, Geise-Provance P 1993
Muscles: testing and function, 4th edn. Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore, pp 68-77
Kelso S F, Ritchie D H, Cohen I R, Weed J H, Root M L 1982
Direction and range of motion of the first ray. Journal of
the American Podiatry Association 72(12): 600-605
Kidd R 1997 Forefoot varus - real or false, fact or fantasy.
Australian Journal of Podiatric Medicine 31(3): 81-86
Kilmartin T E, Wallace A, Hill T W 1991 First metatarsal
position in juvenile hallux abductovalgus - a significant
clinical measurement? Journal of British Podiatric
Medicine 46: 43--45
Kulik S A, Clanton T 0 1996 Tarsal coalition. Foot & Ankle
International 17(5): 286-296
Lang L M G, Volpe R G 1998 Measurement of tibial torsion.
Journal of the American Podiatric Medical Association
88(4): 160-165
McRae R 1997 Clinical orthopedic examination, 4th edn.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, pp 1-7
Menz H B 1995 Clinical hindfoot measurement: a critical
review of the literature. The Foot 5(2): 57-64
Menz H B 1998 Alternative techniques for the clinical
assessment of foot pronation. Journal of the American
Podiatric Medical Association 88(3): 119-129
Milgrom C, Giladi M, Simkin A et al 1985 The normal range
of subtalar inversion and eversion in young males as
measured by three different techniques. Foot & Ankle
International 5: 143-145
Miyazaki S, Yamamoto S 1993 Moment acting at the
metatarsophalangeal joints during barefoot level walking.
Gait Posture 1: 133-140
 210 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Mueller M J, Host J V, Norton B J 1993 Navicular drop as a
composite measure of excessive pronation. Journal of the
American Podiatric Medical Association 83(4): 198-202
Nawoczenski D A, Cook T M, Saltzman C L 1995 The effect
of foot orthotics on three-dimensional kinematics of the
leg and rearfoot during running. Journal of Orthopaedic
Sports Physical Therapy 6: 317-327
Payne C B, Dananberg H J 1997 Sagittal plane facilitation of the
foot. Australian Journal of Podiatric Medicine 31(1): 7-11
Riegger-Krugh C, Keysor J J 1996 Skeletal malalignments of
the lower quarter: correlated and compensatory motions
and postures. Journal of Orthopaedic Sports Physical
Therapy 23(2): 164-170
Rome K 1996a ankle joint dorsiflexion measurement
studies - a review of the literature. Journal of the
American Podiatric Medical Association 86(5): 205-211
Rome K 1996b A reliability study of the universal
goniometer, fluid goniometer, and eletrogoniometer for
the measurement of ankle dorsiflexion. Foot & Ankle
International 17(1): 28-32
Root M L, Weed J H, Sgarlato T E, Bluth D R 1966 Axis of
motion of the subtalar joint. An anatomical study.
FURTHER READING
Altman M 11968 Sagittal plane angles of the talus and
calcaneus in the developing foot. Journal of the American
Podiatry Association 58: 463--470
Anderson J A D, Sweetman B J A 1975 Combined
flexirule/hydrogoniometer for measurement of lumbar
spine and its sagittal movement. Rheumatology &
Rehabilitation 14: 173-179
Apley A G, Solomon L 1988 Concise system of orthopaedics
and fractures. Butterworths, London
Bailey D S, Perillo J T, Forman M 1984 Subtalar joint neutral.
A study using tomography. Journal of the American
Podiatry Association 74: 59-64
Bartlett M D, Wolf L S et al1985 Hip flexion contracture
measurements. Archives of Physical and Medical
Rehabilitation 66: 620-625
Bland J M, Altman D G 1986 Statistical methods for
assessing agreement between two methods of clinical
measurement. Lancet February: 307-310
Cochran G, Van B 1982 A primer of orthopaedic
biomechanics. Churchill Livingstone, New York
Coughlin M J, Mann R A 1999 Surgery of the foot and ankle,
7th edn. Mosby, St Louis
D' Amico J C, Schuster R 01979 Motion of the first ray
clarification through investigation. Journal of the
American Podiatry Association 69: 17-23
Ebesui J M 1968 The first ray axis and first metatarso-
phalangeal joint. An anatomical and pathological study.
Journal of the American Podiatry Association 58: 160-167
Fabry G, MacEwan G D, Shands A R 1973 Torsion of the
femur. A follow up study in normal and abnormal
conditions. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 55A:
1726-1738
Fairbank J C T, Pynsent P B, Van Poortvliet J, Phillips H 1984
Mechanical factors in the incidence of knee pain in
adolescents and young adults. Journal of Bone and Joint
Surgery [Br] 66B: 685-692
Journal of the American Podiatry Association 56:
149-155
Spooner S K, Kilmartin T E, Merriman L M 1994 The
palpation technique for determination of metatarsal
formula: a study of validity. The Foot 4(4): 198-200
Sutherland D H et al1981 The pathomechanics of gait in
Duchenne muscular dystrophy. Development of Medicine
& Child Neurology 23(3): 3-22
Svenningsen S, Terjesen T, Auflem M, Berg V 1990 Hip
rotation and in-toeing gait. A study of normal subjects
from four years until adult age. Clinical Orthopaedics &
Related Research 251: 177-182
Tachdjian M 01985 The child's foot. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Thackery C, Beeson P 1996 In-toeing gait in children: a
review of the literature. The Foot 6(1): 1--4
Tiberio D, Burdett R G, Chadran A M 1989 Effect of subtalar
joint position on the measurement of ankle dorsiflexion.
Clinical Biomechanics 4: 189-191
Tomaro J 1995 Measurement of tibiofibular va rum in
subjects with unilateral overuse syndromes. Journal of
Orthopaedic Sports Physical Therapy 21(2): 86-89
Green W B, Heckman J D (eds) 1993 The clinical
measurement of joint motion. American Academy of
Orthopaedic Surgeons, Illinois
Green D R, Whitney A K Walters P 1979 Subtalar joint
motion. A simplified view. Journal of the American
Podiatry Association 69: 83-91
Hartley A 1995 Practical joint assessment: lower quadrant.
Mosby, St Louis
Helal B, Gibb P 1987 Freiberg's disease: a suggested pattern
of management. Foot and Ankle 8(2): 94-102
Henry A P J, Waugh W 1975 The use of footprints in
assessing the results of operations for hallux valgus - a
comparison of Keller's operation and arthrodesis. Journal
of Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 57-B: 478--481
Hicks J H 1953 The joints. The mechanics of the foot. Journal
of Anatomy 87
Holden M K et al1984 Clinical gait assessment in the
neurologically impaired. Reliability and meaningfulness.
Physical Therapy 64: 35--41
Kelso S F, Richie D H, Cohen I R et al 1982 The direction and
range of the first ray. Journal of the American Podiatry
Association 72: 600-605
Mann R, Inman V T 1964 Phasic activity of intrinsic muscles
of the foot. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 46A:
469--481
McGlarnry E D 1992 Lesser ray deformities. In: McGlarnry
E D, Banks A S, Downey M S (eds) Comprehensive
textbook of foot surgery, 2nd edn. Vol. 1. Williams &
Wikins, Baltimore
Manter J T 1941 Movement of the subtalar and transverse
tarsal joints. Anatomy Records 80: 397--410
Myerson M S, Shereff M J 1989 The pathological anatomy of
claw and hammer toes. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery
[Am] 71A: 45--49
Norkin C C, White D J 1995 Measurement of joint motion:
a guide to goniometry, 2nd edn. F A Davis, Philadelphia

Scott J H 1983 In: Harris N (ed) Leg length inequality, a
postgraduate textbook of clinical orthopaedics. Blackwell,
Oxford, pp 282-291
Sgarlato T E 1973 A compendium of podiatric biomechanics.
California College of Podiatric Medicine
Subotnick S I 1979 Cures for common running injuries.
Anderson World, California
Sussman R E, Piccora R 1985 The metatarsal sesamoid and
ORTHOPAEDIC ASSESSMENT 211
first metatarsophalangeal joint. Journal of the American
Podiatric Medical Association 75: 327-330
Welton E A 1992 The Harris and Beath footprint: interpretation
and clinical value. Foot and Ankle 13: 462--468
Whittle M 1991 Gait analysis. An introduction. Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford
Williams P L, Warwick R (eds) 1989 Gray's anatomy, 36th
edn. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 213
Approach to the patient 213
Psychological aspects of skin disease 214
The purpose of assessment 214
How common is skin disease? 214
Skin structure and function 215
Epidermis 216
Dermo-epidermaljunction 217
Dermis 218
Skin appendages 218
)
History and examination of the skin 219
History taking 219
Clinical examination 220
Common tests and investigations 227
Recording of the assessment 228
Hyperkeratoticdisorders 229
Assessment of corns and callus 229
Blistering disorders 231
Inflammatoryconditions of the skin 232
Eczema 232
Psoriasis 233
Vasculitis 234
Lichen planus 234
Granulomaannulars 235
Necrobiosis Iipoidica 235
Other inflammatory conditions 235
Allergies and drug reactions 235
infections of the skin 236
Viral 237
Bacterial 237
Fungal 238
Infestationsand insect bites 238
Disorders of subcutaneoustissue
Systemic disorders and the skin
Pigmented lesions 240
Skin tumours 242
Benign tumours 242
Malignanttumours 242
Summary 243
Assessment of the skin
and its appendages
1. Bristow
R. Turner
INTRODUCTION
Dermatology is the study of the skin and its dis-
orders. More than just an inert barrier, the integu-
ment is a highly active organ with an important
role in physiology and homeostasis. There are
over 5000 recognised skin disorders in existence
but the largest percentage of skin disease is due
to a handful of conditions, which may range
from the trivial (i.e, minor bruising) to life threat-
ening (i.e. malignant melanoma). Most skin dis-
eases do not have a significant mortality,
although they cause significant morbidity and
have a high impact on the quality of life of
patients (Harlow et al 1998). Typically, skin dis-
orders affect individuals in a number of ways
(the four Ds):
• discomfort: i.e, itching and pain
239
• disability: i.e. foot ulceration, hand eczema
239 • disfigurement: i.e. scarring or rashes
• death: i.e. skin cancers.
APPROACH TO THE PATIENT
The key to a good dermatological assessment is,
firstly, a thorough history. This provides essential
information and initiates an understanding of the
patient as a person, the environment and an
appreciation of the psychological aspects to the
skin disease. The second stage is examination of
the skin (with investigations when required). The
skin is an easily accessible structure, but it is fre-
quently difficult for non-dermatologists to
examine and record their findings. Therefore a
213
 214 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
basic orderly approach is required if a successful
outcome is to be achieved.
Psychological aspects of skin
disease
The skin defines who we are and how we are
perceived to be. It is on our appearance we are
judged by others (Lawton 2000). One only has to
see the amount of time and money invested in
changing or enhancing our appearance to appre-
ciate how important the skin and its appendages
are. A common mistake of students when faced
with a patient with widespread skin disease is to
remain at a distance, avoiding any physical
contact. Skin diseases are subconsciously often
perceived as nasty, dirty or infectious.
As a practitioner, preconceptions need to be
overcome if the patient is to be reassured that
they are in the care of an empathetic, under-
standing professional. It should be remembered
that the problems of the skin patient may be
more than skin deep, even with conditions that
are perceived by the practitioner to be trivial.
Many patients suffering the most common skin
disorders such as psoriasis and eczema have a
quality of life similar to patients with other
chronic diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis,
cancer and heart disease. Often, the visibility of
skin lesions to others is not correlated to the suf-
ferer's well-being (Fortune et al 1997) and many
conditions may be aggravated by psychological
stress, i.e. atopic dermatitis, psoriasis and lichen
planus. It should also be borne in mind that often
just acknowledgement and discussion of the
wider problems with a patient, in a sensitive and
empathetic manner, is an important aspect of the
assessment (Case history 9.1).
THE PURPOSE OF ASSESSMENT
The assessment procedure is at the heart of the
diagnostic and treatment process. From a
patient's perspective assessment is seen as the
reaching of a diagnosis and arriving at a decision
on the most suitable form of treatment, i.e. what
it is and what can be done about it. Most patients'
fears regarding skin disease revolve around
----.---------------._--_ _---..
Case history 9.1
Mrs F is a 50-year-old housewife with a 35-year
history of widespread psoriasis. With no family history,
she developed the disease in her teens. This made
normal activities such as socialising and relationships
impossible due to the widespread disease and its
appearance. Every day, Mrs F has to spend 2 hours
applying emollients and other medicaments that are
often greasy and for most would be intolerable.
Excessive washing of clothes and bed linen, as well
as cleaning around the house, are everyday tasks
due to the exfoliative nature of the disease. With time,
Mrs F has undergone many forms of treatment for her
condition, with limited success, but with the help and
support of her family and health professionals she
has developed her own coping strategy.
issues such as 'is it catching?' and 'will it get
better?'. All the information gathered during the
assessment will help to inform and reassure the
patient accordingly.
The difficulty is that many skin diseases, to the
untrained eye, appear very similar. The second
challenge is deciding whether the skin disease is
part of an underlying systemic condition; there-
fore, the importance of the whole assessment
process cannot be overstressed.
Many underlying conditions may be reflected
in the condition of the skin and nails. For
example, clubbing of the nails is a feature often
associated with smokers and those with lung
disease. Recurrent ulceration and infection of
the foot is a common diagnostic marker in dia-
betes mellitus. Recognising such features will
improve the likelihood of a successful diagnosis
and treatment plan.
How common is skin disease?
Reliable data are difficult to obtain but skin disor-
ders are thought to affect around a quarter of the
population, with only a small percentage seeking
professional help. Typically, 10-20% of a general
practitioner's annual workload involves skin dis-
orders (Office of Population Census and Surveys
1991), and podiatrists also spend a significant
amount of time treating skin conditions (i.e.
hyperkeratosis, nail disorders and wounds, etc.).
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 215

Of the most common disorders, most can affect Table 9.1 Functions of the skin
the lower limb (Gawkrodger 1992): Functions of the skin Specific property
• fungal and other skin infections Barrier properties Physical: thermal/mechanical/
• dermatitis/eczema radiation
• psoriasis Chemical: irritants/allergens/
water loss
• warts Microbiological: infections/
• tumours (benign and malignant). infestations
Sense organ Touch/vibration/pressure/
temperature
SKIN STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION Nociception
Other Thermoregulation and assistance
The skin (or integument) is the largest organ in maintaining blood pressure
system and covers around 1.8 m 2 • Much more Vitamin D and cholesterol
than just an inert wrapping, the skin is a highly production
active organ that fulfils many functions (Table
9.1) which are determined by its structure. The Across the whole body surface, there are con-
skin comprises three layers: an epithelium (epi- siderable regional variations in the skin's struc-
dermis) and a connective tissue matrix (the ture, which in turn dictates its specific
dermis) firmly bound together at the dermo- properties. These local variations may then
epidermal junction (Fig. 9.1); below the dermis influence the microclimate and therefore the
lies the subcutaneous (fat) layer. pattern of organisms. Such variation may also

' t - - - - - - Hair

Skin surface

Epidermis

))------::::- Sweat duct

Hair follicle -------'((11\--11-

Erector pili muscle - - - - - - - " ' \ ~ Sebaceous gland
Dermis Hair bulb has a ----, -\ ~ Eccrine gland
rich vascular supply

Apocrine gland

Figure 9.1 Normal skin (not to scale) showing epidermis and dermis and the skin appendages, excluding nail.
 216 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
account for the typical distribution of skin
disease.
Epidermis
The epidermis (Plate 9) is an avascular structure,
relying on the diffusion of materials across the
dermo-epidermal junction for nutrients and
waste disposal. It is principally composed of ker-
atinocytes (corneocytes), which make up approxi-
mately 80% of the cells, as well as melanocytes,
Merkel's discs and Langerhans' cells. Appendages
of the epidermis include the nails, sweat glands
and sebaceous glands (Fig. 9.1).
The epidermis can range in thickness from
around 0.4 to 1.5 mm, depending on the anatom-
icallocation; it is divided into four layers.
Basal layer (stratum germinativum). For the most
part, the basal layer consists of a single, undulat-
ing layer of cuboidal keratinocytes. The cells
within this layer are firmly attached to the
dermo-epidermal junction (OED by tonofilaments
which arise from the cytoplasm of the cells linking
into the hemidesmosomes anchored into the DEJ
(Venning 2000). These mitotically active cells gen-
erate the cells of the more superficial layers of the
epidermis.
Scattered throughout this layer are specialist
cells known as melanocytes. In sun-exposed areas
(e.g. the face) they may have a ratio of 1 in 4,
whereas on unexposed areas such as the plantar
surface of the foot their numbers may decrease to
1 in 30. These cells are well developed in the epi-
dermis of humans as we have a relatively hairless
integument. Melanocytes are dendritic cells
which produce a pigment melanin in specialist
organelles known as melanosomes. These
melanin granules then pass along the dendritic
processes of the cell and are distributed evenly to
adjacent keratinocytes. The melanin forms a pro-
tective cap over the cell nucleus, its function
being to limit the amount of harmful ultraviolet
radiation reaching the DNA within the nucleus.
Recently, it has been proposed that melanin also
has a role in mopping up free radicals, which
arise as a result of inflammation within the skin
(Norlund 1994). The amount of melanin pro-
duced across various races is roughly equal;
however, in darker skins the melanin granules are
much more dense and less susceptible to degra-
dation as they ascend through the epidermis.
Merkel's cells are specialised nerve endings of
unknown origin, possibly a modified ker-
atinocyte (McKee 1996) found in the basal layer.
Their function is thought to be the perception of
light touch. They are typically only found in
specific regions of the skin, being numerous on
the volar (pulp) surfaces of the fingers and toes,
in the nail beds and the dorsum of the foot.
Prickle cell layer (stratum spinosum). The new
cells generated by the active basal layer pass into
the stratum spinosum. Here they become more
polyhedral in shape. Internally, large numbers of
keratin filaments (tonofilaments) surround the
nucleus, whereas externally the cells have abun-
dant spinous processes. These are desmosomes,
bonding adjacent cells together, and are an
important component of the epidermis, as they
resist mechanical stress. In the upper part of this
layer are the first lamellar granules. These secre-
tory organelles contain many substances such as
glycoproteins, phospholipids, sterols and lipases.
Their significance is still being debated but it has
been suggested that these granules are responsi-
ble for the barrier function found higher in the
epidermis (Freinkel & Traczyck 1985).
Langerhans' cells make up about 8% of the
epidermis and are particularly found in the
stratum spinosum. They are derived from bone
marrow and are dendritic in structure, forming
no apposition with the cells around them.
Functionally, these cells are outposts of the
immune system in the epidermis, recognising
and presenting antigens to sensitised T lympho-
cytes and they have an important role in hyper-
sensitivity and allergic reactions. Patients with
specific skin diseases may have reduced
numbers of Langerhans' cells.
Granular layer (stratum granulosum). By the
time the ascending cells have reached the granu-
lar layer they are much more flattened in appear-
ance and are packed with keratohyalin granules.
These granules are primarily composed of pro-
teins and various types of keratins. As the cells
move up towards the next layer of the epidermis
the lamellar granules migrate to and fuse with
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
the cell membrane, expelling their contents into
the intercellular space. The ejected lipid material
is then organised into sheets at the junction with
the stratum corneum. This forms a hydrophobic
barrier (an almost watertight seal) along the junc-
tion of the two layers. In eczematous plaques,
this process of extrusion is often reduced, leading
to increased water loss through the epidermis
and resultant fissuring (Cork 1997).
Horny layer (stratum corneum). As the cell
becomes cornified it loses a percentage of its
water content and has a very flattened appear-
ance with around 15-20 layers of keratinocytes.
The remaining intracellular water accumulates,
acting as a plasticiser with intracellular keratin,
and causes the cell to swell. This improves the
barrier seal to the epidermis and prevents
fissuring of the skin under normal tensile forces
(Cork 1997). Cells at this level begin a little
understood pre-programmed cell death with
most of the intracellular material undergoing
breakdown, leaving just the keratin and protein
matrix within these now cornified cells.
Remnants of organelles and melanin pigment
may be present within the stratum corneum.
Normally, cells in this layer have lost their
nucleus, but it may remain in incompletely kera-
tinised cells (parakeratosis). The deeper cells in
this layer are densely packed and so this area is
often referred to as the stratum compactum (orig-
inally called the stratum lucidum).
As cells ascend the stratum they continue to
change. Modifications to the lipid membranes of
the keratinocytes reduce adhesion, and so cells
become less densely packed. There is also degra-
dation of desmosomes, which further weakens
cellular adhesions until the cells ascend to a level
where desquamination is likely - the stratum
dysjunctum.
The skin as a barrier
The whole process of cell generation, maturation
and degradation strives to create an effective
barrier from water loss and from invading organ-
isms, allergens or irritants. Many mechanisms
are in place to help fulfil this function. However,
the main threats to this barrier include trauma
217
(scratching, etc.), desiccation and hydration
(Forslind 1994). Drying of the epidermis, central
to many skin diseases, causes keratinocytes to
shrivel and lose apposition, leading to fissuring,
while excessive hydration strips the lipid barrier
from the epidermis.
Control of the keratinisation process
The epidermis can be considered an active
organ, constantly generating keratinocytes in the
basal layer which, in a period of 28-70 days,
ascend through the superior layers, and undergo
a cycle of maturation, keratinisation and desqua-
mation. Regulation of this process is complex,
but local factors within the epidermis, dermis
and other tissues can modulate the rate of prolif-
eration (i.e. inflammatory mediators in the
dermis, tissue growth factors, fibroblasts,
vitamin A derivatives, etc.). Disease processes
may also disturb the normal equilibrium.
Psoriasis often accelerates epidermal transit time
to as little as 5 days, whereas skin carcinomas
may trigger an uncontrolled proliferation of cell
growth within the epidermis.
Derma-epidermal junction (DEJ)
The point at which the dermis meets the epider-
mis is known as the dermo-epidermal junction.
This is a basement membrane divided into a
number of layers, crossed by a complex of
filaments, keratins and proteins that form an
anchoring surface between the dermis and epi-
dermis. In areas of greater mechanical stress, to
enhance adhesion the dermis makes regular
finger-like folds into the overlying epidermis,
known as dermal papillae. These are comple-
mented by protrusions from the epidermis into
the dermis, known as rete pegs or epidermal
ridges. This undulation serves to increase the
surface area of attachment and is a major feature
of the plantar surface of the foot, where mechan-
ical stresses can be high. Pathologically, the DEJ
is the site of many pathologies and this can lead
to loss of adhesion and the development of blis-
tering diseases (i.e. epidermolysis bullosa, der-
matitis herpetiformis).
 218 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Dermis
Below the dermo-epidermal junction lies the
dermis. This consists essentially of dense fibro-
elastic connective tissues in a gel-like base
(ground substance) which contains glycosamino-
glycans. Collagen strands provide tensile
strength, with elasticity afforded by interwoven
elastic fibres that make this a pliable tissue.
Accommodated within the dermis are the skin
appendages, macrophages, fibroblasts and the
neurovascular network.
The thin, upper layer or papillary dermis con-
tains most of the blood and lymphatic vessels,
whereas the less vascular, deep reticular layer, is
much more dense with collagen and elastic
fibres. Cells of the immune system are present in
the dermis, i.e. T lymphocytes and mast cells.
Subcutaneous layer
The dermis is separated from the fascia by the
subcutaneous (fat) layer. This is a layer of fat cells
rich in nerves, blood vessels and lymphatics. Its
main function is to provide thermal insulation
and physical protection. To this end, it is well
developed across the plantar surface, particularly
across the metatarsal heads and heels where it
may be up to 18 mm thick. Attached to the under-
lying fascia, plantar fat is divided into vertical
chambers by dividing fibrous septae, which act
as an effective shock absorption system.
Blood supply and lymphatics
The main blood supply to the skin arises from a
network (or plexus) of vessels located in the sub-
cutaneous layer. At this lowest level, branches
supply eccrine sweat glands located deep in the
reticular dermis. Vessels ascend and fan out to
form a second plexus in the mid-dermis.
Arterioles from this level supply hair follicles
and their associated structures. Other vessels
ascend further to form a third plexus in the pap-
illary dermis.
From the papillary plexus, single capillaries
loop upward into the dermal papillae. These tiny
vessels loop and descend to drain into venules
within the papillary plexus and then descend
further into the deeper dermis, eventually recon-
necting with the subcutaneous blood vessels.
Within the foot, the sole contains the most
densely organised network of capillaries in the
skin (Pasyk et al 1989), which correlates well to
the thickness of the overlying epidermis. It has
no thermoregulatory role.
Lymph vessels are found throughout the
dermis. Within the papillary dermis, highly dis-
tensible lymphatic end bulbs drain intercellular
fluids and smaller particles. These empty into
larger vessels, which descend to the lymphatics
in the subcutaneous layer. Ryan (1995) suggests
that their function is key to maintaining turgid-
ity, which is vital to retain mechanical resilience
in the skin, requiring a fine balance between
supply and drainage, as dehydration and
oedema can lead to a reduction in skin stiffness
and deformation in the structure of collagen and
elastic fibres.
Skin appendages
Hair follicles and sebaceous glands. Hair folli-
cles and their associated sebaceous glands are
found on the lower limb, sparing the plantar
surface. Compared with sebaceous glands in
other areas of the skin (i.e. face, chest), these
glands are relatively inactive.
Sweat glands. Sweat glands exist in two forms.
The larger apocrine glands are exclusively asso-
ciated with the hair follicle in the groin and
axillae, whereas the smaller eccrine gland is a
simple coiled structure located in the reticular
dermis with an opening directly onto the epider-
mis. Stimulated primarily by the sympathetic
branch of the autonomic system, sweat glands
are an important mechanism for thermoregula-
tion, mainly above waist level (Ryan 1995). They
are most numerous on the palms and soles.
Under normal circumstances a small, steady flow
of sweat is produced, which is thought to aid
grip. This function is further enhanced on the
palms and soles by the presence of dermato-
glyphics. These skin creases, present at birth, are
a result of the unique arrangement of collagen
fibres in the dermis and are more prominent on
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
the weightbearing surfaces of the foot (pulp of
the toes, heel and metatarsal area) and palmar
area (fingerprints). Not only do they act like the
tread on a tyre in conjunction with the small
amounts of sweat, but within these areas, there is
a dense and highly organised neural network in
the underlying dermis (Montagna 1960) which
provides a rich tactile perception necessary to
protect the integrity of the foot.
HISTORY AND EXAMINATION OF
THE SKIN
Dermatological assessment consists of three
parts:
• history taking
• clinical examination
• common investigations and tests.
It is often tempting when assessing the skin to
leap straight to examination without resorting to
the standard medical practice of history taking
followed by examination. While this may give a
correct diagnosis in experienced hands, often, to
those new to dermatology, this will lead to an
incorrect or incomplete conclusion. However, a
brief initial examination may help to direct ques-
tioning for the history.
History taking
Ideally, conduct the consultation in a private
environment, with sufficient time to allow the
patient to talk freely. You should expect to spend
most of the consultation listening, only using
questions to direct the history. It is important to
ask patients what they think is the cause of the
problem, as they are often correct. Starting the
consultation by asking: 'How may I help you?' or
'Tell me about your problem' is beneficial. It lets
patients know that they may talk and that there
is willingness to listen, thus setting them at ease.
However, certain facts are necessary to make a
diagnosis and, if these are not offered, they
should be asked for directly.
Duration of the problem. The duration of a
disease is essential to know. Whether the disease
219
is constant, deteriorating or fluctuating or
whether there are periods of relapse and remis-
sion is useful. Acute or self-limiting conditions
are usually inflammatory or infective (i.e. fungal
infections), whereas chronic or progressive
symptoms may be an indication of a more
serious disease. Stressful events may give a
remitting and relapsing pattern, particularly
with psoriasis, eczema and lichen planus.
Relieving or exacerbating factors. Does any-
thing help the problem or make it worse? Many
conditions are improved in sunlight, e.g. psoria-
sis, whereas others are made worse, e.g. lupus
erythematosus.
Relationships to physical agents. Does light,
heat or cold playa part in the problem? Is it asso-
ciated with any particular activity? Has injury
played a part in the problem? Has there been
exposure to chemical or plant material?
Treatment. This is one of the most essential
questions. Alongside their usual medications,
often patients will have tried to treat the
problem themselves and will have bought over-
the-counter medications, preparations from
health stores or perhaps borrowed a prescribed
medication from a friend or family member.
They may also have tried cosmetic preparations
that they do not consider relevant. It is often
helpful to ask them to bring in everything they
put on the skin. In some instances the true
appearance of the skin lesion may be altered or
masked by previously applied medicaments. For
example, a steroid cream applied to a fungal
infection will dramatically increase the spread of
the eruption.
Past medical history. It is important to elicit any
history of skin diseases, in particular psoriasis,
eczema and skin cancer; all these conditions are
pertinent to the lower leg and foot. Other salient
conditions include information regarding a
history of allergy, through either occupation or
domestic exposure (e.g. epoxy resins from work
or Elastoplast at home). Internal medical condi-
tions may also be relevant, as many may mani-
fest themselves in the skin. For example,
dermatitis herpetiformis is a blistering disorder
that is commonly associated with coeliac disease,
a gluten intolerance affecting the gut.
 220 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Occupation. Many occupations expose the skin
to irritants and allergens. The patient may need
to wear a particular garment or item of footwear
as part of his job and that is causing the problem.
It may be that other members of the workforce
are similarly affected. Outdoor workers or
workers who are exposed to wet or cold will also
have problems particular to them: for instance,
skin cancer is higher in those with outdoor occu-
pations.
Social history. It is useful to know who is at
home with the patient as they may be able to
help with the treatment. Enquiries about
smoking should be made when considering cir-
culatory problems, and alcohol consumption is
relevant to a number of skin conditions, partic-
ularly psoriasis.
Family history. A number of skin conditions
run in families, e.g. palmoplantar keratoderma.
Recessively inherited diseases may skip genera-
tions, so information is required about distant
relations too.
Recognising the norm in the assessment of skin is
essential. Normal variations are seen due to race
and the normal ageing process. Any given popu-
lation will include a significant range of skin
colours. Lesions that appear red or brown on
white skin, for example, often appear black or
purple on pigmented skin and mild redness may
be masked completely. In addition, some condi-
tions have a distinct racial predisposition (e.g.
melanoma in Caucasians). However, across all
races, normal skin will not be different from sur-
rounding skin and will feel smooth.
As the skin ages, it appears more translucent
with irregular pigmentation. Thinning of the skin
occurs at all levels, including the subcutaneous
layer, which may be evident on the plantar area
of the foot. Natural turgidity and elasticity seen
in younger individuals is lost. Pinching of the
skin results in 'tenting', as the skin fails to return
to its natural shape. As a result of decreased
sweat and sebum production, the normal skin
surface barrier is compromised and so is more
prone to the effects of drying and irritation. A
reduced immune response as the numbers of T
and B lymphocytes, along with Langerhans'
cells, decrease potentially leave the skin more
open to infection and malignant change. Also,
any inflammation that occurs as a result of
decreased immune surveillance tends to be
dampened down; hence, signs of inflammation
may seem less acute. With ageing, the nails may
reduce their rate of growth and often become
thicker and slightly yellow in colour.
Clinical examination
Clinical examination of the skin uses a variety of
senses. Sight is obviously the most important,
but touch and smell are also valuable. Many
trainees unused to dermatological assessment
will shy away from touching the skin. This is
clearly a natural reaction, but must be overcome
in order to assess the area fully. Observation is an
important stage in examination and it is impor-
tant to follow a particular pattern:
• general distribution (localised, widespread or
regional)
• individual lesion morphology
• assessment of other structures
• assessment of the nail
• assessment of the sweat glands.
General distribution
When a widespread eruption is suspected, it is
important to look and ask about all of the skin.
Patients may often be reluctant to discuss other
areas or simply not connect them to the current
condition. For example, scalp psoriasis can
mimic dandruff. A patient concerned with scaly
plaques on his knees may not connect the two,
particularly if the dandruff has been present for
some time. Many disorders have a typical pattern
or predilection for specific sites, although it
should be remembered that patterns could occa-
sionally vary from the norm. Eczema has a
common pattern - affecting the flexor surfaces of
the arms and legs along with the face. Symmetry
of the eruption should also be recorded as this
usually denotes an endogenous condition. Table
9.2 highlights examples of the distribution pat-
terns of various dermatoses.
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 221
------_._---_._----------

Table 9.2 Common patterns of skin disorders • Koebner's phenomenon, i.e. warts, psoriasis
Condition Typical distribution pattern
(Plate 10), lichen planus, molluscum
contagiosum.
Atopic eczema Antecubital and popliteal fossa,
face, neck, hands Note that some disorders may have a number of
Contact dermatitis Hands, face, feet configurations. Koebner's phenomenon is where
Psoriasis Extensor surfaces of knees and skin lesions of a specific disease may appear at a
elbows, scalp, back, nails site of trauma which was previously unaffected.
Lichen planus Flexor surfaces of wrist, ankles, The edge of the lesion should also be inspected. Is
oral cavity, genitalia it discrete or ill-defined? For example, psoriasis
Erythema nodosum Anterior surfaces of shins and fungal infections have much more marked,
well-defined edges than eczema. Surface contour
should also be noted (Fig. 9.3).
Individual lesion morphology Colour. To interpret the skin colour of lesions,
good lighting is essential, as temperature and
Individual lesions should be assessed. A magni-
dependency will modify appearances. Rashes or
fying glass is useful along with good lighting.
lesions that are pink, purple or red will be due to
Initially it is important, if there is more than one
blood. If the blood is within vessels gentle pres-
lesion, to describe the arrangement (Fig. 9.2).
sure will whiten or blanch the lesions - this is
This can include:
erythema, and can be viewed best through a
• annular (ring-like), i.e. psoriasis, lichen glass slide or tumbler. If it is not possible to
planus, granuloma annulare blanch the lesion, this may be due to extravasa-
• nummular (round, coin-like), i.e. nummular tion (loss of blood constituents into the skin) or
eczema pigmentation due to melanin.
• discoid (disc-like), i.e. eczema, psoriasis Touch. It is possible to determine surface
• reticulate (net-like), i.e. livedo reticularis changes in texture and whether the skin disease
• arcuate (curved), i.e. contact dermatitis relates only to the surface of the skin or whether
• grouped, i.e. insect bites, dermatitis it relates to the structures beneath. Light touch is
herpetiformis required to perceive superficial changes (i.e.
texture of a surface lesion), whereas progressively

o Annular
Flat-topped

Nummular ~ Pedunculated

o 0 0 0 0 0 0 Linear ~ Dome-shaped

Grouped
~ Umbilicated

°A~
oW· Satellite
o 0 • Verrucous

... e
o
Arcuate Spire (acuminate)

Figure 9.2 The various configurations of lesion patterns. Figure 9.3 The different surface contours of lesions.
 222 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
deeper pressure will reflect changes to the lower
structures in the dermis and subcutaneous layers.
Oedema (collection of fluid within the tissue)
feels flocculent under the fingers. Typical surface
changes include a soft moist texture due to exces-
sive sweating or a dry and roughened texture due
to a lack of sweating, i.e. anhidrosis. Deeper
lesions may be described as hard, nodular,
mobile, soft, etc.
Odour. Skin odour is a neglected aspect of skin
examination but is useful. Colonisations of
pseudomonas, staphylococcus, or diphtheroids
have distinctive smells (microbiology may help to
confirm this) as do odours associated with exces-
sive sweating (bromhidrosis) and incontinence.
When examining individual lesions, clear
descriptions using well-recognised terms are
essential. This allows good communication
between health professionals. In dermatology,
there are many descriptive terms: some obvious,
others less so. Familiarity with this terminology
will ensure good inter-professional communica-
tion. Skin lesions can be classified as to whether
they are primary or secondary. Primary lesions
arise due to the initial effects of a condition; sec-
ondary lesions evolve from or as a complication
of primary lesions. The distinction between
primary and secondary is not always clear; some
lesions can be classed as primary or secondary
(Tables 9.3 and 9.4). Some of the more common
terms used in assessing the surface of the skin are
described below.
Scaly. Normally the skin sheds skin cells indi-
vidually or in small clumps. This is imperceptible
to the eye. If the skin is weathered or diseased,
skin shedding becomes abnormal, the clumps of
skin become larger and appear as flakes or scales.
These scales may be small, as in the dryness
(xerosis) of atopic eczema, or large, as in
ichthyosis. Scratching the surface of skin is
helpful as it accentuates scaling and may help
with diagnosis. Psoriasis will demonstrate pin-
point bleeding when scratched and the scaling
will become more pronounced (Auspitz sign).
Crusting and exudation. When the skin is
injured or infected, it bleeds, oozes serum or dis-
charges pus. This is an exudate; it dries to form a
crust, which is distinguished from scale by clini-
Table 9.3 List of primary skin lesions
Term Description and example
Erythema Redness, often due to inflammatory
response
Macule Flat, differently coloured, e.g. freckles,
vitiligo
Papule Palpable, solid bump in skin, e.g.
lichen planus
Nodule Palpable, deeper mass than a papule,
e.g. ganglion, rheumatoid nodule
Plaque Elevated, disc-shaped area of skin
over 1 cm in diameter, e.g. psoriasis
Tumour Large mass over 2 cm in diameter,
e.g. lipoma
Cyst Subdermal, fluid-filled fibrous swelling,
loosely attached to deeper structures,
e.g. dermal cyst
Weal Large oedematous bump, e.g. insect bite
Vesicle Tiny, pinprick-sized collection of fluid,
e.g. mycosis, pompholyx
Bulla Serous fluid/blood-filled intraepidermal or
dermoepidermal sac, e.g. bullous
pemphigoid
Pustule Vesicle or bulla filled with pus, e.g. acne,
pustular psoriasis
Burrow Short, linear mark in skin visible with
magnifying lens, e.g. scabies
Ecchymosis Large extravasation of blood into the
tissues, i.e. bruising
Petechia Pinhead-sized macule caused by blood
seeping into skin
Telangiectasiae Permanently dilated small cutaneous
blood vessels
cal appearance and history. While avoiding
hurting the patient, try to remove the crust as this
often obscures the true pathology. Crusting is a
common feature in eczema.
Hyperkeratosis and lichenification. If keratin is
abnormal, it forms thickened areas as shedding
fails. These can be localised, appearing as horns
on the skin and usually reflect a viral or neoplas-
tic process. Sometimes the surface can be papillo-
matous (warty). The areas of thickening can be
more diffuse, e.g. chronic plantar eczema or
corns. Such areas are less flexible and will often
crack, forming deep fissures. Lichenification is a
reaction of the skin to chronic rubbing or scratch-
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 223
--------_._----------------------_._-

Table 9.4 List of secondary skin lesions Macules and patches. These are localised
Term Description and example
impalpable areas of colour change: macules are
less than 1em in diameter and patches are greater
Scale Flake of skin, e.g. mycosis, psoriasis than 1 cm.
Crust Scab, dried serous exudates, e.g. acute Papules, plaques and nodules. A papule is any
eczema lesion less than 1 em in diameter that rises above
Excoriation Scratch marks, e.g. pruritus the surface of the skin. A nodule is larger than
Fissure Crack in dry or moist skin 1 em in diameter, but otherwise similar to a
Necrosis Non-viable tissue papule, and usually due to pathology within the
Ulcer Loss of epidermis; may extend through dermis. A plaque is a raised lesion that is wider
the dermis to deeper tissue, e.q. than it is thick and often represents epidermal
venous ulcer pathology.
Scar Fibrous tissue production post-healing Vesicles, bullae, pustules and abscesses. Small
Keloid Excessive production of fibrous tissue blisters less than 1 cm are called vesicles. Blisters
post-healing larger than 1em are called bullae. Pus-filled vesi-
Striae Lines in skin that do not have normal cles or bullae are pustules, large pustules are
skin tone, e.g. striae tensae in
pregnancy, Cushing's disease
abscesses.
Weal. These are transient papular or plaque-
Purpura Purplish lesions which do not blanche
under pressure, e.g. vitamin C like swellings of the skin due to dermal oedema
deficiency and frequently seen in urticaria.
Urticaria 'Nettle rash', e.g. drug eruption, allergy, Scars. These can be macules, papules or
heat plaques and are a feature of repair following
Lichenification Patchy 'toughening' of skin, e.g. chronic dermal injury. A glossary of terms can be found
eczema in Tables 9.3 and 9.4.
Haematoma Blood-filled blister
Sinus Channel that allows the escape of
pus or fluid from tissues Assessment of other structures
When examining the skin, other structures such
as the nails, hair and mucous membranes may
ing and involves the whole epidermis. The add clues to the diagnosis. For example, lichen
affected area of skin thickens and the skin mark- planus commonly causes lesions in the mouth;
ings become more pronounced. It is a common this may be an important finding in differentially
feature of atopic eczema and usually occurs on diagnosing it from other conditions such as
the flexures. eczema and psoriasis. Palpation of the lymph
Excoriations, erosions and ulcers. Excoriation nodes is important in patients with suspected
means scratch and is usually a feature of itching skin malignancy.
or, less commonly, pain. It may represent under-
lying skin pathology such as scabies or eczema or
Assessment of the nail
indicate disease elsewhere, e.g. renal or hepatic
failure. Erosions are partial-thickness breaks in Inspection of the nails should be included as part
the surface of the skin caused by physical injury of the main dermatological assessment. The nail
including excoriation or where blisters have has evolved as a rigid structure to improve dex-
broken. An ulcer is an area of full-thickness skin terity but in the foot the nail is purely a protective
loss, usually covered by exudate or crust. plate overlying the deeper structures and acting
Atrophic. The surface of the skin is depressed as a counter pressure to the volar tissues (Baran
and blood vessels are visible beneath. It may be et al 1996). The nail unit (Fig. 9.4) is well pro-
due to atrophy of the epidermis or dermis. The vided with a rich neurovascular supply and, as a
skin is often pale and wrinkled. result, is sensitive to internal changes, often man-
 224 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Dorsal nail matrix

Dorsal nail piate ---t:-:::-::::=::-:::-=-=-:::-:::-::-:=- Dermo-epidermal

Intermediate nail plate junction
Ventral nail plate --~"""",
Hyponychium - - - j

Vertical collagen
fibres in dermis

PHALANX
Intermediate nail
matrix
Limit of lunule

Nail bed matrix

Figure 9.4 Structure and anatomy of the nail.

ifesting these subtle changes in the nail structure. Table 9.5 Glossary of nail conditions
External factors too, such as trauma, can modify Condition Definition
nail shape. Therefore, a proper footwear assess-
ment should be undertaken, to complete the clin- Onychauxis Thickening of the nail plate,
usually due to trauma
ical picture, when looking for reasons for
Onychogryphosis Thickened nail with a distortion
changes in nail shape, colour, etc. A glossary of in the direction of growth
the main terms used to describe nail changes can Onycholysis Separation of the nail from the
be found in Table 9.5. nail bed, distal to proximal
Key aspects of examination should include Onychomadesis Separation of the nail from the
assessment of the following factors. nail bed, proximal to distal
Pattern of affected nails. It is important to Onychocryptosis Ingrowing toe nail
always assess finger nails as well as toe nails and Involution An inward curvature of the
note any findings. Often finger nails may show lateral or medial edges of the
nail plate, towards the nail bed
changes more readily (i.e. clubbing). Where only
one or two nails are affected, or one foot, local Splinter haemorrhage Longitudinal, plum-coloured linear
haemorrhages (around 2 mm in
causes should be suspected, whereas nail length) under the nail plate
changes in all digits in both feet and hands sug- Paronychia Inflammation of the tissues
gests a systemic or internal cause. On the foot, surrounding the nails
the length or the position of the toes may give Onychomycosis Fungal infection of the nail plate
clues to local nail abnormalities. Typically, the Chromonychia Abnormal coloration of the nail
longest toe may show nail changes as a result of tissue
interaction with footwear. Koilonychia Transverse and longitudinal
Rate of nail growth. There is great variation concave nail dystrophy which
gives a spoon-shaped
between individuals in the rate of nail growth. appearance
The average rate for a finger nail is 0.1 mm/ day Clubbing Increased longitudinal curvature
(or 3 mm/month), whereas toe nails grow at a of the nail plate with enlargement
half to a third of this rate (Zaias 1980). of the pulp of the digit
Consequently, a normal finger nail will grow Beau's lines Transverse ridging of the nail
completely in about 6 months, whereas a toe nail plate seen as the result of a
temporary cessation of nail growth
will take 12-18 months. Such information is
 ASSESSMENT OFTHE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 225

useful to determine the approximate time of Table 9.6 Causes of nail spooning and clubbing
events: e.g. the time of trauma to a nail, the likely Koilonychia (spooning) Clubbing
clearance time of a haematoma. Most systemic
Idiopathic Idiopathic
disorders lead to a decline in the rate of nail
growth but a few may have the opposite effect Hereditary Hereditary
(psoriasis, hyperthyroidism, nail trauma and Iron deficiency anaemias Lung disease:
drugs). bronchiectasis
Insulin-dependent diabetes lung cancers
Shape of the nail plate. The breadth of the nail
abscess
matrix and length of the nail bed normally Physiologically thin nails lung infections
dictate the shape of the nail plate (finger nails (i.e. children) fibrotic lung disease
being rectangular and toe nails, quadrangular). Psoriasis emphysema
asthma in childhood
The contour of the underlying phalanx, and toe Alopecia
position, may modify this. The most commonly Cardiovascular disease:
occurring nail shape alteration in the toe nail is Lichen planus congestive heart failure
subacute bacterial
transverse over-curvature or involution (pincer Raynaud's disease endocarditis
nail). This is typically seen in the nail plate of myxoid tumours
Scleroderma/systemic congenital heart disease
the hallux and is often accompanied by pain sclerosis
when direct pressure is applied to the nail. If Alimentary disease:
Renal transplant ulcerative colitis
there is an underlying subungual exostosis
Thyroid disease Crohn's disease
(Plate 11), lifting of the distal nail plate occurs, gut cancers
often accompanied by pain. Frequently seen in Acromegaly
Endocrine:
young adults, a lateral X-ray will differentiate active hepatitis
Occupational (immersion
between this and other causes of painful nails in oils, acid and alkali) auto-immune thyroiditis
(e.g. onychocryptosis). Internal causes of nail acromegaly
shape alterations include koilonychia (spoon- Other:
ing) and clubbing: their causes are listed in polycythaemia
Table 9.6. cirrhosis
malnutrition
Colour of the nail plate and bed. Changes in nail
colour (chromonychia) may arise as a result of
external or internal factors. Finger nails, in par-
ticular, are vulnerable to occupational causes Surface texture. The surface of the nail is nor-
such as chemical agents. Colour change can mally smooth but changes may occur. Subtle
occur on the surface of the nail, within the nail longitudinal lines may arise with age or as a
plate itself or below in the underlying nail bed or result of minor trauma, although specific diseases
lunula. The use of a powerful pen torch or laser may accentuate their appearance (rheumatoid
pointer shone in the pulp of the digit, through arthritis, peripheral vascular disease and lichen
the nail plate, can help to isolate the source. Table planus). Solitary lines or ridges may signify a
9.7 lists the more common causes of chromony- tumour within the matrix or be the result of a pre-
chiao Splinter haemorrhages are plum-coloured vious paronychial infection. Transverse lines are
streaks of about 3-4 mm seen running longitudi- common in the hallux as a result of repeated
nally under the nail plate. These are the result of minor trauma from footwear. When transverse
extravasation of blood between the nail bed and lines affect the majority of nails simultaneously
plate. Typically they are caused by trauma, they are known as Beau's lines and may repre-
though, if the majority of nails are affected, dis- sent a sudden period of illness. By noting their
orders such as rheumatoid disease, vasculitis or distance from the cuticle, a rough calculation can
skin diseases (psoriasis and eczema) should be be made as to the time of the illness. Pits are
suspected. small erosions in the nail found on the surface of
 226 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Table 9.7 Causes of nail discoloration (chromonychia) Onychomadesis is the less common of the two
Discoloration Cause
conditions. Proximal detachment occurs most
frequently due to acute bacterial infection of
Nail bed the proximal nail fold or an acute skin eruption
Brown Idiopathic, subungual wart affecting the nail bed such as a blister or psoriatic
White Anaemia, cirrhosis, renal disease plaque.
Green Pseudomonas infection, blistering diseases Nail thickness. Thickening of the nail (ony-
Yellow Subungual corn, wart or exostosis, jaundice chauxis) is probably the most commonly
Brown/black Haematoma
observed toe nail condition. Long-term trauma to
Lunula the nail plate can lead to hypertrophy of the nail,
Red Congestive heart failure, alopecia often with a brown discoloration. Typically, the
Brown/black Haematoma, melanoma, melanonychia condition affects the hallux or longest toe as a
result of footwear interaction. Other conditions
Nail plate
such as fungal infections, psoriasis and lichen
White Onychomycosis, trauma, onycholysis planus may also lead to onychauxis. Onycho-
Yellow Nicotine or urine staining, yellow nail
syndrome, jaundice
gryphosis is a more severe thickening of the nail
Brown Mycotic infection, onychauxis, plate often with gross deformity and a deviation
onychogryphosis, shoes dyes, melanoma in the direction of nail growth. Pachyonychia
congenita is a rare inherited disorder hallmarked
by congenital thickening of the nail plate.
the nail plate. When only a few nails are affected Periungual changes. The periungual tissues
it is considered a variant of normal but multiple seal the nail unit from damage but may show
nail involvement is seen in a number of skin dis- disease themselves. These tissues may be
eases such as psoriasis, lichen planus, eczema breached by inappropriate nail care or prolonged
and alopecia. immersion, e.g. water, chemicals, etc., leading to
Loosening or shedding of the nails. Onycholysis infection or chemical irritation and thus parony-
is the detachment of the nail from the bed in a chia. Acute paronychia is more commonly asso-
distal to proximal fashion, whereas onychomade- ciated with infection, whereas the chronic variety
sis occurs in the opposite direction. The aetiology is often confined to the hands, most often as a
for both conditions is similar (Table 9.8) but it is result of irritant reactions. Other periungual con-
most frequent as the result of trauma, particularly ditions include tumours:
overzealous nail care or fungal infection. The loos-
ened area is usually white, although in some • Periungual warts - usually asymptomatic,
disorders the area may adopt a different colour. easily diagnosed by their appearance.
• Corns/callus - found within the nail sulci-
may lead to pain on compression of the nail
Table 9.8 Causes of nail shedding
plate. Nail edges may be thickened or
Level of separation Cause involuted.
• Subungual exostosis - diagnosed by X-ray,
Onycholysis Trauma (nail surgery, nail picking)
may lead to lifting of the nail plate.
Peripheral vascular disease
Psoriasis
• Fibromas - associated with tuberous sclerosis.
Rheumatoid arthritis • Malignant tumours - basal cell carcinoma,
Subungual tumours squamous cell carcinoma, subungual
Eczema melanoma.
• Glomus tumours - causes of extreme pain
Onychomadesis Nail matrix infection or inflammation
when exposed to slight trauma or changes in
Subungual blistering
temperature, often visible by digital illumi-
Drugs
nation. Rarely are they found in the toe.
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 227

Assessment of the sweat glands Table 9.9 Causes of sweating disorders

Eccrine sweat glands are particularly numerous Cause Examples

across the palms and soles. Normally these sweat Anhidrosis
glands play no part in thermoregulation; their Ageing: Sweat production decreases
activity is increased during mental stress and with age
anxiety. When assessing sweat gland function, Damage to neurological Autonomic neuropathy
excessive local sweating usually has a local pathways Diabetes mellitus
cause, whereas generalised sweating may have a Leprosy
CNS disorders
more systemic cause. The two most common dis-
Displacement of sweat ducts
orders are:
Dermatological lesions Eczematous or psoriatic
plaques
• anhidrosis - a lack of sweating Lichen planus
• hyperhidrosis - excessive sweat production. Miliaria
Lack or loss of sweat glands
The causes of each of these conditions are sum- Damage Iscarring to areas
marised in Table 9.9. When assessing sweating of skin
Congenital lack of sweat
disorders it is pertinent to look for associated glands (ectodermal
symptoms, e.g. concurrent tachycardia in the dysplasia)
absence of a fever may suggest thyrotoxicosis. Hyperhidrosis
An elevated temperature and lymphadenopathy Physiological Normal in young adults
may indicate infection. Exercise
Over-clothing or occlusive
Hyperhidrosis. When symmetrical, this condi- footwear
tion is most commonly associated with young Emotions or stress
active individuals: it is usually physiological Endocrine disorders Hypoglycaemia
rather than pathological, with resolution occur- Hyperthyroidism
Acromegaly
ring in the third decade. Sweat production may
increase to such an extent that the skin becomes Dermatological Associated with
palmoplantar keratoderma
overhydrated and macerated, particularly if
Other Drugs
footwear /hosiery is occlusive. Moist fissures CNS disorders
may develop, mostly interdigitally, along with Cardiovascular disorders
blistering of the soles. At this stage secondary Respiratory failure
Tumours
bacterial or fungal infection can occur, generat-
ing an unpleasant odour and even a brown dis-
coloration to the skin (bromhidrosis).
Anhidrosis. Anhidrosis should be considered
Fungal assessment and other microbiology
as a condition normally associated with ageing. Fungal diseases enjoy the conditions of the foot
In severe cases cracking and fissuring of the epi- and are a major contributor to both primary and
dermis may occur, particularly around the heel. secondary disease. It is essential to have a high
Deep fissuring may develop into the dermis with index of suspicion in any disease of the foot, par-
subsequent recurrent bleeding, a common ticularly those that are scaly or blistering. Wood's
feature with eczema. light and mycology are the two main methods of
assessment in fungal disease.
Wood's light. This is filtered ultraviolet light,
Common tests and investigations excluding the visible spectrum. Fungus within
the skin will fluoresce under Wood's light,
• fungal assessment and other microbiology thus revealing subclinical infection and helping
• histological assessment with diagnosis, but the fluorescence is not
• patch testing. bright, so good blackout facilities are essential.
 228 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Microsporum species are the main types
detectable by this method (fluorescing green),
but other pathogens also fluoresce, notably ery-
thrasma (caused by Propionibacterium minutissi-
mum and fluorescing coral pink).
Mycology. Fungal disease usually affects the
most superficial aspects of the skin and so is easy
to remove for assessment by scraping. A 15 blade
is ideal to do this. After carefully scraping across
the skin, the scale is collected either on a glass
slide or onto a small piece of black paper. Where
possible, if blisters are present, the whole roof
should be removed. The undersurface of the
blister is then scraped to remove the fungal
debris onto a glass slide; the remaining skin is
sent for culture. With nails, a clipping from the
most proximal part of the affected nail is useful,
along with any subungual debris. Potassium
hydroxide (20%) when applied to the sample on
the glass slide will render the sample transparent
after 20 minutes or so, thus revealing the under-
lying fungal elements. The scrapings are then
sent for expert examination and culture, after
placing the sample onto folded black card. More
than sufficient scrapings should be sent when-
ever possible to ensure a representative result.
Bacterial and viral culture. Infection with bacte-
ria should be considered wherever inflammation
or pus is present. A swab is taken by rubbing it
onto the affected area; if the lesion is a blister or
pustule, the surface should be broken first with a
sterile needle. The swab is moistened with some
of the culture medium when assessing dry
lesions. Biopsy tissue can also be cultured. It is
important that this does not dry out, so it is sent
either in sterile water or within the culture
medium of a swab. Viral specimens need a viral
transport medium. Contact the microbiology lab
before taking the sample, as some labs will take
the specimens themselves.
Histological assessment
Clinical examination of the skin only allows a
view of the surface morphology, whereas
histopathology is an easy and valuable adjunct
whenever diagnosis is in doubt. Under local
anaesthesia, small suspicious lesions are usually
excised in their entirety, whereas larger lesions
need to have a carefully placed sample taken that
includes both normal and abnormal skin. It is
good practice to refer suspicious pigmented
lesions for expert assessment rather than biopsy.
The three main biopsy techniques are punch,
shave and ellipse. Punch biopsies are a simple
method of obtaining tissue for histology which
does not require much technical skill. The punch
is similar to an apple core and comes in a range
of sizes from 2 mm to 7 mm diameter. The punch
will penetrate the skin to a maximum depth of 7
or 8 mm and so is useful for epidermal and
superficial dermal pathology. Shave biopsies are
a simple method of getting biopsy specimens,
effective for assessing superficial skin disease
using a razor or scalpel blade. Ellipse biopsy is
useful for the removal of small lesions and for
larger areas.
Patch testing
Allergic contact dermatitis is a common problem
on the lower leg, particularly associated with
footwear, medicated dressing and topical thera-
pies. Patch testing assesses this by applying pos-
sible allergens to aluminium discs, which are
placed onto the skin of the back and left in place
for 48 hours. The discs are removed and the skin
is assessed on the day and 2 days later. Positive
reactions appear as red raised areas within the
discs; sometimes the reactions can be very strong,
resulting in erosions and blisters.
Recording of the assessment
At the end of the skin assessment it is important
to ensure accurate recording of the history and
examination for a number of reasons:
• to ensure good record keeping
• to act as a baseline, in case of any changes in
the progression of a condition
• to facilitate good communication with other
medical professionals.
The use of colour photography and video
equipment may also add objective, recorded evi-
dence and allow the patient with poor mobility /
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES 229

eyesight to visualise and appreciate their skin Table 9.10 Causes of hyperkeratosis
problem.
Cause Clinical features

HYPERKERATOTIC DISORDERS Familial/inherited

Palmoplantar keratoderma Various types exist. Typically
Hyperkeratosis is the term used to describe a inherited forms begin in
thickening of the stratum corneum. In the foot, childhood
the most common causes are the mechanical Ichthyosis Many types. Characterised
forces of pressure, shear and friction acting on by dry, flaky skin affecting
the epidermis, leading to corns and callus forma- various parts of the body
tion. However, other causes include skin diseases Darier's disease Palmoplantar hyperkeratosis
may occur; usually
such as psoriasis, dermatitis or fungal infections lesions are punctate in form
and the less common palmoplantar keratoder-
Pachyonychia congenita A disease characterised by
mas (Table 9.10). Rarely, a sudden, acquired onset thickened nails. Associated
of symmetrical, plantar hyperkeratosis may indi- palmoplantar hyperkeratosis
cate an internal malignancy. may occur

Acquired
Assessment of corns and callus Palmoplantar keratoderma Normally arises in patients
from their twenties, in
Corns and callus are a discrete form of hyperker- patterns described above
atosis distinct from the secondary lesions seen Keratoderma climactericum Yellow/brown papules,
with other dermatological disorders. Callus which then coalesce to form
plaques (callosities) are hard, dense, yellowish thickened plaques across
the soles of menopausal
plaques of hyperkeratotic tissue usually found on women. Fissuring is
the plantar surface of the foot, whereas corns common
appear as darker, harder, invaginated areas of Reiter's disease Red hyperkeratotic rash
hyperkeratosis present either alone or within a may occur on the soles
called 'keratoderma
callus plaque. blennorrhagica'. Difficult to
Patients with calluses and/ or corns complain distinguish from pustular
of a number of symptoms, ranging from cosmetic psoriasis
irritation to severe pain affecting gait. Symptoms Chronic dermatitis Hyperkeratotic lesions may
include a stabbing pain when walking, which be observed accompanied
by fissuring and crusting
may persist when resting or subside into a dull,
soft tissue ache. Callus usually is reported as a Pustular psoriasis Yellow/brown sterile
pustules occur with a
stinging, burning sensation, which is worse just hyperkeratosis of the palms
after the start of rest and on resuming weight- and soles, typically in older
bearing. An illustrative description of callus patients
being like 'walking on stones' may be given. An Syphilis Distinctive copper pink
papules may occur on the
erythematous 'halo' may be evident around sole with hyperkeratosis
either lesion type.
Lymphoedema Dirty brown lesions may
Calluses and corns appear to form in response occur over oedematous
to over-prolonged and excess mechanical stresses areas of the foot and lower
(such as intermittent pressure, shear and friction) leg
from ground reaction forces on the foot and Hypothyroidism A mild hyperkeratosis may
footwear during gait. occur on the soles but
resolves with treatment
Corns and callus are always found on areas
Tinea pedis Hyperkeratosis may occur
exposed to mechanical stress and often in a as part of the eruption
pattern which relates to the biomechanics of foot
 230 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

function. The few surveys undertaken into the • diffuse callus beneath the third and fourth
incidence of callus and corn lesions on the foot metatarsal heads
are in general accordance as to their epidemio- • callus solely beneath the second, first and
logical features (Gillet 1973, Merriman et al1986, fifth metatarsal heads
Springett 1993, Whiting 1987). The commonest • dorsal corns on the fifth toes followed by the
sites and lesions include (Fig. 9.5): fourth, third and second
• interdigitallesions between the fourth/ fifth
toes followed by first/second and
101-2 third / fourth toes.
(2nd) 102-3
(4th) Sex incidence ratio is between 1 :2 and 1 :4 male
103-4 to female, with mode age of symptomatic onset
(3rd)
.... 104-5
between 40 and 70 years. The incidence decreases
·••·(1st) with reduced weightbearing and shoe wearing.
Oiffuse callus The site of the lesion, an indication of its
severity, size, texture (hard and glassy or soft),
Apices of duration and stimulators/ exacerbators, e.g. a
Site of seed toes particular activity and/or pair of shoes, should
corns be noted, along with colour differences and
lesion contours, bulk, depth and width.
Common site of It is assumed that the maceration which
seed corns appears as a milky yellow region under a callus
plaque or corn is due to excess trauma and, as a
Plantar aspect result, water is squeezed from the viable layers
of heel of the epidermis into the lower keratinised
layers of the stratum corneum. The features of
A Plantar aspect maceration and extravasation may be consid-
ered as clinical indicators of marked mechanical
2nd toe stress (Plate 12). Suitable management of these
3rd toe 2nd lesions is urgently required to prevent tissue
3rd breakdown and ulceration.
4th toe
2nd 0i'l:--- Subungual
5th toe corn
1st Types of corn
Seed corns. The aetiology of seed corns is not
clear. The empirically proposed association with
tension stress has neither been proved nor dis-
puted. These lesions appear similar in structure
and biochemically to other mechanically induced
hyperkeratoses. Unpublished work using high-
powered liquid chromatography (HPLC) shows
that they are not plugs of cholesterol as previ-
ously thought but, in common with other hyper-
keratoses, have a high cholesterol content
compared with normal plantar skin (O'Halloran
B Dorsum 1990). Seed corns tend to occur at the margins of
Figure 9.5 The common sites for corns and callus weightbearing areas of the plantar aspect of the
formation on the feet (Merriman et al 1987). foot either singly or as disperse clusters.
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
Hard corns. A hard corn (Plate 13) appears as a
darker patch within the epidermis, often with a
callus covering. Texturally it is hard, glassy and
dense when touched with a scalpel. When enucle-
ated, a classic corn nucleus appears as a cone,
although they may be any shape or multinucle-
ate. Under greater trauma the contents of the
papillary capillaries may be extruded into the
epidermis as a brown-black stain (extravasation).
A corn forming over a bursa may be associated
with the formation of a sinus into the bursal sac;
infection may result.
Vascular corns. When the skin is made translu-
cent by application of water, alcohol or oil, clini-
cal signs below the surface of the lesion become
apparent. Intrusions of vascularised dermal
tissue into the epidermis can be seen in vascular
corns and, if cut, this vascular tissue bleeds pro-
fusely. These lesions usually occur at sites of
excess mechanical stress, may have a relatively
long history and may be painful on direct pres-
sure. These features suggest that the lesion is a
vascular corn rather than a foreign body or wart.
Some practitioners make a distinction between
vascular and neurovascular corns; others con-
sider that they are one and the same.
Soft corns. Soft corns occur interdigitally and
appear as soft, soggy epidermal masses (macer-
ated tissue) which can easily blunt the scalpel
blade. Pain is a frequent complaint. The condi-
tion appears to be caused by poorly fitting
footwear, disease processes affecting the skele-
ton, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis, or biomechanical
anomaly, e.g. excess pronation where the toe
tissues are compressed and sheared in ill-fitting
footwear.
Fibrous corns. These arise from long-standing
corns and involve the presence of fibrous tissue
in the dermis below the corn. The affected tissues
have an altered biomechanical behaviour: they
appear more firmly attached to deeper structures
than normal. Shear stresses occur at the tissue
interface and, as this tissue is unable to dissipate
stress as efficiently as normal tissue, there may be
a perpetuation of what appears to be chronic irri-
tation of tissues, causing further fibrosis to
develop. The precise aetiology of these lesions is
not clear.
231
Other causes of hyperkeratosis. Palmoplantar
keratodermas (PPK) are a complex group of rela-
tively rare disorders which are difficult to clas-
sify. Historically, such conditions were named
purely on clinical and histological appearance,
which has led to a confusing array of nomencla-
ture (Ratnavel & Griffiths 1997).
The consistent feature within this group of dis-
eases is hyperkeratosis of the palms and soles.
Unlike normal callus, the amount is much
increased with a rapid return rate following
debridement. Typically, lesions bear no correla-
tion to any weightbearing patterns. Palmar
lesions may range from one or two minor patches
to complete involvement. The majority of these
diseases are hereditary but spontaneous cases
can arise. Clinically, PPK may be categorised into
one of four distinct patterns of disease:
• diffuse PPK - diffuse hyperkeratosis across
the palms and soles (usually sparing the arch)
(Plate 14)
• focal PPK - discrete patches of hyperkeratosis
with normal skin in between
• punctate PPK - numerous punctate corn-like
lesions spread across the palms and soles
• PPK with ectodermal dysplasia - PPK of any
variety, with accompanying features of
ectodermal abnormalities (e.g. hyperhidrosis,
neurological or dental malformations).
Many other skin diseases may lead to the
development of hyperkeratosis, which often
takes on a different texture from the mechanically
induced type. For example, in psoriasis the skin
may flake off with a scalpel and bleed due to mal-
formation of the epidermis (Au spitz sign). Callus
associated with ichthyosis tends to be thick and
tough and there will be evidence of the condition
on other body sites.
BLISTERING DISORDERS
The term blister is used to describe any fluid-
filled lesion which may occur as the principal
feature of some relatively rare dermatological
disease or as a feature of more commonly seen
disorders (Table 9.11). Blisters can develop at a
number of levels in the skin:
 232 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Table 9.11 Main causes of blistering on the lower limb
Disorders with blistering Disorders where blistering may
as the principal feature occur as a secondary feature
Epidermolysis bullosa Friction - most common
Bullous pemphigoid
variety seen on the feet due
to pressure and shearing forces
Pemphigus
Fungal and bacterial infections
Dermatitis herpetiformis (e.g. tinea and erysipelas)
(rare below the knee)
Diabetes - an uncommon
complication associated with
hyperglycaemia
Thermal injury (e.g. burns,
cryosurgery)
Eczema
Erythema multiforme
Severe sunburn/photosensitivity
• Superficial. These blisters occur in the
stratum corneum and are associated with
infections, e.g. tinea pedis. Superficial blisters
are more prone to rupture, leaving open
erosions which may be complicated by
secondary infection.
• Intraepidermal. These occur in the lower
layers of the epidermis, usually the stratum
spinosum, and are associated with, for
example, acute eczema and viral vesicles.
• Subepidermal. These occur at the
dermal-epidermal junction and are
associated with, for example, epidermolysis
bullosa.
Differential diagnosis requires a thorough
history and examination (including information
on concurrent illness, drug therapies and family
history) along with the general pattern and dis-
tribution of the disease.
Family history is a key feature in epidermoly-
sis bullosa (EB), an inherited group of disorders
where the skin reacts to minor trauma by blister-
ing; hence the feet are commonly involved. The
spectrum of the disease ranges from EB simplex
(minor blistering of the hands and feet with
minimal scarring and little nail involvement) to a
potentially lethal recessive dystrophic form (with
more widespread blisters and scarring). As the
disease is inherited, the onset is usually in child-
hood. Epidermolysis bullosa acquisita is an
acquired form, akin to EB simplex, which nor-
mally affects middle-aged patients with a similar
pattern.
Pemphigus is a relatively rare blistering disor-
der seen in middle age. Lesions tend to be
intraepidermal (which rupture easily) and have
an insidious onset often without a history of
trauma. Unlike EB, pemphigus rarely affects the
feet but oral lesions may be present. In both con-
ditions, Nikolsky's sign may be present - the
ability to raise a blister when firm finger pressure
is applied across the affected skin.
Bullous pemphigoid (Plate 15) is distinctive
in that it usually affects the over-sixties with
large tense subepidermal blisters emerging on
urticated skin, including the foot. Mucous mem-
brane involvement is not a common feature.
Typically seen on the extensor surfaces but
rarely below the knees is dermatitis herpeti-
formis. Blisters are typically small and grouped,
with the appearance of herpetic lesions. Pruritus
is a common early symptom. Unlike pemphigus,
oral lesions are not observed, but the majority of
sufferers have also coeliac disease of the jejunum.
INFLAMMATORY CONDITIONS OF
THE SKIN
Eczema
Eczema is a descriptive term encompassing a
wide variety of inflammatory diseases, many of
which are pertinent to the lower limb. Clinical
features vary greatly between each form of
eczema and so are presented separately.
Subtypes of eczema
Atopic dermatitis. This increasingly common
form of eczema presents at any age but is most
common in childhood. Itch is the main
symptom, with rash localised to the flexures.
The itching and subsequent scratching can be
severe. In some patients dryness and scaling is
the major feature. Patients often have other
allergic diseases such as hay fever or asthma.
The signs are all manifestations of scratching
and rubbing. First, the skin roughens and
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
reddens; with continued scratching the skin
becomes broken and later infected. The usual
pathogen is Staphylococcus aureus, which pro-
duces golden weeping and crusted skin. Later,
the skin thickens with accentuation of the
normal skin folds (lichenification), with fissures
developing where the skin is less flexible.
Asteatotic eczema. This is a common form of
eczema usually seen in the elderly, especially
those in institutional care. It results from low
humidity, poor rinsing of soaps or detergents or
over-vigorous washing. The usual symptom is
soreness and itching, most frequently on the
shins. The skin is scaly, pink and the surface
broken in a crazy paving pattern.
Discoid eczema. Discoid eczema is a very
localised form of eczema. It presents as multiple,
isolated, and coin-shaped lesions. Usually
patients will complain of itching and, because of
the shape of the lesions, assume they have a
fungal infection. On examination, the lesions are
red, scaly and superficially infected with golden
crusting. Patients generally have dry skin or a
previous history of eczema (Case history 9.2).
------------l
Case history 9.2
Emma was a 24-year-Old student nurse and was
referred for treatment of her ingrowing toe nail. She
mentioned that her main symptom was itching rather
than soreness. She had wondered whether it was a
fungal infection. She had bought some antifungal
cream and had been using it for 3 weeks. She was
concerned, as the toe appeared to be worsening and
her 'infection' was spreading. She was otherwise well,
apart from a childhood history of hay fever and
eczema. She was currently living in the hospital
nursing residence. On examination, the nail appeared
normal although the nail bed was inflamed in relation
to a 2 cm circular patch of redness and scaling. She
had a number of similar lesions on her lower legs and
some appeared infected. Her skin was generally dry.
Diagnosis: Diagnoses considered at that time
were ringworm (fungal infection), although the culture
and microscopy were negative; Bowen's disease,
although Emma was really too young for this and had
not had much sun exposure; and psoriasis, but she
did not have a family history or other signs of
psoriasis. Finally, a diagnosis of discoid eczema was
made. Emma used a weak steroid and moisturiser,
which cleared her symptoms quickly, and her skin
returned to normal.
233
Lichen simplex. In this condition, patients
usually complain of one or two itching patches. It
frequently occurs on the medial aspect of the
ankles and lateral calves. The itching may be
very severe and keep the patient awake at night.
The skin reacts to the scratching and rubbing by
becoming thickened and lichenified (see above).
Sometimes the lesions resemble plaques and
other times nodules. The lesions are usually pink
or brown and may be mistaken for lichen planus
or psoriasis (see below).
Stasis dermatitis (venous eczema, gravitational
eczema). This form of eczema affects the lower
legs. It usually occurs in patients with venous
disease (previous varicose veins or deep venous
thrombosis). Patients will complain of itching or
soreness and may have a history of previous
venous ulceration. The skin is red, scaly and
weeping, usually in association with an ulcer or
area of varicosity. The underlying skin may feel
firm and be discoloured blue brown with previ-
ous leakage of blood into the skin. Occasionally,
the rash can spread beyond the areas of venous
disease. One should always consider allergic
contact dermatitis, as this is a common secondary
feature.
Pompholyx. This is an acute eczema of the
palms and soles. It is usually associated with a
number of different forms of eczema elsewhere.
As the plantar skin is so thick, instead of the skin
weeping when it is inflamed, it forms small blis-
ters under the skin instead. These can occasion-
ally be mistaken for eczema elsewhere.
Psoriasis
This is a very common group of diseases. In its
most usual form, it consists of well-defined, red
plaques with loosely adherent silvery scale
localised to the extensor surfaces. Two percent of
the population is affected and may present at any
age but the second and third decades are the
commonest. Scaly areas develop over weeks or
months in the scalp, around the sacrum and
umbilicus. The flexures and genitals may be
affected. The nails have characteristic changes
that are a useful aid to diagnosis: they develop
pitting and ridging. The nail may come away
 234 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
from the nail bed (onycholysis) and the under-
surface of the nail can develop thick scaling. The
damage is only transient. Arthritis is commonly
associated with psoriasis and may take on a
number of forms. Disease severity of the arthritis
does not parallel the extent of the skin disease.
Psoriasis and its variants commonly affect the
lower legs.
Subtypes of psoriasis
Classic plaque psoriasis. This symmetrical rash
affects the extensor surfaces of the skin. On the
lower leg, the knees and shins are frequently
involved and in this site may be thick and persis-
tent, covering the whole shin. The plaques are
variable in size, pink, red or purple and well
demarcated. The scales are large and silver in
colour and can be easily scraped away, revealing
pinpoint bleeding. Usually nail changes will be
evident on the toes.
Guttate psoriasis. This acute variant follows a
streptococcal sore throat. Within a couple of
weeks, small innumerable plaques of psoriasis
cover the body. The rash tends to resolve with no
treatment in 2 to 3 months. Occasionally it can be
recurrent or go on to develop into classical
plaque type.
Palmar plantar pustular psoriasis (Plate 16). This
variant occurs primarily in middle-aged, female
smokers. It is characterised by pustules on the
palms and soles, with or without classical disease
elsewhere. The pustules initially are creamy
coloured; as they mature, they turn brown;
finally, the roof falls away, leaving a scaly depres-
sion. They are commonly mistaken for fungal or
bacterial disease but culture of the pustule is
always sterile. A single digit may be all that is
involved; in this form, the nail may be destroyed
permanently. Smoking cessation does not help
the rash.
Generalised pustular psoriasis and erythro-
derma. Occasionally, psoriasis may be pustular
on the body. In this form, it is widespread, of
acute onset, often with systemic upset. Lakes of
pus can develop on the skin which later scale.
Patients usually have a previous history of pso-
riasis. Occasionally, psoriasis can be so wide-
spread it affects the whole body. With this, there
is loss of normal skin function (barrier against
infection, heat and water loss) and patients
can become very ill (death is not unknown,
usually due to coexisting conditions). This is
called erythroderma.
Vasculitis
This condition frequently presents on the lower
legs. The rash may have been precipitated by a
new medication or an infection or another
inflammatory medical condition. Clinically, there
is inflammation within the blood vessels that
results in leakage of blood into the surrounding
skin. Lesions do not blanch. Early lesions are
raised, red and itchy. Later, the skin may blister
or ulcerate. Occasionally, the rash may be very
extensive; commonly, it is modified by areas of
pressure and may be accentuated around the
shoe or sock line. Apart from ulceration, skin
involvement is usually only a minor problem.
Generalised involvement is sometimes a
problem, with inflammation of vessels occurring
in the gut, joints and kidneys that occasionally
may result in renal failure or, rarely, death.
Lichen planus (Plate 17)
Lichen planus (LP) is a common inflammatory
condition that frequently affects the lower leg.
The main presenting symptom is itch and rash.
The itch is often very severe; patients tend to rub
more than scratch, as sometimes the rash is
tender. The rash may be very widespread,
appearing characteristically on the wrists, shins
and sometimes diffusely on the body. The mouth
is often sore; the genital mucosae can be
involved. Scalp involvement may lead to perma-
nent hair loss. The nails are also involved. The
clinical appearances are classical. The rash con-
sists of multiple flat-topped, polygonal papules
that have a shiny surface. The colour is pale pink
through to violet and sometimes brown.
Resolving lesions often leave marked persistent
pigmentation. Nail involvement produces pits on
the nail surface; later, the nail thins and becomes
abnormal, sometimes resulting in destruction of
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
the nails. Inside the mouth, LP can appear as
white lacy streaks on the mucosa to blisters to
ulcers. On the lower leg, LP can become very
thick (hypertrophic). LP frequently develops in
areas of skin injury (koebnerisation), leading to
bizarre linear forms of the rash. LP of the soles is
less distinct, but the symptoms are similar and
usually associated with more typical rash else-
where. Lichen planus is usually relatively short-
lived 0-2 years), but hypertrophic disease may
become chronic.
Granuloma annulare
Frequently misdiagnosed as tinea, this eruption
is an idiopathic disorder that predominantly
affects people under 30 years old (particularly
children). Starting as a single red papule, it
spreads concentrically (up to several centimetres
in some cases), becoming concave in the centre
with a pink papular edge. The lesions, which can
be single or multiple, occur most commonly on
the hand but also occur on the foot and shins.
Unlike tinea, the lesion is rarely scaly and does
not itch. Diagnosis is confirmed by biopsy. The
condition may be rarely associated with diabetes
mellitus. Necrobiosis lipoidica may resemble
this lesion but tends to have a yellowish hue.
Necrobiosis Iipoidica (Plate 18)
This condition occurs on the shin and is com-
monly seen in diabetics. Patients may be asymp-
tomatic or complain of rash or ulceration. The
lesions start as red patches, which enlarge, the
centre becomes depressed and the skin yellows.
Blood vessels may be visible traversing the
patch. Occasionally, lesions ulcerate. Sometimes
the rash may precede the diagnosis of diabetes or
rarely may be the presenting feature. They are
often multiple.
Other inflammatory conditions
Sunburn. Exposure to sunlight (UVB radia-
tion) will lead to an erythema after a latent
period of 1-3 hours, depending on the amount
of exposure. Excessive exposure can lead to
235
desquamation (peeling) and, in the long term,
can increase the risk of malignant changes in the
skin.
Chilblains (perniosis). This is a familial
vasospastic response to prolonged exposure to
cold. Typically, lesions begin on the apices of the
toes, fingers and occasionally the ears. In women,
lesions may appear in the region just above the
footwear line where the ankle is only covered by
thin hosiery (sub malleolar perniosis). The
chilblain begins as an erythema, turning into a
purple, swollen lesion that may itch and burn.
Ulceration of lesions is not uncommon.
Erythrocyanosis. A relatively common disor-
der, erythrocyanosis commonly affects young,
overweight women, particularly those working
in a cold environment. Exposure to cold invokes
a vasospastic response, resulting in a purple-red
discoloration in the buttock, thigh and shin area
accompanied by a burning sensation.
Erythema multiforme. This skin disorder is
characterised by symmetrical, concentric 'target'
lesions occurring on the hands, feet and limbs.
Individual lesions may have a blistered bluish-
red centre with a more vivid surrounding ery-
thema. Involvement of the genital, oral and
conjunctival areas is not uncommon and appears
in the more severe form of the disease known as
Stevens-Johnson syndrome. The causes are
diverse, but 50% of cases are idiopathic: known
causes include drug eruptions and viral and
streptococcal infections. Differential diagnosis
should include other causes of blistering and
fungal infections. Negative fungal culture and
the symmetry of the eruption should establish
the diagnosis.
ALLERGIES AND DRUG REACTIONS
Allergic contact dermatitis (Plate 19)
Typically, this condition occurs as a result of the
skin becoming sensitised to a specific allergen (a
type IV hypersensitivity reaction), so that subse-
quent exposure to the allergen produces an acute
reaction of erythema, weeping and blistering at
the point of contact.
 236 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
--- ---------------------------------------------
The site of the reaction depends on the area of
skin exposed to the allergen. Sensitisation is
more rapid on thin or moist skin; hence, reactions
are most commonly seen on the face and ante-
cubital fossa. Due to its thickness, the plantar
surface of the foot rarely becomes involved. Shoe
line eruptions tend to be seen on the margins
where the skin becomes thinner towards the
dorsum. The popliteal fossa is also an area of
thinner skin and, occasionally, may show reac-
tions: e.g. to the dyes used in nylon tights.
The common allergens affecting the lower limb
are listed in Table 9.12. It is important to recog-
nise that sensitised T cells may spread from the
contact site and provoke eczematous type lesions
elsewhere on the body. When the cause of the
reaction is not apparent, patch testing should be
undertaken to identify the causative agent.
Differential diagnosis should be made from
psoriasis and fungal infections. Depending on
the point of exposure lesions may be symmetrical
or asymmetrical with a well-defined edge.
Fungal cultures and microscopy will typically be
negative. Allergic dermatitis rarely affects chil-
dren and the elderly, possibly due to a less vigi-
lant cell-mediated immunity. With psoriasis,
lesions should be present elsewhere and nail
changes are likely.
Juvenile plantar dermatosis
Juvenile plantar dermatosis is thought to be a
variant of contact dermatitis. The condition
arises in schoolchildren as a scaly, erythematous,
glazed eruption, typically affecting the forefoot
Table 9.12 Common causes of allergies in the lower limb
Location Common allergen
Thigh (pocket area) Phosphorus sesquisulphate
(matches)
Popliteal fossa Dyes in nylon tights
Foot and ankle Venous leg ulcer treatments
Chromates (leather tanning)
Adhesives (epoxy resins)
Metals (nickel in buckles)
Medicaments, especially those
containing lanolin and parabens
and plantar surfaces of the toes, sparing the inter-
digital areas. Fissuring may accompany the con-
dition. Differential diagnoses include tinea
infection, psoriasis, contact dermatitis and
adverse drug reaction. The symmetry and glazed
appearance of the condition, along with the
patient's age, are usually enough to make the
diagnosis. With a contact dermatitis, a positive
patch test would be obtained.
Drug reactions
Reactions to drugs may arise due to:
• a true allergic reaction to a drug
(hypersensitivity)
• the effects of overdosage (toxic reaction)
• side effects of a drug
• alteration, by the drug, of the normal
immune response.
The difficulty in differentiating the above
factors is that, potentially, they can all mimic vir-
tually any skin lesion. When a drug reaction is
suspected, a thorough drug history is required
(including any over-the-counter preparations the
patient may be using). Most often the offending
drugs are the ones taken in the last 2-3 weeks,
although reactions are not uncommon in drugs
taken safely for many years. Withdrawal from
the drug usually results in resolution of the con-
dition within a week or two. Drug reactions
affecting the lower limb are rare.
Typical patterns of drug eruptions include:
• toxic erythema - generalised erythema
accompanied by fever
• urticaria
• erythema multiforme
• vasculitis - typically seen as a painful
purpura on the shins
• erythema nodosum.
INFECTIONS OF THE SKIN
The surface of the skin is an effective barrier
against most environmental agents, but through
injury to the skin surface or when exposed to vir-
ulent organisms this barrier fails. The pattern of
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
disease is very much dependent on the type of
infection and so will be considered accordingly.
Viral
Verrucae. Verrucae (Plate 20) are the predomi-
nant viral infection on the foot caused by infec-
tion of the skin with human papilloma virus
(HPV). Around 5% of 16 year olds will have
warts at anyone time (Williams et al 1991). The
virus affects the stratum spinosum and causes
hyperplasia and formation of a benign tumour.
Typically, the plantar wart is found under a point
of high pressure, e.g. the metatarsal heads or a
bony prominence (Glover 1990). In its early
stages it appears as a small, dark, translucent
puncture mark in the skin. More mature lesions
show thrombosed capillaries, a 'cauliflower-
rough' surface and are painful when pinched.
The patient may complain of increased discom-
fort on starting to walk after a period of rest, e.g.
first thing in the morning. Different types of HPV
cause different wart lesions, e.g. flat, genital or
plantar.
Verrucae protrude above the level of the skin
unless they occur on weightbearing surfaces.
When they are found on weightbearing surfaces
they protrude into the skin and, as a result, are
more painful. Mosaic warts are made up of mul-
tiple, small, tightly packed individual warts and
may not be painful, whereas plantar warts may
be single or multiple and are usually painful.
Occasionally, periungual warts may develop
around the nail edge and lead to distortion of the
nail plate.
Verrucae can usually be diagnosed from their
clinical appearance; however, they can be con-
fused with corns (particularly neurovascular or
fibrous) and foreign bodies. Verrucae can occur
on non-weightbearing and/or weightbearing
areas of the foot, unlike corns and most foreign
body injuries, which tend to occur solely on
weightbearing areas. There may be multiple ver-
rucae present, not only on the feet but also on the
hands, the pinching of which tends to cause a
sharp pain, whereas corns and foreign bodies
give rise to pain on direct pressure. Verrucae
appear encapsulated and the skin striae are
237
broken; corns do not appear encapsulated and
the skin striae are not broken but pushed to one
side. Any wart with an atypical appearance, par-
ticularly in the elderly or immunosuppressed,
should be biopsied as, rarely, the lesion may
undergo malignant change.
Molluscum contagiosum. This is a contagious
infection (usually of children) which usually
involves the trunk but can affect the leg and foot.
Infection with the causative poxvirus, usually by
close contact, leads to a papular lesion, which
may range in size from a pinhead to a pea. The
hard, shiny pedunculated lesion has a central
crater from which cheesy material may be
expressed by pinching it. The uniqueness of this
lesion makes the diagnosis straightforward.
Herpes zoster (shingles). Shingles is a recrud-
escence of previous chicken pox, usually along a
single dermatome. It can occur at any age, but
most frequently in the elderly or immunosup-
pressed. It presents as a 1-3-day history of pain
or burning in one limb followed by haemor-
rhagic blisters and later superficial ulcers. Pain
may persist for many weeks and months.
Herpes simplex. Herpes simplex (cold sores)
rarely affect the lower leg, although they may
involve the thigh in rugby players (serum pox)
following infected oral exposure to an eroded
area of skin on the sports field.
Bacterial
Bacterial superinfection, which is very common
particularly in the various forms of eczema, was
discussed earlier. Primary bacterial infections are
less common (Plate 21). In all these conditions,
full assessment by bacterial swabs is essential.
Ecthyma. This infection affects the full thick-
ness of the epidermis. The main pathogens are
Staphylococcus aureus and Streptococcus pyogenes.
The patient may have recently been to a humid
climate or had an insect bite. It presents as a
shallow ulcer with a thick, crusted top.
Cellulitis. Cellulitis or erysipelas is a serious
infection usually of the lower leg caused most
commonly by Streptococcus pyogenes. It presents
as a flu-like illness that is rapidly followed by a
painful red advancing area, usually on the lower
 238 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
leg. The affected area becomes swollen and the
skin discoloured. The skin may even blister,
necrose and ulcerate. Commonly, a 'portal of
entry' is found such as tinea pedis (see below) or
a fissured patch of eczema.
Pitted keratolysis (Plate 22). Bacterial over-
growths on the sole of the foot secrete proteolytic
enzymes that produce multiple pits within the
epidermis. The pathogens are microaerophilic
diphtheroids. This is particularly common in
patients with sweaty feet or who wear trainers.
Usually it is asymptomatic, but sometimes the
skin thins sufficiently to be tender. Odour is com-
monly offensive in such patients.
Erythrasma. This bacterial infection of creases
and flexures occurs between the toes of the foot.
It is commonly mistaken for tinea pedis. The
pathogen is Propionobacierium minutiesimum,
The skin is usually macerated and red/brown in
colour. Again, it has a strong odour and
fluoresces coral pink in Wood's light.
Fungal
There are four patterns of fungal infection of the
foot (tinea pedis). Asymmetry is a feature
common to all subtypes. In all situations, scrap-
ings are essential to fully assess for fungal
disease. Interdigital scaling is the commonest
form, usually presenting as itching and fissuring.
This usually occurs between the third to the fifth
toes where the skin is most macerated. The rash
initially begins on one foot, only later extending
to the other toes, nails and other foot. A variety of
fungi and yeasts are implicated.
Extension onto the dorsa of the foot (Plate 23).
In chronic disease, the fungus can spread onto
the dorsa of the foot, producing itchy scaly rings
with an active edge. Fungal culture will help dif-
ferentiate this from discoid eczema. Typical
fungal causes include Trichophyton rubrum and
less commonly Epidermophyton floccosum.
Blistering in the instep. The inflammatory reac-
tion on the sole to fungus tends to produce blis-
tering (Trichophyton mentagrophytes). It is usually
unilateral. Removal of the blister roof will allow
closer inspection and it may be sent for culture.
Moccasin foot. The soles of the foot can be
generally involved with fungus (Trichophyton
rubrum), producing thickened scaly feet. Often
the disease affects both feet. The nails may also
be involved. Most patients are unaware of the
problem but will have a previous history of
infection.
Onychomycosis. Tinea pedis may progress to
the toe nails (onychomycosis), typically as a
result of repeated trauma (e.g. from footwear).
Infection may occur superficially on the nail plate
or subungually invading under the hypony-
chium. Proximal subungual involvement occurs
rarely in immunocompromised patients or fol-
lowing chronic paronychia. Total nail involve-
ment and dystrophy may result.
Tinea incognito. Misdiagnosis of fungal infec-
tion is a problem as often the incorrect diagnosis
made is eczema. The use of topical steroids to
reduce inflammation consequently allows the
unsuspected fungus to grow unchecked by the
immune system. Patients present with a history
of a persistent rash, usually on the foot, which
fails to respond to steroid creams. The potency of
the steroid used is often very high. The rash is
red, ill-defined with nodules within, that when
squeezed express pus. Scrapings confirm the
presence of fungus (Case history 9.3).
INFESTATIONS AND INSECT BITES
Scabies. The mite Sarcoptes scabiei causes
scabies. Itching is often severe despite sometimes
having minimal evidence of infestation. Patients
may describe itchy nodules or blisters. They will
usually have family members presenting at the
same time with itch. The signs are generally that
of eczema but blisters and excoriations are more
pronounced. The primary lesion is the burrow of
the mite. It appears as a linear or serpiginous
white line with scaly opening at one end and a
minute grey or red dot at the other end (the mite).
The mite may be extracted with a needle and
examined using a microscope. Scabies should be
suspected in any patient with a pronounced itch,
and other sites of involvement (hands and trunk)
should be sought.
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
Case history 9.3
Philip was a 25-year-old footballer who presented
with a 4-year history of a troublesome right great toe
nail. He was concerned, as the nail was discoloured
and growing abnormally. A brief examination of the
toe nail suggested fungal disease. Philip explained
that since playing professionally he commonly
developed a blackened nail on his right foot but
recently the colour of the nail had changed and
become crumbly. He also mentioned that from time to
time he had athlete's foot but had never sought
treatment for this. Initially, when asked what
medication he was on, he said none; then he
remembered that he had been using some steroid
cream. A friend had given him some that he used
rather unsuccessfully, to treat a patch of eczema on
the same foot. On closer questioning, it seemed that
the cream had initially helped the eczema but each
time he stopped the treatment the eczema just came
back again.
On examination, the nail was grossly thickened
with creamy linear discoloration at the medial margin
extending to the proximal nail fold. The ridged nail
was detaching itself from the nail bed. The fourth and
fifth interdigital spaces on both feet showed scaling
and blistering. Examining the right ankle revealed a
thickened erythematous scaly plaque within which
were inflamed nodules. The area was markedly
excoriated. Microscopy of scrapings from the web
space and eczematous plaque revealed the presence
of fungus. Culture of the toe nail clippings grew the
same fungus, Trichophyton rubrum (a common
fungus affecting the foot).
Diagnosis: Fungal nail and web space disease
with tinea incognito of the ankle. The whole problem
cleared after discontinuing the topical steroid and a
3-month course of antifungal tablets (terbinafine). He
was also advised to check the fitting of his soccer
boot.
Insect bites. A variety of insects will bite the
skin, producing itch or painful nodules or blis-
ters on the skin. The lower leg is commonly
involved as it is often exposed (biting insects and
fleas). Clues to suggest insect bite are grouped
lesions, often along a sock or shoe line, and a
history of presence of domestic animals or prox-
imity to farms.
Larvae migrans. A variety of hookworms that
are gut parasites in animals may find them-
selves in humans. Cats and dogs are the main
carriers. The immature form of the parasite pen-
etrates the skin and the larvae migrate under
the skin to produce loops and tortuous tracks.
239
Patients usually complain of itch and blistering,
usually contracting the disease on beaches
abroad but occasionally in the UK. The pattern
of migration makes diagnosis easy. Fortunately,
the disease is self-limiting.
DISORDERS OF THE
SUBCUTANEOUS TISSUE
The subcutaneous layer is a layer of primarily
adipose (fat) tissue and covers most of the lower
limb, particularly the thighs, anterior shins and
plantar surface.
Atrophy. Atrophy is the most common disorder
affecting the subcutaneous layer. It occurs most
frequently as a result of ageing and trauma (e.g.
heel pad atrophy in long-distance runners and
the elderly) or as a result of granulomatous
change (panniculitis) around injection sites (typi-
cally, diabetic patients using insulin injections).
Affected skin becomes depressed and scarring
may occur.
Painful piezogenic papules. On the plantar
surface, around the heels, herniations of fat from
the heel pad into the dermis may be evident on
standing. As solitary or multiple nodules they
may occasionally give rise to heel pain (Shelley &
Rawnsley 1968), usually in middle-aged females.
Diagnosis is established, as pain will result from
direct pressure while standing, but when non-
bearing the lesion completely disappears.
Erythema nodosum. This is an uncommon
eruption affecting the shins presenting as painful
nodules on the shins and less commonly the
thighs and forearms. The rash starts as painful
areas that enlarge into hot, red nodules, which
are acutely tender. These then resolve over a
matter of weeks. The redness fades and takes on
a bruised appearance. The condition is impor-
tant, as it is often associated with other diseases
such as sarcoidosis and a variety of infections.
SYSTEMIC DISORDERS AND THE
SKIN
The skin is an easily accessible structure and may
often give clues regarding internal disease.
 240 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Typical disorders which may affect the skin
include connective tissue and endocrine diseases.
Common systemic disorders and their effects on
skin are summarised in Table 9.13.
PIGMENTED LESIONS
Pigmented lesions represent a large part of
general dermatological practice; this is also the
case on the lower legs. Pigmented lesions arise as
a result of a variety of processes, both neoplastic
and inflammatory. Close attention to the clinical
history and signs will allow distinction between
most lesions.
Freckles or ephelis. These are probably the
most common pigmented lesions seen on the
skin. They are most common in those with fair
skin who have been exposed to sunshine. Lesions
are usually innumerable; they are visible but not
palpable and the pigmentation within is usually
evenly distributed and is generally slight. Darker
freckles can also occur, particularly after pro-
longed or excessive sun exposure.
Lentigo. A lentigo is a lesion where there is an
increase in the number of melanocytes within the
skin, resulting in a pigmented patch. Lesions
usually occur in older patients and usually arise
on sun-exposed sites. Again, the lesion is visible
and not palpable; it tends to be solitary and the
pigmentation within it is usually light and
always even.
Seborrhoeic warts. These are particularly
common, developing with advancing age. They
appear as well-defined, rough, warty, slightly
raised lesions that have a stuck-on appearance.
They usually occur on the trunk and proximal
limbs but can arise on the lower leg. They do not
develop on the sole. They are always benign but
can become inflamed after minor trauma and
may be mistaken for malignancy.
Pigmented naevi. Moles are collections of pig-
mented naevus cells (melanocytes) in the skin

Table 9.13 Systemic conditions and their associated skin changes

Condition Associated skin changes in the lower limb and foot

Diabetes mellitus Increased incidence of skin infections (fungal and bacterial), skin stiffening,
ulceration (neurovascular), diabetic bullae, necrobiosis lipoidica, granuloma annulare
Lupus erythematosus Erythematous scaly plaques with follicular plugging
Systemic lupus erythematosus Periungual erythema, splinter haemorrhages, onycholysis and leuconychia. On
the legs, erythromelalgia and erythema nodosum
Dermatomyositis Periungual erythema with characteristic 'ragged cuticles'. Occasional calcification
within the skin
Systemic sclerosis/scleroderma Tight waxy skin with later distal digital atrophy with calcinosis, ulceration and
occasionally gangrene
Ehlers-Danlos syndrome Fragile skin with frequent bruising, hypermobility, poor wound
healing, typically showing large scars upon the knees
Rheumatoid arthritis Skin atrophy, nodules, vasculitis with periungual infarcts, splinter
haemorrhages and onycholysis with longitudinal ridging of the nails
Hyperthyroidism Hyperhidrosis, clubbing, onycholysis, hyperpigmentation, pretibial myxoedema
Hypothyroidism Anhidrosis, leuconychia, pruritus, palmar and plantar hyperkeratosis
Acromegaly Hyperhidrosis, skin thickening, coarse hair
Hepatic disease Clubbing, spider naevi and pruritus
Renal disease Hyperpigmentation or skin yellowing, nail changes - half-and-half nails, onycholysis
Reiter's syndrome Keratoderma blennorrhagica
Internal malignancy Hyperpigmentation, palmoplantar keratoderma, secondary skin
tumours, pruritus, nail clubbing, bullous eruptions
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
that contain the pigment melanin. The nature of
moles will vary enormously depending on how
many naevus cells are present, where in the skin
they occupy and how pigmented they are: obvi-
ously, the greater number of naevus cells there
are, the larger and more protuberant the lesion.
Lesions that are close to the epidermal surface
tend to be red/brown in colour; however, the
further down the pigment is in the skin the bluer
the colour becomes. In addition, the intensity of
the colour will depend upon how much pigment
is being produced. Moles are sometimes present
at birth; their number increases during life, most
commonly in the first two decades but can
develop at any age. Moles may become larger
and more pigmented with age and occasionally
may regress. The clinical appearances of moles
are infinitely variable, therefore making
classification on macroscopic grounds alone
almost impossible; however, they can be defined
according to their microscopic appearances and
knowledge of these patterns may be useful in the
clinical setting.
Junctional naevi. Collections of melanocytes
along the dermal-epidermal junction, junctional
naevi are the usual type of mole for the sole of the
foot. In this site the pigmentation usually follows
the ridges and troughs on the epidermal mark-
ings. They are usually impalpable, the colour is
red brown, and is symmetrical. They commonly
occur in children and generally 'mature' by
melanocytes falling away into the dermis, forming
intradermal naevi. Here, the melanocytes have all
fallen into the superficial dermis. Often, the
naevus cells stop producing pigment and plump
up. Clinically, the lesions are therefore protuberant
and pale or skin-coloured. They may continue
growing in adulthood. Compound naevi have
both junctional and intradermal components and
therefore share clinical features of both types of
lesions.
Blue naevi. Melanocytes that have never
reached the epidermis and instead have prolifer-
ated in the deeper dermis have a blue appear-
ance. These often develop in later life, especially
on sun-exposed sites, especially the dorsa of
hands and feet and on the scalp. Blue naevi are
small (less than 5 mm) and may be slightly
241
raised. They can be differentiated from vascular
malformations in that they do not blanch. They
are almost always benign.
Malignant melanoma (Plate 24). In the assess-
ment of pigmented lesions the potential diagno-
sis of melanoma should always be considered.
There are a number of clinical symptoms and
signs that should alert you to the diagnosis
(Table 9.14).
Itching is an early and significant symptom
that should be sought. Often, it may be the only
presenting symptom, particularly where the
melanoma is not in general view. There may be
a change in the surface of the mole, skin creases
may be lost, and hair follicles and pores may
disappear. Almost always there will be an
increase in the size, shape or thickness of the
mole. This occurs over weeks and months and
usually is asymmetrical. Colour will change
within a mole; pigment can both increase and
decrease within the same lesion. Also, as the
melanocytes invade deeper into the skin, they
may appear blue or even black. Rarely,
melanoma may lose all pigmentation, making
diagnosis very difficult clinically (although the
patient may recall a pre-existing pigmented
lesion). Bleeding, the surface of a melanoma
may ulcerate, particularly in advanced disease.
The tumour may have spread by the time it is
picked up; this may be clinically evident with
tumours developing along the lines of lym-
phatic drainage (in transit metastasis), in the
draining lymph nodes or at distant sites (for
instance presenting as fits, weight loss or short-
ness of breath).
Melanoma is very rare before puberty and
usually occurs in large congenital moles. The
Table 9.14 Suspicious signs and symptoms in a
pigmented lesion
Symptoms Signs
Change in sensation Loss of skin markings
Change in size Irregular margins
Change in colour lrreqular pigmentation
Change in shape Bleeding
Change in outline Ulceration
New lesion
 242 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
majority of melanomas develop in later life,
occurring in fair individuals on sun-exposed
sites and most commonly in women on the lower
legs. Melanoma may arise on the sun-protected
sole of the foot and, as it is hidden from view, it
usually presents late. Any unusual lesion on the
foot should be suspected, particularly if there is
pigmentation (Case history 9.4).
SKIN TUMOURS
Tumours of the skin need careful assessment, as
there will be clues in both history and examina-
tion that will lead to accurate diagnosis. Most
lesions will be benign, but a small proportion
will be malignant (Table 9.15) and therefore life
threatening. Early referral of such lesions to a
dermatologist can improve prognosis enor-
mously. Points that should be sought in the
history are, obviously, site of the lesion, how
quickly it is growing, whether there are associ-
ated symptoms such as irritation or pain, or
whether there are similar lesions elsewhere.
Clinical signs that should be recorded are size,
shape, surface, colour, outline, temperature and
consistency. Dimensions should be recorded in
the notes, and where possible the lesion should
be photographed.
Case history 9.4
Amiddle-aged female patient presented for
assessment of her softcorns, which had been
troublesome for many years.After taking a history,
the feet were examined, revealing trivial disease;
however, on her posterior left calfthere was a
suspicious pigmented lesion. On questioning the
patient, she remembered having a mole on her leg for
a number of years but apart from occasional minor
irritation itcaused her no concern. She tended to
burn when she was inthe sun and had spent the first
20 years of her life living in Florida. She did not have
anyfamily history of melanoma. She was otherwise
well. On examination the lesion was 1.5 em in
diameter, the pigmentation was varied and the outline
irregular. Within the lesion there was a nodule which
had become ulcerated. She was referred to a
dermatologist, who confirmed the suspected
diagnosis of melanoma by an excision biopsy. She
remains free from recurrence.
Table 9.15 Principal tumours affecting the lower limb
Benign Malignant
Dermatofibroma Bowen's disease
Seborrhoeic wart Basal cell carcinoma
Haemangioma Squamous cell carcinoma
Lipoma Melanoma
Clear cell acanthoma Kaposi's sarcoma
Pyogenic granuloma Porocarcinoma
Eccrine poroma Metastasis
Glomus tumour
Benign tumours
Dermatofibroma. The lesions are very common,
particularly on the lower leg. They are usually
symptomless; often the patient is unaware that
the lesion is even there. Sometimes they catch
when the leg is scratched or shaved. They are felt
as firm tethered nodules within the skin, some-
times with a slightly elevated surface. They often
have a pigmented halo and for this reason may
be mistaken for more sinister lesions. They are
always benign.
Pyogenic granulomas (Plate 25). These are
common vascular proliferations that grow
rapidly over a few days or weeks. They usually
follow a minor injury. The surface is very easily
broken and bleeding may be prolonged and fre-
quent. In time, the lesion develops a surface
epithelium that is more resilient, ultimately
resembling a haemangioma.
Eccrine poroma. These are benign tumours of
the sweat duct that arise on the palms and soles,
typically in the over-40 age group. They are pink
or red, painless and usually 1-2 em in diameter
with a moist surface, surrounded by a moat-like
depression. Occasionally, they can undergo
malignant change.
Malignant lesions
Bowen's disease. Bowen's disease is squa-
mous cell carcinoma confined to the epidermis
only. It is a condition of the elderly, usually pre-
 ASSESSMENT OF THE SKIN AND ITS APPENDAGES
senting as a well-defined, erythematous, scaly
patch on the lower leg. When the scale is picked
off the surface may bleed and weep. It occurs
most commonly in women (suggesting a sun-
related aetiology). The lesions are sometimes
multiple. Left untreated they may persist for
many years; however, sometimes this disease
can progress on to true invasive squamous cell
carcinoma.
Basal cell carcinoma. Basal cell carcinoma
usually presents on the face but occasionally it
occurs on the lower legs. Usually it presents as a
fleshy nodule with a pearlescent appearance,
having small blood vessels grossing the surface.
Advanced lesions ulcerate and if neglected may
become very large. Despite being locally destruc-
tive they do not metastasise. Occasionally, they
remain superficial and indistinguishable from
Bowen's disease.
Squamous cell carcinoma. Squamous cell carci-
noma (See) is a common malignant tumour of
the lower leg presenting as a lump or as a bleed-
ing ulcer. The tumour grows over a period of
weeks and months. In time the tumour becomes
painful, particularly if it is invading bone or
nerves. Usually it will develop on a background
of sun damage but it is also associated with
exposure to arsenic and aromatic hydrocarbons.
Occasionally, it may develop with an old scar or
leg ulcer; this should be considered, especially in
ulcers that fail to heal with conventional mea-
sures or ulcers with fleshy or rolled edges.
Metastasis generally tends to be a late event,
usually to the regional lymph nodes. An see
that arises on the foot may invade deeply with
only minimal surface involvement, mimicking
pressure or neuropathic ulcers. Often, in this site
the tumour will have multiple sinuses that dis-
charge offensive-smelling material.
Kaposi's sarcoma. This rare vascular tumour
was described originally on the lower leg in
males of eastern European extraction. It presents
as blue-black or purple patches that later become
plaques and nodules. Tumours range in diameter
from 1 to 3 cm; they are usually multiple. Later
lesions may involute or ulcerate. Oedema may
become a problem. Kaposi's sarcoma is associ-
243
ated with human herpesvirus 8 and immunosup-
pression, notably HIV (Lebbe 1998).
Porocarcinoma. This rare sweat duct tumour
often occurs on the lower leg. The history
and clinical appearances are similar to see
but the tumours are more likely to recur and
metastasise.
Metastasis (Plate 26). Tumours of the lung,
prostate, thyroid, kidneys and breast rarely
spread to the skin. Usually when they do, it tends
to be the scalp and upper body. However,
tumours arising on the lower legs can metasta-
sise to the draining lymph vessels and nodes,
particularly melanoma and Sec. The tumours
will usually appear as subcutaneous nodules;
they may be large. They may be firm and may
feel as if they are attached to related structures.
The patient will usually have a history of pre-
vious tumours, but occasionally the metastasis
may be the presenting feature.
SUMMARY
There is no point assessing a patient's skin unless
the information is to be used to benefit the
patient. A diagnosis is formulated from all the
data gathered from the assessment and the prac-
titioner's knowledge and clinical experience.
Epidemiological data - information such as age
and gender - may help. Information from obser-
vation, clinical tests and special investigations
will also help to reduce the list of possible condi-
tions. In most instances the diagnosis will
become obvious, but on occasions it may not be
possible to reach a definitive diagnosis. In this
case a provisional diagnosis has to be made and
the cycle of the disease process must be awaited
for further enlightenment. Where a diagnosis is
not available, the practitioner may decide to treat
the symptoms. Occasionally, the effect of a treat-
ment can be a diagnostic aid in itself; e.g. a vesic-
ular eruption that resolves with the use of an
antifungal implies that the aetiology was
mycotic. When a condition is diagnosed, the
practitioner must decide what action is necessary
based on available evidence.
 244 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
REFERENCES
Baran R, Dawber R P R, Tosti A, Haneke E 1996 A text atlas
of nail disorders. Martin Dunitz, London
Cork M 1997 The importance of the skin barrier function.
Journal of Dermatological Treatment 8: S7-S13
Forslind B 1994 A new look at the skin barrier. A biophysical
and mechanical model for barrier function. Journal of
Applied Cosmetology 12: 63-72
Fortune D G, Main C J, O'Sullivan T M, Griffiths C E M 1997
Quality of life in patients with psoriasis: the contribution
of clinical variables and psoriasis-specific stress. British
Journal of Dermatology 137(5): 755-760
Freinkel R, Traczyck T 1985 Lipid compositions and acid
hydrolase content of lamellar granules of the foetal rat
epidermis. Journal of Investigative Dermatology 80:
441-448
Gawkrodger D J 1992 An illustrated colour text of
dermatology. Churchill Livingstone, London
Gillet du P 1973 Dorsal digital corns. Chiropodist July
Glover M G 1990 Plantar warts. Foot and Ankle 11(3): 172-178
Harlow D, Poyner T, Findlay A, Dykes P 1998 High
impairment of quality of life in adults with skin diseases
in primary care. British Journal of Dermatology 139
(SuppI51): 15
Lawton S 2000 A quality of life for patients with skin
disease. Skin Care Campaign Directory, London
Lebbe C 1998 Human herpesvirus 8 as the infectious cause
of Kaposi sarcoma: evidence and involvement of
cofactors. Archives of Dermatology 134(6): 736-738
McKee P H 1996 Pathology of the skin with clinical
correlations. Mosby-Wolfe, London
Merriman L, Griffiths C, Tollafield D 1986 Plantar lesion
patterns. Chiropodist 42: 145-148
Montagna W (ed) 1960 Advances in the biology of the skin:
cutaneous innervation. Pergamon Press, Oxford
Norlund J 1994 The pigmentary system: an expanded
FURTHER READING
Baran R, Dawber R P R, Tosti A, Haneke E 1996 A text atlas
of nail disorders. Martin Dunitz, London
Dawber R P R, Bristow I R, Turner W A 2000 A text atlas of
podiatric dermatology. Martin Dunitz, London
Goldsmith LA 1991 Physiology, biochemistry and
molecular biology of the skin. Oxford University Press,
Oxford
Harman R, Mathews CAN 1974 Painful piezogenic pedal
papules. British Journal of Dermatology 90: 573
perspective. Annals of Dermatology 6(2): 109-123
Office of Population Census and Surveys 1991-1992
Morbidity statistics from general practice. Fourth
National Study 54: 22
O'Halloran N 1990 A biochemical investigation into the
cholesterol content of seed corns. BSc dissertation,
University of Brighton
Pasyk K A, Thomas S V, Hassett C A, Cherry G W, Faller R
1989 Regional differences in the capillary density of the
normal human dermis. Journal of Plastic and
Reconstructive Surgery 83(6): 939-945
Ratnavel R C, Griffiths WAD 1997 The inherited
palmoplantar keratodermas. British Journal of
Dermatology 137: 485-490
Ryan T J 1995 Exchange and the mechanical properties of
the skin: oncotic and hydrostatic forces control by blood
supply and lymphatic drainage. Wound Repair and
Regeneration 3: 258-264
Shelley W B, Rawnsley H M 1968 Painful feet due to
herniation of fat. Journal of the American Medical
Association 205: 308
Springett K P 1993 The influence of forces generated during
gait on the clinical appearance and physical properties of
skin callus. PhD thesis, University of Brighton
Venning V 2000 The dermo-epidermal junction: an
important structure in dermatology. Dermatology in
Practice 8(1): 6-8
Whiting M F 1987 Survey of patients of large employer in SE
England and Dept of Podiatry, University of Brighton.
Unpublished, protected data
Williams H C, Potter A, Strachan D 1991 The descriptive
epidemiology of warts in school children. British Journal
of Dermatology 128: 504-511
Zaias N 1980 The nail in health and disease. SP Medical,
New York
Lewis-Jones S 2000 The psychological impact of skin
disease. Nursing Times 96(27): 2-4 (suppl)
Leung A K C, Chan P Y H, Choi M C K 1999
Hyperhidrosis. International Journal of Dermatology
38: 561-567
Litt J Z, Pawlak G P 1997 Drug eruption reference manual.
Parthenon Publishing, London
Windsor A 2000 Sampling techniques. Nursing Times
96(27): 12-13 (suppl)
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 245
Why assess footwear? 246

The 'anatomy' of the shoe 246

Footwear assessment
The 'anatomy' of sports shoes 248
L. Merriman *
Shoe construction 248
Lasts 248
Measurement 249
Methods of construction 250
Materials used in construction 252
Allergy to shoe components 253

Style 253
Suitable shoe styles 253
Unsuitable styles of footwear 255

Assessment of footwear 255

History taking 256
Assessment of shoe fit 256
Wear marks 261 INTRODUCTION
Suitability 264
Everyday shoes 264 Assessment of footwear and hosiery is impor-
Hosiery 264 tant as many foot health problems are associated
with the foot coverings. The majority of women
Summary 265
experience foot pain associated with wearing
shoes (Frey 1995, Frey et al 1992). Footwear
assessment may also be used for forensic pur-
poses (McCourt 2000). Additionally, examina-
tion of the footwear can confirm a diagnosis or
occasionally suggest a pathology which might
not otherwise have been considered.
Effective footwear assessment depends upon
the ability to differentiate a suitable from an
unsuitable shoe. To do this it is necessary to
understand the function of the different parts
of a shoe and the properties of the materials
used in their construction. This chapter there-
fore begins with a section about footwear before
the methods of assessment are described in
detail.
Well-fitting shoes are an essential part of the
treatment of foot problems and the ability to
assess fit is therefore an important tool. Several
methods of measuring fit are described,
together with some simple observations. The
ability to read the pattern of wear on a shoe is a
skill that can be used to assess how the foot
functions within the shoe. Some of the common
patterns are described. It is hoped that this
chapter will stimulate the reader to observe
footwear and understand its significance.
"Linda Merriman wishes to acknowledge the work of Janet Hughes. This chapter is largely
based on her work in the previous edition.
 246 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Why assess footwear?
Assessment of footwear is essential in the investi-
gation of foot problems for many reasons. Perhaps
the most important of these is that shoes give
valuable information about how the foot functions
during gait. It complements the assessment of the
locomotor system (Ch, 8), much of which relies on
barefoot observations, by assessing the way the
foot functions during daily activity, i.e. wearing
shoes. Examination of the wear and crease marks
of footwear can be an aid to diagnosis as well as
helping to complete the global picture. Another
reason for the importance of footwear assessment
is that unsuitable footwear can affect the efficacy
of treatment or help to prolong a condition which
might be alleviated by suitable shoes. In some
instances shoes are the cause of the problem and
effective treatment will consist simply of suggest-
ing alternative shoes.
Footwear is often neglected by practitioners
and its assessment has not always been given the
attention it deserves. This type of assessment is
more of an art than a science and relies heavily
on the experience of the observer. Gaining this
experience is complicated by the enormous
range of footwear that is available and the many
different methods of construction.
Observations of shod and unshod popula-
tions in the literature demonstrate that the
unshod populations have fewer foot deformities
than those who wear shoes. Research has also
shown that when members of an unshod popu-
lation start to wear shoes the incidence of foot
problems increases. There is no experimental
evidence showing that footwear is the cause but
it is clearly implicated.
Simple observation reveals that some feet
survive even the most unsuitable footwear. The
feet that survive unscathed are probably those
with good bone structure and foot function.
However, it can be assumed that for some feet
inappropriate shoes will certainly cause defor-
mity. Patients with foot deformity often report
similar symptoms in relatives but note that they
were not present as children.
The shoes most likely to cause problems are
those which do not fit well or are in some way
unsuitable. Well-fitting, suitable shoes should
always be encouraged.
While the basic function of footwear is pro-
tection both from hard and rough surfaces and
from the cold, the appearance is often more
important to the wearer. Patients exhibit strong
resistance to change where their footwear is
concerned. Many patients, particularly female,
choose to ignore advice regarding sensible
footwear, believing that what they consider to
be an elegant appearance is more important
than foot comfort. It is the authors' experience
that patients are more receptive to footwear
advice if the reasons for changing from high-
heeled court shoes to lace-ups can be explained.
They are also more likely to believe that their
shoes are too small when this is demonstrated
by a few simple tests. It is important, however,
not to be too dogmatic regarding patients'
shoes. Advice is more likely to be accepted if it
is made clear that smart shoes can still be worn
for special occasions.
THE 'ANATOMY' OF THE SHOE
Figure IO.IA shows the parts that make up an
average lace-up shoe. The components can be
grouped into those that make up the upper and
those which form the sole. They are described
individually below. Additionally there are areas
which need reinforcement. These are highlighted
in Figure IO.IB and described under the area they
reinforce.
Vamp. The upper is made of two main sections
which are together moulded into the shape of the
top of the shoe. The front section, which covers
the forefoot and toes, is called the vamp. In some
shoes the vamp is made of more than one piece,
creating a decorative pattern; however, seams
other than those joining the main sections are not
recommended as they limit stretch ability and
may rub bony prominences. The vamp is usually
reinforced anteriorly by the toe puff, which main-
tains the shape of this section and protects the
toes. In safety shoes this area is reinforced with
steel to protect the toes from crushing injury. This
reinforcement can be the cause of toe problems if
it does not fit well.

A Insole
Tongue
Topline
Quarter
Eyelets --,...--,...--f--~/ -+---,ll---
(Oxford lacing) ,/n_- Heel
Throat line ----,1-----''''
--Toppiece
-#1'--- Vamp
/H--Welt
_~~:o....... _ _ Toe cap
'<:::::::::::::::;::;;::::::<::::::.------ Outsole
Figure 10.1 A. The 'anatomy' of a lace-up shoe, showing the parts of an Oxford-style laced shoe
a shoe C. Alternative (Gibson) style of lacing.
Quarter. The sides and back of the shoe upper
are termed the quarters and their top edge forms
the topline of the shoe. The medial and lateral
sections often join in a seam at the centre of the
heel. In lace-up shoes the eyelets for the laces
form the anterior part of this section, whereas the
tongue is attached to the vamp (Oxford style) or
forms part of the vamp (Gibson style, Fig. IO.le).
The inside of the quarter is usually reinforced
around the heel by the stiffener. This helps to
stabilise the hindfoot in the shoe. In some chil-
dren's shoes and some athletic footwear the stiff-
ener is extended on the medial side to help resist
pronation.
Toecap. The upper may have a toecap stitched
over or replacing the front of the vamp. It is made
into a decorative feature in some men's shoes, for
example brogues.
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 247
B
Stiffener
<----7/<------ Shank
" " ' - - - - - Toe puff
B. The reinforcing within
Linings. Linings (not illustrated) are included
in the quarters and vamps of some shoes to
increase the comfort and durability. The lining
for the bottom of the shoe is called the insock. It
may cover the entire length of the shoe, three-
quarters or just the heel section.
Throat. The throat is formed by the seam
joining the vamp to the quarter. Its position
depends on the style of the shoe. A lower throat
line, i.e. a shorter vamp and longer quarters, will
give a wider Ilower opening. This seam will not
stretch and therefore dictates the maximum
width of foot for which the shoe can be used.
Insole. The insole is the flat inside of the shoe
which covers the join between the upper and the
sole in most methods of construction.
Outsole. The outsole or sole is the undersur-
face of the shoe.
 248 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Shank. The shank reinforces the waist of the
shoe to prevent it from collapsing or distorting in
wear. Shanks may not be needed in shoes with
very low heels or in shoes where the sole forms a
continuous wedge.
Heel. The part of the shoe under the heel of the
foot, also called the heel, raises the rear of the
shoe above ground level. A shoe without a heel
or a midsole wedge may be completely flat or
have the heel section lower than the forefoot, in
which case it is called a negative heel. The outer
covering on the surface of the heel, which can be
replaced when worn, is called the top piece.
Welt. The welt is a strip of material, usually
leather, used to join the upper to the sole in
Goodyear-welted construction.
The 'anatomy' of sports shoes
Since trainers replaced plimsolls sports footwear
design has developed considerably, bringing
new construction methods and terminology to
the footwear industry. The functions of sports
shoes are different to those of ordinary shoes as,
for example, they may be required to absorb
shock or provide some medial to lateral stability.
The parts of a sports shoe are shown in Figure
10.2 and the terms illustrated are described below.
MUdguard. Reinforcing round the outside of
the rim of the toe is called the mudguard.
Saddle. The saddle is reinforcing stitched to
the outside of the shoe in the area of the arch.
MUdguard
Saddle
Figure 10.2 The parts of a sports shoe.
---' ,-,-----,_.
Collar and heel tab. The topline of a sports
shoe is often padded to form the collar. This may
be shaped up around the back of the tendo
Achilles to form a heel tab. Heel tabs were
designed to protect the tendo Achilles but some-
times rub sensitive feet and may therefore need
to be removed.
Hindfoot stabiliser. One of the elements that
may be incorporated into a sports shoe to
attempt to counter pronation is the hindfoot
stabiliser, which consists of a plastic meniscus
between the midsole and the stiffener.
SHOE CONSTRUCTION
Lasts
The last is the mould on which most shoes are
made and its shape and dimensions will dictate
the fit and to some extent the durability of the
shoe made on it. It is usually hinged around the
instep to allow it to be removed from the shoe
when construction is completed. Last design and
manufacture are skilled occupations involving
the use of many measurements, some of which
are shown in Figure 10.3. Most of these are
volume measurements rather than the traditional
length and width measurements associated with
shoe fit. The measurements of the last need to be
different from the measurements of the foot to
allow for movement in walking and the tightness
of fit required by the wearer. It is these factors
Heel tab
Collar
Hind foot stabiliser
Midsole
Outsole

Back curve
; and is essential for the toe-off stage of gait. The
Heel height
_---l~ +_--=:::.l!-_==----'-T""oe"-,spring
Waist curve
Figure 10.3 Some of the measurements used in last
design. 1 = throat opening; 2 = heel girth; 3 = length;
4 = heel to ball length; 5 = instep girth; 6 = waist girth;
7 = ball girth (joint).
which make it difficult to convert a plaster cast
of a foot into a last without considerable
modification. Other dimensions are dictated by
fashion features and current style. A last for a
high-heeled shoe, for example, will need to be
much shorter than the foot for which it is being
designed to compensate for the shortened equinus
position in which the foot is held. Another
example is the last for a court shoe, which differs
from the last for an equivalent lace-up shoe by
having an overly curved heel and a shallow toe
puff in order to help the shoe stay on the foot.
Some features built into the last may affect the fit
and are therefore described below.
Recede. The recede is the part of the last that
projects beyond the tip of the toes and forms the
rounded contour of the front of the shoe. A taper-
ing recede, found in some fashion shoes,
increases the overall length of the shoe. In a
poorly designed last the recede may encroach on
to the toes, causing pressure on the tips of the
toes in walking.
Flare. In the past there used to be no difference
between left and right shoes until it was discov-
ered that shoes were more comfortable with a
degree of inflare. Now most commercially avail-
able shoes are made on lasts with some inflare.
Occasionally, the flare of the foot does not match
that of the shoe, causing characteristic wear
marks on the inside of the shoe and pressure
lesions on the foot.
Heel to ball length. This dimension dictates the
position of the hinge and the widest part of
the shoe. It is essential that this corresponds to
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 249
the widest part of the foot, the metatarsopha-
langeal joint.
Toe spring. Toe spring is incorporated into a
last to compensate for the stiffness of footwear
more rigid the soling material, the greater the toe
spring needed.
Ball tread. This is the width across the sale
under the ball of the foot and it should corre-
spond to the width of the foot at this point. In
some ladies' fashion shoes this width is
decreased and compensated for with extra girth
in order to give the appearance of a thinner, more
elegant foot (Fig. 10.4); thus, the shoes will be
narrower and deeper than the foot they are
designed to fit and when worn the upper will
overlap the sole.
Men's shoe
f - + - - Women's shoe
Ball tread
Figure 10.4 The different relationship of ball width to ball
tread seen in women's and men's shoes. These shoes have
identical width fittings.
Measurement
The last is designed in a single size and then a set
is made in the range of sizes and widths in which
the shoes are to be manufactured. Marked sizes
will vary slightly from one manufacturer to
another.
Length
Shoes are marked according to one of three dif-
ferent length sizing systems depending on where
the shoes were made. Figure 10.5 gives a rough
conversion table between the three major
systems: United Kingdom, American and Paris
Point (Continental). The UK scale starts at 0 for a
 250 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

A B C o foot measuring about 102 mm and has 8.4 mm

;- 11 ~ 16
1 - between whole sizes and 4.2 mm between half
- sizes. After size 13 the scale restarts at size 1 for
17
- 12 - 18
t- 2 - adult footwear. American shoes are approxi-
mately half a size larger than their UK equivalent
'- 13 - 19 f- 3 - for all except women's shoes which are one and a
20 f- 4 - half sizes bigger. Paris Point begins at size 0 and
'-
14 - 21 increases by 6.5 mm between each size.
5 -
::.-
15 - 22
23 f- 6 - Fittings
=- 16 - 24 - Several standard width fittings are available in
f- 7
25 the UK size system to accommodate differences
- 17 - t- 8 - in three-dimensional girth. For ladies A is the nar-
26 rowest and G the widest, for children the range is
- 18 - 27
c- 9 -
from A to H and for men it is from 1 to 8. The girth
28 f- 10 - increase between fittings is normally 6.5 mm.
- 19 ...:;
Many lines are only made in one size and this is
29 f- 11 - usually ladies' D or men's 4. The girth around the
== 20 ~= 30
12 - ball of the foot increases by 5 mm for whole sizes
~ 31 up to children's size 10 and 6.5mm for whole
- 21 15
32 t-- 13 - sizes above this. In the American system, the
- 22 - 25 equivalent to the letter system is two more: e.g.
33 I- 1 -
AAA is equivalent to the UK A. There is no equiv-
34 2 - 35 alent Continental width-fitting system and in
'- 23 - I-

35 45 general the shoes are narrower than in the UK.

~
24 ~ = I- 3 -
36 55
f- 4 - Methods of construction
'- 25 ~ 37
::=
5 - 65
= 38 I-
Shoes were traditionally made by moulding
=- 26 ~ 75 leather on to a wooden last. Modern technology
39 I- 6 -
::: has brought many new materials to shoe manufac-
40 85
'-
27 --= 7 - ture and has, to some extent, mechanised the con-
41 struction, but it remains a fairly labour-intensive
- 8 - 95
28 - 42
r--
industry. The first stage in the construction of most
9 - 105 shoes is to attach the insole to the undersurface of
~ 29 - 43 I-
::=
'= the last. The remaining construction is split into
44 10 - 115
== t-- two main operations: lasting, when the upper sec-
~ 30 - 45 tions are shaped to the last and attached to the
'= 11 - 125
insole; and bottoming, when the sole is attached to
=-
==
31 - 46
12 - 135 the upper. There are five main methods of bottom-
47 ing and the one chosen will influence the price,
=- 32 - 13
48 quality and performance of the final product.

Stuck-on (cement)
Figure 10.5 Comparison of measurements of shoe length
A. Centimetres B. Paris Point C. English sizing system As the name implies, this type of construction
D. American women's sizes. involves sticking the sole to the upper (Fig. 1O.6A).
 FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 251

A C

Upper

Welt -l~:~~~.~=~r- Upper

Outsole Midsole Insole

B D

Upper--...,r/ Upper

Chainstitch
inseam Filler Insole Outsole Insole
Lock stitch
outseam Outsole

Upper _ _Ill

Stitching Sole Insole

Figure 10.6 Common methods of shoe construction A. Cement B. Goodyear C. Stitchdown D. Moulded E. Strobel-
stitched method.

This method is commonly used for both men's and Stitchdown

women's footwear as it produces a lightweight
The upper is turned out at the edge of the last
and flexible shoe.
instead of being curved under it and attached to
a runner (insole) (Fig. 10.6C). The sole is then
Goodyear welt stitched to the upper and runner. This is a
cheaper method of construction. While not as
The edge of the sole in a Goodyear-welted shoe is
strong as some constructions it produces a light-
made of two sections. The top section, called the
weight, flexible sole. It is used for children's
welt, is stitched to the upper and insole rib at the
footwear and some casual shoes.
point where it curves under the last (Fig. 10.6B).
The outsole is then sewn to the welt around the
Moccasins
edge. This creates heavier, less flexible footwear
and is used for high-quality dress and town In this method the upper is not made in sections
shoes. and lasted as previously described. A single
 252 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
larger section forms the insole, vamp and quar-
ters, by being moulded upwards from the under-
surface of the last. An apron is then stitched to the
gathered edges of the vamp and the sole is
stitched to the base of the shoe. This method is
used for flexible fashion footwear.
Moulded methods
In these methods the lasted upper is placed in a
mould and the sole formed around it by injecting
liquid synthetic soling material (Fig. 10.60).
Alternatively, the sole may be vulcanised by con-
verting uncured rubber into a stable compound
by heat and pressure. These methods combine
the upper permanently into the sole and such
shoes cannot therefore be repaired easily.
Moulded methods can be used to make most
types of footwear.
Force lasting
There are many variations of this method but the
main one, which is increasing in use, is the sewn-
in-sock or Strobel-stitched method (Fig. 10.6E).
The upper is sewn directly to a sock by means of
an overlocking machine (or Strobel stitcher). The
upper is then pulled (force lasted) on to a last or
moulding foot. Unit soles with raised walls or
moulded soles are attached to completely cover
the seam. This is a modern method which has
evolved from the construction of sports shoes but
is increasingly used for casual shoes.
Materials used in construction
Leather upper materials
The traditional material for shoe upper manufac-
ture is leather and it still has advantages over
synthetic materials. The first of these is its per-
meability. Permeable materials allow perspira-
tion to escape from the foot, producing a drier
environment, which is less conducive to fungal
growth. The second advantage is that leather
stretches with wear and will permanently mould
to the shape of the foot. Additionally, leather
forms many tiny creases where flexing occurs,
giving a smooth contour to the inside of the shoe.
It is important to remember that the permeability
of leather is likely to be impaired by special coat-
ings, e.g. patent leather.
Synthetic upper materials
Some synthetic materials (the poromerics) are
permeable and allow the shoe to 'breathe' but
none have the permanent suppleness found in
leather. Most are slightly elastic and will stretch
to some extent during wear; however, they will
return to their original shape when taken off. For
this reason shoes made of these materials should
fit well and will not be as versatile at fitting awk-
wardly shaped feet as leather. Some synthetic
materials may form a single deep crease, which
can rub on the foot, instead of the many small
creases found in leather. This problem is likely to
be more pronounced when the shoes are too big.
Many synthetic materials can be produced
cheaply and are used to manufacture reasonably
priced shoes. Providing they fit well and perspi-
ration is not allowed to build up inside, they can
be completely satisfactory.
Other upper materials
Woven fabrics such as cotton corduroy can be
used to make soft uppers. These are classified as
breathable fabrics even if made of synthetic
fibres; however, they will usually only stretch in
one direction. They can make comfortable
footwear, but it is essential that these fit well and
are well constructed with adequate reinforce-
ment, particularly in the heel area.
Lining materials
All the materials used for upper construction can
also be used for linings; however, the combina-
tion of a leather upper with a full lining made of
a non-breathable, non-stretch material will have
all the disadvantages of the lining materials and
none of the advantages of the leather. In practice
full linings are rare, but when they are used it is
preferable that they be made of thin leather or
fabric. Many linings are made of synthetic mate-

rial but are usually confined to the quarters and
the insock, where the loss of permeability and
stretchability is not a problem.
Leather soling materials
The ideal soling material must be waterproof,
durable and possess a coefficient of friction high
enough to prevent slipping. As for upper con-
struction, leather has been the traditional mater-
ial for the construction of shoe soles but synthetic
materials are much more versatile than leather
which, besides being very expensive, has poor
gripping qualities.
Synthetic soling materials
The advantages that man-made soling materials
have over leather are that they are more durable,
have better resistance to water and have higher
coefficients of friction and, therefore, better grip.
They can be made of flat material and be stuck or
sewn onto the upper like leather, or they can be
made in a shaped mould which is either stuck on
or moulded directly on to the upper. Extra grip
properties can be incorporated in the form of a
distinctive sole pattern with well-defined ridges
or they can be moulded with cavities to reduce
the weight of the sole. These cavities need to be
covered with a rigid insole or can be filled with
light foam to produce a more flexible sole.
Synthetic soling materials have been the subject
of a great deal of research, particularly relating to
sports shoes, and this has led to new designs and
construction methods being used in all types of
footwear. For example, two or more materials of
different densities can be incorporated into the
sole, e.g. to give a hard-wearing outer surface
and a softer, more flexible midsole for greater
comfort. Many synthetic soling materials possess
a degree of shock absorption. Patients can some-
times relieve metatarsalgia by changing from
thin-soled shoes to shoes with thick soles with
good shock-absorption properties.
Shank
The shank can be made of steel, wood or synthetic
~rial and will usually retain a slight degree of
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 253
flexibility. Shank flexibility can be tested for by
pressing down on the inside of the shoe on a flat
surface. A suitable shank would be completely
rigid or give slightly, but a shank that is too
flexible will yield under this pressure and would
allow the shoe to twist when weightbearing.
Allergy to shoe components
Some components used in shoe construction can
cause allergic contact dermatitis. Substances
which sometimes cause skin problems are listed
below.
Rubber. Rubber, used for some soles, can be
present even in an all-leather shoe as it is a con-
stituent of many adhesives.
Chemicals. The chemicals used in the process
which turns animal hide into leather (tanning)
and dyes used to colour it can leach out of the
leather when the foot sweats.
Other features. Materials such as nickel, used
in eyelets and shanks, or the fungicides used
to protect the leather, can also produce skin
irritation.
Diagnosis of these conditions can be made
from the localised area affected by the eruption.
Treatment involves use of footwear constructed
without the causative component. Fortunately
these conditions are rare. Help to identify suit-
able footwear can be obtained in the UK from
organisations such as the Disabled Living
Foundation and the Shoe and Allied Trades
Research Association.
STYLE
Figure 10.7 shows the seven basic shoe styles:
lace-up, moccasin, court, sandal, boot, mule and
clog. All shoes are variations on these themes.
The history of footwear shows that styles re-
invent themselves. Shoe styles tend to reflect con-
temporaneous expectations of society (Lawlor
1996).
Suitable shoe styles
Only the styles on the left of the illustration - the
lace-up, sandal, boot and moccasin styles - fit
 254 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Figure 10.7 The seven basic shoe styles A. Lace-up B. Moccasin C. Court D. Sandal E. Boot F. Clog G. Mule.

the definition of a sensible shoe, which must are designed. It is better, therefore, to recommend
have a mechanism for holding the foot back in features to be found in a suitable shoe with an
the heel of the shoe. Without this fixation the foot
is allowed to slip forward into the toe space
causing friction on the sole and trauma to the
toes. Thus, there are two really important parts of
an ideal shoe: a band around the instep and cor-
responding pressure at the heel. These parts,
shown in Figure 10.8, should be firm and fit well.
The band around the instep prevents the foot
from sliding forward. This needs to be well up
the instep to be effective. This is counterbalanced
by pressure behind the heel to prevent the foot
from sliding back.
Support is often listed as being essential in a
good shoe, but a normal foot does not need to be
supported to function correctly or barefoot
walking would be impossible. A good shoe should Parts of the shoe Parts of the shoe
be firm enough to support itself and provide a that must be firm that must fit snugly
solid base from which to push off. Recommending to prevent the foot to prevent the foot
from sliding back from sliding forward
footwear is complicated by the constant changes
to styles and models marketed by different manu- Figure 10.8 The parts of a shoe needing to fit well to
facturers and the different uses for which shoes prevent forward or backward movement of the foot.
 FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 255

Table 10.1 Points to look for in an ideal shoe but high heels became associated with fashion
• Laces with at least three eyelets
and style as early as the 16th century. High heels,
defined as those that place the foot in more than
Low, wide heel for good stability
slight equinus, are not suitable for everyday
Good width at the front of the shoe to prevent cramping
the toes
wear. In addition to the fact that they are nearly
always slip-oris, they alter the normal biome-
• Deep, reinforced toe box
chanics of the lower limb in walking. Habitual
• Firm stiffening round the heel
wear leads to permanent shortening of the calf
• Curved back for close fit around the heel muscles, barefoot walking is made uncomfort-
• Shaped topline, high enough up the instep for adequate able and in severe cases the heels may not be able
fixation
to touch the ground.
• Strong leather upper
Hard-wearing synthetic sole
Good fit
ASSESSMENT OF FOOTWEAR
• Good condition The assessment of footwear should not be seen as
a separate entity to be completed after other
aspects of the examination but should be inte-
explanation of why they are important. To assist grated into the global assessment. For example,
this task a list of points to look for in a suitable observation of patients walking in their shoes can
shoe is included in Table 10.1. often be achieved as they enter the clinic and
there are some checks of fit which should
be done before the shoes are removed. This
Unsuitable styles of footwear will ensure that the number of times the
Mules, clogs and court shoes, the styles on the shoes need to be removed and replaced is kept to
right of Figure 10.7, are unsuitable for regular a minimum. Table 10.2 lists the tests that should
wear as they have no means of securing the foot. be included in a simple footwear assessment and
The only way that mules stay on is by being
'gripped' by the toes. This can lead to toe defor- Table 10.2 The parts of a simple footwear assessment
mity. Slip-on shoes, especially court shoes, are and the stages at which they can be completed within the
global assessment
bought too short and inevitably cramp the toes as
the only way that they can stay on the foot is by Stage of Test Brief description
wedging the foot between the curved back of the assessment
heel and the toe puff. When tried on in the correct In shoes
size the foot slips forward into the toe space and Walking Observe gait
the heel lifts out of the shoe on walking, giving
Standing Observe stance
the impression that it is too big. Clogs or slip-on Check length Palpate end of longest toe
shoes that extend right up the instep will limit Check heel to Locate MTPJs in shoe
forward movement to some extent. A properly ball length
Check width Pinch upper over
fitting lace-up is always preferable (Fig. 10.8). metatarsal heads
In most shoes, even 'flat' ones, the heel is Check depth Palpate toes during flexion
raised slightly above the level of the ground, so Barefoot
that the foot is in slight equinus. Even a modest Walking Observe gait
height of heel will tend to throw the weight of the Sitting History
foot forward into the toe section unless it is Assess suitability of shoes
restricted by an adequate fastening. It is therefore Check wear marks
Examine inside of shoe
even more important for a high-heeled shoe to
Standing Observe stance
have a secure fastening. Raised heels are said to Note longest toe
have developed as a protection from dirty streets
 256 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
the stage at which each should be completed.
They are described in full below. Performing
these checks routinely, as part of a set sequence,
will help to ensure that assessment of footwear is
completed without undue effort. It should be
remembered that hands should be washed
between examination of the footwear and the
foot. Patients attending for their first appoint-
ment should have been warned to bring a selec-
tion of their shoes, as new or 'best' shoes may not
demonstrate the habitual wear pattern found in
the shoes worn every day. There may therefore
be several pairs of shoes to examine.
History taking
Background information about the patient's
general footwear and purchasing habits is an
essential part of the assessment of footwear.
Financial circumstances
Before suggesting appropriate footwear, it is
important to ascertain the financial circum-
stances of the patient, as this will influence her
ability to follow the advice given. Women tend to
spend less per item of footwear than men but
they change their footwear more frequently;
hence, in total, they spend more on footwear than
men (British Footwear Association 1998).
Wardrobe
Questions regarding the number of shoes
owned and the number regularly worn may
seem irrelevant but can add helpful informa-
tion. This line of questioning may uncover that
special shoes are worn at work and, therefore,
need examination in preference to shoes worn
only occasionally. There are specialist reinforced
shoes for work in dangerous environments,
smart shoes may be needed for office work or
special shoes may be required for a specific
sporting activity. Advertising and the media
influence women's attitudes towards purchas-
ing shoes (Reardon 1999). It is, therefore, impor-
tant that the practitioner is familiar with current
styles within 'the high street' as these could
have a major influence on the style of shoes
women are willing to purchase.
Habits
Details of how often shoes are changed and
whether long periods are spent wearing slippers
or sports shoes can also be important. For
example, a lady is unlikely to benefit from having
a pair of suitable shoes to go out in once a week
when she spends the rest of the week at home in
slippers.
Acquisition of footwear
Information about when, where and how often
patients buy their shoes can be useful: e.g. do
they have their feet measured or visit a self-
service shop? Whereas 40% of parents start off
having their children's feet measured, by the age
of 11 years only 15% of children have their feet
measured (Stevens 1995).
Independence
No assessment of footwear would be complete
without noting the patient's ability to put on and
take off her shoes or to do up and undo the
fixation. Many adaptations to footwear and aids
to assist independence are available and may
form a valuable part of treatment. Sources of
information are included in Further Reading.
Assessment of shoe fit
Shoe fit is always a compromise as the shape of
the foot is changing continually due to many
different factors, some of which affect length
and some girth. The biggest factor affecting
length is weightbearing and measurements of
length should, therefore, never be made when
the patient is sitting. Girth is affected by body
weight but is also highly sensitive to both tem-
perature and swelling. There is thus a tendency
for feet to be smaller in the morning than the
evening. Measurements taken during the
middle of the day will give the most representa-
tive results.

Assessment of shoe fit is not an exact science:
often observation and common sense are all that
is required to decide whether shoes fit correctly.
Sometimes a method of measuring fit is useful to
demonstrate to patients that their shoes are inad-
equate. A well-fitting shoe should fit snugly
around the heel and the arch and allow free
movement of the toes.
This section includes a comprehensive list of
tests for different aspects of fit. It is not intended
that all the tests described should be included in
each assessment. They are listed partly to
demonstrate the range of potential tests, but also
to allow selection of an appropriate test to suit
the problems experienced by the patient. In most
cases the simplest test described will be adequate
but, occasionally, when more accuracy is
required, the more complicated measurements
can be useful.
The style of the shoe will to some extent dictate
fit: e.g. a court or slip-on shoe is likely to be too
small in length, width and depth. Additionally,
the style of the front of the shoe can have a direct
bearing on the fit in this region. Demonstration of
poor fit by some of the tests described may help
to convert the patient to sensible shoes.
If shoes are really comfortable they are proba-
bly a good fit. Strangely, comfort is not as impor-
tant a factor as might be expected when shoes are
being purchased. Colour, style and heel height
may compete equally. People, particularly
women, seem to be tolerant of minor foot dis-
comfort and it is necessary to explain that ill-
fitting footwear may damage feet and that
comfort should be paramount when choice of
footwear is concerned.
Length
Correctly-fitting shoes should have a gap
between the longest toe and the front of the shoe
to allow for elongation of the foot, which takes
place when walking. This gap should ideally be
about 12 mm. Shoes that are too short will be
recognisable, as the upper will tend to bulge at
heel and toe. There are a number of simple tests
with which this observation can be confirmed.
They are not all suitable for all types of shoes.
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 257
• With the patient standing in her shoes,
palpate the end of the longest toe through the
toe puff. This may not be possible if the toe
puff is reinforced.
• Sprinkle a little talcum powder into the shoe
and ask the patient to walk a few paces.
When the shoes are removed an outline of
the toes can be seen printed in the powder on
the insole from which the gap can be
assessed. It may be difficult to see the result
of this test in footwear which extends high
up the instep (high-waisted).
• Cut a thin strip of card the length of the foot
and slide this into the shoe until it touches
the tip. This should reveal a gap of about
12 mm between the inside of the heel and the
end of the strip of card (Fig. 10.9). This
method can be influenced by the shape of the
toe puff and is therefore most effective in
round-toed shoes. To minimise the error, keep
the width of the card narrow and do not slide
it right to the end of very pointed-toed shoes.
Shoes that are too short will mould the toes
into the shape of the front of the shoe; shoes that
are pointed are likely to cause pressure lesions on
the toes.
\
o
,
, ,,
I
i
"
I
I
I
I
I
© r~
---
6
:<~~«{j(f>;a'.
.
~
Gap equivalent to toe space
Figure 10.9 A method of testing a shoe for correct length.
 258 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Length of children's shoes. Children's shoes
need a little more toe space than adults to allow
for growth. A gap of 20 mm between the longest
toe and the front of the shoe should be present in
new shoes, allowing 8-9 mm for growth before
new shoes are needed. If a child's shoe is worn
out it is likely that it is too small, as it is usual for
young feet to outgrow the shoe before it is worn
out. It is also important to check for sock fit with
growing feet as these too can be rapidly out-
grown. Hosiery that is too small can cause as
much damage as shoes that are too short.
Heel to ball length
Correctly-fitting heel to ball length will ensure
that the hinge of the shoe is correctly aligned
with the ball of the foot, and that the widest part
of the foot is in the widest part of the shoe. It
varies according to the design of the last.
Average heel to ball length will be adequate for
average feet, and will only need to be assessed if
the toes are unusually short or long in relation
to the rest of the foot. Heel to ball length will be
incorrect if too much room for growth is
allowed in children's shoes, when odd-sized
feet are not fitted with different-sized shoes or
when extra long shoes are bought to fit wide
feet. This important measurement should only
be assessed once the length of the shoes has
been checked and found to be correct. Two tech-
niques for measuring heel to ball length - one
Figure 10.10 Illustration of two feet with identical length but different heel to ball length and the result of fitting them both in
the same shoe.
simple and one more accurate - are described
below:
• With the patient standing in her shoes, feel
for the metatarsophalangeal joint. If the bulge
of the joint is level with the bulge of the shoe,
this measurement is correct.
• Measure the distance from the patient's heel
to both the first and fifth metatarsal heads.
Flex the ball of the shoe and measure the
distance from the heel to the point at which
the shoe bends both medially and laterally.
The medial and lateral measurements from
the foot and the shoe should correspond.
Shoes with a heel to ball length that is too long
will put unnecessary pressure and strain on the
metatarsophalangeal joints, particularly that of
the hallux, as the foot will be trying to flex the
shoe where it is still reinforced by the shank. If
the heel to ball length is too short, it will cause
fewer mechanical problems but will restrict toe
room (Fig. 10.10).
Width
Correct width is also important and should be
sufficient to allow the toes to rest flat on the
insole without being compressed. Very few
fashion shoes are made in width fittings so
fashion shoes are often bought either too narrow
or a size longer than they should be, to benefit
from the corresponding increase in width. In a
 FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 259

shoe of inadequate width the upper will overlap

the sole. Width can be assessed in a patient's
footwear as follows: Sale of
shoe - f - - -
• With the patient standing in her shoes grasp
the upper level with the metatarsal heads and
try to pinch the upper material between the
finger and thumb. If the upper feels tense and
stretched and cannot be pinched, the shoe is
not wide enough. If wrinkles appear then the
shoe may be too wide.
An additional check on width can be made on
shoes with a well-defined throat line. This line
Top piece
governs the maximum width of the shoe as the of heel - - t - - -
seam will not stretch. There should ideally be
enough space under the throat line to accommo-
date the tip of a pencil. If this extra space is not
available, the throat line can bite into the fleshy
dorsal surface of the foot on walking. Figure 10.11 The outlines of shoe and foot from an
Shoes which are too narrow will cause pres- assessment of shoe flare. The medial and lateral
measurements are not the same on the two outlines,
sure lesions on the first and fifth metatarsopha- indicating an inflared shoe but an outflared foot.
langeal joints and the interphalangeal joint of the
fifth toe. In diabetic patients these pressure
lesions can progress rapidly to ulcers.
Other factors affecting fit
Shoe flare. If there is an indication that the
Depth
flare of the foot does not match that of the shoe,
Correct depth is important to prevent pressure this can be assessed as follows (Fig. 10.11): draw
being exerted on the tops of the toes. Unlike round the standing foot and, on the outline pro-
length and width, there is no increase in depth duced, join the centre of the heel to the second
with an increase in shoe size. The depth of a shoe toe. Draw an outline of the shoe and join from a
depends on its last. The degree of recede (see Fig. point below the heel seam at the back of the shoe
10.3) incorporated into the last design will also to a point bisecting the top piece of the heel.
affect the finished depth in the front of the shoe. Extend the line forward to the tip of the sole.
If the patient is wearing, or needs, an orthosis, or Measure the maximum width of the medial and
has a toe deformity, then the depth is likely to be lateral sections of both outlines, noting which
a problem. Inadequate depth causes a bulging section is the widest. The widest part should be
toe puff. It can be assessed as follows: the same in both, and will usually be the medial
sections.
• With the patient standing in shoes ask her to
Inside border shape. Another factor affecting
take a step forward and pause just before toe-
fit is the shape of the front of the shoe and its
off, while still weightbearing equally on both
impact on the inside border (Fig. 10.12). The
feet. Palpate the upper of the flexed foot above
longest point on the foot is usually the great or
the fourtl;). and fifth toes. If the toes are cramped,
second toe, but in shoes, the longest part is tradi-
then the J'epth in the toe puff is inadequate.
tionally in the centre. Toes can often be painlessly
Shoes which are too shallow will cause pres- moulded into pointed toe shapes, but this is
sure lesions on the interphalangeal joints of the likely to cause pain and deformity in the long
toes and can also affect nails. term. A straight inside border is particularly
 260 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
Figure 10.12 Shoes with a straight and a shaped inside
border and the effect on toes.
important for patients in whom the longest part
of the foot is the hallux or who have a tendency
towards hallux valgus. A simple way to demon-
strate to a patient that shoes are unsuitable is to
ask her to stand on an outline of the shoe with the
heels aligned. Any overlap of the toes over the
edge of the outline indicates that the shoe is
incorrectly shaped. Pointed toes are not necessar-
ily unsuitable but the toe shape must start after
the toes and the foot must be prevented from
slipping forward into the space by a strap or
laces.
Fixation. The means by which the foot is
secured within the shoe will also need to be
checked. Not only should the shoe not be worn
too loose or too tight but also some adjustment
should always be possible either to tighten or
loosen the shoe. In a lace-up this means that there
should always be a gap between the rows of
eyelets up the front of the shoe. The effectiveness
of the fixation can be checked by the following
test: with the patient standing with one foot in
front of the other grasp the shoe upper and ask
the patient to lean forward on to the forward
foot. If forward movement can be detected
within the shoe, the fixation is inadequate. It is
likely to be ineffective if the laces do not come far
enough up the instep (three or four eyelet holes
will be needed to give adequate fixation and
opening) or the patient uses elastic laces or leaves
the laces/buckle done up when taking the shoe
on and off, making the shoe a slip-on.
Function. Most of the aspects considered so
far have been static observations. It must be
remembered that the shoe is required to function
during activity as well as rest. The patient
should therefore be observed walking while
wearing their shoes and barefoot and any differ-
ences between the two noted. If the gait is better
barefoot than when shod, there is likely to be
some inadequacy of the shoes. Some points to
compare when walking in and out of footwear
are listed in Table 10.3, together with some pos-
sible causes of differences. Additionally, there
are some aspects of shoe fit which can also be
assessed when walking: the heel should not lift
out of the shoe at each step; the topline should
not gape on flexion; and there should be no
movement of the foot within the shoe.
Fitting problems
Anatomical variations mean that some people
will have more problems finding shoes that fit
than others. An example of this is a combination
of a narrow heel and a wide forefoot. A standard
shoe bought wide enough for the forefoot will
be too loose at the heel. Shoes made on combi-
nation lasts used to be available to fit such feet
but the best solution is a visit to an experienced
Table 10.3 Points to be observed with the patient walking
barefoot and in shoes; any differences between the two sets
of observations should be noted
Observation Possible causes of differences
Step length High heels will tend to cause a shorter
step length
Overall stability This may be affected by sole area
Angle of heel Wear on the inside of a shoe will
increase a tendency to valgus in relation
to the tibia
Heel strike Some footwear can cause a flat-footed
gait
Toe-off Stiff footwear can limit flexion at the
metatarsophalangeal joint; incorrect
heel to ball length may have the same
result

shoe fitter who will know what is currently
obtainable.
Assessment of the fit of a patient's shoes
should be carried out on both feet even if the pre-
senting problem is unilateral. A person's feet are
commonly not identical in size and a pair of
shoes may fit neither foot adequately. Small dif-
ferences in size can be managed by shoes which
fit the larger foot and adaptation for the shoe of
the smaller foot. Differences of two sizes or more
will need odd-sized shoes, as the discrepancy in
heel to ball length will be too great. A list of sup-
pliers of odd-sized pairs can be found by con-
sulting organisations such as the Disabled Living
Foundation (DLF) in the United Kingdom. Some
adaptations to help overcome the problem are
illustrated in leaflets available from the DLF and
the books suggested in Further Reading.
If the assessment shows up any deficiency in
fit and the patient is willing and able to buy new
shoes, suggest a visit to a shoe shop with a
trained shoe fitter and a good stock of different
fittings and last styles. Having feet measured
may be something many people associate only
with buying children's shoes. It is equally impor-
tant for adults to be measured, particularly those
with problem feet. Even specialist shops may
have difficulty fitting feet which are bigger,
wider or narrower than average. If a patient is
having difficulty finding suitable shoes then spe-
cialist organisations like the Disabled Living
Foundation should be consulted for appropriate
manufacturers or stockists.
Wear marks
Assessment of the pattern of wear on the soles
and the uppers of patients' footwear can help to
confirm a diagnosis of foot pathology and may
also highlight deformity elsewhere, e.g. genu
valgum. The patterns are to some extent pre-
dictable, given that the shoes enclose the foot and
will mould to its shape. Well-defined deformities
give classic wear patterns. It is important to be
able to recognise the wear expected from a
normal foot in order to differentiate that which is
abnormal. Abnormal wear presents not only as
an unusual pattern but also as excessive or
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 261
insufficient wear where some wear should be
expected.
Examination of the wear patterns of shoes
will also reveal information about foot function.
Distortions of the uppers can indicate abnormal
frontal plane motion during walking. The wear
marks on the heel and sole will reflect the direc-
tion of the weightbearing pathway during the
gait cycle. Normal wear is the result of a smooth
transfer of load from the heel to the forefoot.
Some gait analysis equipment (Ch. 12) displays
a centre of pressure line and it is logical to
assume that normal wear will occur along this
path (Fig. 10.13).
The degree as well as the pattern of wear must
be assessed, as shoes which are worn out or in
need of repair are unsuitable for regular wear.
One check of the degree of wear is to place the
shoe on a flat surface and gently touch the back,
front and each side. The shoe should be stable
and not rock when touched. If rocking is detected
then the shoe will provide an unstable base for
walking and standing. Checking stance shod and
barefoot will confirm these observations.
Wear on the sale
If the foot is functioning properly and is in a well-
fitting shoe the pressure on the sole of the shoe
Centre of
--+---- pressure line
under foot
Areas showing
normal wear
Figure 10.13 The 'normal' pattern of wear on the sale and
the heel.
 262 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION
should be even and no one part should wear out
excessively. It is normal, however, for signs of
wear to occur under the medial central forefoot
(Fig. 10.13). It is also normal for there to be a
slight curvature of the undersurface of the sole.
An element of this is built into the shoe by incor-
porating toe spring into the last (see Fig. 10.3),
and this is accentuated by normal toe-off in
walking.
Any variation of the above will represent
abnormal sole wear. Some examples follow.
When the slight curvature on the undersurface of
the sole is not apparent, or is not symmetrical or
exaggerated, abnormal toe function is indicated.
This is often the case in patients with rheumatoid
arthritis who may have reduced toe function and
a short stride. Insufficient wear on the posterior
part of the sole indicates a heel to ball length
which is too short and, when combined with
excessive wear, at the tip of the sole, means that
the whole shoe is not long enough. Wear at the
tip of the sole alone may indicate that the shoe
has been made on a last designed without
enough toe spring, but insufficient wear in this
area denotes lack of push-off. Excessive wear to
the sole of the shoe may indicate limited
dorsiflexion if it is towards the front of the sole,
and pes cavus when it is across the tread without
Figure 10.14 The pattern of wear seen in the shoe of a patient with pes cavus.
extending down the lateral border (Fig. 10.14).
An everted forefoot will show excessive wear
along the inner aspect and an inverted forefoot
will be worn along the outer aspect.
Wear marks indicating a circular contact of the
sole with the ground are caused when the
metatarsal area is being used as a pivot, e.g. any
condition that makes use of the toes uncomfort-
able. Examination of the sole will also reveal any
areas of abnormally high pressure, e.g. under a
single metatarsal head.
Wear on the heel
The normal wear on a heel (see Fig. 10.13)
spreads along the posterolateral border of the
heel. Wear is not central, as might be expected,
for several reasons: the entire calcaneus lies
towards the lateral side of the inside of the heel
of the shoe; the weightbearing tubercle is lateral
to the midline of the heel; and the calcaneum is
inverted at heel contact.
Excessive wear along the lateral margin of the
heel may indicate an inverted hindfoot, but this
pattern is also seen in genu varum. Similarly,
excessive wear on the inner aspect of the heel
may indicate a valgus or everted hindfoot, but is
also seen in cases of genu valgum.
 FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 263

Combined heel and sale wear

A combination of excessive wear on the heel and
the ball area of the sole can be seen in pes cavus.
Along the medial border of the heel and sole it
indicates a valgus or everted foot, and on the
outer aspect of the heel and the sole it indicates
inversion. This pattern may also be seen in hallux
rigidus and severe in-toeing. Wear on the outer
side of the heel and the inner side of the sole may
be caused by an out-toed gait (external rotation
of the hip). Unusual combinations/patterns of
wear may simply be the result of a painful area
being offloaded; for example, a painful heel may
result in insufficient heel wear and abnormal
wear in the sole. Figure 10.16 The shoe deformity caused by medial
prominence of the talar head (black arrow) in pes planus.

Crease marks in the upper

Normal creasing of the upper due to flexing
during walking is slightly oblique and follows
the line of the metatarsophalangeal joints. An
excessively oblique crease mark is the sign of
hallux rigidus in which toe-off occurs on the
lateral side of the foot to protect the painful or
rigid hallux (Fig. 10.15). The absence of creases in
worn shoes indicates absence of toe-off, i.e. a
short stride and flat-footed gait.
Deformation of the upper
Distortions of the shoe's upper are caused by
the shoe conforming to common forefoot defor-
mities. Hallux valgus distorts the medial border,
bunionette/tailor's bunion the lateral aspect
and hammer and claw toes create bulges in the
top of the toe puff. Additionally, the heel stiff-
ener may be caused to bulge at the back by
pump bumps, on the lateral side by a varus or
inverted hindfoot, and on the medial side by a
valgus or everted hindfoot. Individuals with flat
feet may distort the medial border because of
the prominence of the talar head (Fig. 10.16).
Scuffed toes are seen when there is a foot-drop
deformity, as the toes are in ground contact
during the swing phase of gait.

A B

Figure 10.15 Crease marks on the upper A. Normal crease marks B. Crease marks with hallux rigidus.
 264 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Examination of the inside of the shoe the most common observations, divided into
The assessment of wear should also include an good and less good aspects. Such a list could be
examination of the inside of the shoe. The wear used as a quick record of the examination by cir-
patterns inside are likely to mirror those found cling the appropriate shoe feature. The suitabil-
on the heel and sole. Additional features such as ity/ unsuitability would then be shown by the
creases, seams or rough areas and even nails column in which the circles had been made.
through the sole may be the cause of localised A shoe which was originally suitable may
lesions. The insock will often display a print of become unsuitable through age. Some shoe com-
the sole of the foot from which the areas taking ponents deteriorate over time, e.g. the insole,
greatest pressure can be observed. which may become cracked or hollowed.
Additionally, feet change shape with age and fit
may be compromised. A shoe may also be unsuit-
Other signs of wear
able if it is inappropriate for the conditions/situ-
The shoes of patients with diabetes mellitus may ation in which it is worn. A common example of
show a characteristic white deposit, sometimes this is found in patients with rheumatoid arthri-
accompanied by deterioration along the inner tis who, because of the difficulty of finding
sides. These signs of wear have been publicised footwear to fit, wear sandals all year round.
by the Shoe and Allied Trades Research
Association (SATRA) who found the white sub-
stance to be glucose and the deterioration due to Everyday shoes
contamination by urine. The preceding checks of suitability, fit and wear
will only be meaningful if they relate to the
Suitability patients' everyday shoes. Even if the shoes
assessed are representative they may be fairly
Table 10.4 lists the points that should be noted in new or have been recently repaired and there is a
the examination of shoe suitability, together with great deal of information to be gained from
examining more than one pair of shoes. New
patients should be routinely asked to bring
Table 10.4 Points to note in examination of shoe suitability
several pairs of footwear for examination. There
Points Good Bad are other occasions when it might be helpful to
see a selection of footwear, e.g. when assessing a
Style of shoes Lace-up, sandal, Court, mule, clog
boot, moccasin patient for orthoses. Another reason for asking to
Method of fixation Lace, buckle and Elastic, none see additional footwear is to overcome the possi-
bar, velcro bility that the shoes, which apparently conform
Heel height Flat High-heeled to the advice given, are being worn only for visits
Upper material Leather Synthetic to the clinic.
Sale material Synthetic, leather
Condition New, scuffed, worn Worn out
Sale wear Normal Abnormal
Hosiery
patterns Socks and stockings that are too small restrict the
Upper crease Normal Abnormal circulation to the foot and can do just as much
pattern
damage to the toes as shoes that do not fit.
Fit Length Good Too small/long
Width Good Too wide/narrow Hosiery fit should therefore be checked at the
Depth Good Too shallow/deep same time as shoe fit and this is particularly
Heel to ball Correct Too long/short important in children, where the foot is still
Flare Good Bad
growing. Socks and stockings may be outgrown,
Construction Welted, cemented, moccasin, moulded
have shrunk with inappropriate washing or
Type Dress, casual, sports, work
simply have been bought too small. The sizing of

stretch socks can lead to confusion as the range of
sizes printed on the label indicates the range
from unstretched to full stretch. Socks will be
more comfortable and cause fewer compression
problems if the unstretched size corresponds to
the shoe size.
The materials used in the manufacture of
hosiery can affect foot health. Socks made of
natural fibres may be needed by patients with
skin conditions such as eczema, but a mixture of
natural fibres and synthetic substances is often
an advantage, as the synthetic material can help
to keep the foot dry. Natural fibres absorb mois-
ture and remain damp. Synthetic fibres let the
moisture pass through to an absorbent surface on
the other side, for example a leather upper. This
REFERENCES
British Footwear Association 1998 Footwear facts and
figures, 1998 edition. British Footwear Association,
London
Frey C 1995 Pain and deformity in women's feet ... are
shoes the cause? Journal of Musculoskeletal Medicine 15:
35-38,43--46
Frey C, Thompson F, Smith J, Sanders M, Horstman H 1992
American Orthopaedic Foot and Ankle Society women's
shoe survey. Foot and Ankle International 2: 78-81
FURTHER READING
Hughes J R (ed) 1982 Footwear and footcare for children.
Disabled Living Foundation, London
Hughes J R 1983 Footcare and footwear for adults. Disabled
Living Foundation, London
Hunt G C (ed) 1988 Physical therapy of the foot and ankle.
Churchill Livingstone, New York
FOOTWEAR ASSESSMENT 265
process, known as wicking, keeps the foot dry
but will not take place if shoes are made of, or
lined with, synthetic material.
SUMMARY
This chapter has described the factors which
should be included in an assessment of footwear.
The reader should now be able to judge the suit-
ability of footwear and whether it is contributing
to the foot problems experienced by the patient.
The ability to use footwear assessment to both
the advantage of the patient and the practitioner
will come only with experience, but it is hoped
that the importance of this often neglected aspect
has been clearly demonstrated.
Lawlor L 1996 Where will this shoe take you? A walk
through the history of footwear. Walker & Company
McCourt F 2000 A problem of attribution in forensic
podiatry. British Journal of Podiatry 13: 107-110
Reardon K 1999 Lowdown on the right shoe. The Times
Weekend 13 March: 5
Stevens G 1995 Society news. Journal of Podiatric Medicine
50: 10
Sources of information
Disabled Living Foundation (DLF), 380-384 Harrow
Road, London W9 2HU
Independent Footwear Retailers Association, PO Box
247, London W4 SEX
Shoe and Allied Trades Research Association
(SATRA), Rockingham Road, Kettering, Northants
NN169JH
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 269

Generation of X-rays 269

The effects of radiation on tissue 270
Radiographic
Ordering an X-ray 270
assessment
Oorsiplantar view (OP) 271
Lateral view (weightbearing) 271 1. Turbutt
Anteroposterior ankle (AP ankle) 273
Axial view of sesamoids 274
Oorsiplantaroblique view 274

Basic radiological assessment 275

Alignment 276
Bone density 282
Cartilage 285
Soft tissue 285

Radiological assessment of specific

pathologies 287
Infection 287 INTRODUCTION
Osteoarthritis 287
Autoimmune disease 288 The role of the specialist in foot disorders is an
Osteochondrosis 289 expanding one. As the knowledge of foot pathol-
Trauma 291 ogy has increased so has the complexity of
Foreign bodies 292
Neoplasia 292 referred cases and treatment regimens. Many
clinical diagnoses can only be confirmed by the
Other imaging modalities 296 use of one of the imaging modalities. This
Computed tomography (CT) 296
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) 296 chapter is designed to give a workable base of
Nuclear medicine - isotope scanning 298 information on the ordering and interpretation of
Fluoroscopy 299 X-rays of the foot, and other imaging techniques,
Ultrasound 299
together with relevant pathological detail. This
Summary 300 knowledge is particularly important for those
involved in surgical practice but has great rele-
vance for all progressive practitioners in foot
health. This chapter should be seen as a starting
point for further reading and development in
this fascinating and rewarding field.
The interpretation of X-rays is complex and
extremely skilled and it should be borne in mind
that it is normal practice within the National
Health Service, and good practice in the private
sector, for all films taken to be reported by a radi-
ologist. In the light of such a report one may add
one's own specific skills and clinical findings to
complete the diagnosis.

GENERATION OF X-RAYS
X-rays are generated by the passage of a high
voltage through a heated coiled tungsten wire
(the cathode) in a toughened glass tube contain-
ing a vacuum, producing free electrons in a
process known as thermionic emission. At the
269
 270 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
other end of the tube is the anode, consisting of
a heavy metal disc, normally tungsten, embed-
ded in a copper bar, which rotates to absorb heat.
When a high potential difference is applied
between the electrodes the electrons from the
cathode stream at high velocity towards the
anode (cathode rays) and bombard the tungsten
target. If a positive nucleus of a target atom is
bombarded by fast-moving free negatively-
charged electrons from another source a repul-
sion and braking effect (the bremsstrahlung
process) takes place. The electrons decelerate
and emit energy in the form of radiation and if
the energy levels are high enough the radiation
is in the form of X-rays. The bombardment of
atoms heavier than sodium, such as tungsten, by
free electrons will produce a high energy wave
of X-rays in the range 10- 7-10-10 em, as well as
other charged particles known as alpha particles,
beta particles and gamma rays. The resulting
X-rays are focused as required by a light-beam
diaphragm - lead shields, visually aligned on
the patient with a beam of light.
Radiation is able to penetrate dense objects for
a certain distance, dependent upon both the
density of the object and the power of the radia-
tion beam. X-rays produced by low voltages,
below 50 kV, will not penetrate tissue for any
great distance and may be considered 'soft'
X-rays. Those produced by higher voltages pene-
trate for increasing distances and are known as
'hard' X-rays.
When an X-ray beam passes through tissues,
such as the foot, and strikes a sensitive film emul-
sion, it produces a chemical change and forms a
negative image of the tissues, which may be
viewed once the film has been processed. The
most dense tissue, i.e. bone, is shown as white
and the less dense tissues are shown as increas-
ing shades of grey and black. In practice it takes
quite a large amount of X-radiation to alter the
film: to reduce the patient dose, the film is nor-
mally placed in a cassette containing rare earth
intensifying screens. These screens fluoresce
when struck by relatively small amounts of radi-
ation and it is the fluorescence that changes the
film. This reduces the radiation dosage required
by up to 90%, depending on the type of screen,
and is therefore far safer for the patient and oper-
ator. The SI unit of radiation absorbed dose is the
gray (Cy).
The effects of radiation on tissue
All ionising radiations are harmful to living
tissue, and must be accorded the greatest
respect. It is a firm principle that the advantage
to the patient of having a radiographic exami-
nation should outweigh the associated radiation
hazard. Effects of radiation may be somatic or
genetic. Radiation suppresses the ability of cells
to reproduce. The sensitivity to radiation is
related to oxygen saturation of the cells. Neural
tissue is the least sensitive, and blood cells and
bone marrow are the most easily damaged,
leading to anaemia and leukaemia in severe
cases of overexposure. The thyroid gland and
the lens of the eye are also vulnerable. The
gonads are radiosensitive and temporary or per-
manent sterility, or even genetic mutations, can
be caused by the excessive irradiation of the
gonads of a person of reproductive age
(Swallow et al 1986). However, the low level of
dosage received in most properly conducted
radiographic examinations, and in particular
with the foot, means that there is absolutely
minimal risk of any damage.
ORDERING AN X-RAY
Any practitioner in the United Kingdom who
wishes to clinically or physically direct Xvradia-
tion must have core knowledge training as stipu-
lated in the Ionising Radiation (Medical
Exposure) Regulations 2000. The course, usually
arranged by physicists, will make the practi-
tioner aware of all the safety aspects and the code
of practice relating to the direction of radiation. If
the patient is referred by the practitioner to an X-
ray department the core knowledge training is
not necessary as the radiologist is deemed to be
clinically directing the examination.
For an investigation to be of maximum use to
the practitioner the reason for the referral, any
relevant clinical history, the information sought,
the views required and whether or not they

should be taken weightbearing must be clearly
specified to the radiographer and the radiologist.
Wasted time, missed diagnoses and unnecessary
radiation exposure can result from a poor
request.
One of the important questions on any X-ray
request form relates to the recent menstrual
history of any female patient of childbearing
age. This is to protect any early fetus from
potential radiation exposure. A female patient
of childbearing age should be asked whether or
not she might be pregnant. If she cannot be
certain the form should be clearly marked
accordingly. In fact radiographs of the foot, cor-
rectly taken by a radiographer, present no
hazard to any fetus, as the dosage is low, the
beam is not angled towards the abdomen and
gonad protection can be used. It is therefore
unlikely that a radiographer will refuse to X-ray
the foot of a pregnant woman (National
Radiological Protection Board).
It .is important that at least two views of any
portion of the anatomy are obtained. As an
X-ray is a two-dimensional rendition of a three-
dimensional object, pathological changes cannot
be properly assessed without more than one
perspective. It should also be remembered that
an X-ray image will inevitably have some
enlargement and distortion of size compared to
the actual structures.
. In gene~al it may be said that weightbearing
VIews, WIth the patient standing in normal
angle and base of gait, are of most use to the
practitioner. It is then legitimate for certain bio-
mechanical features to be deduced as well as
pathological features. Otherwise, such deduc-
tions are little more than guesswork. However,
it should perhaps be noted at this point that the
ordering of X-rays for routine biomechanical
assessment is not good practice, involving radi-
ation exposure which is generally considered to
be unnecessary.
Some of the most commonly requested views,
and the reasons for taking them, are shown
below. However, it should be borne in mind
that there are many variations and other
options in favour with various departments of
radiology.
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 271
Dorsiplantar view (DP)
This is a general-purpose view, taken either
weightbearing (WB) or non-weightbearing
(NWB), which will show the majority of the foot
~rom the midtarsal area distally. The X-ray beam
IS angled at 15° to the naviculocuboid joint as
shown in Figure 11.1. Some departments will
take both feet simultaneously, and the beam will
be directed between the feet at the level of the
first metatarsophalangeal joint. The neck of
the talus, the distal edge of the calcaneum, the
tarsus, metatarsus and digits will be clearly seen
(Fig. 11.2). Normally the bodies of the talus and
the calcaneum will be occluded by superimposi-
tion of the lower ends of the tibia and fibula.
Lateral view (weightbearing)
This is taken with the beam at right angles to the
foot, centred on the styloid process with the
medial side of the foot close up against the cas-
sette (Fig. 11.3). The entire lateral view of the foot
should be visible (Fig. 11.4). This view will
clearly show the tibial and fibular malleoli super-
imposed over the talus, as well as the calcaneum
the subtalar joint, calcaneocuboid joint and talo~
navicular joint. The midtarsal complex will be
partially obscured by the multiple superimposi-
tions of the cuneiforms and metatarsocuneiform
articulations, although the first metatarso-
\ ,
, I'
\./
\
Figure 11.1 Positioning for dorsiplantar (DP) view.
272 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Figure 11.3 Positioning for lateral view.

..
Figure 11.2 Dorsiplantar view shows a mild hallux
abductus deformity. Note also the bipartite medial sesamoid,
and additional sesamoid under the second and fifth
metatarsal heads.

Figure 11.4 Positioning for lateral view (weightbearing). A typical lateral view, giving a good outline of the talus, calcaneum
and medial column. Compare with Figure 11.16.
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 273

cuneiform joint should be well seen. The lesser

metatarsals will be partially superimposed over
each other, although the first metatarsal and
hallux, and the structure of the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint, should be easily distinguish-
able.

Anteroposterior ankle (AP ankle)

This is a view taken with the beam directed along
the longitudinal axis of the foot towards the \
ankle (Fig. 11.5). It is particularly ordered when I \~/
ankle injury is suspected. It will show virtually \
\
no detail of the forefoot, due to marked superim- /
position, but it is designed to clearly demarcate
the trochlear surface of the talus and the articula-
tions with the tibia and fibula (Fig. 11.6). The
malleoli are very clearly seen. Avulsion fractures, Figure 11.5 Positioning for anteroposterior view of ankle
which occur with inversion and eversion injuries, (AP ankle).
can usually be seen on this view.

Figure 11.6 Anteroposterior view of ankle. This view clearly shows the lower ends of the tibia and fibula and outlines the
trochlear surface of the talus. In this case there is a history of an old avulsion fracture of the fibular malleolus and non-
union of a small fragment at the apex.
 274 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

This view is sometimes taken as a non-weight-

bearing stress radiograph in which the foot is held
in inversion or eversion and the amount of liga-
mentous damage is checked by assessing the
degree of tilt of the talus available in the joint.
This can naturally be a painful procedure and
may require an anaesthetic. .. \

Axial view of sesamoids

Although not commonly standard this view can
be most helpful if degenerative change is sus-
pected in the sesamoids under the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint. The beam is angled towards
the sesamoids with the foot flexed at the metatar-
sophalangeal joints (Fig. 11.7). A special position-
ing platform may be used in some departments,
but more usually the patient will be asked to
retract the toes with the assistance of a loop of
bandage. The view will show the ends of the
metatarsals, and the sesamoidal relationship
with the metatarsal will be clearly demarcated,
along with any enlargement or disease (Fig. 11.8).
Dorsiplantar oblique view
The oblique view is a non-weightbearing view
which may be taken in several ways. The most
Figure 11.7 Positioning for axial view ofsesamoids.
common method is for the patient to sit and
incline the foot at approximately 45° to the cas-
sette, with the beam centred on the naviculo-
cuboid joint perpendicular to the dorsum of the
foot (Fig. 11.9). This view gives a distorted image
of the midtarsal area, but is particularly useful for
the open view given of the articular facets in the
area (Fig. 11.10). Degenerative changes and
pathology such as tarsal coalitions may be readily
distinguished.

Figure 11.8 Axial view ofsesamoids. The sesamoids under the head ofthe first metatarsal are clearly seen, together with
the intersesamoidal ridge. In addition, there is a sesamoid underlying the fifth metatarsal head.
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 275

Figure 11.9 Positioning for dorsiplantar oblique view (OP

oblique).

BASIC RADIOLOGICAL
ASSESSMENT
There is a vast amount of information that may
be deduced from the careful study of an X-ray.
Increased or decreased bone density, soft tissue
abnormalities, age, degenerative change, trauma,
metabolic disease, biomechanical abnormalities,
foreign bodies and surgical interventions will all
be reflected in the film. It takes much practice
and knowledge to detect some of the subtler
alterations in appearance. For this reason it can
help to adopt a system of assessment in order to
avoid missing important basic clues to a disorder.
A system which has found favour amongst some
is known as the ABCS of radiological assessment,
where:
A = Alignment and variations
B = Bone density
C = Cartilage
S = Soft tissue.

Figure 11.10 Oorsiplantar oblique view. In this non-

weightbearing view it is possible to see the articular facets
of the midtarsal joint complex much more clearly than with a
weightbearing OP view. Although distorted, it also gives a
useful alternative view of the other joints.
 276 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Alignment
In order to make judgements about the biome-
chanical features of a particular foot as seen on
X-ray it is important to decide how the picture
was taken. One cannot assess with accuracy any
osseous malalignment if the film was not taken
weightbearing, and preferably in normal angle
and base of gait. Since not many imaging
departments actually take films in this way, a
cautious approach should be adopted. How-
ever, one may certainly make some generalisa-
tions about the appearance of a 'normal' foot on
weightbearing dorsiplantar and lateral views. It
is sometimes useful to draw angles and refer-
ence points on acetate sheets overlying the
films. Angles quoted below should be consid-
ered as broad guidelines only.
In this section the commonly seen anatomical
variations, in particular accessory sesamoids,
will be discussed.

Oorsiplantar view (OP)

Commencing at the rearfoot, first examine the
relationship between the talus and the calca-
neum (Fig. 11.11). Normally there will be con-
siderable superimposition of the talus over the
calcaneum, and there will be a small notch, the
talocalcaneal notch, between the two at their
distal edges. In a pronated foot, as the talus
adducts and plantarflexes relative to the calca-
neum, this notch will increase. In a supinated
-foot the notch disappears and the superimposi-
tion becomes complete.
Moving distally, look carefully at the talonav-
icular and calcaneocuboid articulations. In a
pronated foot the head of the talus will move
progressively out of alignment with the cupped
surface of the navicular. In a severely pronated
foot of long duration there may be a flattening
and remodelling of the talar head on the medial Figure 11.11 Dorsiplantar view (weightbearing). A case of
side, with as little as 20% (normal 60-70%) of a moderate hallux abductovalgus deformity which exhibits
mild pronation at the subtalar joint, as evidenced by
the articular cartilage surface remaining within adduction of the head of the talus and relative abduction of
the normal confines of the joint. There will be a the lesser tarsus. There are increases in the metatarsus
progressive abduction of the cuboid, the navic- primus varus angle and the hallux abductus angle, and the
hallux is laterally displaced and slightly rotated into valgus.
ular and the three cuneiforms as pronation There is a lateral displacement of the sesamoids into the
increases. This lesser tarsus abduction angle may intermetatarsal space.

be measured against a bisection of the tarsus
(Fig. 11.12). The shift of the talus and lesser
tarsus are somewhat reversed in a supinated
foot structure, although the talus clearly cannot
move very far laterally and there is a denser
superimposition of the bones.
The articular surface of the navicular with the
three cuneiforms should be clearly visible. It
should be possible to see the outlines of the
cuneiforms, but it can be difficult to see the facets
of all the intercuneiform joints due to superim-
position. In a case of osteoarthritic degeneration
the joints of the whole lesser tarsus can become
indistinct.
Figure 11.12 Biomechanical evaluation of a DP view.
Diagram to show: lesser tarsus abduction angle (A),
metatarsus adductus angle (B), metatarsus primus adductus
angle (C) and hallux abductus angle (D).
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 277
Further distally the metatarso cuneiform
joints, the fifth metatarsocuboid joint and the
intermetatarsal joints are visible, although
superimposed. There is a notch present between
the first and second metatarsal bases, the
metatarsocuneiform split, greater in some cases
than others. This may be related to the angle of
the distal surface of the medial cuneiform. The
base of the first metatarsal appears to have an
additional transverse facet. This is in fact a
superimposition of the plantar aspect of the
metatarsal base, which is cup-shaped.
The lesser four metatarsals are normally par-
allel and virtually straight, with the fifth
metatarsal sometimes exhibiting a lateral
bowing, depending on the exact angle of the
X-ray beam. A longitudinal bisection may be
drawn of the second metatarsal and compared
to a bisection of the lesser tarsus. The resulting
angle, the metatarsus adduction angle, can be of
some value in determining whether or not the
condition of metatarsus adductus exists (Fig.
11.12). Some authorities believe that a normal
range would be 10-20°, with a higher figure
indicating that the condition is present. There
will be an increase of this angle in a supinated
foot and greater superimposition of the
metatarsal bases over each other.
Of great importance is the relationship
between the first metatarsal and the others.
Construction of longitudinal bisections of the
first and second metatarsals enables the metatar-
sus primus adducius angle to be measured
(Fig. 11.12). Most authorities consider that the
norm is 8-10°. Naturally, this angle increases
dramatically in cases of metatarsus primus
adductus, a component of a hallux abductoval-
gus deformity, and the intermetatarsal space
widens.
The first metatarsal sesamoids normally lie
approximately 0.5 em proximal to the articular
surface of the metatarsal head, approximately in
the midline, and should appear as two smooth
ovoid structures. They may be bipartite or multi-
partite. This does not necessarily indicate disease
or injury, although sesamoids can fracture like
any other bone. Since they underlie the
metatarsal there is an increased depth of bone for
 278 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
the X-ray to penetrate. As a result they appear
more dense than the rest of the metatarsal. In a
case of developing hallux abductus, the
sesamoids progressively move laterally, with the
lateral sesamoid eventually ending up in the
interspace between the first and second
metatarsals, the medial sesamoid following
closely behind. The sesamoidal position can be
plotted against the metatarsal bisection if
required.
The drawing of arcs from the intersection of
the metatarsal bisections allows the relative
lengths of the first and second metatarsals to
be assessed, the metatarsal protrusion distance
(Fig. 11.13). This latter measurement is generally
considered normal at ± 2 mm.
In the ideal foot the hallux articulates com-
pletely with the metatarsal. If a bisection of the
shaft is drawn and compared to the metatarsal
bisection the hallux abduction angle can be mea-
sured (see Fig. 11.12). The hallux may normally
deviate laterally by a small amount, compensat-
ing in effect for the normal metatarsus primus
adductus angle. Less than 15° is generally con-
sidered acceptable. In hallux abductus this angle
increases and the articulation becomes progres-
sively less congruous until a partial lateral sub-
luxation occurs, with only a relatively small
Xmm
Figure 11.13 Measurement of metatarsal protrusion
distance. Bisections ofthe metatarsal shafts are extended
proximally, and arcs are drawn to the articular surfaces. The
distance between the two arcs is measured.
portion of the cartilaginous surfaces in apposi-
tion. The valgus rotation that occurs may be
clearly seen in advanced cases, with the plantar
condyles of the proximal phalanx becoming pro-
gressively more visible. The resultant degenera-
tive changes will be discussed later.
Deviation of the cartilaginous surface of the
metatarsal can in some cases be identified and
quantified by construction of the proximal articu-
lar set angle (PASA). This angle has relevance in
the planning of surgical procedures for hallux
abductovalgus (Fig. 11.14). A deviation in
the shaft of the proximal phalanx of the hallux
itself can be identified by drawing the distal
articular set angle (DASA) (Fig. 11.15). This type
of deformity is sometimes responsible for the
abduction deformity sometimes seen in a hallux
when the first metatarsophalangeal joint align-
ment is normal.
Occasionally, a hallux will have an interpha-
langeal joint abduction deformity which can lead
to the distal abduction deformity sometimes
referred to as 'terminal valgus'.
The alignment of the digits may vary. Even the
most normal toes are not actually straight, but they
should sit congruously on to the ends of the
metatarsals. However, abduction, adduction, sub-
luxation, dislocation and flexion deformities are
Figure 11.14 Proximal articular set angle (PASA). Aline
representing the limits ofthe articular cartilage on the
metatarsal head is compared to a perpendicular to the
bisection ofthe metatarsal shaft.
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 279

DASA
Figure 11.15 Distal articular set angle (DASA). A line
representing the articular surface of the proximal phalanx is
compared to a perpendicular to the bisection of the
phalangeal shaft.
exceedingly common. The superimposition of
sometimes very small phalanges can sometimes
make it difficult to decide on the presence or
absence of bony ankyloses or other pathologies.
Lateral view
A weightbearing lateral view will yield much
useful information (Fig. 11.16). The malleoli of
the tibia and fibula will be seen superimposed
over the trochlear surface of the talus. The malle-
oli should be smooth in outline, as should the
trochlear surface. The talus should be domed.
Undue flattening or irregularity may be indica-
tive of degenerative disease.
The facets of the subtalar joint should be
clearly demarcated and the sustentaculum tali
and sinus tarsi readily apparent. The facets and
the sinus tarsi become obscured in a pronated
foot and more visible in a supinated one. The
calcaneum is inclined to the supporting surface,
and the calcaneal inclination angle can be easily
measured (Fig. 11.17). The normal angle will
vary according to the midtarsal joint axes of
motion for any particular foot: 0-10° would be
considered low, 11-20° medium and 21-30°
high. However, the measured angle will vary

Figure 11.16 Lateral view (weightbearing). In this pronated foot the talus is displaced medially and plantarly, obscuring the
facets of the subtalar joint. The cyma line has a marked anterior break, with the smooth curve being invisible, and a bisection
of the talar neck would clearly fall below the level of the first metatarsal shaft. The calcaneal inclination angle is low. Compare
this foot to that shown in Figure 11.4.
 280 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
Figure 11.17 Diagram of lateral view. Note the cyma line
(A-B), declination of the talus (C) and calcaneal inclination
angle (0).
according to whether or not the foot is abnor-
mally pronated or supinated and clinical judge-
ment is important. While looking at the
calcaneum one should check for the presence of
retrocalcaneal enlargement in the area of the
Achilles tendon insertion (Haglund's defor-
mity) or for spur formation on the distal plantar
aspect, bearing in mind that many so-called
spurs are completely asymptomatic.
A bisection through the sloping body and neck
of the talus will demonstrate the talar declination
angle in relation to the supporting surface (Fig.
11.17). A continuation of this line will normally
fall within the confines of the first metatarsal
shaft. In a pronated foot the talar declination
angle increases and the line falls below the first
metatarsal. Conversely, it will rise above it in a
supinated foot as the talus is relatively adducted
and dorsiflexed.
The talonavicular and calcaneocuboid joints
together produce a superimposition on a lat-
eral X-ray known as the cyma line (Fig. 11.17).
These curved joints together form a reverse
'lazy 5' as an intact curve in a normal foot.
In a pronated foot the '5' becomes broken
as the talonavicular joint moves anterior and
plantar to the calcaneocuboid joint, and
once again the reverse occurs in a supinated
foot.
In a severely pronated foot the talus and nav-
icular plantarflex and exert a downward and ret-
rograde tilting force on the posterior aspect of the
medial cuneiform, resulting in a naviculo-
cuneiform fault. In such cases the intermediate
cuneiform, not normally visible, may be seen
protruding above the medial cuneiform.
Less commonly, a calcaneocuboid fault may be
seen in a high-arched foot. In this situation the
cuboid may become partially displaced under
the anterior plantar process of the calcaneum.
In a case of restricted subtalar joint motion it is
worth carefully assessing the tarsus to eliminate
the possibility of a tarsal coalition, although an
oblique view is generally more help in this
regard.
In the midtarsal region there is considerable
superimposition, and it can take some time to
distinguish the metatarsal bases from the
cuneiforms. Any degenerative changes in the
midtarsal region can usually be seen outlined
along the dorsal surfaces.
The first and fifth metatarsals are normally
easily outlined, with the others being partially
superimposed. In a supinated foot one may more
clearly see the second, third and fourth
metatarsals. In a pronated foot the superimposi-
tion becomes more complete, and it may only be
possible to clearly distinguish the first
metatarsal.
At first metatarsophalangeal joint level one
may see the medial and sometimes the lateral
sesamoids, appearing as two ovoid structures
approximately 1.0 cm diameter that are more
dense due to superimposition. Their position
and outline, which should normally be smooth,
should be ascertained. These sesamoids may be
bipartite or multipartite and are as subject to
degenerative change as any other osseous struc-
ture. Osteoarthritis will produce enlargement
and irregularity in the sesamoids. The dorsal
aspect of the metatarsophalangeal joint should
be assessed for degeneration. The hallux should
normally lie in line with the metatarsal, being
neither dorsiflexed nor plantarflexed. Similarly,
at the interphalangeal joint look for hyperexten-
sion, flexion or degeneration. The distal phalanx
can be conveniently checked for distal tufting or
exostosis formation.
The lesser metatarsophalangeal joints are
sometimes visible, and in particular it can be
possible to pick out dorsal subluxation or
dislocation.

Anatomical variation
There are many variations of anatomical form,
such as the accessory ossicles, which occur fre-
quently enough to be considered 'normal vari-
ants', and others which represent interesting
hereditary and congenital malformations of
varying degrees of severity. Accessory ossicles
occur regularly in association with all the major
bones in the foot (Figs 11.18 and 11.19). Most give
no cause for concern, but a proportion give rise to
symptoms, particularly following trauma or
sporting activity, and should certainly be consid-
ered in a differential diagnosis.
1
Figure 11.18 Accessory ossicles of the foot: 1. as tibiale
externum; 2. processus uncinatus; 3. as intercuneiforme;
4. parsponea metatarsalia; 5. cuboideum secundarium;
6. as peroneum; 7. as vesalianum; 8. as inter-
metatarseum; 9. as naviculare; 10. as trigonum.
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 281
Os trigonum. This ossicle is a secondary epi-
physis, found on the posterior aspect of the
trochlear surface of the talus, which fails to fuse
to the talus in about 8% of the population. It can
give rise to symptoms when the foot is regularly
plantarflexed, or subject to injury, as in foot-
baIlers and ballet dancers.
Os tibiale externum. This ossicle lies under the
insertion of tibialis posterior as it crosses the nav-
icular, and is subject to problems following
forced abduction or eversion injuries.
Os peroneum. This ossicle lies under peroneus
longus in the peroneal groove of the cuboid and
is sometimes not noticed except on a lateral or
oblique X-ray. Occasionally, it can be sympto-
matic, particularly in a supinated foot.
Os vesalianum. This ossicle is a secondary epi-
physis at the fifth metatarsal base and must be
differentiated from an avulsion fracture.
Generally, a fracture will have a longitudinal ori-
entation and an irregular outline, compared to
the transverse orientation and smooth contour of
the ossicle.
Metatarsophalangeal joint sesamoids and inter-
phalangeal joint sesamoids. These sesamoids
occur regularly in varying numbers under any of
the joints, and can be symptomatic. In particular,
the hallux interphalangeal joint may have a
sesamoid which is troublesome, particularly in a
hyperextended joint. This sesamoid appears as a
small ovoid on a dorsiplantar view, but may have
an inverted triangular section on lateral view.
Polydactyly. The presence of additional pha-
langes or complete digits is common enough to
be seen in varying forms. Brachydactyly, the
partial failure of development of a metatarsal
segment or phalanges, is less common and, like
polydactyly, has a hereditary predisposition (Fig.
11.20). Cases of congenital aplasia, with complete
failure of development of a segment, are even
more rare.
Coalitions. These may take several forms, and
may be fibrous (syndesmosis), cartilaginous (syn-
chondrosis) or osseous (synostosis). The more
common forms are the talonavicular bar, the cal-
caneonavicular bar and the talocalcaneal bar (Fig.
11.21), all of which will limit subtalar joint motion
and are most easily viewed on oblique X-rays.
 282 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
-----_ ..._ - -

Figure 11.19 Accessory ossicles - os tibiale externum. In this case, os tibiale externum occurs bilaterally in a slightly
pronated foot. The ossicle on the right foot is bipartite.

Other coalitions, such as intermetatarsal bars, may

also be found. Suspected coalitions need to be
confirmed with computed tomographic (CT) or
magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scans, which
can give much more detailed images.

Bone density
Bone is in a constant state of change: new bone
formation by osteoblasts normally being balanced
by the resorptive activity of osteoclasts. These
activities are governed by the endocrine systems,
and are also altered by chemical and vitamin
factors in the blood, by diet, by malabsorption
from the gut, by disease and repair processes and
by physical forces to which the bone is subjected.
The growth and maturation processes are
beyond the scope of this chapter, but are well
described in many standard textbooks, e.g.
Parsons (1980) and Kumar & Clark (1990).
An area of increased density to X-rays, which
will produce a whiter shadow on the film, is
known as increased radiopacity; decreased density,

Figure 11.20 Brachydactyly. There is a marked congenital

shortening of the fourth metatarsal and phalanges. The digit
is actually dorsally displaced, and in this case the condition
was bilateral.

Figure 11.21 Tarsal coalition. In this dorsiplantar oblique
view there is clear evidence of a talocalcaneal coalition. The
patient had no subtalar joint motion available and was
suffering increasing pain in the rearfoot. The condition was
later confirmed with a CT scan (Fig. 11.35).
which will give a blacker shadow, is called
increased radiolucency. The appearance of
increased density of bone on an X-ray is known
as osteosclerosis or eburnation, while decreased
density is called osieopenia. The term 'osteoporo-
sis' is nowadays reserved for a decrease in bone
density due to pathological conditions, and will
be dealt with later in the chapter. A sclerotic area
will appear whiter on the film, since a greater
amount of radiation will have been absorbed by
the bone and osteopenic areas will be darker.
Assessment of density by the naked eye is the
normal everyday method, but it takes time and
much experience before one may be confident of
accurate judgement. There are some scientific
methods for the evaluation of bone density
which may be used by radiologists (National
Osteoporosis Society 1993). Dual energy X-ray
absorptiometry (OEXA) is used on the spine and
femoral neck. Single-photon or dual-photon absorp-
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 283
tiometry (SPA or OPA) measures bone density in
the forearm. Quantitative computed tomography
(QCT) is an expensive method used on the spine.
Investigations are under way into the effective-
ness of ultrasonic scanning on the calcaneum.
X-rays themselves are of little use for early diag-
nosis, as bone loss of 30% can occur before radio-
logical changes are apparent.
An adult foot with normal bone density will
show several clearly defined features:
• The dense outer cortices will be clearly visible
as more sclerotic areas, an average of 1-2 mm
thick, around the periphery of the short bones
and along the shafts of the long bones,
petering out at the metaphyseal areas; in the
phalanges, which are considerably narrower,
the cortical thickness is still maintained and
thus the cortex may appear to account for a
relatively larger amount of the shaft.
• The medullary cavities appear as relatively
radiolucent areas and the cancellous bone is
traversed by fine trabecular patterns which
extend into the epiphyses. The trabeculae are
lamellae arranged to withstand forces and
can be more marked in areas of high stress.
The calcaneum often exhibits good examples
of trabeculation.
• The proximal and distal articular surfaces of
the long bones have a fine sclerotic line
around the perimeter, which is normally
uninterrupted. This line may increase in
thickness if the density of the bone increases
when subject to extra stresses, or may
disappear in certain disease processes.
• The metatarsals often show a U-shaped
sclerotic line at the metaphyseal junction with
the epiphysis, which must not be confused
with a fracture.
In a juvenile foot the epiphyseal lines will still
be visible as radiolucent transverse lines. The
appearance of the epiphyses will depend upon
the stage of development.
Osteoporosis
Probably the most well-known cause of osteo-
porosis is the decrease in hormone production
 284 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
which occurs at the menopause: 30% of post-
menopausal women will suffer significant osteo-
porosis, which is largely preventable with
replacement therapy. It is less well known that
approximately 5% of men in middle age will also
develop osteoporosis (National Osteoporosis
Society 1993).
Hypopituitarism reduces bone growth and pro-
duces short, slender bones with thin cortices.
There are delays in epiphyseal fusion.
Hyperactivity of the adrenal glands, or a pitu-
itary adenoma, may cause the generalised osteo-
porosis of Cushing's syndrome. There are around
11 000 sufferers from Turner's syndrome in the UK,
who have undeveloped ovaries and are likely to
have osteoporosis.
Hyperthyroidism, which could be due to exces-
sive thyroid hormone replacement therapy,
increases the rate of bone remodelling. Faster
resorption than new bone formation occurs,
which may cause thinning of the cortices. Stress
fractures can occur in the long bones.
Interference with vitamin 0 intake or one of
several disorders of vitamin D metabolism causes
rickets in children, i.e. prior to epiphyseal closure,
and osteomalacia in adults. Malabsorption due to
intestinal disease or gastrectomy may be a factor.
Sufferers from anorexia nervosa or bulimia
should be considered at-risk patients for osteo-
porosis, as should ballet dancers and gymnasts
who may deliberately starve themselves. In chil-
dren this leads to characteristic deformities of
wrists and legs, with enlargement and irregulari-
ties of the epiphyseal plates, and generalised
osteoporosis due to failure of the osteoid tissue to
mineralise. In the adult there is softening and
deformation of the bones, with diminished
density. There may be evidence of stress fractures.
Hyperparathyroidism, due to hyperplasia of the
parathyroid glands (primary type), persistent
stimulation due to low serum calcium levels (sec-
ondary type) or an adenoma (tertiary type) or car-
cinoma, will reduce bone density by resorption of
calcium salts. Not all cases will show definite
osseous changes, but there may be subperiosteal
thinning of the long bone cortices, particularly the
digits, and distal resorption. 'Brown tumours'
may be noted expanding the long bone shafts and
there may be calcification of joint cartilages, chon-
drocalcinosis, in long-standing cases.
Osteoporosis occurs on a local level following
a period of disuse of a limb: e.g. after injury or
surgery when immobilisation has been
employed; quite marked demineralisation can
sometimes be seen, temporarily, following a
metatarsal osteotomy, which quickly reverses
when stress and function return. Occasionally,
there is an abnormal response to quite minor
injury, leading to the condition of reflex sympa-
thetic dystrophy. As well as swelling, pain and
stiffness which are out of proportion to the
injury, there may be radiographic evidence of
irregular mottled osteoporosis distal to the
injury site. This radiographic appearance is
known as Sudeck's atrophy.
Autoimmune disease processes such as
rheumatoid arthritis produce specific bone
density changes which will be dealt with later.
Finally, it is known that excessive smoking or
alcohol intake may playa part in osteoporosis.
Osteosclerosis
One may also see increased bone density on
X-ray. Most commonly it is found in areas of
higher stress, where the osteoblastic activity
increases to cope with the forces. This will also be
observed around healing fracture sites. In these
cases the resulting bone will always be sclerotic
even after the resorptive osteoclastic activity.
Hypoparathyroidism, a deficiency of parathor-
mone, results in blood calcium levels falling and
phosphate levels rising. The syndrome can result
in short lesser metatarsals, calcification in some
ligaments of the spine and in some cases
increased sclerosis.
Hypervitaminosis D can lead to increased distal
metaphyseal calcification and calcium deposits in
the skin and periosteum.
Paget's disease is a common disorder of
unknown origin, although there may be inherited
factors. There is speculation and research into a
low-grade viral involvement. It is secondary in
prevalence to osteoporosis and 0.5-1.0% of 45-54-
year-olds and 10-20% of those over 85 will be
affected. Males are more commonly affected than

females. Symptoms such as paraesthesia and pain
are frequently related to nerve compression. The
disease causes excessive bone resorption fol-
lowed by haphazard new bone formation and
remodelling. Isolated bones or the entire skeleton
may be involved, and severe characteristic thick-
ening and deformity may result. The foot is rarely
involved except for the calcaneum. Although the
bones are very enlarged and appear dense on X-
ray they are of poor quality; microfractures are
not uncommon. It should be remembered that
Paget's disease predisposes to an increased inci-
dence of osteosarcoma and fibrosarcoma,
although less than 1% progress to a malignancy.
Metastatic bone disease from primary carcino-
mata elsewhere, such as the breast, may show
sclerotic deposits, although the majority of
metastases produce lytic changes. Secondary
metastases are uncommon, but not unknown, in
the foot. Some primary bone tumours also
produce sclerotic changes, and these will be dealt
with separately.
Osteopetrosis (Albers-Schonberg disease or
marble bone disease) is a rare hereditary disorder
causing thickening of the trabeculae in all the
bones; in particular there may be dense bands in
the vertebrae. Although the bones are dense they
are more susceptible to shear forces and may
fracture more easily.
Increased fluorine ingestion (fluorosis) over
many years may result in the laying down of new
bone inside the medullary cavity of long bones,
leading to a sclerotic appearance. There may also
be periosteal outgrowths.
Epiphyseal, metaphyseal and diaphyseal dus-
plasias, which form a whole group of hereditary
and congenital traits, may lead to many permu-
tations of growth disorders, some of which
involve increased bone density.
Cartilage
Ordinarily one does not see cartilage on X-ray as
it is radiolucent. The condition of cartilage really
has to be assessed by the relationship of the adja-
cent bones in a joint. For example, a healthy
metatarsophalangeal joint will show smoothly
outlined joint surfaces evenly separated by
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 285
1-2 mm of blackness, which represents the carti-
laginous surfaces. Careful examination may
reveal the approximate edges of the cartilage sur-
faces. In a joint which is malaligned or commenc-
ing a disease process one of the first signs will be
changes in the cartilage space. This can usefully
be compared to similar joints elsewhere in the
foot. The space may become narrowed evenly or
unevenly, may become calcified and may eventu-
ally disappear totally, for example in advanced
osteoarthrosis, or may be increased in cases of
joint effusion or early rheumatoid disease. These
conditions will be dealt with later under the head-
ings of arthritis and rheumatoid disease.
Soft tissue
On a normal X-ray there will be very little soft
tissue evident although the outline of the foot
will be delineated. There will be no details else-
where and any space-occupying lesion would
have to be diagnosed purely on bony malalign-
ment in the same way as cartilage damage. For
example an intermetatarsal bursa may cause
splaying of the adjacent metatarsals and proxi-
mal phalanges. It is important in the primary
assessment of the film to compare soft tissue
thicknesses and densities with other sections of
the feet. With a 'soft' X-ray taken at a lower
power there will be progressively more soft
tissue visible. If the X-ray has been particularly
requested for a suspected soft tissue lesion this
should be clearly stated on the request form. It is
sometimes possible to see the shadow of a neo-
plasm such as a large ganglion (Fig. 11.22), but
this cannot be relied on for diagnosis.
Soft tissues can become more visible when
involved in disease processes. Long-standing dia-
betes may cause calcification of the small arteries,
which appear as small white 'worms', particu-
larly between the first and second metatarsals
along the course of the dorsalis pedis artery.
Similar changes may be seen in cases of hyper-
parathyroidism and arteriosclerosis. Other
tissues may have calcareous deposits, particu-
larly the muscles and tendons following injury, in
which case the condition is known as myositis
ossificans. All bursae are capable of undergoing
 286 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Figure 11.23 Bursal calcification. This case of hallux

abductovalgus had an overlying bursa within which was
found an area of calcification. Note also the early
Figure 11.22 Ganglion. On this dorsi plantar oblique view a
manifestations of osteoarthritic degeneration in the joint.
large ganglionic cyst is seen arising from the lateral aspect
of the tarsus. The X-ray cannot demarcate the origin.
Clinically, the growth was approximately 4 ern in diameter
and very tense. An incidental finding is the presence of an
accessory ossicle, os peroneum, on the lateral aspect of the
cuboid.

degenerative calcification. This is not uncommon

at the first metatarsophalangeal joint (Fig. 11.23).
Sinus tracts may also calcify.
The skin and subdermal tissues may exhibit
the crystalline sodium urate monohydrate
deposits of gout, usually close to a joint. In
untreated gout the joint will show degenerative
arthritic change with characteristic punched-out
erosions near the joint margins (Fig. 11.24). In
pseudogout there are depositions of pyrophos-

Figure 11.24 Gout. This radiograph shows gout attacking

both first metatarsophalangeal joints. The joints have clearly
'punched-out' erosions associated with gross degenerative
changes. There is a large overlying bursa on the right foot.
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 287

phate crystals which lead to intracapsular effu-
sion, increased soft tissue density and increased
joint space. Calcium salts may mimic gout in the
condition of calcinosis cutis, a collagen disease,
but the deposits, which are clearly visible, gener-
ally occur well away from joint margins.
Normally, the periosteum is not visible unless
pathological changes are occurring. The perios-
teum may become elevated and visible due to
inflammation, infection or trauma and may in
turn become calcified.
The condition of xanthoma tuberosum multiplex,
believed to be endocrine in origin, can be respon-
sible for large, benign, clearly delineated soft
tissue masses which have a marked increase in
density. They can occur in relation to synovial
tendon sheaths and bursae in the foot and else-
where.
and gives a fuzzy outline to the bone. The bone
will lose density and appear hazy. In time, a loose
body or sequestrum may be formed (Figs 11.25and
11.26). This can be passed to the surface by sinus
formation, or it may eventually be reabsorbed or
remodelled. In some cases a remodelling of the
cortex may produce a sclerotic osseous shell, an
involucrum, which encapsulates the sequestrum. If
treatment is inefficient a chronic walled-off
abscess containing debris and sometimes a
sequestrum may form and can persist for years.
Known as Brodie's abscess, this appears as a
rarefied ovoid area and may particularly be seen
at the metaphyseal areas of long bones.
Osteoarthritis
The signs and symptoms of degenerative
osteoarthritis are well known. On X-ray the

RADIOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT OF
SPECIFIC PATHOLOGIES
Infection
It is important to recognise the development of
infection in bone on radiographic evidence as well
as by clinical presentation, although radiological
changes may not be present in the osseous struc-
tures for some time. The first signs are unlikely to
appear for 10 days or more. Infection may be
blood-borne, or a focus from elsewhere in the
body, or secondary to a direct entry wound such
as surgery or a compound fracture. Although
bone and joint infections can be due to diseases
such as tuberculosis (dramatically on the increase
worldwide), leprosy, syphilis or viral agents such
as smallpox, the most common infections are the
acute bacterial infections due to organisms such as
Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus pyogenes,
Salmonella or Haemophilus influenzae. The infection
spreads firstly into the medullary bone but will
not cross the epiphyseal line. One of the first signs
is increased soft tissue density and swelling,
which should be readily apparent on X-ray.
Infection then passes through the cortex, and the
pus produced elevates and strips the periosteum. Figure 11.25 Osteomyelitis. Chronic osteomyelitis in this
neuropathic diabetic foot has destroyed much of the fifth
The first visible osseous change will often be the metatarsal and phalanges. Note the characteristic fuzzy
subperiosteal reaction, which lifts the periosteum outline of the elevated periosteum.
 288 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
-----------------------_._-- ---------------------
Figure 11.26 Osteomyelitis. Almost complete destruction of the neck of the talus and all midtarsal bones, due to chronic
osteomyelitis.
earliest signs are irregularity and narrowing of
the cartilaginous space, which mayor may not
be accompanied by deformity (Fig. 11.27). As
the disease progresses the cartilage will degen-
erate and become calcified (chondrocalcinosis)
and the joint space slowly disappears. There
will be increased sclerosis, and there may be the
formation of subchondral cysts. At the periph-
ery of the joint there will be clearly visible spiky
outgrowths of bone, osteophytes, which tend to
grow at right angles to the long bone axis and
can attain considerable size. Osteophytes
severely limit joint motion and will also cause
pain and pressure problems for the patient. In
late stages of the disease the joint will become
partially or fully ankylosed and the osteophytes
may fracture, causing loose bodies within the
joint capsule (Fig. 11.28). These osteophytic frac-
tures and loose bodies are clearly visible on
film. Whereas it is relatively easy to diagnose
osteoarthritis in the metatarsophalangeal joints,
degeneration in the midtarsal area can be
masked by superimposition of the bones and
may only be seen on lateral or oblique views.
Autoimmune disease
There are many varieties of autoimmune
disease that attack the joints, including rheuma-
toid arthritis, scleroderma and disseminated
lupus erythematosus. Radiographic analysis is
only one part of the diagnostic process, but most
of the diseases produce similar radiographic
features.
Early changes are effusion into the joint
capsule as the synovial linings are attacked, with
an intracapsular increase in density. The joint
spaces may increase temporarily. The epiphyses
of the long bones become demineralised and as
the synovial pannus invades the bone there is a
progression towards erosions at the chondral
margins, loss of cortex and punched-out peri-
articular erosions. There is a progressive loss of
normal trabecular patterns and generalised
osteoporosis (Fig. 11.29). Articular and bone
changes are associated with progressive defor-
mity and characteristic abduction deformities of
digits. Gross subluxations and dislocations will
be evident in severe cases. There is usually mid-

Figure 11.27 Osteoarthritis. This case of hallux rigidus
shows complete loss of articular cartilage and early
osteophytic changes at the joint periphery. There is no
deviation in the joint in this case.
tarsal and rearfoot involvement in long-standing
cases. Radiographic signs of severe pronation
may often be seen.
In juvenile disorders such as Still's disease
there may be retardation of long bone growth
and premature epiphyseal closure, with 'spin-
dling' of the digits.
Osteochondrosis
This is avascular necrosis of the epiphysis or
apophysis, in which there is a well-documented
cycle of interference with the vascular supply to
an epiphysis, possibly trauma-related but some-
times associated with endocrine dysfunction, fol-
lowed by degeneration and later regeneration. It
occurs in several sites on the foot, as well as in
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 289
Figure 11.28 Osteoarthritis. This oblique view, a more
advanced case than that shown in Figure 11.27, shows
severe degeneration of the joint margins with obliteration of
the joint space. There are multiple osteophytes, some of
which have fractured away to become loose bodies within
the joint capsule.
the femoral epiphysis iLegg-Calre-Penhes
disease), vertebral epiphysis (Scheuermann's disease)
and the tibial tubercle (Osgood-Schlatter's disease).
Over 40 potential sites have been identified. In all
the conditions there is a transient increase in scle-
rosis caused by the failure of the blood supply to
remove calcium salts, followed by osteoporosis,
crumbling and degeneration of the epiphysis.
Revascularisation slowly occurs over a period of
months and the epiphysis remodels, sometimes
with residual deformity. The conditions are self-
limiting and the clinical importance relates to the
functional importance of the joint involved. In
the foot the common conditions are as follows.
Freiberg's infraction. This condition affects the
lesser metatarsal heads, usually the second or
 290 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
Figure 11.29 Rheumatoid arthritis. In this long-standing
rheumatoid patient one may see gross derangement of all
metatarsophalangeal joints, with subluxation in particular of
the hallux and third and fourth toes. There is generalised
osteoporosis and there are subchondral erosions,
particularly seen around the first metatarsophalangeal joint.
The midtarsal joints are also affected, with loss of bone
density and joint demarcation.
third, at the age of about 12-14 years. An increase
in the joint space may be noted due to the 'eggshell
crush' degeneration that occurs in the metatarsal
head. The finally remodelled head may be
flattened or saucer-shaped. In later life it may
produce secondary hypertrophic osteoarthritic
degeneration (Fig. 11.30).
Sever's disease. Sever's disease of the cal-
caneal apophysis usually occurs in the age range
8-12 years. An irregularity and sclerosis may be
exhibited along the apophyseal line on the peste-
-------_.---
Figure 11.30 Freiberg's infraction. The evident flattening
and collapse of the third metatarsal head in this middle-aged
patient is probably indicative of an old Freiberg's infraction,
although this case is unconfirmed. This X·ray also shows a
Keller's arthroplasty, with several loose bodies remaining
around the site; an old fracture of the second metatarsal
shaft; two sesamoids under the fifth metatarsal head; and a
lateral exostectomy of the fifth metatarsal head.
rior aspect of the calcaneum. However, it should
be noted that the apophyseal line is frequently
irregular in any case. Some authorities believe
that a diagnosis of Sever's disease cannot be
made with any certainty on radiographic evi-
dence alone.
Kohler's disease. Kohler's disease of the nav-
icular occurs in youngsters in the age range 2-10
years, with a mean of 3-5 years: 70% of cases are
male and there is a familial incidence. The navic-
ular becomes dense initially, followed by porosis
and collapse into a disc shape, clearly seen on a
lateral view. If untreated, the bone may not
regain proper form and may remain a lifelong
problem.
Other rarer conditions. These are Iselin's
disease of the fifth metatarsal base and Buschke's
disease of the cuneiforms.

Trauma
The foot is subject to a wide range of trauma,
resulting in a variety of pathologies from a hair-
line stress fracture to major complicated fractures
or the presence of foreign bodies. A careful
history is required in all cases. At least two
radiographic views must be taken of any sus-
pected injury site.
Fractures can be classified as follows:
• Simple fractures, where there mayor may not
be displacement of the bone ends, but there is
no penetration through the skin.
• Stress fractures, extremely fine simple
fractures more usually seen on the lesser
metatarsals, although the tibia and fibula are
also recognised sites, particularly in runners.
The fracture may be so fine as to be missed
until a later stage when bony callus can be
seen around the site. Suspected stress
fractures can sometimes only be confirmed
using isotope scanning methods.
• Compound fractures, where the skin has been
breached by bone.
• Complicated fractures, where there is
associated trauma or infection involving
muscles, tendons and blood vessels.
• Greenstick fractures, which occur when the
bone is bent but only one side of the cortex
breaks (frequently seen in children).
• Comminuted fractures, in which there is
splintering or fragmentation.
• Impacted fractures, where one bone is driven
forcibly into the other.
• Avulsion fractures, where a chip of bone is
ripped away by fibrous attachment such as
muscle or ligament. Such fractures can
occur in similar sites to accessory ossicles.
The fifth metatarsal base is a common site
for a fracture and for os vesalianum, and
care must be taken to differentiate between
them.
• Pathological fractures, which may occur due to
osteoporosis or in cases of primary or
secondary neoplastic bone disease.
Certain parts of the foot are prone to specific
types of fracture:
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 291
-----_._--
• Pott's fracture occurs following a forceful
direct injury or twist to the ankle and causes
a spiral fracture to the fibula approximately
5-8 cm above the malleolus, and also
fractures the medial malleolus. There is
considerable disruption of the ankle mortise
and the articular surfaces between the
trochlear surface of the talus and the tibia
may be damaged.
• The calcaneum may suffer from comminuted
or stress fractures following a fall from a
height or due to disease processes. A
comminuted fracture will show as a line of
increased density.
• The talar neck can be fractured in an incident
involving forced ankle dorsiflexion.
• Metatarsal and phalangeal fractures occur very
commonly with all forms of injury.
The normal timetable of fracture healing can
be found in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1 Normal timetable for fracture healing
Time span Process
Week 1-2 Extravasation of blood takes place between
the broken ends. X-rays show sharp bone
edges with or without displacement and
effusion into the soft tissues.
Week 2-3 A fibrosis occurs in the initial blood clot and
calcification forms between the broken ends,
and may be visualised as a fuzzy plug of
tissue. The bone edges will be more blurred.
If the fracture is immobilised there will be
little or no extra callus formation. A fracture
that remains mobile will produce an
increased amount of calcified tissue in the
area which can be seen clearly on X-ray.
Week 3-8 Calcification in an immobilised fracture
should be completed. The fracture line will
disappear and remodelling of any excess
bone will eventually, over a period of
months, restore nearly normal, but slightly
thickened contours in the bone (Fig. 11.30).
A fracture which has not been immobilised,
or in which the bone ends are not apposed,
or in a patient with poor circulation or
disease processes, may continue to delayed
or non-union and exhibit osteoporotic
changes with extra bone callus continuing to
form; the fracture line will remain evident.
 292 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
------------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Foreign bodies
Injuries from foreign body penetration are
common in the foot and range from human or
animal hairs to metal filings, glass, plastic and
wood splinters. Surgical implants are also
foreign bodies (Fig. 11.31). Some substances will
show as areas of increased density on X-ray, but
glass and wood can be difficult to recognise.
More than one view is necessary to try and
locate a foreign body.
Figure 11.31 Foreign body - joint replacement. This X-ray
shows a Swanson double-stemmed implant in situ following
surgery for acute hallux rigidus. The body of the implant can
only just be identified between the bone ends, with the
stems extending into the medullary canals. The two titanium
grommets, through which the stems pass, are clearly seen.
Neoplasia
The radiological diagnosis of bone tumours
requires the expertise of a radiologist. A misdiag-
nosis could prove fatal to the patient.
A complete classification of tumours with
radiological features is beyond the scope of this
chapter, but some of the commoner presentations
are shown below.
Benign bone tumours
Osteochondroma (osteocartilaginous exosto-
sis). This may occur as a solitary lesion, devel-
oping from the periosteum. It has an equal sex
distribution. The tumour shows on X-ray as a
mass of trabeculated bone, but it has a cartilagi-
nous cap which is invisible. Many of these
growths are asymptomatic, but others may give
rise to pain due to pressure on nerves.
Practitioners frequently see the pedunculated
subungual exostosis on the distal phalanx of
the hallux, which may have a traumatic origin
(Fig. 11.32). The commonest presentation is in
the femur or tibia, and the condition can exist in
multiple form as an inherited tendency.
Transformation to a malignant chondrosarcoma
is rare, but recurrence, the presence of soft tissue
shadows or increased cartilaginous thickening
should raise suspicion levels.
Enchondroma. These benign tumours, which
may have a malignant tendency, are caused by
the development of embryonic cartilage cells
within the shafts of long bones such as
metatarsals and phalanges. The tumour is expan-
sile and produces areas of osteoporosis, loss of
trabeculation and thin cortices, giving a 'soap
bubble' appearance. Pathological fractures can
occur. Figure 11.33 shows a multiple enchondro-
matosis or Oilier's disease.
Solitary (simple) bone cyst. This is a cyst of
unknown origin containing clear or serosan-
guinous fluid. It generally occurs in the age range
4-15 years and may only be discovered as a
result of a pathological fracture. It has a predilec-
tion for the humerus and femur, but can occur in
the long bones of the foot and the calcaneum. It
may cause cortical thinning, with lucent areas in
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 293

A B

Figure 11.32 Osteochondroma. A dorsiplantar view (A) and an oblique view (B) of a subungual exostosis on the hallux,
secondary to trauma. These lesions usually have a cartilaginous cap, classifying them as osteochondromata.

the medulla, but does not always expand the
bone.
Aneurysmal bone cyst. A sponge-like cyst with
blood-filled spaces and fibrous septa, this may
arise as the result of a vascular anomaly. It tends
to occur in the age range 20-30 years and has
equal sex distribution: 50% of the cases are in the
long bone metaphyses. There is a rarefied central
area with a thin cortical shell and the cyst will
rapidly expand and destroy bone tissue.
Osteoid osteoma. A most painful lesion which
occurs most often in the long bones of the
extremities, with over 65% incidence in the
femur and tibia. No bones are exempt, includ-
ing the feet: 75% of cases are in 5-20-year-old
patients, with a sex ratio of 2 : 1 male to female.
Radiologically it exhibits an ovoid translucent
nidus up to 2 em in diameter surrounded by an
area of sclerosis. In fact the sclerosis may be
such that it masks the radiolucent area. The
patient may complain of severe pain at night.
The differential diagnosis should include
Brodie's abscess.
Synovial chondromatosis. This condition
occurs mainly in young or middle-aged males.
Multiple metaplastic cartilaginous bodies form
within the synovial membranes around a joint,
usually the knee or shoulder but occasionally in
the digits. Sometimes they will become true loose
bodies within the joint. Radiographic appearance
is of multiple small calcified opacities, accompa-
nied by joint effusion and increased soft tissue
density.
Malignant bone tumours
Osteosarcoma. The commonest primary
malignant bone neoplasm, osteosarcoma
accounts for 40%. It is not common in the foot,
having a 50% incidence in the lower end of the
femur and the upper ends of the tibia and
humerus. It may occur secondarily to Paget's
 294 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Upper

Lower

Figure 11.33 Multiple enchondromatosis. Note the expansiie, thin-walled lesions in the fourth and fifth metatarsal shafts (A).
The patient had similar lesions in the metacarpals of the left hand. The lesions were noted to have increased vascularity on
isotope bone scans (B).

disease. An X-ray may reveal radiating 'sunray'
spicules of bone raising the periosteum,
although this is not particularly common, and a
mixture of lysis or sclerosis within the shaft of
the bone. A wedge of ossified tissue can form
under the periosteum and is called Cadman's tri-
angle. Osteosarcoma can occur, but rarely, in soft
tissues. Radiologically it shows soft tissue
swelling and patchy density.
Chondrosarcomas. These tumours arise from
cartilaginous tissue and are second in frequency
to osteosarcoma. Primary cases arise within the
medulla, mainly in the long bones and ribs, with
10% of cases in the spine. Secondary cases arise
from pre-existing cartilaginous pathology. The
tumours occur mainly in the age range 50-70
years, with a sex ratio of 2: 1 male to female.
They are rare in the foot but have been noted in

the calcaneum. Radiologically they can be very
varied in appearance, imitating other lesions, but
classically they produce expansile 'grape-like'
lesions, with a calcified periphery and multiple
calcified central foci. Chondrosarcoma can occur
in an 'extraosseous form' in soft tissues away
from bone.
Fibrosarcomas. These tumours are less
common than osteosarcomas and occur primarily
in the 40-60 age range. They are highly destructive
tumours, producing expansile 'motheaten' lesions
with slight periosteal reaction in the major long
bones and pelvis: 50% of cases occur around the
knee joint.
Giant cell tumours. These tumours, of which
about 15% are malignant, account for about 4%
of histologically identified tumours. They occur
primarily in the age range 16-45 years. There is
an equal sex distribution: 50% of the growths
Figure 11.34 Giant cell tumour: a large vascular tumour affecting the lower end of the tibia.
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 295
are around the knee, followed in incidence by
the radius and ulna, but they have been
observed in hands and feet. They are vascular
tumours, which on X-ray present as expanded
translucent areas with a thin cortical rim.
Sometimes the cortex is breached but there is no
active new bone formation present and there
may be little periosteal reaction (Fig. 11.34).
Differential diagnosis should include the
aneurysmal bone cyst.
Ewing's tumour. This is a primary tumour of
bone that accounts for 5% of primary bone
tumours. The age range is generally 5-30 years,
with the majority of cases aged 10-20 years.
Initially there may only be minor porotic
changes visible on X-ray, with early periosteal
change and delicate spiculisation being sugges-
tive of osteomyelitis. These later changes cause
considerable tissue destruction, with a mottled
 296 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
destructive appearance, cortical penetration
and maybe pathological fractures. It has fre-
quently metastasised by the time the patient is
first seen.
Secondary metastases. These tumours may
occur in bone from malignancies elsewhere, such
as the breast, kidney, prostate or bowel.
OTHER IMAGING MODALITIES
Whereas X-rays provide a considerable amount
of information about bone tissue, and are cur-
rently the most commonly used imaging modal-
ity, there are other methods of obtaining images
which are for specific problems and deserve con-
sideration. It should be understood that these
more advanced techniques are all more expen-
sive, and require more skilled interpretation,
than plain X-rays and are very unlikely to be
ordered as a first line of investigation.
Computed tomography (CT)
In this technique the patient is moved slowly
through a circular hole in a gantry containing a
mobile X-ray generator and detectors. The X-ray
tube rotates completely around the patient in a
plane determined by the radiographer. The X-
rays generated are picked up by an array of up to
1200 detectors, digitised and fed to a visual
display screen via a computer. Hard copy images
can also be produced using film. The images pro-
duced are in fact slices through the body, and
they may be taken at intervals of 2-10 mm, Any
portion of the body can be scanned subject to
positioning limitations. The images give excel-
lent bone details, with the cortex, medulla and
trabeculae visible. Soft tissue discrimination is
less than that available using magnetic resonance
imaging (see later), but a trained observer will be
able to differentiate muscle, fat and connective
tissues. The major use of CT is the identification
of bone-based pathology such as coalitions,
osteochondritis or trauma, and it can be particu-
larly helpful in the identification of avulsed or
loose bone fragments in comminuted fractures
(Figs 11.35 and 11.36),
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI)
At present MRI is the most expensive imaging
technique, as the capital cost of the equipment is
vast; however, it has the ability to produce stun-
ningly accurate images of bone marrow and soft
tissues and will prove valuable for the foot as it
becomes more readily available.
The image is obtained by placing the part
under investigation into a strong magnetic field
and passing pulsed radiofrequency signals
through the field. Between the pulses the protons
(hydrogen nuclei) alternately relax and realign,
and emit a characteristic radiowave of their own.
This can be detected and recorded, and comput-
ers are able to build a picture of the spatial rela-
tionships, density and tissue distribution of the
protons. Soft tissues vary in their water content,
and hence concentrations of hydrogen nuclei,
both according to their nature and whether or not
inflammatory changes are present, and the resul-
tant signals therefore vary. Very detailed images
of soft tissue injuries and pathology can be gen-
erated: these are high-resolution images and can
be obtained in thin 'slices' through an infinite
number of planes (Fig. 11.37).
The best resolution images are of soft tissues,
and it is possible to identify individual tendons
and their sheaths, muscles, blood vessels and fat.
The images are superb for identifying oedema and
inflammation, as the water content of the tissues is
increased, and also effusions where the water is
free. On the other hand, bone detail is limited to
the signals from the marrow content (Fig. 11.38).
This does create an advantage as bone marrow
oedema, such as in sports injuries, marrow
replacement disorders, such as in metastatic
disease processes (e.g. myeloma, lymphoma), and
marrow infiltration, as occurs in infection, can all
be identified. Specific MRI imaging techniques
exist for the identification of healthy bone marrow.
The STIR fat suppression technique identifies live
fat and hence marrow and bone viability. Using
this technique healthy bone marrow, which nor-
mally gives a white image, appears black.
Diseased marrow fails to be suppressed and
remains white (Fig. 11.39). The disadvantage of
the lack of osseous detail is that MRI is less helpful
 RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 297

Figure 11.35 CT scans of a tarsal coalition. This is the same case as in Figure 11.21 and shows bilateral talocalcaneal bars.
The image (A) is a single frame from a series of 12 taken as 5-mm 'slices' at right angles to the subtalar joint (B) (for
orientation purposes the talus is superior to the calcaneum).
 298 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
Figure 11.36 CT scan, in the transverse plane, of a
comminuted calcaneal fracture with clearly shown intra-
articular fragments.
for assessing periosteal new bone formation, or
bone fragments and fractures.
Nuclear medicine - isotope scanning
The technique of nuclear labelling is an old one,
first used in the 1940s with isotopes such as
strontium-87 and fluorine-18. It relies on the fact
that an inflamed or pathologically active area of
the skeleton has an increased blood flow and
bone activity. If a suitable radioisotope is
injected intravenously with a phosphate marker
it will ultimately be taken up by osteoblasts in
the bone. There is an immediate distribution
into the bloodstream and early images, pro-
duced by gamma-ray emissions, may be taken
(phase 1 - early blood pool imaging). Further
images are then taken of the blood flow into the
area (phase 2 - late blood pool imaging).
Normally the patient will then return 2-4 hours
later for assessment of the uptake into the
bone (phase 3 - bone imaging). The technique is
Figure 11.37 Magnetic resonance imaging. A single frame
from a series of slices taken in the sagittal plane. The
healthy bone marrow and plantar fat pad show white, the
musculature is grey, and the tendons, notably the Achilles
tendon, clearly show as dark grey/black.
generally known as a three-phase bone scan
(Table 11.2).
The most commonly used isotope is tech-
netium-99, derived from molybdenum. It is used
because of its short half-life (approximately
6 hours). Other isotopes such as gallium are still
used, but the trend is towards technetium. The
gamma rays emitted are detected by a gamma
camera positioned above and close to the
patient. The radioactivity is converted into light
Table 11.2 Isotope scanning: three-phase bone scan
Phase Process
Phase 1 Images are taken every 5 s for 30 s,
(flow study) giving an indication of blood perfusion
into the area
Phase 2 Images taken when the area is fully
(blood pool study) perfused
Phase 3 An image taken 3-4 hours later, giving
(metabolic study) an indication of the amount of isotope
tracer that remains bound to bone

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 11.38 MRI scan in the sagittal plane, showing the
destruction of the medial cuneiform and first metatarsal by
chronic osteomyelitis secondary to diabetes (Charcot's foot).
Note that the healthy bone marrow is white, whereas the
diseased bone marrow appears grey.
photons, multiplied and enhanced electroni-
cally and displayed on a screen. The image con-
sists of a pattern of dots forming the osseous
outline, with the greatest concentration of dots
in the area of greatest isotope uptake. Such areas
of increased uptake indicate increased osteo-
blastic activity in the area (Fig. 11.40). This
may be due to any inflammatory process such
as a primary or secondary neoplasm, injury,
stress fracture or infection. The uptake can be
negative in areas of rampant bone infection with
destruction. The technique has one great advan-
tage in that it enables detection of bony pathol-
ogy at a very early stage, unlike other imaging
techniques, and it may provide clues in unex-
plained bone pain. Osteomyelitis and aseptic
necrosis may be detected at the earliest stages,
and serial scans may be used to track the
progress of disease. However, it is important to
note that whereas this form of imaging is highly
sensitive for pathology, it is very nonspecific:
e.g. the increased uptake may be due to any
inflammation, tumour, Paget's disease, injury,
stress fracture or infection. The residue of an
isotope scan may remain for months or years
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 299
Figure 11.39 MRI STIR fat suppression technique of the
case shown in Figure 11_38. In this image the healthy bone
marrow appears black and the diseased marrow fails to
suppress and is very clearly demarcated in white.
within the tissues, and this can limit the useful-
ness of the technique in subsequent disease
such as acute or chronic infection.
Fluoroscopy
There are certain circumstances, notably during
operations, where instant images are required,
and the technique of fluoroscopy may be useful,
particularly for the localisation of pins, screws,
prostheses or foreign bodies. X-rays are used to
cause fluorescence on a screen, most commonly
containing caesium iodide. The resultant images
are intensified and fed to a display monitor or
camera. Modern fluoroscopes can take a series of
time-delayed images which, while not a moving
picture, are very adequate. This drastically
reduces the radiation dosages.
Ultrasound
Ultrasound examinations involve using reflec-
tions of pulsed sound waves to detect dif-
ferences between soft tissue interfaces. Echoes
are reflected by changes in tissue density, and the
use of higher frequencies gives higher-resolution
images but less penetration of tissue. Typical fre-
quencies used in foot examination are in the
order of 7-10mHz. The waves are totally
 300 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Figure 11.40 Large synovial tumour (pigmented villonodular synovitis) which destroyed the second metatarsophalangeal
joint A. X-ray which shows the marked erosions and soft tissue swelling. The diagnosis was aided by the use of a
technetium-99 isotope bone scan. 81 shows the phase 2 late blood pool phase and 82 shows the phase 3 bone imaging,
both of which confirmed greatly increased osteoblastic uptake.

reflected by bone, and this limits usage to the
examination of superficial soft tissues, e.g. exam-
ination for partial or complete rupture of the
Achilles tendon or for plantar digital neuroma.
An extension of ultrasound is Doppler imaging,
which can detect and measure blood flow and
direction in major arteries and veins. The small-
est artery measurable in the foot would be dor-
salis pedis. The images are colour-based, with
arteries appearing red and veins blue. Doppler
imaging has obvious applications in vascular
and diabetic departments.
Whereas ultrasound has the advantages of being
relatively cheap, non-invasive and portable
(modern machines can be used in a patient's home
if required), it is very labour-intensive and the
interpretation of results requires a very skilled
operator. The images are transient and, hence, very
observer-dependent.
SUMMARY
Imaging techniques provide considerable infor-
mation about many pathologies, but these tech-
niques should only be requested to aid diagnosis
and provide effective treatment. Plain X-rays will
always have a major role in the diagnosis of foot
pathologies. However, the foot specialist must
keep abreast of technological developments such
as CT scanning, MRI and nuclear isotope scan-
ning, which may become more accessible in the
future.

REFERENCES
Kumar P J, Clark M L (eds) 1990 Clinical medicine, 2nd edn.
Bailliere Tindall, London
National Osteoporosis Society 1993 Menopause and
osteoporosis therapy. GP manual. National Osteoporosis
Society, London
National Radiological Protection Board 1988 Guidance
notes for the protection of persons against ionising
FURTHER READING
Aird EGA 1988 Basic physics for medical imaging.
Heinemann, London
Berquist T H 1990 Magnetic resonance imaging of the foot
and ankle. Seminars in Ultrasound, CT and MR 11(4):
327-345
British Institute of Radiology 1992 Pregnancy and work in
diagnostic imaging. British Institute of Radiology,
London
Bushong S C 1997 Radiologic science for technologists, 6th
edn. Mosby, St Louis
Gamble F 0, Yale I 1975 Clinical foot roentgenology, 2nd
edn. Krieger, Basle
McKillop J H, Fogelman I 1991 Benign and malignant bone
disease. Clinician's guide to nuclear medicine. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh
RADIOGRAPHIC ASSESSMENT 301
radiations arising from medical and dental use. HMSO,
London
Parsons V A 1980 Colour atlas of bone disease. Wolfe
Medical Publications, London
Swallow R A, Naylor E, Roebuck E J, Whitley A S 1986
Clark's positioning in radiography, 11th edn. Heinemann,
London, pp 89-107
Murray R 0, Jacobson H G, Stoker 0 J 1990 The radiology of
skeletal disorders, 3rd edn. Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh
Pavlov H 1990 Imaging of the foot and ankle. Radiologic
Clinics of North America 28(5): 991-1017
Rogers L F 1982 Radiology of skeletal trauma, Vol 2, 3rd
edn. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, ch 22-23
Root M L, Orien W P, Weed J H 1977 Clinical biomechanics,
Vols 1 and 2. Clinical Biomechanics Corporation, Los
Angeles, California
Taussig M J 1979 Processes in pathology. Blackwell Scientific
Publications, Oxford
Warren M J, [effree M A, Wilson 0 J, MacLarnon J C 1990
Computed tomography in suspected tarsal coalition. Acta
Orthopaedica Scandinavica 61(6): 554-557
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 303

How can gait be analysed? 304 Methods of analysing

Observation of gait 304 gait
Methods of quantitative gait analysis 306
Temporal and spatial parameters 306 c. Payne*
Kinetics of gait 308
Accelerometers 313
Kinematics 313
Electromyography (EMG) 315
Energy expenditure 315
Multisystems 316

Summary 316

INTRODUCTION
Gait analysis is the systematic analysis and
assessment of human locomotion. Gait is a very
complex activity and as such there are many dif-
ferent ways to analyse it. The use of gait analysis
combined with a thorough clinical orthopaedic
assessment (Ch. 8) are powerful tools for identi-
fying pathomechanical mechanisms, guiding
therapeutic interventions, making treatment
decisions and monitoring the outcome of inter-
ventions. However, the identification of cause
from effect is often difficult because of the highly
developed compensatory feedback which oper-
ates during the gait cycle and the occurrence of
more than one pathology at the same time.
Gross abnormalities, such as a patient with a
marked limp or a child who is a toe walker, are
relatively easy to identify. Minor variations
from the 'normal' cause more difficulty and are
harder to spot and describe in a meaningful
way. This is not surprising if one considers how
fast events occur during walking: it takes only
650 ms to complete one full gait cycle.
Practitioners are therefore increasingly looking
towards methods of investigating gait in a sys-
tematic way which provides accurate, repro-
ducible and quantitative data.
There is no single satisfactory method of
analysing and quantifying gait. Additionally, tech-
nological advances in this field are rapid, espe-
cially in the development of software to assist in
"The editors wish to acknowledge the work of Steve West. This chapter is based on his work
in the previous edition.

303
 304 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
the interpretation and analysis of data collected
by more sophisticated systems. New systems are
continually being developed. The reader is there-
fore recommended to review medical and engi-
neering journals to keep abreast of developments.
HOW CAN GAIT BE ANALYSED?
Gait can be analysed by observation or by a
variety of methodologies which produce quanti-
tative data:
• temporal and spatial parameters
• kinetics
• accelerometers
• kinematics
• electromyography
• energy expenditure
• multisystems.
Clinically based gait analysis methods include
observation and simple quantitative methods that
provide useful data. Observation of a patient's
gait can be assisted by the use of video and tread-
mills. Simple quantitative measures can be
achieved from techniques using paper, pen, tape
measure and stop watch. Clinically based
methods are simple to use, can provide repeatable
data and are relatively easy and relatively quick
to interpret. They are also relatively low tech.
Laboratory methods are reliant on sophisti-
cated and expensive equipment, which can be
quite costly. Specialist knowledge is required to
use and interpret the data. Purpose-designed gait
facilities can provide an adjunct to the clinical
examination but are often used solely for
research purposes.
OBSERVATION OF GAIT
Observational or visual gait analysis is the
analysis of a subject's gait without the use of
any equipment and is one of the more useful
and widely used clinical tools available to prac-
titioners. The analysis of gait in this way is sub-
jective and needs a substantial understanding of
normal gait (Inman et al 1981, Perry 1992, Rose
& Gamble 1993).
Observational gait analysis involves watching
a person walk up and down an area that allows
sufficient space for up to 10 steps, usually a cor-
ridor in the clinical setting. Any deviations from
the assumed normal that are relevant are noted.
Observational gait analysis is best done by sys-
tematically concentrating on one body part at a
time, then another, and usually one limb at a
time. With experience many gait deviations can
be observed. The difficulty of observing one
body part at a time is that multiple movements in
multiple segments are occurring concurrently
and need to be observed. Checklists, such as the
one provided in Table 12.1, are usually helpful to
work through, especially when learning.
Traditionally, the approach is to observe the limb
as it moves through the different periods of the
stance phase - heel contact, midstance, propul-
sion. Another approach (Pathokinesiology
Service 1993) is to divide gait into weight accep-
tance (initial contact and loading response),
single limb support (period when body pro-
gresses over single limb, and swing limb
advancement (time when one limb is unloaded
and the other limb is loaded) and note variations
from normal during these phases. A standardisa-
tion of the form to record gait analysis has been
presented by Southerland (1996). The approach
has introduced a shorthand form of notation for
recording during gait analysis referred to as
GHORT (gait homunculus observed relational
tabular). Readers are referred to Southerland
(1996) for detailed information.
In clinical practice, the observational analysis of
gait is usually used after the history and physical
examination of the patient in order to evaluate the
presence of any abnormal function that may be
responsible for the patient's presenting complaint.
The subsequent more detailed static and non-
weightbearing biomechanical evaluation can be
guided to particular areas of interest by the gait
analysis. Of importance at this stage of the clinical
evaluation is a consistency between the observed
gait and the findings of the biomechanical evalua-
tion. For example, if a lot of transverse plane
motion of the midfoot is observed in stance during
the gait analysis, a similar increase in the trans-
verse plane direction of motions at the subtalar
and midtarsal joints should generally be observed.

Table 12.1 Practical observational gait analysis
• Observe for amounts and timing of events
• Look for asymmetry
Concentrate on one aspect at a time
Bisection of caicaneus and posterior aspect of leg is often
helpful
A mark on the medial side of the navicular is also helpful
• Be aware that many individuals may consciously or
subconsciously alter gait while being observed
At least an 8-10 metre walkway is desirable with provi-
sion for watching subjects from behind/in front (frontal
plane) as well as from the side (sagittal plane)
• Patient should be wearing shorts
• Observe with and without shoes and with and without
orthoses
Frontal plane observations:
Upper body:
Head/eyes level or tilted?
Shoulders level?
Height of finger tips
Symmetrical arm swing
Pelvis level or tilted?
Lower limb:
Position of knee
Q angle/patellar position
Timing of knee motion
Position of tibia
Timing of tibial rotation
Foot:
Timing/amount of rearfoot motion
Timing/amount of heel contact/off
1iming/amount of midfoot motion
Transfer from low gear to high gear during propulsion
Angle and base of gait
Abductory twist?
Prominent extensor tendons (extensor substitution)
Clawing of digits (flexor stabilisation)
Sagittal plane observations:
Upper body:
Forward or backward tilt
Symmetrical arm swing
Lower limb:
Position/timing of hip joint motion
Position/timing of knee joint motion
Position/timing of ankle joint motion
Foot:
Timing/amount of heel lift
Timing/amount of midtarsal joint motion
Timing/amount of first metatarsophalangeal joint motion
There is a tendency in clinical practice to focus
on frontal plane motion during the gait analysis
when motion in the transverse and sagittal
planes are just as important to appreciate gait.
This primarily occurs for several reasons. Most
clinics only have long corridors available which
facilitate the observation in the frontal plane but
METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 305
hinders sagittal plane observation. The tradi-
tional teaching of clinical biomechanics places
great importance on frontal plane compensation
for different pathomechanical entities, which
encourages the use of observation of gait to
observe frontal plane motion of the posterior
aspect of the calcaneus. The observation of the
calcaneus in the frontal plane is easy, but is not
necessarily indicative of any abnormal or com-
pensatory gait patterns. For example, any abnor-
mal compensatory movement of the calcaneus in
the frontal plane is entirely dependent on the
range of motion of the joints of the rearfoot
complex and the orientation of the assumed posi-
tion of the subtalar joint axis. If the axis is more
vertical than the assumed normal, there will be
very little motion of the calcaneus in the frontal
plane, with more in the transverse plane. If the
axis is more horizontal, there will be more
motion in the frontal plane, which may not be
pathological. Observational gait analysis is also
limited by the ability to observe transverse plane
motions and the difficulty to observe and inter-
pret motion in all three planes simultaneously as
well as motion occurring simultaneously at
several joints.
In a clinical setting in patients with pathology,
the observation of gait requires them to walk for
some time, which can be fatiguing for them. The
endurance of the patient needs to be considered.
There is no permanent record from observa-
tional gait analysis - no opportunity to review
the data at a later date. The analysis is very
dependent upon the skill and experience of the
observer. All the data are subjective and qualita-
tive. When one observes an individual standing
on both feet, it is impossible to predict whether
the load (distribution of force) under both feet is
equal. This highlights the fundamental drawback
of observation of gait: you cannot observe forces
and the eye can be easily deceived. Reliability
studies on observational gait analysis show it to
be somewhat unreliable (Goodkin & Diller 1973,
Krebs et al1985, Saleh & Murdoch 1985). Despite
these limitations observational gait analysis pro-
vides a good overall impression of gait and
requires no equipment. Experienced observers
use observational gait analysis to make critical
 306 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
judgements, assist in diagnosis and determine
the outcomes of interventions such as foot
orthoses.
Treadmill. One of the most debated areas of
gait analysis relates to the length of walkway
required in order to achieve 'normal' walking
patterns: 4-6 metres is considered appropriate.
Many practitioners have heightened the debate
by using treadmills rather than long walkways.
If a treadmill is used, one must ensure that the
subject has every opportunity to adapt to tread-
mill walking prior to analysis being undertaken.
This usually requires at least 15 minutes of
walking on the treadmill. The more exposure to
treadmills, the shorter the time recorded to accli-
matise and perform consistently (Tollafield
1990). Clearly, older patients and those with
medical conditions are likely to fatigue more
quickly. No matter how sophisticated the system
is, subjects must feel relaxed and comfortable
when being observed. Most authorities now
accept that in order to achieve this objective, the
subject should be allowed to walk at his/her
own cadence rather than being artificially con-
strained by walking in time to a metronome or
some other timing device. A forced gait is of no
value to a practitioner attempting to assess
walking patterns.
For visual observation, treadmills facilitate
closer inspection of the gait as well as easy obser-
vation of gait in the sagittal plane. Additionally,
treadmills are relatively inexpensive. However,
safety and balance of patients need to be para-
mount in their use. There are subtle differences
between overground and treadmill gait that need
to be taken into consideration, especially during
the propulsive phase, as on the treadmill the
'ground' is moving.
Video. Videotaping of a movement for analysis
(overground or on a treadmill) is an improvement
on the traditional gait analysis. Observational gait
analysis is limited by the speed that motions
happen at, meaning that the more subtle motions
cannot be observed in real time. Many move-
ments take place in a very short time period. It
has been observed that events that happen faster
than 83 ms 0/12 second) cannot be perceived by
the human eye (Gage & Ounpuu 1989), so the use
of slow-motion video and freeze-frame can
enhance observational gait analysis. With good
pause and slow-motion facilities the finer and
subtle features of gait that would otherwise be
missed can be observed. This will be dependent
on the frequency of sampling: below 30 Hz would
be unsuitable, 50 Hz is the minimum for slow
walking and 100 Hz would be required for
running, or too much movement happens
between each sampling frame to make the infor-
mation of any use.
If two cameras and a video mixer are used, it
is possible to view gait in two body planes
simultaneously on the same split screen elimi-
nating the problem of cross-plane interpretation.
Initially, many practitioners do find the two
views confusing. Videotapes can be archived for
subsequent viewing and the comparison of
before and after gaits following an intervention.
Recent advances in computing now allow the
taping of gait (either the traditional videotape or
digital) to be viewed on a computer. Some
systems (e.g. 'Irim-Fit'P') allow the drawing and
calculation of angles between segments, the gen-
eration of gait analysis reports and the linking of
the recorded gait into the patient's computerised
records.
Disadvantages to the use of videotaping gait
are that the rotational deviations in the trans-
verse plane cannot be seen. Movements out of
the plane of the camera can also distort joint
angle and influence interpretations: e.g. if sagittal
plane knee motion is being observed, the angle
may appear less than it really is due to internal
rotation of the limb. The analysis of the videotape
is still qualitative and has been shown to be only
moderately reliable (Eastlock et al 1991, Keenan
& Bach 1996), but it is an improvement on the
straight visual observation of gait.
METHODS OF QUANTITATIVE GAIT
ANALYSIS
Temporal and spatial parameters
As gait is repetitive, the measurement of the tem-
poral (time) and spatial (distance) parameters are
an aid to evaluating critical events that occur

._-- ----------
during gait. These parameters include stride
length, stride time, step length, step time, double
support time, mean walking velocity, cadence
and the ratios of left to right of these parameters.
It also includes toe-out/toe-in angles and width
of the walking base (base of gait). These parame-
ters are useful as a measure of an individual's
functional ability to ambulate: for example, less
time will be spent in single limb support if that
limb is painful.
Step length. This parameter is the distance
from initial heel strike of one foot to the heel
strike of the opposite foot.
Cadence. This parameter is the number of
steps taken per unit time, usually per minute. For
practical purposes, practitioners tend to count
the number of steps taken during a period of
10-15 s. When measuring cadence it is important
that subjects are told to walk at their normal
walking speed and as naturally as possible. The
observation count starts once the subject is
walking at normal speed. To estimate average
cadence per minute the following formula
should be applied:
Cadence (steps per minute) = steps counted x
60/time(s)
Stride length. The distance between two suc-
cessive placements of the same foot, stride length
will therefore consist of two step lengths; this
parameter is usually measured in metres.
The walking base. Also known as stride width,
the walking base is the distance between the feet,
usually measured at the midpoint of the heel; it is
recorded in millimetres.
Toe-out and toe-in. These parameters are a
measure of foot position in relation to the line of
forward progression. It has been shown that
foot position in relation to the line of forward
progression constantly changes during gait. To
produce an 'average' the position the foot
adopts for 10 steps is recorded and the mean is
calculated.
The velocity of walking. This parameter, mea-
sured in metres per second, is the distance
covered by the body in a given time in a particu-
lar direction. The mean velocity can be calculated
as the product of cadence and stride length. The
cadence is measured in half strides per 60 s or full
METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 307
strides per 120 s. The velocity can be calculated
by the following formula:
Velocity (m/ s) = stride length (m) x cadence
(steps/min)/120
The above parameters can be recorded with
basic equipment and can provide valuable clini-
cal information (Kippen 1993). Poster paints,
talcum powder, chalk, plaster of Paris, carbon
paper and various coloured inks have been used
to obtain footprint impressions (Wilkinson &
Menz 1997). These footprint impressions provide
a permanent record of the foot placements
during gait and can be used to calculate a variety
of parameters, as indicated in Figure 12.1.
Foot switches can be used to determine tem-
poral parameters; these are inexpensive and
simple to use. The switches are either of a com-
pression closing type or force sensitive type.
They are typically used under the heel, first
metatarsal and fifth metatarsal incorporated
into an insole or strapped to the area of the foot.
They are activated when a certain threshold of
pressure is applied. Foot switches can be used in
combination with other systems, such as elec-
tromyography, so that the timing of critical
events such as heel contact, forefoot contact,
heel off and forefoot off can be determined in
relationship to other variables or parameters
being measured.
Gait mats (e.g. GaitRite™, GaitMat™) consist
of a long strip of walking surface that has
embedded in it an array of switches running
along the length and width of the mat. As sub-
jects walk on the mat, the switches close and
open, allowing the computer to calculate the
timing of each switch. As the geometry of the
mat is known, many of the temporal and spatial
parameters of gait, such as cadence, timing of
single and double support duration and stride
length, can be determined. These systems have
the advantage of being relatively low cost and
are portable.
The measurement of temporal and spatial
parameters can highlight pathology and changes
associated with disease or rehabilitation. Patients
such as those with rheumatoid arthritis,
Parkinson's disease or paralysis will all show
significant deviations from 'normal' parameters,
 308 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
Base of gait
'cOJo
'0
Q)
Ol
c ferent measurement systems for measuring pres-
«
Figure 12.1 Spatial parameters that can be measured
using a simple walkway,
e.g. short stride length, slow or fast cadence.
However, it must be recognised that assessment
of these parameters on their own is not sufficient
for a comprehensive overview of gait. Spatial and
temporal parameters vary during walking and
from one period of walking to another.
Consequently, it is important to view the data
with caution and to obtain a mean average for
any parameter.
Kinetics of gait
This is the study and measurement of forces and
moments exerted on the body that influence
movement. Of direct relevance to the practitioner
is the recording of forces at the foot/floor inter-
face, measured, for example, via force platforms.
Lesion patterns give an indication of the site of
excess stresses but quantitative information
cannot be gained by observation (Duckworth et
aI1985). Consequently, some method of examin-
ing the plantar load distribution must be
employed.
Many authors use the terms 'force', 'load' and
'pressure' interchangeably. This practice is to be
discouraged. It is worth defining these terms and
others used in biomechanics (the study of the
effect of mechanical laws on the locomotor
system) from the outset.
Force. As defined by Newton's second law of
motion, Force is mass multiplied by acceleration.
This law means that any time a force is applied to
an object, the object accelerates. Since accelera-
tion is the change in velocity divided by the
change in time, a force applied to an object will
produce a change in the object's velocity. Force
can therefore be considered as change in momen-
tum divided by change in time. Force is a vector
quantity, having both magnitude and direction.
Pressure. Pressure is force divided by area: the
larger the area the lower the pressure. This unit
has important implications when comparing dif-
sure under the foot. For example, systems which
have large discrete element sizes may not be able
to measure the true pressure under a small area
of the foot.
Researchers and practitioners are interested in
the interaction between the foot and shoe. The
fundamental questions being asked are:
• Is there a correlation between the loading
characteristics of the shod and unshod foot?
• What happens at the foot/ shoe interface?
• Is there a correlation between the loading
characteristics measured at the shoe/floor
interface and those at the foot/floor interface?
• Are the effects of foot orthoses influenced by
the type of footwear?
 METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 309

History has seen the development of a variety

of systems designed to study the way in which
load is distributed over the plantar surface of the
foot. In addition, reviews of clinical findings
employing particular equipment are continually
being published. Many systems described in the
literature are designed as part of research pro-
jects. These systems have not appeared on the
market because of cost, lack of repeatability and
technical difficulties that make them difficult to
use clinically.
The systems currently available to practitioners
are:
• Harris & Beath mat
• pedobarograph
• force plates
• Musgrave footprint
• in-shoe force measurement.

Harris & Beath mat

A deformable mat printing technique first
employed by Morton in 1935 was modified and
adapted for flat-foot studies (Harris & Beath
1947). A three-ridged rubber mat, of 0.002,0.0025
and 0.0028 inches in height, was designed. The
ridged top surface of the mat is spread thinly
with soluble printer's ink and then placed on the
floor, ridged side up. The mat is covered with a
clean sheet of white paper and a static or
dynamic footprint is recorded on to it. The differ-
ing heights of the ridges produces the effect of
increased density of ink in areas of high pressure
(Fig. 12.2).An attempt to calibrate the print mat
using known size and weight has shown promise
but still offers only broad bands of pressure
ranges (Silvino et al 1980). This has enabled
quantitative data to be collected. Many other
authors have adopted the Harris & Beath mat for
varying forms of foot analysis (Henry & Waugh
1975, Kilmartin & Wallace 1992, Rose et al 1985,
Welton 1992, West 1987). The clinical application
of the Harris & Beath mat is far reaching. It can
provide data on foot dimensions including foot
length, width, arch profile and total foot contact
area. In addition, valuable information about
loading of the foot can be gathered; high and low
loaded areas can be identified.
Figure 12.2 An example of a footprint from the Harris &
Beath mat.
Pedobarograph
The pedobarograph was first described by
Chodera in 1960 and was developed for the
investigation of plantar foot pressure measure-
ments. This simple optical system has been used
in static and dynamic pressure measurement
studies (Betts & Duckworth 1978, Betts et al
1980a). Essentially, the pedobarograph is based
on the interruption of a light source by total
internal reflection through the highly polished
glass edges of a glass plate acting like a lens. An
elastic or textured foil is placed between the
light-conducting surface and the plantar surface
of the foot. Light internally reflecting along the
glass is affected by the pressure applied to the
foil. The light illuminates the foil, which scatters
the light back in the area of the pressure. The
patterns of the pressure area can be observed
and recorded by a camera housed inside the
pedobarograph box. Internally, a mirror is
angled at 45° to the glass platform, which reflects
 310 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
the light image into the lens of the video camera.
The pattern observed shows the areas of
increased light intensity with pressure. The
video output can be captured via a frame
grabber and then manipulated and analysed by
software (Fig. 12.3). The pedobarograph is a
non-portable system that requires a raised
walkway into which it can be placed. The images
produced provide high spatial resolution in con-
tinuous greyscale or 16 colour zones.
The pedobarograph has been well docu-
mented using both dynamic and static data
(Betts & Duckworth 1978, Betts et al 1980b,
Hughes et al 1990, Minns & Craxford 1984). In
most of these studies authors have used com-
puter imaging techniques to zone the greyscale
images and enhance them with colour. Several
investigations have been undertaken to establish
the effects of different foil characteristics on the
light intensity emitted. One study by Betts et al
(l980b) suggested that photographic paper with
a pearl finish would be a suitable foil for cali-
brated dynamic foot pressure measurements. In
Foil
Shielding
Light source
--- ---
Camera
Figure 12.3 Cross-section of a pedobarograph.
their study it was found that the paper showed
little viscoelasticity, tackiness or other hystere-
sis-like effects and no evidence of saturation
over the pressure range studied. Hysteresis is
the lag between the release of stress and the ces-
sation of strain in materials subjected to tension
or magnetism.
This work highlighted the need for careful
interpretation of the data. The systems
employed to measure load have within them
characteristics that can affect the data. For
example, the characteristics of the foil, when
measuring static loads, could provide loading
data that was too high or too low because of the
response time and hysteresis of the material. The
recovery time and recovery characteristics of the
material, once it has been loaded and unloaded,
is especially important when investigating
dynamic loading. In the early pedobarograph
studies not only was the material slow to recover
from loading but it also became tacky and
tended to stick to the glass surface even when
unloaded. This gave a false loading as a result of
~---- Light source
Force transducers
Plate
Mirror
 METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 311

the foil characteristics. The pedobarograph
system can be calibrated and can measure pres-
sures to 25 kg/ em? (2.45 MPa).
Recordings have been made of both static and
dynamic loading with feet considered to be
normal and abnormal. It has been stated that the
distribution of load between the sole of the foot
and a supporting surface can reveal information
about both the structure and the function of the
foot (Lord 1981). As mentioned previously it is
desirable to investigate the way in which the
plantar surface of the foot bears and transmits
loads.
Force plates
Force plates allow the measurement of vertical
and shear forces and centre of force application
under the foot. Force plates (e.g. Kistler'P',
AMTFM, Bertec'?') are fixed to the ground and
are used to measure the ground reaction forces
exerted as the patient walks on to the plate
during gait. The plates normally need to be set in
ing a hard copy print. The system provides
detailed numerical and graphical data on the
forces applied to the foot (Fig. 12.4). The system
has poor spatial resolution and does not analyse
discrete pressures on the plantar surface of the
foot. However, it should be noted that it can be
calibrated and has been used to calibrate other
force measurement systems.
Musgrave footprint
The Musgrave footprint is a computer-based
system that can be used for the measurement of
plantar foot pressures. The footplate is a low-
profile plate which uses Interlink force sensitive
resistors (FSRs) between aluminium plates. The
plates are often used in pairs to provide data of
LEFT RIGHT
10

epoxy concrete to prevent interference from

vibration, although these vibrations can nor-
FZ
mally be identified and ignored on gait data.
Force plates consist of a top plate that is mounted
level with the surrounding floor. The top surface
of the plate can be glass, aluminium or steel. The 25 Ant

top plate is separated from a bottom frame by

force transducers mounted at each corner. The FY
o-
force transducers are either piezoelectric - which m

use quartz transducers to generate an electric

Post
charge when stressed - or strain gauges.
~ 113- Lat ..,..
In the Kistler force plate, the plates incorporate is
u.
four quartz rings which exhibit a piezoelectric
effect, thus ensuring the system is sensitive to a ic--it7"'----=---V-,.. FX

force in three planes: x, y, z. The control unit

outputs continuous analogue data via 13 chan- Medt
", I ~JA
nels, of which eight are normally used. The only
limitation of the system is the speed at which
data can be received and stored and the ana-
logue-to-digital converter interface, which can
.s
m
ae
o-
co
0 t'JIL--"'"-'---~~ MZ p---+
limit the resolution in time. Each channel can be iii
sampled up to 3000 times per second. The col- E
:r:: -58 Lo-t
I
-

lected data can be displayed on the computer's I I I I I I I I I I

5 Ro ns •
I I ] I
,A.v. St21lCe :
I I
0.5645.
5 Runs, Av. Stance ~ 0.5725.
VDU as digital information or as a series of
graphs showing force against time before obtain- Figure 12.4 Data display from a Kistler force plate.
 312 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
both a temporal and spatial nature. The system is
interfaced through a standard PC and is therefore
relatively portable.
The Musgrave plate can be calibrated and can
record pressures up to 15 kg/ em- (14.4 MPa). It
produces data which can be displayed graphi-
cally, numerically or visually. The data presenta-
tion is clear and easy to interpret. Young et al
(1993) undertook a comparative trial of the
system against a pedobarograph and found that
the Musgrave plate was unable to measure pres-
sures above 15 kg/ cm-. Such pressures have fre-
quently been observed under the metatarsal
heads of diabetic patients. The work concluded
that in low-pressure areas such as the heel the
Musgrave footprint could provide comparable
results to the pedobarograph.
The Musgrave footprint tends to illustrate ver-
tical force as pressure values and cannot differ-
entiate high shear force values. Callosity under
the foot may not show high values unless the
load under the foot has a long duration of contact
with the pressure platform.
In-shoe force measurement
Many methods have been developed for record-
ing foot loading while the foot is shod.
Piezoelectric discs have been attached to the
plantar surface of the foot to record the different
effect of heel height on forefoot loading
(Schwartz & Heath 1947). Capacitive pressure
transducers have been stuck to the sole of the
foot to record peak pressures in predetermined
areas during gait in patients affected with
Hansen's disease (Bauman & Brand 1963).
Strain gauge transducers have been attached to
the forefoot and hindfoot of the sole of the shoe
to record the total floor reaction. By this method
it was possible to record the heel and sole forces
separately (Miyasaki & Iwakura 1978). An insole
for recording plantar pressures was developed
by Lereim & Serek-Hanssen (1973) in which
miniature transducers were accurately posi-
tioned against the sole of the foot by the use of X-
rays. These were then incorporated into a PVC
insole to be worn in the shoe. New insoles had to
be made for each subject.
Insole pressure measurement systems have
become commercially available, e.g. the German
Emed system, the Italian Orthomat and F-Scan.
The Emed system belongs to a class of devices
characterised as matrix mats. In these devices,
the individual sensors are formed electronically
at the intersection of rows and columns of
conductive material (Nicol & Henning 1978).
The F-Scan insole system consists of a printed
insole approximately 300 mm long, 105 mm
wide across the forefoot, 70 mm wide across the
heel and 0.02 mm thick. The insole is a multi-
layer, piezoresistive, screen-printed sensor sand-
wiched in a moisture-resistant coating. The
layers are held together by small glue spots at a
repeat distance of 1 cm square. This allows the
sensor insole to be cut to fit any size of
shoe down to an adult size 4, providing care is
taken not to cut through any required silver
connecting tracts.
The ink tracts provide multiple sensors of
identical characteristics. The sensors relay data
(Fig. 12.5) via silver tracts which are banded
together to exit the foot on the lateral aspect and
insert into a small, lightweight signal processing
unit worn by the subject just above the lateral
malleolus. The data are presented to the practi-
tioner via a screen and/ or a printer supplying a
one-to-one sized printout. The data presentation
and collection is achieved via a user-friendly pro-
gramme using windows and graphic display
keys that allows for several alternative data
display modes.
The insole sensors do not show a linear rela-
tionship between resistance and pressure; algo-
rithms in the software are used to assign levels
to pressure. Since this is not linear, different
ranges can be achieved for high or low pres-
sures. The insoles have a range from 0.57 kg/ em?
(56 kPa) to 8.85 kg/ em? (868 kPa). The insole unit
may be sensitive to temperature and moisture
changes. However, well-controlled protocols
may be able to reduce this characteristic.
Repeatable data collection runs are achievable
provided that the sensors are undamaged. Most
investigations use each insole unit for a
maximum of five data collection runs or approx-
imately 40 gait cycles. The sensor has been

Y-axis
t vides a method for measuring plantar loading
____ .~~
10 mm
: .--11--: 10 mm
-.11
lmm ~ l. .
Figure 12.5 Diagrammatic representation of F-Scan.
shown to exhibit significant decay after this
(Rose et al 1992). Unpublished work suggests
that the sensor, if laminated with a thin backing
material, produces valid and reliable data
throughout its working load range for 200 gait
cycles. The sensors have shown failure with
respect to total breakdown of the silver relay
tracks, and loss of individual sensors as a result
of marked creasing or cutting. It has also been
noted that sensors can be permanently switched
on, registering maximum loads. This is thought
to be as a result of sensor damage during cutting
the insole to fit shoes. Software modifications in
the future may allow investigators to delete 'hot'
sensors prior to data analysis.
METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 313
The advantage of the system is that it pro-
of successive steps of each foot while the foot is
shod. The foot can be analysed for up to 6 sand
the foot-to-shoe or foot-to-orthosis interface
can be investigated directly. The system is
being developed to further increase the loading
range of the insoles so as to achieve a more
acceptable working range to allow analysis
X-axis
of running foot pressures and loads seen in
pathological feet.
Accelerometers
The use of accelerometers in gait analysis has
generally been confined to the measurement of
impact forces such as those seen at heel strike.
Much work has been undertaken by sports
footwear manufacturers in the quest for the ideal
shock-attenuating insole unit. The 'shock meter'
system has been used to investigate shock waves
transmitted during gait (Johnson 1990). A few
experiments have been undertaken using
accelerometers mounted on pins and then
screwed directly into the bones of volunteers,
although this method is clinically unacceptable.
Accelerometers have been used to measure accel-
eration of body parts during motion (Morris
1973). Accelerometers have been used in research
but in clinical practice they may not be of much
value (Collins & Whittle 1989).
Kinematics
Kinematics describes angular movement and dis-
placement of joints and the body throughout
space. There are a variety of ways in which these
data can be measured directly and indirectly.
Direct method
Direct measurement can be achieved by using
goniometers (Chao 1980). These measure
joint angle changes. The use of goniometers
is becoming increasingly common, especially
electrogoniometers and flexible goniometers
(Fig. 12.6). Electrogoniometers (e.g. Biometric'Y)
are electromechanical devices that span a joint,
 314 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
II
Figure 12.6 Electrogoniometer with transducer capable of
reading 0.1 0 of motion (Penny & Giles, Gwent, UK). The
goniometer has been attached to the foot to record subtalar
motion.
being attached proximal and distal to the joint in
the plane of motion that the joint generally
moves in. They consist of two rigid links that are
connected by a potentiometer that gives a
voltage output proportional to the change in
angle between the two rigid links. The angle the
joint moves through is recorded in a data collec-
tion unit. Foot switches can be used to record
events such as heel contact and toe off, so the
timing of the motion can be determined.
Electrogoniometers can be used to measure two-
or three-dimensional joint motion. They are of
low cost and are relatively easy to use. The
equipment requires careful calibration and
setting up in order to achieve valid and repro-
ducible results. Some patients complain of being
impeded by the measurement systems. This
will affect the results obtained. Measurement of
the small joints within the foot during gait has
been more of a challenge and has led to the
development and production of small flexible
goniometers.
Indirect methods
Cine photography was the principal technique
for gathering kinematic data prior to the intro-
duction of video systems. Muybridge (1955) pio-
neered the use of cine photography in the study
of human and animal locomotion. This work was
a classic and is still used by scientists and artists
today. In the book Human walking, Inman et al
(1981) demonstrate how the use of cine photog-
raphy and still pictures can provide valuable
information about joint angles and limb place-
ment during locomotion. Data analysis of limb
movement became much easier and quicker,
although still too slow and time-consuming for
routine clinical applications, following digitisation
of the images (Sutherland & Hagy 1972).
Modern cine and video recording devices are
now available and can be directly interfaced with
a computer.
Video motion based systems (e.g. APASTM,
Expert Vision'P', Opotrakr'<, Vicon P', Peak
PerformanceP', MacReflex™) use one or more
cameras to track markers that are attached to sub-
jects at various locations. The markers are either
active or passive. Active markers are infrared
light-emitting diodes and the passive markers are
reflective solid shapes. The video cameras keep
track of the coordinates of the markers: in three-
dimensional systems, the computer software
keeps track of the three-dimensional coordinates
of each marker based upon the two-dimensional
data from two or more cameras.
Two-dimensional analysis is cheaper than
three-dimensional analysis because fewer
cameras are needed and less sophisticated soft-
ware needed for the analysis. Inaccuracy can
occur if the segment being investigated rotates
away from being perpendicular to camera. It can
be useful, for example, to record the motion of a
marker on the navicular to monitor motion in the
sagittal plane or to monitor frontal plane motion
of the calcaneus. However, the analysis of frontal
plane motion of the calcaneus from a two-dimen-
sional system may be problematic, due to range
of motion of the rearfoot complex, the position of
the assumed subtalar joint axis and out of plane
may distort the true angle of motion.

In three-dimensional analysis the computer
tracks several sectors at once, allowing the obser-
vation of multiple joints and multiple segments
in all three body planes simultaneously. Cardan
angles are used to measure kinematics, by com-
paring orientation of a distal segment relative to
a proximal segment. Linked segment models that
are based on a joint being composed of two seg-
ments are used to describe the kinematics of gait.
The foot can be modelled as many linked seg-
ments. Three measurable points on a segment are
needed by the analysis software to determine the
position and orientation of the body segments in
all three body planes. The three markers are used
to define directions within segments and build
segmental coordinate systems in three dimen-
sions. The joint centres are calculated using these
segmental coordinate systems. From the joint
centres, anatomically aligned coordinate systems
are constructed and used to calculate joints angle
during walking trials.
To minimise errors, systems need to be cali-
brated prior to use. The placement of markers on
the skin relative to osseous landmarks is crucial if
models that have been developed for various
systems are to be used with any reproducibility
and if subjects are to be evaluated on different
days or if different subjects are to be compared
with each other. Movement of the skin marker
over osseous landmarks also needs to be taken
into account during the modelling of gait or the
evaluation of an intervention.
As well as calculating and providing graphs of
kinematics, software computes the kinetic vari-
ables of the net joint moments, forces and powers
based upon the kinematics and ground reaction
force from the force platform.
Electromagnetic tracking systems. These
systems (e.g. Polhemusl''", Skill 'Iechnologies'P',
Flock of Birds'[") are beginning to be used more
frequently and are not dissimilar in the informa-
tion they provide to the video-based gait analysis
systems, but use electromagnetic sensors to track
the motion of a 'marker' attached to the skin in
three dimensions. They avoid the need for
cameras and the use of multiple markers on each
segment.
METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 315
Electromyography (EMG)
The EMG is the electrical signal associated with
muscular contraction. EMG analysis can provide
information about timing and intensity of muscle
contraction. Such information provides data that
indicate whether muscles are contracting in the
correct order (phasic), at the right time and in an
appropriate way. From this phasic muscle activ-
ity, tone, continuous and clonic muscle contrac-
tion or no muscle activity can be recorded. Data
can assist with the assessment and aetiology of
movement abnormality or in the review and
assessment of physical therapies, rehabilitation
or surgical interventions.
~lectromyographic data can be collected by
usmg surface or indwelling electrodes.
Indwelling electrodes are more definitive than
surface electrodes in terms of sampling activity
from a particular muscle. These electrodes are
also required for analysis of deep muscle activity,
e.g. in the deep posterior compartment of the
calf. A major problem with this sort of electrode
is that it causes intramuscular bleeding and may
displace during muscle contraction (Kadaba et al
1985). The use of surface electrodes is clinically
more viable as they are non-invasive and less
variable than indwelling electrodes. These elec-
trodes are generally used to provide gross infor-
ma.tion about the activity of muscle groups
(Wmter 1990) and are therefore less selective.
There is also an increased risk of 'cross-
talk' - picking up activity from other muscles
that are not directly under investigation. The
EMG is therefore commonly used to identify
gross phasic muscle activity prior to the fitting of
orthoses designed to affect muscle activity, or for
preoperative planning prior to tendon transfer or
lengthening. For routine clinical practice the
system is of little value.
Energy expenditure
Patients who exhibit gross changes in their gait
are likely to use more energy than patients with
an efficient gait pattern. This is not surprising
since the structure and function of the locomo-
 316 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
tor system is designed to be energy-efficient in
terms of its ability both to store and use energy
(Ch. 8). The determination of energy expendi-
ture in gait has been undertaken since the
1950s. Many investigations have looked at
normal and abnormal gaits in terms of energy
cost. Estimation of the energy cost of walking
usually involves the measurement of oxygen
consumption (Inman et a11981) or calculation of
potential and kinetic energy levels of body seg-
ments from their motions and masses
(Quanbury et aI1975).
A commercially available device called Caltrac
measures the total number of calories used by
subjects during walking. An alternative
approach is to monitor heart rates as an indica-
tion of energy expenditure during activity (Rose
et aI1989). In this method the 'physiological cost
index' (PCl) is calculated as an estimate of energy
used. The following formula is used:
PCI = (heart rate walking - heart rate resting) /
velocity
where heart rate is in beats/min and velocity is
in m/min, or beats and velocity are per second.
This is probably more useful in clinical practice
than the measurement of oxygen consumption
and carbon dioxide production during activity.
The measurement of oxygen consumption
requires an analysis of the subject's exhaled air.
Normally this requires the use of a Douglas bag,
which allows the respiratory quotient to be cal-
culated. Exercise is generally undertaken on a
treadmill. Since the equipment required is bulky,
REFERENCES
Bauman J H, Brand P W 1963 Measurement of pressure
between foot and shoe. Lancet 3: 629-632
Betts R P, Duckworth T 1978 A device for measuring plantar
pressures under the sole of the foot. Engineering in
Medicine 7(4): 223-228
Betts R P, Franks C 1, Duckworth T, Burke J 1980a Static and
dynamic foot pressure measurements in clinical
orthopaedics. Journal of Medical and Biological
Computing 18: 674-684
Betts R P, Franks C I, Duckworth T 1980b Analysis of
pressure and load under the foot. Part 2: Quantitation of
the dynamic distribution. Clinical Physical Physiological
Measurement 1(2): 113-124
this sort of assessment is not routinely under-
taken in the clinic.
Multisystems
Several developments are currently under way
to provide multiple linked data. These systems
may well provide data from energy consump-
tion studies with gait and force plate studies. In
some gait laboratories additional information
from EMG is also simultaneously presented.
The difficulty with these systems is that they
tend to cause information overload of the prac-
titioner.
SUMMARY
Gait analysis is a complex task. The collection and
analysis of quantitative data can aid observation
of gait. One of the main problems with these
methods is the difficulty in establishing what is
normal. Gait may alter with every step a person
takes; as a result, repeatability is a major problem.
The practitioner must also be wary of highly tech-
nical equipment which will provide complex data
that prove difficult to interpret and require con-
siderable computer power or time.
In the research field, quantitative analysis of
gait is making a contribution to our understand-
ing of the complexities of gait. In particular,
research into gait is improving our knowledge of
its components and is also being used to design
and evaluate therapeutic interventions.
Chao E Y S 1980 Justification of triaxial goniometer for the
measurement of joint rotation. Journal of Biomechanics
13: 989-1006
Chodera J 1960 Pedobarograph: apparatus for visual display
of pressures between contacting surfaces of irregular
shape. C25 Patent, 104 514 30d
Collins J J, Whittle M W 1989 Impulsive forces during
walking and their clinical implications. Clinical
Biomechanics 4: 179-187
Duckworth T, Boulton A J M, Betts R P, Franks C 1, Ward J D
1985 Plantar pressure measurements and the prevention
of ulceration in the diabetic foot. Anatomical Record
59:481-490

Eastlock M E, Arvidson J, Snyder-Mackler L, Danoff J V,
McGarvey C L 1991 Inter-rater reliability of videotaped
observational gait analysis assessments. Physical Therapy
71:465-472
Gage J R, Ounpuu S 1989 Gait analysis in clinical practice.
Seminar in Orthopaedics 4(2): 72-87
Goodkin R, Diller L 1973 Reliability among physical
therapists in diagnosis and treatment of gait deviations
in hemiplegics. Perception and Motor Skills 37: 727-732
Harris R I, Beath T 1947 Army foot survey. An investigation
of foot ailments in Canadian soldiers. Ottawa National
Research Council, Canada NRC no. 1574
Henry A P J, Waugh W 1975 The use of footprints in
assessing the results of operations for hallux valgus. A
comparison of Keller's operation and arthrodesis. Journal
of Bone and Joint Surgery 57B(4): 478-481
Hughes J, Clark P, Klenerman L 1990 The importance of
toes in walking. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery
72B(2): 245-251
Inman V T, Ralston H J, Todd F 1981 Human walking.
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, MD
Johnson G R 1990 Measurement of shock acceleration during
walking and running using the shock meter. Clinical
Biomechanics 5: 47-50
Kadaba M P, Wootten M E, Gainey J, Cochran G V B 1985
Repeatability of phasic muscle activity: Performance of
surface intramuscular wire electrodes in gait analysis.
Journal of Orthopaedic Research 3(3): 350-359
Keenan A M, Bach T M 1996 Video assessment of rearfoot
movements during walking - a reliability study.
Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation
77: 651-655
Kilmartin T E, Wallace W A 1992 The significance of pes
planus in juvenile hallux valgus. Foot and Ankle 13(2):
53-56
Kippen S C 1993 A preliminary assessment of recording the
physical dimensions of an inked footprint. Journal of
British Podiatric Medicine 48(5): 74-80
Krebs D E, Edlestein J E, Fishman S 1985 Reliability of
observational kinematic gait analysis. Physical Therapy
65: 1027-1033
Lereim P, Serek-Hanssen F 1973 A method of recording
plantar pressure distribution under the sole of the foot.
Bulletin of Prosthetics Research: 118-125
Lord M 1981 Foot pressure measurement: A review of
methodology. Journal of Biomedical Engineering 3(2): 91-99
Minns R J, Craxford A D 1984 Pressure under the forefoot
in rheumatoid arthritis; a comparison of static and
dynamic methods of assessment. Clinical Orthopaedic
and Related Research 187: 235-242
Miyasaki S, Iwakura H 1978 Foot-force measuring device
for clinical assessment of pathological gait. Medical
Biological Engineering and Computing 16: 429-436
Morris J R W 1973 Accelerometry: a technique for the
measurement of human body movements. Journal of
Biomechanics 6: 729-736
Muybridge, Eadweard 1955 The human figure in motion.
Dover Publications, New York
METHODS OF ANALYSING GAIT 317
Nicol K, Henning E M 1978 Measurement of pressure
distribution by means of a flexible large surface mat. In:
Asmussen E, Jorgenson K (eds) Biomechanics VI-A.
University Park Press, Baltimore, pp 374-380
Pathokinesiology Service and Physical Therapy Department
1993 Observational gait analysis handbook. Rancho Los
Amigos Medical Centre, Downy, California
Perry J 1992 Gait analysis: normal and pathologic function.
Slack, Thorofare, New Jersey
Quanbury AD, Winter D A, Reimer G D 1975 Instantaneous
power and power flow in body segments during walking.
Journal of Medical Engineering and Technology 7: 273-279
Rose J, Gamble J G 1993 Human walking, 2nd edn. Williams
& Wilkins, Baltimore, MD
Rose G K, Welton E A, Marshall T 1985 The diagnosis of flat
foot in the child. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 67B: 1
Rose J R, Gamble J G, Medeiros Jet al1989 Energy cost of
walking in normal children and those with cerebral palsy:
comparison of heart rate and oxygen uptake. Journal of
Pediatric Orthopedics 9: 276-279
Rose N E, Feiwell L A, Cracchiolo A 1992 A method for
measuring foot pressures using a high resolution,
computerized insole sensor: the effect of heel wedges on
plantar pressure distribution and centre of force. Foot and
Ankle 13(5): 263-270
Saleh M, Murdoch G 1985 In defence of gait analysis.
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 67B: 237-241
Schwartz R P, Heath A L 1947 The definition of human
locomotion on the basis of measurement. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 29(1): 203-214
Silvino N, Evanski P M, Waugh T R 1980 The Harris and
Beath mat: diagnostic validity and clinical use. Clinical
Orthopaedics and Related Research 151: 265-269
Southerland C C 1996 Gait evaluation in clinical
biomechanics. In: Vamassy R (ed) Clinical biomechanics
of the lower extremity. Mosby, St Louis
Sutherland D H, Hagy J L 1972 Measurement of gait
movements from motion picture film. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 54: 787-797
Tollafield D R 1990 A reusable transducer system for
measuring foot pressures. A study of reliability in a
commercial pressure pad. BSc thesis, Department of
Health Sciences, Coventry Polytechnic
Welton E A 1992 The Harris and Beath footprint:
interpretation and clinical value. Foot and Ankle 13(8):
462-468
West PM 1987 The clinical use of the Harris and Beath
footprinting mat in assessing plantar pressures.
Chiropodist 42(9): 337-348
Wilkinson M, Menz H 1997 Measurement of gait parameters
from footprints: a reliability study. The Foot 7: 19-23
Winter D A 1990 Biomechanics and motor control of
normal human movement, 2nd edn. John Wiley & Sons,
New York
Young M J, Murray H J, Veves A, Boulton A J M 1993 A
comparison of the Musgrave Footprint and optical
pedobarograph systems for measuring dynamic foot
pressures in diabetic patients. Foot 3(2): 62-64
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 319
Microbiology 320
Indicationsfor microbiology 320
Sampling techniques 320
Identification of microorganisms 325
Urinalysis 328
Indications for urinalysis 328
Collection of the urine specimen 328
Clinical assessment 328
Laboratory assessment 330
Bloodanalysis 331
Indicationsfor blood analysis 331
Collection of the blood sample 332
Haematology 332
Biochemistry 334
Serology 335
Histology 335
Indicationsfor histology 335
Sampling techniques 336
Transportation and storage 337
Tests and interpretation of results 338
Summary 338
Laboratory tests
A. Percivall
1. Reilly
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an overview of laboratory
tests which can be performed on tissue and fluid
samples from the lower limb. The tests of most
relevance are:
• microbiology
• urinalysis
• blood analysis - haematology, biochemistry
and serology
• histology.
The tests playa vital role in enabling the prac-
titioner to understand the nature of local and sys-
temic related pathologies affecting the lower
limb. Data from the tests can be used to:
• provide information to aid the diagnostic
process
• enable a definitive diagnosis to be made in
situations where there may be a number of
possible diagnoses
• measure the disease process in relation to
normal parameters
• reveal occult disease processes that might
affect therapeutic and treatment options
• enable implementation of effective treatment.
The accuracy of any laboratory test is deter-
mined by its sensitivity, specificity, predictive
value and efficiency (see Ch. 2). Sensitivity indi-
cates how often a positive test result is obtained
from a patient with a particular disease, whereas
specificity indicates the number of negative
results from patients without a particular
319
 320 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
----_._.__._--------- - - _ .
disease. Predictive values of positive test results
give a measure of the frequency of the disease
amongst all patients who test positive for that
disease. The efficiency of a test indicates the per-
centage of patients correctly diagnosed with a
particular pathology.
Some of the tests can be undertaken in the
clinic (near patient testing) but most require the
use of laboratory services. Because of the expense
and possible inconvenience caused by some of
the tests it is important that they are only used
where appropriate.
MICROBIOLOGY
Indications for microbiology
Practitioners often request microbiological analy-
sis to determine which particular organism is
causing an obvious infection. However, the
process can often be wasteful of both time and
resources. Organisms found and identified in the
laboratory usually fall into two categories: they
either reflect the normal microbial flora or they
fall outside this group and may be considered
pathogens. It must be remembered that some
normally resident organisms have the propensity
to cause disease when found in abnormal sites.
Conversely, just because a normal resident
organism has been isolated at an abnormal site, it
may not be the causative agent of the disease as
commensals often contaminate samples sent to
the laboratory. Further, the distinction between a
pathogenic organism and a non-pathogen is
often imprecise, e.g. where a person is a 'carrier'
of a disease. This has led to the adoption of two
basic rules:
• Never without good reason dismiss a
microbe as a contaminant because it is not an
'accepted' pathogen.
• Never without good reason accept a microbe
as the necessary cause of a disease merely
because it is an 'accepted' pathogen.
Microorganisms are classified, biologically,
into four main groups: viruses, protozoa, bacteria
and fungi. In podiatry, with the exception of
some superficial mycoses, most infections are
------------_...-
caused by bacteria. Some viral infections of the
foot do occur: the main protagonist is the human
papilloma virus (HPV), which gives rise to
plantar warts or verrucae.
As with other forms of laboratory testing,
microbiological testing should only be consid-
ered when it is likely to serve a useful purpose.
The circumstances where it is applicable are:
• when the results of testing are likely to
influence the choice of treatment and result
in more effective treatment for the patient
• if the results will help identify sources of
infection that need to be traced.
Sampling techniques
Specimen types
Specimens may be divided into two groups:
those from normally sterile sites and those con-
taining a normal resident flora. The differentia-
tion is important since samples taken from
normally sterile sites need to be inoculated into
enrichment media. The media provides nutrients
that will allow rapid growth (or amplification) of
the organisms so that enough will be available
for identification. Specimens taken from sites
which have resident flora will, in contrast, need
to be inoculated into media containing selective
agents which will suppress the growth of any
commensal organisms that might mask a poten-
tial pathogen.
Ideally, when microbiological information is
needed, an appropriate specimen is taken from
the correct site. The specimen is transported
immediately to the laboratory where it is
processed quickly using the best tests, which are
then correctly reported; these results are returned
to the originator where they can be properly inter-
preted at a time when the information is relevant.
Thus, it is important that the results of the work
done in the laboratory are a true reflection of that
specimen. Reasons for failure to report an organ-
ism originally present in a specimen include:
• a delay in examination
• the amount of specimen examined is
insufficient

• the amount of medium into which the
specimen is inoculated is insufficient
• the medium used for inoculation is of
doubtful quality or unsuitable for the growth
of the organism present
• the incubation time of the inoculated medium is
too short or the wrong conditions are provided
• too few colonies are examined or the
organism is not recognised.
It is imperative to use reputable laboratories
that employ strict internal standards and where
reagents and media are performance-tested
using standard organisms. If this procedure is
adhered to, failure to report pathogens often rests
with the sampling technique employed by the
requesting practitioner. Good-quality specimens
are obtained following certain guidelines:
• The sample should be taken from the actual
site where an infection has been diagnosed
or is suspected.
• Skin should not be cleaned with an antiseptic
prior to taking the sample.
• Strict aseptic technique must be followed in
order to reduce the risk of the sample
becoming contaminated by the
microbiological flora of either the patient or
the person taking the sample.
• Many pathogenic microorganisms are
surprisingly delicate. Unless special
measures are taken they do not survive for
long away from the body. This means it is
often vital that specimens are transported to
the laboratory without delay.
• If some delay in transporting specimens to
the laboratory is anticipated, it is important
that steps are taken to prevent significant
growth of contaminating normal flora
organisms. These organisms grow at room
temperature and can swamp the genuine
pathogen. Suppression is normally achieved
by refrigeration of samples or inclusion of an
inhibitor in the transport medium.
• It is important that sufficient sample is
supplied so that the laboratory may use
different methods for culture and analysis of
the sample and thereby maximise their
LABORATORY TESTS 321
chances of providing meaningful results.
Many techniques may not work reliably if
insufficient material is provided.
• If at all possible, samples should be taken
prior to the commencement of antibiotic
therapy. A drug may suppress a pathogen
sufficiently to thwart isolation and
identification, without actually working well
enough to allow the patient to recover.
• It is often desirable for practitioners to wait for
the initial results from the laboratory before
starting antibiotic therapy. The results will
allow practitioners to choose a narrow-
spectrum drug that they can be confident will
do the job. However, if a life-threatening
infection is suspected, a broad-spectrum
antibiotic should be prescribed without delay.
• Specimens taken for microbiological analysis
are by their very nature likely to contain
pathogenic organisms and therefore should
be treated with care.
• Good documentation is vital to ensure that
samples are not mixed up, lost or subjected to
inappropriate tests.
• It is vital that there is dialogue between the
practitioner taking the sample and the
laboratory staff. For more unusual organisms
the microbiologist may be able to provide
advice about the most appropriate methods
of sampling and transportation.
• In order to be effective the laboratory requires
good clinical information about the patient.
The site of the suspected infection must be
stated. The symptoms should be included on
the clinical history section. Is there anything in
the patient's history or in the clinical features
(colour of pus, cellulitis) that might provide a
clue as to the type of organism that is causing
the problem? It is important to note recent
treatment with antibiotics for the reason given
above. Without this sort of detailed
information, valuable time and resources may
be wasted in inappropriate analyses.
Apparatus for obtaining specimens
Containers. Strong leak-proof sterile contain-
ers of adequate size, conforming to the relevant
 322 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
British Standards specification, must be used to
transport specimens from source to laboratory.
These British Standards pay attention to min-
imising the health hazard from leakage, aerosol
formation or spread of airborne particles when
opening containers holding specimens.
Containers range from 6 ml 'bijou' bottles, with
screw caps suitable for body fluids, trans-
port media and biological cultures, to large
300 ml bottles suitable for early morning urine
samples and sanitary specimens. Whatever con-
tainer is used, it must be clearly labelled in
indelible ink with sufficient space for name,
address, date and nature of specimen together
with the time the specimen was taken. The label
should have a water-resistant back.
Swabs. Bacteriological swabs are often made
from a pledget of Dacron (Terylene) attached to
the end of a holder made from wood, plastic or
metal, the whole of which is sterilised before use.
Cotton wool pledgets can be used, but they may
release lipoproteins, which can harm some fas-
tidious bacteria. Swabs are the collection instru-
ment of choice where microbial contamination or
infection is suspected. Swabs complete and ready
sterilised with or without transport media are
available commercially.
Collection of samples
Wounds and mucosal surfaces. If a large
quantity of pus is present this may be drained
and sent to the laboratory; otherwise, a swab
should be taken. Great care should be taken to
avoid contamination with the normal flora from
surrounding healthy tissue. It is important that
a sample is taken from the base of the wound. If
it is taken from the superficial edges, the flora of
the adjacent skin could contaminate it. Swabs
are placed into tubes containing a semi-solid
transport medium, which prevents them from
drying out.
Skin. For mycological (fungal) investigations,
nail clippings or skin scrapings from the edge of
the lesion, taken with a blunt scalpel, can be
placed in either a purpose-designed packet
which has a black inner surface to help identify
the sample, or a clean, dry plastic container.
Once the sample has been obtained it should
be sent directly to the laboratory. Accom-
panying the sample will be a laboratory request
form. Accurate information will enable the lab-
oratory staff to carry out the most appropriate
tests and investigations quickly and thus
provide the clinician with the results without
delay. Laboratory request forms vary, but it is
important that the following information is
included:
• The patient's name.
• The ward name or place where the sample
was taken.
• The patient's date of birth - resident flora
change with age and it is therefore helpful to
the laboratory staff in their investigations.
• Date of admission to hospital - useful for
infection control staff to monitor nosocomial
infection.
• Site of infection - be as specific as possible, it
will help laboratory staff distinguish
commensals from pathogenic flora.
• Antibiotic therapy - even small amounts of
antibiotic inhibit the growth of micro-
organisms in the laboratory.
• Date and time of collection of the specimen -
microorganisms survive or multiply at
varying rates and, thus, this information is
important when the sample is cultured.
• Specimen type and investigation requested -
remember most swabs look the same once in
the laboratory, therefore state clearly what the
specimen is. State whether the sample is for
microculture and sensitivity, for virology or
serology.
• Biohazard status - if suspected, then the
sample should not only be marked as such
but should be transported in double-wrapped
specimen bags.
Laboratory examination
When samples containing suspected bacterial or
fungal pathogens are sent to the laboratory, the
most appropriate methods for investigation will
be carried out. The methods used fall into the fol-
lowing categories:

------------------------------------------------------
• direct examination - macroscopy and
microscopy
• culture
• biochemical tests
• sensitivity testing
• serology and antigen testing
• pathogenicity testing in animals.
Macroscopy. Direct examination of the sample
may give clues to the presence of infection or
other factors. Turbid cerebrospinal fluid or the
presence of pus in urine is immediate evidence of
infection. The foul smell of anaerobic organisms
may be detected in pus. Macroscopy will also
show if there has been any contamination of the
specimen: e.g. if the swab smells of disinfectant,
rendering the sample useless. Most specimens
will, however, need to be examined under a
microscope.
Microscopy. Although it is possible to examine
specimens directly as an unstained preparation,
more information can be obtained by staining the
organisms present. However, there are often only
a few organisms present and although these can
be concentrated in some samples by, for example,
centrifuging cerebrospinal fluid, it is usual to
stain organisms obtained after culture. The use of
microscopy on non-cultured specimens is most
valuable when the sample has been obtained
from a normally sterile site and thus the presence
of any organism indicates infection.
The most widely used stain is Gram's stain:
gentian violet in Gram's stain binds to the cell
wall of Gram-positive organisms and resists
decolorisation with methanol or acetone. Those
cells decolorised and stained with a counter-
stain, to make them visible, are classified as
Gram-negative bacteria. The Gram stain imme-
diately separates most bacteria into two groups
and this together with other factors significantly
aids diagnosis (Fig. 13.1). The other most com-
monly used stain is the Ziehl-Neelsen stain for
acid-fast bacteria such as Mycobacterium spp.
Staining and subsequent microscopy can be
rapidly done and is often more valuable than
culture - it can take up to 8 weeks to give a
culture result in mycobacterial disease - to give a
presumptive diagnosis of potentially life-threat-
LABORATORY TESTS 323
ening diseases. Other microscopic techniques
such as dark ground, immunofluorescence and
electron microscopy are available and are used in
specific cases, the latter being especially useful
for viruses.
Fungal hyphae and spores can often be seen
under the light microscope: skin scrapings with
suspected dermatophyte infection are mounted
on a slide, cleared with 10% potassium hydrox-
ide and stained with lactophenol blue. This
simple procedure can often be done by the podi-
atrist without recourse to the laboratory, thus
giving an instant diagnosis. Culture of these
specimens can take 2-3 weeks. Many patients
will have been prescribed a topical antifungal
medicament based on the clinical features of the
disease which, if caused by a dermatophyte,
should be well on the way to resolution by the
time the results are reported.
Culture. Culture allows either the ampli-
fication of organisms initially present only in
small numbers or selection of organisms from
mixed inocula. Media for cultivation of bacteria
and fungi must be capable of satisfying all
their nutritional requirements and provide
appropriate conditions which satisfy any factors
which may affect their metabolism such as tem-
perature, pH, osmolarity, oxygen, carbon dioxide
and radiation.
Culture media fall into the following classes:
• Synthetic or defined media - prepared
entirely from organic or inorganic chemicals
such that the exact composition is known and
is repeatable on any occasion.
• Routine media - prepared from a mixture of
digested or extracted animal or plant protein,
such as beef or soya bean. They are usually
supplemented with accessory growth factors
and the pH adjusted to 7.4. They are used for
routine growth of many bacteria and their
composition is only approximately known.
• Enrichment media - usually routine media
with specific additions such as whole blood,
serum or additional sugars, for the growth of
more exacting organisms.
• Selective media - routine media to which has
been added selectively inhibitory chemicals
324 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

CHAINS/PAIRS - - - ... Streptococcus

A NON-SPORING - - - ... Propionibacterium

- - - - - - - - - - ... Escherichia Pseudomonas

Klebsiella Vibrio
Proteus Campylobacter
Salmonella Haemophilus
Shigella Brucella

B I:...:..:.':':"':':=':"=-=.'-=-' - - - - - - - - ... Bacteroides

Figure 13.1 Bacteria classified by staining, shape and use of oxygen A. Gram-positive B. Gram-negative.

that suppress or kill all but a few types of
(known) organisms.
• Indicator media - routine media with the
addition of substances which change the
appearance of the media when a particular
organism grows on it: for example,
haemolysis of red blood cells by haemolytic
bacteria or the production of coloration in
dermatophyte test medium which
incorporates an indicator that detects the
rise in pH as the culture grows.
Culture media can be used in either of two
forms: liquid or solid. The solid form is prepared
 LABORATORY TESTS 325

from liquid media with the addition of agar in
concentrations of 1-4%. Liquid media or 'broths'
are used, for instance, in the routine culture of
pure cultures, sterility testing and anaerobic
culture but suffer from the disadvantage that
mixed cultures cannot be separated. The use of
solid media facilitates this process and mixed
cultures can be separated to allow isolation of
individual colonies.
Identification of microorganisms
Bacteria
It is first necessary to isolate the microorganism
in pure culture before carrying out identification
tests. This is usually achieved by streaking or
spreading the initial inoculum on the surface of
solid selective media to produce isolated colonies
of the desired organism. A colony is then selected
and may need subculturing in routine or
enriched media to restore normal growth before
examination. Table 13.1 lists the types of bacterial
pathogens found in the lower limb.
The process of identification is normally done
in the following way:
Morphology. Stained microscopic mounts are
examined for size, shape, cell aggregates, the
presence of spores, etc. Hanging drop mounts of
living organisms are examined for motility and
special techniques can be applied for the exami-
nation of capsules and £lagellae.
Staining reaction. The Gram stain is the
most important of the staining reactions and, in
conjunction with the morphology, is often
enough to narrow the field considerably.
Staining with malachite green will show the
bacterial spores in Bacillus and Clostridium spp.,
the position of which in the cell can determine
the species.
Cultural characteristics. The size, shape and
colour of colonies on solid media are sometimes
helpful in diagnosis but are not sufficiently stable
enough to be of routine value. However, the
ability of an organism to grow on different
media, including the stimulatory effects of added
substances such as glucose, whole blood or
serum, can be significant, i.e. the degree of
haemolysis of blood incorporated into the media
is used to differentiate streptococci. Alpha-
haemolytic streptococci such as Streptococcus
pneumoniae produce colonies which are sur-
rounded by a green ring, whereas Streptococcus
pyogenes, a beta-haemolytic bacterium that is
responsible for human throat infections, grows

Table 13.1 Bacterial pathogens found in infections of the lower limb

Bacteria Features

Staphylococcus aureus
Steptococcus pyogenes
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
Escherichia coli
Klebsiella spp.
Proteus spp.
Corynebacterium minutissimum
Clostridium welchii
Gram-positive, aerobic coccus. Most frequent cause of foot infections. Able to form an
enzyme which coagulates citrated plasma: therefore the infection tends to remain
localised. Responsible for boils, carbuncles, septic toes and osteomyelitis.
Gram-positive, aerobic or anaerobic coccus. All strains are beta-haemolytic. Produce
enzymes which help break down surrounding connective tissue and thus aid its
spread. May lead to cellulitis, lymphangitis and lymphadenitis and may be the prime
organism responsible for necrotising fasciitis.
Gram-negative, aerobic bacillus. Gives rise to blue-green pus and produces a pungent
odour. May be found in paronychia alongside Candida albicans.
Gram-negative, aerobic bacillus usually found in the gut. May be present in mixed
infections and also is found alongside Candida albicans in paronychia.
Gram-negative, aerobic bacillus found in the gut. May be present in mixed wound
infections.
Gram-negative, aerobic bacillus found in the gut. May be present in mixed wound
infections.
Gram-positive, aerobic bacillus responsible for erythrasma and pitted keratolysis.
Gram-positive, anaerobic bacillus responsible for gas gangrene.
 326 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
with a clear ring around it where the blood cells
have been completely lysed. These characteristics
of colony growth of bacteria are accompanied by
observations of the optimum temperature and
pH ranges for growth and any pigment that may
be produced. The gaseous requirements of
organisms can also be diagnostic. Some bacteria
are obligate aerobes (e.g, Bordeiella), but others
(e.g. Pseudomonas aeruginoeai, which usually
utilise molecular oxygen, are capable of utilising
nitrate if cultured anaerobically. Anaerobes are
either facultative, i.e. they can grow either aero-
bically or anaerobically, or obligate. Other factors
such as the ability to grow in the presence of
antibiotics, bile salts and high salt concentration
should also be noted.
Biochemical reactions. The ability of organ-
isms to utilise particular substrates with a
detectable end product, such as sugars, is a
widely tested function. A range of these bio-
chemical tests are available, including fermenta-
tion patterns, catalase, oxidase and nitrate
production, and are, perhaps, the most useful
aids to identification. For example, if a positive
identification of Gram-positive cocci has been
made, a catalase test can be done to aid further
diagnosis. Staphylococci and streptococci are
both commonly found cocci. Staphylococci are
catalase-positive and are able to produce
bubbles of oxygen when incubated with hydro-
gen peroxide. Streptococci, which are catalase-
negative, do not react in this way and no oxygen
is produced. This may help identify, say, a
colony of staphylococci but does not help with
identification of the species within the genus. A
mannitol fermentation test may be able to deter-
mine if the colony consists of Staphylococcus
aureus or Staph. epidermidis, since Staph. aureus
tests positive, whereas Staph. epidermidis does
not. Ready-made kits for multiple biochemical
analyses are freely available commercially to
enable complex tests to be carried out simulta-
neously with remarkable accuracy. All help to
build a pattern of the metabolic activity of the
organism, which - together with the informa-
tion gained from microscopic and cultural
examination - may be sufficient to identify the
organism.
Sensitivity testing. Once the identification of
an organism has been made, the susceptibility of
the organism is often predictable. However, not
all organisms have predictable resistance pat-
terns and, thus, testing for sensitivity to particu-
lar antibiotics is required. Perhaps the most
common method used to test antibiotic sensitiv-
ity is disc diffusion. A Petri dish is inoculated to
produce a lawn of the test organism and an
antibiotic-impregnated disc containing a range of
antibiotics at concentrations comparable with
therapeutic plasma levels is placed on the surface
of the lawn.
Inhibition of growth around the disc indicates
the organism is sensitive to the antibiotic.
Although this test indicates sensitivity of the
organism, it does not show the lowest concen-
tration (minimum inhibitory concentration,
MIC) at which the antibiotic will inhibit growth
of the microorganism. Although a relationship
between MIC and successful outcome of antimi-
crobial chemotherapy cannot be clearly estab-
lished, it is considered the most useful guide to
the efficacy of antimicrobial therapy. Several
methods of obtaining the MIC are available, and
recently commercial test strips of paper with
antibiotic incorporated along its length in
increasing concentration have simplified the
test. These test strips are put on a lawn inocu-
lum of the test organism and the point at which
the growth meets the test strip corresponds
to the MIC (Fig. 13.2). From these figures the
minimum bactericidal concentration (MBC) can
be determined; this is defined as the lowest con-
centration that prevents growth after subculture
to an antibiotic-free medium. These figures
are required where accuracy of dose is impor-
tant, e.g. in treating the immunocompromised
patient.
Serological and bacteriophage testing. It is
often possible to identify bacteria by determining
their antigenic composition. This can be achieved
by incorporating suspensions of the organism in
a series of standardised solutions of purified anti-
bodies. Where agglutination occurs, it can be
inferred that the organism possesses a specific
antigen against which that antibody was origi-
nally prepared. Bacteriophages are also highly
 LABORATORY TESTS 327
--------_._------------------------------------------------

clinical manifestation. Where an infection is sus-

pected, scrapings from the active periphery of a
skin lesion or full-thickness clippings of nails
High
together with subungual debris should be taken
and inoculated on and into Sabouraud's agar,
which is selective for fungal growth. The plates
should be incubated at 25-28 QC. Colonies of
Candida spp. often appear overnight or in a day
or two; dermatophytes take 1-3 weeks to appear.
Species identification depends on the rate of
M.I.C growth, colonial appearances and microscopic
7'----- Low
appearance of the fungus, in particular the
fungal spores - both micro- and macroconidia.
Sporulation of dermatophytes usually occurs
within 5-10 days of inoculation. Table 13.2 lists
Figure 13.2 E-test. An antibiotic strip placed on a lawn of the type of fungus responsible for fungal infec-
test organism to show minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC). tions affecting the feet.

specific in their lytic action of bacteria. Thus,
stock preparations of known phages can be used
in a similar way to antisera, allowing precise
identification of variants within species, e.g.
staphylococci.
Animal tests. The identification of pathogenic
organisms may require the use of animal inocu-
lation but is only of value if the inoculum pro-
duces highly specific symptoms or lesions in the
sensitive laboratory animal.
Fungi
Fungal infection is a common manifestation in
podiatric practice and is usually diagnosed on its
Viruses
Unlike bacteria and fungi, viruses cannot be
grown on artificial media and usually require
tissue culture, chick embryo culture or inocula-
tion into laboratory animals. Much work is in
progress to simplify viral identification. The
processes are complex and outside the scope of
this chapter.
Although newer techniques for the detection
and identification of microorganisms, such as
detection of antigens, antibodies and polymerase
chain reaction studies, help in the overall arma-
mentarium available to the practitioner, culture
still remains the gold standard against which all
these newer techniques are measured. The best

Table 13.2 Fungi responsible for fungal infections of the feet

Fungus Features

Trichophyton rubrum
Trichophyton mentagrophytes
Epidermophyton f1occosum
Scopulariopsis brevicaulis
Candida spp.
Affects skin and nails. 85% of cases of onychomycosis thought to be due to T. rubrum.
Can affect skin and hair in a number of ways. Diffuse dry scaling tinea on the soles is
usually due to T. rubrum.
Affects skin and nails. Can cause a range of skin responses but is especially associated
with vesicle eruption. 12% of cases of onychomycosis due to T. mentagrophytes.
Affects skin in a variety of ways but is especially associated with vesicle eruption.
Rarely causes onychomycosis.
Secondary pathogen. Produces a dark green-black discoloration.
A yeast of which Candida albicans is the most common. Affects skin and nails. In nails
is often responsible for paronychia.
 328 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
non-culture tests have specificities and sensitivi-
ties in the order of only 85-90%, even in the
hands of experienced staff.
It should always be remembered that because
of the skill and costs involved in culturing and
carrying out the exacting tests to identify organ-
isms, the practitioner must take care to ensure
that correctly taken specimens are sent to the lab-
oratory. This will help speed the result and thus
allow appropriate, efficient and, more impor-
tantly, effective treatment to be delivered to the
patient.
URINALYSIS
The kidneys play an important role in the main-
tenance of homeostasis, one of their functions
being the excretion of waste and foreign sub-
stances through the formation of urine. Water
accounts for 95% of the total volume of urine; the
remaining 5% consists of electrolytes, cellular
metabolites and exogenous substances such as
the excretion products of drugs. The amount of
fluid drunk and the amount lost through perspi-
ration, respiration and defecation modify the
amount of urine produced. The average daily
output of urine for an adult is 1200 ml.
If a disease alters the body's metabolism or
kidney function, traces of substances not nor-
mally present (or normal constituents in abnor-
mal amounts) may appear in the urine. Many
early disease states can be detected by urinalysis
before they become clinically obvious and it
therefore plays a useful role in the assessment of
patients. Assessment of a patient's urine can be
made both in the clinic and in the laboratory.
Testing is non-invasive and cost-effective, and
urine specimens are easily obtained. Clinical
assessment is commonly performed, allowing
the practitioner to obtain information about the
health status of their patient rapidly.
Indications for urinalysis
Urinalysis may be used as an aid in the diagnosis
of renal disease, hepatic disease and diabetes
mellitus, all of which have relevance to the podi-
atrist. Diabetes mellitus can have widespread
consequences for the lower limb. Renal and
hepatic diseases may have serious systemic
repercussions, which complicate diagnosis and
affect the treatment of lower limb problems.
Urinalysis is particularly useful in the preopera-
tive assessment of patients to screen for illnesses
which may complicate or contraindicate elective
procedures. Screening for a urinary tract infec-
tion (UTI) or the presence of bacteria in urine can
also identify those patients at increased risk of
developing postoperative wound infections.
Collection of the urine specimen
Urine specimens can be classified as a first-
voided morning, random or timed sample. The
first-voided morning specimen is the most con-
centrated of the day, and is the most specific for
nitrates and proteins. The random specimen is
the most convenient for patients to collect and is
the most commonly used specimen. Timed spec-
imens are combinations of urine voided over a
specific length of time and are more applicable to
the hospital environment.
Proper collection and prompt examination of
urine is important for accurate analysis. The use
of clean collecting vessels will minimise bacterial
and chemical contamination. The patient is
usually asked to provide a midstream specimen
of urine (MSU), which should be less than 4
hours old at the time of testing. To collect the
specimen, the patient should be instructed to first
gently cleanse the opening to their urethra with
water and begin to urinate into the toilet, subse-
quently inserting a clean container into the
urinary stream to collect the sample. The con-
tainer is removed from the urine stream and the
act of voiding completed.
Clinical assessment
Physical examination of urine
Colour. Urine should be examined under good
lighting against a white background. Normally,
the colour of urine is yellow owing to a pigment
called urochrome. The colour becomes deeper
with increasing concentration, such as in the first
 LABORATORY TESTS 329

void of the morning. Other changes in colour are Reagent testing

seen, often due to the ingestion of certain med-
A variety of dipsticks are available for testing
ications or food (Table 13.3). The patient may be
urine. Some are single-test based, such as
concerned about any change in their urine.
Clinistix'v which tests for glucose; some are
Ascertain the circumstances surrounding the
multi-test based, such as Multistix" 8SG which
patient noticing the change in colour. Did the
has eight reagent strips (Plate 28). To use a multi-
colour only appear after the urine contacted the
test reagent, a reagent strip is taken from the
container? Did the urine have to sit in the sun for
bottle and completely immersed in the urine
hours before the colour appeared?
specimen. The strip is removed and excess urine
Clarity. The common terms used to describe
wiped off on the rim of the specimen container.
urine are clear, hazy, cloudy, turbid or milky.
The strip is held horizontally (therefore not
Urine is normally clear. Suspended particles will
allowing chemicals to drip from one pad to
give it a hazy or cloudy appearance. Turbid urine
another) and the colour of the test areas com-
(Plate 27) can be caused by the presence of a UTI,
pared with the colour chart on the bottle, follow-
leucocytes, erythrocytes or parasitic disease.
ing the manufacturer's instructions as enclosed.
Prostatic fluid, blood, lipids or sperm can cause
Multi-test reagents test results:
milky urine.
Glucose. Glucose is not normally detectable in
Odour. Freshly voided urine has little smell;
the urine. The presence of glucose in the urine
stale urine may contain ammonium salts from
may be due to elevated blood glucose levels. (as
the breakdown products of urea, producing an
in diabetes mellitus) or reduced renal absorption.
offensive odour. Infected urine has a foul smell;
A negative result is therefore normal. The test
the odour worsens if the urine is left to stand.
area will detect glucose at 7 mmol/l, and thus a
Ketones in the urine, ketonuria, produce a sweet
positive result should be followed up with a
pear-drop smell and suggest a ketoacidotic state
blood glucose analysis to establish the cause of
that requires urgent medical attention.
the glycosuria. The most common cause of glyco-
suria is diabetes mellitus. However, it is also seen
with stress (as glycogen stores are mobilised
Table 13.3 Causes of colour change in urine from the liver) and secondary hyperglycaemia
Colour Cause due to Cushing's syndrome, thyrotoxicosis or
steroid use.
Red Haematuria Bilirubin. The presence of bilirubin in the urine
Haemoglobinuria
Anthrocyanin (in beetroot) is indicative of hepatic or biliary disease. A posi-
Orange-red Rifampicin
tive result should be followed up - even trace
amounts of bilirubin are sufficiently abnormal to
Orange Anthraquinones
Dehydration require further investigation.
Yellow(++) Bilirubin Ketones. Ketones (primarily acetone and aceto-
Riboflavin acetic acid) are breakdown products of fatty acid
Green Biliverdin metabolism and are abnormal urinary con-
Green-blue Amitriptyline
stituents. Their presence may be due to starvation
Resorcinol or uncontrolled diabetes mellitus. False positives
Blue Methylene blue are seen with certain medications such as met-
Brown Urobilinogen
formin and insulin. A positive result in a diabetic
Porphyria patient requires urgent medical attention.
Metronidazole Specific gravity. This parameter tests the con-
Brown-black Haemorrhage centrating and diluting power of the kidney. The
L-dopa specific gravity of urine is normally between
Senna
1.012 and 1.030 and increases with glycosuria,
 330 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
proteinuria or infection. Decreased values are
seen in diabetes insipidus, pyelonephritis and
glomerulonephritis. A fixed value may indicate
renal failure.
Blood. Haematuria is the presence of red
blood cells (RBCs) in the urine. In microscopic
haematuria, the urine appears normal to the
naked eye, but examination under a microscope
shows a high number of RBCs. Gross haematuria
can be seen with the naked eye. Most of the
causes of haematuria are not serious: e.g. exercise
may cause haematuria for 24 hours and blood is
often found in the urine of menstruating females.
However, the condition can be associated with
serious renal or urological disease and/ or UTI. A
positive result will require a medical opinion.
pH. Normal urine is slightly acidic, with a pH
of 5-6. Values are lowest after an overnight fast
and highest after meals. Strongly acid urine
may indicate starvation or uncontrolled dia-
betes mellitus. Recheck the glucose and ketone
test results if this is the case. Very high (alkaline)
values suggest infection and warrant further
investigation.
Protein. Normal urine contains small amounts
of albumin and globulin, not normally detectable
by the reagent strip. A negative result does not
therefore rule out abnormal proteinuria. A posi-
tive result indicates renal disease, UTI or hyper-
tension and requires confirmation.
Urobilinogen. Although normally present in
urine, elevated levels of urobilinogen indicate
liver abnormalities or haemolytic anaemia. A
positive result requires an urgent medical
opinion.
Nitrite. The presence of nitrites requires their
conversion from nitrates by Gram-negative bac-
teria. A negative test does not rule out infection
since Gram-positive cocci will not produce
nitrites, and note that the urine must also be
retained in the bladder for several hours to allow
the reaction to take place. A positive result
confirms a UTI and requires further analysis.
Leucocytes. The presence of leucocytes and
other components of pus in the urine, pyuria, is an
indication of bladder or renal infection. A negative
result where clinical symptoms are present would
require microscopy and culture. A positive result
confirms a UTI and also requires further analysis
to identify the infecting organism.
Laboratory assessment
Microscopy
A small amount of the collected specimen is cen-
trifuged at 5000 rpm for 5 minutes and the sedi-
ment resuspended in a few drops of urine and
mounted on a glass slide:
• Erythrocytes: more than 5 erythrocytes per
high power field is abnormal.
• Leucocytes: more than 5 leucocytes per high
power field may indicate bacterial infection
or renal disease.
• Epithelial cells: derived from the cellular lining
of the genitourinary (GU) tract, small
numbers of epithelial cells may be found in
urine. A large number is an abnormal finding.
• Casts: casts result from the precipitation of
protein, cells and debris inside the renal
tubules. They are so named because their
shape represents a 'cast' of the lumen of a
tubule. Hyaline casts are formed from
Tamm-Horsfal protein and may be found in
normal patients but are more frequently seen
in sufferers of hypertension, congestive heart
failure or renal disease. Granular casts are
composed of protein and tubular cells and
indicate renal tubular disease. Red cell casts
suggest disease associated with bleeding and
white cell casts are an indicator of acute
pyelonephritis.
• Crystals: crystals may be found in patients
with urinary stones but are found in the
urine of normal patients as well. Formation
of crystals varies with the pH; urate crystals
can be found in acid urine and phosphate
crystals can be found in alkaline urine.
Cystine crystals are found in patients with
cystinuria and oxalate crystals may be
present in patients with oxalate stones.
Culture
A urine culture is used to estimate the number
of bacteria present in urine and to identify the
 LABORATORY TESTS 331

exact organism present. Urine is an excellent Indications for blood analysis

culture medium and is easily contaminated
from the GU tract. At room temperature, conta- Blood tests can aid in the diagnosis of the follow-
minants will grow rapidly unless the urine is ing, all of which are relevant to the practitioner
plated or refrigerated promptly. Urine cultures dealing with the lower limb:
are obtained from patients suspected of having • anaemias, e.g. from an altered erythrocyte
a UTI, and should be collected taking extra count
care to follow the MSU method as described • infections, e.g. from a raised leucocyte
above. Cultures that demonstrate multiple count
organisms have usually been contaminated • systemic inflammation, e.g. from a raised
during collection. erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR)
• metabolic disorders, e.g. raised serum
glucose and ketone levels
BLOOD ANALYSIS • clotting disorders, e.g. from an abnormal
platelet count
Blood is the fluid component of the vascular • hormonal disorders, e.g. from a high level of
system and constitutes about 8% of the total serum thyroxine
body weight - approximately 5-6 litres in an • immunology-related disorders, e.g. in
adult male and 4-5 litres in an adult female. It seropositive arthritides.
comprises plasma (55%), a watery liquid that
contains dissolved substances, and formed ele- The use of routine blood sampling in asympto-
ments (45%), which are cells and fragments matic patients is questionable. Many studies of
(Table 13.4). The principal functions of blood routine biochemical screening prior to surgery
are: have revealed less than 1 % of abnormality in
unsuspected cases. In cases where abnormality
• the transportation of heat, hormones and
was detected, the results of the tests made no dif-
metabolites (such as oxygen) around the
ference to the anaesthetic or surgical manage-
body
ment of the patient.
• to help in the regulation of pH and
Blood screening can be useful in detecting
temperature
certain haematological diseases such as sickle-
• to protect the body through clotting
cell anaemia and thalassaemia. Both conditions
mechanisms, the action of white blood cells
can have implications for the management of
and antibodies.
lower limb problems, especially surgical man-
agement. When surgical intervention is planned
Table 13.4 Components of blood it may be worthwhile to undertake a screening
for these conditions in those at particular risk.
Plasma (55% of blood) Formed elements (45% of Blood tests are also indicated for surgical
blood)
patients with a history of thrombosis or clotting
Water (91.5% of plasma) Red blood cells (RBCs) disorders. However, in general, patients
Solutes (8.5% of plasma) White blood cells (WBCs) without clinical signs of systemic disease are
protein neutrophils (40-75%)
albumin lymphocytes (20-45%) unlikely to produce grossly abnormal results.
globulin monocytes (2-10%) Significant liver disease, for example, is almost
fibrinogen eosinophils (1-6%) certain to produce jaundice. The appearance of
electrolytes Platelets
respiratory gases bilirubin in the urine offers a cheap alternative
enzymes screening test. Initial detection of diabetes can
hormones be reliably performed on a urine sample, which
digestion products
waste also has the benefit of revealing proteinuria and
unrecognised renal impairment.
 332 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS

Collection of the blood sample Haematology

There are several ways in which blood samples Haematological investigation generally follows a
may be obtained. An autolet with a disposable sequence of diagnostic steps:
needle can be used to produce a small drop of
• the full blood count
blood from a pinprick. It is usual to prick the
• the blood film
distal pulp of the thumb, and is the method by
• inflammatory tests
which diabetic patients perform daily monitor-
erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR)
ing of their blood sugar levels.
plasma viscosity
For laboratory-based tests, a greater quantity
C-reactive protein
of blood than that obtained from a pinprick is
• clotting studies.
required. It is important that the person taking
the sample has appropriate and current The full blood count. A full blood count (Table
qualifications - a phlebotomist is a technician 13.5) includes basic data on RBCs, white blood
who has been trained to take samples of blood. cells (WBCs), haemoglobin concentration and
Blood samples are taken from a vein, usually in mean cell volume (MCV). In the laboratory, auto-
the forearm, using a tourniquet above the elbow mated blood count machines perform the analysis.
to force blood to accumulate in the vein. A
Table 13.5 Normal haematological values
needle is inserted into the vein and this needle
fitted to a syringe or a vacutainer (an evacuated Factor Value
tube).
Haemoglobin
To ensure appropriate stability of the sample, Men 13.8 g/dl
containers that contain an appropriate additive Women 11.5-16.5 g/dl
are used. Many samples must be prevented from Erythrocytes: red cell count (RCC)
clotting and therefore an anticoagulant is added. Men 4.5-6.5 x 10 12/1
The anticoagulant of choice is the dipotassium Women 3.8-5.8 x 10 12/1
salt of ethylenediamine tetra-acetic acid (EOTA). Leucocytes: white cell count (WCC) 4.0-11.0 x 10 9/1
Where an infection is suspected, two or more Mean cell volume (MCV) 78-98 II
samples may be taken. One type of container Packed cell volume (PCV)/haematocrit
used to transport the blood sample facilitates Men 0.40-0.54%
testing for the presence of aerobic organisms; Women 0.35-0.47%
another type facilitates testing for the presence of Mean cell haemoglobin (MCH) 27-32 pg
anaerobic organisms. Mean cell haemoglobin concentration 30-35 g/dl
(MCHC)
Whether you take the sample yourself or refer
Thrombocytes 150-400 x 10 9/1
to a hospital it is essential you provide the labo-
Reticulocytes (adults) 10-100 x 10 9/1
ratory undertaking the tests with relevant infor-
Differential WCC:
mation. The patient's hospital number or
neutrophil granulocytes 2.5-7.5 x 109/1
laboratory number, if there have been previous lymphocytes 1.0-3.5 x 10 9/1
tests, will enable current results to be compared monocytes 0.2-0.8 x 10 9/1
with previous test results. Many laboratories eosinophil granulocytes 0.04-0.4 x 109/1
basophil granulocytes 0.01-0.1 x 109/1
produce cumulative results which give an indi-
Erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR) <20 mrn/hour
cation of patient progress. Normal ranges vary in «60 years 01 age)
pregnancy; for this reason it is vital to provide C-reactive protein (CRP) 811g/ml
this information on the request form. Prothrombin time (PT) 11-13 seconds
Blood can be analysed in a variety of ways.
Activated partial thromboplastin time 27-36 seconds
Analysis may focus on the cellular content (APTT)
(haematology), chemistry (biochemistry) or Bleeding time 1-4 minutes
immunological aspects (serology) of blood.

• Normally, more than 99% of the formed
elements are RBCs. The percentage of total
blood volume occupied by the RBCs is called
the packed cell volume (PCV) or haematocrit,
expressed as the percentage of total blood
volume packed by centrifuge in a given
volume. The PCV is reduced in all types of
anaemia; a haematocrit measurement of less
than 30% is probably detrimental to surgical
intervention.
• The haemoglobin concentration reflects the
oxygen-carrying capacity of the blood. It is
reduced in all forms of anaemia and is
increased in polycythaemia.
• RBC indices are arithmetic ratios derived
from the RBC count, PCV and haemoglobin
concentration. The most useful of these ratios
is the MCV, which is a measurement of the
haematocrit divided by the RBC count. It is
low, less than 82 fl, with microcytic anaemia
and greater than 100 fl with megaloblastic
anaemia. The mean cell haemoglobin (MCH)
is the haemoglobin concentration divided by
the RBC count; the mean cell haemoglobin
concentration (MCHC) is the haemoglobin
concentration divided by the PCv.
• The WBC count can be decreased
(leucopenia) or increased (leucocytosis).
Leucopenia can result from a viral infection,
ingestion of certain drugs (especially
antineoplastics) and radiation. Leucocytosis
can result from acute bacterial infection,
leukaemia, acute haemorrhage and tissue
necrosis.
• The platelet count provides quantification of
thrombocytopenia but gives no indication of
platelet function.
• The reticulocyte count measures those early
forms of RBC with inclusion fragments of the
endoplasmic reticulum. The count quantifies
the rate of erythropoiesis: increased numbers
of reticulocytes reflect increased formations
of RBCs, as seen in haemorrhage or
haemolysis; a low number suggests
nutritional deficiency or leukaemia.
The blood film. Details of individual blood cell
types are obtained from microscopic examination
LABORATORY TESTS 333
of a stained blood film. Many abnormalities in
RBC morphology can be seen. Anisocytosis is
excessive variation in the size of RBCs, poikilocy-
tosis is excessive variation in their shape, sphero-
cytosis demonstrates round RBCs, and the RBCs
of sickle-cell disease are long and bent.
The differential WBC count is a reflection of
100 WBCs that are morphologically examined in
a peripheral smear. The numbers of different
types of WBCs are expressed as a percentage of
the whole (see Table 13.4). A left shift denotes a
decrease in neutrophil segmentation, which is a
sign of increased turnover and demand for
WBCs most commonly seen in acute bacterial
infections.
Inflammatory tests
• ESR: the ESR is the rate of fall of RBCs in a
column of blood. The ESR increases with age
and is higher in females than in males. A
raised ESR reflects an increase in the plasma
concentration of proteins and is indicative of
diseases associated with malignancy,
infections and inflammations.
• Plasma viscosity is used by some laboratories
instead of an ESR. As with the ESR, the level
of viscosity is dependent on the concentration
of proteins, but is the same in males and
females, and increases only slightly with age.
• C-reactive protein (CRP) is synthesised in the
liver and can be detected in the blood within
6 hours of an inflammatory response. This
test is also replacing the ESR.
Clotting studies
• The prothrombin time (PT) determines the
amount of prothrombin in the blood. Test
reagents are added to a sample and the time
taken for the blood to clot noted. It provides
a laboratory measurement of the extrinsic
blood coagulation pathway. The PT is
prolonged by deficiencies in fibrinogen,
prothrombin and factors V, VII and X but
remains normal in patients with haemophilia
A and B, or platelet deficiencies. It is
commonly used to monitor patients taking
warfarin.
 334 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
• The activated partial thromboplastin time
(APTT) provides a laboratory measurement
of the intrinsic blood coagulation pathway
and is the best single screen for disorders of
coagulation. The APTT is prolonged by
deficiencies in fibrinogen, prothrombin and
factors V, VIII, IX, X and XII, and in patients
with haemophilia A and B, or platelet
deficiencies.
• The thrombin time (TT) measures the
clotting (fibrin formation) time of a sample
of blood following the addition of a small
amount of thrombin. The most common
cause of a prolonged TT is the presence of
heparin.
• The bleeding time is the time required for
cessation of bleeding from a small skin
puncture, usually of the ear lobe. As the
droplets of blood escape, touching the wound
with filter paper blots them. When paper no
longer stains, the bleeding has stopped. It is a
standard assay that measures the
effectiveness of platelet plug formation. The
bleeding time is increased if platelet function
is abnormal, e.g. patients who are suspected
of having a qualitative platelet disorder such
as von Willebrand's disease or patients on
aspirin therapy.
Biochemistry
Arterial blood gas studies are the best single deter-
mination of lung function, referring to the deter-
mination of arterial oxygen and carbon dioxide
tensions and the pH. Indications for blood gas
studies include the assessment of preoperative
lung function, documentation of pulmonary
disease and continuing assessments of cardiopul-
monary diseases. Serum chemistry assays useful in
the diagnosis or monitoring of many metabolic,
renal and fluid/ electrolyte abnormalities are given
in the following paragraphs.
Urea and creatinine are dependent on the
kidney for excretion: therefore, their measure-
ment is an index of renal function. Urea, an
end product of protein metabolism, is synthe-
sised in the liver, and is the principal nitroge-
nous constituent of urine. In pathologies that
affect renal function, its serum concentration
rises. Azotaemia is defined as increased nitroge-
nous substances in the blood and is charac-
terised by a blood urea nitrogen (BUN) level
greater than 20 mg/100 ml. The BUN: creatinine
ratio is 10: 1 in normal individuals; in patients
with acute renal failure both BUN and creati-
nine levels rise and the ratio may be unchanged.
The BUN level alone is increased in patients
with renal disease, gastrointestinal haemor-
rhage or increased protein metabolism.
The BUN level is decreased in patients with
severe cirrhosis, inadequate protein intake or in
pregnancy.
The concentration of creatinine in the serum has
a linear relationship to glomerular filtration,
making it a more sensitive indicator of renal
disease than BUN. Creatinine levels rise in
patients with renal disease, gigantism, acromegaly
and increased dietary intake from roasted meats.
The normal range for uric acid is 3.5-7.2 mg/ dl
for males and 2.6-6.0 mg/ dl for females.
Elevated serum uric acid is not a reliable diag-
nostic test for gout. However, acute gout never
occurs in patients who have a serum uric acid
level in the lower half of the normal range. The
test can give rise to false negatives and positives.
In the first few attacks, when it is often difficult to
diagnose, the serum acid level is often below the
higher level. Serum uric acid levels can be
helpful in monitoring treatment.
Sodium levels are increased in patients with
dehydration, primary aldosteronism, Cushing's
syndrome and with some diuretic drugs. Sodium
levels are decreased in fluid retention (seen in
congestive heart failure), with unreplaced body
fluid loss (vomiting, diarrhoea) and in Addison's
disease. Sodium is the principal cation of extra-
cellular fluid.
Potassium levels may be increased (>5.5 mmol/I)
in patients with renal failure, mineralocorticoid
deficiency, acidosis, massive tissue necrosis
and with high-dose penicillin (hyperkalaemia).
Hypokalaemia may occur in patients with chronic
diarrhoea, primary/secondary aldosteronism,
Cushing's syndrome or with diuretic drugs.

-"--------"----------------
The concentration of chloride tends to decrease
along with sodium to maintain electrical charge
equilibrium. Levels increase and decrease, as per
sodium.
The measurement of carbon dioxide provides a
differential diagnosis in the change of blood pH,
acidosis or alkalosis. The carbon dioxide level is
higher in respiratory alkalosis (pulmonary
emboli, asthma or liver disease), with metabolic
acidosis (diabetic ketoacidosis), with decreased
excretion of hydrogen ions (renal failure) and
with increased loss of alkaline fluids (chronic
diarrhoea).
Blood glucose. Blood sugars bind non-enzy-
matically to proteins forming stable covalent
linkages. The measurement of glycated deriva-
tives of haemoglobin and plasma proteins has
provided a reliable index of long-term blood
glucose control in diabetics. In normal individu-
als a small percentage of the haemoglobin mol-
ecules in RBCs become glycosylated, i.e.
chemically linked to glucose. Glycosylated
haemoglobin (GHb) can be separated from
normal HbA by electrophoresis into three frac-
tions: HbA}A, HbA}B and HbA}C. Normally
only HbA}C is quantitated, and gives a measure
of mean blood sugar over the preceding
2 months. The percentage of glycosylation is
proportional to time and to the concentration of
blood glucose. Therefore, poorly controlled dia-
betics will have a greater percent of GHb.
The glucometer uses a small sample of blood
to test blood glucose levels. Glucometers vary
slightly in design; all come with instructions for
use. It is essential that the practitioner follows
the manufacturers' guidelines, regularly cleans
the equipment and takes care to calibrate the
equipment prior to use. The glucometer gives
the amount of glucose in the blood, in milli-
moles per litre, as a digital read-out. A normal
reading is within the range of 4-8 mmol/l (non-
fasting) and 3-5 mmol/l (fasting). Glucometers
have been known to give false positive and neg-
ative readings. This is usually due to inadequate
cleaning, poor calibration or not following the
manufacturers' guidelines when carrying out
the test.
LABORATORY TESTS 335
Serology
Conditions associated with unclear causes of
joint pain in the foot and lower limb pose a
concern for the practitioner, especially where the
ankle, subtalar or metatarsophalangeal joints are
involved. Seropositive arthritides can be a cause
of this type of joint pain. Analysing serum for the
presence of rheumatoid factor can be helpful in
these instances. Rheumatoid factors are autoanti-
bodies found in the serum, usually of the
immunoglobulin M (IgM) class, which are
directed against human IgG. Either the latex or
Rose-Waaler tests can detect their presence.
Their presence may indicate rheumatoid arthritis
(in 80% of cases), systemic lupus erythematosus
(in 50% of cases), systemic sclerosis (in 30% of
cases), Sjogren's syndrome (in 90% of cases),
polymyositis (in 50% of cases) or dermatomyosi-
tis (in 50% of cases).
HISTOLOGY
Histopathology is the examination of tissues or
cells for the presence or absence of changes in
t~eir structure due to abnormal condition. It pro-
vides a useful method for clarifying or
confirming a diagnosis and gives an insight into
how a disease originates, progresses and is
influenced by therapy. The preparation of thin
slices or sections of the tissues, which are
coloured differentially by the use of various
stains, makes this study possible. Tissue and
body fluids (other than blood and urine) can be
removed from the lower limb for histological
examination.
Indications for histology
The indications for histological analysis are:
• when a lesion does not have a clear clinical
diagnosis and resists treatment, e.g. neuroma
• when there is no exudate which can be
cultured for the presence of pathogens; in this
case, a sample of tissue is needed for
microbiological purposes and for
identification of cellular changes
 336 LABORATORY AND HOSPITAL INVESTIGATIONS
• where tissue has an abnormal appearance
and malignancy is suspected
• where the lesion fails to heal, e.g. inclusion
cyst, pyogenic granuloma (Plate 29).
Sampling techniques
The range of tissues from the lower limb that can
be removed for histological analysis can be found
in Table 13.6. Various methods can be used to
remove tissue or fluid for investigation. The tech-
nique used will depend upon the site and the
amount that needs to be removed. A wide range
of investigations can be performed on tissues
taken from the body. Samples should be collected
in such a way as to pre-empt the method to be
used. The practitioner should therefore decide at
the outset what investigations are required.
Appropriate collection and storage techniques
are vital to preserve the sample.
Most techniques require local analgesia. In the
case of tissue it is generally advisable to remove
a section of surrounding healthy tissue as well as
the abnormal tissue; this allows the pathologist
to make comparisons between normal and
abnormal tissue.
Sources for histological diagnoses can be
either tissue or cell preparations. Tissues can be
obtained by biopsy (shave, punch, needle or
excision), from resected organs (partial or com-
plete) or via autopsy. Cell preparations include
fluid aspirates, smears, brushings and fine
needle aspirates. In podiatric practice it is pri-
marily tissues that are sampled and sent to
histopathology. Some examples of biopsy are
given below.
Biopsy
Shave. A shave biopsy can be achieved by
introducing an endoscope into the body. This
procedure is used when it is necessary to remove
a piece of tissue from a deep structure, e.g. syn-
ovial membrane from a joint.
Punch. A punch biopsy (incisional biopsy)
involves the removal of a small section of abnor-
mal tissue. The procedure is not as extensive as
excisional biopsy but is still open to complica-
Table 13.6 Tissues which can be removed from the foot
for histological analysis
Epithelial Keratinised stratified epithelial
tissue (skin)
Stratified cuboidal epithelium
(sweat glands/secretory function)
Multicellular exocrine glands:
- coiled tubular eccrine and
apocrine (sweat)
- branched acinar holocrine
(sebaceous)
Connective Mesenchymal found in adult tissue
below skin and blood vessels
Loose areolar: subcutaneous layer
of skin and blood vessels, nerves
associated with fibroblasts,
macrophages, mast cells and
various fibres
Adipose: under weightbearing
surfaces, joints and bone marrow
Dense collagenous: common to
fascia, aponeuroses, tendons,
ligaments
Elastic and reticular: less abundant
in feet
Hyaline and fibrocartilage:
chondrocytic cells associated with
joints, especially distal metatarsal
ends, fibrocartilage
submetatarsals, between bones
and tendons
Osseous (bone): made of compact
(outer), cancellous (inner) and
cellular components associated
with regeneration
Muscle Skeletal: striated, contractile form
attached between bones; mainly
intrinsic form in feet in four layers
Nerve Cell body and axons
Neuroglia: found at sites of tumours
Synovial membranes Loose connective tissue: line
structures and secrete synovial
fluid, tendon lining, bursae, do not
contain epithelial cells
Tissue repair Stroma: supporting connective
tissue restoration; active repair or
scar tissue due to fibroblasts or
keloid (overactivity)
Scab/fibrin plug: sealing wound
Granuloma: active repair tissue
tions such as deep infection. A punch, which con-
sists of a cylinder with a sharp, fine cutting edge,

is used. The punch is pushed through epithelial
tissue and a small section of epithelial and/or
connective tissue is removed. A trephine is a
similar instrument to a punch, but much more
sturdy. It is used for punching holes in bone. In
these cases a larger access hole is necessary. Bone
samples should, wherever possible, have clear
radiographs attached to assist the determination
of the general appearance of the lesion. The
advantage of punch biopsy lies in the small area
of tissue removed. Normal tissue is not usually
included. The depth of tissue sampling will
depend upon the pressure applied. Punch biopsy
is likely to be used where large areas have been
affected and treatment cannot be undertaken at
the same time. Unlike excisional biopsy it is
purely a diagnostic procedure. When skin biopsy
is performed it is essential to create an unobtru-
sive scar. In the foot, tissue around digits may
require a section of bone to be removed in order
to achieve closure. A surgeon specialising in feet
should be consulted to reduce the risk of
ischaemia.
Needle. Aspiration is the technique used to
withdraw fluids from the body, e.g. synovial
fluid. Examination of synovial fluid can be very
useful when examining for the presence of uric
acid crystals (gout), infection or bleeding into a
joint space. Where uric acid crystals are sus-
pected the sample of synovial fluid should be
placed in absolute alcohol or placed directly on
to a slide. Bursae can be aspirated. This usually
leads to a temporary relief of symptoms.
Resected organs
Partial. Partial resection or excisional biopsy
involves the removal of all the abnormal tissue
plus a section of the surrounding normal tissue.
This procedure permits examination of the
abnormal tissue as well as, hopefully, providing
treatment at the same time. It is a surgical
technique which requires high standards of
asepsis. A scalpel is used to incise and then
dissect the abnormal tissue and some surround-
ing normal tissue from the site. Haemostasis
should be carefully performed to prevent
unnecessary complications. Tissue from skin
LABORATORY TESTS 337
down to muscle, ligaments and tendon will
require careful repair. Ganglion formation must
be removed in total as it has a high recurrence
rate. The gelatinous mass is difficult to retrieve.
The thin translucent membrane should be
included wherever possible. Thicker mem-
branes suggest that they have undergone longer
periods of deep trauma.
Complete. Whole parts, such as amputated
feet, toes and excised rays, can be sent to the
pathology department. Analysis of whole
anatomy takes a good deal longer due to the time
required to separate and fixate tissues. Bone
needs to undergo a decalcification process.
Transportation and storage
Laboratory personnel will discuss the best mode
of collection to ensure that an appropriate sample
for testing is achieved. Specimens labelled urgent
are unwelcome unless requested during surgery
where a quick result is necessary, e.g. in the case
of a suspected malignancy, so that appropriate
treatment can be performed concomitantly. Even
small samples will take 24 hours to fix before the
tissue can be usefully analysed.
All specimens should be clearly marked with
the patient's name, hospital number, site and the
date/time that the sample was taken. A full
history of the patient is essential. High-risk cases
should be identified with a separate 'high risk'
label. The specimen should be sealed in a plastic
bag, the request form remaining outside.
As with microbiological samples, damage can
be sustained by using an incorrect method of
transportation. Most tissue samples are placed
in a screw-cap container containing normal
buffered formalin (NBF) solution. Formalin
itself constitutes a hazard, especially if spilt on
living tissue. Samples for frozen section should
be transported dry. They will be damaged if
they come into contact with formalin. Frozen
sectioning provides rapid results, usually
within 5-10 minutes, and is used where results
are urgently required: often when the patient is
still on the operating table, when the result of
the test will decide the course of action to be
taken.
 338 LABORATORY AND HOSPITALINVESTIGATIONS
Tests and interpretation of results
These fall into several categories depending
upon the nature of the lesion and/or suspected
pathology. Slides of tissue are produced for
microscopy. Often, staining techniques are used
in order to show up changes more distinctively.
The main purpose of histological examination
is to assess whether the tissue or fluid sample
differs from what is normal. Abnormal cellular
findings, e.g. changes to the nucleus, may indi-
cate malignant changes. Chronic inflammation
may be evident because of the presence of lym-
phocytes, plasma cells and macrophages.
Abnormal findings may relate to the presence of
giant cells, a characteristic feature produced by
foreign bodies. This is a common feature in the
foot.
Scarring and inflammatory changes may tether
down tissue, which can account for some pain
syndromes in both fore and hind parts of the foot.
These syndromes are difficult to diagnose accu-
rately other than by exploratory procedures.
FURTHER READING
Axford J 1996 Medicine. Blackwell Science, Oxford
Bayer Diagnostics Urinalysis - the inside information
Blandy J 1998 Lecture notes on urology, 5th edn. Blackwell
Science, Oxford
Hanno P M, Wein A J 1994 Clinical manual of urology.
McGraw-Hill, New York
Hoffbrand A V, Pettit J E 1993 Essential haematology.
Blackwell Scientific, Oxford
Karlowicz K A 1995 Urological nursing - principles and
practice. W B Saunders, Philadelphia
Kumar P, Clark M 1998 Clinical medicine, 4th edn.
W B Saunders, Philadelphia
Nerves fall under this category. They can show
marked changes, involving abnormal blood
vessels, as in the case of neuromata. Nerve con-
duction tests may provide evidence of damage
prior to surgical investigation in the foot.
SUMMARY
This chapter has covered the indications for the
use of a range of near-patient and laboratory-
based tests, appropriate sampling techniques, the
principles of testing and interpretation of results.
Emphasis has been placed on starting with the
simplest tests prior to using more specific and
sophisticated tests.
The use of laboratory tests can never replace
good interview and assessment techniques. Tests
should be used economically and wisely, should
cause no harm to the patient and above all
should be used to support treatment, confirm
diagnosis or rule out a suspected malignancy.
Results should be acted upon in order to ensure
that effective treatment is provided.
Philpott-Howard J 1996 Microbiology. In: Hooper J,
McCreanor G, Marshall W, Myers P (eds) Primary care
and laboratory medicine. ACB Venture Publications,
London
Quinn G 1995 Laboratory blood tests in podiatry. British
Journal of Podiatric Medicine and Surgery 7(2): 24-27
Robinson S H, Reich P R 1993 Haematology, 3rd edn. Little,
Brown and Company, Boston
Stokes E J, Ridgeway G L, Wren M W D 1993 Clinical
microbiology, 7th edn. Edward Arnold, UK
Tortora G J, Grabowski S R 2000 Principles of anatomy and
physiology, 9th edn. John Wiley and Sons, New York
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 341

Normal development 342

Early posture 342
The paediatric patient
Determinants of gait 342
Growth and development 343 p. Beeson
The assessment process 343 P. Nesbitt
Initiatingthe process 343
General considerations 343
Interviewing 344
History taking 344
Examination 346
Footwear 352

Conditions affecting the lower limb of

children 353
Developmental dislocation of the hip (DOH) 353
Knee pain in the child 354
Abnormal frontal plane configuration of the
knee 354 INTRODUCTION
In-toeing problems 356
Congenital talipes equinovarus (clubfoot) 359 When assessing the paediatric patient it is impor-
Flat feet 360 tant to appreciate that during the early years of
Toe deformities 363 life the lower limbs undergo many physiological
Causes of limping in children 365
Infections 368 changes and the child passes through numerous
Juvenile plantar dermatitis 368 developmental milestones. The practitioner
Psoriasis 368 needs to be familiar with these normal changes as
Vasospastic disorders 368
Juvenile idiopathic arthritis 368 they will influence management. These variations
in lower limb position and function can often
Summary 369 concern the parent and confuse the inexperienced
practitioner.
Areas of concern can often be recognised by
seeing the child walk. Observation of the child's
style of gait will provide vital clues to potential
underlying pathology. Furthermore, in evalua-
tion of the restless child, scrutinising stance and
gait is valuable as hands-on examination time is
often reduced.
Whereas a well-structured, systematic and
holistic approach to assessment is encouraged, to
ensure vital information is not omitted, an
opportunistic approach may be desirable in cases
of non-compliance. It is essential to identify, as
early as possible, any problems that might need
specialist treatment in order to prevent pathol-
ogy in later life.
This chapter considers the normal develop-
ment process, presents an overview of factors
which should be taken into consideration when
assessing the child and reviews the assessment
findings of specific conditions that arise in the
lower limb of children.

341
 342 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
NORMAL DEVELOPMENT
Prior to assessing a child it is important that the
practitioner has a good understanding of
normal development and the approximate age
by which certain milestones should be met.
However, it should be remembered that varia-
tions occur even in normal healthy children. A
delay in certain milestones can occur in prema-
ture babies. Table 14.1 summarises the main
development stages of childhood. The develop-
mental changes seen in children will influence
both their posture and gait.
Early posture
At 6-7 months most babies will sit unassisted
(sit alone 9-12 months) and attempt to crawl.
They will start to pull themselves up into a
standing position and stand holding on to fur-
niture (cruising) at 9-12 months, but they fre-
quently fall backwards into a sitting position.
By 12 months the child should be able to stand
alone briefly and may possibly walk alone:
97% of children walk between 9 and 18 months;
of the remainder only 6% are neurologically
compromised (Luder 1988). The early walker
has an immature spinal curvature which is 'C'
shaped (sagittal plane), as opposed to'S' shaped
in the adult. The child will have a wide base of
gait for stability, with the arms flexed and held
high for balance and no arm swing. The base of
gait will become narrower as the child gains
confidence, developing a heel-to-toe gait from
3 years of age.
Table 14.1 Main development stages of childhood
Term of reference Age range
Neonatal 1---4 weeks
Infant 4 weeks to 1 year
Early childhood 1-6 years
Late childhood 6-10 years
Prepubertal 10-12 years
Puberty 12-14 years
Adolescence 14-17 years
Adulthood 18 years +
Determinants of gait
This phrase encompasses the essential develop-
mental milestones, based on six components
affecting walking. The various components
(Ch. 8) commence at the time the child first starts
to walk and continue to the age of 5-6. Learning
skills, balance and physiological changes all con-
tribute to the process of maturity, assisting the
young child to walk as an adult walks. By the
sixth year there is little to differentiate the child's
gait from that of the adult. The initial stages of
walking involve a 'stomping' gait with the entire
limb being lifted, circumducted over the ground
and then plunged down again. There is little
frontal or sagittal plane movement at the pelvis.
The leg is usually maintained in an externally
rotated position with little transverse plane
motion and the knees are in a varus position. The
foot neither supinates nor pronates and there is
little demand on the ankle to either dorsiflex or
plantarflex.
Gait is apropulsive, shock absorption minimal
and velocity control poor. The child thrusts its
head, the heaviest single component of the body,
downwards to increase speed and up and back-
wards to reduce velocity.
Two years of age. The child's gait will have
refined considerably. The foot is still not capable
of supinating at toe off; however, the pelvis is
beginning to rotate in all three body planes and
the leg demonstrates signs of internal rotation at
heel contact. The frontal plane position of the
knees is valgus. The net result is a much
smoother gait. Although velocity control is
improved, the arms still do not swing in coordi-
nation with the legs.
Four years of age. Gait is no longer apropul-
sive; heel lift and the associated subtalar joint
supination are apparent for the first time. Leg
and pelvic rotations are now completely devel-
oped, although arm swing is still not coordinated
with leg movement.
Five to six years of age. Pronation-supination
at the contact and propulsive phases of gait is
fully developed. Stride length is increased and
foot-to-ground contact time is greatly reduced
compared with 12 months previously.

Growth and development
The child's foot growth is synchronised with the
body and not the limb. The foot normally
doubles in length at the first and fifth month in
utero. From birth to 4 years of age it doubles in
size again, but after 4 years the growth rate
decreases markedly.
At birth many of the bones of the foot are still
cartilaginous and therefore not visible on X-ray.
Only bone cells with a calcium and phosphate
mineral source are readily identified on X-ray
film. As the diaphyses are apparent before birth,
metatarsals and phalanges can be seen on plain
X-ray, albeit as rather poorly defined areas. The
calcaneus and talus are clearly visible on X-ray.
The short bones of the midtarsus are also already
formed at birth, although the navicular and
cuneiforms are rather imprecise (lateral appears
first at 3-6 months) and can take another 2-3
years to have a functional calcific appearance.
The sesamoids of the first metatarsal appear
around 8-10 years of age eCho 11).
Most anatomical books will provide a useful
table of ossification events and these will there-
fore not be considered here. When reading
X-rays, knowledge of the position of the epiphy-
ses is desirable to avoid misinterpretation: for
example, the first metatarsal base is the site of the
epiphysis, whereas the epiphysis of the other
metatarsals is located at the metatarsal head. A
knowledge of ossification is also important as far
as applying effective treatment at the most
appropriate time (i.e, metatarsals ossify around
14-16 years for females and 16-18 years for
males). It is also useful to remember that in chil-
dren some bones may appear differently orien-
tated to those of the adult foot. The lower limb
continues to grow in length and girth until the
age of 19-20 years in males. Females tend to
mature earlier and therefore growth usually
ceases around 15-17 years.
THE ASSESSMENT PROCESS
Assessment can be divided into two areas:
history taking and examination.
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 343
Initiating the process
It is usually the parent who draws attention to a
foot problem in the child. Parents are often con-
cerned about the manner in which their child is
walking or are unhappy about the shape, position
or size of the lower limb or foot. The parents'
observations or opinions will often be based upon
what they, or another family member, consider to
be normal. It is the role of the practitioner to iden-
tify whether there is an abnormality or, more
commonly, to reassure the parents that what
appears to them to be abnormal is only part of the
normal developmental process. Throughout the
developing years there are recognisable features
which confirm normal trends.
An holistic approach to examination is indi-
cated rather than looking at the foot in isolation.
Treatment will only be required if an abnormality
is progressive and can be halted. If the condition
does not warrant treatment, then careful moni-
toring may be desirable to ensure the child devel-
ops normally.
General considerations
A number of factors can influence the paediatric
consultation:
• previous encounters with medical
intervention
• the referral
• the appointment
• the trip
• the waiting room
• the interminable wait
• the relatives.
It is essential that the practitioner creates a
relaxed and conducive environment for the
assessment. The child needs time to settle and
questions should always precede 'hands-on'
examination. A casual approach to the practi-
tioner's dress may be desirable. Children who
have suffered discomfort at a previous medical
consultation may associate a white coat with a
bad experience. First-name terms may be appro-
priate. If the child can relate to the practitioner,
he may be more willing to cooperate.
 344 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
To achieve optimal compliance with young
children it is sometimes necessary to use distrac-
tion tactics: use of toys, humour and constant
banter can be helpful.
Interviewing
A number of cognitive aspects about children are
worthy of consideration as they can influence the
interview process:
• limited attention span
• influenced by immediate events
• limited experience (black and white)
• egocentric
• non-conceptual.
It is important to build a rapport with both
the child and parents and not to alienate or
talk down to the child. This helps develop the
cooperation of the child to examination and
compliance of both child and parentis) to the
treatment plan. Questions should be relevant
and posed using a diplomatic approach, and
all explanations should be clear.
It may be easier to interview the parent while
the child is playing. Watching the child at play
allows evaluation of motor coordination and
posture. Toys should be available to facilitate this
informal assessment. Sometimes young children
will perceive direct questioning by a stranger as
threatening, and so playing with the child first
may put him at ease. Making the most of the
child's natural clothing vanity is another ploy the
practitioner can use to relax the child.
It is important that during any assessment the
child is chaperoned. The latter point cannot be
ignored these days, when children may misin-
terpret the nature of examination if left alone
with the practitioner. It may be useful to ask
parents to dress the child in easy-to-remove
clothing so that the process of undressing does
not add to the patient's anxiety. Another person
who is present - parent, nurse or care assistant-
can bear witness to events.
Parental dynamics can also influence the
success of the consultation. The practitioner
should be aware of:
• Do the parentis) and child converse or sit
close together?
• Do the parents assist the child in removing
clothes?
• Do the parents appear caring, neutral or
angry towards the child?
• Does the child appear confident or cling to
the parentis)?
A flexible approach to questioning may be nec-
essary in cases of difficult children. If the child is
uncooperative, do not hesitate to temporarily
abandon the examination or reschedule the
appointment for a time when the child is less
tired or irritable. Advise the parents to bring
along items such as personal toys to create a com-
petitive distraction while being examined.
Some children do not want to cooperate. In this
case use positive statements (i.e, stand up, walk
straight, stand on your toes) and be firm. Avoid
giving the child a chance to be oppositional and
don't be afraid to utilise the 'white coat' syn-
drome. Remember the practitioner's role is to
help the child, not to be liked.
One aspect of paediatric management is an
ability to handle the parents (Meadow 1992).
Always enquire specifically about the parents'
concerns. Explain about the cause and treatment
using plain language and avoid promoting
parental anxiety by mentioning all complica-
tions. Furthermore, avoid the use of terms that
might invoke unnecessary parental anxiety (e.g.
chronic, progressive, delay, tumour, spastic).
While it is wise to avoid raising expectations of
treatment one should always end the consulta-
tion on a positive note.
History taking
In order to obtain a relevant history a structured
systematic approach should be adopted. This
will reduce the possibility of omitting relevant
information. In addition to the general questions
regarding the presenting problem and medical
history (Chs 3 and 5), particular attention should
be paid to the following areas:
• perinatal history (pregnancy and delivery)
• neonatal history

----------------------------------------------
• post-neonatal history
• developmental milestones
• family history
• previous consultations.
The child's age and presenting symptoms will
influence the emphasis placed on the different
aspects of the past medical history. In patients with
congenital disorders such as talipes equinovarus,
metatarsus adductus, calcaneovalgus and tor-
sional problems, it may be useful to concentrate on
the perinatal history.
Perinatal history
Pregnancy. It is important to ascertain whether
the pregnancy was normal. Did the mother take
any medication during her pregnancy? Some
drugs, for example phenytoin used to control
epilepsy or high doses of vitamin A, are known
to be teratogenic during the first trimester of
pregnancy. Smoking by the mother has been
reported to retard growth in some cases and
excessive alcohol intake can delay intellectual
development. The practitioner must elicit infor-
mation without creating anxiety. Did the mother
sustain any maternal trauma or complications
(threatened miscarriage, antepartum haemor-
rhage or toxaemia) during the pregnancy? Did
she come into contact with any infections likely
to cause abnormality in the child (e.g. measles,
chicken pox)? Some questions may be reserved
for cases where visible signs of abnormality are
evident. It is important not to alarm the parent as
incidental findings are rarely conclusive. The
majority of babies encountered are healthy.
Delivery. The mother should be asked about the
nature and duration of labour. Was the delivery
uneventful, full term (40 weeks) or premature?
(gestational age less than 37 weeks). Muscle tone
is diminished in premature babies compared to
those who reach full term and an increased pre-
disposition to developmental dislocation of the
hip (DOH) and internal position of one leg is seen.
Incidence of hip dislocation is higher 00 times
more than occipital) when the fetus is malposi-
tioned in utero (frank breech) or when there are
twins. A Caesarean section is often indicated in
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 345
cases of frank breech, transverse lie, large size or
fetal distress. Long deliveries, especially if there
was fetal distress, could be significant if there is
evidence of poor posture, coordination or motor
function. Forceps delivery can sometimes result in
temporary facial or brachial palsy.
Neonatal history
At birth the baby undergoes several tests to
determine their APGAR score (Apgar 1953). This
routine procedure is performed at the first (index
of asphyxia) and fifth (index of neurological
residua or death) minute after birth. It is used to
evaluate the cardiovascular, respiratory and neu-
rological status of the neonate:
• A = appearance - colour
• P = pulse - indication of heart rate
• G = grimace - plantar aspect of the foot is
stimulated to provoke the child to cry
• A = activity - muscle tone
• R = respiratory effort.
The child's response to each test is rated on a
scale of 0-2: 2 is the maximum score. A score of
10 is the maximum and is rarely achieved; a low
score below 6 is indicative of problems.
Post-neonatal history
This mainly relates to feeding problems in the
early months, which can influence normal
growth and development.
Developmental milestones
A knowledge of the normal developmental mile-
stones is important for the recognition of
suspected neurodevelopmental disorders. If
neurodevelopmental delay is suspected, detailed
questions on the following are indicated:
• head control
• ability to sit alone
• ability to crawl
• ability to stand, walk, run
• ability to hop on one foot, tandem walk
• ability to walk up and down stairs
 346 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
• result of 8 month hearing test
• ability to comprehend and obey simple
commands.
Family history
Family history of problems can provide vital
information about the cause and the prognosis of
the complaint. Are there other siblings with a
similar problem? It is helpful to ascertain any
family traits. These can usefully be represented
by constructing a pedigree chart. In genetically
determined conditions, e.g. immune deficiency
states, neurodegenerative disease or muscular
dystrophy, enquiries about second- and third-
degree relatives may be indicated.
Previous consultations or advice
This should be noted as it may affect the parent's
perceptions of the outcome of the child's foot
problem. It must be stressed that the majority of
paediatric problems are usually normal develop-
mental variations, rarely requiring anything
more than explanation and reassurance.
Examination
Once a clear history has been taken, the child is
examined. The younger the child, the more expe-
dient the process needs to be. It is important to
do easy/fun tests first. Tests which may be per-
ceived by the child as threatening (e.g. hip exam-
ination) can be left until last. Sometimes it can
help to examine a sibling or parent first to put the
child at ease. The examination should consider
the following points:
• observation of gait and posture
• general walking capability
• symmetry of body
• obvious deformity
• muscle bulk and wasting
• joint motion
• vascular and skin quality
• footwear.
First impressions are useful and the practi-
tioner should start with a general observation of
the child walking, sitting, playing and how they
interact with their parents.
When assessing children, the focus is usually
on the locomotor system. In most children a brief
vascular, neurological and skin assessment will
suffice. Further detailed examination should be
performed in cases where the presenting
problem, history taking or brief assessment indi-
cates the presence of a significant problem. Tests
should only be used in order to clarify an other-
wise unclear diagnosis.
Those parts of the examination process which
are of particular relevance to the examination of
the child are noted below.
Neurological assessment
Neurological assessment implies motor and
sensory evaluation. In the UK all neonates are
examined by a paediatrician after delivery; mid-
wives and health visitors undertake follow-up
tests during the early years of development. Most
neurological abnormalities will be detected
during this stage. Reflexes are an important
method for determining normal muscle develop-
ment and innervation in the neonate. Certain
involuntary (primitive) reflexes disappear after
1 year of age. Reflexes present during the first
year of life are summarised in Table 14.2. The
formal neurological examination of an infant will
include an evaluation of the primitive reflexes,
muscle tone/power, coordination (hand/eye) and
posture in relation to development. Neurolog-
ical examination of the child should emphasise
evaluation of superficial!deep reflexes, muscle
tone/power (stand on tiptoes/heels) and coordi-
nation (heel-to-toe walking, balancing on one leg,
hopping).
All practitioners should be mindful of skeletal
and gait abnormalities which indicate a neuro-
muscular disorder, e.g. Charcot-Marie-Tooth
disease (Case history 14.1), Duchenne's muscular
dystrophy and Friedreich's ataxia. In some cases
late walking may be due to neurological dys-
function undetected at birth or developmental
hip dysplasia. Neurological tests should be
carried out if an abnormality is suspected (Ch. 7).
 THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 347

Table 14.2 Reflexes associated with development

Reflex Descriptor

Oral reflex If a finger is placed in a baby's mouth, the baby will automatically suck and swallow. Failure to suck
may indicate a cerebral problem later leading to motor dysfunction in the lower limb
Mora reflex This reflex (startle reflex) disappears by 5 months. The infant is held in a supine position with one hand
supporting the head and neck. By sudden slight dropping of examiner's hand supporting head a
response is elicited. The normal response is for the baby to spread his arms away from his chest with
hands open and fingers spread apart followed by a movement of the arms towards the centre of his
chest as if in an embrace. The legs are flexed. Failure to respond suggests weakness. Asymmetry may
indicate lower spinal lesion if one leg affected. Hyperactivity suggests CNS infection and reverse Mora.
Where the baby extends limbs with external rotation, this indicates basal ganglia disease
Grasp reflex Palmar or plantar response up to 9 months. An object is placed in the palm and the fingers
automatically flex to grip the object. The foot would be similarly stimulated in the area behind the toes.
Failure to respond suggests CNS weakness, depending upon symmetry of reflex
Plantar reflex This is achieved by firmly stroking the lateral sale of the baby's foot and extending the movement
across the ball of the foot. A normal response in a child under 1 year is extension of the hallux.
An abnormal response indicates dysfunction of the upper motor neurones
Placing and If you touch the anterior aspect of either upper or lower limb (anterior tibia) against the edge of
stepping/walking an examination couch the child will lift the limb to place the foot/hand onto the surface of the couch.
reflex Alternatively, place the dorsum of the foot beneath the table top to attain the same response. This
occurs in the newborn up to about 4 weeks of age. If the baby is gently held above a surface with the
sales lightly contacting the surface this will elicit a stepping/walking motion. This response is present
until 8 weeks of age. Absence may indicate brain damage
Tonic neck reflex When the baby is supine and not crying, the head will be turned to one side and the arm on the same
side will be extended. The other knee will often be flexed. In normal babies, passive rotation of the
head will increase upper body muscle tone on the side to which the head is turned. This reflex is
present up to 3 months
Patellar and ankle Results should be similar to normal adult
tendon reflex

ment. The examination process outlined in

Case history 14.1
A mother diagnosed with Charcot-Marie-Tooth
disease brought her son to the clinic for assessment.
She reported that he seemed to limp when tired. Gait
analysis revealed a mild high-stepping gait and
marked inverted heel strike. The child presented with
mild forefoot valgus and a tight posterior muscle
group. The foot demonstrated early signs of cavoid
syndrome. Neurological tests revealed stocking
distribution of hypoaesthesia and diminished reflexes.
Muscle tone and bulk were reduced and the lateral
compartment of the leg demonstrated early signs of
peroneal muscular atrophy.
Conclusion: The child is demonstrating early
clinical features of Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease.
Orthopaedic assessment
This can be subdivided into gait analysis,
weightbearing and non-weightbearing assess-
Chapter 8 can be used with children as well as
adults; however, the following specific points
should be noted.
Walking is perhaps the most sensitive indica-
tor of a child's neuromuscular status. It is an
ability that is refined with age and practice, yet
many parents are dissatisfied with their child's
style of gait - 'normal' should be distinguished
from 'abnormal'. The developmental milestones
such as crawling, sitting, standing and walking
may vary from infant to infant. If there is undue
delay, then pathology such as neuromuscular
disease, mental retardation and other physical
handicaps must be ruled out.
Parents seek advice less frequently before their
children walk. In those cases the complaint
usually relates to the shape or the position that
the foot or toes are adopting. Once again it is vital
 348 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

to differentiate normal development from true

abnormality.

Gait analysis
Observation of the child's posture and gait on
entering the clinic enables the practitioner to gain
a general impression of lower limb function. It is
useful to observe the child shod so as to evaluate
the effect of the footwear on lower limb mechan-
ics. The choice of footwear may be unsuitable and
advice may be needed. The child should also be
observed unshod wearing underclothes in order
to assess the position of the lower limb, especially
the knees. First, decide whether the child's gait
style is appropriate for their age. As with all
patients it is important to observe the child's gait
from head to toe, taking note of any signs of asym-
metry of posture. The head should be level in the
frontal and transverse planes. In very young chil-
dren the head is positioned slightly ahead of the
body and may tilt downwards in the sagittal plane
to improve forward momentum as the child
chases their centre of gravity. Symmetry of facial
features and head size should also be evaluated.
The shoulders should be aligned and a child over
6 years should have symmetry of arm position
(same distance from the body) and symmetrical
arm swing. In static stance the arms should hang
level; if they appear uneven when fingers are
Figure 14.1 An 11-year-old boy had suffered cerebral
straightened this may suggest a corresponding palsy following an infection. Ankle equinus with spasticity
shoulder drop. If shoulders are level and there is has affected the right side of his body.
no evidence of scoliosis then anisomelia of the
arms may be indicated. If one arm is held close to
the body in a flexed posture neurological assess- Equinus may be apparent during gait; in chil-
ment is indicated to rule out an an upper motor dren up to 4 years it is not uncommon to observe
neurone lesion (UMNL), e.g. hemiparesis or cere- toe-walking. Abnormal in-toeing (common) or
bral palsy (Fig. 14.1). out-toeing should be noted. Evidence of a limp
Asymmetry at the level of the pelvis during needs further investigation (see later section on
walking may indicate pathology associated limping) and the presence of a scissoring gait,
with a scoliosis or a limb-length discrepancy. indicative of spastic adductors, warrants closer
Weightbearing and non-weightbearing examina- neurological examination.
tion should be performed on the spine to confirm
a tentative diagnosis. Gluteal muscle weakness or
Weightbearing assessment
paralysis associated with hip disorders will cause
a distinct lateral lurch in gait (Trendelenburg gait) Spine. It is important to check the spine for
as the fulcrum for the muscle is lost. shape, deformity and movement. Check for
 THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 349

normal skin covering and absence of dimpling at

A I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I i I I I Embryonic ectoderm
the base of the spine over lumbar vertebrae 3/4. I

If a patient shows signs of dimpling, or a tuft of

hair at the base of the spine, it may indicate spina IIIII"'~
bifida (Figs 14.2 and 14.3). Dorsal neural groove
The presence of a scoliosis, kyphosis or lordo-
sis should be confirmed and whether it is a func- :J11!1i j j! i ' j ! ! Ii i I i i , ! ! !
Dorsal surface
tional or fixed deformity. A fixed deformity is
usually due to bony abnormality (structural),
whereas a flexible (functional) deformity is due
08 .... : ......
.:~, ,~
Spinal cord
Spinal column

to soft-tissue deformity. Fixed spinal curvatures

are retained when sitting and flexing the spine, B ~ Spina bifida occulta

•
especially scoliosis. Scoliosis is a frontal plane
deformity but can show signs of vertebral rota-
tion, causing a kyphotic or humped appearance
in the sagittal plane. Progressive thoracolumbar
problems can impair pulmonary function and in
time cause strain on respiration. • Meninqocel
Marked scoliosis in children, especially where
epiphyseal growth remains, must be considered
potentially progressive. These patients should be

~
sent for a specialist opinion. Lordosis is increased
forward curvature in the sagittal plane, which Meninqornyelocel
commonly affects the lumbar vertebrae. This
varies between races, Afro-Caribbeans having a
larger lordotic curvature than Asians and
Caucasians. Early walkers also appear to have an
increased lumbar lordosis but this is due to a pro-
truding abdomen.
Hips. The Trendelenburg sign may be useful in Figure 14.2 A. Normal development of the neural tube
detecting hip weakness. The Trendelenburg test and spine. B. Classification of spinal dysfunction.

Figure 14.3 Hair tuft at the base of the spine seen with spina bifida occulta.
 350 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
-----------
is a measure of normal muscle action between
the pelvis and greater trochanter (gluteus
medius). If the mechanism fails, it is deemed pos-
itive (Ch. 8).
Non-weightbearing assessment
Young children may be best examined on a
parent's lap. The lower limb is examined for pain
and swelling, obvious deformity and signs of
weakness. Both limbs should appear the same
regarding position, muscle bulk and tone. On
examination there should be symmetry in ranges
and direction of joint motion on each side.
Ranges of motion change with development;
however, quality of motion should be smooth
and unhindered. The temperature of the limb
should be warm and the limbs should be exam-
ined for dislocations, fractures, soft-tissue lumps
and enlargement of bony areas. Bring the legs
together and visually estimate the limb lengths at
the level of the malleoli.
Pelvis and hips. Altered function of the gluteal
muscles due to hip dysplasia will cause a change
in the shape of the buttocks. As a result the
gluteal fat folds will not appear level ('anchor
sign'). The central crease forms the central anchor
with the two base lines along the buttocks as the
bottom of the anchor. If the base lines are not
level this implies asymmetry. When performing
tests on the hips of children, it must be remem-
Figure 14.4 To determine hamstring tightness, lay the child supine, flex the hip to 90° and attempt to extend the knee to 90°.
bered to avoid damaging the blood supply to the
femoral head. At birth the head of the femur lies
superficially in the acetabulum, which gives the
appearance that the thigh is externally rotated on
the pelvis. As the child develops, the head of the
femur goes deeper into the acetabulum, which in
turn allows the limb to internally rotate. In a
normal neonate there is a ratio of 2: 1 external to
internal hip rotation. With development, the
amount of external rotation reduces as the
amount of internal rotation increases, to the point
where a normal adult value shows equal internal
and external rotation of 45° in each direction.
When undertaking formal hip examination it is
important to evaluate flexion/ extension, abduc-
tion/ adduction and internal!external rotation
in both hip-flexed and hip-extended positions
(Ch. 8). This should be followed by assessment of
hamstring tightness (Fig. 14.4). Comparison of
the lengths of the tibiae and femurs can be per-
formed using the Allis/skyline test (see Ch. 8). A
discrepancy of limb length in an infant may be
indicative of hip dislocation.
In the neonate, ligamentous laxity may be
present, together with instability of the hip. This
is associated with circulating maternal hormones.
Correct technique in hip examination is para-
mount so as to prevent iatrogenic dislocation or
avascular necrosis of the femoral head. Nerves
lying posterior to the hip joint, particularly the
sciatic nerve, are subject to trauma in posterior

hip dislocation. Damage to the nerve may lead to
motor and sensory loss.
Knees. During childhood the knee undergoes
a swing in the frontal plane from varus to valgus
and then back towards neutral (Beeson 1999).
Normal physiological bow legs (genu va rum)
(Fig. 14.5) will present between birth and 2 years
of age. Physiological genu valgum (knock knees)
is commonly seen between the ages of 3 and
5 years (Salenius & Vankka 1975). At 4 years of
age girls tend to be more knock-kneed than boys
(Heath & Staheli 1993). Physiological genu
valgum is generally outgrown by the age of 8
years (Beeson 1999). Some authors consider that
a second episode of genu valgum may occur
between 12 and 14 years of age (LaPorta 1973);
this is mainly seen in girls due to the pubertal
effects of growth (Cahuzac et al1995).
Knee position can be assessed with the child
either lying supine or standing. In the supine
position the child's knees or ankles are pushed
together with the legs parallel to the examina-
tion couch. The distance between the medial
femoral condyles of the knees and medial malle-
oli of the ankles can then be measured with a
tape measure.
Figure 14.5 16-month-old girl with tibia vara of both legs.
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 351
The child should be observed from the side for
genu recurvatum (hyperextension). This defor-
mity occurs in the sagittal plane. In very early
childhood, genu recurvatum may be present but
should reduce with development as the knee lig-
aments tighten. If reduction does not occur the
patient should be tested for ligamentous laxity
(Harris & Beeson 1998a).
The range of transverse plane motion in the
knee should be equal in both directions and be
minimal by the age of 4 years. In the newborn
20-30° of total motion may be available
(Kilmartin 1988). The amount of rotation of the
tibia on the femur should reduce by 10° at
3 years of age and at 6 years of age should show
minimal movement.
Patellae. The position of these large sesamoids
should be noted. Are they facing forward,
inwards or outwards? The patellae may be up to
30° externally rotated at birth. In young children
it is considered normal for the patellae to be
externally rotated, but by 4 years of age the patel-
lae should face forwards. The position of the
patellae is dependent upon normal hip develop-
ment. The change of direction of motion (DaM)
and range of motion (ROM) at the hip, femoral
torsion and reduction of external position of the
femoral head allow the patellae to face anteriorly.
These changes may continue until 10 years of age
and may give rise to an abnormal foot position.
Tibia-fibular segment. The tibiae should
appear symmetrical. Signs of excessive frontal
plane bowing should be noted and conditions
such as Blount's disease and rickets ruled out.
The calf muscles should be assessed for tone,
bulk and symmetry. Exaggerated lateral calf
muscles with forward facing patellae may
suggest medial genicular position.
The tibia and fibula twist with normal devel-
opment. At birth it will be apparent that the
malleoli are on the same level in the frontal
plane. As development ensues, the distal end of
the tibia twists externally (tibial torsion). The
lateral malleolus moves to a more posterior posi-
tion. There is axial rotation of the tibia and fibula
as well as twisting within the bone itself.
Malleolar position will reach an adult value
around 6 years of age with a position of 13-18°
 352 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

external malleolar positioning. This represents a

true external tibial torsion of around 18-25°
(Elftman 1945, Lang & Volpe 1998). Medial tor-
sional deformity (a decrease in malleolar angle)
is associated with flat foot and in-toeing, whereas
lateral torsional deformity (an increase in malle-
olar angle) is seen in pes cavus.
Foot. Careful examination of each joint fol-
lowed by assessment of forefoot to rearfoot align-
ment is indicated. The rearfoot must be examined
with the ankle, the forefoot with the midtarsal
joint and the toes with the metatarsophalangeal
joints. Documentation of the weightbearing foot
shape is also important. Figure 14.6 A line through the heel should bisect the
Ankle. In the newborn there is approximately forefoot through the second or third toe. In this case the line
passes lateral to the second/third toe, demonstrating a mild
50° dorsiflexion and 30° plantarflexion at the metatarsus adductus.
ankle. The ROM at this joint decreases with
development. Any limitation of ankle joint ROM
needs further evaluation (see Ch. 8). There metatarsals may be directly related to the
should be no deep creasing anterior to the ankle; metatarsals or may be an isolated deformity.
if present, this may indicate a fixed dorsiflexed
ankle (calcaneovalgus deformity). Where persis-
Joint laxity
tent toe-walking exists, neurological pathology
needs to be distinguished from habitual causes. Lower limb joint pain in children can sometimes
Rearfoot. The calcaneus will have a relatively be associated with ligamentous laxity (Bulbena et
low calcaneal inclination angle in the sagittal al 1992). This can be tested using the Beighton
plane. In the neonate the neutral position of the scale (Beighton et al 1989), a 9-point scale which
calcaneus is 8-10° varus. The talus undergoes assesses the degree of:
valgus rotation up until 6 years. The angle of dec-
• elbow hyperextension
lination of the talus increases, which helps bring
• thumb hyperextension
the foot from its supinated embryonic position to
• fifth finger hyperextension
its more pronated adult position. At birth the
• knee hyperextension
forefoot may be slightly inverted, but this will
• spine - ability to bend and touch hands flat
reduce with normal development. The young
on the floor (*)
child has a relatively narrow heel in relation to
[4 x 2] = 8 + (*) = 9
the breadth of the forefoot. The foot should have
a straight lateral border. In a rectus foot a line Children graded with 5 points or more are con-
bisecting the heel to forefoot will demonstrate sidered ligamentously lax. In addition to the
equal parts medial and lateral to the line. In an above, it may be noted that the child with liga-
adducted foot, the medial side will appear mentous laxity presents with excessive eversion
greater and, conversely, in the abducted foot the of the calcaneus in stance.
lateral side will appear greater (Fig. 14.6).
Forefoot. The midtarsus and metatarsus
Footwear
should be examined for frontal plane abnormali-
ties as well as transverse abnormalities. The fore- Evaluation of the child's footwear and hosiery is
foot in the newborn is 10-15° inverted on the important. Children's feet should be measured
rearfoot (Tax 1985). The latter is easier to identify on a regular basis to ensure they have not out-
as it is more obvious. Deformity distal to the grown their shoes. Footwear should be of the

-------------------------------------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
correct length, width and depth. Often parents
present their children to clinic because they are
concerned about excessive shoe wear. It is impor-
tant to determine whether the shoe wear is
normal or abnormal. In making this decision it is
important to establish how long the shoes are
worn each day, the level and type of activity the
child engages in and the types of material the
shoe is constructed from. Wear marks may be
misleading: i.e. heavy toebox wear associated
with a child using the foot as a bicycle break can
be confused with a child who drags his foot due
to a hemiparesis.
It is important to communicate findings
directly with the child, as they may be undertak-
ing activities at day nursery that their parents are
unaware of. Assessment of footwear is consid-
ered in detail in Chapter 10.
CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE
LOWER LIMB OF CHILDREN
Developmental dislocation of the hip
(DOH)
This is usually detected shortly after birth, during
routine examination of the neonate by the paedi-
atrician. However, it is possible for the condition
to be missed and not picked up until later in the
child's development. The fact that hip dislocation
is not always congenital has resulted in a change
in terminology. Congenital dislocation of the hip
(CDH) is now known as developmental disloca-
tion of the hip (DOH), thereby reflecting the con-
tinuum of developmental dislocation over time
(Coleman 1994, Novacheck 1996). DOH may have
serious repercussions, leading to osteoarthritis,
limb shortening and hip pain.
In a normal hip the quality of motion should
be unimpaired when the hip is taken through its
range of motion. Various tests are used to estab-
lish the presence of DOH, although feeling for
displacement of the femoral head may be all that
is required. It should be noted that clinical exam-
ination may produce false negatives. X-ray and
ultrasound imaging can confirm a diagnosis.
Barlow's test. The baby is placed supine with
hips and knees flexed. Thumb pressure is
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 353
applied over the lesser trochanter with the
middle finger of each hand over the greater
trochanter. The femoral head is gently dislocated
by moving the pressure on the hand backwards.
Consequent release of pressure allows the head
to slip back into position. A positive result indi-
cates that the hips are unstable due to ligamen-
tous laxity. The test becomes less useful as the
child becomes older (Valmassy 1993). The
wisdom of this manoeuvre is questionable, as
the potential for avascular necrosis or neurolog-
ical damage is increased by intentionally dislo-
cating the hip joint.
Palmen's sign. This is similar to Barlow's test
and performed in the same manner. It is a
provocative test for a subluxable (but not dislo-
eatable) hip. If the hip is subluxable, the exam-
iner feels a give (but not a clunk) as the femoral
head is displaced partially out of the acetabulum
(Harris 1997).
Ortolani's manoeuvre. This is performed by
flexing the hips to 90 The middle fingers are
0
•
again placed over the greater trochanter and the
thigh is lifted and abducted. The hip can be relo-
cated with a palpable (rather than audible) click.
This test is reliable up to 6-8 weeks of age, but
clicking can arise from ligaments moving, giving
false positives.
Limitation of hip abduction. This test is used
when the infant's dislocated hips no longer
reduce with Ortolani's manoeuvre (after 2
months). Abducting the hip with the thigh and
knee flexed will be resisted on the dislocated
side. This is due to contracted adductors. The
anchor sign is abnormal.
Galleazi's sign. The infant is observed supine
with hips and knees flexed and with the feet
placed flat on the couch. In normal limbs the
level of the knees should be equal. If one knee is
lower than the other this may indicate hip
pathology on the low side. This is similar to the
skyline test for checking the length of the femur
and tibia.
Telescope (piston) sign. The hip may be out of
the acetabulum but still mobile along the ala of
the ilium. With the infant supine, the thigh in the
sagittal plane and at right angles to the trunk,
longitudinal traction may cause the head to slide
 354 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
up and down along the lateral side of the ala
(Harris 1997).
Knee pain in the child
Complaints of significant, persistent knee pain
are relatively uncommon in children and
usually they present with a limp or refusal to
walk. The clinical history should attempt to
localise the pain, determine what activities exac-
erbate the pain and what treatment has been
provided to date. It is also useful to assess the
psychosocial dynamics of the child and his
family. All children between the ages of 5 and 15
years presenting with knee pain must also be
evaluated for ipsilateral hip disorders (Davids
1996). A structured approach to knee assess-
ment is essential (Ch. 8). A number of specific
knee tests are indicated in children:
Patella compression test. With the patient
lying supine and the knee extended, the practi-
tioner compresses the patella against the femoral
condyles. If performed too vigorously it will
cause pain, even in the normal knee. A more sen-
sitive approach of gradually loading the kneecap
is preferred and is less distressing for the patient.
Medial facet tenderness test. The patella is dis-
placed medially and the practitioner palpates the
posterior medial surface. Performing this test
also determines whether there is any tightness of
the lateral capsule tending to pull the patella lat-
erally, increasing shearing forces on the posterior
facets, which may damage the articular cartilage.
Quadriceps muscle bulk evaluation. The patient
is asked to contract the quadriceps muscle group;
the bulk of the vastus medialis muscle is
assessed. Loss of muscle bulk can occur with
chronic pain or poor mechanical function of the
knee.
Muscle function. Quadriceps muscle strength
and hamstring flexibility should also be assessed.
The 90: 90 test will determine hamstring tight-
ness which, when present, will tend to flex the
knee and increase patellofemoral compression.
Squatting test. The patient is asked to stand on
both feet and then crouch down. Patients with
severe pain will express discomfort; as the knee
flexes the posterior surface of the patella is com-
pressed against the femur. The degree to which
squatting is restricted will indicate the severity of
the condition.
Anterior knee pain can occur during adoles-
cence (more common in females). It is a recalci-
trant problem which, in a minority of cases, can
be disabling. The pain will be most intense
during or after vigorous activity, although kneel-
ing or sitting with a flexed knee for long periods
('cinema seat' sign) may also incite discomfort. A
high 'Q' angle (see Ch. 8) has been implicated as
a precipitating factor. Internal femoral rotation,
external tibial rotation and genu valgum are
known to increase this angle.
At certain stages of development an increased
'Q' angle will be normal when physiological
knee valgus is present. The 'Q' angle should
reduce to 15° by 6 years of age.
Osteochondroses causing knee pain. Intra-
articular knee pain due to osteochondritis disse-
cans, characterised by primary necrosis of
subchondral bone, will cause pain over the
lateral side of the medial femoral condyle.
Osgood-Schlatter's disease is a traction
apophysitis affecting the tibial tubercle and is
associated with patellar tendon strain. It pre-
dominantly affects males between 10 and 14
years of age. Pain is anterior and below the knee.
It is made worse by strenuous activity.
Examination demonstrates the presence of a
prominent and tender tibial tubercle and quadri-
ceps wasting may be visible. Extending the leg
against resistance exacerbates the symptoms.
Radiographs may show fragmentation of the
tibial tuberosity at the tendon insertion.
Abnormal frontal plane configuration
of the knee
Parental concern about knock knees or bow legs
is a common presenting complaint.
Genu varum
Genu varum is normally present from birth until
2 years of age. If a child presents with bow legs at
3-4 years of age, further investigation and treat-
ment may be necessary. A distance of more than

Scm between the knees, at any age, is cause for
concern and necessitates further investigation
(Sharrard 1976). Rickets and Blount's disease are
two conditions predisposing to genu vara with
tibial vara.
Rickets. Rickets will present as genu varum as
well as anterior bowing at the junction of the
middle and lower one-third of the tibia. Swelling
of the wrists and ankles and bossing of the
cranium is also seen in rickets. Radiological
investigation will show the epiphyses to be
widened and irregular, whereas the metaphyses
will appear 'cupped'.
Biochemical tests are performed to determine
levels of vitamin 0, calcium and phosphate,
which may be reduced due to dietary deficiency,
malabsorption, renal disease or hypophosphatasia.
If biochemical tests prove normal, Blount's
disease may be suspected.
Blount's disease. This is a condition affecting
the growth of the medial upper tibial epiphysis.
Cessation of the growth plate causes the tibia to
develop a lateral varus tilt. This condition has an
estimated incidence of 0.05 per 1000 live births
and is due to the lateral side of the growth plate
expanding faster than the medial side. Blount's
disease is thought to be a combination of obesity
and marked physiological bowing. This will
have the effect of compressing the medial side of
the growth plate, which causes further bowing of
the tibia. The lateral epiphysis continues to
expand as pressure is released. The medial epi-
physis will appear fragmented on X-ray. Blount's
disease may appear at any time between the ages
of 18 months and 4 years. Referral for treatment
should be initiated as the condition will invari-
ably progress without treatment. In the infant,
Blount's disease is often severe with both knees
affected. Arrest of the medial growth plate may
also affect older children, aged between 6 and 13,
in whom the deformity is usually unilateral and
less severe than the infantile variety, though no
less certain to progress without treatment.
Unilateral tibia vara can contribute to limb-
length discrepancy.
Trauma, infection (McRae 1997) and fluorosis
(Tachdjian 1972) can also result in marked genic-
ular bowing.
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 355
Genu valgum
Genu valgum is normally present between 3-5
years of age and 12-14 years of age. In severe
unremitting cases radiological examination
should be used to rule out developmental or
metabolic abnormalities of the epiphyses.
Surgical correction may have to be considered,
although this is rare. Unilateral knock knee
should be investigated as it is almost always a
pathological defect of the epiphysis associated
with either trauma, osteomyelitis, tumour or
developmental bone disturbance.
Excessive subtalar joint pronation of the foot
has been associated with genu valgum, as it
throws body weight medial to the central axis of
the foot and hence tends to force the foot into
pronation. Conversely, excessive varus deformity
of the forefoot may create frontal plane movement
of the knee, in order to bring the entire forefoot
into ground contact. Genu valgum will result.
Popliteal angle in children
The popliteal angle is defined as the angle of the
tibia to the femur when the hip is flexed and knee
extended. Evaluation of the popliteal angle is
used to assess hamstring tightness in healthy chil-
dren and hamstring contracture in cerebral palsy
(Katz et al 1992). It is also used as an indicator of
gestational age in infants. The mean angle in new-
borns is reported to be 27° and reduces to zero by
age 11 months (Reade et aI1984).
Hamstring, and more specifically medial ham-
string, shortening is a common cause of asym-
metrical hip motion and subsequent in-toeing.
Diagnosis is made by flexing the hip to 90° and
then attempting to extend the knee using the
90: 90 test (see Fig. 14.4). In children under 10
years, less than 70% extension is unsatisfactory.
Quality of motion is also evaluated while per-
forming the 90: 90 test. If the hamstrings resist
the final 30° of motion it is usual for the child to
experience discomfort, which indicates an abnor-
mal tightness. The medial hamstring tension can
be tested by internally rotating the flexed upper
thigh while gradually extending the knee. If,
with internal rotation of the thigh, knee extension
 356 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
is limited and uncomfortable, then the medial
hamstring is the principal cause of the complaint.
Children with tight hamstrings can assume a
normal angle and base of stance; however, during
gait, as the knee extends just prior to heel contact,
the tight medial hamstring will abruptly rotate
the leg internally. Such cases will also demon-
strate a windmilling style of running, the lower
leg being circumducted during the late swing
phase of running in order to 'short-cut' around
the extended knee position. Growing pains are
common in such in-toers, Hamstrings should
therefore be tested in any child complaining of
persistent nocturnal leg pains.
In-toeing problems
In-toeing is often a cause for parental or grand-
parental concern because the child doesn't walk
like his peers. Children themselves may not be
unduly affected, unless their gait pattern causes
tripping. It is important to establish exactly what
the family's worries are, because resolving those
fears provides an important goal of treatment.
Sometimes, the concern is related to the child
tripping or a pronated foot.
Thirty percent of children in-toe at the age of 4,
but the condition persists in only 4% of adults
(Svenningsen et al 1990). It was once thought to
cause osteoarthrosis of the hip and poor sporting
ability (Alvik 1960), but it has subsequently been
shown to be unimportant in osteoarthrosis of the
hip (Hubbard et aI1988), while the sporting per-
formance of women with internal femoral posi-
tion has been found to be equivalent to normal
controls (Staheli et aI1977).
Resolution of the in-toeing gait usually occurs
between the ages of 4 and 11 (Fabry et al 1973,
Thackeray & Beeson 1996a, 1996b). Management
of in-toeing depends upon the level at which the
abnormality originates.
Assessment starts with gait analysis. The key
to accurate diagnosis is the position of the
patella. In the in-toeing child, the patella will
either point in the direction of progression or it
will be internally rotated or 'squinting'. A squint-
ing patella indicates that the cause of the gait
defect is proximal to the knee joint. Severely
adducted feet in the presence of a forward-
looking patella occur in cases of internal genicu-
lar position (knee), internal tibial torsion (leg)
and metatarsus adductus (forefoot).
Following gait analysis, the ranges of motion
at the hip and knee joint and the position of the
transmalleolar axis and forefoot should be
assessed. The range of hip rotation is assessed
with the knee and hip extended: the leg is
brought to the neutral position where the patella
is facing directly upwards (parallel with the
frontal plane). While viewing the patella, the leg
is internally and then externally rotated and the
degree of rotation estimated. In children of less
than 4 years, an excessive internal range of hip
motion is considered abnormal and will often
explain an in-toeing style of gait. In children
older than 4, asymmetry of motion may be
significant.
A common finding on hip examination of the
in-toeing child is an increased internal range of
hip motion but reduced external range of
motion. In such cases there is obviously
sufficient range of external motion to allow
normal walking; however, the child continues to
walk in-toed because it is easier to do so. The
parents should be told that the child is simply
walking along the line of least tension. Most
children who present with internal femoral
position grow out of the condition. While inter-
nal rotation falls from about 60° at age 4 to
under 40° in the adult, decreasing 2-3° per year
(Staheli 1993), external rotation remains at a
constant 40° from 4 years of age to adulthood.
The net result is loss of total rotation with age
and less internal bias to gait.
Tibial torsion and internal genicular position
Clinical diagnosis of internal tibial torsion is
made by measuring the transmalleolar axis,
which is formed between the midpoints of the
medial and lateral malleoli and the frontal plane.
The transmalleolar axis increases during the first
few years of life from 2-4° at birth to 10-20° in
the adult. Many complex methods have been
described for measuring tibial torsion (Reikeras
& Hoiseth 1989). A quick clinical estimation is
 THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 357

position, 45° or more of internal rotation may be

Figure 14.7 Check malleolar position by placing the
thumbs on the anterior surface of the malleoli. There should
be one thumb's thickness difference between the medial and
lateral malleoli.
present. External rotation usually remains no
more than 10-20°, although in some cases it is
completely absent.
The prognosis without treatment for internal
genicular position and internal tibial torsion is
good. It tends to resolve spontaneously around
5-6 years of age. Its significance lies in the fact
that it can cause frequent tripping. There is also
evidence to suggest that it may be a factor associ-
ated with the development of osteoarthrosis of
the knee (Turner & Smillie 1981). For that reason
it is worthwhile monitoring the child to ensure
that resolution does occur. The patient should be
seen every 6 months, gait analysis performed
and the range of motion at the knee and
the transmalleolar axis measured. If tripping
and clumsiness is severe, treatment may be
considered.

made by placing the thumb of each hand anterior .'

to the malleoli; the medial malleoli should be one
thumb's thickness anterior to the lateral malleoli
(Fig. 14.7).
The incidence of internal tibial torsion has
been reported to range from 1 to 40% (Hutter &
Scott 1949, Michele & Nielsen 1976). In some
cases the transmalleolar axis will appear normal
though it is apparent on gait analysis that the
whole tibia is internally rotated on the knee. This
condition is called internal tibial position or
internal genicular position. An internal genicular
position is an important cause of in-toeing and is
so similar to tibial torsion that it is quite likely to
be misdiagnosed as such.
Internal genicular position only becomes a
cause for concern for the parents when the child
starts to walk. Examination will reveal a normal
transmalleolar axis but an abnormally high inter-
nal range of motion at the knee (Case history
14.2). This is estimated by stabilising the thigh
and grasping the foot and rotating the tibia inter-
nally and then externally (Fig. 14.8). Normally a
small but symmetrical range of motion of 10-20° Figure 14.8 Internal tibial position is estimated by
will be evident. In cases of internal genicular internally and externally rotating the tibia on the knee joint.
 358 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Case history 14.2
A 2-year-old child presented with an adducted angle
of gait and tibial varum. Examination revealed a
normal tibial angle for the child's age; however, during
gait the tibiae appeared bowed. Clinical findings
revealed a forward-facing knee, with normal range of
motion at the hip. Transverse motion at the
tibial-femoral interface revealed excessive motion on
medial rotation. An in-toeing gait pattern was evident
and an exaggerated bulging of the gastrocnemius
muscle on the lateral side of the leg observed due to
the internal position of the leg. This gave a false
impression of tibial varum.
Conclusion: Medial genicular position.
Metatarsus adductus
Metatarsus adductus is a transverse plane defor-
mity arising at the tarsometatarsal (Lisfranc's)
joint. It was first recognised in 1864 by Henke,
who labelled the condition metatarsus adductus.
A number of other names, including skewfoot,
metatarsus varus, Z foot, serpentine foot, one-
third of a clubfoot and hookfoot, have subse-
quently been used. Some of these terms have
proved useful when describing more complex
variants of the basic condition. The hallmark of
the deformity is a C-shaped curvature of the
lateral border of the foot (Fig. 14.9). Other clinical
Figure 14.9 A C-shaped curvature of the lateral border of the foot is the hallmark of metatarsus adductus. This 2-year-old
boy responded poorly to treatment as the deformity was quite rigid. The early management of metatarsus adductus is
desirable.
signs help confirm the diagnosis, including wrink-
ling of the skin in the medial longitudinal arch as
a consequence of bunching of the metatarsal
bases, a dorsal plantar crease medial to the first
metatarsal cuneiform joint, a high arch profile
created by adduction of the forefoot on the rear-
foot and, if the child is walking, a marked ten-
dency to lateral weightbearing. Internal tibial
torsion and abnormal knee position may also
occur in combination with metatarsus adductus.
The cause of metatarsus adductus is unknown.
A number of theories have been proposed,
although intrauterine moulding remains the most
popular. This theory is somewhat flawed because
from the 17th week of fetal life the mother is
aware that the fetus is moving, pushing up
against and away from the highly elastic uterine
wall. It is proposed that the direct deforming
influence of constricting amniotic bands (Torpin
1968) or fetal immobility caused by loss of amni-
otic fluid (Blane et al 1971), both of which
are associated with clubfoot, may be responsible
for the development of metatarsus adductus,
often referred to as 'one-third of a clubfoot'
(Ponsetti 1996).
Metatarsus adductus is thought to resolve
spontaneously in more than 90% of cases (Staheli
1993). Ponsetti & Becker (1966) found that only
 THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 359

11.6% of their patients required treatment,

whereas Rushforth (1978), in an Tl-year follow-
up of 83 children, found that 86% demonstrated
complete resolution of the deformity.
Metatarsus adductus represents a spectrum of
mild to severe deformity. Assessment of the
foot's flexibility is the practitioner's primary
objective (Fig. 14.10). If the foot can easily be cor-
rected and the adductus position is mild, the
prognosis for spontaneous resolution is excellent.
As the deformity becomes more marked there is
often a corresponding increase in rigidity. Clinical
features of calcaneal eversion, medial talonavicu-
lar joint bulging and 'humping' of the dorsolat-
eral midfoot indicate that spontaneous correction
is unlikely.
Uncompensated metatarsus adductus presents
as a high-arched supinated foot; symptoms are
usually minimal and may be limited to skin
lesions under the fifth metatarsophalangeal joint. Figure 14.10 Assessing flexibility of the metatarsus
adductus foot by cupping the heel in inversion while pushing
Accordingly, prognosis is less favourable and the forefoot straight.
treatment should be instigated as soon as possi-
ble. Another significant finding on assessment is
the presence of a vertical crease overlying the different. It is important therefore to note any
medial cuneiform. The vertical cuneiform crease element of these conditions which may be
presents only in the more severely affected feet. superimposed upon the metatarsus adductus,
Radiographic examination can assist the evalu- as management of more than one condition may
ation of metatarsus adductus in cases of skew- or be necessary.
Z foot where rearfoot involvement exists. This
complex variant of metatarsus adductus presents
Congenital talipes equinovarus
an everted rearfoot with plantarflexed and
(clubfoot)
adducted talus. Several charting techniques have
been developed to measure metatarsus adductus In congenital talipes equinovarus (CTEV), the
and its variants (Berg 1986). The value of radiog- adductus of the forefoot occurs at the midtarsal
raphy is limited. This is because the tarsal bones joint and not at the tarsometatarsal joint. There
do not ossify until the patient is 3-4 years old; are four components to the deformity: equinus,
furthermore, in a non-weightbearing patient the inversion of the rearfoot, adductus and pronation
plate will simply show the position the foot was of the forefoot. The most severe deformities,
held in for X-ray. however, occur in the rearfoot. The talus is
In metatarsus adductus parents are often con- abducted and the calcaneus is in equinus. The
cerned about the child's adducted style of gait calcaneus is also inverted, whereas the navicular
rather than the foot shape. To ensure consistent is displaced medial to the head of the talus. The
and reliable diagnosis, all other causes of posterior and medial soft tissues, including tib-
adducted gait, including internal femoral rota- ialis posterior, flexor digitorum longus and
tion, internal tibial torsion, genicular position, triceps surae, are also shortened and atrophied,
compensation for a forefoot valgus and hallux forming a 'pipe stem' shape to the leg.
varus (Jimenez 1992), must be ruled out. In con- CTEV is difficult to correct and there is a high
clusion, the 'level of deformity' may be quite incidence of recurrence. It is well documented
 360 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
.--------------------- - - -
that it is easier to correct a clubfoot deformity in
the first few days of life than after even a few
weeks (Ponsetti 1992).
Assessment of the clubfoot should address the
relative severity of each of the four components of
the condition. The plantarflexed first metatarsal
component is critical but usually yields well to
manipulative correction. The equinus and inver-
sion components of the rearfoot and the adduc-
tion of the forefoot at the talonavicular joint are
more resistant to correction (Ponsetti 1996).
Internal tibial torsion may also occur with club-
foot and must be also be corrected.
No matter how effective initial treatment, club-
foot will always result in shortening of the foot,
reduced calf muscle circumference and reduced
ankle and subtalar joint motion. Medial displace-
ment of the navicular and abduction of the talus
on the calcaneus may also persist. In less well
corrected clubfeet, poor gait and abnormal fore-
foot loading results in plantar callus and shoe-
fitting difficulties. The Ilizarov technique has
been used for the correction of persistent defor-
mities (Wallander et aI1996).
Flat feet
Flatfoot is one of the most common conditions
seen in paediatric podiatry clinics. There is no
universally accepted definition for flatfoot.
Morley (1957) suggested that children under
5 years of age appeared to have flat feet because
the medial longitudinal arch was filled with fat.
Radiological studies of toddlers' feet have
subsequently proved Morley wrong. All children
under 5 years have a depressed medial
longitudinal arch because of the low calcaneal
inclination angle and the underdeveloped
sustentaculum tali. It is only with external
torsion of the tibia, in the first 5 years of life, that
the calcaneus begins to assume its normal 20°
angle of inclination and the medial longitudinal
arch becomes apparent. However, in the neonate,
fat deposits are retained for a short period and
tend to be quite marked on the dorsum of the
foot. This fat distribution does contribute to an
immature foot shape, which disappears quite
rapidly after the first 12 months.
'Flatfoot' is a common term used by health care
professionals and lay people alike. 'Excessive
pronation of the foot' is a more accurate term
because, as well as a lowered medial longitudinal
arch, the flat foot may also present the following
clinical signs (Fig. 14.11):
• calcaneal eversion
• bulging of the talus (talonavicular joint
subluxation)
• abduction of the forefoot
• 'too many toes sign'
• 'C' -shaped lateral border.
Helbing's sign, described as a bowing of the
calcaneal tendon as it inserts into the calcaneus,
can sometimes be associated with excessive
pronation. Helbing's sign is not always reliable
because in some cases of excessive pronation it is
not seen. This is so when the foot maximally
pronates from a supinated position associated
with rearfoot varus. Pronation can occur using
the available range of subtalar joint motion, but
the calcaneus may still remain in a relatively
inverted position. This is commonly referred to as
'partially compensated rearfoot varus'. Marked
eversion of the calcaneus will inevitably lower
the medial longitudinal arch. With calcaneal ever-
sion there will also be abduction of the distal end
of the calcaneus, allowing the talus to assume a
more adducted and plantarflexed position which
can be seen clinically as medial bulging in the
area of the talonavicular joint. Once congruency
is lost at the talonavicular joint, progressive sub-
luxation of the joint follows. As the talus ad ducts,
the forefoot will assume an abducted position rel-
ative to the adducted rearfoot. This abnormality
will manifest clinically as the 'too many toes
sign'. When a normal foot is observed from the
rear, it is possible to see the fifth and sometimes
the fourth toe. In a pronated foot the third toe
may be seen as well. The lateral border of the foot
will be C-shaped with the concavity of the 'C'
overlying the calcaneocuboid joint.
The aforementioned clinical signs associated
with excessive pronation will occur with varying
degrees of severity. In some cases the only abnor-
mality will be a lowering of the medial longitu-
dinal arch: all other signs will be absent. Such
 THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 361

Figure 14.11 A 10-year-old boy with moderate pronation. Calcaneal eversion, medial talonavicular bulging and forefoot
abduction characterise excessive subtalar joint pronation associated with forefoot varus of both feet.

feet are not a cause for concern; indeed, a study of normal values should be used to determine
of 295 Israeli army recruits undergoing basic which children were abnormal and required
training found that the incidence of stress frac- treatment. However, in practice, Staheli's normal
tures was reduced in individuals with low- limits have proved to be very wide. Moreover,
arched feet (Giladi et aI1985). the height of the arch alone is not a reliable indi-
When evaluating the child's pronated foot the cator of excessive pronation of the foot as the
practitioner must consider other risk factors that arch is not flat in every pronated foot. Some
may affect the foot in its overall development
(Napolitano et al 2000). These contributing
factors may influence the treatment plan. The AlB 2.0
risk factors include: 1.8
1.6
• obesity
1.4
• ligamentous laxity
1.2
• hypotonia (Down's syndrome)
1.0
• rotational deformities
.8
• frontal plane tibial deformities
.6
• equinus
.4
• tarsal coalitions.
.2
Objective assessment of the pronated (flat) foot o

is vital in order to measure how the patient's foot
is changing with the passage of time or indeed
how it is responding to treatment. Staheli et al
(1987) developed the arch index as an indicator
of foot pronation (Fig. 14.12). The narrowest
point of the arch width was divided by the
widest point of the heel width to give an arch
index value. Staheli recommended that his graph
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 1415-19 30's 50's 70+
Figure 14.12 Staheli's table of normal arch index values.
The mean value for the arch index and two standard
deviations for each of the 21 age groups. The solid line
shows the mean changes with age; the shaded area shows
the normal ranges. The actual values for each age group
are represented by solid circles for the mean and open
circles for two standard deviations. (Reproduced by kind
permission of the Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery.)
 362 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
patients will present with calcaneal eversion and
talonavicular bulging, but the medial longitudi-
nal arch may still be apparent.
Rose's valgus index (Rose et al 1985) takes into
account the eversion of the foot relative to the leg
and can be used in conjunction with Staheli's
index to obtain more valid information about the
degree of pronation (Fig. 14.13). Rose's technique
measures the displacement of the medial malleo-
lus relative to the weightbearing surface of the
heel. The more the foot pronates, the greater the
medial displacement of the malleoli.
The Rose and Staheli indices should be used to
determine objectively foot position and arch
height. Footprints should be repeated once
yearly in an attempt to identify change. The deci-
sion as to which children require treatment
should be based upon an assessment of the mag-
nitude of their symptoms, family history and the
footprint indices.
The patient with excessive pronation may
suffer from chronic low-grade discomfort in the
medial longitudinal arch, talonavicular area, or
leg muscle pain, or even all three. The tibialis
anterior muscle is particularly prone to causing
Figure 14.13 Rose's valgus index. Footprints to show
diagnostic features A. The orientation ofthe heel oval, in
this case pointing towards the second toe B. The medial
pressure pattern which is commonly found in flat foot
C. To show the measurements for calculation ofthe valgus
index, which equals 1/ 2 AB - AC x 1DDIAB where A and B
are vertically beneath each malleolus and C is the centre of
the heel print. (Reproduced by kind permission ofthe
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery.)
discomfort where the foot is excessively
pronated. This is because the excessive prona-
tory movement of the foot causes the muscle to
work aphasically, leading to overuse. In many
cases, such leg pain may be written off as
untreatable 'growing pains'. The condition is,
however, very responsive to conservative
orthotic treatment.
Whereas the young patient's foot may be
severely pronated, it usually remains quite
flexible, as demonstrated by the hallux dorsi-
flexion (Jack's test) and tiptoe-standing tests. This
invokes the windlass mechanism associated with
the plantar aponeurosis, affording a rise in arch
height where the foot is flexible (Case history
14.3). This test is negative for rigid flat feet. In a
rigid pronated foot the arch will not rise upon
dorsiflexion of the hallux; neither will the rear-
foot invert when the individual stands on tiptoes.
The swivel test, where the child is asked to turn
their upper body in stance and look over one
shoulder while the foot on that side is observed,
can be useful. If the foot demonstrates a supina-
tion movement with arch rise, this signifies a
flexible foot. The supination resistance test can
also be used. With the child weightbearing, the
examiner places two fingers on the plantar aspect
of the navicular and pushes up. If arch rise is
observed with this manoeuvre a flexible foot is
indicated. All of these tests are used to demon-
strate whether the tarsus is flexible or not.
r---
I Case history 14.3 I
Two brothers age 8 and 10 years presented with
excessively pronated feet in relaxed calcaneal stance
with severe talonavicular bUlging. Both boys
experienced foot fatigue bythe end of the day and
pain in the styloid process. Their gaitwas excessively
abducted and apropulsive. Jack's test and the tiptoe
test were positive, demonstrating a flexible flat foot.
The posterior tibial tendon was anteriorly displaced
overthe medial malleoli, rendering itan inefficient
invertor and plantarflexor ofthe foot. The peroneal
muscles werecontracted. Both boysdemonstrated 6
on the Beighton scale.
ConclusIon: A diagnosis of severe flexible flatfoot
primarily caused by malposition of posterior tibial
tendon and tightness ofperoneal muscles and
aggravated by ligamentous laxity.

Rigid flat feet
A rigid pronated foot is a rare but significant
finding, usually indicative of tarsal coalition and
peroneal spastic flat foot. Tarsal coalition is a
fibrous, cartilaginous, or osseous union of two or
more tarsal bones and is congenital in origin
(Mosier & Asher 1984). Coalition between the
calcaneus and the navicular and the middle facet
of the subtalar joint is the most common presen-
tation and is conclusively linked with the syn-
drome of peroneal spastic flat foot, which is a
painful rigid pronation of the foot with tonic
spasm of the peroneal muscles.
Tarsal coalitions usually become painful during
the second decade of life when the coalition starts
to ossify, and may be associated in the rearfoot
with a sudden injury. The child will present with
mild deep pain in the subtalar joint and limitation
of subtalar joint movement. Generally the
more severe the limitation of movement, the more
severe the pain. Talocalcaneal coalition tends to
produce the most severe pronation of the foot.
If the tarsal coalition has ossified, its presence
can be confirmed by radiographic examination of
the foot. The calcaneonavicular coalition is best
demonstrated by a medial oblique radiograph. In
non-ossified calcaneonavicular coalition the
proximity of the two bones and flattening of the
navicular as it approaches the calcaneus should
arouse suspicion. Bone scans are useful for coali-
tions difficult to diagnose radiographically,
particularly of the talonavicular joint. Th.e
talocalcaneal joint most commonly shows a coali-
tion in the middle facet, which can be seen on
plain X-ray (Harris-Beath or ski-jumper's view),
of the rearfoot; however, computed tomography
(CT) is considered the gold standard. Magnetic
resonance imaging (MRI) is particularly useful in
the immature, before ossification of tarsal bones
is complete (Kulik & Clanton 1996).
The peroneal muscle spasm, which may be
occasional or continuous, is probably the
response of the peroneal muscles to effusion into
the subtalar joint. It has been demonstrated that
the posterior subtalar joint intra-articular pres-
sure is less in eversion than in inversion (Kyne &
Mankin 1965). The peroneal spasm can be
reduced by a local anaesthetic block of the
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 363
common peroneal nerve as it passes around the
neck of the fibular (Harris 1965). The spasm, a
protective mechanism, can be induced by force-
ful inversion of the foot.
The swivel test can also be used to determine
whether the subtalar joint (STJ) is at its end of
ROM. This is particularly useful in rigid flat feet.
The child is asked to look over one shoulder
while the practitioner observes the calcaneus of
the foot on the opposite side. If the foot fails to
pronate more, then the STJ is considered to be
functioning at its end of ROM.
Toe deformities
Hallux valgus
While not a common condition, juvenile hallux
valgus is a very significant foot problem.
Although it begins as an isolated abnormality of
the first metatarsophalangeal joint, as the condi-
tion progresses it affects the entire forefoot.
Advanced hallux valgus is known to be associ-
ated with hammer second toe and crowding of
the other lesser digits, widening of the forefoot
leading to footwear-fitting problems, and plantar
callosity and metatarsalgia.
A survey of 6000 9-year-olds determined a 2%
incidence of hallux valgus (Kilmartin et al 1991).
Although it is possible to detect hallux valgus in
children younger than 9 years, the changes are
often very subtle. On the other hand, in adoles-
cents the condition may have already progressed
to the point where it is involving the lesser toes.
Therefore, 9 years is probably the optimum age
for assessment and treatment.
The condition is known to be inherited
(Johnston 1959), so children with the complaint
are often presented by parents who are only too
familiar with the long-term effects of 'bunions'.
Diagnosis may be confirmed using the following
three criteria:
• A first metatarsophalangeal joint angle in
excess of 15°. This may be measured clinically
with a digital goniometer or on a
dorsoplantar weightbearing X-ray. If
radiographs are taken, the first-second
intermetatarsal angle should also be
 364 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
measured. An angle in excess of the normal
9° is known to be the forerunner of clinically
apparent hallux valgus (Kilmartin et al 1994).
• Osteophytic thickening of the first
metatarsophalangeal joint. Visible thickening
of the joint indicates hypertrophy of the
metatarsal head caused by loss of congruency
of the joint and subsequent early
degeneration of the joint surface.
• A strong family history of the complaint. A
family history of hallux valgus, while not
confirming diagnosis, must arouse suspicion.
When hallux valgus is present in the child,
family history may also indicate the likely
prognosis for the child. A history of severe
deformity affecting siblings, parents and
grandparents is very significant.
Hypermobility may be a predisposing factor
for juvenile hallux valgus; therefore, the screen-
ing of all children with hypermobility for hallux
valgus would be beneficial (Harris & Beeson
1988b).
Pain is not usually a feature of hallux valgus
until the deformity is more advanced. Pain can
be associated with footwear irritation of the skin
overlying the medial eminence. Because of the
progressive nature of hallux valgus, once the
diagnosis is made, assessment and review is
likely to be a long-term commitment for both
patient and practitioner. Dorsoplantar weight-
bearing radiographs will allow accurate assess-
ment of the following:
• first metatarsophalangeal joint space
• hallux valgus angle
• first-second intermetatarsal angle
• medial eminence
• osteophytic development
• sesamoid position.
Radiographic changes are likely to be very
subtle in the short term. Three yearly X-ray
reviews are therefore indicated. Objective clinical
assessment can be made by taking a digital
goniometer measurement of the first metatarso-
phalangeal joint angle. This value should be
recorded after drawing around the weightbear-
ing foot on a blank sheet of paper. When stored in
the patient's records, this can provide a visual
indication of the effectiveness of treatment.
Because hallux valgus is usually a bilateral con-
dition, both feet can be assessed in this manner
even if at first only one foot is affected.
Lesser toe deformity
The following lesser toe deformities are common
cause for parental concern:
• adductovarus third, fourth, fifth toes
• dorsiflexed second toe
• overriding fifth toe
• underriding third and fourth toes.
Although the abnormal position is often real
enough, the condition may be quite benign. It is
essential that the practitioner applies the follow-
ing criteria to determine which lesser toe prob-
lems require treatment:
• Is weightbearing on the apex of the toe
rather than the soft plantar pulp? Apical
weightbearing may lead to the development
of painful corns and callus.
• Is the malposition of one toe likely to influence
the position of an adjacent, otherwise normal
toe? For example, a dorsiflexed second toe will
lead to loss of buttress effect on the hallux,
which will predispose to hallux valgus.
• Is the malpositioned toe likely to be irritated
by footwear or cause footwear-fitting problems?
• Is the type of toe deformity likely to respond
to conservative or surgical treatment?
Transverse and frontal plane deformities are
resistant to conservative treatment, whereas
sagittal plane deformities and even the sagittal
plane component of complex digital deformities
respond more favourably to conservative treat-
ment. In children older than 9, conservative treat-
ment becomes progressively less effective. In
infants younger than 2, corrective devices are
poorly tolerated and technically difficult to make
because of the size of the toes.
If treatment is indicated, conservative treat-
ment should always be attempted first. Response
to treatment may be monitored using a Harris &
Beath mat. The child should be asked to step on

and then off the mat. Digital purchase will be
recorded by the mat. A Musgrave pressure
system can also provide useful information.
Apical weightbearing by the digits will be
recorded as a very small area of digital contact,
whereas adductovarus will often appear as the
lateral side of the digit in contact with the mat. In
overriding digits, toe purchase with the ground
will be absent. Following treatment, the foot
printing procedure should be repeated.
Drawing around the toes on blank paper,
photocopying the undersurface of the foot while
supporting the child's weight, or photograph-
ing the digits will also facilitate objective assess-
ment of treatment success.
Causes of limping in children
The painful limb / foot in the child is a cause for
concern. Limping is abnormal, and few parents
tolerate the problem for long before seeking
medical help. The child who limps presents a
diagnostic problem, as there are numerous con-
ditions that may result in limping (Table 14.3). It
is the practitioner's role to determine the likely
cause.
First, localise the problem in terms of anatom-
ical structure. Careful systematic evaluation
from the pelvis distally will help. Next, deter-
mine the cause, e.g. trauma. In young children
physical signs rather than subjective symptoms
will playa major role in determining aetiology.
Communication is limited and so true clinical
acumen is demanded. Thorough questioning of
the parents is crucial. It is easy to be led to false
conclusions, since pain may be influenced by
psychological factors, subjectivity and referred
pain (from the hip to the knee).
History
To arrive at a correct diagnosis it is paramount
that a detailed history is obtained. The exact cir-
cumstances surrounding the onset and duration
of the limp must be carefully and sympatheti-
cally explored. An episode of trauma is fre-
quently blamed as the cause of the limp, but may
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 365
-----------
be misleading. Conversely, an innocuous inci-
dent associated with minimal trauma may frac-
ture a pre-existing unicameral bone cyst of the
calcaneus or bone weakened by a tumour.
A number of specific questions should be con-
sidered (Table 14.4).
Limping after vigorous activity may be the
first clue to an impending stress fracture. Rather
than limp, the child may refuse to walk or stand
and ask to be carried.
If pain is associated with the limp, its exact
location and pattern should be explored with the
child. The pattern of referred pain in children
appears to be stronger than in adults (e.g. pain
referred to the knee due to medial hip problems
such as slipped capital femoral epiphysis (SCFE)
or osteoid osteoma). The character of the pain
may be helpful, such as the constant pain from an
expanding tumour or infection versus pain
related to joint motion. Conditions which lead to
demineralisation of bone frequently cause gener-
alised pain, particularly in the weightbearing
bones. Lower extremity pain and limping may be
the first signs of systemic illness such as juvenile
idiopathic arthritis (JIA), leukaemia, Gaucher's
disease or chronic renal disease.
The age of the patient will make certain diag-
noses more suspect:
• developmental dislocation of the hip in the
young child
• Perthes' disease or toxic synovitis of the hip
in 5-7 year olds (more common in males than
females on a 6:1 ratio)
• Kohler's oseteochondritis of the navicular
(5-12 year olds)
• heel pain (Sever's traction apophysitis) in
9-12 year olds
• SCFE or anterior knee pain in young
adolescents 02-15 years age).
Osteochondroses such as Perthes', Kohler's,
and Freiberg's diseases are a group of disorders
associated with trauma and altered vascular
supply to bone (DeValentine 1992) which com-
monly cause limping in children. Other examples
of osteochondroses affecting the foot are given in
Table 14.3.
 366 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

Table 14.3 Limp relating to specific location

Location Possible causes

Nervous system
CNS Cerebral tumour
Cerebral palsy
Spina bifida
Spinal muscular atrophy

PNS/ muscle Poliomyelitis

Friedreich's ataxia
Muscular dystrophy
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease

Back Trauma
Acute appendicitis
Herniated nucleus pulposus (slipped disc)
Scheuermann's disease of the spine (osteochondritis of spine)
Spondylolisthesis (forward displacement of vertebra on one distal to it)

Hip Developmental dislocation of the hip (DDH)

Slipped capital femoral epiphysis (SCFE)
Transient synovitis of the hip
Legg-Calve-Perthes disease
Trauma
Coxa vara (provokes waddling gait)
Trochanteric bursitis

Femur/tibia Fracture (fractured femur may present as hip or knee pain)

Blount's disease
Limb-length inequality (short femur or tibia)

Knee Osgood-Schlatter's disease (traction apophysitis)

Osteochondritis dissecans
Chondromalacia
Haemophilia
Sickle-cell anaemia
Rickets
Baker's cyst
Referred pain from hip

Ankle/foot Fracture/sprai n
Rickets (ankle)
Osteomyelitis (calcaneus)
Unicameral bone cyst (calcaneus)
Sever's disease (traction apophysitis)
Osteochondroses - Mouchet's or Diaz/K6hler's/ Buschke's/Freiberg'slTreve's disease
Haglund's disease (osteochondrosis of accessory navicular)
Iselin's disease (traction apophysitis)
Accessory navicular - type II (Romanowski & Barrington 1991)
Tarsal coalition
Embedded foreign body in foot
Verruca
Onychocryptosis
Subungual exostosis

Miscellaneous Septic arthritis (juvenile idiopathic arthritis)

Angioleiomyoma
Leukaemia
Attention-seeking device
Child abuse

Table 14.4 Questions the practitioner should consider
when assessing a child with a limp
• Is the limp constant or intermittent?
• Is the limp only present in the morning, at the end of the
day when the child is fatigued or is it present throughout
the day?
• What is the posture of the lower extremity when the child
is limping?
• What is the effect of climbing stairs or running?
Did the limp start following vigorous activity?
Physical examination
Gait assessment should be preferably under-
taken unassisted by the parent. The uncoopera-
tive child is best assessed when he thinks the
examination is finished. Stiffness or limitation of
motion of a single joint forces the surrounding
joints to compensate by increased movements.
This results in an irregular or jerky gait, such as
the forward thrust of the pelvis with a stiff hip or
hiking the pelvis to swing through a stiff knee.
Positional change may occur, such as external
rotation of the foot to accommodate a stiff ankle
and limited dorsiflexion or external rotation of
the entire limb in SCFE. Sometimes it is helpful to
accentuate the limp by asking the child to walk
on his toes or heels. Listening to the gait can be
informative: the slapping of the foot in drop foot,
the scraping sound of spastic gait or the quick
soft steps of an antalgic gait. Inspecting the shoes
for abnormal wear is useful: increased toe wear
in toe walkers, destruction of the medial shoe
counter in severe abnormal pronation.
A non-weightbearing evaluation will help to
clarify initial impressions about the limp. Joints
should be examined individually and compared
to the contralateral side and with expected
normal values, in particular observation for
joint stiffness, limited motion or guarding.
Marked changes to joint angle measurements
indicate disease or injury and should not be
attributed to immaturity. Joint stiffness fre-
quently accompanies synovial swelling and/ or
joint effusion as seen in JIA, whereas laxity of a
joint generally points to a ligamentous problem.
In the hip, telescoping or pistoning are the
classic signs of dislocation. A formal knee exam-
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 367
ination may be required to exclude knee pathol-
ogy. Measurement of limb lengths is important,
as limb shortening may be an early sign of a dis-
located hip. Cutaneous changes should not be
overlooked. Extra skin folds, cafe au lait spots,
erythema or heat may provide an excellent clue
to diagnosis.
A complete neurological examination includ-
ing evaluation of muscle function and strength
is important. A neurological abnormality is fre-
quently the underlying cause of many difficult
to diagnose limp problems (e.g. the child with
early Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease who pre-
sents with a mild cavus foot and toe clawing).
Subtle variations in neurological function may
only be noticeable with weightbearing or fol-
lowing vigorous activity. The Trendelenburg
test (ability to stand on one foot) is a valuable
clue to limb stability. Most normal children over
4 years of age can sustain this position for a
minimum of 30 seconds. Less time (a delayed
Trendelenburg) may suggest weakness of
the hip abductors or hip instability associated
with acetabular dysplasia. Weakness of a
specific muscle is usually due to a local problem
(e.g. quadriceps atrophy accompanying a knee
complaint), whereas weakness of muscle groups
is usually associated with primary muscle dis-
eases, systemic illness or neurological problems
(Hensinger 1986).
Certain limping patterns are characteristically
associated with weakness of specific muscles.
Tightness or spasticity of the muscles and poor
voluntary control are good clues to mild cerebral
palsy. Similarly, running accentuates the flexion
and posturing of the upper limb in a child with
mild spastic hemiplegia. Rupture of the calcaneal
tendon will lead to drop foot; Thompson's test
should be performed (Ch. 8). Hamstring inflexi-
bility can result in a flexed knee gait with abrupt
internal rotation of the leg at heel strike, particu-
larly if the medial hamstrings are tight. Limited
straight leg raising can be associated with ham-
string inflexibility, but also other causes such as
discitis or spondylolysis and spondylolisthesis
need to be excluded (Fields 1981). These usually
give rise to back pain, which radiates laterally
into the buttocks.
 368 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Special tests
The history and physical examination may be
supplemented by a variety of radiological or lab-
oratory tests, depending on the clinical assess-
ment of the child. Generally, start with
non-invasive tests, then progress to more inva-
sive tests as indicated. Due to the diffuse nature
of pain patterns in children, a larger area may be
exposed than might be chosen for an adult, e.g.
radiographs of the hip and knee when a problem
is suspected in the femur. Radiographs should
include anteroposterior and lateral views of the
area and comparison views of the uninvolved
side. In acute osteomyelitis where bone changes
may not be seen for 7-10 days a bone scan may
be more helpful.
Laboratory studies include blood count, differ-
ential, erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR),
blood cultures or direct aspiration. The ESR is
normal in trauma, the osteochondroses and
SCFE, whereas it is raised in osteomyelitis, septic
arthritis, JIA and malignancy. More complex and
invasive tests should be reserved for the more
complicated cases.
Infections
Verrucae are endemic in children, particularly
between 6 years of age and the late teens. The
source of the viral infection is often hard to iden-
tify and advice will depend upon duration,
symptoms, activities and attitude toward the
problem. The presence of tinea pedis can be diag-
nosed from skin scrapings; teenage boys are par-
ticularly susceptible to fungal infections
associated with hyperhidrosis.
Juvenile plantar dermatitis
Another seasonal condition is forefoot eczema or
juvenile plantar dermatosis (Ch. 9). The aetiology
is uncertain but it is not thought to be a chronic
contact dermatitis. A rash appears on the weight-
bearing area of the foot. A pink, shiny or glazed
appearance is noted with scaling. The skin thins
and is inflexible, with resultant fissures forming.
Differential diagnosis includes tinea pedis.
Psoriasis
Acute guttate psoriasis is the commonest form in
the young and often related to a minor infection
such as a streptococcal sore throat. The rash
either subsides in about 6 weeks or progresses to
plaque psoriasis (Beeson 1990). Plaque psoriasis
mainly affects the extensor surfaces but occasion-
ally the flexures. The latter may involve the inter-
digital web spaces and nail folds.
Vasospastic disorders
These used to be very common in children
because of poor economic and housing condi-
tions. Their incidence has declined in recent
decades. However, chilblains still occur in chil-
dren who are exposed to extremes of tempera-
ture due to inadequate footwear and hosiery in
winter or poor home conditions. They appear as
red, blotchy, intensely itchy areas. Broken
chilblains may become infected.
Dark mauve swellings around calf muscles,
thighs and buttocks indicate erythrocyanosis.
This affects overweight females in particular.
Acrocyanosis, reddening of the hands and feet,
may also occur in children. Both erythrocyanosis
and acrocyanosis are indicative of poor blood
supply and response to cold.
Juvenile idiopathic arthritis (JIA)
JIA, previously known as juvenile chronic arthri-
tis, is one of the most common chronic illnesses of
childhood. It affects 1 in 1000 children (Malleson
& Southwood 1993) and is a major cause of func-
tional disability. The child with JIA may present
with lower limb pain. Both forefoot and rearfoot
deformities are common; however, the type of
deformity is difficult to predict due to the
influence of other joint deformities and the child's
age when the disease is active (Beeson 1988).
Treatment is based upon maintaining a good
lower limb position with splints/orthoses,
maximum muscle strength, a full range of joint
motion and appropriate footwear. The use of a
team approach in the management of this condi-
tion is paramount (Beeson 1995).

SUMMARY
Although the assessment process is similar, the
skills required to assess the child do differ from
those used to assess an adult.
Assessment of the child requires sufficient
knowledge of normal development and the
ability to differentiate between self-limiting
developmental conditions and significant, persis-
tent abnormalities, and those that warrant
further evaluation. The practitioner must appre-
ciate normal developmental milestones in order
to undertake a thorough assessment.
This chapter has primarily concentrated on
REFERENCES
Alvik L 1960 Increased anteversion of the femoral neck as a
sole sign of dysplasia coxae. Acta Orthopaedica
Scandinavica 29: 301-306
Apgar V 1953 Evaluation of the newborn infant. Current
Research Anesthesia Analgesics 32: 260
Beeson P 1988 Juvenile chronic arthritis: the foot. The
Chiropodist 43(2): 20-26
Beeson P 1990 The clinical significance for chiropodists of
recent advances made in the pathology and treatment of
psoriasis. Journal British Podiatric Medicine 45(3): 43--46
Beeson P 1995 Podiatric perspective: a case study of
rheumatoid arthritis and a multidisciplinary approach.
British Journal Therapy Rehabilitation 2(10): 566-571
Beeson P 1999 Frontal plane configuration of the knee in
children. The Foot 9(1): 18-26
Beighton P H, Grahame R, Bird H A 1989 Hypermobility of
joints, 2nd edn. Springer, Berlin
Berg E E 1986 A reappraisal of metatarsus adductus and
skewfoot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 68-A:
1185-1196
Blane W A, Mattison D R, Kane R 1971 LDS intrauterine
amputations and amniotic band syndrome. Lancet 2: 158
Bulbena A, Duro J C, Porta M et al 1992 Clinical assessment
of hypermobility of joints: assembling criteria. Journal
Rheumatology 19(1): 115-122
Cahuzac J Ph, Vardon D, Sales de Gauzy J 1995 Development
of the clinical tibiofemoral angle in normal adolescents.
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 77-B: 729-732
Coleman S S 1994 Developmental dislocation of the hip:
evolutionary changes in diagnosis and treatment
[Editorial]. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics 14: 1-2
Davids J R 1996 Pediatric knee: clinical assessment and
common disorders. Pediatric Clinics of North America
43(5): 1067-1090
DeValentine S D 1992 Foot and ankle disorders in children.
Churchill Livingstone, New York, pp 452-458
Elftman H 1945 Torsion of the lower extremity. American
Journal Physiology and Anthropology 3: 255-265
Fabry G, McEwan G D, Shands A R 1973 Torsion of the
femur (a follow up study in normal and abnormal
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 369
common paediatric orthopaedic conditions of
the lower limb. Brief discussion has considered
pertinent vascular, dermatological and arthritic
conditions that lead to patients seeking advice.
The practitioner must identify the cause of any
pain and be vigilant for signs of neuromuscular
deficit. In a well-resourced nation such as the
UK, most severe problems associated with the
foot and lower limb are detected at birth.
However, all practitioners should be aware of
problems that may have missed detection or
which are relatively mild but may still lead to
functional problems in later life.
conditions). Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 55A:
1726-1738
Fields L 1981 The limping child: a review of the literature.
Journal American Podiatric Association 71(2): 60-64
Gauthier G, Elbaz R 1979 Freiberg's infraction: a
subchondral bone fatigue fracture. A new surgical
treatment. Clinical Orthopedics Related Research 142:
93-95
Giladi M, Milgrom C, Stein M et al 1985 The low arch, a
protective factor in stress fractures. Orthopedic Review
14: 709-712
Harris E J 1997 Hip instability encountered in pediatric
podiatry practice. Clinics in Podiatric Medicine and
Surgery 14(1): 179-208
Harris R 11965 Peroneal spastic flat foot (rigid valgus foot).
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 47-A: 1657-1667
Harris M-C R, Beeson P 1988a Is there a link netween
juvenile hallux abducto valgus and generalised
hypermobility ? A review of the literature. Part I. The
Foot 8(3): 125-128
Harris M-C R, Beeson P 1988b Generalised hypermobility: is
it a predisposing factor towards the development of
juvenile hallux abducto valgus? Part 2. The Foot 8(4):
203-209
Heath C H, Staheli L T 1993 Normal limits of knee angle in
white children ~ genu varum and genu valgum. Journal
Pediatric Orthopedics 13: 259-262
Hensinger R N 1986 Limp. Pediatric Clinics of North
America 33(6): 1355-1364
Hubbard D D, Staheli L T, Chew D E 1988 Medial femoral
torsion and osteoarthrosis. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics
8:540-542
Hutter C G, Scott W 1949 Tibial torsion. Journal Bone and
Joint Surgery [Am] 31-A: 511-518
Jiminez A L 1992 Hallux varus. In: McGlamry D E, Banks
A S, Downey M S (eds) Comprehensive textbook of foot
surgery, 2nd edn. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, pp
587-588
Johnston 01959 Further studies of the inheritance of hand
and foot anomalies. Clinical Orthopedics 8: 146-159
 370 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Katz K, Rosenthal A, Yosipovitch Z 1992 Normal ranges of
popliteal angle in children. Journal Pediatric Orthopedics
12:229-231
Kilmartin T E 1988 Medial genicular rotation: aetiology and
management. The Chiropodist 43: 181-184
Kilmartin T E, Barrington R L, Wallace W A 1991
Metatarsus primus varus. Journal Bone and Joint
Surgery [Br] 73B: 937-940
Kilmartin T E, Barrington R L, Wallace W A 1994 A
controlled prospective trial of a foot orthosis in the
treatment of juvenile hallux valgus. Journal Bone and
Joint Surgery [Br] 76B: 210-214
Kulik S A, Clanton T 01996 Tarsal coalition. Foot and
Ankle International 17(5): 286-296
Kyne P J, Mankin H J 1965 Changes in intra-articular
pressure with subtalar joint motion with special
reference to the etiology of peroneal spastic flat foot.
Bulletin of the Hospital for Joint Diseases 26: 181-186
Lang L M G, Volpe R G 1998 Measurement of tibial torsion.
Journal American Podiatric Medical Association 88(4):
160-165
LaPorta G 1973 Torsional abnormalities. Archives Podiatric
Medical Foot Surgery 1: 47-61
Luder J 1988 Early recognition of cerebral palsy. Update
15 March: 1955-1963
McRae R 1997 Clinical orthopaedic examination. Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh, pp 231-238
Malleson P N, Southwood T R 1993 The epidemiology of
arthritis: an overview. In: Southwood T R, Malleson P N
(eds) Bailliere's clinical paediatrics international practice
and research. Bailliere Tindall, London, 1: 635-636
Meadow R 1992 Difficult and unlikeable parents. Archives
Disease in Childhood 67: 697-702
Michele A A, Nielsen PM 1976 Tibiotalar torsion:
bioengineering paradigm. Orthopedic Clinics of North
America 7: 929-947
Morley A J M 1957 Knock knees in children. British Medical
Journal 2: 976-979
Mosier K M, Asher M 1984 Tarsal coalitions and peroneal
spastic flat foot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am]
66-A: 976-984
Napolitano C, Walsh S, Mahoney L et al2000 Risk factors
that may adversely modify the natural history of the
paediatric pronated foot. Clinics in Podiatric Medicine
and Surgery 17(3): 397-417
Novacheck T F 1996 Developmental dysplasia of the hip.
Pediatric Clinics of North America 43: 829-848
Ponsetti I V 1992 Current concepts review. Treatment of
congenital clubfoot. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Am] 74-A: 448-454
Ponsetti I V 1996 Congenital clubfoot - Fundamentals of
treatment. Oxford University Press, Oxford, pp 68-80
Ponsetti I V, Becker J R 1966 Congenital metatarsus
adductus, the results of treatment. Journal Bone and Joint
Surgery [Am] 74-A: 702-711
FURTHER READING
Berkow R (ed) 1987 The Merck manual, 15th edn. Merck
Sharp & Dohme Research Laboratories
Reade E, Hom L, Hallum A et al 1984 Changes in popliteal
angle measurement in infants up to one year of age.
Developmental Medicine Child Neurology 26: 774-780
Reikeras 0, Hoiseth A 1989 Torsion of the leg determined by
computerised tomography. Acta Orthopaedica
Scandinavica 60: 330-333
Romanowski C A J, Barrington N A 1991 The accessory
ossicles of the foot. The Foot 1(2): 61-70
Rose G K, Welton E A, Marshall T 1985 The diagnosis of
flat foot in the child. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br]
67-B: 71-78
Rushforth G F 1978 The natural history of hooked forefoot.
Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 60-B: 530-532
Salenius P, Vankka E 1975 The development of the tibio-
femoral angle in children. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Am] 57-A: 259-261
Sharrard W J W 1976 Intoeing and flat feet. British Medical
Journal 1:888-889
Smillie I S 1969 Treatment of Freiberg's infraction.
Procedures of Royal Society of Medicine 60: 29-31
Staheli L T 1993 Rotational problems in childhood. Journal
Bone and Joint Surgery 75-A: 939-949
Staheli L T, Lippert F, Denotter P 1977 Femoral anteversion
and physical performance in adolescent and adult life.
Clinical Orthopedics 129: 213-216
Staheli L T, Chew D E, Corbett M 1987 The longitudinal
arch. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Am] 69-A: 426-428
Svenningsen S, Tierjesen T, Auflem M 1990 Hip rotation and
intoeing gait. Clinical Orthopaedics Related Research 251:
177-182
Tachdjian M 0 1972 Pediatric orthopaedics, 2nd edn, Vol 4.
W B Saunders, Philadelphia, p 2826
Tachdjian M 01985 The child's foot. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Tax H 1985 Podopaediatrics, 2nd edn. Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore, pp 90-97
Thackeray C, Beeson P 1996a In-toeing gait in children: a
review of the literature. The Foot 6(1): 1-4
Thackeray C, Beeson P 1996b Is in-toeing gait a
developmental stage? The Foot 6(1): 19-24
Torpin R 1968 Fetal malformations caused by amniotic
rupture during gestation. Charles C Thomas, Springfield
Turner M S, Smillie I S 1981 The effect of tibial torsion on the
pathology of the knee. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery
[Br] 63-B: 396-398
Valmassy R L 1993 In: Thomson P (ed) Introduction to
podopaediatrics. W B Saunders, London, pp 29-31
Wallander H, Hansson G, Tjernstrom B 1996 Correction
of persistent clubfoot deformities with the Ilizarov
external fixator. Acta Orthopaedica Scandinavica 67(3):
283-287
Waugh W 1958 The ossification and vascularisation of
the tarsal navicular and their relation to Kohler's
disease. Journal Bone and Joint Surgery [Br] 403-B:
765-768
Behrman R E, Vaughan V C 1987 Nelson textbook of
pediatrics, 13th edn. W B Saunders, Philadelphia

Drennan J 1992 The child's foot and ankle. Ravens Press,
New York
Ferrari J 1998 A review of the foot deformities seen in
juvenile chronic arthritis. The Foot 8(4): 193-196
Illingworth R S 1990 The development of the infant and
the young child. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
McCrea J D 1985 Pediatric orthopaedics of the lower
extremity. Futura, New York
THE PAEDIATRIC PATIENT 371
Pollak M 1993 Textbook of developmental paediatrics.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
Sharrard M D 1979 Paediatric orthopaedics and fractures,
Vols I and II, 2nd edn. Blackwell Scientific, London
Sheridan M D 1980 From birth to five years. Children's
developmental progress, 7th edn. NFER-Nelson
Publishing, Berkshire
Thomson P (ed) 1993 Introduction to podopaediatrics.
W B Saunders, London
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 373
Guiding principles 373
Role of the sports podiatrist 374
Assessment environment 375
Injury risk factors 376
Intrinsic risk factors 376
Extrinsic factors 383
History taking 387
Medical history 387
Social history 388
Drug history 388
Sport history 389
Injury history 390
Examining the injured structure
Specialist investigations 392
Injury grading systems 393
Summary 393
Assessment of the
sports patient
B. Yates
391
INTRODUCTION
With increasing numbers of people undertaking
regular exercise there has been a corresponding
rise in the number of sports injuries. In 1991 it was
estimated that there were 5 million cases of exer-
cise-related morbidity in the United Kingdom
(Nicholl et al 1991). This would equate to 1 in
every 10 people sustaining one injury each year.
With the profile of sport in society increasing, and
the incentive of high salaries for professional
sports men and women, it is likely that injury inci-
dence figures are now even greater among the
general population. Podiatry has a significant part
to play in the management of sports injuries, as
the majority of these injuries occur in the lower
limb. The commonest acute injury is the ankle
sprain (Colville 1998); the commonest tendon
injury is to the Achilles tendon (Marks 1999) and
the most frequently seen joint pathology is
patellofemoral syndrome (Walsh 1994). Podiatric
intervention is often an integral component in the
successful management of these and other lower
limb injuries.
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
As with other areas of assessment it is essential to
take an accurate history and perform a detailed
examination. The majority of sports injuries seen
by the podiatrist are chronic in nature due to
overuse: they represent a diagnostic challenge
due to the long injury period and compensation
mechanisms which may have occurred as a result
373
 374 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

of the injury. Both of these factors can make it
difficult to confirm the diagnosis of the injury
and ascertain its aetiological factors.
The history and examination should be aimed
at both diagnosing the injury and determining
the presence or absence of intrinsic (personal)
and extrinsic (environmental) risk factors associ-
ated with the injury. The identification of intrin-
sic and extrinsic risk factors can assist in making
the diagnosis and guiding the management plan.
It is important to gain as much information as
possible about the injury. Information on the
duration, nature, frequency and intensity of
symptoms must be gained along with details of
the injury mechanism, aggravating factors and
previous treatment.
Clinical examination of the patient, which
should include the whole musculoskeletal
system, with a specific focus on the lower limbs
and the injury site, should follow the standard
examination protocol of observation, palpation
and movement. When turning to the injury site
it is imperative to know the anatomical struc-
tures of the region in order to make an accurate
diagnosis. After observing the area for
inflammation, erythema, ecchymosis, structural
defects and malalignment the practitioner
should physically examine the area. The
purpose of the physical examination is to iden-
tify, isolate and then stress individual anatomi-
cal structures to try and reproduce the patient's
symptoms. This should help enable the practi-
tioner to identify whether the pathology is iso-
lated to a specific tendon, ligament, bone, joint,
muscle or nerve. A summary of the assessment
process is given in Figure 15.1.
ROLE OF THE SPORTS PODIATRIST
The podiatrist may be part of an interdisciplinary
sports medicine team, a multidisciplinary sports
medicine team or working as a sole practitioner.
Central members of a sports medicine team are
likely to include a sports physician, orthopaedic

Intrinsic factors Intrinsic factors

Previous injurY,fitness, Structural alignment,
flexibility Flexibility, physical bulid

Extrinsic factors
Sport, equipment, Extrinsic factors
Equipment, sport
surface, training errors,
environment
i ,. ! technique

Medical history
( HISTORY

Social history
Drug history t ~
Injury observation
Swelling,

(0 IFFERENTIAL
DIAGNOSIS
malalignment,
ecchymosis, etc
Injury history
Location, duration,
mechanism,
Pain profile, +/- factors, I
previous treatment DEFINITIVE )
r DIAGNOSIS Injury assessment
Identify, isolate and
stress injured structure
Specialist
investigations

Figure 15.1 Assessment of the sports patient.


surgeon, physiotherapist and podiatrist. Other
members of the team may include a general prac-
titioner (GP), radiologist, osteopath, chiropractor,
podiatric surgeon, masseur, and professionals
from the sports science disciplines such as an
exercise physiologist, sports psychologist, and
nutritionist. Working in such a team is of obvious
benefit to both practitioner and patient. The
patient is likely to be treated more holistically,
with appropriate intervention more readily avail-
able. For the practitioner there should be assis-
tance in making an accurate diagnosis and being
able to treat more of the aetiological factors of the
injury (Case history 15.1).
Working as a sole practitioner is often more
challenging. Assistance in making an accurate
diagnosis through interdisciplinary discussion
or access to specialist investigations such as
magnetic resonance imaging (MRD bone scans
and intracompartmental pressure tests may not
be available. It is important to develop a referral
network with other health care practitioners to
----- - - - -----_._-
~~----~
Case history 15_1
- - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----1
A 19-year-old female, elite cross-country runner with
pain in her medial longitudinal arch was referred, by
her coach, to a multidisciplinary sports medicine
team. The pain had been present for 4 weeks and
was gradually getting worse. The pain was centred
around the navicular and the insertion of the posterior
tibialis tendon was both prominent and painful. Base
line X-rays were negative for a navicular stress
fracture but demonstrated a type 2 os tibialis
externum. A magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scan
was requested by the sports physician to examine the
health of the tibialis posterior tendon and determine
the presence of a stress fracture. The scan confirmed
a navicular stress fracture and healthy tendon. She
was treated with a short leg cast for 6 weeks followed
by prophylactic orthoses to reduce pronatory
compression forces on the navicular. She was also
identified as being oligomenorrhoeic with only four
menstrual cycles per year. This is known to be a risk
factor for stress fractures (Tomten et al 1998). She
was subsequently referred for dual energy X-ray
absorptiometry (DEXA) scanning of her pelvis, spine
and foot, which demonstrated reduced bone mineral
density. She was therefore referred to a
gynaecologist and sports nutritionist to address these
imbalances. Three years on she is still competing at
an elite level and has had no further stress fractures.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 375
overcome these potential shortcomings and to
be able to offer the patient more beneficial treat-
ment plans. If such a network does not exist the
practitioner may be required to provide treat-
ment and advice using mechanical, physical
and pharmacological modalities as well as
giving advice on appropriate training sched-
ules. Although this may not affect the treatment
outcome, the practitioner must be aware of his
limitations and refer to other practitioners
where necessary.
ASSESSMENT ENVIRONMENT
The practitioner may assess and treat the injured
athlete in a variety of different environments: the
majority are likely to be in a clinic or private
practice setting, whereas practitioners involved
with sports clubs will often see athletes in what-
ever medical facilities are available at the club
ground or stadium. Some athletes may require
assessment and treatment at the side of a pitch or
track during an event. In each situation there will
obviously be time, space and equipment limita-
tions. A methodical, well-planned and logical
approach to the assessment will assist the practi-
tioner in whichever environment he is treating
the athlete.
As with any biomechanical examination it is
important to have an area to observe the
athlete's gait. There should be a minimum of
5 m of uninterrupted non-carpeted surface. A
flat bed couch is essential for a number of tests
where the athlete must be able to lie fully prone,
supine or on their side. There should be plenty
of space on either side of the couch for the prac-
titioner to undertake an assessment of the knee,
thigh, hips and lower back. Tape, padding and
temporary orthoses are useful adjuncts to diag-
nosis and should be available in all working
environments.
It is important that the athlete wear clothing
that permits an accurate examination. Shorts must
be worn to allow assessment of the knees and
observation of leg alignment and muscle bulk. It
may be of benefit to have spare shorts of different
sizes available for patients who do not bring their
own. Jumpers and jackets should be removed to
 376 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
assess the spine, hips and shoulder position.
Assessment of the athletes' footwear is essential.
This should involve both the sports footwear and
general footwear, as either or both can contribute
to overuse injuries. Athletes should be advised to
bring their sports shoes to all consultations.
The use of gait analysis equipment can be of
great benefit in assessing the sports patient. The
most commonly used equipment is a treadmill,
with or without the use of a video camera. More
specialist equipment such as force platforms, in-
shoe pressure systems and digitised video gait
analysis are discussed in detail in Chapter 12.
Specialist equipment can be very useful when
assessing more complex sports injury cases or
when treating professional athletes. These
systems can:
• aid the diagnosis
• identify sporting technique
• assist in treatment planning
• help explain injury mechanisms to the
patient.
Although the cost would prohibit most practi-
tioners from purchasing such equipment it
would be beneficial to identify where patients
can be referred for this type of analysis.
INJURY RISK FACTORS
The aetiology of both acute and chronic injuries
is undoubtedly multifactorial. To simplify this
process, risk factors are divided into intrinsic
and extrinsic causes. Intrinsic risk factors are
those that are personal and are either biological
or psychosocial characteristics that predispose
the individual to injury. Intrinsic risk
factors account for up to 40-60% of all running
injuries (Cavanagh & Kram 1990, James et al
1978). Extrinsic risk factors are independent of
the person and are related to the type of sport-
ing activity and the sporting environment.
Extrinsic risk factors account for up to 80%
of running injuries (McKenzie et aI1985). Of all
risk factors for overuse injuries training errors
are the most common and may account 60% of
the cases (Hreljac et al 2000). Table 15.1 lists the
intrinsic and extrinsic risk factors to injury.
Table 15.1 Intrinsic and extrinsic risk factors associated
with sports injuries
Intrinsic risk factor Extrinsic risk factor
Age Sporting equipment
Gender Exercise surface
Previous injury Sporting activity
Structural alignment Sport position
Flexibility Training errors
Physical fitness Warm up and stretching
Physical build Environmental factors
Psychological factors
Systemic disease
Intrinsic risk factors
Age
The age of an athlete can affect both the type of
injury that may occur and the healing mecha-
nisms that follow. Younger and older athletes
tend to be more injury prone for a variety of
reasons. There is generally less muscle mass and
muscle strength in both of these groups com-
pared with older adolescents and young adults.
This can result in greater injury risk both in
contact and endurance sports. Less protective
sports equipment is available for children than
adults, which can lead to greater injury risk from
ground reaction forces and physical contact. The
quality of coaches in children's teams is often
lower than their adult counterparts, which may
cause injury due to improper training and coach-
ing supervision (Dalton 1992).
In children of all ages fractures are more
common than ligamentous disruptions. Even the
location of fractures varies with the age of
the child. Adolescents tend to have fractures in the
physeal areas, whereas preadolescents have more
fractures in the diaphysis (Cantu & Micheli 1991).
Certain bony injuries, such as the osteochondri-
tides, can only occur in the young athlete. Also
traction apophysitis of the calcaneus (Sever's
disease), the fifth metatarsal (Iselin's disease), and
of the tibial tubercle (Osgood-Schlatter's disease)
only occur in children and adolescents, although
rarely the symptoms may persist into adulthood

._--------------_._-- .._---_._--_._---_._-_ .. _ - - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - _ . -
in the case of Osgood-Schlatter's disease. Both
traction apophysites in the young athlete and
musculotendinous injuries in the older athlete
have been linked with reduced flexibility. It is
known that reduced flexibility is more common in
both groups (Anderson & Burke 1994, Gerrard
1993). Assessment of flexibility is therefore a key
area when examining both children and older ath-
letes with sports injuries.
Musculotendinous injuries are the commonest
injury in the older athlete (over 40 years). This is
due to a number of cellular changes which occur
with increasing age. Changes in collagen cross-
linking cause an increase in tendon stiffness and
reduce the elasticity of the tendon. This can result
in a muscle being subject to earlier and prolonged
loading in a movement cycle and being unable to
undergo normal stretching, resulting in damage
to the musculotendinous unit. The diameter,
density and cellularity of the collagen fibrils are
also diminished with advancing age, which
results in reduced muscle mass and strength.
Finally, the blood supply to tendons reduces with
age, resulting in an increased risk of tendonitis,
tendonosis or rupture (Strocchi et aI1991).
Overuse injuries in the older athlete may also
develop due to a delayed physiological response
to exercise. When a person starts an exercise pro-
gramme there are gradual positive changes to the
cardiovascular, neurological, endocrine and mus-
culoskeletal systems. As a person becomes fitter
the muscles become stronger and there is an
increase in bone density. These normal adaptive
changes are delayed in the older athlete and may
cause musculotendinous injuries if the athlete
increases their training volume too quickly.
Gender
Physiological differences between the sexes result
in differences in athletic performance. For compar-
ative body sizes women have a reduced cardiac
output, blood volume, vital capacity and mean
muscle mass when compared to males. Whether
this increases the risk of injury in female athletes is
uncertain. Studies involving civilian populations
have not shown significant differences in injury
rates between the sexes; except in children where
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 377
boys are twice as likely to be injured as girls
(Bruns & Maffulli 2000). This is in contrast to
studies involving military personnel where injury
rates among female recruits are between two and
four times higher than their male counterparts
(Jones et a11988, Ross & Woodward 1994).
Perhaps of more significance than injury rates
are the differences in the types of injury seen
between males and females. Certain injuries are
associated with certain sporting activities. An
example of this is posterior ankle impingement,
which is most commonly seen in females partic-
ipating in either dance or gymnastics. Pain from
existing structural deformity or natural align-
ment may also occur in the female athlete.
Hallux valgus is far more common in females
and the joint or prominence can become painful
due to the increased ground reaction and fric-
tional forces of sporting activity. A valgus align-
ment of the knee is more common in females,
and this can increase the strain on the medial
soft tissue structures of the knee during sport
involving excessive knee flexion and rotation,
e.g. medial collateral ligament injuries in skiing.
Patellofemoral syndrome is undoubtedly more
common in females than males and this is prob-
ably due to a wider pelvis decreasing the
mechanical efficiency and altering the muscle
mechanics of the patellofemoral joint.
The incidence of stress fractures has also been
reported to be higher in females. Early studies
showed the female incidence to be 10 times
greater than men (Protzman & Griffis 1977).
Although more recent studies have not shown
such a significant difference between the sexes it
is generally accepted that female athletes are
more prone to stress fracture than males, espe-
cially in the military. There are three common
aetiological factors which may be responsible for
this greater relative risk of stress fracture. These
interlinking factors are known as the female
athlete triad or unhappy triad and are usually
present in combination:
• amenorrhoea or menstrual irregularities (less
than five menses per year)
• osteoporosis (due to menstrual abnormalities,
hormonal imbalance, calcium deficiency or
malnutrition)
 378 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
• eating disorders (anorexia nervosa, bulimia
nervosa, binge-eating disorders, anorexia
athletica).
Although any of these factors can be present in
the non-athletic female population both amenor-
rhoea and eating disorders are more common
amongst athletes. One prospective study also
demonstrated that stress fractures occurred more
frequently in female athletes with low bone
density (Bennell et al 1996).
It is generally agreed that females are more
flexible than males. Whether this should affect
injury rates between the sexes is unclear, but it
has been reported that greater flexibility may
predispose ligament injuries whereas inflexibility
may predispose musculotendinous injuries. This
would result in females being more prone to lig-
ament injuries and males to musculotendinous
injuries. Some evidence would appear to support
this theory, as both anterior cruciate knee liga-
ment injuries and lateral collateral ankle liga-
ment injuries have been reported to be higher in
females than in males undertaking the same
activity (Almeida et a11999, Griffin 1994).
Previous injury
History of previous injury is a common finding
when assessing the injured athlete. The relative
risk of developing an injury when a history of a
previous injury is present is two to three times
greater than with a history of no injury. The
majority of studies in this area have involved
military subjects or runners. It is not surprising
that a previously traumatised structure may be
re-injured, as the athlete may frequently return to
exercise too quickly or the underlying cause of
the injury has not been addressed. The subse-
quent injury is often more severe than the previ-
ous injury. An example of this is seen in tibial
stress fractures, where there is a history of previ-
ous exercise-induced shin pain in up to 50% of
cases.
The subsequent injury does not necessarily
occur at the same location as the previous injury.
This may suggest compensatory changes have
occurred due to the injury or its treatment. These
------'-'--'-'--
changes may be in proprioception or neuromus-
cular coordination resulting in excessive strain on
adjacent or distant structures (Case history 15.2).
Structural alignment
The assessment of structural alignment must
include an overall impression of the whole body,
with a specific focus on the lower limbs and the
injured area. The purpose is to assess and deter-
mine if the body's structure and function has
caused or contributed to the injury. Bio-
mechanical abnormalities may be identified, but
their relevance to injury must be determined. It is
also important to determine if any abnormality
has occurred due to the injury rather than
causing it.
Structural alignment should be assessed with
the patient non-weightbearing, weightbearing
and dynamically. A thorough examination in all
three components is essential if the practitioner is
to gain a complete picture of the athlete's struc-
ture and function as it relates to the injury. This
,-.------ - - - - '----------------1
IL Case history 15.2
_ i
A zs-year-olc male, international rugby player was
diagnosed with right-sided Achilles tendonosis. The
pain in the tendon had been present for 2 months and
had caused him to reduce his training volume. It had
not improved with physiotherapy. The tendon was
painful on palpation 4 cm proximal to its insertion and
there was moderate swelling. There was a history of
right-sided plantar fasciitis that had resolved 8 months
ago with calf stretches, strapping and physical
therapies. All non-weightbearing and static
biomechanical parameters, inclUding limb length,
were the same for both limbs and calf flexibility was
excellent in both limbs.
Dynamic video gait analysis with the athlete
running on a treadmill demonstrated an earlier heel
lift on the right side. Video analysis taken prior to both
injuries was used as a comparison and did not
demonstrate an early heel lift. It appeared that due to
the previous plantar fasciitis the athlete had adapted
his gait by an early heel lift in an attempt to reduce
the impact forces acting on the heel. This had
resulted in excessive muscle activity of the calf
muscle, inducing the tendonosis. The athlete was
successfully treated with gait re-education and a heel
raise in his sports footwear that was gradually
reduced over a 3-month period.

--------_._------------_._----------_._------------------------------------------------------
assessment should include examination of the
joints, muscles and osseous alignment (Ch. 8).
The majority of podiatric interventions in sports
injuries are related to the assessment and treat-
ment of structural alignment and function that
has caused or contributed to the injury.
Chronic or overuse sports injuries are usually
due to the presence of one or both of the follow-
ing situations:
• normal structure and function but inadequate
preparation or excessive demands placed on
the tissues
• abnormal structure and function with relatively
normal demands placed on the tissues.
Although this is a rather simplistic view, it
can be seen to be true in the majority of cases. If
we consider two runners with patellofemoral syn-
drome: runner A runs over 100 miles/week,
running every day; runner Bruns 20 miles/week,
running 3 times per week with 4 rest days. Apart
from their injuries, they are both healthy and have
taken 6 months to get to this weekly mileage. It
should be clear that runner A is doing too much,
too soon, and too frequently:
• running 100 miles/week will often result in
injury
• a running volume of 100 miles/week in just
6 months has not allowed the tissues to
undergo the normal adaptive processes
required to meet these demands
• running every day does not allow adequate
recovery time for the tissues, resulting in
injury.
Other aetiological factors may also be present
in runner A, but treatment will fail unless the
errors of the training schedule are addressed. In
the case of runner B, the aetiology of his injury
is likely to be due to abnormal structure and
function which has resulted in excessive
patellofemoral joint reaction forces. His struc-
tural assessment should include examination of
factors such as:
• muscle inflexibility (hamstrings, iliotibial
band, quadriceps, lateral retinacula of the
knee and calf muscles)
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 379
• muscle weakness (vastus medialis, gluteus
medius, medial retinacula of the knee)
• patella malalignment or hypermobility (in
frontal, transverse or sagittal plane)
• patella maltracking (during flexion and
extension)
• excessive subtalar joint pronation
• frontal plane malalignment of the knee or
tibia.
The presence or absence of these factors should
assist the practitioner in identifying the aetiolog-
ical factors and planning the most effective
treatment (Witvrouw et al 2000).
Asymmetries between limbs may represent the
obvious cause of a unilateral overuse injury.
However, it is important to consider the role of
other factors such as the type of activity, exercise
surface, unilateral trauma and injury history.
Any of these factors may cause a unilateral
injury. If structural asymmetry is identified, then
the practitioner must determine a biomechanical
mechanism by which the asymmetry could have
caused the overuse injury. If we consider stress
fractures as an example, there is a strong associa-
tion between stress fractures and limb-length
inequality (Brukner et al 1999). Stress fractures
tend to occur in the longer limb, and the greater
the inequality the greater the incidence (Friberg
1982). The reasons for this are thought to be due
to the biomechanical consequences of the limb-
length difference, which results in a longer stance
phase, skeletal realignment, greater osseous
torsion and increased muscle activity of the
longer limb.
Flexibility
Hypermobility due to increased muscle flexibil-
ity and ligamentous laxity has been associated
with a greater risk of injury. Hypermobility is
often determined by the Beighton score, which is
based on a nine-point test designed to measure
excessive joint movement (Ch. 14). This test has
been used in a number of studies on flexibility
and injury, which has generally shown that
hypermobility is associated with a greater inci-
dence of ligamentous injury. Rossiter & Galbraith
 380 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
(1996) found that hypermobility was present in
34% of military recruits with ankle and knee lig-
ament injuries compared with 19% of control
subjects. Increased flexibility, measured by the sit
and reach test, in the absence of ligamentous
laxity has not been shown to be a significant
factor in injury prediction.
Generalised inflexibility due to muscle tight-
ness has been linked to musculotendinous injury:
while this is likely to be true, it has not been
proven in any long-term prospective study.
However, if a theoretical causal link can be made
between the muscle inflexibility and the injury,
then stretching of those muscles should be
included in the treatment programme. Likewise,
if hypermobility is present, then stretching
should be avoided and athletes encouraged to
perform specific stabilising exercises.
Stretching prior to activity does not appear to
reduce the risk of lower limb injury. This has
been demonstrated in a number of studies,
including two large randomised controlled trials
involving military recruits (Pope et a11998, 2000).
These studies did not measure the level of flexi-
bility of the two groups but demonstrated that
the injury incidences of the two groups were the
same irrespective of whether the athlete
stretched or not prior to exercise. This does not
mean that injured athletes with muscle inflexibil-
ity should not be instructed to stretch, as this is
an effective treatment modality. However, ath-
letes are often questioned as to whether they
stretch before and after activity and encouraged
to do so if they do not. There seems little evi-
dence to support this premise and failure to
stretch before exercise should not be viewed as a
risk factor to injury.
Physical fitness
Physical fitness is known to lower the risk of
injury, as shown in a number of studies based on
military and civilian populations (Neely 1998).
This protective mechanism not only applies to
practising a known sport but also to learning a
new sport or athletic skill. The level of reduced
risk varies amongst the studies, and is dependent
upon the activity being undertaken and the
fitness test used. Pope et al (2000) were able to
demonstrate that the least-fittest group of their
army recruits were 14 times more likely to
sustain a lower limb injury than the fittest group.
The fitness method used was the progressive
20 m shuttle run test, also known as the bleep
test. This test is one of the most popular fitness
tests used today.
When assessing injured athletes it is important
to gauge their fitness level, as you may need to
offer advice on a more appropriate training
regimen. This is often the case for the novice
athlete who enthusiastically embarks on an over-
ambitious fitness programme. This will result in
injury, as the musculoskeletal system is not pre-
pared for such strenuous exercise. When an
injury occurs, the athlete should be advised to
modify his exercise to prevent recurrence or
further injury to other structures. This advice
may include changing the method of exercise or
reducing the intensity, frequency or duration of
the exercise.
Physical build
The relationship of physical strength to injury is
unknown. To avoid injury the musculoskeletal
system must be able to cope with the physical
demand of the sporting activity. Some evidence
suggests that stronger athletes are more injury
prone (Knapik et aI1992). The reasons for this are
unclear, but it may be that the muscular forces
generated by stronger athletes damage their joint
structures and even the muscles themselves. It
may also be that stronger athletes exercise at
greater intensity or duration than weaker ath-
letes, resulting in higher injury rates.
There is a correlation between strength imbal-
ance and injury that is most frequently seen in
the knee joint, where differences between ham-
string and quadriceps strengths have been asso-
ciated with cruciate ligament injuries. The role of
strength differences between limbs has also
shown a greater injury incidence on the weaker
side. There is general agreement that strength
differences greater than 10% can increase the
injury risk to the weaker limb. These injuries may
be acute, as with cruciate ligament injuries, or

chronic, due to fatigue, e.g. tendonitis, muscle
strains and stress fractures. The role of limb dom-
inance in injury incidence is less certain. Limb
dominance in racket or ball sports is associated
with different injury patterns. However, in sports
that require equal stresses through both limbs
there is no evidence to suggest limb dominance is
a risk factor. Herring (1993) was unable to show
any difference in injury incidence based on limb
dominance in elite runners.
Anthropometric data such as height, weight,
body mass index (BM!) and total body fat have
also been examined as injury risk factors. In
general, it is only the BMI that has been shown to
be a positive indicator for injury risk. The BMI is
determined by dividing the body weight in kilo-
grams by the height of the patient in metres
squared (i.e. kg zm"). The normal BMI range is
20-25 with above 25 representing clinically over-
weight, above 30 clinically obese and below 20
representing underweight. As a general rule, the
injury risk doubles for individuals who fall
outside the normal BMI range.
Psychological factors
Psychological factors can playa significant part
in both the development of a sports injury and
the rehabilitation of the injury. Although there is
no definite psychological profile of the injury-
prone athlete, there are certain characteristics
which may predispose the athlete to injury. Acute
injuries may be more frequently seen in athletes
who are extroverts with a low sense of responsi-
bility. These athletes are natural risk-takers who
may put themselves in injurious situations
unnecessarily. The reasons for this type of sport-
ing behaviour may be due to a daredevil attitude,
poor decision making or an attempt to gain pop-
ularity with their peers, coach or supporters.
Chronic overuse injuries may be seen more fre-
quently in athletes who demonstrate high levels
of responsibility and dedication. These athletes
will often train and play beyond the point of
fatigue, resulting in small repetitive trauma to
the tissues. This can cause chronic overuse
injuries such as stress fractures, tendonitis and
muscle strains.
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 381
Other obvious psychological injury risk factors
are stress and anxiety levels. Stress may come
from the sport itself or other life stresses.
Changes in personal circumstances, careers and
relationships with family and friends can induce
significant stress on an athlete. The athlete may
then view sport as an escape or outlet to vent
frustration, which can lead to poor decision
making and injury. It is important to be aware of
these factors when treating the athlete, as injury
recurrence will be high if they are not addressed.
This may mean liaising with the athlete's coach
or team physician, so that an appropriate social
support network can be provided.
The psychological response of the athlete to
an injury can vary significantly. Most will go
through a reaction of stress and grief. The grief
response to an injury is like a minor or moder-
ate version of losing a loved one. The severity of
the injury and the importance of sport to the
athlete will determine the level of the grief
response. The grief response is characterised by
three phases:
Phase 1 - shock. The immediate response to
the injury may be one of sudden complete shock.
The athlete may show signs of anger, disbelief
and deny the existence of the injury.
Rehabilitation of the athlete cannot begin until
this phase is over.
Phase 2 - preoccupation. The athlete may
demonstrate signs of depression and guilt about
the injury, becoming isolated from other team
members, family and friends. The athlete may
also show signs of bargaining behaviour when
undergoing treatment during this phase.
Rehabilitation may begin during this phase, but
real progress will not be achieved until the
athlete enters the next phase.
Phase 3 - reorganisation. This is characterised
by the athlete fully accepting the presence of the
injury and demonstrating a renewed interest in
the rehabilitation programme. The athlete is also
likely to show a renewed interest in the sport and
in relationships with family and team-mates.
The practitioner should be aware of the
various emotional states the athlete may
demonstrate. This can help in formulating more
appropriate treatment plans with one of the
 382 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
main aims being to guide the athlete to the final
reorganisation phase.
Systemic disease
Practitioners must be aware that not all athletes
are free from systemic disease or medical condi-
tions. Cardiovascular, respiratory, endocrine,
arthritic and neurological complaints are seen
fairly frequently in the athletic population. The
spur for many people to start to exercise may be
the presence of hypertension, cardiovascular
disease or obesity. Patients with systemic disease
are often prescribed exercise programmes by
other medical professionals such as CPs, medical
consultants or physiotherapists. The role of exer-
cise and sport is generally beneficial for patients
with systemic disease as it can improve cardio-
vascular, respiratory and neurological function
and help improve strength, flexibility and mobil-
ity. However, the exercise must be of the right
type, intensity, duration and frequency to ensure
medical complications do not arise. Practitioners
should also be aware that undiagnosed systemic
disease may be the underlying cause of the injury
(Case history 15.3).
Case history 15.3
A 38-year-old male physical education instructor was
referred by his GP with a 2-month history of localised
pain in both forefeet. The patient was otherwise healthy
and participated in a wide variety of sports both at work
and socially. Both he and his GP were unsure of the
nature of his pain and he had been referred for further
investigation and orthotic treatment if appropriate.
A thorough medical history demonstrated no major
illnesses, operations or a history of lower limb injuries.
There was no significant family medical history or social
history. There was also no recent history of a change in
exercise pattern or footwear. The pain was centred
around the left fifth and right third metatarsophalangeal
joints and tended to occur after activity. The pain was
gradually getting worse. Moderate swelling was present
at both joints, particularly in the right second interspace,
with slight splaying of the second and third toes
(Sullivan's sign). A list of differential diagnoses was
considered, includinq stress fracture, capsulitis,
synovitis, flexor digitorum longus tendonitis, neuroma,
bursitis, soft tissue mass (right foot only), osteoarthritis
Patients with cardiovascular conditions such as
peripheral vascular disease or hypertension must
exercise with caution. Dynamic exercise increases
the cardiac output, increases the blood flow to
working muscles and causes peripheral vasodila-
tion. The net result is a rise in systolic pressure in
normotensive athletes. However, with hyperten-
sion there are rises in both systolic and diastolic
pressures from already elevated baseline levels.
This can elevate the blood pressure to dangerous
levels, particularly if the athlete has moderate to
severe hypertension, the exercise intensity is too
high or isometric exercise is performed.
In patients with vasospastic conditions or
peripheral vascular disease, localised tissue
hypoxia can result if the metabolic demands of
the exercising tissues are greater than the blood
supply can provide. It is also important to
remember that certain sports injuries are caused
by cardiovascular changes such as acute and
chronic compartment syndromes of the lower leg
and foot, and popliteal artery entrapment syn-
drome. Exercise can also occasionally be the
cause of cardiovascular pathology, such as effort-
induced deep vein thrombosis or external artery
endofibrosis (Bradshaw 2000).
and systemic joint disease. After a thorough clinical
examination osteoarthritis, stress fracture and tendonitis
were excluded. The examination of the joints caused
pain and there were some neuritic symptoms in the right
foot. The patient was given a local anaesthetic injection
into the web space to exclude a Morton's neuroma and
a temporary orthosis. The patient was also referred for
X-ray.
Upon review the local anaesthetic injection had not
resolved the symptoms but the temporary orthosis had
alleviated some of the pain. The X-rays revealed erosive
changes in both metatarsal heads and the patient was
subsequently diagnosed by a rheumatologist as having
rheumatoid arthritis. The patient is currently taking
disease-modifying drugs, wearing appropriate orthoses
and continues to exercise. His exercise programme has
been modified to avoid high-impact and contact sports.
This case demonstrates the importance of keeping an
open mind when determining the diagnosis of an injury.
Practitioners should consider all potential causes to
avoid unnecessary or inappropriate treatment.

Athletes with diabetes must monitor their
blood glucose levels very closely, especially
when starting or altering an exercise programme.
Exercise increases the demand for glucose in the
exercising tissues, resulting in a sharp drop in
blood glucose levels. This can trigger a hypogly-
caemic attack. Athletes will often have to reduce
their dosage of insulin before exercise and should
always have a ready source of glucose available
when they exercise. It is important that diabetics
exercise to help reduce cardiovascular complica-
tions and limited joint mobility associated with
the disease.
Neurological conditions such as upper or lower
motor neurone lesions, hereditary motor and
sensory neuropathies and nerve entrapments
may occur in athletes. Patients with neurological
disorders are often advised to exercise. Such
patients may have altered sensation, altered
muscle function and gait and a pes cavus foot
deformity. These patients must be carefully
assessed to ensure they undertake the appropri-
ate exercise programme using appropriate sup-
ports as required. Avoidance of high-impact and
contact sports is essential in neuropathic patients.
Extrinsic factors
Sporting equipment
The most important piece of sporting equipment
in the assessment of chronic overuse injuries is
the athlete's footwear. The athlete's shoes can
assist in the diagnosis of the injury as they are
often a contributory aetiological factor. They also
represent an adjunct to treatment, as the practi-
tioner will often modify the footwear or use it to
accommodate an orthosis. In certain circum-
stances the practitioner may recommend chang-
ing the footwear completely. Recommending the
right shoe for the patient is not easy. Sports shoe
manufacturing is a multi-billion pound industry
and company research data on shoe design and
function are closely guarded secrets. Each
company produces a number of different models
for the same sport making it hard to know which
is the best one. The most expensive model does
not mean it is the best. The use of 'motion control
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 383
systems' or special air or gel pockets to aid shock
absorption is often used to market the brand as
being better than that of the competition. The evi-
dence to support such claims is often lacking.
The practitioner should appraise the athlete's
shoe, identifying good and bad attributes and, if
recommending a change in footwear, advise the
athlete of what to look for when buying new
sports shoes. To recommend one specific model
for all patients will fail, as many patients will
return dissatisfied if the injury does not resolve
or complain that the shoe is uncomfortable.
The aim for the practitioner is to ensure that
the patient is exercising in a shoe that is:
• comfortable
• correct fit in length and width
• appropriate for the patient's sport
• does not show signs of excessive wear
• has appropriate tread, studs, spikes, cleats for
the sport and exercise surface
• provides sufficient shock absorption,
especially in the midsole
• provides appropriate motion control for the
patient
• firm fastening
• lightweight.
Many sports shoes do not meet all of these cri-
teria and can playa significant part in the devel-
opment of an overuse injury. Worn shoes have
been identified as risk factors in the incidence of
a number of injuries such as stress fractures, exer-
cise-induced leg pain and Achilles tendonitis due
to a lack of shock absorption (Gardner et a11988,
Myburgh et al 1988). The shoe is the interface
between the foot and the ground and must
absorb significant ground reaction forces gener-
ated by sporting activity. As the shoe ages or
becomes more worn, its ability to absorb these
forces is reduced, resulting in increased forces
being passed on to the musculoskeletal system. It
has been estimated that the average running shoe
loses 50% of its shock-absorbing capabilities after
300-500 miles of running (Cook et al 1985). Old
shoes may not only demonstrate signs of exces-
sive wear but also material degradation can
occur, even further reducing the shock-absorbing
capabilities of the shoe.
 384 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
An uneven wear pattern on the sole of the shoe
or the insole inside the shoe can give a guide to
biomechanical abnormalities or sporting tech-
nique of the athlete. Excessive lateral wear of the
rearfoot can indicate a varus alignment or strike
pattern and may cause inversion ankle sprains or
lateral foot and leg injuries. Excessive wear
across the ball of the foot will cause a loss of trac-
tion and control, which may induce injury.
Different wear patterns between the shoes may
indicate different biomechanics or sporting tech-
nique. The most common example of uneven
wear is limb-length inequality due to structural,
functional or environmental factors.
The weight of the shoe is important to optimise
performance: the heavier the shoe, the greater the
muscle exertion and energy expenditure. This
can cause fatigue in the lower leg muscles and
therefore affect performance. Light running
shoes may enhance speed but should only be
worn for racing as they do not offer appropriate
support or shock absorption.
The importance of comfort and correct fit
cannot be overstated. Shoes that are too tight or
narrow will obviously cause irritation, resulting
in corns, calluses, subungual haematomas and
other nail pathologies. It is common in kicking
sports such as soccer and rugby that the athlete
will wear a boot that is too small in order to get
a better 'feel' for kicking the ball. This practice
should be discouraged as it can often lead to
clawing of the toes and exacerbate nail patholo-
gies. Shoes that are too narrow or fastened
too tightly can cause pain in the arch and neu-
ritic pain in the forefoot during exercise. A shoe
that is too long will allow excessive movement
of the foot, resulting in friction blisters and heel
slippage.
Exercise surface
The role that the exercise surface may play in the
development of overuse injuries is a contentious
issue. It was previously thought that athletes
who exercise on hard unyielding surfaces
such as concrete would have an increased inci-
dence of osteoarthritis due to accelerated wear
and tear of the joints. There is very little evi-
dence to support this despite several long-term
prospective studies. However in athletics,
harder synthetic track surfaces can increase
performance but also increase the incidence of
musculoskeletal injury. If athletes exercise solely
on hard surfaces, increases in the incidence of
medial tibial stress syndrome by 28%
and Achilles tendonitis by 17% have been
demonstrated (Nigg & Yeadon 1987).
Artificial grass was first used for sport in 1964
and has since become a major playing surface in
a wide number of sporting activities. The injury
profile of this surface is different to that of
natural grass. Bowers & Martin (1976) identified
an injury virtually unique to this surface. Turf toe
is a hyperextension injury of the first metatar-
sophalangeal joint resulting in a sprain of the
plantar capsuloligamentous structures. It is
caused by shoes with a flexible sole in the fore-
foot bending excessively on a hard unyielding
surface. It is primarily seen in American football
but can occur in any sport played on artificial
grass surfaces such as AstroTurf.
Harder surfaces invoke greater ground reac-
tion forces, which must be absorbed by the shoe
and musculoskeletal system. The body absorbs
these forces primarily through the joints and
eccentric muscle activity. The harder the exercise
surface, the greater the eccentric muscle activity
(Richie et al 1993). Theoretically, exercising on
harder surfaces should cause greater knee
flexion, ankle dorsiflexion and greater or pro-
longed subtalar joint pronation to aid the
absorption of the higher ground reaction forces.
No biomechanical studies have shown this to
date.
In addition to the hardness of the exercise
surface, it is important to consider the friction
and energy loss of the surface. Friction, or hori-
zontal stiffness, is integral in acceleration and
deceleration. Artificial athletic surfaces have
greater friction than grass, allowing greater accel-
eration and deceleration. However, these greater
frictional forces must be absorbed by the body
and can result in increased injuries. These
injuries may be to the musculotendinous units or
the ligaments designed to limit joint movements
such as the cruciate ligaments of the knee.

Energy loss of a surface is related to its elastic
behaviour and deformation properties. Surfaces
that deform when loaded are termed compliant
and result in increased contact time. This
increases cushioning as peak contact forces are
reduced. However, it may reduce performance as
the contact time is greater, resulting in slower
acceleration. Exercising on softer surfaces can
also alter joint positions. Consider an athlete
running on sand. The greatest contact force
occurs at heel strike, so the sand will be maxi-
mally displaced at this time. This results in
greater ankle dorsiflexion, requiring greater
muscle activity of the calf muscles. Thus, exercis-
ing on softer surfaces may reduce injuries associ-
ated with high-impact forces but may lead to
increases in muscle activity resulting in musculo-
tendinous injury.
It is also important to consider the terrain and
incline of the exercise surface. Uneven terrain
such as grass will mean the body having to
adapt to maintain ground contact and stability.
These adaptive changes mainly occur in the
frontal plane and can result in greater supina-
tory and pronatory moments within the foot
and ankle. If these forces become excessive then
frontal plane injury will result. The most
obvious example of this is the inversion ankle
sprain. Pronatory injuries can occur and usually
involve the posterior tibial tendon. If an athlete
exercises on uneven terrain with frontal plane
movements of the foot and ankle limited by
strapping, a brace or boots, then greater forces
will be transferred to the knee. This can result in
collateral ligament and cruciate damage. This
injury pattern has been seen in skiing. Uneven
terrain can also exist on surfaces which are per-
ceived to be flat. The camber of roads is usually
canted up to 14°. This can cause pronatory
moments on one limb and supinatory moments
on the other, resulting in an environmental
limb-length difference.
The importance of exercising on an incline
should not be overlooked. Both uphill and
downhill running are associated with different
joint angular relationships and muscle activity
patterns. Uphill running requires greater ankle
joint dorsiflexion and eccentric calf and ham-
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 385
string muscle activity. Downhill running requi-
res greater ankle plantarflexion and eccentric
muscle activity of the foot dorsiflexors. This par-
ticularly affects the tibialis anterior muscle,
which becomes active for longer and elongates
further as it decelerates foot slap. Downhill
running also increases the load on the quadri-
ceps muscles and is known to exacerbate condi-
tions such as patellofemoral syndrome and
patella tendonitis.
Sporting activity
The type of sport the athlete plays and the tech-
niques they use are integral to the development
of overuse injuries. Certain injuries are even
named after certain sports or activities (Table
15.2). This does not mean that these injuries are
unique to that particular sport, but they occur
frequently due to the forces the anatomical struc-
ture has to absorb. Metatarsal stress fractures are
not unique to military personnel who march, but
this activity involves repetitive impact forces
through the forefoot, which can result in a
stress fracture. Patella tendonitis is most com-
monly seen in jumping sports due to the high
ground reaction forces (up to eight times body
weight) that this activity produces. A significant
component of these forces is absorbed by eccen-
tric quadriceps activity, which can cause patella
tendonitis.
Table 15.2 Common injuries named after a sport
Injury name Injury definition
Footballer's ankle Anterior ankle impingement
Tennis leg Rupture/tear of medial head of
gastrocnemius
Fresher's leg Exercise-induced shin pain
March fracture Metatarsal stress fracture
Jumper's knee Patella tendonitis
Runner's knee Patellofemoral syndrome
Golfer's elbow Medial epicondylitis
Tennis elbow Medial (forehand) epicondylitis,
lateral (backhand) epicondylitis
Swimmer's shoulder Rotator cuff pathology
 386 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
It is important the practitioner has an under-
standing of the type of sport the athlete plays and
its biomechanics. This will help the practitioner:
• understand the forces involved in the sport
• identify the structures at risk of injury
• determine the potential biomechanical
mechanism of injury
• formulate the most appropriate treatment
plan.
These four factors are all interrelated.
Identifying the structures most at risk of injury
requires knowledge of the forces involved in the
sport. This knowledge is related to the biome-
chanical movements of that particular sport.
Determining the biomechanical mechanism of
injury is crucial to formulating the most appro-
priate treatment plan.
Without this knowledge it is difficult to
reduce or prevent the forces that caused the
injury. Appropriate treatment planning must
also take into account the limitations of the
sport on the treatment. This will include the ath-
letes' footwear and other sporting equipment.
Some sports do not allow the use of mechanical
supports as they may compromise player safety
or give the athlete an unfair advantage.
It is also important to be aware of individual
variation in sporting technique, which not only
determines the athlete's skill and ability at a
sport but can also predispose injury. Minor dif-
ferences in sporting technique can have a
significant effect on injury development. An
example is in running techniques between fore-
foot and rearfoot strikers. Forefoot striking is
associated with increased impact forces, a
reduced stance phase and reduced subtalar joint
pronation. These three factors combined could
increase the forces being absorbed both in the
forefoot and more proximally in the calf muscles,
shin and knee.
The team position will also help determine
the sporting technique of the athlete. The posi-
tion played may be based on anthropometric
characteristics, limb dominance and skill levels.
Team position may be important to the practi-
tioner, as the biomechanical movements and
sporting techniques used by the athlete can vary.
This will result in different injury profiles seen
between positions: e.g. a prop forward and
wing back in rugby, a wicket keeper and fast
bowler in cricket, a linebacker and wide receiver
in American football.
Training errors
As discussed earlier, athletes may do too much,
too soon, and too frequently. Training errors are
one of the commonest causes of chronic overuse
injuries, and practitioners must identify these
errors for successful treatment planning. Failure
to do so will lead to a recurrence of the injury or
development of other overuse injuries. To avoid
injury athletes who wish to exercise regularly
must find the correct balance of exercise intensity,
duration and frequency. This will normally
involve:
• participating in more than one sport
• combination of strength, flexibility and
endurance training
• incorporation of rest days in the weekly
training schedule
• periods during the year of greater
training/sport levels, i.e. seasons
• variation in training methods to help
maintain interest.
When athletes first begin to train they often
overestimate their baseline fitness level. This can
result in injury, as the musculoskeletal system is
not physiologically prepared for this volume of
exercise. Common injuries at this stage are muscle
strains and exercise-induced leg pain (shin
splints). Increasing the volume of exercise too
quickly can also occur when an athlete is return-
ing from injury or training for a specific competi-
tion that they are not prepared for.
Bones, like muscle, also undergo a normal
physiological strengthening process during the
early period of an exercise programme. This
remodelling process is characterised by initial
bone porosity due to osteoclastic channelling,
which is then followed by osteoblasts laying
down new bone matrix. The result is that the bone
is initially weakened by exercise and then eventu-
ally strengthened beyond its pre-exercise level.

This whole process usually takes 6 months and
during the first 2 months the bone is especially
prone to injuries such as stress fracture. This is
one of the main reasons stress fractures are
usually seen during the first 2 months of starting
an exercise programme or significantly increasing
the exercise level (Beck 1998).
Environmental factors
Changes in temperature, humidity and altitude
can all affect performance and may increase
injury risk. Practitioners providing treatment at
endurance events should be particularly aware
of the consequences of environmental factors.
High temperatures and humidity levels can
produce heat-intolerance illnesses including
syncope, heat cramps, exhaustion and stroke.
These are most frequently seen in athletes who
have not fully acclimatised to the environment
and become dehydrated and salt depleted.
Most cold-related sports injuries are seen in
submaximal endurance sports such as marathon
running or wilderness sports such as moun-
taineering and skiing. Cold climates reduce per-
formance as the body must use energy stores for
thermogenesis. Cold-induced injuries include
chilblains, trench foot, frostbite and hypother-
mia. Pre-existing conditions, such as asthma,
Raynaud's phenomenon and cold urticaria, can
also be triggered by the cold.
High altitude ranges from 1500 to 3500 m
above sea level. Above 1500 m, the maximum
oxygen uptake by the body reduces by 10% for
every 1000 m. This results in reduced perfor-
mance at endurance events. The opposite is true
for performance at short anaerobic events, due to
lower air resistance. Illnesses associated with
high altitude include acute mountain sickness,
pulmonary oedema, cerebral oedema and retinal
haemorrhage.
HISTORY TAKING
A significant part of the patient's initial consul-
tation is likely to involve history taking. It is
important to cover all relevant areas, otherwise
vital clues may be missed, resulting in misdiag-
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 387
nosis or inappropriate treatment planning. The
consultation will start with noting the patient's
personal details. In addition to the patient's
name, address, date of birth, GP, information on
other health care practitioners treating the
athlete should also be recorded. Recording the
contact details of the athlete's coach(es) is
useful, as communication with them may assist
the practitioner in identifying risk factors and
ensuring the athlete adheres to any treatment
plan.
The following areas should be covered to
achieve an accurate history:
• medical history
• social history
• drug history
• sport history
• injury history.
Medical history
Taking an accurate medical history is essential
in determining an athlete's suitability to
perform a sport. As already discussed, poor
physical fitness or systemic disease may predis-
pose an athlete to injury. Diseases of the cardio-
vascular, respiratory, neurological, endocrine,
gastrointestinal and genitourinary systems can
affect performance and predispose injury. If
medical conditions are identified, it is important
to gain information about the onset, the type of
symptoms experienced, the treating physician
and the type of treatment. This information will
help the practitioner to determine whether it is
necessary to recommend participation in a dif-
ferent sporting activity or participation at a
reduced level.
The history of any surgical procedures should
also be recorded. Surgical procedures due to sys-
temic disease or previous injury may have direct
relevance to the assessment of the current injury.
Information related to all surgical procedures is
important as it provides an indication of the
overall health status of the athlete and the
athlete's healing capacity. Also, any recent opera-
tions that may have resulted in a reduced training
programme and fitness level, which may have
 388 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
contributed to the current sports injury, need to be
noted.
Both the patient and practitioner often over-
look the role of nutrition in sports performance
and injury. The practitioner should be aware of
the nutritional requirements of athletic perfor-
mance. Energy for exercise comes from carbohy-
drates, fats and, to a lesser extent, proteins.
Muscle hypertrophy and skeletal development is
reliant on proteins, vitamins and minerals.
Homeostasis is dependent upon water, fibre and
minerals. A healthy diet will incorporate the right
balance of these foodstuffs. Athletes will often
manipulate this balance in order to enhance per-
formance: e.g. carbohydrate loading prior to
endurance events, protein supplements to
increase muscle mass and anaerobic power.
Manipulation of foodstuffs may not be detrimen-
tal as long as it does not increase one source at
the expense of reducing another. However, if the
practitioner is in doubt and suspects the athlete's
diet is contributing to the injury then referral to a
dietitian or sports nutritionist is warranted.
Other indications for referral may include rapid
changes in body weight, vitamin deficiencies and
BMIs below 18 or above 27.
Accurate assessment of physical fitness is
difficult without resort to specific exercise physi-
ology tests. These tests are used to measure an
athlete's ability to exercise aerobically or anaero-
bically. An impression of athletes' fitness can be
gained from questioning them about their exer-
cise programme, athletic performance, speed of
recovery from exercise and injury history. Rapid
increases in exercise intensity may not be associ-
ated with increases in physical fitness. Exercise at
too Iowan intensity will also not produce
improvements in fitness. As a general rule aerobic
exercise must be performed at a level equivalent
to 70-80% of the maximum heart rate. Exercising
below this level will not produce significant
improvements in fitness and exercise above this
level may overstrain the cardiovascular system. A
slow recovery from exercise may either be due to
poor physical fitness or exercising at too high an
intensity. Signs of a slow recovery may include
laboured breathing post-exercise, severe fatigue
or delayed-onset muscle soreness.
Social history
The social history of the athlete will involve
questioning them regarding their occupation,
dietary and alcohol habits and whether they
smoke. High alcohol consumption, smoking and
a poorly balanced diet may all predispose the
athlete to injury due to their effect on physical
fitness. A patient's occupation is often over-
looked but may be a significant factor in both the
aetiology of the injury and its management. It
may be difficult for an athlete to truly rest an
injured structure if their occupation involves
heavy manual work or standing for prolonged
periods. The social network of family and friends
may be a cause of stress to the athlete. If these
stresses become significant they may contribute
to the development of injury. Questioning the
athlete on these issues may be necessary if the
practitioner suspects psychological stress as an
aetiological factor in the injury.
Drug history
A thorough pharmacological history should
include any current prescription only or over-
the-counter medicines, previous medication and
drug allergies. Current or past medication may
indicate pathology not identified in the medical
history. Drug allergies are obviously important,
as they may contraindicate certain treatment
options. Over-the-counter medicines may
include nutritional supplements, homeopathic
remedies, topical agents or pain medication. Pain
medication is of particular importance, as it will
mask some of the symptoms of the injury. This
can result in the athlete and practitioner under-
estimating the severity of the injury, in addition
to the potential long-term complications of such
medication.
The use of pharmacological aids to enhance
sporting performance is now more common-
place. Such practices are not confined to the elite
level. The practitioner should be aware of the
potential risks associated with pharmacological
abuse, particularly their role in injury develop-
ment. This is mainly confined to anabolic
steroids, which can significantly increase muscle

mass, muscle strength and the psychological
drive to exercise. These drugs may cause injury
due to the increased forces placed through the
musculoskeletal system from the greater exercise
intensity. There is also some evidence to suggest
that continual long-term use causes weakening
of collagen structures, resulting in injury to
tendon, ligament and muscle. Other more serious
long-term effects can include cardiomyopathy,
liver damage and testicular atrophy. Abuse at the
elite level is further complicated by athletes
using masking agents, which may themselves be
detrimental to health. Evidence on the effects of
other ergogenic aids such as protein, vitamin and
mineral supplements, creatine, caffeine, blood
doping and human growth hormone is currently
lacking. Although these aids are commonly used,
their potential benefit to athletic performance has
not been clearly proven.
Sport history
It is important to gain as much detail about the
athlete's sporting history as possible. This should
include the following:
• type or types of sport
• frequency (number of times/week)
• duration
• intensity
• level.
The main sport the athlete participates in is of
obvious importance but the practitioner should
also focus on secondary sporting activities the
athlete may undertake. These activities may be
for interest or fitness but they can play a
significant part in the development of an injury
and should not be overlooked. Other factors to
note would include the sports surface, footwear,
limb dominance and sporting position.
The frequency, duration and intensity of sport-
ing activity will help the practitioner determine if
the athlete is over- or under-training: both can
lead to injury. Over-training can cause overuse
injury, as there is insufficient time for tissue
replenishment and regeneration. Under-training
can cause injury due to inadequate levels of
fitness or strength. As a general rule, to improve
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 389
cardiovascular fitness it is recommended to exer-
cise three times a week for a minimum of 20 min
each time at an intensity of 70-80% maximum
heart rate.
The duration of activity is important: too
short an exercise period will not produce the
desired physiological improvement in fitness,
and too long a period will cause fatigue and
possible injury. Duration should also include
how long the athlete has been participating in
that particular sport, as this will impact on his
fitness and skill level. When questioning the
athlete on his sporting activity, it is important to
determine at what frequency, duration and
intensity he was exercising at when the injury
occurred. The practitioner should pay particular
attention to recent changes to the training
schedule (Case history 15.4).
The level at which the athlete undertakes his
sport is also important. This will help the practi-
tioner determine the athlete's motivation to play
Case history 15.4
A 23-year-old semi-professional soccer player
returned for treatment complaining of bilateral shin
pain. Eighteen months previously he had been
successfully treated for patellofemoral syndrome after
being prescribed an exercise programme and
orthoses for his football boots and AstroTurf training
shoes. His shin pain had been present for 6 weeks
and was gradually deteriorating. It was initially
suspected that the shin pain was due to the orthoses
becoming worn and less effective. Additional support
was therefore added to the orthoses and the athlete
was reviewed 2 weeks later. The pain was still
present and it was at this stage that the athlete
revealed that his training schedule had changed
slightly. In addition to his normal soccer training,
which consisted of 5 hours' practice and one game
per week, he had started to attend a high-impact
aerobics class. This was in a school hall with a non-
sprung hardwood floor. For the gO-minute classes he
wore an old pair of running shoes in which his
orthoses did not fit.
He was advised to discontinue the aerobics class
and the shin pain resolved within 10 days. High-
impact aerobics on hard surfaces is associated with
significant ground reaction forces and this had
caused him to develop medial tibial stress syndrome.
The lack of orthotic control and the poor shock
absorption of his old running shoes had probably
exacerbated the situation.
 390 'SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
sport and may also guide the treatment plan.
Elite or professional athletes may find it harder to
rest or modify their activity than novice athletes.
Convincing a professional athlete to take time
out from their sport is often very difficult and
should involve collaboration with other
members of the sports medicine team or coach-
ing staff. These athletes are often more demand-
ing of the practitioner and can present a
management challenge.
When assessing an athlete's current participa-
tion level it is important to determine his athletic
goals. Athletes may strive to achieve certain
goals or reach a specific level of performance,
such as running a distance in a given time or
becoming a regular first team player for a sports
club. Although these goals may be achievable the
athlete will often have unrealistic expectations of
the time it will take to reach that level of skill or
fitness. Part of the assessment of the athlete and
his injury may involve the practitioner giving
advice on whether the athlete's goals are achiev-
able in the short term.
Injury history
As much information as possible should be
gained about both previous lower limb injuries
and the current injury. Previous injuries are
important as they can make the athlete more sus-
ceptible to injury and they may also cause struc-
tural or functional compensations. Information
on this area can be gained easily by asking ques-
tions such as:
• Have you broken any bones within the lower
limb?
• Have you ruptured or torn any ligaments or
tendons in the lower limb?
• Is there a history of prolonged or intermittent
swelling of any joints in the lower limb?
• Have you had any injuries, which have
resulted in missing more than 2 weeks from
sport?
With acute injuries there is often a history of a
single traumatic event. The athlete may be able
to describe how the injury occurred, making it
easier for the practitioner to determine the
mechanism or pattern of injury. This informa-
tion can enable the practitioner to identify the
injured structure and the likely level of force
that caused the injury. Diagnosis of both the
injured structure and the injury severity is
therefore easier.
Identifying the injury mechanism in chronic or
overuse injuries is harder as these injuries are
usually associated with multiple minor traumatic
events and the injury may have led to functional
compensation.
The location, duration and the type of pain can
all assist the diagnosis of the injury. The location
of pain may be diffuse and generalised or focal
and specific to a single structure. This character-
istic is important, as both generalised and focal
pain can be typical of specific conditions. As an
example, consider patellofemoral syndrome and
patella tendonitis, which are both causes of ante-
rior knee pain. Patella tendonitis will cause pain
within the tendon or its sheath and is focal in
nature. Patellofemoral syndrome is characterised
by pain medial, posterior or lateral to the patella
and is generalised in nature. This is sometimes
referred to as the 'grab' sign, as the patient will
grab the whole of the front of the knee when
asked to locate the area of pain.
The duration of pain will inform the practi-
tioner both of how long the injury has been
present and its severity. As a general rule, the
longer the injury has been present the longer the
recovery period will be from the initiation of
treatment. This is usually because the injury has
become more severe. Consider pathology of
tendons as an example. Long-standing tendonitis
can be associated with the formation of adhe-
sions, scar tissue and mucinous degeneration of
the tendon itself. This is referred to as tendonosis
and will require more intensive and prolonged
treatment that may take many weeks or months
to resolve. Injuries which are intermittent in
nature may be less severe or specifically associ-
ated with a sporting activity.
Descriptions of the type of pain experienced
are somewhat subjective. However, certain pain
descriptions are characteristic of trauma to
specific anatomical structures. Neurogenic symp-
toms usually involve paraesthesia, numbness or

a burning sensation. A dull or intense aching sen-
sation usually represents an injury to deep struc-
tures, especially muscle or bone. Sharp or
throbbing pain may represent trauma to articular
structures. The severity of the pain is especially
subjective, as patients have differing tolerance
and pain coping strategies. It is therefore best to
assess the pain severity in conjunction with all
other injury factors.
Other factors to note about the injury are pre-
vious conservative treatment and what exacer-
bates or improves the injury. The majority of
sports patients have usually been treated by
another health care practitioner or attempted
self-treatment prior to attending the podiatrist.
This information may be particularly useful in
determining injury severity and appropriate
treatment planning. Accurate information on
treatment by other health care workers may
require communication between practitioners,
which can also assist in making an accurate
diagnosis through case discussion. Factors
which exacerbate injury are usually sport-
related and may include any of the intrinsic and
extrinsic risk factors discussed earlier. Factors
outside of the athlete's sport may also con-
tribute, such as occupation, social activities and
non-athletic footwear.
Many injuries have such characteristic histo-
ries that the injury diagnosis requires only
minimal examination. A common example of this
is exercise-induced leg pain, traditionally known
as shin splints. The characteristics of the common
causes of exercise-induced leg pain are shown in
Table 15.3. The relationship of the pain to exercise
is very diagnostic, as each condition significantly
varies. In chronic compartment syndrome the
Table 15.3 Characteristics of the common causes of exercise-induced leg pain
Pain characteristic Medial tibial stress syndrome
Location Tenoperiosteal junction
Nature Diffuse
Description Dull ache
Relationship to Post-exercise, lasts <2 days
exercise
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 391
pain is induced by exercise and the athlete must
stop or reduce their exercise intensity. Upon ces-
sation of exercise the pain goes completely
within minutes. In medial tibial stress syndrome
pain is rarely present during exercise but occurs
within hours following exercise and may last up
to 2 days post-exercise. The pain from stress frac-
tures is exacerbated by exercise and usually
becomes constant in nature unless the athlete
completely rests.
EXAMINING THE INJURED
STRUCTURE
Following a thorough injury history, the practi-
tioner may have formulated a provisional list of
differential diagnoses. This process is assisted by
observation of the injured site and adjacent struc-
tures. Marked swelling, bruising and erythema
often accompany acute injuries, whereas in
chronic injuries these signs may be minimal or
absent. Observation of adjacent structures is
useful to gauge the level of any swelling or to
determine deformity. Unilateral injuries should
always be visually compared with the asympto-
matic side. This will require having the athlete
prone when the injury is on the posterior surface
such as with Achilles tendon injuries.
From the history and visual inspection the
practitioner should be able to identify the
potential injured anatomical structures. The
next phase of the examination will be to indi-
vidually isolate the structures and then apply
stress to them in a controlled manner. The appli-
cation of stress should be gradually increased
until the athlete's symptoms are reproduced.
Stress is initially applied by gentle and then firm
Tibial stress fracture Chronic compartment syndrome
Bone Muscle compartment
Focal Diffuse
Intense ache Tightness, fullness, cramping
Constant, made Induced by exercise,
worse by exercise immediate relief with rest
 392 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
---,--------

palpation. The level of pressure required when
palpating the area is determined by the tissue
type and depth. Deep dense structures such as
tendon or bone will require firmer pressure than
more superficial structures or those that are less
dense such as muscle or ligament.
Movement of the injured structure should also
be performed. This should initially be passive,
with the practitioner directing the movement. If
this is pain-free, the patient should be directed to
move the structure actively with no resistance
applied. In the majority of sports injuries both of
these types of movements are unlikely to cause
pain. The next step is to apply active resistance to
the movement. This should first be performed
with concentric contraction and then eccentric if
the first movement did not induce symptoms.
These contractions should be held for between 10
and 20 seconds. In the majority of cases resisted
eccentric or concentric contraction will induce
symptoms.
The method of achieving the greatest stress is
to have the athlete perform dynamic or func-
tional exercises: examples of these movements
are double or single knee squats to stress the
patellofemoral joint and the single leg tiptoe test
to stress the posterior tibial tendon or have the
athlete go up and down on their forefoot with the
heel over the edge of a stair to stress the Achilles
tendon. A dynamic functional assessment should
be included in any orthopaedic examination. For
the athlete with a sports injury this may require
the practitioner to observe the athlete's sporting
technique in addition to normal static stance and
gait analysis. Many of these sporting movements
can be performed in a relatively small space or
on a treadmill. Occasionally, a practitioner may
have to go and observe the athlete in his natural
sporting environment.
Specialist investigations
As with any investigation, specialist tests should
only be performed if the results may change the
treatment plan. Specialist investigations in sports
medicine are primarily used to assist in diagnos-
ing and grading the severity of an injury. A
summary of the various tests and the common
sports injuries they may be used to diagnose is
given in Table 15.4. X-ray remains the mainstay
diagnostic test for osseous pathology and MRI or
ultrasound for soft tissue pathology. A number of

Table 15.4 Specialist investigations used in sports injury assessment

Investigation Main uses Common sports injuries diagnosed

X-ray Articular and osseous Fractures, ligament ruptures or laxity,

Computed tomography (CT)
Magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI)
Nuclear bone scanning
Ultrasound
Intracompartmental pressure
studies
Nerve conduction studies
Arteriography/venography
pathology
Osseous, especially cortical
pathology
Tendon, ligament, muscle,
cartilage, bone marrow pathology
Abnormal bone activity
Tendon, ligament, muscle,
fascial pathologies
Muscle/fascial pathology
Nerve pathology
Arterial and venous pathology
osteochondral defects, osteochondritides
Stress fractures, cartilage tears, osteochondral
defects
Tendonopathies, ligament injuries, muscle tears,
cartilage tears, stress fractures, osteochondral
defects
Stress fractures, medial tibial stress syndrome,
osteochondritides
Tendonopathies, plantar fasciitis
Compartment syndromes
Exercise-related nerve entrapments
Effort-induced deep vein thrombosis, arterial
entrapment syndromes

----------------------------------------------------, - - - ,
conditions such as stress fractures, osteochondral
defects and the osteochondritides may be diag-
nosed by several different modalities. In these
cases the choice of modality will depend upon
the injury history, and the cost and access of the
modalities.
Injury grading systems
As with many pathologies, sports Injuries are
often graded by their severity. These classification
systems are primarily used to direct treatment
protocols. As an example, grade one ankle sprains
are treated differently from grade three sprains.
Grading systems are also useful when communi-
cating with other health care practitioners in the
sports medicine team about the patient. They can
also be used to help explain the nature of the
pathology to the athlete or coach. Grading
systems may describe an injury to a tissue type
such as ligament, bone or tendon, or be specific to
a certain injury such as posterior tibial tendon
dysfunction, osteochondral talar defects or
Achilles tendon injuries. The grading systems for
muscle and ligament injuries and tendonitis are
given in Table 15.5.
SUMMARY
The practitioner should involve the patient as
much as possible in the assessment process.
Table 15.5 Grading systems for ligament injuries and tendonitis
Grade Ligament injuries Tendonitis
One Stretching of the ligament Pain after exercise
without macroscopic tears
Two Partial macroscopic tear Pain pre- and post-exercise, pain
reduced during exercise
Three Complete rupture Pain before, during and after exercise
Four Constant pain and volume of
exercise reducing
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 393
Athletes are often well educated in their area of
sport and this can greatly assist the practitioner.
Likewise, the practitioner must educate the
patient, as this will play a crucial role in the
success of the treatment. The majority of sports
injury treatments require the athlete to follow
specific advice or instructions. Compliance is
intricately linked to understanding so the practi-
tioner must educate the athlete about the injury
and the purpose of any treatment.
A structured holistic approach is essential in
the assessment of the sports patient. The practi-
tioner should develop a logical assessment
scheme that meets the patient's and his own
needs in whatever assessment environment
they are working in. The successful treatment of
lower limb sports injuries requires the practi-
tioner to assimilate knowledge from areas as
diverse as sports psychology, exercise physiol-
ogy and sports biomechanics. This knowledge
will assist in the diagnosis of the injury risk
factors. Identification of these intrinsic and
extrinsic risk factors should form the main focus
of the assessment. Diagnosis of the injury itself
requires detailed knowledge of the regional
anatomy and common sports injuries that affect
the lower limb. Athletes with chronic overuse
injuries can be very difficult to treat. The assess-
ment principles outlined in this chapter are
designed to help the practitioner meet these
management challenges.
Muscle tears
Minimal tear with no loss of strength
Macroscopic tear with loss of
strength
Complete tear with no function
 394 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
REFERENCES
Almeida S A, Trone D W, Leone D M, Shaffer R A, Patheal
S L, Long K 1999 Gender differences in musculoskeletal
injury rates: a function of symptom reporting. Medicine
and Science in Sport and Exercise 31(12): 1807-1812
Anderson B, Burke E R 1994 Scientific, medical, and
practical aspects of stretching. In: Delee J C, Drez D (eds)
Orthopaedic sports medicine, Vol 1. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Beck B 1998 Tibial stress injuries: an aetiological review for
the purposes of guiding management. Sports Medicine
26(4): 265-279
Bennell K L, Malcolm S A, Thomas S A et al1996 Risk
factors for stress fractures in track and field athletes: a 12
month prospective study. American Journal of Sports
Medicine 24: 810-818
Bowers K D, Martin R B 1976 Turf toe: a shoe surface related
football injury. Medicine and Science of Sports 8: 81-83
Bradshaw C 2000 Exercise related lower leg pain: vascular.
Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise S34-36
Brukner P, Bennell K, Matheson G 1999 Stress fractures.
Blackwell Science, Oxford
Bruns W, Maffulli N 2000 Lower limb injuries in children in
sports clinics. Sports Medicine 19: 637-662
Cantu R, Micheli L (eds) 1991 American College of Sports
Medicine guidelines for the team physician. Lea &
Febiger, Philadelphia
Cavanagh P R, Kram R 1990 Stride length in distance
running. Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise
21(4): 467-479
Colville M R 1998 Surgical treatment of the unstable ankle.
Journal of the American Academy of Orthopaedic
Surgeons 6: 368-377
Cook S D, Kester M A, Brunet M E 1985 Shock absorbing
characteristics of running shoes. American Journal of
Sports Medicine 13: 248-253
Dalton S E 1992 Overuse injuries in adolescent athletes.
Sports Medicine 13(1): 58-70
Friberg 0 1982 Leg length asymmetry in stress fractures: a
clinical and radiological study. Journal of Sports
Medicine 22: 485-488
Gardner L I, Dziados J E, Jones B H et al 1988 Prevention of
lower extremity stress fractures: a controlled trial of a
shock absorbent insole. American Journal of Public
Health 78: 1563-1567
Gerrard D F 1993 Overuse injury and growing bones: the
young athlete at risk. British Journal of Sports Medicine
27(1): 14-18
Griffin L Y 1994 The female athlete. In: Delee J C, Drez D
(eds) Orthopaedic sports medicine Vol 1. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Herring K 1993 Injury prediction among runners.
Preliminary report on limb dominance. Journal of
American Podiatric Medical Association 83(9): 523-528
Hreljac A, Marshall R N, Hume P A 2000 Evaluation of lower
extremity overuse injury potential in runners. Medicine
and Science in Sports and Exercise 32: 1635-1641
James S 1, Bates B T, Osternig L R 1978 Injuries to runners.
American Journal of Sports Medicine 6: 40-50
Jones B H, Vogel J A, Manikowski R et al1988 Incidence of
and risk factors for injury and illness among male and
female army basic trainees. US Army Research Institute
of Environmental Medicine technical report T19-88
Knapik J J, Jones B H, Bauman C L, McArthur-Harris J 1992
Strength, flexibility and athletic injuries. Sports Medicine
14(5): 277-288
McKenzie D C, Clement D B, Taunton J E 1985 Running
shoes, orthotics and injuries. Sports Medicine 2: 324-327
Marks R M 1999 Achilles' tendonopathy. Foot and Ankle
Clinics 4(4): 789-809
Myburgh K H, Grobler N, Noakes T D 1988 Factors
associated with shin soreness in athletes. Physician and
Sports Medicine 16: 129-134
Neely F 1998 Intrinsic risk factors for exercise-related lower
limb injuries. Sports Medicine 26(4): 253-263
Nicholl J P, Coleman B A, Williams B T 1991 Pilot study of
the epidemiology of sports injuries and exercise related
morbidity. British Journal of Sports Medicine 25(1):
61-66
Nigg B M, Yeadon M R 1987 Biomechanical aspects of
playing surfaces. Journal of Sports Science 5: 117-145
Pope R P, Herbert R D, Kirwan J D 1998 Effects of flexibility
and stretching on injury risk in army recruits. Australian
Journal of Physiotherapy 44: 165-172
Pope R P, Herbert R D, Kirwan J D, Graham J B 2000 A
randomized trial of pre-exercise stretching for the
prevention of lower limb injury. Medicine and Science in
Sport and Exercise 32(2): 271-277
Protzman R, Griffis C 1977 Stress fractures in men and
women undergoing military training. American Journal
of Bone and Joint Surgery 59(6): 825
Richie D, Devries H, Endo C 1993 Shin muscle activity and
sports surfaces: an electromyographic study. Journal of
American Podiatric Medical Association 83(4): 181-189
Ross J, Woodward A 1994 Risk factors for injury during
basic military training: is there a social element in injury
pathogenesis. Journal of Occupational Medicine 36:
1120-1126
Rossiter N, Galbraith K 1996 The incidence of
hypermobility in a military population (abstract).
Meeting of the Combined Services Orthopaedic Society,
Aldershot, UK, 165
Strocchi R, DePasquale V, Guizzardi S et al1991 Human
Achilles tendon: morphological and morphometric
variations as a function of age. Foot and Ankle 12: 100-104
Tomten S E, Falch J A, Birkeland K I et al1998 Bone mineral
densities and menstrual irregularities: a comparative
study on cortical and trabecular bone structures in
runners with alleged normal eating behavior.
International Journal of Sports Medicine 19: 92-97
Walsh W M 1994 Patellofemoral joint. In: Delee J C, Drez 0
(eds) Orthopaedic sports medicine Vol 2. W B Saunders,
Philadelphia
Witvrouw E, Lysons R, Bellemans J, Combier D, Vander
Straeton G 2000 Intrinsic risk factors for the development
of anterior knee pain in an athletic population. American
Journal of Sports Medicine 28: 480-489

FURTHER READING
Brukner P, Khan K 1993 Clinical sports medicine. McGraw-
Hill, Sydney
Brukner P, Bennell K, Matheson G 1999 Stress fractures.
Blackwell Science, Victoria
Delee J C, Drez D (eds) 1994 Orthopaedic sports medicine,
Vols 1-3. W B Saunders, Philadelphia
ASSESSMENT OF THE SPORTS PATIENT 395
Hartley A 1995 Practical joint assessment: lower quadrant.
2nd edn, Mosby, St Louis
Nicholas J A, Hershman E B 1995 The lower extremity and
spine in sports medicine. Mosby, St Louis
Subotnick S (ed) 1999 Sports medicine of the lower
extremity, Vol 2. Churchill Livingstone, New York
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 397
Factors to consider when assessing 397
Examination of the patient with foot pain 398
Measurement and assessment of pain 398
The painful foot
Tools of assessment - how do we score pain? 399
W. Turner
CAUSES OF PAIN IN THE FOOT 403
R. Ashford*
Articular and bone conditions 403
Osteoarthritis (OA) 403
Footballer's ankle 404
Osteochondritis dissecans(ankls/talocrural joint) 405
Hallux rigidus 406
Accessory ossicles 407
Stress fractures 408
Subungual exostosis 408
Tarsal coalition 409
Metatarsalgia 410
Sesamoiditis 411
Tumours 411
INTRODUCTION
Soft tissue, tendons and ligaments 412
Tendonitis 412 Before embarking on a description of conditions
Subluxing peroneal tendons 413 that affect the foot and can cause pain it is impor-
Chronic ankle sprain 413 tant to have a working knowledge of the concept
Sinus tarsi syndrome 414
Compartment syndrome 414 of pain: how it manifests, how it is measured and
assessed, other indicators of pain and current
Nerves 415 thought regarding the treatment of pain.
Tarsal tunnel syndrome 415
Other entrapments 416 Why do we need to measure pain? Pain in the
Peripheral neuropathy 417 foot has plagued mankind for as long as humans
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma) 417 have existed. As practitioners it is only relatively
Skin and subcutaneous tissues 418 recently that the importance of monitoring foot
Retrocalcaneal bursitis 418 pain has been recognised. Previously we may
Heel pad syndrome 419 have asked the patient 'how' their pain was pro-
Plantar fasclitis 419
Soft tissue masses or tumours 420 gressing between treatments; however, rarely did
we chart this most important aspect of patient
General 420 management. Needless to say, as practitioners we
Crystal arthritis 420
Hereditary and motor sensory neuropathy 421 need to chart and monitor all aspects of treat-
Infection 422 ment intervention so as to provide the informa-
Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD) 423 tion to compare single patients as well as groups
Referred pain 424
of patients. This, in turn, gives the practitioner
Summary 424 the facility to monitor the progress of individual
patients as well as objective data to validate new
treatment regimens.

Factors to consider when assessing

It is essential to recognise that pain is subjective.
Only the person experiencing the pain knows
how it feels, its intensity, location and the restric-
tion it places on their lives. 'Pain is whatever the
experiencing person says it is, existing whenever
"The editors wish to acknowledge the work of David Tollafield. This chapter is based on his
work in the previous edition.

397
 398 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
the experiencing person says it does' (McCaffery
& Beeke 1989).
A simple illustration of a misconception of a
painful foot is when a healthy patient seeks treat-
ment for what looks like the tiniest corn on the fifth
toe. The patient complains of severe pain, finds it
difficult to walk and complains of throbbing when
the bed clothes are pressing on it. Compare this to
the frail patient who presents with heavy callosi-
ties over the first and fifth metatarsals and with
deep-seated corns located beneath. The patient
complains of moderate pain from the lesions.
Practitioners may intuitively select the frail patient
as the one suffering the most pain. Is this assess-
ment justified? With any assessment it is important
to remember that pain is relative; it is a very indi-
vidual thing and it is important to distinguish
between bias and inaccuracy.
Studies have shown that practitioners find it
difficult to assess pain accurately and to assess
the degree of pain experienced by the patient
(Sutherland et al 1988). Such inaccuracies can in
some way be overcome by the use of validated
and reliable clinical tools dedicated to the assess-
ment of pain. However, clinical tools must be
seen as an adjunct to patient assessment of pain
and not a panacea. It is suggested that a clinical
picture is built up before undertaking charting of
pain levels. As discussed in Chapter 3, it is
important to consider the following:
• What eases or aggravates the pain?
• At what time of the day is it worse?
• Is the pain constant or intermittent?
• What type of medication is the patient taking?
• What is the previous medical history and
history of injury?
Examination of the patient with foot
pain
Your first observation should be to look at the
patient, not the foot. It is useful to highlight those
traits that have been discussed under medical
history (Ch. 5) as the source of pain may be
explained by general disease processes. Assess
the patient's attitude. This may reveal psycholog-
ical variations from normal and may influence
the outcome in terms of treatment.
Pointers concerning general health include:
• Does the patient look well?
• Is the patient well nourished (obese or thin
and wasted)?
• Colour (pale and anaemic, jaundiced)?
• Look at the hands, are they misshapened
(rheumatoid arthritis)?
The physical examination may reveal findings
that raise concerns. For example, a manual
worker who has thick calluses on his hands, yet
says he cannot work because of the pain in his
foot, may be less than fully honest.
Examination of the foot begins with watching
the patient walk (Ch. 8). An antalgic limp, where
the patient will spend only a short period of time
on the painful foot, is a clear positive sign. The
limp may be linked with other problems associ-
ated with proximal joints or the back; these
should be excluded. Look at shoe wear on the
sole; this may indicate an abnormal gait pattern.
Are the toes severely clawed, suggesting a neu-
rological problem? It is important to note any cal-
losities, both dorsally and on the sole, as these
indicate areas of high pressure and friction.
Similarly, one must remember all the structures
running under any area of tenderness.
The sources of pain are numerous (Table 16.1)
and can be subdivided for convenience into
problems affecting different tissues, generalised
disorders and referred pain. The table provides
an overview of typical problems associated with
the painful foot. In many cases the origins are not
clear and assessment and investigations are nec-
essary to isolate the cause.
Measurement and assessment of pain
Measurement and assessment of pain is an inte-
gral part of the assessment and treatment plan-
ning process. It gives the practitioner
information regarding the patient's readiness for
treatment, the focus of the appropriate interven-
tion and a quantifiable measure of the disrup-
tiveness of the problem.
With pain being such a personal experience,
many measures of pain are based on patient self-
reports. More objective measurements of pain
 THE PAINFUL FOOT 399

Table 16.1 Sources of pain classified under tissue types. Table 16.1 (Cont'd)
The table provides an overview of typical problems
associated with the painful foot. In many cases the origins Condition Aetiology
are not clear and assessment and investigations are
necessary to isolate the cause Skin and subcutaneous
Retrocalcaneal bursitis Repetitive injury/mechanical
Condition Aetiology rheumatoid
Articular and bone Heel pad Obesity/occupational referred
from back
Osteoarthritis General degeneration
Plantar fasciitis Repetitive injury,
Footballer's ankle Chronic injury biomechanical
Osteochondritis dissecans Chronic injury Onychocryptosis Iatrogenic/congenital
Hallux rigidus General degeneration Plantar warts Infective
Toe deformities Congenital and acquired Callosity/corns Biomechanical/deformity/
Accessory ossicles Congenital/injury endocrine/footwear design
Stress fractures Repetitive injury Ulcers Vascular/infective/trau matic/
Subungual exostosis Repetitive injury dermatological/neoplastic
Exostoses Injury/dislocation/
biomechanical
Tarsal coalition Congenital
Metatarsalgia General degeneration/referred/ tend to rely on a single dimension - namely, pain
multifactorial/rheumatoid intensity. These measures tend to focus on three
Sesamoiditis Repetitive injury/degenerative aspects of pain: physical, functional and behav-
Bony or cartilaginous Neoplastic metastasis, ioural. Physical pain can be measured in terms of
tumours primary or secondary
intensity, location or physical symptoms.
Periosteal/joint Infective/neoplastic metabolic/
autoimmune reactive
Functional measurements of pain rely on assess-
ing such things as walking distance or activity
Soft tissue
levels, whereas behavioural aspects are more
Tendonitis
Subluxing peroneal }
difficult to assess and include assessing patients'
tendons Most of these are associated behaviour towards protecting the affected
Chronic ankle sprain with injury painful area or assessing the abnormal gait which
Compartment syndrome
may have developed because of the pain. Other
Sinus tarsi Degenerative/trauma or
rheumatoid manifestation measurements of pain include multidimensional
Nodules Dermatological/rheumatoid analyses. Such tools attempt to assess pain in a
Ganglia/cysts number of different dimensions. They tend to use
Nerves multiple visual analogue or number ranking
Tarsal tunnel Degenerative/biomechanical scales. Listed below is a selection of single and
Peripheral neuropathies Metabolic/endocrine/proximal multidimensional pain assessment tools.
entrapment or trauma
Interdigital neuromata Repetitive injury and (Morton's)
degenerative Tools of assessment - How do we
Hereditary and motor Congenital with hereditary score pain?
sensory neuropathies predisposition
(HMSN) V~ualana0guesca~s
Radicular pain Lumbar referred pain
Visual analogue scales (VAS) are used to measure
Vascular pain, treatment satisfaction and other related
Peripheral vascular disease Socioenvironmental/endocrine treatment interventions. The main advantages of
and metabolic
this measure are that it is quick, easy to adminis-
Acute embolism Secondary to other factors,
e.g. atherosclerosis ter, cheap and easily attached to any patient
Buerger's disease Ethnic and social factors record card. The disadvantages are that these
predispose to manifestation scales only measure one dimension of pain, give
 400 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
a single reading and misinterpretation of the
scoring mechanism, particularly among the
elderly, who frequently mark the wrong place or
misinterpret the scoring continuum. The VAS
consists of a 10 cm line that ranges from 'no pain'
to 'worst possible pain'. Patients are asked to
mark on the line their reported level of pain (Fig.
16.1). Another form of VAS can be presented as a
pain thermometer (Fig. 16.2).
Verbal scales
On similar lines, the simple verbal scales (VS) cat-
egorise pain into discrete groups such as mild
pain, moderate pain, severe pain or worst pain.
Again, these can be presented to the patient in a
linear fashion (Fig. 16.3). Patients are then
instructed to circle the most appropriate descriptor
of pain. One major advantage, like all scale mea-
surements of this nature, is that they are cheap to
administer; another major advantage is that each
No Worst
pain possible
pain
Figure 16.1 A visual analogue scale 10 em in length.
Worst
possible
pain
No pain
Figure 16.2 Another form of the visual analogue scale can
be presented as a pain thermometer.
descriptor is a discrete item, and therefore patients
are only allowed to choose one. The main disad-
vantage revolves around the type of data that can
be extrapolated from measurements of this kind.
One way round this problem is to give each of the
descriptors a number, so that the data collected
can then be analysed as nominal data (see Ch. 4).
Questionnaires
A multidimensional pain tool, the McGill Pain
Questionnaire (MPQ) (Melzack 1975) was
devised in Canada and contains sets of words
that are used to quantify pain levels. The full
questionnaire consists of 78 adjectives arranged
into 20 groups. The groups are set out to reflect
similar pain qualities. The advantage of such a
comprehensive verbal descriptive scale is that it
offers patients the opportunity to describe their
pain on a number of dimensions; for example, it
endorses both emotional and sensory descrip-
tors. The MPQ is a comprehensive reliable multi-
dimensional pain assessment tool. It has been
extensively tested in the clinical arena for both
reliability and validity and consistently scores
well in these domains. The major disadvantage,
especially in a busy clinic, is the length of time
the questionnaire takes to complete. It is there-
fore not ideal for continual use in monitoring
chronic pain, and a short version of the MPQ has
been developed which is easy to administer and
can be repeated easily at short return dates.
~ .. ' . ' W "npra.
I I l
No Mild Moderate Severe Worst
pain pain pain pain pain
OR
No pain
Mild pain
Moderate pain
Severe pain
Worst pain
Figure 16.3 Examples of verbal scales.

A similar and briefer pain scale is the 52-item
West Haven-Yale multidimensional pain inven-
tory (WHYMPI). This scale is specifically based
on cognitive behavioural models of pain behav-
iour and is used mainly for chronic pain monitor-
ing. It comprises three parts: the impact of pain on
the patient's life, the patients' perception of the
response of others to their communication of pain
and suffering and their levels of participation in
daily life. The major advantages compared with
the long PMQ are that this tool is much quicker to
administer and it gives a rounder picture of the
patient's distress in relation to pain.
Two further tools are worth noting: the
Wisconsin brief pain inventory and the pain per-
ception profile developed by Tursky and col-
leagues. Again, both are quicker to administer
than the MPQ and have a number of disease-
specific advantages when assessing pain.
Observational techniques
Although not particularly relevant to painful foot
management, but included for completeness, a
short description of this technique is outlined. As
the name suggests this technique involves the
practitioner recording observed patient pain
levels. This might include time spent resting, med-
ication used, sleep patterns and verbal! motor
pain behaviour. These techniques are notoriously
difficult and unreliable because precisely defined
behaviours are required and staff are then
required to score these subjective behaviours.
These techniques are particularly useful in the
assessment of patients with severe learning dis-
abilities or communication problems.
Physiological measures
Unfortunately, little use of physiological moni-
toring of pain has been reported in the clinical
setting. Researchers have attempted to measure
autonomic function or disease activity as ana-
logues for the experience of pain. The results
from these studies and similar work is equivocal
and suggest that at present physiological mea-
sures of pain are unreliable and really should not
be considered for monitoring purposes.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 401
Related measurement tools
As well as measuring pain, many of the generic
tools currently available also assess quality of life
(QoL) issues. It is arguable that pain, particularly
in relation to foot health (see below), cannot be
seen in isolation. Other measurements of disease
have to be considered when assessing and moni-
toring patients' health status. Therefore, coupled
with pain measurement and assessment, another
important dimension has entered the patient
assessment arena. It has become increasingly clear
that one cannot separate a patient's pain from
their current QoL. Quality of life, in this context,
can be defined as 'the impact of disease and treat-
ment on disability and daily living or a patient-
based focus on the impact of a perceived health
state on the ability to lead a fulfilling life' (Price
1996). In this context, tools such as the sickness
impact profile (SIP) have been introduced. Not
designed specifically for the measurement of pain,
this tool assesses the effect of certain treatment
interventions in relation to quality of life. It is
designed to look at aspects of activities of daily life
affected by chronic low-level sickness.
Finally, other related tools have been devised,
again not specifically to measure and assess pain
but to quantify the extent of a patient's health
status. Included in such tools are measures of
dimensions such as mobility, physical activity,
dependency and pain. A good example of such a
generic measurement scale is the Arthritis Impact
Measurement Scales (AIMS). As the name sug-
gests, this tool was specifically designed to assess
how a designated disease impacts on the ability
of a patient to function in daily life.
The short form-36 (SF-36) is also worth a
mention in this context. This particular question-
naire was devised from the Rand health batteries
(Stewart & Ware 1992). The SF-36 includes in
its eight dimensions: physical function, social
functioning, role limitations due to emotional
problems, mental health, energyIvitality, pain
and general health perceptions. Also included is
a single item about perceptions of health changes
over the past 12 months. There are many more
examples of these health status tools: some are
disease-specific and others are much more
 402 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

Instructions: The line next to each item represents the amount of pain you typically had in each situation.
On the left is "No pain" and on the far right is "Worst pain imaginable." Place a mark on the line to indicate
how bad your foot pain was in each of the following situations during the past week.
If you were not involved in one or more of these situations mark them as NA.
Questions: How severe was your foot pain:

1. At its worst?
2. Before you get up in the morning?
3. When you walked barefoot?
4. When you stood barefoot?
5. When you walked wearing shoes?
6. When you stood wearing shoes?
7. When you walked wearing orthotics?
8. When you stood wearing orthotics?
9. At the end of the day?

Figure 16.4 The Foot Function Index pain subscale.

generic. If such tools are to be considered the
practitioner is well advised to check the reliabil-
ity and validity of the selected measuring tools in
the context of the condition they are proposing to
monitor (Bowling 1995).
Foot specific (pain) questionnaires
The pain tools described above are generic and not
specific to the foot. They are useful and have been
used in clinical settings and a selection of research
studies. A foot-specific pain scale that is reliable
and valid has yet to be developed. The develop-
ment of the Foot Function Index (FFI) by
Budiman-Mak et al (1991) marked the first attempt
to measure foot dysfunction. The index is split into
three discrete sections: foot pain (Fig. 16.4), dis-
ability and activity restriction. The pain section of
FFI consists of nine questions that address the
severity of the pain experienced during specific
circumstances. A study by Saag et al (1996) demon-
strated the reliability of this section (pain) of the
FFI in relation to arthritic foot pain. Being easy to
administer and foot-specific, the pain section of the
FFI is well worth considering in the clinical arena.
Another foot-specific questionnaire worth con-
sidering for foot monitoring is the Foot Health
Status Questionnaire (FHSQ) developed at
Queensland University of Technology, Australia.
This tool was developed to measure foot health
related quality of life. Although not pain-specific,
this tool includes pain as an indicator in one of
the three subsections. In the section including
pain there are a further three hypothesised
domains of foot health: namely, foot function,
footwear and general foot health (Table 16.2)
(Bennett & Patterson 1998). Bennett et al (1998)
demonstrated the validity of this tool in their
study and concluded that a tool such as this
could be used by researchers and practitioners to
identify changes to foot health status as a result
of different interventions (remember this is one
of the key points when monitoring pain). It is
short and easy to administer, particularly in the
clinical setting; it can also be administered by a
postal survey. One of the major disadvantages in
relation to pain monitoring is that this tool incor-
porates pain as a dimension of foot health. As a
consequence, pain per se cannot be analysed sep-
arately using this tool.
 THE PAINFUL FOOT 403

• Inflammatory arthropathies such as rheumatoid

CAUSES OF PAIN IN THE FOOT
ARTICULAR AND BONE
CONDITIONS
Osteoarthritis (OA)
Degenerative arthritis may affect any of the joints
of the foot and ankle. The joints most commonly
affected are the ankle, subtalar, calcaneocuboid,
talonavicular, first tarsometatarsal and first
metatarsophalangeal joint (MTPJ). The first MTPJ
will be considered separately under the heading
of hallux rigidus.
Aetiology
This may be primary with no known cause but,
while such arthritis is common in the hip and
knee, it is rare in the ankle. Far more commonly
OA is secondary to some insult to the joint and
may follow major injury, such as a fracture
extending into the joint, a dislocation or repeated
minor trauma. Fractures of the neck of the talus
may also lead to OA of the ankle. Other causes
can include:
• Infection in the joint. Septic arthritis, unless
diagnosed and treated early, will lead to lysis
of cartilage and secondary OA.
arthritis (RA) and the seronegative
arthritides, e.g. psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's
disease and ankylosing spondylitis.
• Metabolic disorders such as gout and
pseudogout.
• Systemic diseases such as diabetes mellitus,
which can lead to Charcot foot or ankle; the
ankle is affected in about 10% of Charcot
foot cases.
• Proximal malalignmeni, e.g. following a
malunited fractured tibia, has frequently been
stated to lead to arthritis by imposing
abnormal stresses on distal joints. While some
authors have allowed up to 10° in the sagittal
or frontal plane (Nicoll 1964), others have felt
that even a few degrees of angulation may
lead to significant problems (Johnson 1987).
Merchant disputed this in a long-term follow-
up study when he could find no correlation
between the degree of malunion and the
occurrence of OA (Merchant & Dietz 1989).
• Other miscellaneous conditions such as
haemophilia or avascular necrosis (Freiberg's
disease affecting second metatarsal head).
Presenting symptoms
Generally these will be pain and stiffness in the
area of the affected joint. Symptoms may start as

Table 16.2 The four basic domains of foot health as evaluated by the Foot Health Status Questionnaire (FHSQ)

Domain No. of items Theoretical Meaning of Meaning of

construct lowest score (0) highest score (100)

Foot pain 4 Evaluation of foot pain
in terms of type of pain,
severity and duration
Foot function 4 Evaluation of feet in terms
of impact on physical
function
Footwear 3 Lifestyle issues related
to footwear and feet
General foot 2 Self-perception of feet
health (individual's subjective
assessment of body
image related to feet)
Extreme and significant
foot pain that is acute
in nature
Severely limited in performing
a broad range of physical
activities because of feet:
limited in walking, working
and moving about
Extremely limited in access
to suitable footwear
Generally perceives feet
to be in a poor state of
health and identifies poor
condition of feet
No pain or discomfort in any
part of the foot
Can perform all desired
physical activities: walking,
working and climbing stairs
No problems with obtaining
suitable footwear
Perceives feet to be in an
excellent state of health and
condition
 404 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
aching after exercise and progress of pain after
walking a distance. With time and progression of
the arthritis the distance the patient can walk
without pain gradually reduces. Pain may
become constant and also present at night, dis-
turbing sleep. How much pain the patient is
experiencing is important to know but quantify-
ing pain is difficult, because individual patients
will have different tolerances to pain and differ-
ent attitudes to the degree of their disability.
While one can ask the patient to quantify their
pain on a visual analogue scale of, say, 1-10, it is
function which probably influences us most
when it comes to determining treatment. While
one must beware the stoic who pushes himself
on regardless of the pain (and vice versa), how
much a patient can do is often a good indicator of
how severe the symptoms are. Stiffness may ini-
tially occur after the joint has been rested for a
while, but with time the range of movement in
the affected joint will decrease. Dorsiflexion is
usually the first movement to be lost, and shoes
with a slight heel raise may therefore be more
comfortable. In severe OA the joint may com-
pletely lose movement and become virtually
ankylosed. Patients may also complain of a limp,
swelling or joint deformity.
Signs
The joint may appear swollen or deformed or be
held in an abnormal position. The joint may feel
warm if the underlying cause is infection or an
inflammatory arthropathy, but otherwise not.
An effusion may be present in ankle OA but is
not usually clinically detectable in OA of other
foot joints. Osteophytes may be felt in
superficial joints as hard bony swellings and
represent new bone formation around the
periphery of affected joints. Localised tender-
ness may also be found. The range of movement
of the joint will be reduced, the degree depend-
ing on how advanced the arthritis is, and move-
ment will be painful, more so at extremes. Often
movement may feel 'dry', rather than smooth
and easy. In advanced OA grating or crunching
may be felt by the examiner as the joint is
moved.
Investigations
Plain X-rays, generally standing anteroposterior
(AP for ankle, DP (dorsiplantar) for foot) and
lateral, are essential (Ch. 11). The cardinal signs
of OA are reduced joint space, sclerosis, cysts and
osteophytes (see Fig. 11.27). Standing films are
helpful as they may demonstrate deformity
under load and the true loss of joint space due to
cartilage erosion. Special views may be helpful to
show the subtalar joint; Anthonsen's view shows
the medial and posterior subtalar facets. If infec-
tion is suspected then any open wounds can be
swabbed. Aspiration of the joint to obtain bacte-
riology may be helpful. Results from blood tests
will be normal and are unhelpful unless the OA
is secondary to a systemic disease, infection or
metabolic cause such as gout (Ch. 13). Further to
the discussion on pain it should be noted that the
degree of X-ray change does not always correlate
in a linear fashion with the patient's symptoms
or disability. It is always important to treat the
patient and not the X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
In early OA, when X-rays are normal, a pre-
sumptive diagnosis may be made solely on infor-
mation from the history, symptoms and signs.
Other periarticular causes should be considered
however. In established OA, with X-ray changes,
the differential diagnosis will usually lie in deter-
mining the underlying cause.
Footballer's ankle
Aetiology
This condition was well described by McMurray
in 1950 and occurs in soccer players as a result of
repeated kicking of the ball with the foot held in
equinus (McMurray 1950). In this position the
anterior capsule largely takes the strain, as the
extensor tendons are mechanically disadvan-
taged, and bony traction spurs develop.
Presenting symptoms
These will be pain, often on kicking a stationary
ball, but also on dorsiflexion of the ankle. The

Figure 16.5 X-ray showing footballer's ankle with an
anterior tibial spur - lateral view.
patient may complain of some restriction of
dorsiflexion.
Signs
Local tenderness over the neck of the talus and
anterior tibial margin; pain on dorsiflexion of
the ankle and perhaps some restriction of this
movement.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate a dorsal talar spur
and also a spur on the anterior lip of the tibia.
The spur on the anterior lip of the tibia can be
subtle, appearing as a convex margin rather than
the normal concave one (Fig. 16.5). Both these
spurs are intracapsular, although this may be
difficult to appreciate on a plain X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
This mainly associated with early OA of the
ankle. It should be noted, though, that in a true
footballer's ankle the articular surfaces are
normal when these bony spurs are removed sur-
gically (Case history 16.1).
THE PAINFUL FOOT 405
.... C~se history 16.1
Patient: 24-year-old professional footballer.
Presenting symptoms: 1 year history of pain over
dorsum of the right ankle. This had gradually
increased and was painful especially when running.
There was no history of instability. 3 months
previously the patient had undergone removal of 'bony
spur' by the club doctor, but symptoms had persisted
and he was currently unable to play football.
Signs: Some discomfort on full dorsiflexion but no
discernible loss of movement.
Investigations: Plain X-rays showed osteophytic
lip to anterior margin of right tibia, with evidence of
previous removal of talar spur.
Diagnosis: Partially treated footballer's ankle.
Operative findings: Arthroscopy showed synovitis
of ankle and confirmed osteophytic anterior tibial
margin. This was resected.
Postoperatively the patient made a good recovery
and returned to the first team.
Osteochondritis dissecans
(ankle/talocrural joint)
Aetiology
This is an interesting condition in which an
osteochondral fragment becomes separated from
the talar dome, usually posteromedially or mid-
laterally. It is now thought that all of the lateral
and most of the medial lesions originate from
trauma, probably associated with inversion
injuries of the ankle (De Smet et aI1990).
Presenting symptoms
Because of the aetiology the diagnosis may be
missed acutely and the patient treated for a simple
sprain or malleolar fracture. If, however, symp-
toms persist after adequate treatment of the recog-
nised injury, an osteochondral fracture should be
suspected. Acute symptoms will be those of a
sprained ankle, with the patient complaining of
pain, swelling and difficulty walking. Chronic
symptoms are more general, with patients com-
plaining of discomfort, pain and perhaps stiffness
during or after exercise. If an osteochondral frag-
ment has become detached from the talar dome,
then there may be locking and giving way in the
ankle, suggestive of a loose body.
 406 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Signs
Acute signs will include swelling and tenderness
over the lateral ligament complex with pain on
inversion of the ankle. It may be possible to
locate tenderness over the talar dome midlater-
ally or behind the medial malleolus.
Investigations
AP, lateral and oblique (l0° of medial rotation)
plain X-rays of the ankle should initially be
requested. Lateral lesions classically are shallow,
horizontal and often detached or elevated.
Medial lesions are frequently cup-shaped and
deeper (Canale & Belding 1980), shown by line
drawing in Figure 16.6. In the acute stage X-rays
may appear normal, especially if the lesion is
stage I, i.e. only the articular cartilage is
damaged (Berndt & Harty 1959). Even in a
chronic lesion it may be difficult to detect any
changes on plain X-ray. A bone scan is extremely
useful as it will usually be positive. Magnetic res-
onance imaging (MRI) is the most sensitive, as
well as the most expensive way of demonstrating
Figure 16.6 Osteochondritis dissecans: line drawing of
anterior view of the ankle mortice. Lateral lesions tend to be
horizontal and shallow, medial ones tend to be deeper and
cup-shaped.
the osteochondral fractures. Blood tests are of no
value in the investigation of this condition.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely, this will be the coexistent trauma.
Chronically, it will be other conditions around the
ankle such as anterolateral impingement syn-
drome, tendonitis of any of the tendons crossing
the ankle joint and early GA.
Hallux rigidus
Aetiology
Hallux rigidus is a condition in which
dorsiflexion of the MTPJ of the hallux is restricted
and painful on movement. Plantarflexion may
also be limited but dorsiflexion is the functional
movement affected by the pathology. It may
occur secondary to an osteochondritis dissecans
of the first metatarsal head in adolescents, usually
females. In adults, males tend to predominate and
it can be secondary to a systemic disease such as
RA or gout, but most commonly is primarily due
to a local arthritic degeneration. Various theories
have been advanced for the primary cause, such
as a long first metatarsal and hallux and repeated
minor trauma; patients tend to have pronated,
narrow, long feet with a flat longitudinal arch.
Hallux plexus was a term originally used to
describe hallux rigidus. It is now used in conno-
tation with a severe form where the proximal
phalanx becomes flexed at the MTPJ and the first
metatarsal becomes secondarily elevated.
Presenting symptoms
Intermittent pain in adolescents, who may expe-
rience episodes of acute pain made worse by
walking. Adults present with pain on walking,
stiffness and pain over the dorsal exostosis in
more advanced cases, although lateral joint pain
may be observed as well.
Signs
The hallux is commonly straight and a dorsal
bony prominence, with perhaps a bunion (soft
 THE PAINFUL FOOT 407

bursa swelling), may be found. Locally there may

be some tenderness over the exostosis and
around the first MTPJ. The range of movement
should be assessed with the foot in a plantigrade
position but also in a plantarflexed position. A
grind test, in which the hallux is compressed
longitudinally with rotation, may be painful
where the joint is not stiff. In advanced cases
compensatory secondary hyperextension of the
interphalangeal joint (IPJ) may be found and
commonly there is a callosity on the medial
plantar aspect of the head of the proximal
phalanx or base of the distal phalanx.

Investigations
Plain X-rays of the first MTPJ may be normal or
Figure 16.7 X-ray showing accessory navicular - dorsiplantar
show a dorsal exostosis with a normal-looking view.
joint. In more advanced cases degenerative
changes will be apparent with progressive OA. If
hallux rigidus is due to gout or RA then periar-
ticular erosions may be present with osteoporo-
sis. Blood tests are only indicated if a systemic Presenting symptoms
disease is suspected. The os trigonum causes symptoms with activities
in repeated plantarflexion, affecting football
Differential diagnosis players and dancers standing 'en pointe'.
Patients complain of posterolateral ankle pain
In flexor hallucis longus tenosynovitis, dorsi-
when the ankle is plantarflexed and impinge-
flexion of the hallux may be restricted and painful.
ment occurs. An accessory navicular may cause
Resisted plantarflexion of the hallux will be
rubbing in a shoe, because of local pressure, or
painful and local tenderness may be felt posterior
may become symptomatic following a twisting
to the medial malleolus.
injury to the foot.

Accessory ossicles Signs

Aetiology
There are at least 15 accessory ossicles around the
foot and ankle (Romanowski & Barrington 1991).
Most are anatomical variants in origin (see Fig.
11.18). Only two are rarely likely to cause symp-
toms. Around the hindfoot there is the as
trigonum, on the posterior aspect of the talus
close to the lateral tubercle, and the accessory nav-
icular (Fig. 16.7 and see Fig. 11.19). The type II
accessory navicular is roughly 1 em in size and
united to the main body of the navicular by a
synchondrosis of about 12 mm (Romanowski &
Barrington 1991).
With a symptomatic os trigonum tenderness
may be felt behind the lateral malleolus and
peroneal tendons and forced passive plantar-
flexion of the ankle will be painful. When
an accessory navicular is present there will
be local tenderness in association with a promi-
nent navicular and perhaps pain on resisted
inversion.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate the presence of
accessory ossicles but their presence is not proof
 408 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
------------------------------
of their guilt. A bone scan may help to demon-
strate a symptomatic os trigonum.
Differential diagnosis
A symptomatic os trigonum may be mistaken for
peroneal tendonitis, flexor hallucis longus ten-
donitis or a fracture of the lateral process of the
posterior talar tubercle. A symptomatic accessory
navicular is usually obvious because of local ten-
derness but should not be confused with tibialis
posterior tendonitis.
Stress fractures
Aetiology
Stress fractures occur due to overuse in
unadapted feet or when surgery in the foot leads
to high stresses elsewhere. Fractures have been
reported in groups such as runners, army
recruits and dancers. They may also occur,
though rarely, after first ray surgery, e.g. Keller's
excisional arthroplasty operation, which
increases stresses on the lesser metatarsals. From
whatever cause the most common site is a
metatarsal shaft. Stress fractures have also been
reported in the calcaneus, navicular, cuboid and
proximal phalanx of the hallux.
Presenting symptoms
Pain occurs in relation to activity. Initially it
may be vague and difficult to localise but settles
on rest. With time the patient may complain of a
limp.
Signs
In the early stages there may be little to find on
clinical examination but if activity continues then
local tenderness and swelling will develop. A
limp may be present.
Investigations
Plain X-rays may often be normal in the early
stages and it can be 2-3 weeks before changes
become apparent for metatarsal stress fractures
and up to 5 weeks for calcaneal ones. In the
metatarsal shafts early changes may be a fine
line of bone resorption followed either by scle-
rosis or periosteal callus, depending on whether
the cortex has been breached. In the calcaneum
the fractures tend to occur in the posterior
part and appear as endosteal callus with an
intact cortex on X-ray. Because of the delay in
plain radiographs a bone scan may be helpful if
there is doubt about the diagnosis. Computed
tomography (CT) or magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI) scans may be helpful to show
stress fractures which are difficult to depict on
plain X-ray.
Differential diagnosis
The clinical picture, relation to activity and local
tenderness should point towards the correct
diagnosis. One should beware of metatarsal
'stress fractures' in the diabetic as they may be
the precursor of a Charcot foot.
Subungual exostosis
Aetiology
This is a bony spur usually ansmg from the
dorsomedial aspect of the distal phalanx of the
hallux. Rarely it may arise from the lesser toes. It
is generally a benign osteochondroma, congeni-
tal in origin, and may be noticed from adoles-
cence up to early middle age. There is some
suggestion that those occurring in young adult
athletes may be the result of repetitive minor
trauma inside the shoe.
Presenting symptoms
Patients may notice a swelling under the nail or
may complain of pain on walking or running
with shoes on.
Signs
The nail may be elevated and there may be
a darkish discoloration, resembling a haema-
 THE PAINFUL FOOT 409

toma, apparent under the nail. The distal nail Signs

edge may be elevated, suggesting an enlarged
Stiffness in the subtalar or midtarsal joint move-
distal tuft.
ments is usually the predominant sign. Patients
may also have a valgus flatfoot with subtalar irri-
Investigations tability, characterised by pain on forced
plantarflexion of the ankle joint and some per-
Plain X-rays will show the exostosis. Medial
oneal spasm. In childhood, presentation like this
oblique views are most helpful but DP and
is known as peroneal spastic flatfoot.
lateral may be required to establish the extent of
the projection. As cartilage is not radio-opaque,
the practitioner should not be lulled into think- Investigations
ing that the swelling is small (see Fig. 11.32).
Appropriate plain X-rays may demonstrate a
coalition; DP, lateral and medial oblique films
Differential diagnosis should be taken. Medial oblique views show the
calcaneonavicular coalition (Fig. 16.8). A Harris
A subungual exostosis may be confused with
axial view may show a talocalcaneal coalition.
other conditions, such as a glomus tumour or Dorsal beaking on the head of the talus is a sec-
subungual wart. ondary change to abnormal movement, also
suggesting this type of pathology (Case history
Tarsal coalition 16.2). A long anterior calcaneal process may
indicate a calcaneonavicular coalition, although
Aetiology this coalition is usually well demonstrated on
This is a congenital condition, inherited as an plain films (see Fig. 11.35). If X-rays are not
autosomal dominant trait, in which adjacent tarsal diagnostic then a CT scan in the frontal plane
bones have a fibrous, cartilage or bone connection may confirm the diagnosis.
or bridge which progressively restricts normal
movement. This may be termed syndesmosis,
synchondrosis or synostosis, respectively, and
occurs in less than 1 % of the population (Mosier &
Asher 1984). Generally, it begins as a fibrous union
in infancy and progresses to cartilaginous and
then bony union; however, it may remain fibrous.
The most common coalition is probably talocal-
caneal, followed by calcaneonavicular (Stormont
& Peterson 1983). Although rare, most other pos-
sible combinations have been described.

Presenting symptoms
Although these coalitions usually ossify between
8 and 16, symptoms may not develop until late
childhood or into adulthood. Sometimes patients
never develop symptoms and the diagnosis is
made incidentally. When they do present,
patients may complain of stiffness and ankle
pain where playing sport. They may also com- Figure 16.8 X-ray illustrating calcaneonavicular coalition-
plain of recurrent ankle sprains. medial oblique view.
 410 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
---~----~----~-------------~~~~---------------~
r------------------- -----1
I Case history 16.2
Patient: 25-year-old female.
Presenting symptoms: The patient has a history
of bilateral flat feet since childhood. She was now
getting pain on walking after half a mile which was
interfering with normal living.
Signs: There was a normal range of movement in
both ankle joints but both subtalar joints were rigid;
there was slight decreased range of movement in the
midtarsal joints bilaterally.
Investigations: Plain X-rays showed talar beaking
bilaterally. A CT scan showed bony left talocalcaneal
fusion. On the right there was virtual talocalcaneal
apposition but bony fusion could not be demonstrated
and a fibrous union was surmised.
Diagnosis: Bilateral talocalcaneal tarsal coalition
with secondary arthritic changes in the midtarsal
joints.
Operative: Planned staged triple arthrodeses to
give the patient plantigrade pain-free feet for walking.
Differential diagnosis
Other conditions leading to stiff subtalar or mid-
tarsal joints, such as degenerative or inflamma-
tory arthritis.
Metatarsalgia
Aetiology
Metatarsalgia is characterised by pain felt under
one or more metatarsal heads when weightbear-
ing. It may be due to a number of causes:
• Atrophy of the plantarfat pad with age. This
results in a generalised metatarsalgia because
of loss of the cushioning effect of the fat pad.
• Increased pressure under the lesser metatarsals
following first MTPJ surgery, e.g. for hallux
valgus of Keller's operation.
• Metatarsophalangeal joint problems.
Subluxation or dislocation of the proximal
phalanx may lead to a pistoning effect which
depresses the metatarsal head, increasing its
load. This may occur in inflammatory
arthropathies or in a cavus foot with claw
toes. Claw toes that dorsiflex on the
metatarsal head pull the fat pad forward,
exposing the metatarsal head to greater
loading during stance. Case history 16.3
illustrates the effect of hallux valgus on the
I forefoot.
• A prominent fibular (lateral) condyle on a
metatarsal head may cause a very local plantar
callosity with pain on weightbearing.
• Proximal stiffness of malalignment, e.g. a pes
cavus foot, may lead to excessive loading on
one side of the foot.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain under the ball of the
foot on walking, made worse by walking bare-
foot. Well-padded shoes such as trainers can
reduce symptoms effectively. Patients may also
complain of hard skin continually building up
under the foot, which adds to the general dis-
comfort.
Signs
The main sign is tenderness under the metatarsal
heads on palpation; callosities may be present
under the symptomatic heads, indicating the
increased load. With a prominent fibular condyle
the callosity is small and well-defined and has a
Patient: 58-year-old garage mechanic.
Presenting symptoms: The patient presented
with a large bunion on his left foot and discomfort
under the centre of the ball of his foot on walking.
Signs: A gross hallux valgus was present, along
with pronation of the hallux. There was some callosity
formation under the second and third metatarsal
heads. The rest of the foot was normal.
Investigations: Plain x-rays showed hallux valgus
of 55° with lateral subluxation of the proximal phalanx
at the first MTPJ. Some minor degenerative changes
were present in this joint.
Diagnosis: Gross hallux valgus with secondary
transfer metatarsalgia due to unloading of the first ray.
Operation: Arthrodesis of the first MTPJ to correct
the hallux valgus and allow better weightbearing
through the first ray, thus relieving the transfer
metatarsalgia. Usually a secondary reduction in the
hallux valgus is difficult with realignment (osteotomy)
operations. Postoperatively the patient's symptoms
were relieved.

central keratotic core. This may be described as a
localised intractable plantar keratoma. The other
type of callosity observed will be a diffuse lesion
without a central keratotic core. Prominent
metatarsal heads may be palpated and their
degree of rigidity should be assessed, as should
the mobility of the toes. It is important to access
the mobility of the proximal joints to ensure they
are supple.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate evidence of any
inflammatory arthropathy and any changes in a
metatarsophalangeal joint. If available, dynamic
pressure studies will show the distribution of
pressure under the metatarsal heads. The plain
X-ray view has not been shown to provide an
objective measurement of metatarsal plantar-
flexion in the case of lesser metatarsals.
Differential diagnosis
This lies between the various causes of
metatarsalgia. A wart may cause a plantar cal-
losity but does not normally occur under a
metatarsal head. A Morton's neuroma is com-
monly referred to as Morton's metatarsalgia,
although the pain and tenderness is actually
between metatarsals, radiating into toes (digital
neuritis).
Sesamoiditis
Aetiology
Flexor hallucis brevis inserts into the base of the
proximal phalanx of the hallux and within its
tendons two sesamoid bones lie under the first
metatarsal head. These may give rise to pain if
they become arthritic. This can occur secondary
to hallux rigidus or inflammatory arthropathies
such as rheumatoid arthritis. Chondromalacia-
type changes have also been reported. Rarely,
sesamoids may fracture following trauma
and stress fractures have been reported. Hyper-
trophy of a sesamoid can lead to a painful plantar
callosity.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 411
Presenting symptoms
Pain under the first metatarsal head on weight-
bearing is the main symptom; patients may
notice this particularly on toe-off.
Signs
Tenderness may be localised to one or both
sesamoids. Extension at the first MTPJ may be
limited and painful and a plantar callosity may
be present.
Investigations
A standing DP and lateral X-rays should be
taken and also a skyline view of the sesamoids.
If X-rays are normal a bone scan may be helpful.
Differential diagnosis
Other causes of pain around the first MTPJ, such
as hallux rigidus. The high incidence of bipartite
sesamoids (figures vary from 10 to 30%) may
lead to a false diagnosis of a fracture (Hubay
1949).
Tumours
Aetiology
Bony or cartilaginous tumours are fortunately
rare in the foot. Nevertheless, a number have
been reported, both benign and malignant.
Among the most common benign ones are osteoid
osteoma, enchondroma and osteochondroma. Osteoid
osteomas may occur in the tarsus in the foot,
enchondromas in metatarsals or phalanges and
osteochondromas normally only occur as subun-
gual exostoses (Fig. 16.9). Malignant tumours
reported include osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma
and Ewing's tumour. Osteosarcomas and chon-
drosarcomas have been reported in the tarsus
and metatarsals, Ewing's in the tarsus. Although
a secondary deposit is the most common bony
tumour in the body as a whole, secondaries are
rare in the foot but may occur: if they do, the
most likely primary is a bronchial carcinoma.
 412 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Figure 16.9 Subungual exostosis on dorsum of third toe
with gross nail displacement.
Presenting symptoms
This will depend on the individual tumour.
Osteoid osteomas tend to occur in young adults
and classically give rise to night pain relieved
by aspirin. Enchondromas may cause cortical
thinning of a metatarsal and therefore present
with acute pain from a pathological fracture.
Malignant tumours may present with pain
and/ or swelling.
Signs
These depend on the diagnosis and may vary
from nil to tenderness and swelling from a patho-
logical fracture.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will demonstrate most of these
lesions, showing areas of bone destruction,
expansion or new bone formation. An osteoid
osteoma may be seen as a central nidus with sur-
rounding sclerosis, but can be very difficult to see
and a bone scan may help by showing it as a con-
centrated hot spot. MRI is extremely helpful both
in diagnosis and delineating the extent of a
malignant tumour. Before any definitive treat-
ment is planned a biopsy of the tumour is usually
necessary. As well as imaging bony tumours, a
full blood screen will usually be performed,
along with a chest X-ray and bone scan, unless
the tumour is simple and benign.
Differential diagnosis
The first consideration with any lesion suspected
of being a tumour is whether it is benign or
malignant. Infection should always be consid-
ered as it may sometimes be difficult to differen-
tiate. Although it should not cause any confusion
in diagnosis, an old fracture may sometimes look
suspicious to the untutored eye.
SOFT TISSUE, TENDONS AND
LIGAMENTS
Tendonitis
Aetiology
Peritendonitis may affect any of the tendons
crossing the ankle into the foot but most com-
monly involves the tendo Achilles and tibialis
posterior. Achilles tendonitis occurs usually in
young adults who are joggers or athletes. Tibialis
posterior tenosynovitis (inflammation of its
tendon sheath) normally occurs in late middle
age. Less commonly, tenosynovitis of a peroneal
tendon may occur and in dancers tenosynovitis
of the flexor hallucis longus tendon can occur
where it passes in a groove behind the talus.
Presenting symptoms
Patients with peritendonitis will present with
pain on exercise, usually along the course of the
tendon; they may also notice some swelling. It is
worth enquiring whether they have recently
changed running shoes.
Signs
In Achilles tendonitis the tendon will be painful
to palpation about 5 cm proximal to its distal
insertion; with time, swelling and crepitus may
be found. In tibialis posterior tenosynovitis there
will be tenderness behind the medial malleolus
with pain on resisted inversion and perhaps
passive eversion. It is important to rule out rup-
tured tibialis posterior tendon. In this case the
patient may present with vague pain on the
medial aspect and a spontaneous flat foot. The

hindfoot will be in valgus and the heel will not
invert if the patient stands on tiptoe. When
looked at from behind, the forefoot is abducted,
producing the 'too many toes sign' (Johnson
1983).
For the peroneal tendons, tenderness will be
felt distal to the lateral malleolus, along the
course of the tendons, with pain on inversion
and plantarflexion. Differentiating between
brevis and longus may be difficult; tenderness
on the sole of the foot between the cuboid and
base of the first metatarsal will suggest prob-
lems with peroneus longus. Evert the hindfoot
actively against resistance to clarify such
involvement.
In tenosynovitis of flexor hallucis longus there
will be tenderness posterior to the medial malle-
olus with pain on passive extension of the hallux.
Occasionally, tenderness can be found at the level
of the sesamoids and may cause limitation of
movement at the first MTPJ.
Investigations
Peritendonitis is largely a clinical diagnosis; if
doubt exists then MRI may be helpful in showing
fluid in the tendon sheath. Abolition of the
patient's symptoms by injection of local anaes-
thetic may also be diagnostic.
Differential diagnosis
In Achilles tendonitis it is important not to miss a
rupture. Up to 25% of acute ruptures are missed
(Lutter 1991). Similarly, with tibialis posterior
tenosynovitis, rupture should be looked for.
Tenderness at the insertion may be due to an
accessory navicular.
Subluxing peroneal tendons
Aetiology
The peroneal tendons are held behind the lateral
malleolus by the retinaculum and this may be
ruptured in an acute injury. Following that the
tendons are free to sublux.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 413
Presenting symptoms
The patient may complain of a painful snapping
sensation at the ankle on certain movements.
Signs
There will be tenderness along the peroneal
tendons behind the lateral malleolus and the
tendons may sublux anteriorly with resisted
eversion and dorsiflexion.
Investigations
Again, this is mainly a clinical diagnosis but if
doubt exists then a peroneal tenogram may show
dye leakage, indicating a torn retinaculum.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely with a sprained ankle and more chroni-
cally with peroneal tenosynovitis.
Chronic ankle sprain
Aetiology
Chronic lateral pain following an acute inversion
injury of the ankle is common, being reported in
up to 50% of some patient groups (Ferkel et al
1991). This may be due to residual instability,
causing recurrent sprains, but most commonly is
due to soft tissue impingement in the lateral
gutter. The initial sprain leads to inflammation,
synovitis and then scar tissue and fibrosis.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain over the anterolateral
aspect of the ankle on walking, and often weak-
ness and a feeling of giving way.
Signs
Tenderness is present over the anterolateral
gutter of the ankle. Ankle and subtalar joint
movement is usually normal. Instability should
be carefully looked for. Clinically, this is done by
comparing inversion between the two ankles and
 414 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
doing an anterior drawer test. In this test the
patient lies supine with the knee flexed and the
examiner sits on the patient's foot to stabilise it.
The tibia is then pushed back on the talus.
Instability is shown by excessive movement by
comparison to the other ankle. A clunking sensa-
tion may be elicited sometimes. This may be a
difficult test to do without the patient fully
relaxed under a general anaesthetic.
Investigations
Plain X-rays are usually normal but may show
small bony spurs or calcification. Stress X-rays
for instability will be normal. A bone scan may
show mildly increased uptake and is only useful
in excluding other causes of pain. MRI is the only
tool which can show increased soft tissue in the
lateral gutter.
Differential diagnosis
Other local causes of pain should be excluded,
such as an osteochondral fracture, peroneal
tendon problems and arthritis of the ankle joint.
Sinus tarsi syndrome
Aetiology
This condition was first described in 1958 by
O'Connor, but has remained somewhat nebulous
(O'Connor 1958). It follows a sprained ankle
which does not resolve in the normal time and
may be due to degeneration of the fatty soft
tissue in the sinus tarsi. Although such changes
have been shown, in O'Connor's original series
of 14 patients treated operatively histology of
excised tissue was normal. Some practitioners
consider that the condition represents a mild
form of subtalar instability.
Presenting symptoms
The patient will complain of chronic pain, situ-
ated laterally, following a sprained ankle.
Signs
Apart from tenderness over the sinus tarsi, there
is little to find.
Investigations
Plain X-rays will be normal. An injection of local
anaesthetic into the sinus tarsi should provide
some temporary relief of symptoms and is diag-
nostically useful.
Differential diagnosis
Other causes of continued pain following a
sprained ankle.
Compartment syndrome
Aetiology
The muscles and nerves in the leg are contained
within four compartments, each of which has
fascial or fascial and osseous boundaries. The
foot also has four compartments. A compartment
syndrome results from ischaemia to muscles, and
may involve nerves, secondary to raised pressure
within that compartment. It may occur acutely
following a fracture or soft-tissue trauma or
chronically with symptoms after a certain level of
exercise. Mild compartment syndromes are not
infrequently missed following a fractured tibia
and present with residual sequelae such as claw
toes. Chronic compartment syndromes only will
be discussed.
Presenting symptoms
Chronic compartment syndromes of the leg will
present with pain in the involved compartment
after a degree of exercise, usually running. The
pain settles on rest but symptoms may become
worse with time. If the anterior compartment is
involved, then pain and paraesthesia may radiate
into the dorsum of the foot and ankle from
involvement of the superficial peroneal nerve. If
the deep posterior compartment is involved,
then pain and paraesthesia over the sole of the
foot, in the distribution of the posterior tibial
nerve, may be felt.

Signs
At rest physical examination may be normal,
although there may be some tenderness over the
distal tibia. This may become more marked if
the patient exercises on a treadmill to produce
symptoms.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken to exclude a stress
fracture or other osseous causes of leg pain.
Measuring compartment pressures with a
catheter introduced under local anaesthetic is the
most useful way to confirm the diagnosis.
Pressures are measured before and after
exercise. There is some debate as to the correct
abnormal compartment pressures. Generally,
intracompartmental pressures at rest should be
less than 15mmHg and 5-10 min following exer-
cise should have returned to 15 mmHg or less
(Pedowitz et aI1990).
Differential diagnosis
Shin splints or stress fractures of the tibia will be
the main differential diagnosis for leg pains. For
neurological symptoms in the foot an entrap-
ment neuropathy should be excluded.
NERVES
A number of nerves may be compressed at sites
around the ankle and foot, resulting in entrap-
ment neuropathies.
Tarsal tunnel syndrome
Aetiology
The posterior tibial nerve, a branch of the sciatic
nerve, may become compressed as it passes
under the flexor retinaculum behind the medial
malleolus (Fig. 16.10). Interestingly, tarsal
tunnel syndrome is a relatively new diagnosis,
having only been properly first described in
1962 (Keck 1962, Lam 1962). The condition is
analogous to carpal tunnel syndrome in the
wrist but nowhere near as common. The com-
THE PAINFUL FOOT 415
r .•i iii ii\ \\--uiliilimc---+--- tibial
f>
Posterior
nerve
",,",-~--\-- Flexor
retinaculum
----
Medial and lateral plantar
nerves emerging
Figure 16.10 Line drawing to show gross anatomy of the
tarsal tunnel - lateral view.
pression may cause direct pressure, leading to
motor and sensory symptoms, or may compress
the vascular supply, the vasa nervorum, causing
sensory symptoms only. Aetiology of tarsal
tunnel syndrome is idiopathic, trauma or asso-
ciated with bony alignment (Cimino 1990).
Other cases may be related to problems such as
rheumatoid arthritis or compression within the
tunnel associated with a ganglion, lipoma or
venous varicosities.
Presenting symptoms
The patient is likely to complain of a diffuse,
burning type of pain on the sole of the foot.
With time symptoms may become more
localised. Often pain is worse on activity and
better at rest. A proportion of patients get night-
time pain and some 30% have proximal radia-
tion of pain to the midcalf region, known as the
Valleix phenomenon (Mann 1993).
Signs
Sensory or motor weakness is rare to find but
should be carefully looked for. Most useful is a
positive Tinel sign, obtained by starting proximally
and percussing along the course of the nerve.
At the site of entrapment percussion will cause
radiation of pain along the course of the nerve.
 416 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Investigations
Plain X-rays may demonstrate any post-trau-
matic bony spurs causing compression but do
not in themselves make a diagnosis. Electro-
diagnostic tests are necessary for this: nerve con-
duction studies looking at sensory conduction
velocities and the amplitude and duration of
motor-evoked potentials (Ch. 7). Tests should be
performed bilaterally and a peripheral neuropa-
thy should be excluded. If an extrinsic compres-
sion in the tunnel is suspected then an MRI may
be helpful.
Differential diagnosis
Because of the diffuse nature of the symptoms
the differential diagnosis is quite wide, but two
possibilities should be particularly looked for. A
peripheral neuropathy, e.g. from diabetes, may
cause burning pains in the foot, but is usually
bilateral. Sciatica with nerve root irritation
causing distal pain also needs to be excluded.
Straight leg raising will be restricted and painful.
Other entrapments
Aetiology
Other entrapments which have been described
include the deep peroneal nerve under the infe-
rior extensor retinaculum and the superficial per-
oneal nerve as it exits the deep fascia about
11.5em above the lateral malleolus, the medial
plantar nerve at the master knot of Henry and the
first branch of the lateral plantar nerve between
abductor hallucis and quadratus plantae
muscles. Most of these entrapments occur in
runners or athletes.
Symptoms and signs
Deep peroneal nerve. Patients complain of
pain over the dorsum of the foot and sometimes
numbness and paraesthesia in the first web
space. There may be altered sensation in the first
web space and a positive Tinel sign.
Superficial peroneal nerve. Symptoms include
pain over the dorsum of the foot and ankle and
inferior lateral border of the calf. As a sensory
nerve there are no motor signs but there may be
a positive Tinel sign. A fascial defect or muscle
herniation where the nerve exits the deep fascia
should be looked for.
Medial plantar nerve. Patients complain of an
aching pain over the medial aspect of the arch,
often radiating into the medial three toes, becom-
ing worse on running. Again, a positive Tinel
sign may be found and also tenderness under the
medial arch (Case history 16.4).
First branch of lateral plantar nerve. Patients
complain of chronic pain, often increased on
running but sometimes present on waking. On
examination there will be tenderness over the
nerve deep to abductor hallucis and pressure
reproduces the patient's symptoms.
Investigations
Nerve conduction studies may help with the
diagnosis of deep peroneal nerve entrapment,
but are less useful in diagnosing the others. More
- - - - - - - _ . _ - -..
Case history 16.4 ;
1-------------------------_ 1
Patient: 48-year-old keen runner; squash and
badminton player.
Presenting symptoms: 18-month history of
bilateral paraesthesia affecting the medial aspect of
the soles of both feet, in the distribution of the medial
plantar nerve, when running. Symptoms initially
settled after exercise but over the next 6 months the
patient developed shooting pains without any pattern
of onset with increasing numbness in both feet.
Signs: A positive Tinel sign above both medial
malleoli. Some loss of sharp and blunt sensory
discrimination on the medial aspect of the sole was
identified.
Investigations: Nerve conduction studies showed
conduction blocks bilaterally at the level of the tarsal
tunnel. Medial plantar responses were absent on the
right and delayed on the left.
Diagnosis: Bilateral tarsal tunnel syndrome.
Operative findings: On both sides there was a
high division of the posterior tibial nerve into medial
and lateral plantar branches. A sharp edge to
abductor hallucis was found to be compressing the
medial plantar nerve bilaterally. In addition there was
a large vascular pedicle crossing the medial plantar
nerve and compressing it more proximally. Pain
settled following surgery.

recently, abnormalities of nerve conduction and
electromyography have demonstrated plantar
nerve abnormalities (Schon et al 1993). Injection
of local anaesthetic at the site of entrapment may
act as a diagnostic test if it abolishes symptoms.
Differential diagnosis
As for tarsal tunnel syndrome.
Peripheral neuropathy
Aetiology
Peripheral neuropathies may be due to a variety
of causes. In the West the leading cause is dia-
betes and in the Third World it is leprosy. Other
causes include spina bifida, pernicious anaemia,
drugs and alcoholism. The different patterns of
peripheral neuropathy may vary but in diabetics
the most common is a symmetrical distal
polyneuropathy, encompassing motor, sensory
and autonomic components.
Presenting symptoms
Patients may notice no symptoms at all if the
neuropathy presents as a painless one. The first
inkling of a problem may be when a patient pre-
sents with a complication such as ulceration or
infection. In a diabetic who normally has a pain-
less foot with no sensation the presence of pain is
important and may indicate deep infection, such
as an abscess or osteomyelitis. If the presentation
is of a painful neuropathy the patient may com-
plain of a burning sensation in the legs and feet,
commonly worse at night.
Signs
In a diabetic the foot may adopt a cavus appear-
ance with clawed toes. In the absence of vascular
disease the foot will feel warm and there may be
distended veins. Sensation to light touch and pin-
prick will be reduced and joint position sense
may be impaired. The toes may be clawed with
wasting of the intrinsic foot muscles and the ankle
jerk absent. Callosities may be present under the
metatarsal heads and heel.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 417
Investigations
In evaluating a peripheral neuropathy it is
important to look for an underlying cause.
The urine should be tested for sugar and a
random blood glucose test performed to look
for the most common cause. A careful history
and examination should uncover evidence
of other causes. Nerve conduction studies
may be helpful to rule out an entrapment
neuropathy.
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma)
Aetiology
This condition is a type of entrapment neuropa-
thy affecting a plantar digital nerve. It most com-
monly affects the common digital nerve to the 3/4
interspace, but may also occur in the 2/3 inter-
space. The diagnosis probably does not exist in
the first or fourth webspaces, although there has
been much debate about this. The incidence of a
second neuroma in the same foot is 4%
(Thompson & Deland 1993). Women are affected
at least four times more often than men and the
condition can affect adults of any age. The nerve
develops a fusiform swelling, just proximal to its
bifurcation, at the level of the intermetatarsal
bursa (Fig. 16.11). Although frequently termed a
neuroma, technically it is not as the histology
shows a degenerative process rather than a prolif-
erative one.
Presenting symptoms
The patient complains of a burning pain on the
sole of the foot, at the level of the metatarsal
heads and commonly radiating into one or two
toes. It may feel to the patient like walking on a
sharp pebble. Occasionally, pain will radiate
proximally. Pain is often worse on walking and
may be particularly exacerbated by tight-fitting
shoes, as these will compress the metatarsal
heads together, thus 'trapping' the nerve. Resting
or removing tight shoes may settle the pain. Less
than half the patients complain of numbness in
the toes.
 418 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Figure 16.11 Resected Morton's neuroma showing
terminal digital branches following operation.
Signs
On palpation of the relevant interspace the
patient's pain will be reproduced, sometimes
with radiation into a toe. However, it may be
difficult to elicit conclusive evidence on examina-
tion. If pressure is maintained in the interspace
with one hand, while the other alternately
squeezes the forefoot from side to side to com-
press the metatarsal heads together, then a
painful click may be obtained. This is known as
Mulder's click and is only helpful if it reproduces
pain (Mulder 1951). It is important to ensure that
any tenderness is not over the metatarsal heads,
rather than intermetatarsal, although in rare
cases nerves may become entrapped under a
metatarsal head. Sensation in the toes is usually
normal, but may vary.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken to rule out other
pathology. Although ultrasound and MRI have
been used to look for the swelling in the nerve
they have not generally proved reliable enough
to be used as diagnostic tools. Ultrasound has
been reported as useful if the neuroma is 5 mm in
diameter (Pollak et al 1992). Nerve conduction
studies are not helpful. A diagnostic injection of
local anaesthetic may be helpful if it abolishes the
patient's pain.
Differential diagnosis
Problems affecting the metatarsal head, such as
synovitis, intermetatarsal bursa and Freiberg's
disease, should be considered. It is important
to be careful about whether the tenderness
is under a metatarsal head or intermetatarsal.
Pain from a neurological cause, such as tarsal
tunnel syndrome, peripheral neuropathy or
referred pain from the back should be
excluded.
SKIN AND SUBCUTANEOUS TISSUES
Retrocalcaneal bursitis
Aetiology
There are two bursae at the heel; one is deep to
the tendo Achilles and the other lies superficial to
its insertion. The deep bursa is infrequently
affected but, as it has a synovial lining, symp-
toms may be early indicators of an inflammatory
arthropathy such as rheumatoid arthritis. Men
are affected more often than women. Symptoms
in the subcutaneous bursa affect adolescent
females most frequently.
Presenting symptoms
For the subcutaneous bursa the symptoms are
well described by some of the eponyms for the
condition, sucha as 'pump or heel bumps'. The
patient complains of a tender prominence at the
heel when wearing shoes (Fig. 16.12).

Figure 16.12 Bilateral heel bumps with superolateral
prominence on the heel, also known as Haglund's deformity.
Signs
Inflammation of the deep bursa will produce ten-
derness deep to the tendo Achilles. In heel
bumps there is variable tenderness over a thick-
ened bursa situated just lateral to the tendo
Achilles attachment.
Investigations
A plain lateral X-ray should be taken. With deep
bursitis calcaneal erosions should be looked for.
In heel bumps the X-ray is usually normal with
no evidence of any posterosuperior prominence
to the calcaneus.
Differential diagnosis
This is mainly with other causes of heel pain and
with Achilles tendonitis.
Heel pad syndrome
Aetiology
This is a chronic inflammatory process within
the heel fat pad. The heel is subject to repetitive
impact loading on walking which can exceed
body weight; with running these forces can
rise to 3-8 times body weight (Riegler 1987).
THE PAINFUL FOOT 419
Predisposing symptoms may be running on
hard surfaces, e.g. roads, obesity and increasing
age.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of heel pain, worse in the early
morning and on weightbearing. They may have a
limp.
Signs
There is localised central tenderness under the
heel.
Investigations
This is essentially a clinical diagnosis. X-rays or
ultrasonography are not helpful.
Differential diagnosis
This will include plantar fasciitis and entrapment
neuropathies, particularly of the nerve to abduc-
tor digiti quinti.
Plantar fasciitis
Aetiology
This is a chronic inflammation at the site of the
attachment of the plantar fascia to the medial
tubercle of the calcaneum. It possibly represents
a traction periostitis and may be precipitated by
overuse and occurs in middle-aged people and
with a male predominance.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of pain under the heel on
weightbearing; this may be particularly acute on
getting up in the morning.
Signs
There is tenderness along the anteromedial
border of the calcaneum which may be increased
by passive dorsiflexion of the toes.
 420 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Investigations
The diagnosis is clinical although a bone scan
may show increased uptake locally. Plain X-rays
may show a spur on the inferior border of the cal-
caneum but this is equally found in asympto-
matic people.
Differential diagnosis
As in heel pad syndrome.
Soft tissue masses or tumours
Aetiology
Some benign soft-tissue masses, such as ganglions,
are common in the foot. A ganglion is a mucoid
cyst which usually arises from an underlying joint.
In the foot they most commonly occur over the
dorsum of the ankle (Fig. 16.13). Plantar fibroma to-
Figure 16.13 Large ganglion on lateral aspect of the ankle.
sis is analogous to Dupuytren's contracture in the
hand and is a proliferation of the plantar aponeu-
rosis to form discrete nodules, usually in the
instep. A glomus tumour is a benign bright red vas-
cular tumour, the size of a small pea, and is usually
located subungually or in a web space.
Presenting symptoms
A ganglion presents as a painful lump inside
footwear. Plantar fibromatosis may present with
painful nodules, although often the patient only
notices some mild discomfort or simply a
swelling. A glomus tumour, however, may
present with marked pain.
Signs
A ganglion will appear as a mobile subcutaneous
lump of variable size. Small ones may appear
quite firm, whereas larger ones often have a more
spongy feel. The nodules of plantar fibromatosis
are felt as firm, fairly immobile nodules, often
along the edge of the plantar fascia and under the
instep. A glomus tumour will appear as a subun-
gual mass or may be palpated as a small nodule
in a web space.
Investigations
Plain X-rays may distinguish a glomus tumour
from a subungual exostosis; otherwise, the diag-
nosis is made from clinical information.
Differential diagnosis
Multiple ganglions around the extensor tendons
on the dorsum of the ankle should arouse suspi-
cion of rheumatoid arthritis. A lipoma may be
mistaken for a ganglion and is commonly located
on the dorsolateral aspect of the ankle.
GENERAL
Crystal arthritis
Aetiology
Arthritic changes may be caused by the deposi-
tion of crystals within a joint. This may be sodium

urate crystals in gout or calcium pyrophosphate
dihydrate crystals in pseudogout. Gout is a disease
characterised by a disorder of purine metabolism
and is associated with hyperuricaemia. It may
be primary with a strong hereditary factor or be
secondary to other problems such as renal failure.
Pseudogout is sometimes associated with other
metabolic conditions, such as hyperparathy-
roidism, but otherwise it is idiopathic.
Presenting symptoms
Up to 75% of initial attacks of gout affect the big
toe (Jacoby & Dixon 1991). The patient complains
of acute onset of a swollen, very painful first
MTPJ. Pseudogout may present with gout-like
attacks but these are usually less severe. About
50% of patients, however, will present with pro-
gressive degeneration of joints. In the foot the
ankle, subtalar and talonavicular joints are most
commonly affected.
Signs
In the acute stage of gout the great toe will be
swollen, inflamed and very tender (Fig. 16.14). In
Figure 16.14 Acute gout in the first metatarsophalangeal
joint.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 421
chronic cases the signs of osteoarthritis will be
present. Gouty tophi (deposits of sodium urate)
may be found in the cartilages of the ears and in
bursae, tendons and soft tissues generally.
Investigations
Acutely, the serum uric acid may be raised but
acute attacks can occur with a normal uric acid
level. Aspiration of joint fluid and examination
under a polarising lens will show brightly bire-
fringent needle-like crystals in gout and more
pleomorphic rectangular crystals in pseudogout.
Chronically, X-rays will show degenerative
changes in joints affected. Gout gives a character-
istic appearance of sharp, punched-out juxta-
articular lesions, with little reactive sclerosis and
no general osteoporosis.
Differential diagnosis
Acutely, this will be with acute infection and
septic arthritis. Chronic forms will be associated
with other causes of degenerative joint disease.
Hereditary and motor sensory
neuropathy
Aetiology
This condition is also known as peroneal muscular
atrophy and was first described by Charcot, Marie
and Tooth in 1886. Essentially, it is an inherited
neuropathy with a predominantly motor compo-
nent affecting the lower limbs. Motor weakness
begins in the peronei, then the dorsiflexors, and
may involve all the muscles below the knee.
There may also be sensory changes and involve-
ment of the upper limb. The initial symptoms are
usually in childhood but the neuropathy then
slowly progresses. The adult may then present
with a cavus foot, claw toes and pain and callosi-
ties over the metatarsal heads. Fixed deformities
may develop with equinus of the forefoot and
varus of the hindfoot (Mann 1993).
Presenting symptoms
This will d"epend on how far the disease has pro-
gressed. Initially, the patient may present with
 422 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
just a clumsy gait and perhaps a history of recur-
rent ankle sprains. With time the weakness and
changes in the shape of the foot become more
apparent. The patient may then complain of
footwear problems and pain along the lateral
border of the foot because of the varus heel.
Signs
In the established case there will be a cavus foot
with a high arch, a plantarflexed first ray, clawing
of the toes and peroneal and intrinsic muscle
weakness. Weakness of other muscle groups
should be looked for and the hands examined.
Sensory changes, if present, are usually mild.
Investigations
A careful clinical examination is important
because of the differential diagnosis. Plain X-
rays, standing AP and lateral, will show the
cavus and demonstrate any degenerative
changes when fixed deformities are present.
Nerve conduction studies and electromyography
are important for accurate diagnosis and to rule
out other causes of pes cavus.
Differential diagnosis
This is from other causes of pes cavus, which will
include idiopathic, muscular diseases such as
muscular dystrophy, neurological problems such
as cerebral palsy, Friedreich's ataxia, polio-
myelitis and spinal cord problems. In addition,
pes cavus may be due to residual clubfoot or
compartment syndrome.
Infection
Aetiology
Infection may occur in the soft tissues, as
osteomyelitis in the bone or as septic arthritis in
a joint. The cause may be direct inoculation fol-
lowing an open wound, either traumatic or sur-
gically created, or via haematogenous spread.
Traumatic or surgical infection may occur at
any time but septic arthritis is more likely to
occur in the very young or the elderly or
immunocompromised. Bony infections are most
commonly due to Staphylococcus aureus but strep-
tococci may also be associated with soft-tissue
infections.
Presenting symptoms
These will vary according to the tissue involved
and degree of infection. Cellulitis will present
with pain, swelling and erythema of the
involved area. Because the bones are very
superficial in the foot, osteomyelitis should
always be suspected under any area of eel-
lulites. Septic arthritis is likely to present with
exquisite pain on moving a joint, usually the
ankle, and with overlying swelling and ery-
thema. However, in the elderly or immunocom-
promised, symptoms may be strikingly muted,
reducing suspicion of an underlying joint infec-
tion. In acute septic arthritis or osteomyelitis the
patient is likely to have systemic signs of being
unwell.
Signs
Swelling, tenderness and erythema of the soft
tissues will be noted. In septic arthritis there is
likely to be marked pain on very limited move-
ment of the joint. If marked local tenderness is
elicited over a bony area this should alert you to
the possibility of underlying osteomyelitis. If
infection spreads to a tendon sheath, causing a
tenosynovitis, then passive movement of the
tendon will be limited and very painful and ten-
derness may be present along the length of the
tendon.
Investigations
Plain X-rays are necessary to exclude or demon-
strate osteomyelitis. However, it may take
10 days to show any changes. A bone scan will
be positive well before plain X-rays and may
help. In septic arthritis a diminution in joint
space or adjacent osteomyelitis may be seen.
Aspiration of fluid from a joint and Gram stain
and culture can provide a diagnosis. Blood cul-
tures should also be done: a full blood count will

show a raised white cell count and the erythro-
cyte sedimentation rate (ESR) or C-reactive
protein will be high. Obviously, if there is an
open discharge with pus then swabs should be
taken.
Differential diagnosis
Infection is a clinical diagnosis. Usually the ques-
tion to be decided is whether there is underlying
bony or joint infection.
Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD)
Aetiology
This is an interesting condition which is poorly
understood but results from a dysfunction of the
sympathetic nervous system. It can follow
trauma, sometimes minor in nature, after a frac-
ture or following surgery. Pain can become so
unremitting that the patient wishes amputation
and may also develop depression and personal-
ity changes.
Presenting symptoms
Patients complain of a burning pain, often out of
proportion to the injury. Initially, this will be due
to the trauma of surgery but, instead of settling,
the pain increases and becomes the dominant
complaint. Pain can occur at rest, with movement
and may well trouble the patient at night. The
weight of blankets on the bed, or even a sheet,
may be intolerable. As well as affecting the
injured area, the patient may experience pain
over the whole foot in a global distribution.
Signs
These may vary according to the stage of the con-
dition. The limb may be swollen and may have a
shiny dry appearance. There may be hair and
nail changes, joint stiffness and sudomotor
changes, with dry skin or excessive sweating.
The affected area may become very sensitive and
even light touch may evoke considerable and
prolonged pain. Because of muscular spasm,
patients may develop fixed equinus at the ankle
or claw toes.
THE PAINFUL FOOT 423
Investigations
Plain X-rays may show osteopenia within a few
weeks and subperiosteal bone resorption. A
bone scan is very helpful as it will show gener-
alised increased uptake in the affected area.
Patients have a characteristic delayed bone
scan pattern of diffuse increased tracer through-
out the foot, with juxta-articular uptake accen-
tuation (Holder et al 1992). Temporary pain
relief from a lumbar sympathetic block is also
a useful test, although a negative test does not
exclude RSD. Case history 16.5 belies some of
the problems of treating and diagnosing this
pain syndrome early. Both psychological and
organic problems can arise, making the problem
intractable.
Case history 16.5
Patient: A 13-year-old schoolgirl presented following
a nail surgery (phenolisation) with positive subungual
exostosis over the left hallux. This was confirmed by
X-ray. Following an exostectomy to remove the bone,
intractable pain developed in a pattern unusual for
postoperative events.
Presenting symptoms: Pain following two
operations at 6 weeks. Stabbing and crushing pain
was described, with extreme sensitivity over the foot.
Signs: The foot was swollen and blue. Analgesics
were of minimal help. The patient had a tendency to
hysterical fits. Over an 18-month period the
contralateral side became affected.
Investigations: Infection was excluded. Surgery
was performed on two further occasions by different
surgeons in case an exostosis was still present.
Amitriptyline 10 mg at night provided minimal help in
reducing vasomotor activity. A lumbar sympathectomy
(guanethidine) only gave temporary relief. Psychiatric
assessment was considered.
Diagnosis: Reflex sympathetic dystrophy with
hysteria.
Conclusion: This case history highlights the ease
with which inappropriate management and additional
physical insult can elevate the patient's problem. RSD
is a difficult problem to manage and non-invasive
techniques should be emphasised, with total pain-
blocking control and maintenance of mobility if the
pain syndrome is diagnosed (Tollafield 1991).
 424 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Differential diagnosis
It can be difficult sometimes to decide if mild
RSD is present or if the patient simply has a very
painful injury, or one is missing a component of
that injury.
Referred pain
Aetiology
Referred pain has been mentioned in connection
with compartment syndrome involving the deep
peroneal and posterior tibia nerves. The main
source of referred pain, however, is sciatica due
to nerve root compression in the back. Most com-
monly this is due to a prolapsed intervertebral
disc and over 90% of these occur at the L4/5 or
L5/S1Ievels.
Presenting symptoms
Patients will usually complain of low back pain
radiating into a buttock and down the leg. They
may have little back pain and mainly leg pain. A
careful history may indicate the nerve root
involved. Pain radiating down the back of the leg
into the sole of the foot is generally Sl in origin
and down the lateral border of the leg and into
the hallux is generally L5 in origin.
Signs
In an acute disc prolapse the patient experiences
considerable pain and is unable to move easily.
He may have a scoliotic tilt to the spine when
viewed from behind, paraspinal muscle spasm
REFERENCES
Bennett P J, Patterson C 1998 The Foot Health Questionnaire
(FHSQ): a new instrument for measuring outcomes of foot
care. Australian Journal of Podiatric Medicine 32(3): 87-92
Bennett P J, Patterson C, Wearing S, Baglioni T 1998
Development and validation of a questionnaire designed
to measure foot-health status. Journal of the American
Podiatric Medical Association 88(9): 419-428
Berndt A L, Harty M 1959 Transchondral fractures
(osteochondritis dissecans) of the talus. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 41-A: 988-1020
and tenderness in the buttock. Straight leg
raising will be restricted and causes pain in the
distribution of the nerve root. Sensory changes
and muscle weakness appropriate to that nerve
root may be found but not invariably. Reflexes
may be diminished; the knee jerk is L3/4 and the
ankle jerk is L5/Sl.
Investigations
Plain X-rays should be taken of the lumbosacral
spine. If surgery is contemplated, or the diagno-
sis is unclear, then an MRI scan or CT scan is
necessary.
Differential diagnosis
The symptomatology is usually clear but back
pain is very common and a more distal problem
coexisting with long-standing back pain and
sciatica should always be considered.
SUMMARY
There are many causes of foot pain. Knowledge
of the methods of quantifying and monitoring
pain will aid the practitioner in his understand-
ing of this most elusive construct. It has been
highlighted that pain is subjective and is a very
personal experience, and that the pain associated
with certain foot conditions can manifest at
various levels. Practitioners must undertake a
careful history, examination and relevant investi-
gations, and an appropriate monitoring tool
must be selected to chart the progress of any pain
manifestation.
Bowling A 1995 Measuring disease: a review of disease-
specific quality of life measurement scales. Open
University Press, Buckingham
Budiman-Mak E, Conrad K J, Roach K E 1991 The Foot
Function Index: a measure of foot pain and disability.
Journal of Clinical Epidemiology 44: 561-570
Canale S T, Belding R H 1980 Osteochondral lesions of the
talus. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 60-A: 97-102
Cimino W R 1990 Tarsal tunnel syndrome: a review of the
literature. Foot and Ankle 11: 47-52

------------------
De Smet A A, Fisher D R, Burnstein M I et al 1990 Value of
MR imaging in staging osteochondral lesions of the talus
(osteochondritis dissecans). American Journal of
Roentgenology 154: 555-558
Ferkel R D, Karzel R P, Del Pizzo W et al1991 Arthroscopic
treatment of anterolateral impingement of the ankle.
American Journal of Sports Medicine 19: 440-446
Holder L E, Cole L A, Myerson M S 1992 Reflex sympathetic
dystrophy in the foot: clinical and scintigraphic criteria.
Radiology 184(2): 531-535
Hubay C A 1949 Sesamoid bones of the hands and feet.
American Journal of Roentgenology 61: 493-505
Jacoby R K, Dixon A StJ 1991 The painful foot in systemic
disorders. In: Klenerman L (ed) The foot and its disorders,
3rd edn. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford
Johnson K A 1983 Tibialis posterior tendon rupture. Clinical
Orthopaedics and Related Research 177: 140-147
Johnson K D 1987 Management of malunion and nonunion of
the tibia. Orthopaedic Clinics of North America 18: 157-172
Keck C 1962 The tarsal tunnel syndrome. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 44-A: 180-182
Lam S J S 1962 The tarsal tunnel syndrome. Lancet 2:
1354-1355
Lutter L D 1991 Achilles tendon rupture. AAOS fourth
annual comprehensive foot and ankle course
McCaffery M, Beeke A 1989 Pain: clinical manual for
nursing practice. C V Mosby, Toronto
McMurray T P 1950 Footballers ankle. Journal of Bone and
Joint Surgery 32-B: 68-69
Mann R A 1993 Diseases of the nerves. In: Mann R A,
Coughlin R J (ed) Surgery of the foot and ankle, 6th edn.
C V Mosby, St Louis
Melzack R 1975 The McGill Pain Questionnaire: major
properties and scoring methods. Pain 1: 277-299
Merchant T C, Dietz F R 1989 Long term follow-up after
fractures of the tibial and fibular shafts. Journal of Bone
and Joint Surgery 71-A: 599-606
Moiser K M, Asher M 1984 Tarsal coalitions and peroneal
spastic flat foot. A review. Journal of Bone and Joint
Surgery 66-A: 976-984
THE PAINFUL FOOT 425
Mulder J D 1951 The causative mechanism in Morton's.
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 33-B: 94-95
Nicoll E A 1964 Fractures of the tibial shaft. A survey of 705
cases. Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 46-B: 373-387
O'Connor D 1958 Sinus tarsi syndrome. A clinical entity.
Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery 40-A: 720
Pedowitz R A, Hargens A R, Mubarak S Jet al1990
Modified criteria for the objective diagnosis of chronic
compartment syndrome of the leg. American Journal of
Sports Medicine 18: 35-40
Pollak R A, Bellacosa R A, Dornbluth N C et al 1992
Sonographic analysis of Morton's neuroma. Journal of
Foot Surgery 31(6): 534-537
Price P 1996 Defining and measuring quality of life. Journal
of Wound Care 5(3): 139-140
Reigler H E 1987 Orthotic devices for the foot. Orthopaedic
Review 16: 27-37
Romanowski C A J, Barrington N A 1991 The accessory
ossicles of the foot. Foot 2: 61-70
Saag K G, Saltzman C L, Brown K, Budiman-Mak E 1996
The Foot Function Index for measuring rheumatoid
arthritis pain: evaluating side-to-side reliability. Foot and
Ankle International 17(8): 506-510
Schon L C, Glennon T P, Baxter D E 1993 Heel pain
syndrome: electrodiagnostic support for nerve
entrapment. Foot and Ankle 14: 129-135
Stewart A L, Ware J E (eds) 1992 Measuring functioning and
well-being: the medical outcomes study approach. Duke
University Press, Durham, North Carolina
Stormont D M, Peterson H A 1983 The relative incidence of
tarsal coalition. Clinical Orthopaedics and Related
Reasearch 181: 28-36
Sutherland J E, Wesley R M, Cole P M 1988 Differences and
similarities between patient and physician perception of
pain. Fam Med 20: 243-246
Thompson F M, Deland J T 1993 Occurrence of two
interdigital neuromas in one foot. Foot and Ankle
14: 15-17
Tollafield 1991 Reflex sympathetic dystrophy in day case foot
surgery. British Journal of Podiatric Medicine 3(1): 2-6
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 427

The at-risk foot 427 The at-risk foot

Tissue viability 429
Factors essential for tissue viability 429 W. Turner
Factors which can result in loss of tissue viability 429
Classifying loss of tissue viability 430 J. McLeod Roberts
Aetiological classification 431

Approachesto determining degree of risk 433

Holistic overview 433
Local indicators 435
Systems approach to risk assessment 438

Clinical decision making 447

Summary 448

INTRODUCTION
Increasingly, assessment and subsequent man-
agement of the high-risk patient is forming a
major part of the practitioner's workload. As the
population ages and more people live to old age,
the incidence of conditions which place the foot
at risk increase. Furthermore, a restructuring of
clinical caseloads to focus service delivery to
those in greatest medical need is resulting in
high-risk case mixes. Knowledge of factors
which increase risk for foot disease, together
with practical approaches to assessment of the
high-risk foot, is essential for safe and effective
service delivery.
Normal function of the lower limb is depen-
dent on viability of a wide range of tissues.
Optimum function requires that skin, bone,
muscle, nerve, vessels and connective tissues
are structurally sound. Loss of viability results
in reduction of normal function, eventual
total loss of function or systemic complications.
Maintenance of tissue viability enables func-
tional ability, keeping the patient mobile and
independent and maintaining quality of life.
For the lower limb practitioner, skin is the most
common tissue to lose viability, resulting in
potentially serious consequences for the patient.
Key functions of the skin are given in Table 17.1.

THE AT-RISK FOOT

The term 'at-risk foot' is used to describe a foot
which is at risk of loss of tissue viability. Usually,
427
 428 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

Table 17.1 Functions of the skin Table 17.2 Factors responsible for an at-risk foot

• Prevents dehydration Classification Conditions

• Contains other tissue of the body
Communication Vascular - ischaemia Peripheral vascular disease
• Sensation (touch, heat, cold, pain, etc.) Critical limb ischaemia
• Immunological (direct barrier, cellular) Occlusion (e.g. tourniquet)
Protects body from ultraviolet light Severe anaemia
• Thermoregulation Deep vein thrombosis
Shock absorption Compartment syndrome
Vitamin 0 production Buerger's disease
• Protection from irritants (chemicals, etc.) Microangiopathy
Vascular - venous stasis Incompetent lower limb
valves
Congestive heart failure
(right-sided)
Obesity
the increased risk relates to intrinsic factors Failure of respiratory/
which reduce the ability of the soft tissues to abdominal pump
withstand normal minor environmental stresses Calf muscle pump failure
Pericapillary fibrin deposition
(extrinsic factors). Therefore, an at-risk foot may Oedema - pitting/non-pitting
be seen to be one where soft tissues are more vul- Neurological Distal symmetrical
nerable to the effects of environmental stresses. polyneuropathy
Additionally, an at-risk foot is one which is often Mononeuropathies
Radiculopathies
less likely to recover quickly from minor stresses Upper motor neurone lesions
and minor wounds than the normal foot. Often Lower motor neurone lesions
recovery is likely to be complicated, delayed or Diabetes mellitus
Tabes dorsalis
incomplete. In severe cases, recovery is not possi- Leprosy
ble and stasis, spread or deterioration of the con- Alcoholism
dition occurs. Vitamin B 12 deficiency
HIV/ AIDS
The role of the practitioner is often to first iden-
tify factors which may place a patient's lower Neoplasia Malignant melanoma
Basal cell carcinoma
limb status at high risk. Some factors which may Squamous cell carcinoma
be responsible for an at-risk foot are given in Malignant transformation of
Table 17.2. wounds
It is important to bear in mind that in many Infections Erysipelas
Osteomyelitis
cases most at-risk feet are victims of more than Cellulitis
one causal factor. Many at-risk feet have a com- Lymphangitis
plicated series of factors responsible for causing Lymphadenitis
Bacteraemia
disease risk. A good example of this is the dia- Septicaemia
betic foot ulcer. Diabetic foot ulcers are either Dermatophyte infection
neuropathic, ischaemic or a combination of both Yeast infection
Herpes infection
factors. Additionally, the patient may be
immunocompromised, have a coexisting infec- Immune system DiGeorge syndrome
dysfunction HIV/AIDS
tion or be suffering abnormal weightbearing Malnutrition
traumas on already damaged tissues. It is impor- Diabetes mellitus
tant for the practitioner to identify and eliminate Long-term steroid use
Immunosuppressive drugs
all risk factors if such an ulcer is to be given the Radiation
best chance of healing. Effects of ageing
From the clinical perspective, an at-risk foot is Leukaemia
Lymphoma
one which is more likely to develop significant
pathologies such as: (Cont'd)
 THE AT-RISK FOOT 429

Table 17.2 (Conf'd) • Freedom from infection:

Classification Conditions
local or systemic
• Freedom from major environmental stresses:
Trauma Heat heat, cold, radiation, mechanical trauma,
Cold chemical trauma
Radiation
Chemicals (acids and alkalis) • Freedom from malignant disease:
Mechanical (pressure, skin, soft-tissue, vascular or bone
shear, friction) malignancy
Musculoskeletal Rheumatoid arthritis • Freedom from intrinsic (systemic or local)
Gout
Osteoarth ritis disease
Psoriatic arthropathy • Ability to compensate for minor changes to
Reiter's syndrome the environment:
Neuroarthropathy
(Charcot foot) production of melanin in response to
Ankylosing spondylitis ultraviolet radiation
production of hyperkeratosis in response to
mechanical trauma
• ulceration ability to regulate constant pH,
• infection temperature, etc.
• necrosis
• amputation Factors which can result in loss of
• malignant lesions tissue viability
• severe deformity.
Whenever skin viability is lost, the patient may
Correct determination of risk factors is essen- lose one or more of the normal functions of skin.
tial in order that effective preventative, curative For example, a large full-thickness skin wound
or rehabilitative management can be planned. can cause a patient to lose significant volumes
of body fluids, body heat and to place the
person at high risk of infection. Additionally,
TISSUE VIABILITY
the affected area of skin will be unable to with-
Factors essential for tissue viability stand normal weightbearing traumas and will
be susceptible to damage from ultraviolet light.
Viable tissue is, by definition, that which is able
Any pharmacological (or other) product placed
to withstand normal environmental stresses
on the affected area is liable to systemic absorp-
without loss of structure or function. For tissue
tion. A potentially significant factor can be
viability to be maintained, the following factors
where patients choose to place - e.g. steroid or
are essential:
iodine ointments - on their wounds. This com-
• Adequate oxygen supply: bination of risks has the potential to create
good quality and quantity of blood significant complications, including infection,
• Adequate nutrient supply: dehydration, shock, hypothermia, irradiation
sufficient nutrients to meet the respiratory trauma and unintended systemic action of
need of cells topical medicaments.
• Adequate removal of respiratory metabolites: Even small wounds can have significant conse-
removal of carbon dioxide, lactate, etc. quences for some patients. Any wound provides a
• Adequate sensory, motor and autonomic potential portal of entry for microorganisms. In a
nerve supply susceptible or immunocompromised host this
• Adequate immune function: may lead to serious and potentially limb- (or even
local and systemic immune mechanisms life-) threatening infection. A good example of this
are effective is small open interdigital fissures, resulting in
 430 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
rapidly spreading beta-haemolytic streptococcal
infection (erysipelas) in immunocompromised
patients. In this example, the minor structural
change to the skin (i.e. the fissure) is no longer
suited to the skin's function as a barrier to micro-
organisms. Tissue viability is therefore lost.
Traumatic versus trophic wounding. Skin and
soft tissue failure can be said to occur therefore
when environmental stresses exceed the struc-
tural strength of the soft tissue. Major environ-
mental stresses (e.g. burns, lacerations, incisions)
are likely to exceed the strength of even normal
tissues and result in traumatic wounding.
However, minor environmental stresses are
encountered more regularly. Minor stresses
might include friction, pressure, shear, ultraviolet
radiation, etc. In most cases these minor stresses
will be dissipated or absorbed (attenuated) by
soft tissues and result in no noticeable degenera-
tion of the tissues. However, even minor envi-
ronmental stresses such as these have the
potential to result in wounding when the
integrity of the soft tissues is compromised.
Compromise may arise in the form of atrophic
skin, ischaemia, loss of sensation or other
significant changes to normal tissue structure. In
such cases minor environmental stresses may
result in trophic ulceration.
Classifying loss of tissue viability
It is not enough to determine whether or not
there is loss of tissue viability. This will only tell
us that something has gone wrong and that some
action should be taken, but gives us no idea of
the cause or severity of the situation and there-
fore no guide as to appropriate action.
Much more information will be needed from
the assessment process. In order to gain that
information in a logical manner, it is important to
use a system to classify the loss of tissue viability.
The purpose of a classification system is to aid:
• diagnosis
• prognosis/degree of risk
• treatment plan
• monitoring
• research and audit.
Any system which is to be used In clinical
practice on a daily basis should be:
• simple to use
• easy to remember
• validated.
Some systems are designed primarily for
research and audit purposes and may of neces-
sity require complex or costly apparatus such as
that to measure the transcutaneous oxygen
tension (TcpOz) (Ch. 6) or a complex question-
naire. Such systems are more suited to specialist
centres rather than the routine clinic.
Several of the earlier systems were designed to
record wounds rather than loss of tissue viability
and therefore do not accommodate conditions
where there is no actual loss of tissue although
these can usually be adapted to do so.
As pointed out in his excellent chapter in The
Foot in Diabetes, Young (2000) draws the distinc-
tion between a classification system and a
descriptive system.
A classification system is applied at the first
presentation of the patient. The loss of tissue
viability will be assigned to a particular cate-
gory and will remain in that category, no matter
what the progression and final outcome. For
example: a system based on the aetiology of the
loss of tissue viability would place a blister
caused by the persistent rubbing of an ill-fitting
shoe on the back of the heel as a traumatic loss
of tissue viability and would remain in that cat-
egory throughout the treatment process to final
outcome.
On the other hand, a descriptive system will
change with each occasion of assessment. For
example, there may be blood in the fluid of the
blister initially, which may disappear as the
blister heals. Other descriptors could be surface
area, colour, appearance of margins or presence
of infection. The difficulties here are threefold:
first, in deciding which factors to include among
the many possibilities. Decisions should be evi-
dence based, where the factors chosen have been
shown to have a significant influence on healing,
or other valid reasons for inclusion, such as an
indicator of efficacy of treatment or a guide to
management. Where the classification system is

also used to indicate the degree of risk, the
number of possible factors increases further,
making the designing of an easy-to-use system
all the harder.
The second task is to obtain clear definitions
of these factors. The lack of universal consensus
on definitions makes comparison difficult. For
example, a very simple classification system of
ulcers which nonetheless is an aid to prognosis
and degree of risk, is to determine whether the
ulcer is superficial or deep. However, unless
there are clear definitions as to exactly what is
understood by these two terms, we cannot be
sure that an ulcer graded as superficial by one
practitioner, which subsequently deteriorates,
would not have been classified as deep by
another.
Thirdly, an accurate but simple means is needed
to measure the factors concerned, and such means
are not available for all factors. For example, it is
generally held that if an ulcer can be probed to
bone, it is assumed that osteomyelitis is present,
regardless of whether it can be detected on X-ray,
but this rule has not been validated by research.
Similar problems apply to the presence of
ischaemia and neuropathy (Chs 6 and 7).
So far, no single system has been designed
which is appropriate to all situations: each has its
limitations and many practitioners will use a
combination of classification and description to
record both details of loss of tissue viability and
to estimate the degree of risk.
Aetiological classification
One example of a well-validated classification
system for lower limb ulcers is the aetiological
system (Table 17.3). This is appropriate for use by
practitioners in a clinical setting as it is a useful
guide for a treatment plan, since removal or ame-
lioration of the cause will be a fundamental step
in the treatment. There is also some correlation
between cause and prognosis, e.g. an uncompli-
cated neuropathic ulcer has a significantly better
prognosis than a similar-sized ischaemic ulcer.
Although used more often for the classification of
ulcers, this system can be easily adapted to clas-
sify loss of tissue viability. The precise categories
THE AT-RISK FOOT 431
Table 17.3 An example of an aetiological system of
classification of lower limb ulcers
Category of lesion Examples of conditions
Dermatological Atopic eczema
Endocrine Diabetes mellitus
Haematological Sickle-cell anaemia,
cryoglobulinaemia
Iatrogenic Stevens-Johnson syndrome
Immunological Rheumatoid arthritis
Infectious Tuberculosis
Neoplastic Squamous cell carcinoma,
malignant melanoma, Kaposi's
sarcoma, basal cell carcinoma
Neurological Hansen's disease (leprosy),
diabetes mellitus, syringomyelia
Traumatic Burns, friction blisters, cuts,
pressure sores
Vascular Peripheral vascular disease,
venous hypertension
can be altered according to the wishes of the
practitioner. For example, vascular could be
divided into arterial, venous and lymphatic cate-
gories and iatrogenic could be included as a type
of traumatic cause of ulceration.
It must be borne in mind that infection can
complicate many lower limb ulcers, but is rarely
a cause of ulceration. Nonetheless, this system
has some limitations. It tells us nothing about the
degree of loss of tissue viability. For this we could
add a descriptive section, based on measurement
of depth of the deepest part of the wound. This
has been shown to have a strong correlation with
prognosis and so would be helpful in determin-
ing the degree of risk of slow healing, ulceration
and amputation. It is also possible that a particu-
lar lesion can be assigned to more than one cate-
gory, which detracts from the precision of the
system. For example, a basal cell carcinoma is a
skin cancer and could be classified as both a neo-
plastic and a dermatological lesion and the ulcer
seen in the diabetic foot could be classified as
both endocrine and neurological.
Meggit-Wagner wound classification system
(Table 17.4). This is another well-validated
system which chiefly yields information as to the
severity of the wound and therefore relates to
prognosis and degree of risk. It has the further
 432 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 17.4 Meggitt-Wagner wound classification
Grade Appearance Implication
Loss of tissue involves
dermis only
2 Loss exposes tendon No significant
3
or bone
Loss exposes tendon or
bone, with osteomyelitis
or abscess
} ischaemic component
4 Gangrene of digits or
5
forefoot
Extensive gangrene of
the foot
} Primarily an
ischaemic problem
advantage of dividing tissue loss into that with
no significant ischaemic component and that
where peripheral vascular disease is a major
factor and so is of help in determining the most
important steps in the subsequent treatment,
since wounds which are primarily ischaemic will
not heal unless steps are taken to improve the
blood supply.
However, it has limitations, since it was
designed to assess wounds and has no place for
preulcerative conditions such as callus. This
system has been adapted by some practitioners
for the classification of loss of tissue viability by
the addition of a grade a category for such con-
ditions where no break in the epidermis has
occurred. In addition, it would usually be
expected that a patient with a grade 4 ulcer
would have significant large-vessel disease of
the lower limb and one would expect to find
non-palpable pedal pulses. However, in patients
with diabetes, it is quite possible for them to
have digital gangrene and palpable pedal
pulses, suggesting a grade 4 ulcer but with no
significant major vessel pathology, the gangrene
being a result of septic vasculitis or embolism.
Small-vessel disease (i.e. thickening of the base-
ment membrane) is no longer considered to be a
prime cause of digital gangrene in patients with
diabetes. Another limitation to this classification
system is that there would be no place for the
Charcot foot, even though this condition carries
a high degree of risk of ulceration. A more
detailed but similar classification system, which
includes a grade a for intact skin and a separate
grade for spreading infection, is the Sims
classification (Sims et al 1988).
Almost all other systems are mainly descrip-
tive and designed more to assess the degree of
risk of ulceration/ amputation than of classifying
the ulcer per se. If they are to meet the criteria for
simplicity and ease of use, they inevitably focus
only on aetiological and local factors, e.g.
ischaemia and infection present, which gives a
limited view of factors contributing to risk.
San Antonio/Texas System (Armstrong,
Harkless and Lavery). This group of practition-
ers designed two systems: one system is
designed to classify the total range of loss of
tissue viability, but has yet to be validated; the
second system is concerned only with actual
ulcers. The advantage of the first system is its
comprehensiveness; both systems are an aid to
prognosis and management.
The second system has been validated and
grades ulcers according to depth, presence or
absence of sepsis and presence or absence of
ischaemia. No reference is made to the presence
or absence of neuropathy however, which is
considered by some practitioners as the single
most important contributory factor to diabetic
ulceration.
Using this system to assess the lesions of
people with diabetes, Lavery et al (1996) were
able to show that patients with infection and
ischaemia were 90 times more likely to have an
amputation than patients with lower-grade
lesions, thus showing the importance of local
wound conditions on outcome.
S(AD) SAD system (Table 17.5). This is a com-
prehensive system based on the San Antonio
system but with modifications and extensions
(Macfarlane & [effcoate 1999). It is also aimed at
patients with diabetes but is designed for research
and audit rather than as a guide to management.
However, it could be adapted for management
purposes (Serra 2000). The key elements of this
system are size of a wound, as measured by both
depth and surface area, infection, ischaemia and
neuropathy. Each of these elements is assigned a
grade from a to 3 according to severity, with grade
a representing a normal foot and grade 3 repre-
senting the worst situation. The advantages of this
 THE AT-RISK FOOT 433

Table 17.5 The S(AD) SAD classification

Grade Area Depth Sepsis Arteriopathy Denervation

0 Skin intact Skin intact No infection Pedal pulses palpable PinpricklVPT sensation normal
1 <10 rnrn- Skin and subcutaneous Superficial: Diminution of both pulses Reduced or absent pinprick
tissues slough or exudates or absence of one sensation. VPT raised
2 10-30 rnrn- Tendon, joint capsule, Cellulitis Absence of both pedal Neuropathy dominant: palpable
periosteum pulses pedal pulses
3 >30 rnm'' Bone and/or joint Osteomyelitis Gangrene Charcot foot
spaces

system are that it covers the whole range of loss of these two categories. Edmonds & Forster (2000)
tissue viability and includes the Charcot foot. acknowledge that their system of staging does
However, the authors suggest testing either rather not accommodate the Charcot foot and that the
than both small and large nerve fibres for neu- system would need extending for research and
ropathy which could lead to a false-negative audit purposes.
result since denervation of each type of nerve fibre
does not necessarily progress at the same rate. The
APPROACHES TO DETERMINING
measurement of the vibratory perception thresh-
DEGREE OF RISK
old requires the availability of a neurothesiometer
for the latter, which may not be readily available Holistic overview
in a routine clinic, but the authors do suggest the
To fully determine the degree of risk for any
cheaper alternative method of using a 10 g
patient, one would need to take into account all
monofilament. The authors acknowledge that
factors which can influence healing, including
measurement of neuropathy is an imperfect
not only the local condition of the lesion but also
science. The system awaits full evaluation but
the patient and his environment. Although few
there is a report of its successful use in a large
of these latter factors are included in any pro-
multidisciplinary clinic in Portugal.
posed classification system, because such inclu-
Edmonds and Foster system. This system is
sion would make the system very cumbersome,
designed specifically to aid management of dia-
much of the data will be recorded as part of a
betic foot lesions by assigning the foot to a stage
primary patient assessment (Ch. 5) and will be
of graded severity, according to the criteria
taken into account by the practitioner when
shown in Table 17.6, and dividing the lesions into
assessing the degree of risk. Most work has been
one of two aetiological categories (neuropathic or
carried out on people with diabetes, as these
neuroischaemic), as management differs for
people form the group with highest risk of
worst-scenario lower limb complications of
Table 17.6 Staging the diabetic foot
ulceration and non-traumatic amputation:
40-70% of all non-traumatic lower limb amputa-
Stage Clinical status tions are related to diabetes mellitus and 85% of
Normal. No presence of callus, ischaemia,
all such amputations are preceded by a foot
neuropathy, deformity, swelling ulcer (International Working Group on the
2 High risk. One or more of the above is present Diabetic Foot 1999).
3 Skin breakdown or presence of blister,
splits or grazes for more than 1 week
4 Ulcer and cellulitis Psychological factors
5 Necrosis
Recent research has started to focus on patients'
6 Advanced necrosis, foot cannot be saved
own perceptions of their health and their degree
 434 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
of risk. There is a strong association between
non-compliance with therapy and amputation in
a number of studies on patients with diabetes.
The patient with diabetic neuropathy who has
been told emphatically of the importance of
checking his footwear and of the consequences of
failure to heed this advice, but who returns later
with an ulcer due to a foreign object in the shoe,
possibly believes himself to be invulnerable: it
won't happen to me. Education is seen as a vital
part of the management of such patients, but
simple transfer of knowledge is not enough. The
patient's perception of his health status and the
desire to alter behaviour are important
influencing factors.
Complex interactions of psychological factors
in people with at-risk feet can result in denial
or detachment syndromes. In these cases patients
perceive their foot health of low importance or
relevance, often psychologically detaching them-
selves from their foot problems. These situations
can be a particular challenge for practitioners to
manage and call for a multiprofessional approach
to assessment and management.
Other behavioural factors can be detrimental
to health in general, such as tobacco smoking and
excessive alcohol drinking, as well as having par-
ticular negative effects on healing outcomes.
Socioeconomic factors
Low economic status has been shown to be asso-
ciated with a higher risk of amputation. A person
on a low income is less likely to be able to afford
good footwear, adequate heating in the home, a
balanced diet, etc. The socioeconomic status of an
individual is more important than whether the
person belongs to an ethnic minority group.
Support in the form of family and friends and
religious or social groups is important in reduc-
ing the risk, especially so in patients who suffer
visual or other impairments, and this could be
one reason why ethnic minorities are not at a dis-
advantage in terms of risk of lower limb ulcera-
tion and amputation. Lack of education in
general is also an influencing factor: e.g. this may
lead to inability to understand footcare advice or
to realise the importance of adequate diet.
Environmental factors
Reduced access to health care is also associated
with increased risk. No matter how well moti-
vated a patient may be, if there are inadequate
footcare facilities, or those facilities are out of
reach due to lack of transport, then there is
always the possibility that a lesion will develop
or worsen before adequate help is received.
Other environmental factors such as inadequate
heating in the home or poor hygiene are closely
related to socioeconomic factors and lack of edu-
cation, as discussed in the previous section.
Occupational factors
Apart from the earnings-related factor, certain
occupations independently place the person at a
higher risk of lower limb complications. For
example, people who have sedentary jobs are at
higher risk of obesity, heart disease and venous
stasis problems than people in more active jobs.
People such as top executives who spend long
hours in flight are also at high risk of deep vein
thrombosis. Occupations involving exposure to
the elements will increase that person's chance of
developing cold-related conditions such as
chilblains, which can lead to ulceration.
Previous medical history
Past medical history is important, since previous
ulceration or amputation will place the person in
a high-risk category for further ulceration and
amputation. This is because the factors that con-
tributed to the development of the first ulcer are
likely to still be present and, once amputation has
been performed, the extra stress on the already
compromised contralateral limb will place that
limb at high risk.
Age
The individual's healing ability will vary from
person to person across any age band but in
general healing slows with age. A more significant
factor is the presence of coexistent disease, the
likelihood of which increases with age.
 THE AT-RISK FOOT 435

Coexistent disease Surface area of wound

All too often a practitioner will be confronted
with a non-healing ulcer: this, despite the
fact that extreme care, the most appropriate
dressings, antibiosis and careful observation
and monitoring have all been carried out.
In many such cases there is an underlying sys-
temic condition which is delaying healing.
There are many conditions which can delay
healing and will therefore place the person in a
higher risk category, some examples of which
are shown in Table 17.7. In addition, the treat-
ment itself for coexisting conditions may also
impair healing.
A thorough primary patient assessment, as
described in Chapters 5-10, should detect rele-
vant underlying conditions/treatment.
Local indicators
Having assessed the patient holistically for risk
factors, it is necessary to turn our attention to
the area of tissue viability loss itself and make
an accurate recording of lesion details. This
will often be carried out as part of the routine
assessment of skin and the appendages in the
clinic (Ch. 9). Some of the systems used have
been discussed earlier in this chapter. Methods
of obtaining descriptive details will now be
discussed.
The surface area of the wound is an important
piece of data, since it enables the practitioner to
chart the progress of a lesion and thus determine
the success or otherwise of treatment.
Evidence of surface area as a prognosis for
healing is contradictory, with a meta-analysis of
wound healing studies by Margolis et al (2000)
on diabetic neuropathic foot ulcers showing no
correlation, whereas a recent paper by Oyibo et al
(2001) looked at 194 patients with diabetic foot
ulcers and found ulcer area at presentation was
greater in the amputation group compared with
healed ulcers, so the authors conclude that ulcer
area does predict outcome and should be
included in a wound classification system. The
same authors found that the patient's age, sex,
duration/type of diabetes, and ulcer site had no
effect on outcome.
Methods of measuring surface area vary from
the very simple to the very complicated.
The simplest method is to use a sterile, dispos-
able millimetre ruler and record the longest axis
of the wound as the length, L, and the width, W,
as the longest dimension perpendicular to L. One
of two formulae can then be used to calculate the
surface area:
A = L x Wx 0.785
or
A = L x W x 0.763

Table 17.7 Examples of conditions or treatments which may delay healing

Category Examples

Cardiovascular Peripheral vascular disease, venous insufficiency, lymphatic obstruction

Endocrine/metabolic Diabetes mellitus, malnutrition, deficiency syndromes, obesity
Immunological DiGeorge syndrome, hypogammaglobulinaemia, human immunodeficiency virus, rheumatoid
arthritis, hypersensitivity
Immunosuppressive agents Long-term steroids, immunosuppressive drugs, radiation, cytotoxic drugs
Infectious Cytomegalovirus, infectious mononucleosis, severe bacterial, mycobacterial or fungal disease
Haematological Leukaemia, anaemias, haemophilia, sickle-cell anaemia
Musculoskeletal Deformities, hypermobility
Neoplasia Carcinomas, lymphomas, sarcomas
Respiratory Chronic obstructive airways disease
Renal Chronic nephropathy
Traumatic Burns, foreign bodies, repeated minor trauma, tight clothing (tourniquet effect)
Exogenous factors Inappropriate dressings, antiseptics, environmental conditions, caustics and irritants
 436 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
For derivations of these calculations, see
Schubert (1997).
A second method requiring only simple appara-
tus is to place a sterile, flexible, transparent grid
over the wound: the grid has a removable backing
and is marked into J-cm squares. The margins of
the lesion can then be traced on to the grid and the
surface area calculated by counting the squares.
Disposal of the removable backing prevents cross-
infection, and the tracing can be stored in the
patient's notes for future reference. There are
various strategies for calculation of surface area,
such as including all whole squares and all partial
squares on the right, discarding all partial squares
on the left, etc., or using a formula such as:
A c =Nc
A c-r = (N c + (0.4 x N p ) )
where A c is the surface area of whole squares,
A c-r is the surface area of whole and partial
squares, N c is the number of complete squares
and N p is the number of partial squares within
the traced area.
If the grid is divided into smaller squares, such
as 0.5 cm x 0.5 em then each formula has to be
multiplied by 0.25 to obtain the area in em-
(Richard et aI2000).
Both of these methods have the advantage of
being quick, simple to use and inexpensive. The
disadvantages are that it is more difficult to
obtain an accurate tracing if the lesion is on a
curved surface such as the heel and that these
methods are very subjective.
A more objective measurement is made by
using a camera to take a photograph of the
lesion. The camera must always be placed at a
set distance from the lesion and a scaled ruler
should be positioned at the top or bottom of the
lesion, in the same vertical plane. The area of the
lesion can then be calculated from the devel-
oped photograph. The advantages are that the
measurement will be more objective and there is
no risk of cross-infection, but disadvantages are
that errors will again be present if the wound is
on a curved surface, the equipment is much
more expensive than use of a transparent grid
and the result is not instantly available unless a
Polaroid camera is used.
A further development is to use a digital camera
and associated software, which will enable the
image to be displayed on a computer screen. The
operator can click on to various points around the
margin of the lesion and the software will
instantly calculate the surface area. The advan-
tages are increased accuracy and instantaneous
results. The disadvantages are the initial expense
of the equipment and the need to develop a skill in
operating the equipment.
A group of workers from France have devel-
oped a planimetry software program, which
uses the tracing of the wound on a transparent
grid together with the computer mouse acting
as a digitiser, to transfer the tracing to the com-
puter, whereupon the software automatically
calculates the surface area. This method was
compared with calculating the surface area by
length and width, by square counting and by
using image-processing software and was
found to be highly reproducible and accurate.
The advantage of this method is that it does not
require the expense of a digital camera, but on
the downside it is more time-consuming
(Rajbhandari et aII999).
Depth of wound
The depth of the wound is an important piece of
data, since as mentioned earlier, depth shows
strong correlation with prognosis and degree of
risk. The usual method is to use a blunt, sterile
probe and measure the depth at the deepest part
of the wound. The advantages are ease of use and
low cost. The disadvantages are risk of cross-
infection and deciding exactly where the deepest
part of the lesion lies. It is also difficult to measure
the depth of very narrow lesions such as fissures
or splits in the epidermis. Lesions of unbroken
skin will of course have zero depth.
Volume of wound
Although some research is being undertaken
using stereoscopic equipment, no very satisfac-
tory method of measuring the volume of a
wound has been developed. Other methods tried
have included injecting normal saline and mea-
 THE AT-RISK FOOT 437

suring the volume used to fill the wound - but
this assumes the wound to have no pre-existing
fluid present - or using some other medium to
fill the cavity, such as an inert foam or a hydrogel.
None of these methods work very satisfactorily
and there is no great advantage in measuring
volume rather than depth.
Colour of wound
The colour of the wound can either be a mere
recording of colour by name, referring to either
the base of the wound or the surrounding epider-
mis, or using some sort of standard colour chart.
Successful use has been made of ordinary house-
hold paint colour charts for this purpose, which
have the advantage of reducing observer bias and
making it easier to compare the lesion at a later
date. Colour has some bearing on prognosis, since
a red base will suggest good granulation tissue
and better prognosis for healing than a grey base,
which suggests poor blood supply, or a yellow
base, which suggests presence of infection.
Margins of wound
Margins of wounds can also be related to progno-
sis. A 'saucer-shaped' wound suggests healing is
under way, whereas undermined edges suggest
the presence of a sinus, straight edges suggest no
change and rolled edges may indicate malignant
change.
Infection
Infection is one of the most important indicators
for risk (Carlson 1999). Table 17.8 lists useful
indicators of foot infection. The exudate can
further be described in terms of colour and con-
sistency, which gives some indication of the
pathogens involved. A more precise way of
determining which pathogens are present is to
take a swab (Ch. 13). The usual method is to
swab deep in the wound before any lavage of the
wound has taken place. However, controversy
rages concerning the detection of infection, since
it is recognised that any swab taken of a wound
will show the presence of pathogens, but
whether these are merely commensals or true
pathogens is more difficult to decide. It is rec-
ommended by some that tissue scrapings are
collected from the base of the wound using the
blunt edge of a scalpel blade and that the blade
and adherent tissue be sent to the pathological
laboratory for analysis. A similar controversy
surrounds the detection of osteomyelitis, since
X-rays are not reliable in the early stages and
clinical signs such as a 'sausage' toe and failure
to heal are often the only indicators. Probing to
bone is used by many as a rule of thumb but this

Table 17.8 'PREPSOCS' indicators of foot infection

Pain Not necessarily present (especially with sensory neuropathy). Throbbing, pulsatile or
persistent pain. May also have generalised malaise
Redness Soft tissue infection produces a diffuse area of cellulitis radiating from a central point
(often a portal of entry). May spread via lymph vessels, presenting as clear red lines
(lymphangitis). May herald onset of systemic spread
Exudation Amount of exudate produced is proportional to blood supply to wound. Consistency and
colour altered by microorganisms (e.g. creamy-yellow pus indicates staphylococcal
infection, green pus indicates pseudomonas infection)
Pyrexia Local rise in temperature may be present. Need to distinguish from other causes of
temperature increase (e.g. Charcot foot). Rise in systemic temperature is common in
severe infection, or indicates systemic involvement
Slow healing If wound is slow to heal or failing to heal, suspect underlying infection
Oedema Acute inflammatory response associated with infection produces local oedema. Oedema
may impede normal function (e.g. reduce range of motion of a joint)
Colour change (blue, grey, black) Change in colour usually indicates presence of infection and/or tissue necrosis
Smell Malodour indicates presence of microorganisms, e.g. presence of anaerobes
 438 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
is not entirely accurate as a study by Armstrong
et al (1998) showed using bone biopsies to
confirm infection.
Pain
The presence or degree of pain does not always
bear relation to the severity of a lesion since, in
conditions such as diabetes mellitus, peripheral
sensory neuropathy may mean that the foot is
insensate and the patient feels no pain at the site
of a lesion. Indeed, the first time such a patient
may realise he has a problem is on noticing
hosiery or footwear being soaked in exudate, or
on routine visit for a foot inspection at the clinic,
or by the observation of a relative or friend.
However, practitioners usually record the
presence and nature of any pain experienced by
the patient, since alleviation of the pain is one
of the therapeutic objectives and, whereas
absence of pain does not necessarily indicate all
is well, presence of pain is usually a strong indi-
cation of an underlying problem. Pain is often
recorded using the patient's own description of
the pain. A more objective method is to use the
visual analogue scale (VAS) to show intensity of
pain, with one end of the line indicating no pain
and the other end indicating worst pain ever
(Ch. 3). The patient is asked to mark a point on
the line corresponding to the intensity of pain
felt at that moment.
A second often-used method is the McGill Pain
Questionnaire (MPQ), or a modification of it,
which consists of the patient selecting adjectives
from various groups to show the nature and
intensity of pain. Both methods are useful in mon-
itoring pain and pain relief, but pain is a very
difficult entity to compare from one patient to
another. The VAS is more suited for use in a busy
clinical practice than the MPQ, which takes time
to complete, but yields more information and is
more suited for research purposes.
Systems approach to risk
assessment
As can be seen from Table 17.2, pathological
changes within the body systems can threaten
tissue viability. Each physiological system will
now be considered in turn and attention drawn
to changes from the norm which increases the 'at-
risk' status of the patient. Details of actual assess-
ment procedures will not be included, as these
can be found in the relevant chapters of this text-
book.
Cardiovascular system
Tissue viability is compromised whenever local
circulation is compromised. An inefficient
drainage system can be as threatening as a
reduced blood supply as both can produce local
ischaemia, leading to reduced diffusion of nutri-
ents and gases with subsequent reduction in
tissue metabolism. The cause may be local factors
such as a local vasculitis caused by local infection
or vasospasm as seen in chilblains or Raynaud's
phenomenon, a stenotic artery due to atheroscle-
rosis or stasis following incompetent veins or a
damaged lymphatic system; 85% of lower limb
ulcers are venous ulcers and they are often very
resistant to healing. Chapter 6 discusses causes
and signs and symptoms of venous stasis in more
detail. Systemic factors such as congestive heart
failure or severe anaemia can lead to ischaemia in
the lower limb and external factors such as tight
footwear, hosiery or dressings can also be a cause
of localised ischaemia.
Vasospastic disorders such as Raynaud's
disease or phenomenon, acrocyanosis, erythro-
cyanosis and chilblains (perniosis) can result in
loss of tissue viability; prolonged vasospasm is
triggered by exposure to a cold environment or
to sudden changes in temperature.
Thromboangiitis obliterans (Buerger's disease)
is a small-vessel disease affecting smokers. This
mainly affects young men, and causes small areas
of necrosis on the tips of the fingers, toes, nose
and ears.
The cardinal signs of a compromised circulation
are absence of pedal pulses, an ankle/brachial
pressure index below 0.9, ischaemic pain on exer-
cise or at rest and oedema (Ch. 6). Sudden tem-
perature change or a difference in temperature
between the two lower limbs is also an important
sign. Colour changes and absence of hairs are not

sufficient signs on their own, but help to build the
whole picture of a limb or foot with a compro-
mised circulation. The absence of one pedal pulse
in a foot indicates a compromised circulation but
if the other pedal pulse is intact, significant
ischaemia is unlikely. Although calcification may
lead to a false high value for the ankle/brachial
index, a low value always indicates some reduc-
tion in blood flow: the lower the index, the higher
the risk. Digital pressures can also be measured
using an appropriate pressure cuff. Further evi-
dence can be obtained by observing or listening to
the waveform or flow sounds of major arteries
and veins using a hand-held Doppler or measur-
ing the transcutaneous oxygen diffusion pressure
(Tcp02) on the dorsum of the foot or at digital
level. Values below 50 mmHg on the leg or
dorsum of the foot indicate some degree of
ischaemia.
Dermatological system
As explained in Chapter 9, the intact skin is an
important barrier to pathogens and any break or
potential break in that integrity, such as cuts and
bruises, poses a risk of infection. If infection is
already present, as in paronychia or onychia,
then there is risk of the situation worsening with
development of cellulitis and lymphangitis. Any
condition which produces a localised change,
resulting in the altered ability of the epidermis
and dermis to withstand normal daily trauma -
such as an excessively moist or dry skin - poses
a threat to the integrity of the skin (Plates 29 and
30). Examples of such conditions can be seen in
Table 17.9.
Alteration in the hydration of the stratum
corneum, such as is seen in the dry skin of people
exposed to wind and sun, due to ageing, certain
drugs such as those used in chemotherapy, or a
systemic condition such as hypothyroidism, all
render the epidermis more likely to form fissures
and thus portals of entry to pathogens. Similarly,
excessive hydration as seen in the macerated skin
due to occlusive dressings, prolonged immersion
in water or poor attention to personal hygiene
can lead to moist fissures. Blisters, including
vesicles and bullae, whether caused by external
THE AT-RISK FOOT 439
Table 17.9 Examples of conditions affecting the skin which
increase the at-risk status of the patient
Symptom Condition
Dry fissures Sun, wind, ageing, hypothyroidism,
chemotherapy
Wet fissures Occlusive dressings and footwear,
poor hygiene, hyperhydrosis, certain
occupations, e.g. baker, cook
Callus and corns Foot deformities, abnormal foot
function, ill-fitting footwear, ichthyosis
Blisters Epidermolysis bullosa, pompholyx,
pemphigus, urticaria, pustular
psoriasis, juvenile plantar dermatitis,
ill-fitting footwear
Pruritic lesions Tinea pedis, atopic eczema, venous
stasis eczema, contact dermatitis,
asteatotic dermatitis
Malignant lesions Melanoma, squamous cell
carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma,
Kaposi's sarcoma
Trauma Cuts, bruises, ingrown toenail, insect
bites
Infection Paronychia, onychia, erysipelas,
necrotising fasciitis
trauma such as friction from footwear or due to a
systemic condition such as bullous pemphigoid,
as well as callus and corns produced at sites of
increased mechanical stress, can all ulcerate,
exposing the patient to risk of infection. Often the
first sign of increased trauma is a slight redden-
ing of the skin at the sites of increased stress,
such as on the dorsum or apices of toes from ill-
fitting footwear. This is the initial inflammatory
response to trauma and should never be disre-
garded. If the lesion is pruritic, such as in atopic
or venous eczema, or in tinea pedis, then the
chances of infection from scratching are even
higher.
In addition, ulcers and other skin lesions such
as pigmented naevi, may undergo malignant
change, which is obviously a threat not just to the
affected limb but to the whole person. Any
patient with a lesion which shows rapid change
in colour, size or wound margins or which
exhibits bleeding or other discharge should be
immediately referred for further investigation
such as biopsy and pathological examination.
 440 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

Malignant naevi can arise under the nail as well
as on skin and not all malignant naevi arise from
pre-existing pigmented naevi. In addition, not all
melanomas are pigmented.
Endocrinological system
Metabolic and endocrine disorders can cause
widespread effects of morbidity and even mor-
tality and need to be noted when taking the
patient's medical history, but their effects on the
at-risk status of the lower limb vary from none to
extremely marked consequences, as can be seen
from Table 17.10.
In addition to direct effects on the lower limb,
many endocrine and metabolic disorders produce
other symptoms which may place the person at
risk of lower limb complications: for example,
ocular muscle weakness, as sometimes seen in
Graves' disease, may lead to blurred and double
vision, and retinopathy associated with diabetes
mellitus indirectly places the person at a higher
risk of lower limb problems, because of reduced
ability to notice any problem or to carry out
routine nail care safely.
Certain endocrine disorders can place the
patient at risk when undergoing surgery and
require appropriate prophylaxis, extreme vigi-
lance and prompt treatment if an emergency
arises. A thorough assessment is essential to
ensure awareness of such conditions.
Hyperthyroidism can sometimes lead to a life-
threatening situation, thyrotoxic storm, where
the patient may present with cardiovascular col-
lapse and shock. The practitioner must be aware
that infection, surgery, trauma, fright, diabetic

Table 17.10 Endocrine and metabolic disorders with effects on the lower limb

Endocrine/metabolic disorder Effects on the lower limb

Acromegaly/gigantism (excess pituitary
growth hormone)
Addison's disease (adrenocortical
plus insufficiency)
Cushing's syndrome (excess cortisol); may be
due to excess pituitary ACTH (Cushing's disease) reduced inflammatory response; tendency to bruising; osteoporosis;
or exogenous ACTH or steroids
Diabetes mellitus (a relative or absolute lack
of insulin secretion, leading to elevated
blood glucose levels and alterations in lipid
metabolism)
Hypocalcaemia (most common causes are
deficiency of parathyroid hormone, vitamin D
or kidney disease)
Hypercalcaemia (idiopathic hypersecretion
of parathyroid hormone)
Hyperthyroidism (the most common form
is an autoimmune condition called
Graves' disease, but other forms also exist)
Hypothyroidism (the most common form
is an autoimmune disease called
Hashimoto's disease)
Postmenopausal syndrome (fall in
oestrogens leads to bone resorption)
Enlargement of feet; erosion of articular surfaces leading to joint problems;
thickened, sweaty skin
Increased pigmentation over bony prominences and extensor surfaces,
generalised effects of dehydration, weight loss, weakness, fatigue,
orthostatic hypotension
Muscle wasting and weakness; thin, atrophic skin; poor wound healing;
plus generalised effects of hypertension and glucose intolerance
Arteriosclerosis, leading to calcification and atherosclerosis of arteries
Peripheral vascular disease is 50-100x more common in patients with
diabetes
Neuropathy can appear in various forms. The most common form is
bilateral, symmetrical, peripheral sensorimotor polyneuropathy, but wasting
of hip and thigh muscles (diabetic amyotrophy) predominantly affects elderly
males and single nerves can also be affected
Tetany (paraesthesia of lips, tongue, fingers, feet, muscle spasm). Lack of
vitamin D will lead to reduced calcium absorption in the gut,
compensated for by parathyroid hypersecretion, leading to bone resorption,
rickets or osteomalacia, with a tendency for bowed legs and fractures
Muscle weakness, bone resorption of phalanges and soft tissue
calcification, osteitis fibrosa cystica (rare)
Moist, warm skin, pretibial myxoedema (infiltrative dermopathy), muscle
weakness, wasting
Dry, scaly, coarse, thickened skin; a tendency to tarsal tunnel syndrome
Osteoporosis, leading to crush fractures of spine, and fractures of wrist
(Colles' fracture) and of neck of femur (Perthes' fracture)

acidosis or discontinuation of antithyroid med-
ication can all precipitate a thyrotoxic storm,
which is a medical emergency requiring immedi-
ate hospitalisation.
A patient who is receiving or who has
received long-term steroids in the previous year,
such as a person with rheumatoid arthritis, will
show a reduced inflammatory response, poor
healing ability and increased risk of infection
and at times of injury or surgery is at risk of
cardiovascular shock due to a sudden fall in
blood pressure.
The endocrinological condition which has
extremely important consequences is diabetes
mellitus. Whatever the cause, be it an autoim-
mune disease causing type 1 diabetes or a multi-
factorial response to obesity, genetic input and a
host of other factors, producing type 2 diabetes,
the consequences on the lower limb are equally
serious. The major consequences are an increased
risk of peripheral vascular disease and a high
risk of peripheral neuropathy. In patients with
diabetes, the single most important risk factor for
ulceration is the presence of peripheral neuropa-
thy and the most important contribution to
delayed healing is ischaemia. Thus, a thorough
assessment of both the cardiovascular and the
neurological systems are essential for patients
with diabetes (Chs 6 and 7).
There are several forms of neuropathy that
may affect the person with diabetes, but the
most common is peripheral polyneuropathy,
which can affect all branches of the peripheral
nervous system, i.e. sensory, motor and auto-
nomic nerves.
Sensory neuropathy leads to lack of aware-
ness of injury and a reduction in the protective
function of proprioceptive reflexes. Motor neu-
ropathy leads to wasting of intrinsic foot
muscles and eventual foot deformities such as
claw toes and a pes cavoid-type foot (Plate 31).
This in turn leads to increased pressure
on metatarsal heads, apices of digits and the
heels, with formation of callus and, if no pre-
ventative measures are taken, to tissue break-
down and ulceration (Plate 32). Autonomic
neuropathy leads to dry skin, with increased
callus formation and loss of the normal sympa-
THE AT-RISK FOOT 441
thetic reflex which adjusts vasomotor tone, so
that blood flow to the foot is increased. The foot
will appear warm with bounding pedal pulses
(Case history 17.1). However, because of the
lack of vasomotor tone, appropriate vasocon-
striction as a postural reflex is missing, leading
to orthostatic hypotension and arteriovenous
shunting, depriving skin and superficial tissues
of an adequate blood supply. This shunting also
leads to the characteristic sign of engorged
dorsal veins. Although the patient may lose the
ability to detect a painful stimulus, when single
nerves are affected the common symptom is a
severe, lancinating pain, often following the dis-
tribution of a single dermatome. This gives rise
to the phenomenon of the sensitive, insensate
foot.
Neuropathy is also a factor in the develop-
ment of the Charcot foot, where absence of
pain and other protective reflexes plus abnor-
mal blood flow to bone leading to osteopenia,
result in gross neuroarthropathy developing
from a seemingly trivial injury or even the
repetitive trauma of walking. The first signs of
such a process are usually a marked increase in
the temperature of one foot, with swelling, but
with no apparent cause such as infection. Any
Case history 17.1
Mr Brown, a 35-year-old Caucasian male, with type 1
diabetes present for 14 years, attended the podiatry
clinic for treatment of neuropathic ulcers. He weighed
15 stone and wore trainers bought in a high street
store. Mr Brown had recently completed a short
prison sentence where the ulcers had developed. He
had a deep, heavily exuding ulcer under the first
metatarsal head right foot, surrounded by callus and
a shallow ulcer on the plantar surface of the left heel.
A full assessment revealed the presence of bounding
pedal pulses, dry, warm skin, insensitivity to a 10 g
monofilament as far as the knees and inability to
distinguish between warm and cold or sharp and
blunt stimuli in both limbs. Some wasting of intrinsic
foot muscles was observed, with slight clawing of
toes and prominent metatarsal heads and heels.
Diagnosis: diabetic neuropathic ulcers. The risk
factors contributing to the ulcerations were deemed to
be peripheral neuropathy, excessive body weight
acting on bony prominences and failure to remove
callus build-up.
 442 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
temperature difference of 2°C or more between
the two feet of a patient with diabetes should be
immediately investigated to rule out infection
or acute neuroarthropathy. If early detection is
missed and the foot goes on to develop a
chronic Charcot foot, it will be at high risk of
ulceration, due to the abnormal pressure points
created by the deformity (Plate 33).
Diabetes is an important risk factor for athero-
sclerosis and peripheral vascular disease. The
pathology is identical to that in non-diabetic
patients, but gender difference is lost so that
females are equally at risk at all ages. The hyper-
glycaemia and dyslipidaemia associated with
diabetes appears to upset the delicate balance of
endothelial events that maintains the integrity
and patency of the large and medium vessels,
tipping them over towards atheroma formation
sooner than in non-diabetic patients.
Atherosclerosis also develops more distally in
people with diabetes, with tibial vessels fre-
quently affected and focal stenotic lesions being
more common. In addition, development of col-
lateral circulation is impaired, so that proximal
lesions will have a more profound effect on
distal regions than in non-diabetic patients.
Early calcification of the tunica media of arteries
is also seen. This is a separate process from the
calcification process of Monckebergs sclerosis,
which develops with ageing in medium and
small muscular arteries independently from
atherosclerosis and is clinically insignificant as
it does not interfere with blood flow (Cotran et
al 1994). Pedal vessels are rarely affected by
either atherosclerosis or calcification, an impor-
tant point to bear in mind when deciding on
appropriate tests for measuring the degree of
ischaemia in the foot.
H was commonly believed that a similar
pathology affected small vessels, giving rise to
the term diabetic microangiopathy, and being
put forward as the cause of isolated events of
digital gangrene in the presence of palpable
pedal pulses. However, no evidence exists for
such a pathology and although functional abnor-
malities of small vessels do exist, the only
demonstrable pathology is that of thickening of
the basement membrane. Such events are no
longer thought to be responsible for necrosis in
the absence of large-vessel disease and are no
longer considered an impediment to the success-
ful outcome of vascular reconstruction.
If ischaemia is present and remains uncor-
rected, loss of tissue viability is inevitable. This
alone is unlikely to lead directly to tissue break-
down, but will almost certainly do so in the pres-
ence of other factors, such as ill-fitting footwear,
tight hosiery, etc. Similarly, uncorrected
ischaemia will delay or prevent healing of any
ulcer. Thus, if ischaemia is present, part of the
management must be to improve blood supply if
at all possible.
Ischaemic ulcers, whether associated with dia-
betes or not, have characteristic features which
distinguish them from neuropathic and venous
ulcers, as shown in Table 17.11 (Plates 34 and 35)
(Mason et al 1999).
It is considered that at least 35% of all diabetic
patients will have asymptomatic neuropathy
(Edmonds & Foster 2000). Various studies into
the aetiology of diabetic ulcers have shown that
over half will be neuropathic and a very small
number will be ischaemic, the remainder having
both neuropathy and ischaemia. Bearing in mind
the role of neuropathy and ischaemia in the pre-
vention and healing of ulcers, most practitioners
assign their patients with diabetic ulcers into
either a neuropathic group or a neuro-ischaemic
group and treat accordingly. Careful cardiovas-
cular and neurological assessment of the lower
limb is therefore essential.
The foot that is at highest risk will be the insen-
sate, pulseless foot and a common cause of ulcer-
ation is poorly fitting footwear (Fig. 17.1) (Case
history 17.2). Often such a patient will be
wearing shoes that are one or more sizes too
small, to avoid the sensation that the shoe is slip-
ping off the foot. This of course further compro-
mises the poor circulation, and the tissues with
an already reduced tissue viability will be unable
to withstand the increased ischaemia, resulting
in breakdown. Thorough footwear assessment
(Ch, 10) is therefore also essential.
Diabetes also increases the susceptibility of
the patient to a wide range of infections, both
bacterial and fungal, probably with hypergly-
 THE AT-RISK FOOT 443

Table 17.11 Characteristic features of ischaemic, neuropathic and venous ulcers

Ischaemic ulcers Neuropathic ulcers Venous ulcers

Usually very painful, pain alleviated
by limb dependency
Small, shallow, punched-out
appearance
Dry or small amount of exudate
Pale, grey or yellow base
On dorsum or apices of toes, under
nails, borders of feet (see Plate 2)
Thin surrounding skin, often a halo of
erythema
Often painless
Often very deep
Often copious exudate, may be bloody
Red or yellow (infected) base
Under metatarsal heads, apices of
clawed toes, heels
Thick border of callus surround
Associated with an aching or bursting
pain, alleviated by limb elevation
Shallow, spreading, with irregular
borders
Copious, often smelly exudate
Red or yellow (infected) base
Distal third of leg (see Plate 8)
Often associated with skin scoriation
or eczema, telangiectases and
haemosiderosis. Varicose veins may be
visible (see Plate 6)

caemia, impaired leucocytic function and poor
blood supply all playing a role. As mentioned
earlier, infection is rarely a cause of ulceration,
but once a portal of entry is created, infection is
very likely. The practitioner must be alert to
any signs of infection, e.g. swelling, pain,
redness, warmth, pus and any signs that the
infection is spreading, e.g. cellulitis, lymphangi-
tis. The practitioner needs to be aware of the
possibility of spread of infection to bone (osteo-
myelitis) which is not initially detectable on x-
ray, especially in the neuropathic foot. Severe
infection in both types of foot can lead to the
blue-black discoloration of necrosis (wet gan-
grene). Where ischaemia is a prominent feature,
necrosis can occur in the absence of infection,
Figure 17.1 Ischaemic foot after dancing shoes.
due to an inadequate oxygen supply to the
tissues, i.e. dry gangrene (see Plate 3).
The hyperglycaemia of diabetes also affects
soft tissue such as tendons, leading to a
restricted range of motion at joints (cheiro-
arthropathy) and Dupuytren's contracture, both
of which are associated with an increased risk of
foot ulceration.
Case history 17.2
Mrs Shaw, a 55-year-old Caucasian female, with type
2 diabetes diagnosed 12 years ago, presented to the
podiatry clinic with a very painful ulcer over the
dorsolateral aspect of her right fifth toe (Fig. 17.1).
She was an enthusiastic ballroom dancer and had
been taking part in a contest the previous evening, for
which she had worn a pair of new dancing shoes. A
full primary assessment revealed a small ulcer with
no surrounding callus. There was little exudate
present, but there was erythema surrounding the
area. No pedal pulses were palpable on the right foot.
A Doppler tracing revealed dampened waveform of
both dorsalis pedis and tibialis posterior.
Anklelbrachial pressure index for DP was 0.7 and for
TP was 0.65. Tcp02 measurement of the dorsum of
the right foot was 40 mmHg.
The patient was able to detect sharp and blunt
stimuli on some toes but unable to detect a 10 g
monofilament or the vibrations of a 128 Hz tuning,
fork as far as the ankles.
Diagnosis: neuroischaemic ulcer. The main risk
factors were ischaemia, neuropathy and trauma from
ill-fitling shoes.
 444 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

There are also certain occasions when the
patient with diabetes is at increased risk, even
though his physical condition remains un-
changed, such as when on holiday abroad, par-
ticularly in hot countries, when the danger of
burns from hot sand or blisters from plastic
beach shoes are high possibilities.
Thus, in a patient with a diabetic ulcer that is
failing to heal, an holistic re-assessment is
needed, to discover any contributory risk factor
which may have been overlooked, such as non-
compliance with prescribed treatment/advice,
ill-fitting footwear, poor blood glucose control,
occult infection, peripheral vascular disease or
neuropathy.
Haematological system
Mention has already been made of the general
effects of anaemias on the lower limb in reducing
available oxygen to the tissues. However, certain
haematological conditions have a more direct
effect on the tissue viability of the lower limb
(Table 17.12).
Patients with sickle cell anaemia (homozy-
gous condition) or sickle cell trait (heterozygous
condition) are at increased risk of thrombotic
episodes, causing small-vessel obstruction due
to sickling of red blood cells in hypoxic condi-
tions. Any situation which could promote this
must be avoided. In the clinic this applies to
techniques such as the use of tourniquets and
tight dressings.
Patients suffering from vitamin B12 deficiency
are at risk of neuropathic ulceration, due to
peripheral sensory neuropathy.
The haematological system is also very useful
as an aid to diagnosis. Case history 17.3 gives
an example of where simple haematological
tests prove diagnostic for a rheumatological
condition which has contributed to an at-risk
foot. Such tests can be useful for staging of this
disease (Ch. 13).
Case history 17.3
Mrs Black is a 50-year-old school dinner lady. She
was diagnosed with rheumatoid arthritis 6 years ago
following an acute episode in which her toes and
fingers became painful and swollen. She has been
prescribed prednisolone to control her inflammation
during acute attacks. Her feet have become
deformed with severe hallux abductovalgus
deformities, digital retraction, plantar metatarsal
bursae and associated callosity. She finds it difficult
to walk during acute stages of her disease. Recent
blood tests confirm the presence of rheumatoid
factor (immunoglobulin M: IgM) and she has both
high erythrocyte sedimentation rate and C-reactive
protein level, indicative of severe or prolonged
inflammation. Recently, the medial eminence of her
left hallux valgus deformity has ulcerated and she
has presented with an acute infection of this lesion.
She has been prescribed Augmentin to manage her
current infection. Her footwear is inappropriate,
being slip-on style. Mrs Blackfinds laces or other
methods of fastening difficult, owing to her hand
pain and loss of dexterity. Her peripheral perfusion
is good, with Tcp02 levels of 60 mmHg and normal
ankle: brachial pressure indices. She has no
significant neurological dysfunction.

Table 17.12 Lower limb disease and haematological disorders

Condition Effects on lower limb
Sickle cell anaemia Chronic punched-out ulcers around the ankle, aseptic necrosis of
femoral head, peripheral vascular disease
Thalassaemias Leg ulcers
Pernicious anaemia (Vitamin B12 Glove and stocking anaesthesia, loss of vibration and position sense,
deficiency) muscle weakness
Polycythaemia Increased riskof thrombosis and haemorrhage
Haemophilia Risk of haemorrhage, bleeding into jointswith eventual destruction

Musculoskeletal system
There are a wide range of diseases in this cat-
egory, many of which reduce tissue viability.
Joint conditions producing foot deformities
threaten tissue viability when unaccommodating
footwear is worn or when the tissue overlying
the deformity is not protected from ground reac-
tion forces.
Rheumatoid arthritis. This is an inflammatory
joint condition characterised by rapid subluxa-
tion and deformation of joints, especially of
hands and feet, giving rise to ulnar deviation of
the hands and hallux abductovalgus deformity
of the feet. In 70% of cases it is correlated with
the presence of the rheumatoid factor, an anti-
body produced in response to the altered
immunoglobulin M (IgM) antibody which acts
as the trigger for autoimmune destruction of
joint structure. In addition, rheumatoid arthritis
is characterised by formation of soft tissue
nodules over subluxed joints, by atrophic skin,
muscle wasting and weakness and vasculitis. All
these factors compromise tissue viability.
Nodules are likely to break down due to pres-
sure and form deeply perforating ulcers. Muscle
weakness leads to vascular stasis and this, com-
bined with thin skin, increases the likelihood of
ulceration. Vascular involvement in rheumatoid
arthritis may be limited to discrete digital ateri-
tis, forming small lesions in the skin of digits
around nails folds or may involve a generalised
vasculitis, leading to thrombotic lesions of larger
vessels and leading to dry gangrene. Sadly, in
such cases, internal organs such as the heart are
also likely to be affected, often with fatal out-
comes. Vasculitis may also affect the vasa nervo-
rum, leading to peripheral sensorimotor
neuropathy with subsequent deformities such as
foot drop and with the tissues being at risk of
unnoticed trauma.
Sero-negative arthritides (e.g. psoriatic arthri-
tis, Reiter's disease, ankylosing spondylitis,
enteropathic arthritis, Behcet's disease) are a
range of arthritic conditions which, like rheuma-
toid arthritis, are inflammatory processes, but
which all test negative for the rheumatoid factor
and show a marked correlation with the presence
of the HLA B-27 antigen. They share certain char-
THE AT-RISK FOOT 445
acteristics in common, although not all character-
istics will be displayed in each case. All show a
tendency to involve the sacroiliac joints as well as
peripheral arthritis. Their effects on lower limb
tissue viability varies from one condition to
another.
Psoriatic arthritis. This condition tends to
involve terminal interphalangeal joints which
may precede skin and nail lesions by months or
years. Although slowly progressive, the condi-
tion can be extremely destructive, causing
absorption of the phalanges. Deformities and
skin lesions all compromise tissue viability.
Reiter's disease. This condition is usually sex-
ually transmitted and almost entirely confined to
males. The inflammatory arthritis involves toes,
ankles and knees and painful heel is a common
symptom. Skin and nail lesions (keratodermia
blennorrhagica) closely resemble those of psoria-
sis. Both the joint deformities and skin lesions
compromise tissue viability.
Ankylosing spondylitis. This condition affects
males far more often than females, but here the
spine, hips and shoulders are usually affected.
The feet are rarely involved and the condition
has little effect on tissue viability of the lower
limb.
Enteropathic arthritis. Linked to Crohn's
disease, enteropathic arthritis shows a flitting
peripheral arthritis of lower limb joints, which
remits as the bowel disease improves. Effects on
tissue viability of the lower limb are transitory.
Behcet's disease. This is a rare condition
which, in addition to peripheral arthritis, exhibits
vasculitis, venous thrombosis and neurological
defects. The patient is therefore at increased risk
of gangrene and amputation.
Other inflammatory conditions which do not
belong to the preceding groups are gout and
infective arthritis.
Gout. Gout is an inflammatory condition pro-
duced by the presence of high levels of uric acid,
which crystallises out in joints, provoking an
inflammatory response. The most common site is
the first metatarsophalangeal joint, producing
symptoms of acute pain, swelling and inflamma-
tion. Even if untreated, the symptoms subside
after 2-3 weeks and tissue viability returns to
 446 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
normal, but if repeated attacks occur, crystalline
deposits eventually cause destructive changes in
articular cartilage and underlying bone, with
permanent deformities. In severe cases, topha-
ceous ulcers may arise - especially over bony
prominences.
Infectious (syn: septic, pyogenic) arthritis.
Infectious arthritis is a rapidly evolving inflamma-
tory condition that can destroy a joint very quickly
if not arrested. The condition is usually extremely
painful and a portal of entry can usually be
detected. Patients particularly at risk of this condi-
tion include those on long-term steroid therapy or
on immunosuppressive drugs.
Degenerative joint conditions. Conditions such
as osteoarthrosis also result in deformities but are
usually slow to develop. The metatarsopha-
langeal joint of the first digit is the most com-
monly affected joint, giving rise to a hallux
limitus/rigidus or hallux valgus deformity. They
are often the result of injury or the wear and tear
of ageing.
Connective tissue disorders. These disorders
have many features in common, especially vas-
culitis and fibrosis of ground substance. Each is
a multisystem disease with variable characteris-
tics: several, including systemic lupus erythe-
matosus, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyositis and
dermatomyositis exhibit muscle and joint pains.
The vasculitis can lead to partial or total
obstruction of small vessels, in turn resulting in
tissue necrosis.
Table 17.13 Conditions producing peripheral neuropathy of the lower limb
Condition
Alcoholism
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease (peroneal atrophy)
Connective tissue diseases, e.g. rheumatoid arthritis,
systemic lupus erythematosus, polyarteritis nodosa, sarcoidosis
Drugs, toxins
Gutllaln-Barre syndrome
Hansen's disease (leprosy)
HIV/AIDS
Malignancies
Poliomyelitis
Trauma
Neurological system
We have already seen how degeneration of the
peripheral nervous system, as seen in diabetes
mellitus, can lead to profound deterioration in
tissue viability of the lower limb. Other condi-
tions (Table 17.13) can also produce peripheral
neuropathy with similar associated high-risk
problems.
Conditions affecting the spinal cord produce
symptoms which can be those of a sensory
and/ or a motor deficit, depending on the areas
affected. Examples are syringomyelia (sensory
and motor); motor neurone disease (motor only);
tabes dorsalis (tertiary syphilis)(sensory only);
subacute combined degeneration (vitamin B12
deficiency) (sensory and motor) and Friedreich's
ataxia (sensory and motor). Demyelinating dis-
eases such as multiple sclerosis also produce
combined symptoms - in this case, upper motor
neurone symptoms and sensory loss. In ad-
dition trauma, disc protrusion and neoplasms
can all produce acute sensory and motor
symptoms.
Conditions affecting the brain such as strokes
can produce symptoms of hemiplegic or
quadriplegic upper motor lesions or contralateral
sensory impairment.
Impaired sensory perception is a severe threat
to tissue viability, since it may rob the person of
the pain-warning system which normally alerts
the person to imminent or actual injury.
Postural instability, as seen in Parkinson's
Effect
Sensorimotor neuropathy
Predominantly motor neuropathy
Sensory or mixed neuropathy, mononeuritis multiplex
Generalised neuropathy
Predominantly motor neuropathy
Sensory neuropathy
Distal symmetrical polyneuropathy
Predominantly sensory
Motor neuropathy
Sensorimotor neuropathy

disease, renders the person liable to falls. Motor
neuropathies threaten tissue viability by creat-
ing deformities leading to high pressure points
which make the tissue vulnerable during every-
dayambulation.
For a fuller discussion of neurological condi-
tions and their effects on the lower limb, the
reader is directed to Chapter 7.
Renal system
Chronic renal failure results in a failure of the
kidney to carry out its important regulatory roles
of water and electrolyte balance, acid-base
balance, production of active vitamin 0 3 and pro-
duction of haemopoietins. Even with dialysis,
careful diet and medication, these disturbances can
lead to hypertension and thus increase the risk of
atherosclerosis or occasionally lead to peripheral
neuropathy. As the delicate calcium: phosphate
balance is disturbed, hypocalcaemia and hyper-
phosphataemia occur, leading to an increase in
parathyroid hormone and bone resorption with
rickets or osteomalacia as a consequence. Anaemia
can result from lack of erythropoietin.
Chronic glomerulonephritis which is charac-
terised by diffuse sclerosis of the glomeruli, is
usually accompanied by hypertension.
A familial disease of the kidney which also
results in rickets is characterised by impaired
renal resorption of phosphate and reduced
intestinal absorption of calcium. This in turn
leads to resorption of bone to raise plasma
calcium levels, resulting in rickets or osteomala-
cia. It is called vitamin O-resistant rickets to dis-
tinguish it from the deficiency disease.
Respiratory system
Chronic diseases affecting the respiratory
system, such as chronic obstructive airways
disease, chronic bronchiectasis, silicosis or
asbestosis, will affect the ability of the lungs to
fully oxygenate the blood pumped from the
right ventricle. Poorly oxygenated blood will
then be delivered to the tissues and will impair
healing ability.
THE AT-RISK FOOT 447
CLINICAL DECISION MAKING
The role of the practitioner in assessing the at-
risk foot is to achieve a rational diagnosis based
on key facts from the history, presenting problem
and physical examination of the patient. It is
important to recognise that in many cases the
patient will be consulting several health profes-
sionals about the primary underlying disorderts)
which have placed their feet at risk. The lower
limb practitioner should ensure liaison with
these other professionals to ensure that all practi-
tioners involved are in possession of the full facts
relating to the case, and that effective shared care
can be planned.
In many cases patients will have more than
one, or even multiple causes for their at-risk
feet. It is important to identify all potential risk
factors when assessing the patient. Failure to do
so can render management ineffective, delay
resolution or in severe cases result in deteriora-
tion of the patient. The key to full identification
of risk factors is a comprehensive and system-
atic physical examination and history-taking
approach.
Communication, and where necessary, referral
to other agencies or health professionals is of
utmost importance when dealing with the at-
risk foot. It is important for the lower limb prac-
titioner to ensure that the patient's general
medical practitioner is aware that the patient has
an at-risk foot, reasons for this risk status, the
chosen management plan, and that he is
informed when the patient's foot health status
improves or deteriorates. Similarly, if the patient
is under the shared care of hospital medical or
nursing staff, the lower limb practitioner should
ensure that these are likewise kept informed.
From time to time the lower limb practitioner
will fail to achieve the desired therapeutic inten-
tions. For example, an ulcer may fail to heal,
infection may spread, or pain may become
difficult to manage. In these cases the practi-
tioner should recognise as early as possible that
the treatment being provided is not able to bring
about the desired therapeutic effect. In these
cases the patient should be referred to the practi-
tioner best suited to provide intervention, which
 448 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
may be outside the scope of practice of the refer-
rer. Such a referral should not be seen as an
admission of failure, rather part of an overall
management plan. The earlier into the process
this referral takes place, the better the likely
outcome for the patient. Many patients have suf-
fered because practitioners have failed to recog-
nise that they are no longer in a position to help
the patient. Typical indications for referral to
medical or surgical colleagues are presented in
Table 17.14.
Practitioners should recognise the importance
of review and reassessment of at-risk patients.
Most people working with the at-risk foot have
felt a sinking feeling when an at-risk patient has
failed to attend several consecutive appoint-
ments, only to find that the patient has deterior-
ated and either been hospitalised or is sick at
home. Assessment and diagnosis is not an exact
science at the best of times. In cases of high risk,
and in situations where rapid change is likely, it
is therefore important to keep diagnosis and
treatment plans under review. Formal reassess-
ment of the patient should be undertaken at
regular intervals. Shorter intervals for reassess-
Table 17.14 Indications for medical or surgical referral
Indicator
Severe ischaemia
Deteriorating wound
• Extensive necrosis
• Risk of infection
Spreading infection
Cellulitis
Pyrexia
• Osteomyelitis
• Systemic spread
Worsening medical/physical state
• Sudden loss of weight
• Malaise
Fatigue
• Change in conscious level
Failure to prevent weightbearing
Pain which cannot be managed by over-the-
counter remedies
Unusual/suspicious changes in lesion
Extreme anxiety, depression or stress
Onset of confusion and/or dementia
ment will clearly be necessary for patients with
risk factors which are likely to undergo rapid
change (e.g. infection).
Second and even third opinions are often good
practice when dealing with the at-risk foot. The
lone practitioner is often not the best option for
the patient with severe foot disease. Practitioners
need to be sure that they have reached a correct
diagnosis, have devised appropriate and achiev-
able therapeutic objectives, and have put in place
effective management strategies. The views of
another practitioner (podiatric, medical or
nursing) can be invaluable in ensuring effective
clinical care for high-risk cases.
SUMMARY
Management of the at-risk foot can be a chal-
lenging but highly rewarding area of clinical
practice. This is an area of medicine with a
growing and strong evidence base. Practitioners
practising in this area need to be committed to
continuing professional development to ensure
that they are capable of practising safely, effec-
tively and with up-to-date knowledge.
Indicative referral Potential outcome
Vascular surgeon Reconstructive surgery
Orthopaedic surgeon Amputation
GP Systemic antibiotics
Consultant physician Intravenous antibiotics
Surgeon Surgical debridement or amputation
GP Medical review or hospitalisation
Consultant physician
GP or hospital consultant Hospitalisation for total bed rest
GP Prescription analgesics
GP or dermatologist Biopsy or excision
GP or psychiatrist Psychiatric evaluation
GP or psychiatrist Psychiatric evaluation

REFERENCES
Armstrong D G, Lavery LA, Harkless L B 1998 Validation of
a diabetic wound classfication system. Diabetes Care 21:
855-859
Carlson G L 1999 The influence of nutrition and sepsis upon
wound healing. Journal of Wound Care 8: 471--474
Cotran R S, Kumar V, Robins S L 1994 Pathologic basis of
disease. W B Saunders, Philadelphia, p 484
Edmonds M E, Foster A V M 2000 Managing the diabetic
foot. Blackwell Science, Oxford, pp 3,17-22
International Working Group on the Diabetic Foot 1999
International Consensus on the Diabetic Foot, pp 12,
66-67
Lavery L A, Armstrong D G, Harkless L B 1996
Classification of diabetic foot wounds. Journal of Foot
and Ankle Surgery 35: 528-531
Macfarlane R M, Jeffcoate W J 1999 Classification of diabetic
foot ulcers: the SCAD) SAD system. The Diabetic Foot 2:
123-131
Margolis D J, Kantor J, Berlin J A 2000 In: Boulton A J M,
Connor H, Cavanagh P (eds) The foot in diabetes. John
Wiley and Sons, Chichester, p 63
Mason J, O'Keefe C, McIntosh A, Hutchinson A, Booth A,
Young R J 1999 A systematic review of foot ulcers in
FURTHER READING
Banks V 1998 Wound assessment methods. Journal of
Wound Care 7: 211-212
THE AT-RISK FOOT 449
patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. 1: prevention.
Diabetic Medicine 16: 801-812
Oyibo S 0, Jude E B, Tarawneh I et al 2001 The effects of
ulcer size and site, patient's age, sex and type and
duration of diabetes on the outcome of diabetic foot
ulcers. Diabetic Medicine 18: 133-138
Rajbhandari S, Harris N D, Sutton M et al1999 Digital
imaging: an accurate and easy method of measuring foot
ulcers. Diabetic Medicine 16: 339-342
Richard J L, Daures J P, Parer-Richard C, Vannereau 0,
Boulot I 2000 Wounds 12: 148-154
Schubert V 1997 Measuring the area of chronic ulcers for
consistent documentation in clinical practice. Wounds
9: 153-159
Serra L 2000 Clinic currently testing the SCAD) SAD
classification system -letters. The Diabetic Foot 3: 10
Sims D S, Cavanagh, Ulbrecht J S 1988 Risk factors in the
diabetic foot. Recognition and management. Physical
Therapy 68: 1887-1902
Young M 2000 Classification of ulcers and its relevance to
management. In: Boulton A J M, Connor H, Cavanagh P
(eds) The foot in diabetes. John Wiley and Sons,
Chichester, pp 61-62
Letters 2000 The Diabetic Foot 3: 42
CHAPTER CONTENTS
Introduction 451
Assessmentof the. elderly population 452
Definitions of ageing 453
Lower limb consequencesof ageing 453
Assessmentof the elderly 455
Assessment of the elderly vascular system 455
Assessment of the elderly neurological system 456
Assessment of the elderly musculoskeletal
system 457
Assessment of elderly skin 458
Assessment of the elderly endocrine system 459
Assessment of the elderly haematological
system 459
Assessment of the elderly respiratory system 460
Functional assessment of the elderly 461
Assessment of gait in the elderly 462
Determinants of the quality of life 463
Assessment of cognitive status 463
Assessment of ability to perform basic foot care 464
Risk assessment and the elderly 465
Summary 466
Assessment of the
elderly
W Turner
INTRODUCTION
The majority of people seeking advice for foot
problems are over the age of 65 years. Surveys of
podiatry caseloads identify people over this age
as the largest consumers of foot health services.
As the population ages, so the demands on
providers of foot health services are likely to
increase. It is, therefore, essential for elderly
people to receive a structured and systematic
assessment of their foot/lower limb problem if
effective care is to be provided.
Whereas the general principles of assessment
of the lower limb apply to the elderly, there are
some particular considerations which practition-
ers need to consider when assessing the elderly.
Growing old is sometimes perceived as a disease
process. However, unlike a disease, growing old
is an inevitable, time-dependent process which
will occur to all individuals, providing that life is
not prematurely ended. Ageing is therefore an
unstoppable process for which there is no escape
or cure. The role of the practitioner is, therefore,
to minimise the effects of age-related degenera-
tion of body systems, and to enable the elderly to
compensate for such changes.
The aim of any intervention is to enable the
elderly person to continue to meet the chal-
lenges presented to them by their particular
environments and circumstances. For example,
a painful bunion joint may prevent an elderly
person walking to the shops. Appropriate
foot care provision may relieve the patient's
pain and improve physical function, thereby
451
 452 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
enabling the patient to walk to the shops
without pain and discomfort. Even relatively
simple foot problems, such as neglected long toe
nails, can limit an individual's ability to cope
with the demands of daily living. Nail problems
may prevent a person from wearing outdoor
shoes, and therefore restrict the person's living
environment to their home. Such confinement
can result in social isolation, causing further
health deterioration and severe reductions to
the quality of life.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY
POPULATION
The size of the elderly population has increased
over the last century. For example, in the United
Kingdom, the number of people of pensionable
age has risen from 2 million in 1901 to 10 million
in 2001 - Office for Census and Population
Statistics (OPCS) data. In the UK, the over 65s
now make up around 20% of the general popula-
tion. Reasons for improved longevity include
improved water and sewage treatment, better
nutrition, improvements in housing and better
social and economic circumstances. The impact
of improvements in medical care on average life
span is less quantifiable.
Community podiatry services predominantly
provide foot health services to people over the
age of 65 years. In 1997 a total of 975 000 new
referrals were made to NHS podiatry services in
the United Kingdom. Of these, 63% (614250)
were for people aged 65 years or over (Hansard
1998). In the same year, a total of 9 million face-
Table 18.1 Forecast prevalence of foot pathologies amongst the elderly population (from Turner et a12001)
Condition Mean prevalence
Hyperkeratosis 54.88
Hypertrophic nails 39.8
Toe deformity 30.68
Onychomycosis 40
Hallux deformity 23.14
Diminished sensation 19.83
Vascular insufficiency 16.98
Poor foot hygiene 20.9
Foot ulceration 4.15
to-face contacts were carried out by community
podiatry services, costing a total of £99.6 million
(US$149 million).
The prevalence of foot morbidity amongst
elderly populations is difficult to determine.
There have been relatively few studies which
have quantified foot morbidity amongst the
elderly. In those surveys of foot morbidity which
have been published, the most commonly
reported foot problems amongst the elderly were
difficulties with nail cutting, corns and hard skin,
respectively (Crawford et al 1995). In the same
survey, around half of people over the age of 75
years complained of two or more foot problems.
A recent meta-analysis of the literature shows
forecast prevalence data for foot pathologies
for populations over the age of 65 years
(Table 18.1). However, this does not include
studies of high-risk groups (e.g. people with
diabetes) and probably underestimates the true
prevalence of foot conditions in general popula-
tions. The large standard deviations and
confidence intervals for many of the pathologies
reviewed demonstrate the relatively high varia-
tion of reported prevalence of foot disease in the
literature. Nevertheless, these data can be used
to provide a rough estimate of foot morbidity
for a given population.
There is certainly evidence that the likelihood
of experiencing foot problems, and the likely
need for community foot health services,
increases with advancing age. This is particu-
larly true for elderly women, who are the largest
consumers of UK NHS podiatry services
(Harvey et al 1997).
95% confidence interval Standard deviation
47.78, 61.98 11.46
19.76, 59.84 14.42
9.91, 51.45 23.64
16.77, 63.23 23.7
14.77, 31.51 9.56
14.69, 24.97 4.54
10.4, 23.56 7.52
4.99, 36.81 11.45
0, 8.36 3.04
 ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 453

DEFINITIONS OF AGEING Table 18.2 Typical characteristics of elderly groups

The fact that ageing is a reproducible and pre- Group Characteristics

dictable process enables recognition of the signs Young old Recently retired
of ageing to be made. Ageing is a process begin- 65-74 years Active
Generally fit
ning at conception and continuing until death. Independent
The medical concept of ageing is to treat ageing Often able to drive
as a disease process. However, ageing is not a Able to take vacations
Relatively wealthy
disease, in spite of the fact that as one ages dis- Wide social network
eases become more common. The elderly, there- Often care providers to 'oldest old'
fore, experience greater numbers, variety and parents/relatives

severity of diseases than the young. However, for
a process to be due to ageing, it must be univer-
sal, progressive, intrinsic and deleterious
(Bennett & Ebrahim 1995). It is not surprising,
therefore, that the elderly are the greatest users of
health care services.
Arbitrary conventions tend to define 'the
elderly' as those over the age of 65. For the pur-
poses of population assessment, it is probably
more helpful to divide this group into three more
distinct categories (Bennett & Ebrahim 1995):
• 65-74 years: the young old
• 75-85 years: the old old
• 85 years + the oldest old.
Typical characteristics of each group are given
in Table 18.2.
LOWER LIMB CONSEQUENCES OF
AGEING
The lower limb often suffers the degenerative
effects of ageing owing to the fact that the foot is
a weightbearing structure which bears the
stresses of years of supporting and carrying the
body. As tissues deteriorate with advancing
years, disruption to the normal structure and
function of the foot is inevitable. Structural
change (e.g. joint disease, skin callus) will invari-
ably lead to a degree of loss of function, with
more severe structural disturbances leading to
greater functional impairment. Individuals are
often able to compensate for minor structural
deterioration in order to retain functional ability.
Multiple minor structural defects or single major
defects are likely to result in failed compensation
and adversely affect functional ability.
Old old Often widowed
75-85 years Increasing number of minor
medical problems
Increased likelihood of major medical
problems
Becoming less mobile
Often unable to drive
Dependent on public transport
Rarely take vacations
Generally not wealthy
Social network reducing, owing to
death of friends/relatives
Oldest old Usually widowed
85 years + Coping with major and minor
medical problems
Generally poor
Dependent on others to assist with
everyday tasks
Unable to drive
Travels for essential purposes only
Usually does not take vacations
Physical limitation to activity
Social network confined to close
friends/relatives/carers
From an assessment point of view, it is helpful
to determine what the individual patient is able
and unable to do. Functional ability is affected
by disease and/or the compensatory (coping)
mechanisms for the effects of disease. For
example, an elderly person may be unable to cut
her nails. The person is, therefore, defined as
being functionally unable to perform that activ-
ity. The practitioner may be able to determine a
range of diseases/age-related changes which
have resulted in this functional deterioration.
Often for any given individual, a combination of
coexisting factors contribute to functional loss.
Deterioration of vision, arthritic fingers, joint
diseases affecting the hips / spine, hiatus hernia
and motor weakness are typical examples of
 454 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
conditions which commonly lead to such loss of
function.
Table 18.3 identifies common structural
changes which occur to tissues of the foot and
which are related to the ageing process. Most
elderly people will frequently show signs of one
or more of these structural changes. The underly-
ing mechanisms responsible for such changes are
complex and often relate to combined, multiple
degeneration arising in other systems (e.g. vascu-
lar, endocrine and neurological systems).
Common foot pathologies seen in the elderly
are often not directly related to the physiologi-
cal effects of ageing but to the chronic, long-
term exposure to exogenous factors (Table 18.4).
For example, age-related changes to the skin are
most likely to arise as a result of a lifetime of
exposure to ultraviolet light. In the absence of
Table 18.3 Age-related structural changes to tissues of the
foot
Skin Skin moisture content reduces
Skin becomes drier
Skin more prone to fissuring
Skin is less flexible/elastic
Skin becomes weaker, more likely to tear or split
Atrophy or displacement of subcutaneous fat
may occur
Weightbearing forces on skin increase as foot
function worsens
Hyperkeratotic lesions become more likely
Number of pigmented lesions is likely to
increase
Extravasation of blood into skin is more likely
Loss of skin viability is more likely as a result of
deterioration in circulation
Nail Rate of nail growth reduces
Nail plate becomes drier
Nail plate becomes thicker
Increased likelihood of debris/callus in nail sulci
or beneath nail plate. Increased incidence of
subungual lesions
Involution of nail plate more likely
Nail plate becomes more brittle, and liable to
split/crack
Joints Increased likelihood of degenerative arthropathy
in weightbearing joints. Long-term compensation
for functional foot abnormalities likely to
contribute to joint pathology (e.g. hallux valgus,
hallux limitus)
Thickening of joint margins with resultant
decreased range of motion is likely
Overall mobility of foot joints reduced
Increased likelihood of joint deformity
Table 18.4 Exogenous factors associated with age-related
changes to the foot
Ultraviolet light (sunlight)
Diet
Smoking
Alcohol consumption
Chemicals/drugs
Occupation
Sports, hobbies and activities
Trauma
Footwear
Cosmetics
exposure to sunlight the skin ages very little
with time. The action of ultraviolet light expo-
sure to skin results in the production of free rad-
icals which have a long-term damaging effect on
cells. Many skin disorders which are commonly
associated with ageing are related to ultraviolet
exposure (Table 18.5). The foot is often at a
reduced risk of these ultraviolet light lesions
compared with more exposed parts of the body
(e.g. the face), owing to the fact that for most
people for most of the time the skin of the foot
is covered by footwear.
Foot disorders which occur as a direct result of
ageing tend to be associated with general systemic
(intrinsic) disease. The incidence of systemic
disease increases with advancing age. Elderly
people are also more likely to have several coex-
isting systemic disorders. The combined effects on
the foot of several systemic diseases occurring
simultaneously can be significant. Assessment of
the elderly patient should always, therefore,
include a full and comprehensive medical history
Table 18.5 Skin conditions seen in elderly people
associated with lifelong exposure to sunlight
Wrinkles
Hyperpigmentation
Hypopigmentation
Solar keratoses
Basal cell carcinoma
Squamous cell carcinoma
Malignant melanoma
Dry, inelastic skin

and physical examination. Likewise, a familial
history is also important in assessment of the
elderly patient.
The consequences of lower limb disease for the
elderly patient can be significant. Foot disorders
can make a significant contribution to the risk for
falls, loss of mobility, loss of independence,
inability to carry out activities of daily living,
pain, depression, social isolation, deterioration of
quality of life, loss of tissue viability and ampu-
tation. What may appear to be minor foot pathol-
ogy can have a significant effect on the lifestyle of
the patient. The assessment of the elderly patient
should therefore seek to determine how the
patient's foot health is affecting lifestyle.
It is also important to bear in mind that condi-
tions can deteriorate very quickly for elderly
people. What is a minor problem one day can
become a major limb or life-threatening problem
the next. There are several reasons why patholo-
gies in the elderly patient are likely to deterio-
rate faster. These include a less effective immune
system, poor peripheral circulation, diminished
peripheral sensory perception, motor weakness,
confusion, loss of tissue resilience, combined
systemic pathology, effects of drugs, inability to
self-care, poor nutrition, poor hygiene and inad-
equate footwear.
Evidence for rapid change of foot health
amongst an elderly population has recently
been borne out of a study of the discharge of
elderly patients from a community podiatry
department (Turner et al 2001). In this study
5000 people over the age of 65 who were
assessed as being of 'low risk' for serious foot
pathology were discharged from the service.
Within a 2-year period following discharge 712
(14%) of these patients were re-referred to the
department with serious foot problems which
caused them to be classified as 'high risk'
according to the department's criteria. Reasons
for re-referral included infection or ulceration
(162 re-referrals), diabetes (178 re-referrals),
peripheral vascular disease or neuropathy (310
re-referrals), increased risk due to change of
medication (62 re-referrals).
Practitioners need to be aware that assess-
ments of the foot health status of elderly patients,
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 455
and in particular risk assessment, can only repre-
sent foot health status at a specific point in time.
Inferences for the future foot health needs of a
patient based on such 'snapshot' assessments
carry significant risks. A single major event - e.g.
cerebrovascular accident (eVA), trauma and
infection - or multiple minor events (e.g. neglect
of self-care, minor trauma, change to footwear)
can have a dramatic effect on an individual's foot
health status. Since the occurrence of these events
is unpredictable in elderly people, it is important
to review or reassess the foot health status and
needs of the elderly patient regularly.
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY
The practical approach to the assessment of the
elderly patient varies little from the standard
approach to assessment. However, some addi-
tional points are worthy of consideration. For
several systems, assessment will take the form of
history taking and physical examination (e.g. vas-
cular, neurological, orthopaedic, dermatological).
For some systems, history taking alone is nor-
mally required (e.g. endocrine, renal). Specialist
tests or investigations may be required for com-
plete assessment of other systems where appro-
priate (e.g. respiratory, haematological).
Assessment of the elderly vascular
system
Leonardo da Vinci cheerily recognised the
importance of vascular degeneration in the
elderly when he wrote:
veins which by the thickening of their tunics in the
old, restricts the passage of their blood and by this
lack of nourishment destroys the life of the aged
without any fever, the old coming to fail little by little
in slow death
(in Bennett & Ebrahim 1995)
Age-related changes to the vascular system in
the elderly arise as a result of age-dependent
(physiological) changes and disease (pathologi-
cal) processes. It is thought that the physiological
changes contribute very little to the overall dete-
rioration of vascular function, and that disease
processes are more significant (Wei 1992).
 456 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
The most significant changes to the arteries
include calcification of the tunica media (arterio-
sclerosis), fibre-fatty occlusion of the vessels (ath-
erosclerosis) and arterial complications of these
processes (aneurysm, thrombosis, embolism). The
prevalence of peripheral arterial insufficiency
amongst the elderly is around 16% (Turner et al
2000). One of the most important factors con-
tributing to the pathology of arterial disease in
the elderly is elevation of arterial blood pressure.
Both systolic and diastolic pressures tend to rise
with advancing age. The reasons for this are
complex, but include increased peripheral resis-
tance and physical fitness.
To reduce the risk of age-related arterial
disease, control of blood pressure is important. It
is therefore beneficial for all patients to have their
blood pressure reviewed at least annually.
Treatment for high blood pressure is generally
beneficial in terms of improvements to mortality
and morbidity up to the age of 80 years. How-
ever, side effects of antihypertensive therapy
(especially diuretics) in the elderly can be
significant and lead to additional health con-
cerns, including postural hypotension, falls,
dehydration and occasionally gout.
Apart from hypertension, other major risk
factors for arterial disease in the elderly include
hyperglycaemia and hyperlipidaemia. Undetec-
ted or poorly controlled diabetes mellitus is the
commonest cause of hyperglycaemia in the
elderly. Early detection of impaired glucose toler-
ance (or elevated glycosylated haemoglobin
levels) coupled with resultant management of
hyperglycaemia is therefore useful in the long-
term prevention of vascular disease. Similarly,
screening for hyperlipidaemia and where appro-
priate dietary modification and/or use of lipid
lowering drugs can be important in an overall
plan of action to reduce an individual's risk of
vascular disease.
The consequences of poor arterial supply to
the feet vary from minor changes to poorly nour-
ished tissues, like dry skin, brittle nails, hair loss,
atrophy of fat pad, to more severe foot problems
like ischaemia, ulceration and gangrene. A struc-
tured vascular assessment as detailed in Chapter
6 is, therefore, essential for all elderly patients.
Deterioration of the peripheral venous system
is also common in elderly people. Venous hyper-
tension in the elderly may arise as a result of
right-sided congestive heart failure, lack of exer-
cise (inactive skeletal muscle pumps), valvular
dysfunction, deep vein thrombosis, venous
occlusion, respiratory disease (poor respiratory
pump mechanism) or abdominal masses (e.g.
tumours). The lower limb consequences of
venous hypertension include venous stasis
eczema, venous ulceration, oedema, hyperpig-
mentation (especially haemosiderosis) and in
rare, usually long-standing cases, malignant
(fungating) wounds.
The role of the inter-professional team is
important in conducting an assessment of the
vascular system in elderly patients with periph-
eral vascular pathologies. Frequently, patients
who demonstrate lower limb signs of peripheral
vascular disease will also have coexisting vascu-
lar degeneration affecting other tissues and
organs of the body (e.g. kidney, eye, brain, heart).
Similarly, vascular disease affecting multiple
organ systems is a good reminder to the practi-
tioner to conduct a thorough assessment of the
lower limb vascular supply.
As previously stated, the elderly patient is sus-
ceptible to rapid change in vascular status.
Therefore, frequent reassessment and update of
vascular assessment is necessary, especially for
the 'old old' and 'oldest old' patients who are
likely to be most at risk.
Assessment of the elderly
neurological system
Age-related changes to the peripheral nervous
system can result in deficiencies in the motor,
sensory or autonomic nerves of the lower limb.
Signs of such deficiencies include defects of
sensory perception, muscle weakness, deformity,
dry skin and vasodilation.
The literature suggests that defective sensory
perception is present in around 20% of people
over the age of 65 years (see Table 18.1). The
prevalence of peripheral neuropathy is greatest
in older people with diabetes mellitus, where up
to 43% of people can be expected to have some

---------------------------------------
abnormal neurological assessment findings
(Plummer & Albert 1996). Loss of vibration per-
ception as detected by the use of a tuning fork,
and loss of touch/pressure sensation as detec-
ted by a 10 g monofilament are the commonest
findings in the elderly. The likely presence of
neurological abnormalities increases with
advancing age.
Defects affecting upper motor neurones are
often related to disorders which occur more fre-
quently in the elderly (e.g. CVA). These disorders
may result in severe functional disturbance, and
limit mobility. Disorders which a younger person
could normally compensate for are often difficult
for an elderly person to adjust to. Reasons for
failure to compensate for neurological distur-
bance might include limited capability to re-learn
skills (rehabilitation), coexisting or multiple
pathologies and severity of disruption to normal
function. As a result, many elderly lose a degree
of mobility and independence following a
sudden deterioration in neurological function.
Key neurological indicators include those
tests described in Chapter 7. However, practi-
tioners should avoid making long-term predic-
tions of risk based on clinical assessment. As for
vascular assessment, deterioration in neurologi-
cal function can occur suddenly and may go
undetected by the patient. Regular review of
neurological status is important in the overall
risk management of people over the age of
65, and is particularly important for those over
the age of 85 years.
Deterioration of nervous system function in
the elderly is often clinically significant because
other systemic problems coexist. Many elderly
people with peripheral sensory neuropathy will
also have some degree of vascular insufficiency,
and also foot deformities. Abnormal weight-
bearing pressures, poor footwear, skin lesions,
poor hygiene & self-care or trauma can there-
fore place the patient at high risk of loss of
tissue viability.
The relationship between foot neuropathy and
foot ulceration is a significant one. In one study of
308 patients, 28% of people who could not detect
a 10 g monofilament at any of 10 sites on the foot
developed foot ulcers, compared with 3% of
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 457
people who could perceive the monofilaments at
all sites (Plummer & Albert 1996).
Assessment of the elderly
musculoskeletal system
Musculoskeletal problems are extremely
common in the elderly. Disorders such as
osteoarthritis, osteoporosis and osteomalacia
have an increased prevalence with advancing
age. Deterioration of the musculoskeletal is
responsible for much of the impaired mobility
seen in elderly people.
As far as the lower limb is concerned, the
elderly are more likely to suffer from common
lower limb disorders, including hallux valgus
and lesser toe deformities. Around 23% of the
elderly are likely to have hallux deformities and
around 30% have lesser toe deformity (see Table
18.1). Practitioners are therefore likely to see the
consequences of these deformities arising from
pressure from footwear on deformed joints or
normal weightbearing forces. These associated
pathologies include corns, calluses, blisters and
thickened or deformed toe nails. In patients with
vascular or neurological deficit, ulceration is
commonly seen to affect deformed toes.
Assessment of the musculoskeletal system in
an elderly person is not significantly different
from that of a younger person. However, it is
often impractical to examine joints of the hip and
knee in as much detail (and as vigorously') as for
young patients. It should be remembered that
old people bruise easily, skin may be weak and
joints unstable. Rough examination has the
potential to cause the elderly severe discomfort
or even harm.
Most of the information about musculoskeletal
system disease can be gained from gross exami-
nation and noting any obvious findings (e.g.
obvious foot deformities, swollen joints,
inflamed areas). The medical history may reveal
a history of musculoskeletal disease (e.g. rheu-
matoid arthritis, osteoarthrosis, fracture, back
problems). Observing the patient during walking
can also provide important indications of func-
tional ability. However, care should be taken with
elderly people if using a motorised treadmill for
 458 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
the observance of gait. Elderly people may find it
difficult to adjust their cadence to the speed of
the treadmill, become unstable and/or fall.
Another risk of treadmill use in the elderly is
demanding unaccustomed levels of exercise from
the patient and placing the patient at risk of acute
ischaemia. This may manifest as acute skeletal
muscle cramps, or (worse) acute angina or even
myocardial infarction.
Skin lesions are another useful indicator of
musculoskeletal problems. Skin lesions such as
corns or calluses tend to arise as a result of trauma
to the skin exacerbated by deformed joints,
difficulty accommodating the foot in appropriate
shoes or compensation for functional pathologies.
Elderly people are more likely to be offered
conservative treatment for lower limb joint
pathologies rather than surgical intervention.
This is particularly true where the patient has
complex or multiple systemic problems includ-
ing cardiovascular or neurological disease. A
significant proportion of elderly people are there-
fore prescribed drugs to manage musculoskeletal
pain and inflammation. The most common cate-
gory of drugs prescribed for this purpose is the
nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs).
Use of these drugs can result in gastric irritation
and bleeding, particularly when used long term.
Therefore, any elderly patient taking NSAIDs
showing signs of anaemia or gastric disturbance
should be more closely investigated.
Assessment of elderly skin
As stated above, most of the changes to the skin
which occur with advancing age do so as a result
of cumulative exposure of the skin to ultraviolet
light (sunlight) (see Table 18.5). Increased colla-
gen cross-linking, drying and thinning of the
skin are all a result of ultraviolet light exposure.
Many of the effects of ageing on the skin can be
prevented by avoidance of exposure to sunlight,
or use of appropriate covers/barrier creams.
Bruises and other vascular lesions are more
likely in the elderly patient. These lesions arise as
a result of increased capillary fragility, with cap-
illaries more likely to leak blood into the skin. In
the elderly patient reabsorption of extravasated
blood is much slower than in a younger person.
These lesions are often collectively referred to as
'senile purpura'. Spider naevi, telangiectasiae
and haemosiderosis are skin conditions which
are more common in elderly people. These vas-
cular /haemorrhagic skin lesions are more
common and significant in elderly people taking
anticoagulant drugs (e.g. warfarin) following
thrombosis.
Corns and calluses are likely to be a greater
problem for the elderly. Dryness and reduced
skin resilience predispose to hyperkeratotic skin
lesions. In addition, the elderly are more likely to
have functional foot pathology and/or deformi-
ties which cause abnormal weightbearing lesions
or lead to problems accommodating the foot in
shoes. Vascular or neurological impairment may
then lead to reductions in tissue viability and
infection, ulceration or gangrene.
The elderly are more likely to be troubled by
difficult toe nails. Nails become thicker and
harder with advancing age. Years of repeated
minor trauma from footwear can result in nail
plate abnormalities. Periungual and subungual
lesions may also be a problem (e.g. onychopho-
sis). Inability to self-care may result from poor
eyesight, back pain, hiatus hernia, arthritic
fingers, hip pathologies or obesity. Neglect of
simple routine nail care can result in potentially
serious foot pathology (e.g. infection, ulceration),
particularly where there are coexisting medical,
vascular or neurological abnormalities.
The skin of the elderly patient has a less effec-
tive immune function than younger skin. The
number and function of Langerhans' cells and
epidermotrophic lymphocytes reduce as a result
of ageing. Skin infection is therefore more likely
in old age. This is a particularly significant
problem for elderly patients with hypergly-
caemia, vascular insufficiency or on long-term
steroid therapy.
Some elderly people have very thin, 'papery'
skin. This is known as 'transparent skin syn-
drome' and results in a skin which looks and
feels a little like tissue paper. Skin becomes
wrinkled and loose, has poor elasticity and
bruises and bleeds very easily. Skin tears easily,
and is slow to heal. Vascular /haemorrhagic skin

lesions are very common. This syndrome is
commonly associated with osteoporosis. A
similar skin condition can be seen in some
patients following long-term steroid treatment
(e.g. for rheumatoid arthritis).
Many elderly patients complain about severe
itching of the skin (senile pruritus). This can be
an important indicator of an underlying pathol-
ogy. The practitioner should attempt to identify
the cause of any pruritus. Table 18.6 identifies
some of the common causes of pruritus in the
elderly.
Assessment of the elderly endocrine
system
Endocrine dysfunction is more common in the
elderly. The most significant endocrine disorder
for the lower limb is diabetes mellitus. Type
2 (noninsulin-dependent) diabetes mellitus
becomes much more prevalent with advancing
age. The chronic complications of hypergly-
caemia result in damage to nerves (neuropathy)
and arteries (angiopathy). These disorders
create an increased risk of infection, ulceration,
gangrene and amputation, and account for
significant morbidity for a large number of
elderly people. The primary clinical signs of
diabetes mellitus may often first be identified in
the lower limb. Signs of neuropathy, recurrent
skin infection or arterial disease in an elderly
patient should always be followed up with
testing for diabetes (e.g. glucose tolerance test).
Table 18.6 Causes of pruritus in the elderly
Excessive dryness of the skin
Haematological disorder (e.g. polycythaemia rubra vera)
Hepatic disease
Renal disease
Malignant disease
Drugs
Infestations (e.g. scabies, lice, fleas)
Inflammatory skin diseases (e.g. eczema, psoriasis)
Incontinence
Autonomic dysfunction
Hypersensitivity
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 459
Other consequences of ageing include the
menopause. In women the menopause is an
inevitable consequence of ageing. It results in a
depletion of oestrogen production, with a rise
in the secretion of gonadotrophic hormones -
follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinis-
ing hormone (LH). A reduction in oestrogen is
associated with osteoporosis, dryness of the skin
and flushing/sweating. Osteoporosis is a
significant risk, and occurs because the bone
cannot metabolise vitamin D and calcium
without oestrogen. Pathological fractures may
occur in response to relatively minor trauma in
patients with advanced osteoporosis. The most
significant site for osteoporotic fracture in the
lower limb is the neck of the femur. Fracture at
this site commonly occurs from falls and can be
extremely disabling, and is even responsible for
premature death in some people.
Postmenopausal changes to the skin can
result in dryness and increased fissuring of
'fatty' areas of skin. A common complaint in
postmenopausal women is dry heel fissures,
which may be inflamed and prone to bleeding.
This condition is referred to as keratoderma
climaciericum. It is aggravated by summer con-
ditions (evaporation of surface water), excessive
bathing (including foot spasl), open-backed
shoes and hard soles.
Thyroid dysfunction is also a common problem
in the elderly, but can be difficult to diagnose or
recognise. Hypothyroidism is a common finding
in elderly people as a result of decreased secretion
levels of thyroxine. The signs of hypothyroidism
in the elderly may be subtle, and reflect common
symptoms associated with being elderly. Signs
include constipation, tiredness, dry skin and hair,
weight gain and cold intolerance. Elderly people
with hypothyroidism are at an increased risk of
winter chilling: hypothermia is a significant risk
for people with inadequate household heating or
poor nutrition.
Assessment of the elderly
haematological system
Blood disorders such as anaemia can complicate
an already compromised lower limb. Just
 460 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
- - - - - - - -----------------
because the foot is warm and has bounding
pulses does not always guarantee adequate
tissue nutrition. The quality of the blood is
important too. Anaemia is relatively common in
elderly people, and in mild cases can be difficult
to recognise. Symptoms of anaemia can be slow
to develop, and can be mistaken for 'growing
old'. Lethargy, general malaise, intermittent clau-
dication, pallor, headache, breathlessness, angina
and skin atrophy are all features of anaemia but
are also features which can be seen as part of the
ageing process.
The lower limb consequences of anaemia can
be particularly significant for the elderly patient.
This is particularly true if the anaemia is 'super-
imposed' on coexisting vascular disorders.
Adequate tissue nutrition is dependent upon
both adequate quantity and quality of blood
reaching the tissues. Quantity is affected by
change in the diameter and resilience of the blood
vessels. Quality is affected by disorders of blood
cells, oxygen-carrying capacity or increased ten-
dency to form blood clots. Loss of tissue viability
may occur where reductions in either the quantity
or quality of blood fails to meet the basic nutritive
requirements of respiring cells.
The commonest types of anaemia to affect the
elderly are iron-deficiency anaemia, pernicious
anaemia and folate-deficiency anaemia. Iron-
deficiency anaemia commonly arises following
haemorrhagic disorders, including those caused
by gastric bleeding following long-term use of
NSAIDS. In addition to the general symptoms of
anaemia given above, clinical features of iron-
deficiency anaemia may include koilonychia
(spoon-shaped nails) and brittle nails.
Pernicious anaemia is a common form of
anaemia seen in the elderly. The incidence is
around 1 :8000 people over the age of 60 years. It
arises as a result of vitamin B12 deficiency. Usually
this occurs due to a lack of intrinsic factor, which
is normally produced by the gastric parietal cells.
Intrinsic factor is essential for the absorption of
vitamin B12 in the ileum. Abnormalities of intrin-
sic factor secretion usually arise as a result of
autoimmune processes. The disease is more
common in people with other autoimmune dis-
eases including thyroid disorders, Addison's
----------
disease and vitiligo. For males with pernicious
anaemia, there is an increased incidence of gastric
carcinoma.
In addition to the general symptoms of
anaemia, clinical features of pernicious anaemia
may include weight loss and peripheral neuropa-
thy. Peripheral neuropathy can be significant and
is similar to that seen in diabetes mellitus.
Posterior and lateral columns of the spinal cord
are involved (subacute combined degeneration).
Patients often complain of paraesthesia of toes,
and demonstrate poor vibration perception,
touch/ pressure sensation and proprioception.
Progressive muscle weakness may result in
digital deformity and ataxia. Other features may
include a sore red tongue (glossitis), purpura and
mild fever.
Folate-deficiency anaemia is sometimes seen in
elderly people and is associated with malnutri-
tion. The daily requirement for folate is around
100 p.g. Dietary sources include green vegetables,
kidney, liver and other offal. Cooking can destroy
folate. Anaemia due to folate deficiency produces
generalised symptoms as described above.
Assessment of the elderly respiratory
system
The respiratory system serves to oxygenate the
blood and to eradicate waste gases from the
body. Disorders of the respiratory system may
therefore result in a failure to adequately oxy-
genate the blood, or an accumulation of waste
gases. The latter condition results in acidosis,
which is ultimately fatal.
Assessment of the elderly patient should
include observations of respiratory function.
Age-related changes to respiration may include
an elevated respiration rate, shallower breaths,
altered chest sounds and chronic cough. These
changes are more likely in people who are or
have been smokers. Respiratory abnormalities
may also lead to significant problems for elderly
people with asthma, bronchitis, emphysema and
congestive heart failure.
Respiratory problems are a significant factor in
the pathology of some lower limb disorders. As
with many systemic conditions seen in elderly

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . - - _ ...- - - - - - - - - - _ . - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - - - - - - -
people, respiratory problems seen in combina-
tion with other coexisting disorders present the
greatest threat. For example, elderly people with
emphysema coupled with peripheral vascular
disease may suffer ulceration of the foot. In this
example, the reduction in oxygenation of the
blood may complicate an already compromised
tissue viability.
Functional assessment of the elderly
Functional assessment of the elderly patient is an
important part of the assessment process. A good
functional assessment will provide the practi-
tioner with a clear impression of a patient's capa-
bilities and limitations and identify the effect of
lower limb disorders on lifestyle. It will also
assist with risk assessment of the elderly person.
Table 18.7 details aspects of functional assess-
ment which may be included as part of the
general assessment of the elderly patient.
Assessment of function before and after clini-
cal intervention can be a useful means for the
determination of clinical effectiveness. Some of
the key therapeutic objectives for managing
lower limb pathology in the elderly are con-
cerned with the following:
1. maintaining or improving the patient's
independence
2. improving the patient's mobility
3. improving the patient's quality of life
4. enabling the patient to undertake activities of
daily living (ADLs).
These objectives are as important as disease/
symptom specific objectives (e.g. reducing
pain). Therapeutic interventions which have an
effect on the above will often make a significant
difference to the patient. This is true even where
cure of the presenting problem is not possible.
Most patients are more concerned about reduc-
tions in functional ability and becoming depen-
dent on others (i.e, becoming a 'burden') than
anything else.
An inter-professional approach to therapy
can be particularly useful to the assessment of
function. Physiotherapists and occupational ther-
apists, for example, make use of a variety of func-
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 461
Table 18.7 Examples of functional assessments of the
elderly patient
Independence What are the patient's capabilities?
Can the patient carry out activities of daily
living without assistance?
Is the patient adequately compensating for
the effects of disease?
Can the patient adjust to changes in her
environment?
What does the patient need the help of
other people to do?
What does the patient's social network
consist of?
Mobility Is the patient able to move around her
environment without assistance?
Does the patient drive?
Can the patient climb stairs safely?
Can the patient manage to do her own
shopping, visit hairdresser, chemist, doctor,
etc.?
Does the patient require special aids to
assist her mobility (e.g. stick, frame,
wheelchair)?
Is the patient stable when standing or
walking?
Is the patient likely to fall?
Activities of What activities does the patient feel
daily living she needs to do on a daily basis?
Can the patient cope with feeding and
grooming herself?
Can the patient dress/undress
independently?
Can the patient manage to cut her own
toe nails and/or apply creams to the feet?
Can the patient maintain a clean and
hygienic home?
Quality of life Is the patient satisfied with her life?
Is the patient happy or sad?
Is the patient lonely or isolated?
Does the patient keep herself occupied?
Are there things which the patient enjoys
doing?
Does the patient feel guilty about anything?
Is the patient worried, frightened or
concerned?
Is the patient experiencing painful
symptoms?
Does the patient feel that physical disease
or pain is affecting her lifestyle?
Cognitive state Is the patient confused?
Is the patient forgetful?
Can the patient describe her symptoms?
Is the patient capable of giving informed
consent?
tional assessment strategies which can provide
the practitioner with useful information as part of
an overall assessment of the patient.
 462 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Functional assessment often focuses on the fol-
lowing:
• mobility and independence
• quality of life
• ability to perform ADLs.
In addition, there are other functional assess-
ments which may be particularly relevant to the
lower limb:
• gait analysis
• ability to self-care for feet.
The most popular means of assessing mobility
and independence is the Barthel index. This was
first developed by Mahoney & Barthel (1965) for
the assessment of long-stay hospital patients with
neuromuscular or musculoskeletal problems. It
has since been used for the assessment of com-
munity- (home-) based patients with a variety of
pathologies. The index is designed for the assess-
ment of function both before and after treatment.
It is therefore useful for the determination of the
efficacy of clinical intervention. Table 18.8 shows
the key elements of the Barthel index.
The Barthel index does not include some
important activities of daily living such as shop-
ping, cooking, social activities and gardening,
which probably reflects the fact that the index
was originally designed to assess institution-
alised populations.
Deterioration in independence and mobility
usually progresses through:
1. Social activities of daily living - i.e. how the
person relates to the 'outside world' - e.g.
shopping, visiting friends and relatives,
vacations, going to the pub, etc.
Table 18.8 Key aspects of Barthel index
Feeding
Mobility (from bed to chair)
Personal toilet (washing, etc.)
Getting on/off toilet
Bathing
Walking on a level surface
Going up/down stairs
Dressing
Continence (bladder/bowel)
2. Domestic activities of daily living - i.e. how
the person manages household tasks - e.g.
cooking, cleaning, gardening, etc.
3. Personal activities of daily living - i.e. how
the person manages to care for herself - e.g.
washing, bathing, cutting toe nails,
continence, etc.
Therefore, an elderly person will usually expe-
rience difficulty with visiting the shops before
having problems with cooking or bathing.
Similarly, incontinence usually occurs later on
after the person has developed other functional
limitations. This can make continence a particu-
larly difficult situation to manage for both the
patient and carers. Many other factors often con-
tribute to the onset of incontinence, including
loss of mobility, urinary tract infection, auto-
nomic neuropathy, prostatism, stress inconti-
nence, unstable bladder, retention with overflow
and central nervous system (eNS) pathology.
There are a variety of means to test an individ-
ual's mobility. A simple mobility assessment is
known as the 'timed up and go' test. In this test,
the elderly person is asked to stand from a chair,
walk 10 feet, turn and return to the chair. The
person is timed during this activity. Most adults
can complete this activity in less than 10 seconds.
Frail elderly people may take from 11 to 20
seconds for this task. People taking longer than
20 seconds are generally amongst the most
immobile elderly. For this latter group a more
detailed mobility assessment is indicated. There
is a strong association between the results of this
test and a person's functional independence in
activities of daily living.
Assessment of gait in the elderly
Assessment of gait in the elderly patient can
often be a useful indicator of mobility. It can also
enable the practitioner to determine whether
walking aids (e.g. sticks, frame) are indicated. A
reduction in walking speed is one of the early
features of gait disturbance in the elderly.
Healthy adult cadence is about 1 m/s. A frail
elderly person may walk at less than half this
speed.

--------------------------------
Elderly stride length is often shorter than that
of a younger adult. Gait is often apropulsive,
with limited toe-off evident. This appears as a
'shuffling' gait. The base of gait is often wide, in
an attempt to improve balance and stability. The
elderly person may grasp fixed objects to
improve stability. In this way, elderly people
often use objects around their room to move
around safely. This is especially common for
elderly people with sight problems.
Frail elderly people placed in an unfamiliar
environment will often show a much slower
and more 'unsure' gait than they would nor-
mally have at home. Lack of familiar objects for
stability or an unfamiliar walking surface can
cause perceptual problems and lack of
confidence. Therefore, asking an elderly person
to walk down a long corridor in a hard-floored
clinic can give an unrepresentative picture of
the person's gait. Gait is best observed in an
environment which is familiar to the patient
(e.g. home).
Peripheral sensory neuropathy may produce a
'high stepping' gait with a characteristically
heavy heel strike. Parkinson's disease produces a
'festinating' gait where the person appears to
chase their centre of gravity forwards, shuffling
and stooping. Musculoskeletal problems, joint
pain or foot pain can result in an antalgic (pain-
avoiding) gait. This often manifests as limping or
avoiding certain movements or positions of the
limb during gait.
Determinants of the quality of life
Quality of life is affected by a complex interac-
tion of multiple factors, some of which can have
a large impact on quality of life (Table 18.9).
There are many measurement tools for the
assessment of quality of life. The most popular
tool used in UK health care for the assessment of
quality of life in studies of adults with disease
states is the short form-36 questionnaire (SF-36).
The SF-36 questionnaire consists of 36 questions
divided into the following categories: physical
health, physiological health, mental health and
social well-being. Its popularity has resulted in a
large number of studies which are able to attest
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 463
Table 18.9 Major factors affecting quality of life
Loss of mobility
Dependence on others
Acute or chronic pain
General health status
Life-threatening! terminal disease
Poverty
Social isolation
Loneliness
Mental state - e.g. depression
Bereavement
Difficulty sleeping
Boredom
Inability to perform activities of daily living
Loss of ability to make decisions
Lack of control
the validity and reliability of the questionnaire
for a wide variety of clinical situations.
The SF-36 assessment tool is available free of
charge from the UK Clearing House for
Information on the Assessment of Health
Outcomes, Nuffield Institute for Health Service
Studies (see References for web site address).
More informal assessment of the quality of life
of the elderly can be achieved through normal
clinical conversation. The practitioner, as part of
a normal discussion with the patient, can gain a
fair idea of the patient's quality of life. Podiatry is
a profession which is well suited to this task,
since patients are often seated for treatment for
20 min or so, and treatment does not usually
prevent the patient from talking. Patient and
podiatrist are usually sitting face to face, and
one-to-one communication is established. Where
a podiatrist is concerned that the patient has a
poor quality of life, or feels that the patient is
unusually sad or depressed, a more formal
assessment of quality of life can be undertaken.
This may involve a referral to other members of
the health and social care team: e.g. health visitor,
social worker or general practitioner (GP).
Assessment of cognitive status
Assessment of cognitive function in the elderly
can be important for all health care workers.
 464 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
-------------------------------------
This is particularly important where a practi-
tioner seeks informed consent from a patient for
a clinical procedure. Those changes most fre-
quently associated with the ageing process are
forgetfulness and confusion. Forgetfulness is a
behaviour which affects all people, young or
old. The fact that elderly people appear to forget
things more often may be related to several
factors. First, people who are old today received
a different education to people who are young
today. Some elderly people will have received a
very basic education, had poor schooling and,
as a result, may appear less intelligent and more
forgetful. Coupled with this is the fact that most
elderly people had limited exposure to the
media when they were young compared with
young people today who are exposed to a mass
media. This cohort effect is probably an impor-
tant factor in explaining why elderly people
have difficulty remembering certain facts,
recalling events and handling complex ideas. It
is important to remember that forgetfulness is
not necessarily indicative of the onset of brain
disease or dementia.
Dementia is another cause of forgetfulness. It is
a relatively common finding in elderly people.
Dementia can arise as a result of reductions in
supply to the brain of oxygen, nutrients or hor-
mones. Dementia is not a single disease, but a
term used to encompass a variety of brain dis-
eases. The most common causes of dementia in
the elderly are Alzheimer's disease and multi-
infarct dementia (recurrent mini-strokes of corti-
cal/subcortical areas).
Confusion is where an individual has difficulty
placing herself in terms of time and/or place. It
can lead to disorientation, loss of short-term
memory, changed levels of activity, speech
defects, hallucinations and clouding of con-
sciousness. Acute confusion (delirium) is a rela-
tively common finding amongst elderly people.
It may also be an important indicator of an
underlying systemic disease (e.g. CVA, infec-
tion). Confusion may be aggravated by drugs
(e.g. alcohol), sight or hearing defects and pres-
ence of other brain diseases (e.g. Parkinson's
disease). Confusion may also be a feature of
acute or chronic dementia.
Table 18.10 Mental test score
1_ Name
2. Date of birth
3. Age
4. Date and time of day
5. Address
6. Name of prime minister
7. Date of First World War
8. Place
9. Remember an address 5 min later
10. Count backwards from 20 to 1
Assessment of mental state can easily be
achieved by means of a mental test score (Table
18.10). This is performed by the practitioner
asking 10 simple questions to the patient. A low
score (less than 7) indicates confusion and war-
rants referral to other agencies (e.g. GP, psychia-
trist). Deterioration in mental test score may
indicate the presence of a chronic dementing
illness (e.g. Alzheimer's disease).
Assessment of ability to perform
basic foot care
For the practitioner, accurate determination of an
elderly patient's ability to perform basic tasks
relating to foot care will be important. The fol-
lowing activities are important as part of per-
sonal activities of daily living:
• cutting and/ or filing of toe nails
• filing of hard skin
• application of cream to the sole of the foot
• washing and drying of feet
• putting on stockings, tights or socks
• putting on and fastening shoes
• change of a dressing applied to the foot
(where appropriate)
• inspection of feet for lesions.
Inability to perform the above activities may
place an elderly person at greater risk of deterio-
rating foot health. This is particularly likely
where the elderly person is not able (or eligible)
to receive podiatric care and where there is an
assumption that the person will manage her own
feet. Failure to perform these basic activities may
ultimately also contribute to deterioration in

mobility, independence and quality of life. For
example, patients may feel less inclined to go
outside of the house if putting on shoes and
hosiery becomes difficult. Provision of simple
aids, such as elasticated laces and stocking
helpers, can sometimes rectify this problem, by
providing assistance with difficult activities.
Inability to check and clean feet can be a
major risk for deterioration in foot health status.
This is especially true for patients with either
peripheral vascular insufficiency or defects of
sensory perception. Sight defects may com-
pound the problem. In these cases, the patient
should be encouraged to ask a carer to check
their feet regularly, or seek regular professional
assessment.
The best way to assess an individual's ability
to perform basic foot care tasks is to observe
them being performed. Practitioners should
spend some time with patients looking for
signs of difficulty reaching feet, putting on
shoes and hosiery, and problems with manual
dexterity (e.g. arthritis of fingers). This can often
be determined during the course of a normal
consultation:
• Is the patient able to take off and put back on
her own shoes and hosiery?
• Can the patient touch areas of her feet?
• Is the patient able to manipulate a pair of
scissors / nippers?
• Can the patient manage the use of a file?
• Can the patient apply a cream to the foot?
• Is the patient able to change a dressing on her
foot?
It is important for the practitioner observing
these skills to bear in mind that conditions in the
patient's own home may be totally different to
those in the clinical environment. Patients may
find it easy to manage their feet while seated in a
podiatry chair, but find the same tasks difficult in
an armchair or on a sofa or bed.
RISK ASSESSMENT AND THE
ELDERLY
Limited resources for public podiatry services
have resulted in attempts to prioritise services to
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 465
those people most at risk. Usually, notions of risk
have centred on medical need for foot care. It is
clearly a worthy desire to focus limited resources
on those most at need. However, risk assessment
of the elderly can be a hazardous pursuit and
should not be undertaken without appropriate
validation of risk assessment protocols.
The risks of prioritisation are enormous, both
to individuals and to health services. Getting it
wrong has major consequences for individuals
(ulceration, infection, falls, gangrene, amputa-
tion) and for health services (litigation, com-
plaints, costs of managing complications, effect
on other service providers, etc.).
Generally, the elderly can be divided into three
groups in respect of risk status: high risk,
medium risk and low risk (Table 18.11). What
Table 18.11 Definitions of elderly risk groups
High risk Patients with systemic pathology presenting a
risk to foot health (e.g. diabetes mellitus,
Cushing's disease, leukaemia, anaemia, etc.)
Patients with existing foot ulceration or other
loss of lower limb tissue viability
Patients who have a history of falls
Patients with peripheral vascular disease
Patients with peripheral neuropathy
Patients with hip joint pathology or prosthesis
Patients who are bed-ridden
Malnourished patients
Patients taking certain medications (steroids,
anticoagulants, anticancer drugs, etc.)
Patients with severe cognitive impairment
Patients unable to self-care with poor carer
support
Infirm or frail people living alone
Poor patients
Socially isolated patients
Medium risk Patients with poor skin quality or skin disease
Patients with thickened nails
Patients with calluses or corns
Patients with toe deformities
Immobile patients
Patients with superficial fungal infections of
skin or nail
Patients unable to self-care with adequate
carer support
Low risk Patients with mild foot pathology
Patients with good circulatory status
Patients with good neurological status
Independent patients or those receiving good
levels of home care
Mobile patients
Patients with good personal care/hygiene
 466 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
becomes clear when looking at these definitions
is that most podiatry departments are already
focusing on those at greatest risk.
Several providers of foot health services have
attempted to use risk 'scoring' methods to make
decisions on eligibility for podiatry services.
These criteria are often rigidly applied, allow no
professional discretion and are sometimes
administered by people other than those spe-
cialised in the assessment of the lower limb.
Where risk assessment protocols are used, it is
important for practitioners using such protocols
to be able to obtain second opinions, and identify
patients who they feel are at risk but who do not
fit the 'rigid' criteria.
Risk assessment of the elderly is further com-
plicated by the fact that elderly people tend to
deteriorate much faster than young people. An
elderly person who seems quite fit today may be
infirm or ill tomorrow. This effect can have dev-
astating consequences for foot health where a
patient is under the impression that they are no
longer eligible for foot care.
Reassessment of the elderly patient is neces-
sary at regular intervals. Risk status changes with
corresponding changes in general health status,
physiological changes and social circumstances.
Even changes in time of the year can have a pro-
found effect on risk status. For example, during
the summer a patient may appear to have ade-
quate peripheral circulation, but the same patient
might assess as high risk during the winter when
circulation deteriorates.
The most effective risk assessment protocols
have used qualitative descriptors of risk rather
than rigid/quantitative risk-scoring mecha-
nisms. Effective risk assessment is dependent
upon the following:
REFERENCES
Bennett G C J, Ebrahim S 1995 health care in old age, 2nd
edn. Arnold, London
Clearing House's web site:
(http://www.leeds.ac .uk Inuffield I infoservices IUKCH I
home.html)
Crawford V L S, Ashford R L, McPeake B, Stout R W 1995
Conservative podiatric medicine and disability in elderly
• existence of a valid risk assessment protocol
• patient understanding of the process
• compliance of the patient with advice
• availability and motivation of carers (where
appropriate)
• awareness of CPs (and others) of the
protocols / eligibility for re-referral
• ability to reassess/review risk status as required.
Even the most effective risk assessment proto-
col fails from time to time and patients who were
identified as low risk may develop serious
pathology. Where risk assessment does fail,
departments need to ensure that patients can
receive rapid assessment and treatment to
prevent the likelihood of significant adverse con-
sequences.
It is impossible to be completely certain when
assessing the risk of individuals, particularly the
old. Health providers need to weigh up the costs
(personal, social and economic) of risk assess-
ment with the costs of universal provision of
podiatry services.
SUMMARY
This chapter has examined a range of factors that
are pertinent to the assessment of the elderly.
Although the overall assessment process for the
elderly should be no different to that of any
other age group there are specific factors that
should be taken into consideration. It is essential
that practitioners are aware that any assessment
of the elderly provides a snap shot of the elderly
person at the time of the assessment. In view of
the ageing process and increased risk of acquir-
ing a range of diseases the status of the elderly
person may change from low to high risk within
a relatively short period of time.
people. Journal of the American Podiatric Medical
Association 85(5): 255-259
Hansard 1998. HMSO, London
Harvey I, Frankel S, Marks R, Shalom 0, Morgan M
1997 Foot morbidity and exposure to chiropody:
population based study. British Medical Journal 315:
1054-1055

Mahoney F I, Barthel D W 1965 Functional evaluation: the
Barthel Index. Maryland State Medical Journal 14:
61-65
Plummer E S, Albert S G A 1996 Focused assessment of
foot care in older adults. Journal of the American
Geriatrics Society 44: 310-313
Turner W A, Campbell J A, Milns D et al 2000 Prevalence of
foot problems amongst the elderly. Society of
ASSESSMENT OF THE ELDERLY 467
Chiropodists & Podiatrists Annual Conference,
Commonwealth Institute, London, May 2000
Turner W A, Campbell J A, Milns D 2001 The cruelest cut?
Effects of podiatric discharge on 5000 'low risk' elderly
people over two years. Podiatry, People & Politics
Conference, University College, Northampton,S April 2001
Wei J Y 1992 Age and the cardiovascular system. New
England Journal of Medicine 327(24): 1735-1739
CHAPTER CONTENTS

Introduction 469

Preoperative assessment 470

The systems enquiry 473
Pre- and postoperative
Factors affecting operative risk 478
Laboratory investigationsand imaging modaHties 480
assessment
Postoperative assessment 481 1. Reilly
Summary 482

INTRODUCTION
Corrective surgery can provide a resolution to
many chronic foot conditions that have tradition-
ally been treated by conservative care, e.g. ingrown
toe nails, hammer toes, hallux abductovalgus.
The majority of surgical procedures on the foot
performed by podiatrists in the UK are undertaken
on an elective basis under local or regional anaes-
thesia rather than general anaesthesia. This
chapter focuses on the assessment of patients
having surgery under local anaesthesia. Many
texts assume preoperative assessment means
surgery to be performed under general anaesthe-
sia. Such texts may state that, for example, the
insulin-controlled diabetic patient is not fit for day
surgery. However, as long as the insulin-diabetic
patient has been appropriately assessed and there
are no major contraindications it is possible to
undertake surgery under local anaesthesia on an
outpatient basis. Moreover, early and effective
intervention in the diabetic could prevent later
amputational and salvage surgery.
The process of surgery can be broken down
into three distinct phases: the pre-, intra- and
postoperative phases. These phases are collec-
tively known as the perioperative period and
may overlap and vary in relative importance,
depending on the individual patient and the
nature of the planned surgical procedure. The
overall results of surgery depend upon the
effective assessment and management of each
phase. Table 19.1 identifies the key issues in the
assessment process.
469
 470 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
Table 19.1 The preoperative assessment process
Diagnosis
• Information from the primary patient assessment
• What is the diagnosis?
• What are the important facets of the history?
• What further investigations are required?
Fitness for surgery
• Is the patient fit for surgery?
• Are there any concomitant diseases that increase the
perioperative risk?
• Is the patient on any drugs that could influence the surgical
outcome?
The anaesthetic
• Local anaesthetic (or general anaesthetic)
• Which technique will be used?
The operation
• What is the surgical plan?
• Does the surgery itself pose any special problems?
• Has informed consent been obtained?
After the operation
• Can any problems be anticipated?
• Have redressing appointments been arranged?
PREOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT
Clear communication between the practitioner
and the patient is vital and forms the basis of
informed consent, which is a prerequisite to any
invasive procedure. The decision to recommend
surgery to the patient is taken in light of the pre-
senting problem after non-surgical treatment
options have been tried (or at least considered)
and when the potential risks and benefits of
invasive techniques have been calculated in the
surgeon's mind. It is the responsibility of the
practitioner to determine the most likely diag-
nosis of the problem based on a detailed history
taking and physical examination. Appropriate
laboratory investigations and diagnostic
imaging support and confirm the provisional
diagnosis.
The purpose of the preoperative assessment
The purpose of the preoperative assessment is to:
• review the history of the presenting illness or
complaint
• review the major systems of the body and
ascertain whether these systems are
functioning within normal limits and, if not,
to facilitate the management of this
• arrive at an informed position regarding the
medical appropriateness of the planned
surgical procedure
• identify any factors that may contraindicate
surgery or place the patient 'at risk'.
At the end of the assessment the practitioner
will have an opinion in his mind as to whether
the patient is fit for surgery. This will allow the
practitioner to proceed knowing that the risk of
encountering an intra- or postoperative compli-
cation has been reduced to a minimum.
An inadequate assessment of the patient's
health status may have serious consequences for
the surgical patient.
The patient is placed at risk. Inappropriate or
unsafe surgery is performed because of inade-
quate knowledge of the patient's medical history.
Surgery carried out on patients with certain sys-
temic pathologies carries an increased risk of
postoperative morbidity. Medical disorders can
complicate surgical practice in various ways: e.g.
a patient with rheumatoid arthritis on steroid
therapy is prone to impaired healing and infec-
tion. An occult condition may manifest under the
stress of surgery: e.g. a cerebrovascular insult
may occur intraoperatively in patients with un-
diagnosed hypertension. Invasive treatment on
haemophiliacs or patients taking anticoagulant
therapy requires special consideration because of
the likelihood of very slow blood clotting and
haemorrhage. The use of postoperative analge-
sia, especially if obtained on group protocol,
requires that the practitioner is familiar with the
indications, contraindications, interactions and
side effects of the analgesic medication.
The surgeon is placed at risk. The practitioner
will inevitably encounter blood and tissue fluids
on a regular basis. Inadequate history taking
with regard to identifying known or potential
blood-borne diseases such as hepatitis B places
the practitioner and his assistants at risk.
An increased risk of clinical emergencies. A
number of intraoperative emergencies, such as
hypertensive crises, can arise. A detailed pre-
operative assessment should identify those at
greatest risk.
 PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 471

Poor treatment outcomes. A combination of Current health status

any of the above factors can lead to a poor treat-
Body mass. Obesity is a condition that may be
ment outcome. Without judicious use of labora-
more complicated than simple overeating.
tory investigations, certain disease states can
Obesity is associated with various endocrine
be overlooked. Assessment of preoperative
disease, type 2 diabetes mellitus, peripheral vas-
radiographs are essential if the practitioner is to
cular disease, hypertension and cardiac disease,
effectively plan the appropriate surgical proce-
anaemia, deep vein thrombosis (OVT), cholecys-
dure.
titis and nutritional imbalances. Obese patients
A systematic approach to the assessment
have an increased risk of postoperative OVT and
process will ensure that the practitioner covers
wound complications such as infection and
all relevant areas in the enquiry process. The use
dehiscence.
of questionnaires give the patient time to ~on­
It is commonly assumed that malnutrition is
sider his answers, reduces the amount of time
rare in Western societies. However, the malnutri-
spent during the consultation and ensures that
tion status among the elderly is alarmingly high. A
the patient answers relate to their current and
percentage weight loss of 20% or greater is associ-
past health status (Ch. 5).
ated with a lO-fold increase in operative mortality
Health status can be classified using the
following major surgery, and a threefold increase
American Society of Anesthesiologists' (ASA)
in postoperative infection. Vitamin BI (thiamine)
scale (Table 19.2). Patients who fall into either
and B deficiencies are associated with peripheral
Class 1 or 2 will be the most suitable for elective
neuro~athy. Vitamin C and serum zinc deficiencies
procedures. . .. may impair wound healing. Seriously under-
As already noted in the introduction It IS
weight patients may be suffering from a range of
assumed that the practitioner undertakes a full
systemic conditions or they could be poorly nou:-
medical and social history as detailed in Chapter
ished due to alcoholism, drug abuse or anorexia
5. There are specific issues that need to be taken
nervosa. Fatigue and weight changes are symp-
into consideration when assessing a patient for
toms of many systemic illnesses and are always
elective surgery under local anaesthesia. These
worthy of note, especially if weight change
are considered below.
appears to be rapid.
General health. In general, patients who are
Table 19.2 American Society of Anesthesiologists' (ASA) unwell are not good candidates for surgical pro-
surgical risk classification cedures or treatments which are likely to demand
close compliance on their behalf.
Class Symptoms
Pregnancy. Rarely will elective surgery be indi-
Class 1 The patient has no organic, physiological, cated on a pregnant woman.
biochemical or psychiatric disturbance. The
pathological process for which the operation. is to
be performed is localised and does not entail Past and current medication
systemic disturbance
Class 2 Mild to moderate systemic disturbance caused Information about the patient's past and current
either by the condition to be treated surgically or drug therapy can provide useful information
by other pathophysiological processes
about the patient's health status. Patients should
Class 3 Severe systemic disturbance or disease from be asked if they are currently taking, or have
whatever cause, even though it may not be
possible to define the degree of disability with taken in the past, any tablets or medicine or used
finality any ointments or creams that have been pre-
Class 4 Severe systemic disorders that are already life scribed by their doctor or bought over-the-
threatening, not always correctable by operation counter. The practitioner should refer to the
Class 5 The moribund patient who has little chance of British National Formulary (BNF) or other phar-
survival but is submitted to operation in macological text if unfa~iliar with any drugs the
desperation
patient is taking. In particular, details of adverse
 472 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
reactions, either by the patient or any member of
the patient's family, to previous local anaesthetic
injections and other drugs (e.g. penicillin) should
be sought and explored.
Steroids such as prednisolone are commonly
used in the treatment of asthma, obstructive
airway disease and rheumatoid arthritis. They
have three main effects, which can be of impor-
tance during the perioperative period:
• suppression of the hypothalamus/pituitary
adrenal (HPA) axis
• poor wound healing
• a predisposition to infection.
There will be a suppression of the HPA if the
patient has taken more than 7.5 mg/ day of pred-
nisolone for more than 1 week. In such instances,
consideration must be given to the administra-
tion of exogenous steroids to prevent hypoten-
sion or cardiovascular collapse. For minor
procedures a typical regimen would be 15 mg PO
(by mouth) at 6 a.m. on the day of surgery; and
the same dose 12 and 24 hours later.
Anticoagulants are used in ischaemic heart
disease, mitral stenosis, atrial fibrillation and in
the prevention of postoperative thrombosis for-
mation. Heparin inhibits the intrinsic clotting
pathway and is used in the short-term prophy-
laxis of DVT. Warfarin inhibits the extrinsic clot-
ting pathway and is used in long-term therapy.
The use of an oral anticoagulant has obvious
implications if surgical treatment is planned
(Case history 19.1). Adjustment of the dosing
regimen can be undertaken by the patient's
Case history 19.1
A 54-year-old lady presented with an interdigital corn
that has failed to respond to many years of palliative
treatment. The history and physical examination
revealed that she suffered from atrial fibrillation for
which she took warfarin (to prevent ventricular
thrombosis).
Outcome: surgery was indicated for the patient. At
first assessment her INR was 4.1. In consultation with
her general practitioner, her dosage was adjusted to
reduce the INR to below 2.5. Surgery was carried out
with the INR 1.9 on the day. The postoperative
course was unremarkable and the patient was
discharged after the 12-week follow-up visit.
general practitioner (GP) to allow surgery to
proceed with relative safety. Drugs that alter
platelet function include aspirin, nonsteroidal
anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), steroids and
antihistamines. With patients who regularly take
aspirin it may be necessary to cease its use
because of delayed clotting after surgery. If
aspirin use is to be stopped, with the consent of
the patient's GP, in order for surgery to proceed,
it should be done so 1 week before surgery. It
should be noted that women who take oral con-
traception carry a slightly increased risk of post-
operative DVT formation.
The use of all recreational drugs should be
recorded. Patients who use injectable drugs are at
a higher risk of hepatitis and human immuno-
deficiency virus (HIV). Long-term or heavy use of
tobacco can affect wound healing due to the
immediate vasoconstrictive effect of nicotine as
well as the long-term effect of increased platelet
adhesiveness and atherosclerosis. Tobacco
smokers are also at greater risk of bronchitis,
asthma and lung cancer. Heavy alcohol consump-
tion can affect peripheral sensation, immune
response, postoperative healing and the metabo-
lism of local anaesthetics, as well as having impli-
cations for treatment compliance.
Past medical history
The past medical history consists of information
about previous lower limb problems and the
treatment received, as well as details about any
problems that have affected the patient's general
health. The nature of previous treatment, the
name of the practitioner, details of relevant inves-
tigations such as X-rays and the patient's view of
the treatment success should be recorded. This
information may prevent the repetition of tests or
treatments which have previously been ineffec-
tive. Of particular interest is the operative history
of the patient. In an audit of an NHS surgical
caseload, 10% of patients were referred for revi-
sionary surgical intervention.
Home circumstances
It is important to assess the patient's home situ-
ation. In the case of surgical treatment, the prac-

titioner must establish who is going to transport
the patient to and from surgery and who is
going to assist her through the immediate post-
operative recovery period. Lack of home
support may rule out surgical intervention
(Case history 19.2).
~------------------·---l
I Case history 19.2
A 59-year-old widow was referred for treatment for a
tailor's bunion. Palliative treatment did not control the
symptoms. A preoperative assessment was
undertaken with a view to performing a metatarsal
osteotomy of the fifth metatarsal head. The patient
lived alone and had no children. The only home
support the patient was able to organise was from
neighbours. This support was not very reliable as the
neighbours were out at work all day.
Outcome: the typical postoperative course is to
rest completely for 2 days and to be on 'light duties'
for between 2 and 4 weeks. Patients are asked not to
perform any household duties and to have someone
to stay with them for the first 2 days in case an
emergency should arise. In view of the lack of home
support, surgery was not offered to the patient.
Occupation
A patient's occupation may be a contributory
cause of the lower limb problem and may
influence whether surgery could or should be
offered. Some patients may experience particular
difficulties in taking time off from work to attend
for treatment and need to be aware of the vari-
able amount of time needed to recuperate from
surgery (Case history 19.3). The patient who
cannot or will not devote the time to heal after
surgery is not a good surgical candidate.
Sports and hobbies
Details of any sporting hobby should be sought
from the patient. As indicated in Case history 19.3,
the patient needs to devote time to postoperative
healing, and therefore cessation of sporting activ-
ity must be emphasised to the patient.
Foreign travel
Details of foreign travel should be recorded in
case the patient has acquired an unusual foot
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 473
\-------------------------,
I Case history 19.3 !
A 47-year-old publican attended for a surgical
opinion. He suffered from a complex digital
deformity and the preoperative assessment
indicated that he required extensive digital and soft
tissue reconstruction. While discussing his
occupation as a landlord, the patient expressed his
intention to return to bar work the evening followinq
I surgery. He equated the surgery he was to receive
as akin to that of a tooth extraction under local
anaesthesia from a dentist. Clear (and written)
advice was given regarding the need to rest in the
postoperative period.
Outcome: the patient did not comply with the
advice given. He presented at his first redressing
appointment with marked forefoot swelling and pain -
more than would have been expected from the
procedure performed. The final result was a less than
satisfactory 'sausage toe', through a failure to take
appropriate advice. This example highlights the need
to document the advice given to patients during the
perioperative period to protect the surgeon from
litigious action.
infection. In particular, travel to tropical coun-
tries and any foot injuries sustained while
walking barefoot should be recorded. Many
countries have a higher incidence of HIV than
the UK. A history of blood product transfusion
abroad could, therefore, be important.
The systems enquiry
The cardiovascular system
A history of cardiovascular disease should be
taken with respect to systemic, peripheral and
haematological disease states, followed up by a
review of symptomatology.
Patients with ischaemic heart disease (IHD)
may present with a history of previous myocar-
dial infarction (M!), stable or unstable angina or
a history of previous coronary artery bypass
graft (CABG). A detailed history must be taken
of all patients who have suffered previous
cardiac problems or have high-risk factors
such as obesity, hypertension, shortness of
breath on exercise, smoking or a family history
of cardiac problems. Ten percent of patients
over 50 years old presenting for non-cardiac
surgery had previously suffered MI. This is
 474 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
significant because there is a known risk of re-
infarction in the perioperative period. The rela-
tive significance of that risk is dependent on the
time elapsed since the first MI. A quarter of
patients presenting for non-cardiac surgery are
likely to have another MI if less than 3 months
has passed since their first attack. However, if
more than 6 months is allowed to elapse, the
incidence of repeat MI falls to less than 5 in
every 100 patients.
Angina may be classified as stable or unsta-
ble. Stable angina takes the form of chronic, pre-
dictable, exertional chest pain. In these
circumstances, when there is no history of a pre-
vious MI, and other risk factors are absent, the
risk of perioperative MI is low provided that the
patient is not exposed to any excessive stress.
The patient's anti-anginal medication should be
continued perioperatively. An assessment needs
to be taken of how the patient will respond to
having surgery under local anaesthesia - in
other words, while the patient is awake. Some
patients may find this very stressful and, there-
fore, would be considered unsuitable. Unstable
angina is characterised by increased frequency,
severity and duration of painful attacks that is
not easily controlled by their medication.
Angina of recent onset, angina at rest or with
minimal exertion or angina awakening the
patient from sleep should also be considered
unstable. Such unstable angina symptoms carry
the same perioperative risk as having had an MI
in the previous 6 months. Surgery is contraindi-
cated until the angina has been stabilised by
medical or surgical means.
A history of CABG should also be taken into
consideration. In essence, these patients have
had their symptoms controlled by surgery but
they may still have limited cardiac reserve and
may not be able to respond well to the additional
stress of surgery.
Patients in congestive heart failure (CHF)
have diminished cardiac reserve and do not
respond well to perioperative stress. CHF carries
a high perioperative risk of MI in patients
undergoing general anaesthetic and therefore
elective surgery must be avoided in patients pre-
senting with third heart sounds, an elevated
jugular venous pulse or pulmonary oedema. As
patients who undergo procedures under local
anaesthesia frequently experience considerable
stress from fear and apprehension, those in
cardiac failure represent a high risk of an
adverse perioperative cardiac event. Conduction
defects represent a low risk in elective foot
surgery under local anaesthesia; however, the
opinion of the general practitioner and anaes-
thetist is useful.
Patients with a history of fainting attacks may
require specific assessment before any elective
surgery under local or general anaesthesia.
Patients will often offer a history of palpitations,
'missed heart beats' or fainting attacks. Any
patient who gives a history suggestive of an
arrhythmia should have an electrocardiogram
(ECG) that can then be carefully assessed by a
cardiologist prior to local anaesthesia.
Major heart valve disease is becoming rarer
but a heart murmur is still a regular finding in
routine medical examinations. Most murmurs
are related to turbulent flow of blood in the heart
and are not significant and do not represent
heart valve damage. A history of valvular heart
disease is of concern because it carries a risk of
bacterial endocarditis, CHF and MI. The
American Heart Association recommendation
for cases with mitral valve prolapse and a
detectable murmur is that antibiotic prophylaxis
should be prescribed in all procedures where a
transient bacteraemia is created. In the main,
bone surgery on the foot is clean and prophy-
laxis is not required. Antibiotic prophylaxis is,
however, required in nail surgery where there is
paronychia or in any incision and drainage pro-
cedures of infected tissue.
Well-managed, mild to moderate hypertension
poses no increased perioperative risk, although
in all cases hypertensive medication should be
continued perioperatively. Treated hypertension
is associated with ischaemic heart disease and
stroke. In cases of uncontrolled hypertension, the
patient may present with a variety of symptoms,
including headaches, transient visual impair-
ment, anorexia or even nausea. Two very
significant findings are impaired renal function
manifesting clinically as proteinuria and/or

retinopathy. All patients who have blood pres-
sures above 160/95 on more than one occasion
should be investigated and treated prior
to surgery. Diastolic pressures greater than
120 mmHg are of grave concern and contraindi-
cate any surgical intervention; they require
urgent medical referral.
A comprehensive literature review regarding
perioperative considerations of the patient with
cardiovascular disease has been performed by a
member of the Trent Region Podiatric Forum,
and is presented in Table 19.3.
Anaemia represents a reduction in the oxygen-
carrying capacity of the blood. Since there are mul-
tiple causes and types of anaemia, preoperative
consultation is appropriate. Both cardiopulmonary
integrity and wound healing are dependent on
tissue oxygen levels. Anaemia is rarely a con-
traindication to surgery unless it is of a severe
magnitude. Haematocrit values below 30 are con-
sidered insufficient for elective foot surgery.
Table 19.3 Surgical recommendations for the
cardiovascular patient (information included with thanks to
Dr T Kilmartin of the Trent Forum)
Myocardial Surgery should be avoided in patients
infarctions (MI) who have had an MI within the previous
6 months
Angina In stable angina, where there is no
history of an MI or other risk factors, the
perioperative risk of an MI is low. In
unstable angina, surgery is
contraindicated until the angina has been
controlled by medical or surgical means
Coronary artery A history of a CABG should be
bypass graft considered a low perioperative risk
(CABG)
Congestive Patients in CHF represent a high risk of
heart failure adverse cardiac events from the stress of
(CHF) surgery
Conduction Conduction defects represent a low
disturbances perioperative risk
Arrhythmia Any patient with a history suggestive of
arrhythmia should have an ECG performed
Valvular heart Prophylactic antibiosis is not required in
disease clean podiatric surgery to prevent
bacterial endocarditis. It is, however,
required in nail surgery
Hypertension Elective surgery is contraindicated in
uncontrolled hypertension
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 475
Haemophiliacs and other patients with clot-
ting abnormalities require thorough history
taking. Enquire about bruising, nose bleeds and
any previous surgical problems. Further studies
that will be indicated include a platelet count and
bleeding time.
Sickle-cell disease affects those of African or
West Indian descent. It is an autosomally inher-
ited haemoglobinopathy resulting in the forma-
tion of haemoglobin S (HbS) instead of HbA.
Small changes in oxygen tension cause HbS to
polymerise and form pseudocrystalline struc-
tures, which distort red blood cells into the char-
acteristic sickle shapes. Sickle cells increase blood
viscosity and obstruct microvascular blood flow,
leading to thrombosis and infarction. A compre-
hensive literature review regarding the use of
tourniquets in this condition has been under-
taken by a member of the Trent Region Podiatric
Forum, and is presented in Figure 19.1.
For a surgical wound to heal uneventfully, ade-
quate peripheral circulation is a prerequisite.
Assessment of the vascular status of the lower
limb is covered under physical examination, and
in detail in Chapter 6.
The respiratory system
Postoperative morbidity and mortality from
atelectasis and infection are significantly
increased in individuals with pulmonary disease,
whether anaesthesia is local or general. These
effects are most often noted in those individuals
with known pulmonary risk factors, such as a
history of heavy smoking, pre-existing pul-
monary disease, obesity and in the elderly. The
preoperative goal is to identify pulmonary risk
factors and request an expert opinion as indi-
cated. Preoperative management by consultants
may include pulmonary function testing.
Smokers should discontinue at least 1 week prior
to surgery.
The alimentary system
Gastrointestinal (GD disorders are common and
have many implications for the lower limb and
its treatment.
476 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

New Patient
Afro-caribbean
Asian
Mediterranean
Have you been
screened or tested for
sickle-cell disease?

Arrange appointment
with sickle-cell service
for screening and issue
of risk card

8------.. . .~,'-------..,...- Inform patient of risks

and complications

Consider
alternative care:
• orthotics
• clinopody
• referral on
Surgery
Tourniquet as necessary
without
Examination of the
tourniquet foot prior to inflation
of the tourniquet

Figure 19.1 Decision-making algorithm for patients with sickle-cell anaemia (with thanks to Mr C Bicknell of the Trent
Forum).

Patients with severe liver damage may be The genitourinary system

metabolically unstable and may be unable to
withstand the stress and the demands of surgery.
Liver cirrhosis is not uncommon and should be
identified in the history. Chronic alcoholism may
cause osteoporosis, complicate anaesthesia (the
metabolism of), increase bleeding risk, decrease
wound healing, increase the risk of infection and
diminish adrenocortical responses to stress.
Serious coexisting nutritional imbalances are
often noted.
The kidneys regulate the body's electrolyte and
fluid balance; this has implications for lower limb
circulation and oedema and can delay wound
healing. The presence of any renal symptoms
such as haematuria, dysuria, polyuria, oliguria or
flank pain mandates a specific evaluation.
Although the perioperative risks for patients with
renal disease are primarily related to disturbances
of fluid and electrolyte balance, hypertension and
oedema may be related to renal dysfunction.

Confirmation of kidney disease requires specific
investigation. Screening urinalysis remains the
classic measurement of renal performance
(Ch. 13). Abnormal findings include the pres-
ence of glucose, protein, ketones, bilirubin,
more than four red or white blood cells per
field, bacteria, casts and crystals. Surgery
should be postponed until renal function is
stabilised.
The central and peripheral nervous system
Diseases of the nervous system may cause pain
in the lower limb, deformity or gait abnormali-
ties. The significance of some symptoms in the
neurological enquiry will be very difficult to
interpret because the enquiry relies on the
patient's subjective account. However, inade-
quate assessment of the neurological basis of foot
pathology can lead to inappropriate surgical
intervention through a missed diagnosis. A
detailed assessment of the peripheral nervous
system can be found in Chapter 7.
Endocrine system
Diabetes, thyroid disease, growth disorders,
obesity and problems associated with the
menopause are particularly relevant. Diabetes
mellitus is a complex systemic disease that may
manifest as vascular, neurological, dermatologi-
cal and structural changes in the foot and lower
leg. The perioperative goal is to reduce hypo- or
hyperglycaemia. In the normal subject, hypergly-
caemia activates insulin production, but in the
diabetic this feedback control loop is defective.
Surgical stress causes a catabolic reaction, result-
ing in glucagon, adrenaline (epinephrine) and
cortisol secretion. Blood glucose levels rise and
other fuel pathways are mobilised.
The practitioner should ensure that a good
metabolic balance is obtained preoperatively.
Avoidance of the extremes of hypoglycaemia or
hyperglycaemia will help optimise wound healing
and host defence function. Hyperglycaemia
impairs wound healing by retarding wound
closure, delaying wound contraction, slowing col-
lagen synthesis, impairing granulocytes and
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 477
reducing red blood cell viscosity. Elective surgery
should be avoided in diabetic patients with blood
sugar values greater than 200 mg/dI. Chronic
hyperglycaemia greatly increases the risk of post-
operative infection. The use of haemoglobin AlC,
an index of hyperglycaemia, is helpful in evaluat-
ing trends in diabetic control. Inadequate nutrition
and reduced total plasma albumin have been
shown to deter wound healing in patients with
diabetes and should be normalised preoperatively
when possible. Diabetics with a propensity
towards ketosis require intraoperative intravenous
insulin and monitoring. Wide blood sugar varia-
tions are associated with unpredictable healing
ability and an increased surgical risk. A patient
who is taking multiple medications is more prone
to drug interactions, which may also affect dia-
betes management.
General anaesthesia creates a greater perioper-
ative risk because of increased insulin demands,
the risk of silent MI, nausea and vomiting, and
delays in food and oral medication intake. Early-
morning surgery allows the optimal equilibrium
between insulin dose and caloric intake, with
immediate oral nutrition postoperatively.
The locomotor system
To determine the presence of musculoskeletal
disease the patient should be asked if they have
ever had:
• any form of arthritis
• back, hip, knee, ankle or foot pain
• fractured bones in the legs or feet
• pulled or injured muscles in the legs
• joint swelling or stiffness
• limb pain during any specific activity.
Arthritic patients may be considered to include
persons with single-joint osteoarthrosis and
those with more complex multiorgan arthritides,
including rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus
erythematosus (SLE) and seronegative arthritis.
Osteoarthrosis. There are no specific perioper-
ative considerations for the management of the
osteoarthritic patient. However, the patient may
be on a range of analgesic and anti-inflammatory
preparations, which must be considered in the
 478 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS

overall assessment of the patient. NSAIDs alter Physical examination

bleeding times and some authors recommend
The format of the physical examination is summa-
their cessation.
rised in Table 19.4. The aim of the physical exami-
Rheumatoid arthritis. Many patients coming to
nation is to identify abnormality and delineate
surgery have been on long-term steroids. These
those patients who are fit for surgery. Opinions
drugs suppress the HPA axis, and patients may
vary as to the level of the examination required for
require corticosteroid coverage during the peri-
the patient undergoing elective surgery under
operative period. This should be given even if it
local anaesthesia. The practitioner is expected to
has been 1 year since the patient has received
have undertaken a detailed physical assessment
medication (it is not necessary to treat a patient
involving the systems (Ch. 5), peripheral vascular
with steroids if they have only received intra-
status (Ch. 6), peripheral neurological status
articular injections of cortisone). Disease-remit-
(Ch. 7), orthopaedic status (Ch. 8) and skin (Ch. 9).
tive drugs, e.g. methotrexate, suppress the bone
As the physical examination has been considered
marrow and can cause leucopenia and thrombo-
in these chapters, it will not be dealt with in this
cytopenia, increasing the likelihood of infection.
chapter.
They can safely be stopped for several days
during the perioperative period, in consultation
with the prescribing doctor. Factors affecting operative risk
Systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE). Since SLE
The use of local anaesthetics
is a multisystem disease, a careful history and
assessment should be performed prior to Local anaesthetic agents can be defined as drugs
surgery. If the patient has received cortico- which are used clinically to produce a reversible
steroids within the last year prior to surgery, con- loss of sensation in a circumscribed area of the
sideration should be given to stress-coverage
replacement during the perioperative period.
Raynaud's phenomenon is also associated with Table 19.4 Physical examination

this disease and constitutes a contraindication to The cardiovascular system

the use of adrenaline (epinephrine) in foot • Blood pressure
surgery and may affect wound healing. • Ankle brachial pressure index (ABPI)
• Temperature
Seronegative spondyloarthropathies. If possi- • Palpation of pulses
ble, elective foot surgery should be performed • Capillary refilling time (CRT)
during periods between active disease flare-ups. • Oedema

Otherwise, there are no specific perioperative The respiratory system

• Shortness of breath (SOB)
considerations for Reiter's syndrome, psoriatic • Observe for clubbing of fingers
arthritis or enteropathic arthritis.
The alimentary system
Gout. Any patient with a history of gout is • Rarely performed
at a substantially increased risk of a postopera- The genitourinary system
tive gouty attack. This may be due to local sur- • Midstream urinalysis reagent testing
gical trauma, dehydration and the temporary The central nervous system
interruption of uricosuric medication. Those at • Gait
highest risk have had an attack within the last • The motor system
• The sensory system
year or are on hyperuricaemic medication.
The endocrine system
Septic arthritis. Septic arthritis is a serious con- • Blood glucose monitoring for diabetics
dition. The patient is likely to be generally
The locomotor system
unwell and should not undergo surgery if there • Joint range and quality of motion
is any chance the joint is infected. Synovial fluid • NCSP/RCSP
analysis should be considered where there is a • Arch profile
• Digital position
recent history of infection.

body. Because surgical techniques require their
use, any contraindication to local anaesthetics
must be identified. The following contraindica-
tions should be considered:
Unstable epilepsy. High blood levels of local
anaesthetic agents are known to cause convul-
sions in some epileptic patients through their
action on brain tissue. Their use is therefore best
avoided in such individuals.
Methaemoglobinaemia. Methaemoglobin is a
form of haemoglobin consisting of globin with
an oxidised haem-containing ferric iron. Met-
haemoglobin is unable to transport oxygen and
therefore compromises cardiovascular function.
When prilocaine is metabolised by the liver, small
amounts of a chemical called O-toluidine are pro-
duced which inhibits the enzyme involved in the
conversion of methaemoglobin to haemoglobin.
In patients with known methaemoglobinaemia,
an alternative local anaesthetic agent to prilocaine
should be utilised.
Pregnancy and breastfeeding. The British
Medical Association suggests that drugs should
only be used during pregnancy where the poten-
tial benefit outweighs the risk of harm to the
fetus, particularly during the first trimester
where all drugs should be avoided if possible.
There is no specific guidance on the risks associ-
ated with the low doses of local anaesthesia used
in the foot of a pregnant woman. However,
because of the ability of local anaesthetics to
cross the placental barrier, they are probably best
avoided whenever possible during pregnancy. If
a local anaesthetic were to be given during preg-
nancy it would seem prudent to avoid prilocaine
hydrochloride, as fetal haemoglobin is more sus-
ceptible to the development of methaemoglobi-
naemia. Both lidocaine (lignocaine) and
bupivacaine are considered safe for use with
breastfeeding mothers, as the quantities secreted
into breast milk are small.
Porphyrias. The porphyrias are a group of
metabolic disorders. Included in the list of drugs
contraindicated for use in patients with por-
phyria are some local anaesthetics. These drugs
must therefore be avoided in known carriers of
the porphyrogenic gene to avoid precipitating an
acute attack.
PRE· AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 479
Where surgery is still indicated, the use of a
general anaesthetic should be considered and the
patient referred.
Psychiatric status
Patients approach surgery with an understand-
able amount of fear and anxiety. They know that
they will be in an unfamiliar environment to
which they are unaccustomed. Some fear that
they will experience pain during the operation.
Most of their anxiety is down to inadequate
knowledge based on hearsay and rumour.
During the preoperative assessment it is impor-
tant that the practitioner recognises the hyper-
nervous patient and provides appropriate
information and counselling to allay any concerns.
However, it is important that the practitioner
recognises when a patient is unsuitable for surgery
under local anaesthesia and, if surgery is neces-
sary, refers the patient for general anaesthesia.
Age
Older patients. An increasing percentage of the
population is over 65 years of age, a trend that is
expected to continue well into the 21st century.
Independent ambulation is an important compo-
nent of wellness, although a majority of patients
over the age of 65 complain of foot pain limiting
their activity. In geriatric patients who have foot
conditions which can be surgically corrected, and
where the physical condition is satisfactory,
surgery can safely be performed. The chronolog-
ical age of the patient is less important, as long as
the physiological age of the patient is adequate
for the planned surgical procedure.
The problems of surgery on the older patient
include:
• an adverse physiological status
• impact of surgery on the patient's lifestyle
• selection of the operative procedure - simple
procedures versus complex procedures - even
though the latter would give a better result.
Generally, in the older patient, it is found that
destructive rather than functionally reconstruc-
tive procedures are often more appropriate.
 480 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Children. Attention to the child's psychology,
patient-parent relationships and stress levels is
important in the surgical treatment of the paedi-
atric patient. Parental presence during the opera-
tion may be beneficial.
Infection
In general, the elective procedure is performed
when the patient is free from all systemic infec-
tion. A patient with established infection
that does not respond to oral antibiotics
and appropriate wound care demands a thor-
ough preoperative evaluation and specialty
consultation.
Laboratory investigations and
imaging modalities
Urine testing. As indicated in Chapter 13, uri-
nalysis is an aid in the diagnosis of renal
disease, hepatic disease and diabetes mellitus.
Diabetes mellitus can have widespread conse-
quences for the lower limb and is of particular
interest to the surgeon. Renal and hepatic dis-
eases may have serious systemic repercussions
and, if identified, require further investigation
before it is safe to proceed with surgery.
Urinalysis is therefore useful in the preoperative
assessment of patients to screen for illnesses
which may complicate or contraindicate elective
procedures. Screening for a urinary tract infec-
tion (UTI) or the presence of bacteria in urine
can also identify those patients at increased risk
of developing postoperative wound infections.
Testing is non-invasive and cost-effective, and
urine specimens are easily obtained.
Blood analysis. The use of blood analysis in the
preoperative assessment of the surgical patient is
a matter for debate. Routine screening prior to
surgery is likely to reveal a small percentage of
abnormality, most of which is insignificant to
anaesthetic or surgical management in any case.
Therefore, the general rule for the use of
confirmatory diagnostic testing should apply:
their use is indicated from the initial patient
assessment. In cases where systemic pathology is
known or suspected - e.g. in anaemia to ascertain
haemoglobin levels - blood sampling is most cer-
tainly indicated.
The patient on anticoagulant therapy has
already been discussed. Similarly, patients who
suffer from clotting abnormalities also require
further investigation (Table 19.5).
Radiographs. Radiographs are vital to the
surgeon for a number of reasons:
• they allow the identification of many
rheumatological, metabolic, endocrine and
infective disease states
• they allow the progression of deformity to be
monitored
• they show the precise relationship between
osseous anatomical structures that are of
particular interest to the surgeon
• they aid in the selection of the most
appropriate surgical technique
• they demonstrate the position of retained
internal fixation and are used to confirm
bone healing in the postoperative phase.
The identification and use of angular relation-
ships, or charting, between the foot bones has
become a key skill of the podiatrist.
Osteoporosis begins in middle life and is pre-
dominantly a disease of postmenopausal
women. Histologically, bone formation is
normal, but bone resorption is increased. If pre-
operative radiographs suggest significant osteo-
porosis, systemic disease is likely and multiple
contributing factors, including dietary deficien-
cies, endocrine imbalances, sedentary lifestyles
and genetic predisposition, may be implicated.
The implications for the fixation of osteotomies
are clear. Radiographic assessment is covered in
Chapter 11.
Table 19.5 Common clotting abnormalities
von Willebrand's disease
Haemophilia
Type A - classical haemophilia
Type B -Christmas disease
Type C - PTA (plasma thromboplastin antecedent)
deficiency
Vitamin K deficiency

POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT
The postoperative phase is said to have begun
when the patient leaves the operating theatre.
However, wound healing commences with the
initial surgical incision. The wound will progress
through the phases of inflammation to establish
environmental homeostasis amenable to tissue
repair. Careful preoperative assessment and
meticulous surgical technique will assist the
wound through this process and minimise post-
operative complications.
A surgical complication is an unexpected set of
circumstances which occurs during the perioper-
ative setting that directly or indirectly prolongs
the patient's functional recovery period.
Complications are inherent to all types of sur-
gical procedures and forefoot surgery is no
exception. If appropriately anticipated, some
complications are preventable, whereas the effect
of other complications can be minimised with
early diagnosis. There must, therefore, be an
awareness of the signs of impending complica-
tions to trigger prompt and decisive action
appropriate to the situation.
Management is aimed at avoiding haematoma
formation, excess oedema and infection while
attempting to keep the patient comfortable and
protect the surgical site. The format of the post-
operative assessment involves the following:
• evaluation of the wound dressing
• evaluation of the wound
• evaluation of pain.
Evaluation of the wound dressing
A wound dressing has several functions: the
main goal is to provide an optimum environ-
ment for healing to take place. It must first
protect the wound from contamination and
prevent the overgrowth or penetration of
pathogens. It must be absorptive and draw the
fluids away from the wound and prevent their
accumulation - this will reduce tissue macera-
tion. Differing materials can be employed to
provide temporary immobilisation, with or
without compression as required. This places a
wound at rest and allows healing to take place
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 481
without undue mechanical forces impeding the
physiological processes. Clots and newly
formed capillaries are thus not disturbed and
pain levels are decreased. Gentle compression
will aid haemostasis and prevent the formation
of haematoma. Immobilisation is particularly
important in reconstructive surgery to maintain
the foot or a digit in its corrected position
during the healing process.
The postoperative dressing regimen typically
sees the first dressing change at 4-7 days after
surgery. The inspection of the dressing is part of
the overall assessment process. Ensure that there
are no overt signs of slippage, which may predis-
pose exposure of the wound to contamination. If
compression has been applied, has it been effec-
tive? Examine the inside of the dressing to gauge
both the amount of blood loss and the nature of
any exudate formed. A bacterial infection will
demonstrate purulent, offensive exudate and
require prompt antimicrobial therapy and lor
drainage. It is important to record normal and
abnormal findings throughout the healing
process.
Suture removal is typically at 10-14 days post-
operatively. The dressing is inspected as before,
and all points noted.
Evaluation of the wound
A classification of wounds can be found in
Table 19.6. The majority of bone procedures on
the foot are classified as clean, with the exception
of nail surgery, where it is impossible to disinfect
the invaginated nail sulci to the same standard as
unbroken skin.
Table 19.6 Wound classification
Wounds can be classified as:
• Clean: surgical incisions are made with no break in aseptic
technique; no known contamination and no Inflammation IS
encountered
• Clean-contaminated: a minor break is made in aseptic
technique
• Contaminated: a major break is made in aseptic technique,
or in a fresh traumatic wound (less than 4 hours)
• Dirty: acute bacterial infection encountered with or without
pus. A traumatic wound with delayed treatment (greater
than 4 hours). A retained foreign body or infected surgery
 482 SPECIFIC CLIENT GROUPS
When examining the wound postoperatively,
the surgeon is expecting to see:
• an intact wound that shows no sign of
dehiscence
• a 'normal' amount of inflammation
• no sign of excessive bleeding, oedema or
haematoma formation
• the position maintained if any reconstructive
technique has been performed.
Meticulous suturing technique combined
with anatomical dissection, adequate haernosta-
sis and careful skin handling are important to
reduce the incidence of these complications.
When the sutures are removed it is important to
check the healing of the wound edges by gently
applying tensile force across the area.
Dehiscence will require further support of the
wound until the area has regained its mechani-
cal strength.
Evaluation of pain
The degree and severity of pain in the postoper-
ative period depends on:
• the physiological and psychological make-up
of the patient and his tolerance of pain
• the site and nature of the operation
• the amount of surgical trauma.
Pain reflects not only tissue injury but also
represents a psychological dimension to suffer-
ing. Much unnecessary suffering may be
avoided by the reduction of preoperative
anxiety. Simple, clear and honest communica-
tion with the patient should include an explana-
tion of what will happen and when it will
happen, and can have a positive influence on
postoperative pain levels. Certain patients may
benefit from prescription of an anxiolytic, used
FURTHER READING
British National Formulary (BNFl Updated twice yearly.
British Medical Association and Royal Pharmaceutical
Society of Great Britain, London
Forrest A P M et al 1995 Principles and practice of surgery,
3rd edn. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh
alone, or with analgesic medications to raise
pain thresholds postsurgically.
Injections of a long-acting local anaesthetic
immediately after surgery are commonly per-
formed and will delay postoperative pain for
some time. Combinations of opioid analgesics
and NSAIDs, however, provide the mainstay of
postoperative pain management. Paracetamol
may be combined with opioid analgesics, such as
codeine, to gain enhanced analgesia. while
NSAIDs may be added to an opioid regimen to
provide additional anti-inflammatory and intrin-
sic analgesic effects.
During the postoperative period, the patient
should be asked about pain levels and details of
their responses recorded. There are several tools
available to assess pain, including visual ana-
logue scoring and complex questionnaires such
as the McGill Pain Questionnaire (Ch. 3). The use
of (or lack of) prescribed analgesic medication
should also be discussed. The most common
causes of excessive postoperative pain in the first
week after surgery are excessive swelling within
a restrictive dressing or cast and haematoma for-
mation. Extreme levels of pain occurring in the
second postoperative week, 'returning pain', are
suggestive of infection. A suspicion of
haematoma formation or infection requires
prompt intervention and management.
SUMMARY
The continuum of surgical care encompasses the
pre-, intra- and postoperative phases. Careful
attention to detail during each phase is essential
for the achievement of a successful surgical
outcome. The approach outlined in this chapter
will ensure that a broad range of factors are taken
into consideration when assessing the pre- and
postoperative patient.
Greenberger N, Hinthorn D 1993 History taking and
physical examination: essentials and clinical correlates.
Mosby Year-Book, St Louis
McGlamry E D 1992 A comprehensive textbook of foot
surgery. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore

O'Higgins N J et al1991 Surgical management, 2nd edn.
Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford
Pinnock C et al1999 Fundamentals of anaesthesia.
Greenwich Medical Media, London
Seymour C, Siklos P 1994 Clinical clerking: a short
introduction to clinical skills, 2nd edn. Press Syndicate of
the University of Cambridge
PRE- AND POSTOPERATIVE ASSESSMENT 483
Tally N, O'Connor S 1989 Clinical examination. Blackwell
Scientific, Oxford
Turner R, Blackwood R 1991 Lecture notes on history taking
and examination, 2nd edn. Blackwell Science, Oxford
Zier B 1990 Essentials of internal medicine in clinical
podiatry. W B Saunders, Philadelphia
Index

A perioperative risk and, 479-480 iron deficiency, 92, 225, 460

A-beta fibres, testing, 140-142 sports injury risk and, 376-377 pernicious, 89, 444, 460
A-delta fibres, testing, 142-143 Ageing, 451 preoperative assessment, 475
Abbreviations, clinical, 9, 22 definitions, 453 Anaesthesia, 139, 155
Abdominal pain, 68 lower limb consequences, 453-455 Analgesics, postoperative, 482
Abduction, 158, 160, 161 skin, 220, 454,457 Anaphylaxis, 61
Abductor strength test, 180 sweating and, 227 Anchor sign, 350
Abscess, 223 see also Elderly Aneurysms, arterial, 101
Brodie's, 287 AIDS/HI\', 70, 135,446 Angina pectoris, 64
Accelerometers, 313 Albers-Schonberg disease, 285 surgical risk, 473-474, 475
Accessory ossicles, 281, 282, 407-408 Alcohol symptoms, 65,90-91
Accuracy, 42 abuse (alcoholism), 61 Angiography
ACE inhibitors, 60, 90 drug metabolism, 68 in arterial insufficiency, 105
Acetylcholine, 122 neurological disorders, 135,446 in neurological disorders, 137
Achilles (ankle tendon) reflex, 144, preoperative assessment, 476 venous (venography), 110, 392
145,347 consumption, 61, 472 Angiotensin-converting enzyme
Achilles tendon (tendo calcaneus) Alignment, structural (ACE) inhibitors, 60, 90
rupture, 187, 193,413 nonweightbearing assessment, Anhidrosis (lack of sweating), 153,227
Achilles tendonitis (tendinosis), 378, 197-202 Ankle
412-413 sports injuries and, 378-379 children, 352
Acquired conditions, 7 X-ray assessment, 276-282 dorsiflexors, 194
Acrocyanosis, 369 Alimentary system, 67-68 equinus, 171, 188
Acromegaly, 74,440 preoperative assessment, 475-476 evertors. 194
case history, 71 Allen's test, 100 examination, 187-194
facial appearance, 59 Allergic contact dermatitis, 228, footballers, 385, 404-405
skin changes, 225, 240 235-236, Plate 19 impingement, posterior, 377
Action potential, 124-125, 126 Allergies, 235-236 injuries, 190-191
Activated partial thromboplastin time drug, 61, 236 instability, 171
(APTT), 332, 334 patch testing, 228 inverters, 193-194
Activities of daily living (ADU, 461, shoe components, 253 ligamentous injuries, grading,
462,464-465 Allis test, 207 190-191
Addison's disease, 73,440 Alopecia, 225 motion, 171
Adduction, 158, 160, 161 Altitude, high, 387 muscles, 193-194
Adductor strength test, 180 Amenorrhoea, in athletes, 377-378 plantarflexors, 193
Adductovarus fifth, 206 American Society of Anesthesiologists sprain, chronic, 413-414
Adrenal gland disorders, 73 (ASA) surgical risk stress tests, 188-190
Adrenocortical insufficiency, 73, 440 classification, 471 tendon (Achilles) reflex, 144, 145,
Aetiology, 7 Amputation 347
Afferent nerves (nerve fibres), at-risk foot, see At-risk foot X-rays, 191,273-274
120-121,122,126-127 histology of resected parts, 337 see also Subtalar joint; Talocrural
large-diameter, testing, 140-142 phantom limb sensation, 139 joint
small-diameter, testing, 142-143 Anabolic steroids, 388-389 Ankle-brachial pressure index (ABPI),
Age Anaemia, 66, 89, 444 39,103-104,439
at-risk foot, 434 diagnosis, 91-92, 95 Ankylosing spondylitis, 445
limping in children and, 367 elderly, 459-460 Anterior, 158
neurological disorders and, 135 folate-deficiency, 460 Anterior cruciate ligament, 166, 184
485
 486 INDEX

Anterior superior iliac spine (ASIS), purpose, 3-4 Bilirubin, urinary, 329
207,208 records, 8-9 Biochemistry, blood, 334-335
Anterior talofibular ligament (ATFL), repeat, 7-8 Biomechanics, 308
189,190 risk,4-5 Biopsy, 336-337
Anti-hypertensive drugs, 90 time management, 7 excisional. 337
Antibiotics, 321 Asthma, 66-67 muscle, 150
prophylactic, 474 Astrocytes, 115 needle, 337
sensitivity testing, 326, 327 At-risk foot, 5, 427-448 nerve, 144, 150
Anticoagulant therapy, 60, 472 assessment, see Risk assessment punch (incisional), 336-337
Anxiety, preoperative, 479 causal factors, 428-429 shave,336
Aorta, 80, 81, 88 clinical decision-making, 447-448 skin, 228
Apgar score, 345 elderly, 455 Biothesiometer, 142
Aphasia, 155 Ataxia, 114, 151, 175 Bleeding time, 332, 334
Aplasia, congenital, 281 Atenolol, 93 Blistering disorders, 231-232
Apley's compression test, 185 Atherosclerosis, 95-96 Blisters, 223, 231-232, 439
Appearance, physical, 20 coronary, 90 Blood,331
Application letters/forms, 22 in diabetes, 442 analysis, 331-335, 480
Apprehension test, 183 Atopic eczema (dermatitis), 221, biochemistry, 334-335
Arch 232-233 components, 331
height, 201, 362 Atrioventricular (AV) node, 87 coughing up, 67
index (Staheli), 362 Atrophie blanche, 107-108, Plate 5 count, full, 95, 332-333
longitudinal, 204 Atrophy film, 333
Arm muscle, see Muscle, atrophy sample collection, 332
extensors, weak, 155 skin, 223 serology, 335
swing, 168-170, 348 soft tissue, 98 in urine (haematuria), 69, 330
Arrhythmias, 64, 92 subcutaneous fat layer, 239 Blood gases, arterial, 334
surgical risk, 474, 475 Auspitz sign, 222, 231 Blood pressure, 64, 93-94
Arterial emboli, 96 Autoimmune disease, 288-289 in autonomic dysfunction, 153
Arterial insufficiency, 95-106 Autonomic nervous system (ANS), elderly, 456
seealso Ischaemia; Peripheral 87-88,122-124 measurement, 93-94
vascular disease assessment of function, 153 regulation, 88
Arterial tree, 81 Autonomic neuropathy, 153,441 seealso Hypertension
Arteries, 81, 83 Axon, 115, 116 Blood urea nitrogen (BUN), 334
ageing changes, 456 Axonal degeneration, 149 Blood vessels
aneurysms, 101 Axonotmesis, 139 anatomy, 81-84
bruits, 102 major, 80
calcification, 103, 285, 442 physiology, 88-89
Miinckeberg's sclerosis, 103,442 B skin, 218
Arteriography, 105, 392 Babinski response (plantar reflex), 145, Blount's disease, 355
Arterioles, 81, 83, 88 146,347 Body mass index (BM!), 381
Arteriovenous (A-V) anastomoses, Back pain, low, 424 Body weight (mass), 59-60
82-83 Bacteria, 320 loss, 72
Arthritis bone and joint infection, 287 preoperative assessment, 471
crystal, 420-421 culture, 228, 323-325 Bone
degenerative, see Osteoarthritis identification, 324, 325-327 cyst
enteropathic, 445 microscopy, 323 aneurysmal, 293
gonococcal, 70 skin infection, 237-238, Plate 21 solitary (simple), 292-293
juvenile idiopathic (JIA), 367, 368, in urine, 330-331 density, 282-285
369 Balance, 133 infection, 287, 288, 422
preoperative assessment, 477-478 Ball tread, 249 isotope scanning, 298-300, 392
psoriatic, 234, 445 Ballottement test, 183 metastatic disease, 285, 296
rheumatoid, see Rheumatoid Barefoot walking, 255, 260 tumours, 292-296
arthritis Barlow's test, 353 Bone marrow, MRI imaging, 296, 298,
septic (infectious, pyogenic), 422, Baroreceptor reflex, 88, 153 299
446,478 Barthel index, 462 Boots, 253-254
sero-negative, 445, 478 Basal cell carcinoma, 243 Bottoming, 250
Arthritis Impact Measurement Scales Basal ganglia, 117, 130 Bow legs, see Genu varum
(AIMS),401 dysfunction, 151 Bowel habit, altered, 68
Aspirin, 60 Beau's lines, 224, 225 Bowen's disease, 242-243
Assessment, 3-10 Behcet's disease, 445 Brachydactyly, 281, 282
components, 4, 8 Beighton scale, 352, 379 Brachymetatarsia, 201
interview,4,11-26 Bendrofluazide, 60 Bradycardia, 92
loop, 8 Beta-blockers, 60, 90, 93 Brain
process, 4-7 Bias errors, 48 anatomy, 117, 118

ascending pathways, 127, 128
descending pathways, 127, 129
scans, 137
Brain stem, 117, 118, 128
Breastfeeding, 479
Breathlessness (dyspnoea), 65, 67, 91
Brodie's abscess, 287
Bromhidrosis, 227
Bronchitis, chronic, 66, 67
Brown-Sequard syndrome, 138-139
Bruits, 102
Budiman-Mak Foot Function Index, 34
Buerger's disease (thromboangiitis
obliterans), 96, 438
Buerger's elevation/dependency test,
100
Bulla, 222, 223
Bullous pemphigoid, 232, Plate 15
Bundle of His, 87
Bunion, tailor's, 205
Burrow, 222
Bursae, calcification, 285-286
Bursitis, retrocalcaneal, 418-419
Buschke's disease, 290
c anatomy, 117, 118
C fibres, testing, 142-143
C-reactive protein (CRP), 332, 333
Cadence, 307
Calcaneal stance position
neutral (NCSP), 202-204
relaxed (RCSP), 202-204
Calcaneocuboid fault, 280
Calcaneofibular ligament (CFL), 190
Calcaneonavicular coalition, 363, 409
Calcaneus
bone density, 283
deformity, 161
fractures, 291, 298
inclination angle, 279-280, 352
position, 171
spurs, 280
Calcification, degenerative, 285-286
Calcinosis cutis, 287
Calcium antagonists, 60,90
Calibration, instrument, 45-46
Callus, 229-231, 439
elderly, 458
periungual, 226
Caltrac device, 316
Candida spp., 327
Capillaries, 81, 82-83
fluid flow, 86
function, 89
skin, 218
Capillaroscopy, 105
Capillary filling time (CFT), 100
Carbon dioxide, blood, 335
Cardiac output, 87
Cardiovascular disease
clinical tests, 92-94
current medication, 90
exercise cautions, 382
history, 64-66, 90
hospital tests, 94-96
observable signs, 92, 225
symptoms, 90-92
see also Heart disease; Hypertension;
Peripheral vascular disease;
Venous insufficiency
Cardiovascular system (CVS), 80-89
anatomy, 80-86
at-risk foot, 438-439
elderly, 455-456
general overview, 90-95
physiology, 86-89
preoperative assessment, 473-475
Carpal tunnel syndrome, 143
Cartilage, 285
Casts, urinary, 330
Catalase test, 326
Cauda equina, 121
Cellulitis, 237-238, 422, 448, Plate 37
Central nervous system (CNS), 70-71
anatomy, 116-119
in posture/balance/ coordination,
133
see also Neurological disorders
Cerebellum
dysfunction, 150-151, 152
function, 129-130
Cerebral cortex, 117, 118
Cerebral palsy, 348
Cerebral vascular accident (CVA,
stroke), 114, 128,446
loss of consciousness, 136, 137
risk factors, 135
upper motor neurone lesions, 146
Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), 115, 118-119
Champagne legs, 109
Charcot foot, 299, 403, 441-442, Plate
34
Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, see
Hereditary motor and sensory
neuropathy
Cheiroarthropathy, 443
Chemicals, in shoes, 253
Chest pain, 65, 67, 90-91
Chest X-ray, 95
Chilblains, 235, 369
Children, 341-369
assessment, 343-353
generalapproach,343-344
initiating, 343
conditions affecting lower limb,
353-369
examination, 346-352
footwear, 258, 352-353
gait analysis, 59, 348, 367
history taking, 344--346
interviewing, 344
limping, 365-368
non-weightbearing assessment,
350-352
normal development, 342-343
perioperative risk, 480
INDEX 487
sports injury risk, 376-377
weightbearing assessment, 348-350
Chloramphenicol, 60
Chloride, plasma, 335
Chondrocalcinosis, 288
Chondromalacia patellae, 183
Chondromatosis, synovial, 293
Chondrosarcoma, 294--295, 411
Chopart's joint, see Midtarsal joint
Choreo-athetotic movements, 151, 155
Chromonychia, 224, 225, 226
Cine photography, 314
Cinema seat sign, 354
Circulation
collateral, 83-84
peripheral (systemic), see Peripheral
vascular system
pulmonary, 81, 89
Circumduction test, 178
Clarke's test, 183
Claudication
distance, 97, 103
intermittent, 97
Claw toe, 172,206
Clinical environment, 45, 51-52
Clinical examination, 4
Clinical measurement, see
Measurement
Clinical tests, 4
Clogs, 254, 255
Clostridium welchii, 325
Closure,24
Clothing, 49
practitioners, 20
in sports assessment, 375-376
Clotting
abnormalities, 480
tests, 332, 333-334
Clubbing, 92,224,225
Clubfoot, 360
one-third of, 358
Coalitions, 187,281-282
tarsal, see Tarsal coalitions
Codrnan's triangle, 294
Cognitive status, assessment, 461,
463-464
Colchicine, 60
Cold-related sports injuries, 387
Collagen, 377
Collar (sports shoe), 248
Collaterals, 83-84
Colour
nail, 225, 226
skin, see Skin, colour
urine, 328-329
wound,437
Coma, 137
Common peroneal nerve, 119
Communication, 12-21
listening skills, 15-16
non-verbal, 16-21
questioning skills, 13-15
Compartment syndrome, 414-415
chronic, 391, 414-415
 488 INDEX
Compensation, 163
Computed tomography (CT), 296, 297,
298
in neurological disorders, 137
quantitative (QCT), 283
in sports injuries, 392
Concerns, patients', 15,29
Conduction disturbances, 474, 475
Confidentiality, 9-10, 25
Confusion, 464
Congenital conditions, 7
Congenital talipes equinovarus, 360
Connective tissue disorders, 446
Consciousness
assessment of level of, 136-138
loss of, 135, 136
Constipation, 68
Contact dermatitis, 221
allergic, 228, 235-236, Plate 19
Contraceptive pill, 60
Conversation, 11-12
Coordination, 133
assessment, 150-152
causes of poor, 150
Corns, 229-231, 439, Plate 12
elderly, 458
fibrous, 231
hard, 231, Plate 13
periungual, 226
seed,230
soft, 231
vascular, 231
Coronal plane, see Frontal plane
Coronary angiography, 95
Coronary arterial disease (CAD), 90
Coronary arteries, 84
Coronary artery bypass graft (CABG),
473,474,475
Corticospinal tract, 129
Corticosteroids, seeSteroid therapy
Cortisol deficiency, 73
Corunebacterium minuiissimum, 325
Cough.ri?
Court shoe, 254, 255
Coxa valgum, 170
Coxa vara, 170
Coxodynia (hip pain), 175, 176
CRAGCEL acronym, 59, 64
Cramps, nocturnal, 65-66, 97-98
Cranial arteritis, 70
Cranial nerve palsies, 155
Cranial nerves, 120
Creatinine, serum, 334
Crepitus, 165
Crohn's disease, 445
Crossed extensor reflex, 132
Cruciate ligaments, 184
Crusting, 222, 223
Crystal arthritis, 420--421
Crystals, in urine, 330
CT, see Computed tomography
Cuboideum secundarium, 281
Culture media, 323-325
Cushing's syndrome, 73, 284, 440
Cyanosis, 6, 92 sensory testing, 141, 142, 143
in venous insufficiency, 107 shoe wear marks, 264
Cyclic AMP, 125 skin changes, 240
Cyma line, 280 X-rays, 285
Cyst, 222 Diagnosis, 5-7
bone, 292-293 differential, 6
Dialect, 21
Diaphyseal dysplasia, 285
D Diarrhoea, 68
Darier's disease, 229 Diastole, 87
Data Dichrotic notch, 103
gathering, 24 Differential diagnosis, 6
intervals, 39 Digital formulae, 206
nominal, 39--40 Digiti quinti varus, 205
ordinal,39 Direction of motion (DOM), 164, 165
ratios, 39 Disabled Living Foundation (DLF),
Data Protection Act, 9-10, 25 261,265
Deep peroneal nerve, 119 Disease, coexisting
entrapment, 416--417 at-risk foot, 435
Deep venous thrombosis (DVT), elderly, 454--455
106-107,109 skin disease, 239-240
Deformity, terminology, 161 sports injuries, 382-383
Delivery, 345 Dislocation, 165
Dementia, 464 Distal, 158
Demyelination, segmental, 149 Distal articular set angle (DASA), 278,
Dendrites, 115, 116 279
Dental disease, 67---68 Diuretics, 90
Dermal papillae, 217 Doppler ultrasound, 300
Dermatitis in arterial insufficiency, 102-103,
chronic, 229 104-105
contact, see Contact dermatitis in neurological disorders, 137
herpetiformis, 219, 232 sources of error, 50, 51-52
juvenile plantar, 236, 368-369 in venous insufficiency, 102, 109
seealso Eczema Dorsal, 158
Dermatofibroma, 242 Dorsal columns, 128
Dermatoglyphics, 218-219 Dorsal horn, 120
Dermatology, 213 Dorsalis pedis artery
Dermatome, 121 patency testing, 100
Dermatomyositis, 147,240,446 pulse, 51-52, 100, 101
Dermis, 215, 218 Dorsiflexion, 158, 159
Dermo-epidermal junction (DEJ), 216, Dorsiflexors, 194
217 Drawer test, 184, 189,414
Desmosomes, 216,217 Dressings, wound, 481
Development Drugs
foot, 343 adverse reactions, 60, 61, 236
milestones, 345-346 allergies, 61, 236
normal childhood, 342-343 eruptions, 236
Diabetes insipidus, 72 first-pass metabolism, 68
Diabetes mellitus, 440, 441--444 history, 60-61
autonomic neuropathy, 153, 441 metabolism, 68
elderly, 456, 459 preoperative assessment, 471--472
exercise in, 383 recreational, 61, 472
foot ulcers, 428 self-prescribed,61
classification systems, 432--433 sports injuries and, 388-389
ischaemic, 442, Plates 35-36 Dual energy X-ray absorptiometry
neuropathic, 441, Plates 32-33 (DEXA),283
risk assessment, 433--447 Dual-photon absorptiometry (DPA), 283
history, 71-72 Dupuytren's contracture, 443
insulin-dependent, 225 Dysarthria, 151, 155
microangiopathy, 442 Dysdiadochokinesia, 151, 155
motor function testing, 149 Dysphagia, 68
nervous system involvement, 154 Dyspnoea (breathlessness), 65, 67, 91
perioperative risk, 477 Dystrophia rnyotonica, 147
peripheral neuropathy, 417, 441--442 Dysuria, 69
 INDEX 489
-------------------------------------------------------_._------

E granular layer, 216-217 Facial expression, 17, 59

Eating disorders, 378 horny layer, 217 Factor V gene mutation, 106
Eburnation, 283 prickle cell layer, 216 Fainting, 65, 70, 136,474
Ecchymosis, 222 Epidermolysis bullosa, 232 Falls, 135
Eccrine poroma, 242 Epidermophyton floccosllln, 238, 327 Family history, 62-63, 346
Echocardiography, 95 Epilepsy, 136, 137 Fasciculi proprii, 128
Ecthyma, 237 progressive focal deficit, 155 Fat, subcutaneous, see Subcutaneous
Eczema, 59,232-233 surgical risk, 479 fat layer
asteatotic, 233 Epiphyseal dysplasia, 285 Fatiguability, progressive, 148, 155
atopic, 221, 232-233 Epiphyses, 283, 343 Fatigue, 60
discoid, 233 Epithelial cells, in urine, 330 Feedback, 26
distribution, 220 Equinus deformity, 161 Female athlete triad, 377-378
gravitational (stasis, venous), 108, Equipment Femoral nerve, 119
233, Plate 6 measuring, see Measuring Femur, length inequality, 207
seealso Dermatitis instruments/equipment Fibromas, periungual, 226
Edmonds and Foster diabetic foot sporting, 383-384 Fibrosarcomas,295
staging system, 433 Erosions, 223 Fibula
Education, patient, 434 Errors, measurement, 44-51 children, 351-352
Efferent neurones, 120-121, 122 random, 44 examination, 186-187
Ehlers-Danlos syndrome, 240 systematic, 45 50:50 test, 183
Eight-finger test, 187 Erythema, 221,222 Financial aspects, footwear, 256
Elastic stockings, 107 multiforme, 235 Finger-nose test, 152
Elbow nodosum,221,239 First-pass metabolism, 68
golfer's, 385 Erythrasma, 238 Fissures, 223, 439, Plate 30
tennis, 385 Erythrocyanosis, 235, 369 Fitness, physical, 380, 388
Elderly, 451-466 Erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), Flare, shoe, 249, 259
assessment, 455-465 332,333 Flat feet, see Pronation,
definition, 453 Erythrocytes (red blood cells, RBC), abnormal! excessive
functional assessment, 461-462 89 Flexibility, sports injuries and, 377,
malnutrition, 471 counts/indices, 332-333 378,379-380
perioperative risk, 479 microscopy, 333 Flexion, 158
population, 452 in urine, 330 Flexor hallucis longus tenosynovitis,
risk assessment, 465-466 Erythroderma, 234 412,413
seealso Ageing Escherichia coli,325 Flexor stabilisation, 204
Electrocardiogram (ECG), 95 Ethnic origin, 63 Flexor substitution, 204
Electroencephalogram (BEG), 137 Eversion, 158, 159 Fluid
Electrogoniometers, 313-314 Evertors, foot, 194 displacement test, 183
Electromagnetic tracking systems, 315 Ewing's tumour, 295-296, 411 tissue, 86
Electromyography (EMG), 149, 315 Excoriation, 223 Fluoroscopy, 300
Electron beam tomography, 95 Exercise Fluorosis (fluorine excess), 285
Ely's test, 178 ankle-brachial pressure index and, Fog index, 14
Emboli 104 Folate-deficiency anaemia, 460
arterial, 96 claudication distance, 97, 103 Foot
venous, 107 surface, 384-385 alignment, 197-202, 276-282
Emed system, 312 in systemic disease, 382-383 anatomical variations, 281-282
Empathy, 14 seealso Sports arch, see Arch
Emphysema, 66, 67,461 Exostosis care, ability to perform, 464-465
Enchondroma, 292, 411-412 osteocartilagenous, 292 children, 352
Enchondromatosis, multiple, 292, 294 subungual, see Subungual exostosis drop, 175
Endocardium, 81 Extension, 158 elderly, 453-455
Endocrine disease, 71-74 Extensor digitorum longus (EDL), 205 flat, see Pronation,
at-risk foot, 440-444 Extensor substitution, 205 abnormal! excessive
elderly, 459 Extensus deformity, 161 growth and development, 343
perioperative risk, 477 External rotation, 158,160 high-arched cavoid (pes cavus). 173,
Endothelium, vascular, 81 Extrapyramidal system, 129, 130 262,263
Energy expenditure, 315-316 Exudation, 222 length, 201-202
Enteropathic arthritis, 445 Eye contact, 17 moccasin, 238
Environmental factors Eyeballing, 48 muscle activity, 173
at-risk foot, 434 neutral position, 199,201
sports injuries, 387 pain, 397-424
Ependymal cells, 115 F assessment / measurement,
Ephelis, 240 F-Scan insole system, 312-313 398-403
Epidermis, 215, 216-217, Plate 9 Faber's test, 178 causes,399,403-424
basal layer, 216 Facial appearance, 59 examination, 398
 490 INDEX
Foot (Cont'd)
plantar pressure measurement, see
Pressure measurement
sensors, plantar
position/shape, 173
pronated, flat, see Pronation
at risk, 5, 427-448
switches, 307
trauma, 291
X-ray views, 271-274
Foot Function Index (FFI), 402
Foot Health Status Questionnaire
(FHSQ),402--403
Footballer's ankle, 385, 404-405
Footprints, 43--44, 204
Harris & Beath mat, 309
impressions during gait, 307, 308
~usgrave,311-312
Footwear, 245-265
acceptance of advice on, 246
acquisition, 256
assessment, 255-265
history taking, 256
purpose, 246
shoe fit, 256-261
wear marks, 261-264
athletes, 248, 383-384
children, 258, 352-353
diabetes mellitus, 442, 443
practitioners, 20
in sports injuries, 376
seealso Hosiery; Shoes
Force, 308
plates, 311
sensitive resistors, 311-312
in-shoe measurement, 312-313
Forefoot
children, 352
deformity, 171
everted, 201
inverted,199-201
to rearfoot alignment, 199-201
supinatus, 199-201
valgus, 201
varus, true, 199,200-201
Foreign bodies, 292
Forgetfulness, 464
Fractures, 291
classification, 291
healing, 291
march,385
stress, see Stress fractures
young athletes, 376
Freckles, 240
Freiberg's disease (infarction), 196,
289-290
Frequency of urination, 69
Friction, athletic surfaces, 384
Friedreich's ataxia, 114
Frontal lobe, 117, 118
Frontal plane, 157, 158
deformity, 161
joint motion, 158, 159
joint position, 161
Frusemide, 60
Functional ability, 453--454
Functional assessment, 461--462
Fungi
children, 368
culture, 323-325
identification, 327
microscopy, 228, 323
skin infections, 238, 239, Plate 23
specimen collection, 228, 322
Wood's light examination, 227-228
G children, 351, 355
Gait
abnormal patterns, 173-175
analysis, 163, 167-175, 303-316
children, 59, 348, 367
elderly, 457-458, 462--463
GHORT method, 304
limb-length inequality, 168, 170,
206-207
methods, 304
multisystems, 316
observational (visual), 59,
167-173,304-306
quantitative methods, 306-316
sources of error, 51
in sports injuries, 376
angle and base, 202
antalgic, 173,398,463
apraxic, 155
apropulsive, 173-174,463
ataxic, 151, 155, 175
in cerebellar dysfunction, 151
children, 342
circumducted,175
disorders affecting, 167
dystrophic/ atrophic, 175
electromyography, 315
energy expenditure, 315-316
festinating, 152, 155, 175,463
helicopod, 175
kinematics, 313-315
kinetics, 308-313
mats, 307
in Parkinson's disease, 152
scissor, 145, 175, 176
spatial parameters, 306-308
stance phase, 167-168, 169
steppage, 175, 463
swing phase, 167-168, 173
temporal parameters, 306-308
in-toeing, 170,348,356-360
Trendelenburg, 175, 348
in upper motor neurone lesions,
145
seealso Walking
Calleazi's sign, 353
Ganglion, 420
resection, 337
X-ray assessment, 285, 286
Gangrene, 99
dry, 99, Plate 3
wet, 99
Gastric ulcers, 67
Gastritis, 68
Gastrointestinal (GIl disease, 67-68,
475--476
Gender
neurological disorders and, 135
sports injuries and, 377-378
seealso Women
Genitourinary system, 68-70, 476--477
Genu recurvatum, 351
Genu valgum (knock knees), 161,
170-171
non-weightbearing assessment,
197-198
sporting activities and, 377
Genu varum (bow legs), 161, 170-171
children, 351, 354-355
non-weightbearing assessment,
197-198
Gestures, 17-18
Giant cell tumours, 295
Glabellar tap reflex, 152
Glial cells, 115
Glomus body, 83
Glomus tumours, 226, 420
Glucometers, 335
Glucose
blood,335
urine, 329
Goniometers, 313-314
finger, 164
gravity, 164, 177, 198-199
Gonococcal arthritis, 70
Gout, 420--421, 445--446
preoperative assessment, 478
X-ray assessment, 286
Gracilis muscle, 180
Graded potential, 125-126
Grading scales, 39
Gram stain, 323, 325
Granuloma
annulare, 235
pyogenic, 242, Plate 25
Grasp reflex, 347
Grass, artificial, 384
Grief response, sports injuries,
381-382
'Growing pains', 363
Growth, childhood, 343
Growth hormone excess, see
Acromegaly
Guillain-Barre syndrome, 114, 134,
154,446
H
Haematocrit, 332, 333
Haematological disease, 66, 444,
459--460
Haematology, 332-334
Haematoma,223
Haematuria, 69, 330
 INDEX 491

rIaemoglobin, 89,332,333 shoe, 247, 248 Hospital based tests, 4

glycosylated (Crib), 335 height, 255 Hospitalisation, previous, 62
indices, 332, 333 wear patterns, 262-263 Human papilloma virus (rIPV)
Haemophilia, 66, 444, 475 tab,248 infection, 237
Haemoptysis, 67 Heel lift, 167, 169 Huntington's chorea, 151
Haemorrhages, splinter, 92, 224, 225 early, 174-175 Hydrostatic pressure, 86
Haemosiderosis, 108, Plate 6 Heel pad syndrome, 419 H yperaemic test, 104
Hair Heel-shin test, 152 Hypercalcaemia, 72, 440
follicles, 218 rIeel-toe test, 152 Hyperglycaemia, 459, 477
in ischaemia, 98, Plate 1 rIeight,20 Hyperhidrosis, 72, 153, 227
Hallux Helbing's sign, 192,361 Hyperkeratosis, 222-223, 229-231,
abduction angle, 277, 278 Hemiplegic gait, 145 458
abductovalgus. 205, 206 Heparin, 472 Hypcrlipidaemia. 59, 456
abductus, 205, 206 Hepatic disease, see Liver disease Hypermobility, sports injuries and,
abductus interphalangeus, 206 Hepatitis B, 69 379-380
dorsiflexion test, 363 Hepatitis C, 70 Hyperparathyroidism, 284
extensus (trigger toe), 196, 206 Hereditary conditions, 7 Hyperpyrexia, malignant, 147
flexus, 196,206 Hereditary motor and sensory Hypertension, 64, 93, 94
hyperextended, 206 neuropathy (rIMSN, elderly, 456
limitus, 196,206 Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease), exercise in, 382
plexus, 406 114,154,421-422,446 preoperative assessment, 474-475
rigidus, 196, 206, 406-408 case histories, 148, 347 see also Blood pressure
valgus investigations, 149, 422 Hyperthyroidism (thyrotoxicosis), 72,
juvenile, 364-365 Herpes simplex, 237 440-441
metatarsalgia, 410 Herpes zoster, 135,237 facial appearance, 59
sports activities and, 377 rIigh altitude, 387 osteoporosis, 284
varus, 206 High-density lipoprotein cholesterol skin changes, 240
rIammer toe, 204, 206 (rIDLC),95 Hypervitaminosis 0, 284
Hamstring nerve, 119 High-heeled shoes, 254, 255 Hypo Zbradykinesia, 152, 155
Hamstrings, 185 Hindfoot, see Rearfoot Hypocalcaemia, 72, 440
tightness, children, 350, 355-356, 368 Hindfoot stabiliser, 248 Hypoparathyroidism, 284
Handshake, initial, 23, 59 Hip Hypopituitarism, 284
Hansen's disease, 446 abduction limitation test, 353 Hypotension, postural, 153
Harris & Beath mat, 309 developmental dislocation (DDrI), Hypothetico-deductive reasoning, 5
rIead position, 168,348 345,353-354,367 Hypothyroidism, 73, 440
Headache. 70, 135 examination, 175-180 elderly, 459
Healing in children, 349, 350-351 facial appearance, 59
delayed, 435 in in-toeing child, 357 skin changes, 229, 240
fracture, 291 functional tests, 180 Hysteresis, 45, 310
Health status joint, 175-176
measuring tools, 401-402 motion, 176-178
preoperative assessment, 471 muscle tests, 178-180 I
questionnaire, 22, 59, 77-78 pain, 175, 176 Ichthyosis, 229
Hearing, 50 Histology, 335-338 Idiopathic conditions, 7
rIeart indications, 335-336 Iliopsoas contracture, 178
anatomy, 80-81, 82 sample transportation and storage, Iliotibial band contraction/ tightness,
murmurs, 474 337 178-180
physiology, 87-88 sampling techniques, 336-337 Illness, coexisting, see Disease,
valves, 81, 82 skin, 228 coexisting
Heart disease, 64--65, 90-95 tests and interpretation, 338 Imaging techniques, 269-300
ischaemic, see Ischaemic heart disease History taking, 31-33, 57-78 preoperative, 480
valvular, 474, 475 athletes, 387-391 see also Computed tomography;
Heart failure, congestive (CrIF), 64, 89 children, 344-346 Magnetic resonance imaging;
signs and symptoms, 65, 91 family history, 62-63, 346 Ultrasound; X-rays
surgical risk, 474, 475 format, 75 Implants, surgical, 292
Heart rate, 87, 88, 92-93 medical history, 58-62 In-toeing, 170,348,356-360
in autonomic dysfunction, 153 personal social history, 63-64 Independence,256,461,462
physiological cost index, 316 purpose, 57-58 Independent Footwear Retailers
Heat loss, 89 questionnaire, 77-78 Association, 265
rIeel systems enquiry, 64-74 Indices, 39
to ball length, 249, 258 trrv/ AIDS, 70, 135,446 Indomethacin, 60
'bumps', 418-419 Hobbies, 63, 473 Infants
pain, 239 Horne circumstances, 63, 472-473 posture, 342
children, 367 Hosiery, 107, 264-265 reflexes, 346, 347
 492 INDEX

Infection, 422-423 Intraobserver reliability, 43 Klebsiella spp., 325

at-risk foot, 439 Inversion, 158, 159 Knee
bone and joint, 287, 288 Inverted bottle legs, 109 bursae, 183
children, 368 Invertors, foot, 193-194 in children, 351
diabetes mellitus, 442-443 Involucrum, 287 examination, 181-186
indications for referral, 448 Iron-deficiency anaemia, 92, 225, 460 functional tests, 186
lymphangitis/lymphadenitis, Ischaemia joint, 181-182
110-111 cardinal signs, 104,438-439 anatomy, 180
microbiology, 320-328 clinical tests, 99-104 motion, 183
perioperative risk, 480 critical limb, 98, 104 painful, 175
as presenting problem, 5, 422 diabetic foot, 442, Plates 35-36 stability, 183-185
signs, 108,422 hospital tests, 104-106 jumper's, 385
skin, see Skin, infections indications for referral, 448 knock, see Genu valgum
tropical, 64 observable signs, 98-99, Plates 1-2 laboratory tests, 186
venous ulcers, 108 symptoms, 97-98 muscle testing, 185
wound,437-438 Ischaemic heart disease (IHDl, 64, 90, observation, 182
Infestations, 238-239 473-474 pain in children, 354, 367
Inflammation Ischaemic ulcers, 98-99, 442, 443, palpation, 182-183
blood tests, 333 Plates 35-36 position, 170-171
joint, 164 Iselin's disease, 290, 376 Q angle, 186, 354
Inflammatory skin conditions, 232-235 Isotope clearance, 105-106 runners, 385
Information booklets/sheets, 22, 23 Isotope scanning, bone, 298-300, 392 Koebners phenomenon, 221
Infrapatellar fat pad, 182 Kohler's disease, 290, 367
Injuries, previous, 62 Koilonychia (nail spooning), 92, 224, 225
Insect bites, 239 J Korotkoff sounds, 94
Insole, 247 Jack's test, 363 Korsakoff's psychosis, 135
Insole pressure measurement systems, Jaundice, 68 Kyphosis, 349
312-313 Joint
Instruments, measuring, see ageing, 454
Measuring cartilage, 285 L
instruments/ equipment disease, 287-289,445-446 Laboratory tests, 4, 319-338
Intermetatarsal angle, first-second, 364 see also Arthritis preoperative, 480
Intermetatarsal bars, 282 examination, 164-165 Labour,345
Intermittent claudication, 97 inflammation, 164 Lace-up shoes, 247, 253-254, 260
Internal genicular position, 357-358 ligamentous laxity, 352, 379-380 Lachman's test, 166, 184
Internal rotation, 158, 160 motion, 164-165 Lamellar granules, 216
International Statistical Classification direction (DOM), 164, 165 Langerhans' cells, 216
of Diseases, Injuries and Causes measurement, 164 Language, 14
of Death, 9 quality (QOM), 165 Larvae migrans, 239
Interobserver reliability, 43 range (ROM), 164-165 Lasegue's test, 180
Interosseous talocalcaneal ligament, symmetry (SOM), 165 Laser-Doppler fluximetry, 106
191 terminology, 158-161 Lassitude, 91-92
Interphalangeal joints (IPJ), 197 observation, 164 Lasting,250
distal (DIPJ), 197, 198 position, 161 Lasts, 248-249
examination, 197, 198 Juvenile idiopathic arthritis (IIA), 367, Lateral, 158
proximal (PIPJ), 197, 198 368,369 Lateral collateral ligament stress test,
sesamoids, 281 Juvenile plantar dermatitis, 236, 183
Interpretative model, 5 368-369 Lateral plantar nerve, first branch
Intervertebral disc, prolapsed, 424 entrapment, 416-417
Interview, 4,11-26 Leather, 252, 253
aims, 12,22 K Leg
children, 344 Kaposi's sarcoma, 70, 243 alignment, see Alignment, structural
closure, 24 Keloid,223 flexors, weak, 155
communication skills, 12-21 Keratin, 216, 217 fresher's, 385
documenting, 21-22 Keratinisation, 217 length inequality, see Limb-length
practical tips, 25-26 Keratinocytes, 216, 217 inequality
preparation, 22-23 Keratoderma length measurement, 207-208
room, 23 climactericum, 229, 459 pain, exercise-induced, 391
stereotyping, 21 palmoplantar (PPK), 229, 231, Plate 14 shape, venous insufficiency, 109
structure, 22-25 Keratolysis, pitted, 238, Plate 22 tennis, 385
techniques, 14 Ketones, in urine (ketonuria), 329 torsion, 198-199,202
versus normal conversation, 11-12 Kinematics, 313-315 see also Limb
Intracompartmental pressure studies, Kinesics, 17-18 Legg-Calve-Perthes disease, 289, 367
392,415 Kistler force plate, 311 Lentigo, 240
 INDEX 493

Leprosy, 446 M Meggit-Wagner wound classification

Lesser tarsus abduction angle, 276-277 Macule, 222, 223 system, 431-432
Letters, application, 22 Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), Melanin, 216
Leucocytes (white blood cells, WBC) 296-298,299 Melanocytes, 216
counts (WCC), 332, 333 in arterial insufficiency, 105 Melanoma, malignant, 241-242, 440
microscopy, 333 in neurological disorders, 137 Meniscus tears, 184-185
in urine, 330 in sports injuries, 392 Menopause, 459
Lichen planus, 221, 234-235, Plate 17 Malignant tumours Mental test score, 464
nail changes, 225, 234-235 at-risk foot, 439-440 Merkel's cells, 216
Lichen simplex, 233 bone, 293-296 Metabolic disorders, 440
Lichenification, 222-223 foot, 411, 412 Metaphyseal dysplasia, 285
Ligamentous injuries internal, skin changes, 240 Metarterioles, 82, 83
ankle, 190-191 periungual, 226 Metastasis
grading, 393 skin, 242-243 bone, 285, 296
risk factors, 378, 379-380 venous ulcers, 108-109 skin, 243, Plate 26
Ligamentous laxity, 352, 379-380 Malleolar torsion, 198-199 Metatarsalgia, 410-411
Ligaments, 165 Malleoli Morton's (neuroma), 58, 411, 417-418
Lighting, 45, 48 children, 351-352 Metatarsals, 171-172
Limb medial, in leg length measurement, abnormal positions, 196
dominance, 381 207,208 adduction angle, 277
motion, 170 X-ray assessment, 279 deformity, 196
see also Leg Mallet toe, 206 examination, 194-196
Limb-length inequality (LU), 175, Malnutrition, 471 first (metatarsus primus)
206-208 Marble bone disease, 285 adductus angle, 277
gait changes, 168, 170,206-207 McArdle's syndrome, 147 assessment of motion, 194-196
sports injuries and, 379 McGill Pain Questionnaire (MPQ), 34, elevatus, 195, 196,201
Limbic system, 117, 128 400-401,438 flexible plantarflexed, 196
Limping McMurray's test, 184-185 rigid plantarflexed, 196
antalgic gait, 173, 398, 463 Measurement, 37-52 formula, 201
in children, 365-368 errors, 44-51 fractures, 291
Linings, shoe, 247,252-253 evaluation exercise, 51-52 head, prominent fibular condyle, 410
Lipids, plasma, 95 qualitative, 38-39, 40, 47-48 joint motion, 194-196
Listening, 15-16 quantitative, 38, 40-41 parabola, 196
Liver disease, 67, 68 selecting technique, 41-42 protrusion distance, 278
preoperative assessment, 476 semi-quantitative, 39-40 proximal articular set angle (PASA),
skin changes, 240 standardisation of techniques, 45 278
Local anaesthetics terminology, 42-44 see also Rays
adverse effects, 61 types, 38-41 Metatarsocuneiform split, 277
contraindications, 478-479 units, 38 Metatarsophalangeal joints (MTPJ), 196
postoperative use, 482 Measuring instruments/equipment, causing metatarsalgia, 410
Locomotor system, 74 38,41-42 first
assessment, see Orthopaedic calibration, 45-46 angle, 364
assessment sources of error, 45-47, 49, 50 examination, 196, 197
Loose bodies, 288,289 variation, 43 in gait, 172, 173
Lordosis, 349 Mechanoreceptors, 126 gout, 421
Low-density lipoprotein cholesterol Medial, 158 in hallux valgus, 364
(LDLC),95 Medial collateral ligament stress test, sesamoiditis, 411
Lower motor neurones (LMNs), 129 183-184 motion assessment, 196, 197
lesions, 146-150 Medial facet tenderness test, 354 sesamoids, see Sesamoids,
Lumbar plexus, 119 Medial plantar nerve entrapment, metatarsal head
Lumbar puncture, 138 416-417 Metatarsus adductus, 358-360
Lunge test, 190 Medial tibial stress syndrome, 391 Metatarsus primus, see Metatarsals,
Lupus erythematosus, 240 Medical health questionnaire, 22, 59, first
systemic (disseminated), 240, 288, 77-78 Methaemoglobinaemia, 479
446,478 Medical history, 59-62 Metronidazole, 60
Lymphadenitis, 110-111 current health status, 59-60 Microbiology, 227-228, 320-328
Lymphangiography, 111 medications, 60-61 indications, 320
Lymphangitis, 110-111 past, 62, 434, 472 samples (specimens), 320-325
Lymphatics, 84, 85 purpose, 57-58 collection, 322
skin, 218 Medical Research Council (MRC) containers, 321-322
Lymphoedema, 110-111,229 muscle strength grading, 39, examination, 322-325
praecox, 110 148, 165 types, 320-321
secondary, 110, 111 Medications, see Drugs Microcirculation, 83
tarda,110 Medulla oblongata, 117, 118 assessment, 105-106
 494 INDEX
Microglial cells, 115
Microorganisms
identification, 325-328
normally resident, 320
seealso Bacteria; Fungi; Viruses
Microscopy
blood film, 333
microorganisms, 323
urine, 330
Micturition, abnormal, 69
Midbrain, 117, 118
Midtarsal joint (MTJ), 194
motion, 194
position, 171, 172
Milroy's disease, 110
Minimum bactericidal concentration
(MBC), 326
Minimum inhibitory concentration
(MIC), 326, 327
Mobility assessment, 461, 462
Moccasin foot, 238
Moccasins,251-252,253-254
Moles, 240-241
Molluscum contagiosum, 237
Miinckeberg's sclerosis, 103,442
Monofilaments, 41, 139
accuracy, 43
using, 141
Mononeuritis multiplex, 134
Mononeuropathy, 134
Moro reflex, 347
Morton's metatarsalgia (neuroma), 58,
411,417-418
Motor cortex, 127, 128, 144
Motor function assessment, 144-150
Motor nerves, 122
Motor neurone disease, 114, 154
Motor neurones, see Lower motor
neurones; Upper motor
neurones
Motor neuropathy, diabetic, 441
Motor pathways, 128-129
Motor unit, 129, 130
Movement, joint, seeJoint, motion
MRI, see Magnetic resonance imaging
Mucosal surfaces, microbiological
sampling, 322
Mudguard, 248
Mulder's click, 418
Mules, 254, 255
Multifactorial conditions, 7
Multineuronal tract, 129
Multiple sclerosis, 114, 125, 154
case history, 70
signs and symptoms, 134, 135
Multistix 8SG, 329, Plate 28
Muscle, 121-122
activity in gait, 173
assessment, 165-166
atrophy (wasting), 166
in arterial insufficiency, 98
denervation, 148
disuse, 145
knee, 182
biopsy, 150
bulk,166
fasciculation, 148
spasm, 166
spindles, 132
strength (power) testing, 39, 148,
165-166
tears, grading, 393
tone, 166
in coordination disorders, 152
in lower motor neurone lesions,
149
in upper motor neurone lesions,
145-146, 155
weakness (paresis), 71, 146-147, 155
children, 368
as presenting problem, 134-135
Muscular dystrophy, 71, 147
Becker's, 147
Duchenne, 135, 147
facio-scapulo-humeral, 147
limb girdle, 147
Musculoskeletal disease, 74, 445-446
elderly, 457-458
preoperative assessment, 477-478
seealso Orthopaedic assessment
Musculotendinous injuries, risk
factors, 377, 378, 380
Musgrave footprint, 311-312
Myasthenia gravis, 114, 125, 135, 148
Mycology, 228
Myelin, 115, 125
Myelography, 138
Myocardial infarction (MI), 64
surgical risk, 473-474, 475
symptoms,65,90-91
Myocardial perfusion scintigraphy, 95
Myopathies, 114, 146
classification, 147
electromyography, 149
Myositis ossificans, 285-286
Myxoedema, pretibial, 72
N elderly, 456-457
Naevi
blue, 241
junctional, 241
pigmented, 240-241
Nails, 223-226
anatomy, 223-224
in arterial insufficiency, 99
clippings, 228, 322
clubbing (hippocratic), 92, 224, 225
colour changes (chromonychia), 224,
225,226
elderly, 454, 458
growth rate, 224-225
involution (pincer), 224, 225
in lichen planus, 225, 234-235
loosening/ shedding, 226
pattern of affected, 224
periungual changes, 226
pits, 225-226
plate shape, 225
in psoriasis, 225, 233-234
spooning (koilonychia), 92, 224, 225
surface texture, 225-226
thickness, 226
yellow, 111
Nalidixic acid, 60
Names, 23
Nausea, 68
Navicular
accessory, 407,408
position, 171
stress fractures, 375
Naviculocuneiform fault, 280
Necrobiosis Iipoidica, 108, 235, Plate
18
Necrosis, 99, 223
seealso Gangrene
Neonatal history, 345
Neoplasia, see Tumours
Neospinothalamic tracts, 128
Nerve
biopsy, 144, 150
conduction test, 143-144, 149, 392
damage, classification, 139
entrapments, 415-417
impulse, 124-126
injuries, 154
seealso Afferent nerves
Nervous system, 115-133
autonomic, 87-88, 122-124
central, see Central nervous system
function, 124-133
histology, 115-116
organisation, 116-124
peripheral, 120-121
somatic, 122
Neurofibromatosis, 114
Neurological assessment, 133-155
children, 346, 347, 368
purpose, 113-114
sources of error, 50-51
Neurological disorders, 114,446-447
causes, 133-134
exercise in, 383
history, 70-71, 134-135
observation, 135-136
perioperative risk, 477
signs and symptoms, 155
Neurones, 115-116
Neuropathic ulcers, 154,441,443,
Plates 32-33
Neuropathies, 134
Neuropraxia,139
Neurothesiometers, 51, 139, 142
Neurotips, disposable, 142, 143
Neurotmesis,139
Neurotransmitter, 125
Neutral calcaneal stance position
(NCSP), 202-204
Neutral position, foot, 199,201
Night cramps, 65-66, 97-98
Nikolsky's sign, 232
 INDEX 495

90:90 test, 185, 186,354 Onychocryptosis, 224 Paediatric patients, 341-369

Nitrite, in urine, 330 Onychogryphosis, 224, 226 seealso Children
Nitroglycerine, 91 Onycholysis, 224, 226 Paget's disease, 187,284-285
Nociceptors, 126 Onychomadesis, 224, 226 Pain, 5
Nocturia, 69 Onychomycosis, 224, 238 in amputees, 139
Nocturnal cramps, 65-66,97-98 Oral reflex, 347 assessment/measurement, 34-35,
Nodes of Ranvier, 116, 125 Orthopaedic assessment, 157-209 398-403
Nodules, 222, 223 children, 347-352 at-risk foot, 438
rheumatoid, 445 elderly, 457-458 postoperative, 482
Noise, electrical equipment, 47 gait analysis, 163, 167-175 at-risk foot, 438
Nominal categorisation, 39-40 guidelines, 163-164 charts, 34-35
Non-verbal communication, 16-21 limb-length inequality, 206-208 diaries, 35, 36
Non-weightbearing examination, 162, non-weightbearing, 162, 163, 175-202 dimensions, 33
163,175-202 palpation, 164-167 foot, 397-424
children, 350-352, 367-368 preoperative, 477-478 gating mechanism, 131
leg and foot alignment, 197-202 process, 162-163 hip, 175, 176
Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs purpose, 161-162 knee, in children, 354, 367
(NSAIDs), 67, 68, 458, 482 static (weightbearing), 162, 163, limping in children, 365-368
Noradrenaline (norepinephrine), 122 202-206 in neurological disorders, 134, 155
Nuclear medicine, 298-300 terms of reference, 157-161 in peripheral vascular disease, 97-98
Numbness, 71, 135 Orthopnoea, 91 postoperative, 482
Nutrition, sports injuries and, 388 Ortolani's manoeuvre, 353 referred, see Referred pain
Nystagmus, 152, 155 Os peroneum, 281 sensation testing, 140, 142-143
Os tibiale externum. 281 sports injuries, 390-391
Os trigonum, 190, 281, 407-408 subjectivity, 397-398
o Os vesalianum, 281 withdrawal reflex, 131
Ober's test, 178-180 Osgood-Schlatter's disease, 289, 354 Pain perception profile, 401
Obesity, 59, 381 case history, 182 Palaeospinothalamic tract, 128
surgical risk, 471 young athletes, 376-377 Pallor, 92
Observation, 4, 59,164 Ossicles, accessory, 281, 282, 407-408 Palmen's sign, 353
children, 346 Osteoarthritis (OA), 403-404, 446 Palmoplantar keratoderma (PPK), 229,
pain assessment, 401 hip, 176 231, Plate 14
Obturator nerve injury, 178 preoperative assessment, 477-478 Palpation, 164-167
Occipital lobe, 117, 118 X-ray assessment, 287-288, 289, 404 Panniculitis, 239
Occuloplethysmography, 137 Osteochondritis dissecans, 354, 405-406 Papule, 222, 223
Occupation, 63 Osteochondroma, 292, 293, 411 Paraesthesia, 71, 139, 155
at-risk foot, 434 Osteochondrosis, 289-290, 354, 367 Paralanguage, 20-21
footwear, 256 Osteoid osteoma, 293, 411, 412 Parallax error, 49
nail changes, 225 Osteomyelitis, 422 Paralysis, 146, 147, 155
preoperative assessment, 473 diagnosis, 437-438 Paraphrasing, 16
skin disease, 220 X-ray assessment, 287, 288, 422 Paraplegia, 145
Odour Osteopenia, 283 Parasympathetic nervous system, 88,
skin, 222 Osteopetrosis, 285 122, 123
urine, 329 Osteophytes, 288, 289 dysfunction, 153
Oedema (swelling), 92, 222 Osteoporosis, 283-284, 459 Parents, 343, 344
acute, 5 in female athletes, 377-378 Paresis, see Muscle, weakness
in arterial insufficiency, 99 preoperative assessment, 480 Parietal lobe, 117, 118
in deep vein thrombosis (DVT), 107 Osteosarcoma, 293-294, 411 Parkinsonism, 114, 125, 135
differential diagnosis, 99 Osteosclerosis, 283, 284-285 Parkinson's disease, 135, 151, 152
knee, 182 Outsole, seeSole Paronychia, 224, 226
in lymphoedema, 110 Overuse injuries Parsponea metatarsalia, 281
non-pitting, 109 extrinsic risk factors, 383-385, 386-387 Patch testing, 228
peripheral, 65, 69, 92 history taking, 390 Patches, 223
pitting, 109 intrinsic risk factors, 377, 379, 381 Patella, 181-182
tibiofibular segment, 186 Oxygen children, 351
in venous insufficiency, 109, Plate 8 consumption, 316 compression test, 354
Oestrogen deficiency, 459 tension, transcutaneous (TcPOz)' fish eye, 170
Older athletes, 377 105,439 position, 170, 182
Oligodendrocytes, 115 transport, 89 Q angle, 186,354
Oliguria, 69 size, 182
Olliers disease (multiple squinting, 170, 356
enchondrornatosis), 292, 294 p Patella tendonitis, 385, 390
Oncotic pressure, 86 Pachyonychia congenita, 226, 229 Patellar tap test, 183
Onychauxis, 224, 226 Packed cell volume (PCV), 332, 333 Patellar tendon reflex, 144, 145, 347
 496 INDEX
------------------------------------------
Patellofemoral joint tests, 183
Patellofemoral syndrome, 377, 379, 390
Patient-centred approach, 12
Patients
assessment, 3-10
'at risk', seeAt-risk foot
choice of practitioner, 31
confidentiality, 9-10, 25
expectations, 6, 22-23
measurement errors, 50-51
measurement techniques, 41
perceptions of problems, 30
records, see Records
stereotyping, 21
Patrick's test, 178
Pattern recognition, 5
Pedigree chart, 62
Pedobarograph,309-311
Pelvis
in children, 350-351
tilt, 170
Pemphigus, 232
Perinatal history, 345
Peripheral arterial occlusive disease
(PAOD), see Peripheral vascular
disease
Peripheral nervous system (PNS),
120-121
Peripheral neuropathy, 71, 114, 417, 446
diabetic, 417, 441--442
elderly, 456--457
sensory testing, 140-143
Peripheral resistance, 88
Peripheral vascular disease (PVD,
PAOD),95-106
causes, 95-96
clinical tests, 99-104
in diabetes, 442
elderly, 456
exercise in, 382
Fontaine classification, 97
history, 65-66, 95-96
hospital tests, 104-106
observation, 98-99
symptoms, 97-98
seealso Ischaemia
Peripheral vascular system
anatomy, 81-86
assessment, 65-66, 95-111
physiology, 88-89
Peritendinitis, 412--413
Periungual disorders, 226-227
Pernicious anaemia, 89,444,460
Perniosus (chilblains), 235, 369
Peroneal muscle atrophy, see
Hereditary motor and sensory
neuropathy
Peroneal muscles, 194
Peroneal spastic flat foot, 363-364, 409
Peroneal tendons
subluxing,413
tenosynovitis, 412, 413
Personal space, 18-20
Perthes' disease, 289, 367
Perthes test, 109 Positron emission tomography (PET)
Pes cavus, 173, 262, 263 scanning, 105
Petechia, 222 Post-neonatal history, 345
Phalangeal fractures, 291 Post-thrombotic syndrome, 106-107,
Phantom limb, 139 108,109
Phlebitis, 106, 107, 108 Posterior, 158
Phlebo-thrombosis, 106 Posterior cruciate ligament, 184
Phonocardiography, 95 Posterior talofibular ligament (PTFL),
Photoelectric plethysmography, 105 190
Photography Posterior tibial artery (tibialis
cine, 314 posterior)
digital, 41--42, 436 patency testing, 100
skin problems, 228-229 pulse, 51-52, 100, 101
wounds/ulcers, 436 Postmenopausal syndrome, 440, 459
Physical appearance, 20 Postoperative assessment, 481--482
Physical build, 380-381 Posture, 17-18, 133
Physical fitness, 380, 388 approaching, 17-18
Physiological cost index (PCD, 316 contraction, 18
Physiological measures, pain, 401 early childhood, 342
Piezogenic papules, painful, 239 expansion, 18
Pigmented skin lesions, 240-242 withdrawal, 18
Pinprick testing, 140, 142-143 Potassium, plasma, 334
Piriformis test, 180 Potassium hydroxide, 228, 323
Piston (telescope) sign, 353-354 Pott's fracture, 291
Pitted keratolysis, 238, Plate 22 Practitioners
Pivot shift test, 184 appearance, 20
Placing reflex, 347 measurement errors, 47-50
Planes, cardinal body, 157, 158 measurement techniques, 41
Planimetry, wound, 436 patient's choice of, 31
Plantar, 158 Precision, 42
Plantar dermatitis, juvenile, 236, Prednisolone, 60
368-369 Pregnancy
Plantar fasciitis, 63, 419--420 history, 345
Plantar fat pad, atrophy, 410 surgery in, 471, 479
Plantar fibromatosis, 420 X-rays in, 271
Plantar pressure sensors, see Pressure Premature babies, 345
measurement sensors, plantar Premotor cortex, 128
Plantar reflex (Babinski sign), 145, 146, Preoperative assessment, 469, 470--480
347 current health status, 471
Plantarflexion, 158, 159 factors affecting surgical risk, 478--480
Plantarflexors, 193 home circumstances, 472--473
Plantaris muscle, 193 investigations, 480
Plaque, 222, 223 past and current medication, 471--472
Plasma, 331 past medical history, 472
viscosity, 333 physical examination, 478
Platelet count (thrornbocytes), 332, 333 purpose, 470--471
Play, 344 systems enquiry, 473--478
Plethysmography, 110 PREPSOCS indicators of foot
photoelectric, 105 infection, 437
Podotrack plantar pressure measuring Presenting problem, 29-36
device, 41 articulating, 30-31
Pole test, 104 assessment,31-35
Poliomyelitis, 114, 147, 148,446 high priority, 5
Polycythaemia, 444 history, 31-33
Polydactyly, 281 patient perceptions, 30
Polymyositis, 147,446 Pressure, 308
Polyneuropathy, 134 sensation testing, 141
Polyuria, 69, 72 Pressure measurement sensors,
Pompholyx, 233 plantar, 41, 46--47,309-313
Pons, 117, 118 dynamic range, 47
Popliteal angle, in children, 355-356 platform systems, 46, 309-312
Porocarcinoma, 243 sampling frequency, 47
Poroma, eccrine, 242 in-shoe systems, 46--47,312-313
Porphyrias, 479 spatial resolution, 47
 INDEX 497

Pretibial myxoedema, 72 Purpura, 223 first

Problems, patients', 15,29 senile, 458 dorsiflexed (metatarsus primus
seealso Presenting problem Pus, 322 elevatus), 195, 196,201
Processus uncinatus, 281 Pustule, 222, 223 plantarflexed, 201
Pronation, 161 Pyogenic granuloma, 242, Plate 25 seealso Metatarsals
abnormal/excessive (flat foot), 173, Pyuria, 330 Re-assessment, 7-8
360-364 Rearfoot
gait, 174 alignment, to forefoot, 199-201
non-weightbearing assessment, Q children, 352
192-193 Q angle, 186,354 deformity, 171
objective indices, 362 Quadriceps muscle varus, 192,203,204
rigid, 204, 363-364 bulk evaluation, 185, 354 partially compensated, 361
weightbearing assessment, 202-204 function testing, 185, 354 Recede (shoe last), 249
X-ray assessment, 276-277, 280 Quality of life (Qol.) Records, 8-9,21-22
Propionibacterium minutissimum, 228, elderly, 461, 463 computerised, 8, 21
238 measures, 401, 463 confidentiality, 9-10, 25
Propranolol, 60 Quality of motion (QOM), 165 handwritten, 8, 22
Proprioception Quantitative computed tomography location of presenting problem, 32
assessment, 150-152 (QCT),283 pro-forma, 8, 22
testing, 140, 151 Quarter (shoe), 247 Rectus femoris muscle, 185
Proprioceptors, 126 Questionnaires Red blood cells, see Erythrocytes
Propulsion, 167-168,169,173 foot specific (pain), 402-403 Referral
Protein, in urine (proteinuria), 330 medical health, 22, 59, 77-78 indications for medical/surgical,
Proteus spp., 325 pain, 34,400-401,438 447-448
Prothrombin time (PT), 332, 333 Questions, 13-15 letters, 22
Protractor, 164 closed,13-14 Referred pain, 139, 424
Proxemics, 18-20 leading, 14 features, 33, 143
Proximal, 158 open, 13 in orthopaedic assessment, 163
Proximal articular set angle (PASA), 278 personal/intimate, 15 Reflection technique, 16
Pruritus practical tips, 14-15 Reflex arcs, 131-133
elderly, 459 probing, 14 Reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD),
lesions causing, 439 4-Quinolones, 60 284,423
Pseudogout, 286-287,420-421 Reflexes, 130-133
Pseudomonas aeruginosa, 325 crossed extensor, 132
Psoriasis, 217, 233-234 R diminished, pendular, 155
arthritis, 234, 445 Radiation, effects on tissue, 270 early development, 346, 347
case history, 214 Radiculopathy, 134 grading of responses, 144
children, 369 Radiographic assessment, 269-300 pain withdrawal, 131
clinical examination, 220, 221, 222, alignment, 276-282 stretch, 132-133
231 basic (ABCS), 275-287 tendon, see Tendon reflexes
guttate, 234, 369 bone density, 282-285 Reiter's disease, 70, 229, 240, 445
nail changes, 225, 233-234 cartilage, 285 Relaxed calcaneal stance position
palmar plantar pustular, 234, Plate 16 soft tissue, 285-287 (RCSP),202-204
plaque, 234, 369 specific pathologies, 287-296 Reliability, 42-43
pustular, 229, 234 seealso X-rays interobserver, 43
Psychiatric status, preoperative Radiographic views intraobserver, 43
assessment, 479 anteroposterior (AP) ankle, 273-274 Renal failure/ disease
Psychological factors Anthonsen's, 404 foot complications, 447
at-risk foot, 433-434 dorsiplantar (DP), 271, 272, 276-279 preoperative assessment, 476-477
skin disease, 214 dorsiplantar oblique, 274, 275 skin changes, 240
sports injuries, 381-382 lateral (weightbearing), 271-273, symptoms,69,72
Pulmonary circulation, 81, 89 279-280 Renal pain, 69
Pulmonary embolism, 66, 67, 106, 107 Radiolucency, increased, 283 Renal transplant, 225
Pulmonary oedema, 65 Radiopacity, increased, 282-283 Repeatability, 42
Pulse(s), 88, 100 Random errors, 44 Resected organs, 337
Doppler assessment, 102-103 Range of motion (ROM), 164-165 Resistance vessels, 88
palpation errors, 51-52 Rating scales, 39 Resources, measurement techniques
pedal, 100-101,438 numerical pain, 34 and,41-42
points (pressure points), 100, 101 Raynaud's disease, 97, 225 Respiratory disease, 66-67
pressure, 93 Rays at-risk foot, 447
quality, 93 fifth clubbing, 225
rate, see Heart rate abducted, 205 elderly, 460-461
'Pump (heel) bumps', 418-419 dorsiflexed, 201 preoperative assessment, 475
Purkinje fibres, 87 plantarflexed, 201 Rest pain, 98
 498 INDEX
------------------------------------
Rete pegs, 217
Reticular activating system (RAS), 128
Reticular formation, 117
Reticulocyte count, 332, 333
Retrocalcaneal bursitis, 418-419
Rheumatic fever, 65
Rheumatoid arthritis, 445
case histories, 74, 382, 444
preoperative assessment, 478
skin changes, 240
steroid therapy, 60, 441
X-ray assessment, 288-289, 290
Rheumatoid factor, 335, 445
Rickets, 355
vitamin D-resistant, 447
Rigidity, lead-pipe/ cog-wheel, 152,
155
Risk assessment, 4-5, 433-447
elderly, 465-466
holistic overview, 433-435
local indicators, 435-438
preoperative, see Preoperative
assessment
systems approach, 438-447
Romberg's sign, 151-152
Rose's valgus index, 362
Rubber, 253
Running
uphill and downhill, 385
windmilling style, 356
Ryder-Seiffel tuning fork, 141-142
S Shingles, 135,237
Sacral plexus, 119
Sacroiliac joint provocation test, 178
S(AD) SAD ulcer classification system,
432-433
Saddle (sports shoe), 248
Sagittal plane, 157, 158
deformity, 161
joint motion, 158, 159
joint position, 161
Sagittal Raynger, 195
Salbutamol, 60
Salt intake, excess, 72
Saltatory conduction, 125
San Antonio/Texas ulcer classification
system, 432
Sandals, 253-254
Saphenous nerve, 119
Scabies, 238
Scale, 222, 223
Scannergram, 207-208
Scars, 223
Scheuermann's disease, 289
Schistosomiasis, 154
Schwarm cells, 115
Sciatic nerve, 119
Sciatica, 424
Scleroderma/ systemic sclerosis, 225,
240,288
Scoliosis, 202, 349
Scopulariopsis breoicaulis, 327
Scouring test, 178
Sebaceous glands, 218
Seborrhoeic warts, 240
Self-referrals, 22
Senses, 126
Sensitivity, 44, 319-320
Sensorimotor cortex, 127, 128
Sensory cortex, 127
Sensory deficits
causes, 138
elderly, 456-457
Sensory nerves, 122
see also Afferent nerves
Sensory neuropathy, diabetic, 441
Sensory pathways, 126-128
Sensory receptors, 126
Sensory testing, 50-51,138-144
Septic arthritis, 422, 446, 478
Sequestrum, 287
Sero-negative arthritides, 445, 478
Serology, 335
Sesamoiditis, 411
Sesamoids
interphalangeal joint, 281
metatarsal head, 281
axial view, 274
position, 277-278, 280
see also Patella
Sever's disease, 290, 376
Sex, see Gender
Sexually transmitted infections, 70
Shank (shoe), 247, 248, 253
Shin splints, 389, 391
Shock meter system, 313
Shoe and Allied Trades Research
Association (SATRA), 264, 265
Shoes, 245
allergy to, 253
children, 258, 352-353
comfort, 257
components, 246-248
construction, 248-253
depth,259
everyday, 264
fit, assessment, 256-261
fitting problems, 260-261
fixation, 260
flare, 249, 259
function, 260
Goodyear welt, 251
heel to ball length, 249, 258
inside, examination, 264
inside border shape, 259-260
lace-up, 247, 253-254, 260
lasts, 248-249
length, 249-250, 257-258
materials, 252-253
measurement, 249-250
moulded, 251, 252
sports, 248, 383-384
stitchdown, 251
Strobel-stitched, 251, 252
stuck-on (cement), 250-251
styles, 253-255
suitable, 253-255
unsuitable, 255
suitability, 264
wear marks, 261-264, 384
width, 250, 258-259
Short form-36 (SF-36), 401--402, 463
Shoulder
position, 168, 348
swimmer's, 385
Shuttle run test, 20 min, 380
Sickle cell disease, 63, 66, 444
surgical risk, 66, 475, 476
Sickness impact profile (SIP), 401
Single-limb heel-raise test, 190
Single-photon absorptiometry (SPA),
283
Sinoatrial (SA) node, 87
Sinus, 223
Sinus tarsi, 191, 279
syndrome, 414
Skew foot, 358, 359
Skin
ageing, 220, 454, 457
allergies/ drug eruptions, 235-236
appendages,215,216,218-219
see also Nails
assessment, 5, 213-243
approach,213-214
elderly, 458-459
purpose, 214
recording, 228-229
at-risk foot, 439-440, Plates 20-21
barrier function, 217
biopsy, 228
blistering disorders, 231-232
blood supply, 218
colour
interpretation, 98
lesions, 221
in venous insufficiency, 107-108
disease, 213
clinical examination, 220-227
distribution, 220, 221
elderly, 454
frequency, 214-215
history taking, 219-220
investigations, 227-228
lesion morphology, 221-223
primary lesions, 222
psychological aspects, 214
secondary lesions, 222, 223
subcutaneous layer, 239
dry, 439, Plate 30
functions, 215, 217, 428
hyperkeratotic disorders, 229-231
infections, 236-238
elderly, 458
investigations, 227-228
infestations/insect bites, 238-239
inflammatory conditions, 232-235
lymphatics, 218
metastasis, 243, Plate 26
microbiological sampling, 322

-----------------------------_.
odour, 222
over-moist (macerated), 439, Plate 31
perfusion pressure (SPP), 105-106
pigmented lesions, 240-242
scrapings,228,322,323
structure, 215-219, Plate 9
in systemic disorders, 239-240
transparent, syndrome of, 458---459
tumours,242-243
vascular resistance (SVR), 105-106
viability, see Tissue, viability
Skyline/Allis test, 207
Slipped capital femoral epiphysis
(SCFE),367
Smoking, 61, 135
cardiovascular problems, 91
preoperative assessment, 472, 475
Social habits, 135
Social history, 57-58, 63-64
Society of Chiropodists and
Podiatrists, 9
Socioeconomic status, 434
Socks, 264-265
Sodium, plasma, 334
Soft tissue
atrophy, 98
masses/tumours, 420
MRI imaging, 296
X-ray assessment, 285-287
Sole, 247
materials, 253
wear marks, 261-262, 263
Somatotopic organisation, 127
Spasticity, 145
clasp knife, 145
Special needs, patients with, 31
Specificity, 44
Speech
defects, 155
scanning, 155
Spina bifida, 114, 154
occulta, 63, 349
Spinal cord
anatomy, 118-119, 120
ascending pathways, 127, 128
descending pathways, 127, 129
function, 126-127, 129
lesions/ compression, 146, 154
Spinal nerves, 120-121
Spine, 202,348-349
Spinocerebellar tract, 128, 129
Spinothalamic tract, 128
Splinter haemorrhages, 92, 224, 225
Sports, 373-393
equipment, 383-384
history, 63, 389-390
injuries, 373
assessment environment, 375-376
assessment principles, 373-374
clinical examination, 391-392
grading systems, 393
history taking, 387-391
investigations, 392-393
previous, 378, 390
risk factors, 376-387
specific to sport, 385-386
medicine team, 374-375
podiatrist, 374-375
preoperative assessment, 473
shoes, 248,383-384
Squamous cell carcinoma (SCC),
108-109,243
Squatting tests, 180, 354, 392
Staheli's arch index, 362
Staphylococcus aureus, 237, 325, 326
Starling's law of the heart, 89
Startle reflex, 347
Stasis syndrome, see Post-thrombotic
syndrome
Step length, 307
Stepping reflex, 347
Stereotyping, 21
Steroid therapy
long-term, 59, 60, 441
myopathy, 147
surgical risk, 472
Stevens-Johnson syndrome, 235
Stiffener (shoe), 247
Still's disease, 289
Stockings, 264-265
Stork test, 180
Straight-leg-raise test, 180
Strain gauge transducers, 312
Stratum compactum, 217
Stratum corneum, 217
Stratum germinativum, 216
Stratum granulosum. 216-217
Stratum spinosum, 216
Strength, sports injuries and, 380-381
Streptococcus pyogenes, 237-238,
325-326
Stress, sports injuries and, 381
Stress fractures, 291, 408
navicular, 375
risk factors, 377-378, 379, 385, 387
tibia, 391
Stress radiographs, ankle, 274
Stress tests
ankle ligaments, 188-190
knee ligaments, 183-184
sports injuries, 391-392
Stretch reflex, 132-133
Stretching, pre-exercise, 380
Striae, 223
Stride length, 307
Stroke, see Cerebral vascular accident
Stroke volume, 87
Subacute combined degeneration of
spinal cord, 114,460
Subcutaneous fat layer, 218
atrophy, 239
disorders, 239
Subluxation, 165
Subtalar joint (STJ), 187, 191-194
abnormal pronation, 192-193
motion, 192, 193
position, 171, 172
varus, 192
INDEX 499
Subungual exostosis, 225, 226,
408---409, Plate 11
X-rays, 292, 293, 409, 412
Sudecks atrophy, 284
Summarising technique, 16
Summation, 125
Sunburn, 235
Sunlight exposure, 454
Superficial peroneal nerve, 119
entrapment, 416---417
Supination, 161
Surface area, wound, 435---436
Surgery, 469---482
complications, 481
postoperative assessment, 481---482
preoperative assessment, 468,
469---480
previous, 62, 387-388
Swabs, 228,322,437
Swallowing, difficulty in, 68
Sweat glands, 218-219, 227
Sweating, 218
absent (anhidrosis), 153,227
disorders, 227
excessive, see Hyperhidrosis
Swelling, see Oedema
Swivel test, 364
Sydenham's chorea, 151
Symmetry of motion (SaM), 165
Sympathetic nervous system, 87-88,
122, 123
dysfunction, 153
Sympathetic tone, 88
Synapses, 116, 125-126
Synchondrosis, 409
Syncope (fainting), 65, 70, 136, 474
Syndesmosis, 409
Synostosis, 409
Synovial chondromatosis, 293
Synovial fluid examination, 337
Synthetic shoe materials, 252, 253
Syphilis, 70, 229
Syringomyelia, 114, 154
Systematic errors, 45
Systeme International (SD units, 38
Systemic (disseminated) lupus
erythematosus (SLE), 240, 288,
446,478
Systemic sclerosis/scleroderma, 225,
240,288
Systems enquiry, 59, 64-74
preoperative assessment, 473---478
Systole, 87
T
Tabes dorsalis, 114, 150
Tachycardia, 92
Talar tilt test, 189-190
Talipes equinovarus, congenital, 360
Talocalcaneal bar (coalition), 363, 409
case history, 410
investigations, 281, 283, 297, 409
Talocalcaneal notch, 276
 500 INDEX
--------------------------------------------

Talocrural joint (TCJ), 171, 187, 188-191 Tibia Toe-in, 307

dorsiflexion, 188, 189 anterior spur, 404--405 seealso In-toeing
functional tests, 190 children, 351-352 Toe-out, 307
grading of ligamentous injury, examination, 186-187 Toecap, 247
190-191 length inequality, 207 Tongue (shoe), 247
investigations, 191 position, 171 Tonic neck reflex, 347
motion, 188 sabre, 171, 187 'Too many toes sign', 361, 413
osteochondritis dissecans, 405--406 stress fracture, 391 Torque conversion, 170
proprioception, 191 torsion, 187, 198-199,357-358 Touch,18,49-50
stability (stress) testing, 188-190 valgum, 204 functional, 18
strength, 190 varus (varum), 171, 187,204 perception testing, 140-141
Talus Tibial nerve, 119 in skin assessment, 221-222
declination angle, 280, 352 Tibialis anterior muscle, 193-194 Tourniquets, in sickle cell disease, 66,
neck fractures, 291 Tibialis posterior artery, see Posterior 475,476
Tarsal coalitions, 187,409 tibial artery Toys, 344
case history, 410 Tibialis posterior dysfunction Tractograph, 164
investigations, 281, 283, 297, 409 syndrome (TPDS), 190 ankle dorsiflexion, 188, 189
rigid flatfeet, 363 TIbialis posterior muscle, 193-194 malleolar torsion, 198
Tarsal tunnel syndrome, 72, 143, Tibialis posterior tenosynovitis, Trainers (sports shoes), 248, 383-384
415--416 412--413 Training errors, 386-387, 389
Team, sports medicine, 374-375 Tibiofemoraljoint Transcutaneous oxygen tension
Telangiectases (telangiectasiae), 107, motion, 183 (TcPOz)' 105, 439
222, Plate 4 stability, 183-185 Transient ischaemic attack (TIA), 136,
Telescope sign, 353-354 Tibiofibular joint, inferior, 187 137
TELOS system, 190 Time management, 7 Transmalleolar axis, 357
Temperature Timed up and go test', 462 Transtarsal joint, see Midtarsal joint
ambient clinic, 45, 51-52 Tinea Transverse plane, 157, 158
lower limb incognito, 238, 239 deformity, 161
in arterial insufficiency, 99 pedis, 229, 238, 368 joint motion, 158-161
gradient, 99 Tinel sign, 143,415 joint position, 161
measurement, 49-50 Tiptoe-standing tests, 363, 392 Trauma
in venous insufficiency, 108 Tissue at-risk foot, 439
perception testing, 140, 142 ageing effects, 454 in children, 367
Temporal lobe, 117, 118 fluid,86 tissue viability, 430
Tendinitis (tendonitis), 390, 393, radiation effects, 270 X-ray assessment, 291
412--413 sampling methods, 336-337 Travel, foreign, 64, 444, 473
Tendo calcaneus, seeAchilles tendon viability, 429--433 Treadmills
Tendon reflexes, 132-133 in arterial insufficiency, 98 elderly, 457--458
in cerebellar dysfunction, 152 classifying loss, 430--433 gait analysis, 306
in children, 347 factors causing loss, 429--430 Tremor
diminished,155 factors essential to, 429 in cerebellar dysfunction, 151
in motor dysfunction, 144, 145, 149 foot at risk of losing, seeAt-risk foot classification, 136
Tendonosis, 390 in lymphoedema, 110 intention, 136, 151, 155
Tensor fasciae latae, tightness, 178, 179 in venous insufficiency, 108 in Parkinson's disease, 152
Terrain, exercise on uneven, 385 Tobacco use, seeSmoking rest, 155
Thalamus, 117, 128 Toe(s),204-206 Trendelenburg gait, 175, 348
Thalassaemia, 63, 444 adductovarus fifth, 206 Trendelenburg test, 180
Thermoreceptors, 126 alignment, 278-279 children, 349-350, 368
Thiamine deficiency, 135 claw, 172,206 Trephine, 337
Thigh movement, 170 deformities, 364-365, 457 Trichophyton mentagrophuies, 238, 327
Thirst, 72 dorsally displaced, 206 Trichophyton rubrum, 238, 327
Thomas's test, 178 flexor stabilisation, 204 Trigger toe (hallux extensus), 196,
Thomson's test, 187 flexor substitution, 204 206
Throat (shoe), 247 formulae, 206 Triplanar motion, 161
Thrombin time (TTl, 334 hammer, 204, 206 Tropical diseases, 64
Thromboangiitis obliterans, 96, 438 mallet, 206 Trunk position/rotation, 170
Thrombocytes (platelet count), 332, 333 position, 172, 201 Tumours, 222
Thrombophlebitis, 106, 107 puff, 246, 247 bone, 292-296
Thumb technique retracted, 206 malignant, see Malignant tumours
malleolar torsion, 198 spring, 249 painful foot, 411--412
metatarsal motion, 195 trigger (hallux extensus), 196,206 skin, 242-243
Thyroid disease, 72-73, 225, 459 turf, 384 soft tissue, 420
seealso Hypothyroidism walking, 174-175, 348 Tuning fork, 141-142
Thyrotoxicosis, see Hyperthyroidism seealso Hallux Turf toe, 384
 INDEX 501

Turner's syndrome, 284 Valvular heart disease, 474, 475 Vitamin D

Two-point discrimination, 140-141 Vamp, 246, 247 deficiency, 284
Varicose veins, 106-107, 108 excess, 284
Varus deformity, 161 Vitamin deficiencies, 155
U Varus stress test, 183 Vomiting, 68
Ulcers, 223 Vascular assessment, 79-111
classification, 431-433 elderly, 455-456
diabetic foot, see Diabetes mellitus, purpose, 79-80 W
foot ulcers Vasculitis, 96, 446 Waiting room, 23
elderly, 457 clinical fea tures, 234 Walking
ischaemic, 98-99, 442, 443, Plates in rheumatoid arthritis, 445 barefoot, 255, 260
35-36 Vasoconstriction, 88 base, 307
neuropathic, 154,441,443, Plates Vasodilation, 88 distance, 103
32-33 Vasospastic disorders, 369, 382, 438 early childhood, 342, 347-348
as presenting problem, 5 Veins, 81-82, 83 footwear assessment, 255, 260
trophic, 430 function, 89 reflex, 347
venous, 108-109,443, Plates 7-8 valves, 81-82 toe, 174-175,348
seealso Wounds varicose, 106-107, 108 velocity, 307
Ultrasound, 300 Velocity, walking, 307 seealso Gait
Doppler, see Doppler ultrasound Vena cava, 80, 81 Wardrobe,256
duplex Venography (venous angiography), Warfarin, 60, 472
in neurological disorders, 137 110,392 Warts
in venous insufficiency, 110 Venous insufficiency, 106-110 mosaic, 237
quantitative, calcaneum, 283 causes, 106 periungual, 226, 237
in sports injuries, 392 chronic, see Post-thrombotic plantar (verrucae), 237, 368,
Ultraviolet light exposure, 454 syndrome Plate 20
Underweight, 59-60, 471 clinical tests, 109 seborrhoeic, 240
Uniforms, 20 elderly, 456 Weal, 222, 223
Units of measurement, 38 history, 106-107 Wear marks, shoe, 261-264,384
Upper (shoe), 246-247 hospital tests, 110 Weighing scales, calibration, 45-46
crease marks, 263 observation, 107-109, Plates 4-8 Weight, see Body weight
deformation, 263 stasis dermatitis, 108,233, Plate 6 Weightbearing examination, 162, 163,
materials, 252 symptoms, 107 202-206
Upper motor neurones (UMNs), Venous return, 89 children, 348-350
128-129 Venous thrombosis, 106 Welt, 247, 248
lesions, 144-146, 150,457 deep (DVT), 106-107, 109 West Haven-Yale multidimensional
Urea, serum, 334 Venous tree, 81-82 pain inventory (WHYMPI), 401
Uric acid, serum, 334, 421 Venous ulcers, 108-109,443, White blood cells, see Leucocytes
Urinalysis, 328-331 Plates 7-8 White patches (atrophia blanche),
indications, 328 Venules, 81, 83 107-108, Plate 5
preoperative, 480 Verbal (descriptor) scales (VDS, VS), Wipe test, 183
Urinary tract infection (UTI), 330-331, 34,400 Wisconsin brief pain inventory, 401
480 Verrucae, 237, 368, Plate 20 Women
Urine Vertebrae, alignment, 202 postmenopausal, 440, 459
culture, 330-331 Vesicle, 222, 223 radiation safety, 271
microscopy, 330 Viability, tissue, see Tissue, viability shoes, 246, 256
pH,330 Vibration perception sports injuries, 377-378
physical examination, 328-329, Plate elderly, 457 Wood's light, 227-228
27 testing, 51, 140, 141-142 Wounds
reagent testing, 329-330, Plate 28 Videotaping assessment, 435-438
specific gravity, 329-330 kinematic gait analysis, 314-315 classification, 430-433, 481
specimen collection, 328 skin assessment, 228-229 colour, 437
Urobilinogen, 330 visual gait analysis, 306 depth,436
Urticaria, 223 Virchow's triad, 106 dressings, 481
Viruses healing, delayed, 435
culture, 228 infection, 437-438
V identification, 327-328 loss of tissue viability, 429-430
Vagus nerve, 122, 123 infections, 237, 320 margins, 437
Valgus deformity, 161 Vision, role in measurement, 48-49 microbiological sampling, 322
Valgus index, Rose's, 362 Visual analogue scales (VAS), 34, postoperative assessment, 481-482
Valgus stress test, 183-184 399-400,438 surface area, 435-436
Validity, 43-44 Visual defects, 155 traumatic oersus trophic, 430
Valleix phenomenon, 415 Vitamin B12 deficiency, 114, 154,444, volume, 436-437
Valsalva manoeuvre, 153 460 seealso Ulcers
 502 INDEX
---------------------------------------

X in lymphoedema, 111 Xiphisternum, 208

X-rays, 269-296
ankle, 191,273-274
assessment, see Radiographic
assessment
chest, 95
child's foot, 343
generation, 269-270
in hallux valgus, 364-365
knee, 186
ordering, 270-271
in osteoarthritis, 287-288, 289, 404
preoperative, 480 y
in sports injuries, 392 Yellow nail syndrome, 111
subungual exostosis, 292, 293, 409, Young's test, 178
412
views, see Radiographic views
Xanthoma tuberosum multiplex, z
287 Z foot, 358, 359
 THE MEDICAL AND SOCIAL HISTORY rr

Appendix: Medical Health Questionnaire

Please complete the health questionnaire in your own time. Do you take any recreational drugs? Yes/No
Take as long as you feel you need. If there are any areas of Have you ever been injured at work? Yes/No
the form that you are not clear about, please ask the Did you have any major childhood illnesses? Yes/No
practitioner for help. It is important that we know about all If Yes, please state which ones:
aspects of your health as this may affect your legs and feet
and may be important when deciding the best form of
treatment. Family history
Does anyone in your family suffer from foot or leg problems?
Your foot/leg problem Yes/No
Have you had any previous treatment for your feet? Yes/No Please place a tick if a member of your family suffered from
Who provided the treatment? any of these illnesses:
Haemophilia 0
Were any X-rays taken? Yes/No Sickle cell disease 0
Were any blood samples taken? Yes/No Diabetes 0
Rheumatoid arthritis 0
Your general health Epilepsy 0
Are you generally well? Yes/No
Are you under a doctor or consultant currently? Yes/No Social history
Are you sleeping well? Yes/No What is your occupation?
What is your weight?
Do you participate in sporting activities? Yes/No
For women, could you be pregnant? Yes/No If Yes, please state which sports and how regularly do you
participate:
Past medical history
Has your weight recently changed? Yes/No
If yes, how has your weight changed? Heart and circulatory problems
Have you ever had:
Are you taking any medication or tablets? Yes/No A heart attack? Yes/No
If Yes, please list below: Angina? Yes/No
High blood pressure? Yes/No
Heart failure? Yes/No
Are you allergic to anything? Yes/No Irregular heart rhythms? Yes/No
If Yes, please list below: Rheumatic fever? Yes/No
A thrombosis or blood clot? Yes/No
Do you smoke? Yes/No Night cramps? Yes/No
If Yes, how many do you smoke per day? Muscle cramps when walking short distances? Yes/No
An ulcer on your leg or foot? Yes/No
Have you ever: Chilblains? Yes/No
Been off sick from work for more than a week? Yes/No Varicose veins and/or surgery? Yes/No
Been admitted to hospital? Yes/No Anaemia? Yes/No
Undergone an operation? Yes/No Hepatitis or jaundice? Yes/No
Have you ever been under the care of a hospital Haemophilia? Yes/No
consultant? Yes/No Any other blood disorder? Yes/No
If Yes, please give details: Do you suffer from:
Chest pains? Yes/No
 78 SYSTEMS EXAMINATION

Shortness of breath? Yes/No Head and nerve problems

Palpitations? Yes/No Have you ever injured your head? Yes/No
Swollen ankles? Yes/No Have you ever injured your spine? Yes/No
Regular fainting? Yes/No Do you suffer from migraines or regular headaches? Yes/No
If Yes, how frequently:
Respiratory problems
Have you ever had: Do you ever get numbness, weakness, tingling, heaviness
Asthma? Yes/No or shooting pains in your legs and feet? Yes/No
Chronic bronchitis? Yes/No Do you ever get blackouts or feel faint? Yes/No
Emphysema? Yes/No
A blood clot on the lung? Yes/No Glandular problems
Have you ever had a cough for several months? Yes/No Do you have sugar diabetes? Yes/No
Do you ever bring up blood when you cough? Yes/No Do you have thyroid problems? Yes/No
Are you always thirsty? Yes/No
Diet and digestive problems Do your hands and feet get particularly sweaty? Yes/No
Do you have any diet or bowel problems? Yes/No Are you particularly sensitive to cold? Yes/No
Are you troubled by toothache or gum swelling? Yes/No Do you bruise easily? Yes/No
Do you suffer from indigestion or stomach ache? Yes/No
Do painkillers like aspirin upset your stomach? Yes/No Bone and joint problems
Do you have any arthritis? Yes/No
Genitourinary problems Do you ever get any aches and pains in your joints? Yes/No
Have you ever had any 'waterworks' problems? Yes/No Have you any arthritis or long-standing muscle injuries? Yes/No
Is your sleep disturbed by the need to go to the toilet?
Yes/No Thank you for completing this questionnaire. Please add any
Have you ever had any sexually transmitted infections? Yes/No further information that you think may be of use.
Are you in a high-risk group for blood-borne infections, such
as hepatitis B or HIV? Yes/No